Inbox News: February 2025

February 1 - 28, 2025: Issue 639

Week One March 2025 (February 24 - March 2)

2025 Theo Batten Youth Art Award Winners announced

Each year students exhibiting in the Out Front exhibition at Manly Art Gallery & Museum (M&G&M) can apply for the distinguished Theo Batten Youth Art Award.

This year the Theo Batten Youth Art Award, worth $5000, has been judged by respected UNSW Art & Design Associate Professor Lizzie Muller. The funds help support talented young artists pursue arts studies at a tertiary level.

This year’s joint winners are:

  • Jazz Hartmann from Forest High School for a painting entitled Fragments of Discomfort
  • Zahara Spring from St Luke’s Grammar School for charcoal on paper triptych entitled Nurture, Bond, Desire

Each recipient will receive $2000.

Judge Lizzie Muller also awarded a Highly Commended for $1000 to Charlie Heinrich from Covenant Christian School for Posca paint pens on paper entitled Childhood Memories.

Northern Beaches Mayor Sue Heins said the high standard of work by these young students was impressive.

“We are proud to continue to showcase the incredible works by the talented young artists living on Northern Beaches.

“The artwork produced this year is phenomenal. It is a tremendous achievement by these young, aspiring artists.

“Congratulations to the award recipients and to those students selected to exhibit in Out Front 2025,” Mayor Heins said.

Out Front 2025 exhibition highlights 23 artworks by Northern Beaches HSC Visual Art students with the works on display from 21 February to 6 April 2025 at MAG&M.

The exhibition features a broad range of expressive artforms that explore the contemporary themes which are of importance to young people today. The exhibition also includes a mentorship program focused on supporting their transition to emerging professional creative practices.

More in: Out Front 2025 Opens this February at the Manly Art Gallery & Museum - stunning HSC works on display

Audrey Allan, Silent Echoes In Monochrome, gouache painting, Pittwater High School. Photo: Audrey Allen

The participating schools are;

  • Barrenjoey High School
  • Covenant Christian School
  • Davidson High School
  • Galstaun College
  • Killarney Heights High School
  • Mater Maria Catholic College
  • Narrabeen Sports High School
  • NBSC - Balgowlah Boys Campus
  • NBSC - Cromer Campus
  • NBSC - Freshwater Senior Campus
  • NBSC - Mackellar Girls Campus NBSC - Manly Campus
  • Northern Beaches Christian School
  • Oxford Falls Grammar School
  • Pittwater High School
  • St Augustine's College
  • St Luke's Grammar School
  • St Paul's Catholic College Manly
  • Stella Maris College
  • The Forest High School
  • The Pittwater House Schools

This exhibition has been a part of MAG&M’s program since 1995, demonstrating our ongoing commitment to connecting with secondary schools across the region and to supporting visual arts education.

Presented in partnership with the Theo Batten Trust and MAG&M Society, the program has provided Youth Art Awards to aspiring artists for 31 years. The Theo Batten Youth Art Award is offered to students pursuing studies in the visual arts or a related area (such as architecture, design, art education, music, performing arts, filmmaking, digital media etc) commencing in the year 2025. 

Theo Batten (1918-2003) was a well-respected local artist and journalist who studied at the National Art School and won a Walkley Award in 1972. He was a member of the Manly Art Gallery & Museum Society and a member of the Peninsula Art Society, and wanted to leave behind an opportunity for young creative people to continue their studies in the visual arts.

The Theo Batten Youth Art Award is an annual prize of $5000 presented as part of the Higher School Certificate visual arts exhibition Out Front held at Manly Art Gallery & Museum (MAG&M). 

Judge’s Comments: Lizzie Muller

Judging this prize was extremely difficult as all the artists have distinctive and compelling visual styles, and all are clearly passionate and dedicated to their work. Huge congratulations to each of the nine applicants. However, three of the artists’ works and statements stood out in terms of their capacity to reflect on their own practices, and the work that art does. These three artists identified challenges, and how they had overcome them through their engagement with materials or process. They showed openness to the “talk-back” of their own artworks, and as a result, innovation and bravery. These qualities produce a feeling of depth in the resulting pieces – a sense that you are experiencing a conversation between the artist and their work. The ability to consciously learn from experience, and share that learning is in keeping with the vision of the Theo Batten Award, and it was this in the end that allowed me to select two winners: Jazz Hartmann and Zahara Spring, and Highly Commended to Charlie Heinrich.

 

Light at the end of Sydney’s secret train tunnels

February 28, 2025

Abandoned train tunnels 20 metres below the Sydney CBD have been turned into a historic tourist hotspot after a million-dollar makeover by the NSW Government.

Built in the 1920s, visitors will be able to explore hidden parts of the St James Tunnels following restoration and revitalisation works to create a unique underground experience.

St James Tunnels will combine a historical walking tour with an immersive multimedia and soundscape attraction, offering visitors a snapshot of our city’s transport and wartime past.

Once utilised as a World War II air raid shelter, tour groups will be able to walk through the disused southern tunnel, extending under Hyde Park, from busy St James station.

The tunnels were part of visionary engineer John Bradfield’s intended east-west rail corridor, but this was abandoned in the face of the Great Depression and disagreements over rail routes.

Two of the constructed tunnels at St James station have been in continuous use as part of the City Circle since opening in 1926, but the other two were never put into active service.

The abandoned tunnels extend some distance in either direction from St James. To the north is a double-track tunnel which proceeds for some 250 metres under Macquarie Street to be roughly parallel with the State Library; to the south two single-track tunnels extend to Whitlam Square at the intersection of Liverpool and College Streets.

One of the disused platforms. When the station was first constructed, the public could access these platforms but they have since been walled off from the rest of the station. Photo: Beau Giles from Sydney

The southern tunnels were modified during World War II to serve as a public air raid shelter. The abandoned air raid shelter begins in the single track section of the southern end of the station and continues into the two single track tunnels beyond. At the station end the air raid shelter is protected by a blast curtain and the doorways and openings for ventilation between the chambers, each about 30 metres long, are protected by blast curtains.

Crowds leaving a shelter in Hyde Park after the 'all clear' has been given c1942. Image courtesy of the State Library of Victoria [H99.201/3739](Argus Newspaper Collection of Photographs)

The tunnels were also used during World War II as an operations bunker by the No. 1 Fighter Sector RAAF. The bunker was located in what was intended to be the City Inner Tunnel, access to which was provided by a wooden staircase in a shaft leading upward to Shakespeare Place. Women's Auxiliary Australian Air Force (WAAAF) personnel housed in this operations bunker collected information from radar and weather stations, as well as reports on air traffic, ship and troop movements collected from airports, army and Volunteer Air Observer Corps reporting posts. This section of tunnel was constructed using a cut and cover technique outside St James station, and connects to the tunnels in St James through pilot tunnels, accessible via ladder.

As air quality in the tunnel was poor, WAAAF shifts were limited to six hours. Eventually the health of the WAAAF personnel declined due to poor air quality or poor food, so operations were relocated first to The Capital Theatre in Bankstown, and subsequently to the Bankstown Bunker on Black Charlies Hill near Condell Park.

The staircase used to access the bunker was destroyed by fire on 16 November 1968 with smoke from this fire interrupting train services for hours.

From 1933 to 1934, the City Inner tunnel between St James and Circular Quay was used by Raymond Mas as the location for an experimental mushroom farm producing 4,500 kilograms (10,000 lb) of mushrooms per month. 

The end of the northern tunnel flooded and produced an underground lake, 10 metres (33 ft) wide, 5 metres (16 ft) deep, and 1 kilometre (3,300 ft) long. Known as St James Lake, it is off limits to the public. In recent years, due to drought and diminishing water supplies in underground aquifers, there have been a number of proposals for how to use the abandoned tunnels and other underground spaces for storage and recycling of water.

In the mid-2000s, Ian Kiernan proposed that an abandoned water tunnel, Busby's Bore, be redirected to St James Lake where water could be stored and recycled. Busby's Bore was originally used to carry water from nearby swamps to the Hyde Park area, but was abandoned for that purpose in the 1890s after becoming contaminated by sewage. In 2004 the idea of recycling the water from the bore received support from the executive director of the Botanical Gardens Trust, Tim Entwisle.

During 2006, it was proposed that the northern unused tunnels be used as a reservoir for irrigation water for The Domain and the Royal Botanic Gardens as part of a Clean Up Australia project to create a series of water reclamation and storage facilities. Clean Up Australia partnered with a number of groups in the attempt to move the project forward, and in 2007 obtained funding to proceed.

The tunnels which had been prepared as an air raid shelter were also used by ABC TV as a location for one episode of the TV series Police Rescue in the early 1990s. In the episode, a boy who had fallen down a storm drain is rescued. 

The platforms were used as a shooting location in 2003 film The Matrix Revolutions.

In 2008, the station was used as a location for the mini-series False Witness. The platforms featured in Zoë Badwi's 2010 music video Freefallin. In 2011, The Tunnel was filmed in the abandoned tunnels.

Experience-led tourism is a key priority of the NSW Government, with plans to help transform the state’s visitor economy into a $91 billion powerhouse by 2035.

The St James Tunnels tour is expected to be a visitor drawcard, similar to award-winning attractions in London which explore disused tube stations and secret wartime shelters.

The tour is anticipated to run several times a day and will be suitable for visitors aged 13 and above. Once an operator is appointed, tours are expected to commence later this year.

Minister for Transport John Graham said:

“These historic tunnels are more than just infrastructure; they are an expression of Sydney’s development as a modern, international city. These tunnels belong to the people of NSW, so it’s fantastic news that they’ll become another of our city’s great public spaces.

“Tours like Bridgeclimb on the Harbour Bridge are now a must-do experience for Sydney locals and visitors alike. In time, we want to see tours of the St James tunnels become just as popular.

“I want to congratulate the teams who worked so hard underground in a difficult environment to preserve the heritage of the site and reimagine it into an exciting and educational experience.

TAM Chief Executive Lyndal Punch said:

“Transport Asset Manager of NSW (TAM) is proud to be leading this innovative project, unlocking a disused, historic rail asset while using multimedia technology to tell the story of Sydney’s city railway development.

“This new visitor attraction will ensure the stories of the past continue to inspire future generations.”

Sydney Trains Chief Executive Matt Longland said:

“We are very excited be part of this unique transport project which is turning a once disused and unseen heritage site into a fascinating, interactive and educational visitor experience.

“The St James Tunnels are a window into our transport past, a snapshot of World War II history, and the efforts of the workers who built Sydney’s transport infrastructure.”

Elizabeth Street building and entrance, July 2023. Photo: Windmemories.

 

NSW marine life – the importance of seaweed

Video by NSW Fisheries

Learn more about seaweed and its importance for the health of marine animals in NSW. Southern Australia, including NSW, has more species of seaweed than anywhere else on Earth. 

This video was created by NSW DPIRD Fisheries with funding via the Marine Estate Management Strategy.

Underwater photo and video content courtesy of @williamgladstonephotography, used with permission.

 

Sulphur Crested Cockatoo Feeding time

'' The chicks remain with the parents all year round and family groups will stay together indefinitely.'' - Australian Museum

Pictures taken Thursday February 27, 2025 at 5.30pm, Careel Bay

Performance-Arts Centre at Narrabeen Sports High School Mooted

On Thursday February 20 2025, during Question Time at the NSW Parliament sitting session, Pittwater MP Jacqui Scruby, asked The Hon. Prue Car, Deputy Premier, and Minister for Education and Early Learning  whether the Government will commit to a fit-for-purpose creative and performing arts centre, amongst other upgrades, at Narrabeen Sports High School.

The Hon. Prue Car replied:
''We completed the upgrades to Narrabeen North Public School upon winning government. I believe the school community has embraced the new upgrade, and it looks fantastic. There are 15 new classrooms, three new support classrooms, a new covered outdoor learning area, landscaping and a new hall. 

Next door at Narrabeen Sports High School, it is fair to say that the local community is rightly frustrated at the lack of investment. We got to work straight away to address the school's needs. I know it is a huge priority of the member for Pittwater.

Last year we refurbished classrooms, science labs, the STEM room, technology rooms, change rooms and amenities. We resurfaced the school's outdoor basketball and tennis courts. We have upgrades for a further 20 classrooms on the way. 

The member for Pittwater, though, rightly raises that the school community has been calling out for increased investment, particularly in creative and performing arts facilities.

That speaks to the fact that at every high school, whether it is a selective academic school or a sports program school, we need to provide facilities so that every child can be pushed and challenged to be the best they can be. 

In the first instance, we are working with the school to convert classrooms into dedicated music rooms for students, but I know there is a lot more to do. 

Following the advocacy of the new member for Pittwater, I have asked the Department of Education to work with Narrabeen Sports High School on its infrastructure priorities. 

I say that knowing that a creative and performing arts space is at the top of the list of needs that the school would like to see addressed. 

I look forward to meeting with the member in coming weeks to discuss those priorities and what we can do together to support Narrabeen Sports High School with improved creative and performing arts facilities.''


Ingleside Riders Group: Autumn Obstacle Course

Fun but challenging obstacles to test your skill. To book please message Amanda Nielsen directly on 0402 917 745.
  • 4 sessions available over 2 days.
  • Max 6 horses per session.
See flyer for details.
$65 per session (plus $25 for non-members of IRG)
Enter the Ingleside Equestrian Park on McLean St, Ingleside. Float parking available. Bring your own water for your horse.

Racing for a Cause: Manly Inflatable Boat Race 2025

Member for Manly, James Griffin has called on the community to get behind one of the Northern Beaches’ most outrageously fun charity events, the 2025 Manly Inflatable Boat Race.

Awarded ‘Community Event of the Year’ at the 2016 Australia Day Awards in Manly, the Manly Inflatable Boat Race is once again gearing up to take over Manly & Shelly Beach on Sunday 30 March this year, with waves of colour, chaos, and community spirit.

Since its inception, the Manly Inflatable Boat Race has raised over $300,000 for charity. The event will see competitors paddle from Shelly Beach to raise funds for the Manly Adolescent and Young Adult Hospice (AYAH) Australia’s first dedicated young adult’s hospice, and cancer research charity Tour de Cure. 

“The Manly Inflatable Boat Race is an epic event and one which showcases the very best of Manly. I encourage everyone to get involved and make a splash for a fantastic cause,” Mr Griffin said.

With over 500 participants and thousands of spectators expected, the 2025 edition promises to be as wild as ever. Registration and float pumping will take place from 7:30am at South Steyne, near Manly Surf Club, with the actual race being held at Shelly Beach at 10:00am.

Founder and organiser Denver Bevan expressed his own excitement for the event. “The Manly Inflatable Boat Race is a highlight on the Sydney calendar because it’s just so much fun! Race-goers love the thrill of paddling through the waves in crazy, colourful inflatables, and the spectators get a front-row seat to all the mayhem. It’s a fantastic day at the beach for all ages,” Mr Bevan said.

Service Manager at AYAH Tayia Yates welcomed the support, saying the funds raised on the day would make a profound difference. 

“Supporting the Manly Inflatable Boat Race is an opportunity to contribute to a vital cause, offering respite and care to those who need it most. We encourage everyone to participate in this unique community event to help raise funds towards the AYAH and assist us in creating a lasting impact on the families and young individuals in our care.” Ms Yates said

The concept of the Manly Inflatable Boat Race is simple:
  • Pick your wackiest fancy dress costume (the crazier, the better!)
  • Bring your inflatable of choice - anything from rubber duckies to pink flamingos, sea monsters, or pool ponies!
  • Join in the 1km paddle adventure from Shelly Beach, around the Manly Life Savers buoys, and back to shore.
  • Rules? There are none! First to the finish line wins!
In a generous showing of support, 4 Pines Brewing Co have been announced as the major sponsor of this year’s event, with General Manager Adam Dearing declaring that he was ‘stoked to come on board as a major sponsor this year to help bring this fabulous charity event back to life after Covid.” The Boathouse Shelly Beach, Budgy Smuggler and OnlineProjects have also thrown their support behind the Race as key event partners. 

To purchase tickets and for any further inquiries, please visit the Manly Inflatable Boat Race website at  manlyinflatableboatrace.com.au

NSW Training Awards: 2025 entries are now open

The Awards honour and reward the achievements of students, teachers, training organisations and employers.

Get recognised and share your vocational success for the NSW Training Awards 70th anniversary. Don't delay, enter today.

  • Individual Awards entries close 14 March 2025 
  • Organisation Award entries close 2 May 2025

To find out more and nominate, please visit; https://education.nsw.gov.au/skills-nsw/nsw-training-awards

Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship tour applications Now open

Up to 20 students from across NSW will be selected to participate in the annual Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship (PAMS) study tour that will visit historic sites relating to Australia’s military history in the Republic of Korea and Singapore in 2025.

Tour locations in the Republic of Korea include the site of the Battle of Kapyong, the Demilitarised Zone and the UN First Battle Memorial in the. In Singapore, the tour will take in sites such as the Kranji War Memorial, Changi Prison Chapel and Museum and the Fort Siloso and Surrender Chambers.

PAMS is a wonderful opportunity for high school history students to further develop their skills and understanding of Australians at war.

Zygmunt Gray from Finigan School of Distance Education in Queanbeyan was PAMS 2024 recipient that toured Japan, describing the trip as a unique opportunity to gain a better understanding of Australians in wartime.

Fellow PAMS 2024 tourist Celine Chandrasegaran from Saint Mary Mackillop College in Albury said the tour was a transformative experience and plans to continue to share the invaluable insights she gained.

The 2025 tour will take place in the Term 3 school holidays departing on Monday 29 September and returning to Sydney on Friday 10 October.

Eligible students can apply online by submitting a personal essay, a letter of recommendation from their school and a parent consent form.

Applications close on Sunday, 9 March 2025 at 8pm More information and details on how to apply is available at https://www.veterans.nsw.gov.au/education/premiers-anzac-memorial-scholarship/

Premier of NSW Chris Minns said:

“This year's Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship presents a unique opportunity to visit South Korea and Singapore.

“This is a chance to develop a greater appreciation of the story of our nation, along with the story of these nations. 

“I really encourage students to apply, to develop their understanding of military history and those who served.”

Minister for Veterans David Harris said:

“The PAMS study tour is a once in a lifetime opportunity for students across New South Wales, and I encourage all Year 10 and Year 11 history students to consider applying. 

“Scholarship recipients will explore Australia’s military history and visit locations that experienced the war’s impact first-hand. Australians fought abroad in Singapore and later became involved in the Korean War, only five years after the end of the Second World War.

“This tour is an opportunity for students to gain a deeper understanding of the service and sacrifice of our soldiers and the impacts war have had on countries around the world.”

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Munificent

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Adjective

1. very liberal in giving or bestowing. 2. characterised by great liberality or generosity a munificent gift.

From 1580s,  from Old French munificence, from Latin munificentia "bountifulness, liberality, generosity," from stem of munificus "generous, bountiful, liberal," back-formation from munificence, from Latin munificent-, stem of munificus "bountiful, liberal, generous," literally "present-making," from munus "gift or service; function, task, duty, office" (municipal). From Latin munificare meant "to enrich."

Which type of note-taking is better for learning: laptop or pen and paper?

VesnaArt/Shutterstock
Penny Van BergenMacquarie UniversityEmma BurnsMacquarie University, and Hua-Chen WangMacquarie University

Once upon a time, university lectures were accompanied by the sound of pens scribbling on paper. But if you go into a lecture hall today, you will hear students tapping on laptops.

Devices are now an accepted and important part of modern learning. But this does not necessarily mean students should forget the old-fashioned ways of taking notes.

Research shows pen and paper can help students learn and remember more from class.

The benefits of note-taking

Studies have long shown students who take notes during a lecture, class, or while reading are able to remember more of that content later.

One reason is note-taking is more active than listening or reading, which helps us maintain attention.

And students often go beyond just recording the information being said.

Note-taking means students are trying to understand their teacher by making assessments about what is important in real time. They might also organise the content into themes and sub-themes or highlight things that stand out.

These activities are examples of active engagement which strengthens the “encoding process”: the way new knowledge moves into long-term memory and forms memory pathways.

Strong memory pathways enable knowledge to be more easily accessed later, such as when problem solving in class or doing an exam.

Students in a lecture hall taking notes
Taking notes during class can help keep your focus and make it easier to retain information. Matej Kastelic/Shutterstock

Note-taking on a laptop

Research shows the kinds of notes students take when typing on a laptop differ from those taken with traditional pen and paper.

2018 study in the United States found college students took longer lecture notes (both in word count and quantity of ideas) when typing on a laptop than when writing by hand. They also recorded longer sections verbatim from the lecture. This might occur because students typically type faster than they handwrite.

However, while students are faster on a laptop, they are also likely to become distracted.

2021 study of US college students used tracking software and found the average student was distracted for about half their lecture by social media, assignments, shopping and other off-task internet activities.

Note-taking with a pen

So how do pen and paper compare?

2024 meta-analysis of 24 international studies showed taking lecture notes by hand resulted in stronger overall test performance and course grades for undergraduate students.

This is because handwriting engages the brain in a more active way than typing, which is better for learning.

Students who take notes by hand use more shorthand, visual signals (for example, bolding, underlining, arrows and stars) and images (diagrams, graphs and tables) than those who type.

Taking notes by hand is particularly helpful if a lecturer or teacher pauses during a lecture or lesson, so students can revise or add to their notes in real time. In one US study, students using longhand added three times as many new ideas to their notes during lecture pauses as laptop users did.

Woman highlighting words in a notebook
Notetaking on pen and paper can help students form strong connections between ideas. ABO PHOTOGRAPHY/Shutterstock

Are there times laptops might be better?

Despite the benefits of handwriting, there are some situations where laptops may be more appropriate for note-taking.

Students who struggle with slow handwriting or spelling may find pen and paper note-taking interferes with their learning. This is because they need to focus more on the physical act of writing so it becomes harder to process new knowledge.

Some neurodivergent students may also find handwriting challenging. For instance, autistic students often experience difficulties with fine motor skills like handwriting. Similarly, students with dyslexia or dysgraphia may struggle with handwriting tasks.

For these students, typing with features like spell-check and auto-correction can allow them to focus on understanding and fully participating in class.

But for those who find both handwriting and typing equally comfortable, the research shows using a pen and paper are more effective for learning.The Conversation

Penny Van Bergen, Associate Professor in the Psychology of Education, Macquarie UniversityEmma Burns, ARC DECRA fellow and Senior Lecturer, School of Education, Macquarie University, and Hua-Chen Wang, Senior Lecturer, School of Education, Macquarie University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Whales sing when they’ve had a good meal – new research

Stock Photos Studios/Shutterstock
Ted CheesemanSouthern Cross University and Jarrod SantoraUniversity of California, Santa Cruz

Spanning more octaves than a piano, humpback whales sing powerfully into the vast ocean. These songs are beautifully complex, weaving phrases and themes into masterful compositions. Blue and fin whales richly fill out a bass section with their own unique versions of song.

Together, these three species can create a marvellous symphony in the sea.

Published today in PLOS One, our new research reveals these baleen whale species’ response to major changes in their ecosystem can be heard in their songs.

Food for long-distance travel

The six-year study took place in whale foraging habitat in the eastern North Pacific, off the coast of California in the United States. From this biologically rich foraging habitat, the whales migrate long distances each year to breeding habitats at lower latitudes.

They eat little to nothing during their migration and winter breeding season. So they need to build up their energy stores during their annual residence in foraging habitat.

This energy, stored in their gigantic bodies, powers the animals through months of long-distance travel, mating, calving, and nursing before they return to waters off California in the spring and summer to resume foraging.

The whales eat krill and fish that can aggregate in massive schools. However, their diets are distinct.

While blue whales only eat krill, humpback whales eat krill and small schooling fish such as anchovy. If the prey species are more abundant and more densely concentrated, whales can forage more efficiently. Foraging conditions and prey availability change dramatically from year to year.

We wanted to know if these changes in the ecosystem were reflected in the whales’ acoustic behaviour.

Piecing together a complex puzzle

To track the occurrence of singing, we examined audio recordings acquired through the Monterey Accelerated Research System. This is a deep-sea observatory operated by the Monterey Bay Aquarium Research Institute and funded by the US National Science Foundation.

Analysis of sound recordings is a highly effective way to study whales because we can hear them from quite far away. If a whale sings anywhere within thousands of square kilometres around the hydrophone, we will hear it.

Yet, piecing together the complex puzzle of whale behavioural ecology requires diverse research methods.

Our study used observations of the whales, including sound recordings, photo identification and diet analysis. It also used measurements of forage species abundance, characterisation of ecosystem conditions and theoretical modelling of sound propagation.

Our ability to probe the complex lives of these giants was enhanced for humpback whales because we had a unique data resource available for this species: extensive photo identification.

The Happywhale community science project combines photos supplied by researchers and ecotourists, and identification enabled by artificial intelligence, to recognise individual whales by the shape and coloration of their flukes.

This unique resource enabled us to examine the local abundance of humpback whales. We could also study the timing of their annual migration and how persistently individual whales occupied the study region.

A small microphone on the seafloor, with two fish swimming around it.
Scientists used a deep-sea hydrophone to keep a nearly continuous record of the ocean soundscape. MBARI

An increase in food – and in song

The study began in 2015, during a prolonged marine heatwave that caused major disruption in the foraging habitat of whales and other animals throughout the eastern North Pacific.

All three whale species sang the least during the heatwave, and sang more as foraging conditions improved over the next two years.

These patterns provided the first indications that the singing behaviour by whales may be closely related to the food available. Remarkably, whale song is an indicator of forage availability.

Further evidence was found in the striking differences between humpback and blue whales during the later years of the study.

Continued increases in detection of humpback whale song could not be explained by changes in the local abundance of whales, the timing of their annual migration, or the persistence of individuals in the study region.

However, humpback song occurrence closely tracked tremendous increases in the abundances of northern anchovy — the largest increase in 50 years. And when we analysed the skin of the humpback whales, we saw a clear shift to a fish-dominated diet.

In contrast, blue whales only eat krill, and detection of their songs plummeted with large decreases in krill abundance. Our analysis of blue whale skin revealed they were foraging over a larger geographic area to find the food they needed during these hard times in the food web.

School of small, silver fish swimming in the water.
Humpback song occurrence closely tracked tremendous increases in the abundances of northern anchovy. evantravels/Shutterstock

Predicting long-term changes

This research shows listening to whales is much more than a rich sensory experience. It’s a window into their lives, their vulnerability, and their resilience.

Humpback whales emerge from this study as a particularly resilient species. They are more able to readily adapt to changes in the ecology of the foraging habitats that sustain them. These findings can help scientists and resource managers predict how marine ecosystems and species will respond to long-term changes driven by both natural cycles and human impacts.

At a time of unprecedented change for marine life and ecosystems, collaboration across disciplines and institutions will be crucial for understanding our changing ocean.

This work was enabled by private research centres, universities and federal agencies working together. This consortium’s past work has revealed a rich new understanding of the ocean soundscape, answering fundamental questions about the ecology of ocean giants.

Who knows what more we will learn as we listen to the ocean’s underwater symphony?

Side view of a large whale swimming down from the ocean's surface.
The study’s findings can help scientists better understand how blue whales and other baleen whales respond to long-term changes in the ocean. Ajit S N/Shutterstock

This work was led by John Ryan, a biological oceanographer at the Monterey Bay Aquarium Research Institute (MBARI), with an interdisciplinary team of researchers from MBARI, Southern Cross University, Happywhale.comCascadia Research Collective, University of Wisconsin, NOAA Southwest Fisheries Science Centre, University of California, Santa Cruz, Naval Postgraduate School, and Stanford University.The Conversation

Ted Cheeseman, PhD Candidate, Marine Ecological Research Centre, Southern Cross University and Jarrod Santora, Research Associate, Institute of Marine Sciences and NOAA-NMFS Fisheries Ecology Division, Southwest Fisheries Science Center, University of California, Santa Cruz

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Quantum navigation could transform how we travel. So what is it, and how does it work?

Triff/Shutterstock
Allison KealySwinburne University of Technology

Quantum technology is no longer confined to the lab – it’s making its way into our everyday lives. Now, it’s about to transform something even more fundamental: how we navigate the world.

Imagine submarines travelling beneath the ocean, never needing to surface for location updates. Planes flying across continents with unshakeable precision, unaffected by signal disruptions.

Emergency responders could navigate smoke-filled buildings or underground tunnels with flawless accuracy, while autonomous vehicles chart perfect courses through dense urban environments.

These scenarios might sound like science fiction, but they can all be made possible with an emerging approach known as quantum navigation.

This game-changing tech will one day redefine movement, exploration and connectivity in ways we’re only just beginning to imagine. So, what is it?

Satellite navigation is at the heart of many things

Global navigation satellite systems, like GPS, are deeply embedded in modern society. We use them daily for navigation, ordering deliveries and tagging photo locations. But their impact goes far beyond convenience.

Timing signals from satellites in Earth’s orbit authenticate stock market trades and help balance the electricity grid. In agriculture, satellite navigation guides autonomous tractors and helps muster cattle.

Emergency services rely on navigation satellite systems for rapid response, reducing the time it takes to reach those in need.

Despite their benefits, systems like GPS are quite vulnerable. Satellite signals can be jammed or interfered with. This can be due to active warfare, terrorism or for legitimate (or illegitimate) privacy concerns. Maps like GPSJAM show real-time interference hotspots, such as those in the Middle East, areas around Russia and Ukraine, and Myanmar.

The environment of space isn’t constant, either. The Sun regularly ejects giant balls of plasma, causing what we know as solar storms. These emissions slam into Earth’s magnetic field, disrupting satellites and GPS signals. Often these effects are temporary, but they can also cause significant damage, depending on the severity of the storm.

An outage of global navigation satellite systems would be more than an inconvenience – it would disrupt our most critical infrastructure.

Estimates suggest a loss of GPS would cost just the United States economy about US$1 billion per day (A$1.5 billion), causing cascading failures across interconnected systems.

Quantum navigation to the rescue

In some environments, navigation signals from satellites don’t work very well. They don’t penetrate water or underground spaces, for example.

If you’ve ever tried to use Google Maps in a built-up city with skyscrapers, you may have run into issues. Tall buildings cause signal reflections that degrade accuracy, and signals are weakened or completely unavailable inside buildings.

This is where quantum navigation could step in one day.

Quantum science describes the behaviour of particles at scales smaller than an atom. It reveals mind-boggling effects like superposition – particles existing in multiple states simultaneously – and entanglement (when particles are connected through space and time in ways that defy classical understanding).

These effects are fragile and typically collapse under observation, which is why we don’t notice them in everyday life. But the very fragility of quantum processes also lets them work as exquisite sensors.

A sensor is a device that detects changes in the world around it and turns that information into a signal we can measure or use. Think automatic doors that open when we walk near them, or phone screens that respond to our touch.

Quantum sensors are so sensitive because quantum particles react to tiny changes in their environment. Unlike normal sensors, which can miss weak signals, quantum sensors are extremely good at detecting even the smallest changes in things like time, gravity or magnetic fields.

Their sensitivity comes from how easily quantum states change when something in their surroundings shifts, allowing us to measure things with much greater accuracy than before.

This precision is critical for robust navigation systems.

Our team is researching new ways to use quantum sensors to measure Earth’s magnetic field for navigation. By using quantum effects in diamonds, we can detect Earth’s magnetic field in real time and compare the measurements to pre-existing magnetic field maps, providing a resilient alternative to satellite navigation like GPS.

Since magnetic signals are unaffected by jamming and work underwater, they offer a promising backup system.

A steel box bolted to a perforated sheet with the words phasor quantum on it.
A quantum magnetometer used in our research. Swinburne University/RMIT/Phasor

The future of navigation

The future of navigation will integrate quantum sensors to enhance location accuracy (via Earth’s magnetic and gravitational fields), improve orientation (via quantum gyroscopes), and enable superior timing (through compact atomic clocks and interconnected timekeeping systems).

These technologies promise to complement and, in some cases, provide alternatives to traditional satellite-based navigation.

However, while the potential of quantum navigation is clear, making it a practical reality remains a significant challenge. Researchers and companies worldwide are working to refine these technologies, with major efforts underway in academia, government labs and industry.

Startups and established players are developing prototypes of quantum accelerometers (devices that measure movement) and gyroscopes, but most remain in early testing phases or specialised applications.

Key hurdles include reducing the size and power demands of quantum sensors, improving their stability outside of controlled laboratory settings, and integrating them into existing navigation systems.

Cost is another barrier – today’s quantum devices are expensive and complex, meaning widespread adoption is still years away.

If these challenges can be overcome, quantum navigation could reshape everyday life in subtle but profound ways. While quantum navigation won’t replace GPS overnight, it could become an essential part of the infrastructure that keeps the world moving.The Conversation

Allison Kealy, Director, Innovative Planet Institute, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

NASA’s new telescope will create the ‘most colourful’ map of the cosmos ever made

NASA’s SPHEREx observatory undergoes integration and testing at BAE Systems in Boulder, Colorado, in April 2024. NASA/JPL-Caltech/BAE Systems
Deanne FisherSwinburne University of Technology

NASA will soon launch a new telescope which it says will create the “most colourful” map of the cosmos ever made.

The SPHEREx telescope is relatively small but will provide a humongous amount of knowledge in its short two-year mission.

It is an infrared telescope designed to take spectroscopic images – ones that measure individual wavelengths of light from a source. By doing this it will be able to tell us about the formation of the universe, the growth of all galaxies across cosmic history, and the location of water and life-forming molecules in our own galaxy.

In short, the mission – which is scheduled for launch on February 27, all things going well – will help us understand how the universe came to be, and why life exists inside it.

A massive leap forward

Everything in the universe, including you and the objects around you, emits light in many different colours. Our eyes split all that light into three bands – the brilliant greens of trees, blues of the sky and reds of a sunset – to synthesise a specific image.

But SPHEREx – short for Spectro-Photometer for the History of the Universe, Epoch of Reionization and Ices Explorer – will divide light from everything in the sky into 96 bands. This is a massive leap forward. It will cover the entire sky and offer new insights into the chemistry and physics of objects in the universe.

The mission will complement the work being done by other infrared telescopes in space, such as the James Webb Space Telescope and Hubble Space Telescope.

Both of these telescopes are designed to make high-resolution measurements of the faintest objects in the universe, which means they only study a tiny part of the sky at any given time. For example, the sky is more than 15 million times larger than what the James Webb Space Telescope can observe at once.

In its entire mission the James Webb Space Telescope could not map out the whole sky the way SPHEREx will do in only a few months.

SPHEREx will take will take spectroscopic images of 1 billion galaxies, 100 million stars, and 10,000 asteroids. It will answer questions that require a view of the entire sky, which are missed out by the biggest telescopes that chase the highest resolution.

Small metal casing containing three rainbow-coloured plates.
NASA’s SPHEREx mission will use these filters to capture spectroscopic images of the cosmos. NASA/JPL-Caltech

Measuring inflation

The first aim of SPHEREx is to measure what astronomers call cosmic inflation. This refers to the rapid expansion of the universe immediately after the Big Bang.

The physical processes that drove cosmic inflation remain poorly understood. Revealing more information about inflation is possibly the most important research area of cosmology.

Inflation happened everywhere in the universe. To study it astronomers need to map the entire sky. SPHEREx is ideal for studying this huge mystery that is fundamental to our cosmos.

SPHEREx will use the spectroscopic images to measure the 3D positions of about a billion galaxies across cosmic history. Astronomers will then create a picture of the cosmos not just in position but in time.

This, plus a lot of statistics and mathematics, will let the SPHEREx team test different theories of inflation.

Thick clouds of gas and dust surrounded by stars and orange light.
The SHEREx mission will complement the work of the James Webb Space Telescope, which captured this composite image of stars, gas and dust in a small region within the vast Eagle Nebula, 6,500 light-years away from Earth. NASA/ESA/CSA/STScI

Pinpointing the location of life-bearing molecules

Moving much closer to home, SPHEREx aims to identify water- and life-bearing molecules (known as biogenic molecules) in the clouds of gas in our galaxy, the Milky Way.

In the coldest parts of our galaxy, the molecules that create life (such as water, carbon dioxide and methanol) are trapped in icy particles. Those icy biogenic molecules have to travel from the cold gas in the galaxy onto planets so life can come to be.

Despite years of study, this process remains a huge mystery.

To answer this fundamental question about human existence, we need to know where all those molecules are.

What SPHEREx will provide is a complete census of the icy biogenic molecules in our surrounding galaxy. Icy biogenic molecules have distinct features in the infrared spectrum, where SPHEREx operates.

By mapping the entire sky, SPHEREx will pinpoint where these molecules are, not only in our galaxy but also in nearby systems.

Cloud of pink and green dust surrounded by stars.
Located some 13,700 light-years away from Earth in the southern constellation Centaurus of the Milky Way, RCW 49 is a dark and dusty stellar nursery that houses more than 2,200 stars. NASA/JPL-Caltech/University of Wisconsin

Once we know where they all are, we can determine the necessary conditions to form biogenic molecules in space. In turn, this can tell us about a crucial step in how life came to be.

Currently 200 spectra have been taken on biogenic molecules in space. We expect the James Webb Space Telescope will obtain a few thousand such measurements.

SPHEREx will generate 8 million new spectroscopic images of life-bearing molecules. This will revolutionise our understanding.

Mapping the whole sky enables astronomers to identify promising regions for life and gather large-scale data to separate meaningful patterns from anomalies, making this mission a transformative step in the search for life beyond Earth.The Conversation

Deanne Fisher, Associate Professor of Astronomy, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Remembering Roberta Flack, a spellbinding virtuoso of musical interpretation

Leigh CarriageSouthern Cross University

The multi-Grammy award winner Roberta Flack has passed away at 88.

Her approach and sound were a unique combination of soul, folk, rhythm and blues, jazz, pop and musicianship, and arranging skills so broad she had had a lasting impact on future artists.

Her sustained career laid a foundation for pop and neo-soul artists Alicia Keys, Erykah Badu, Solange, J Dilla, Flying Lotus, and D’Angelo.

Over her career, Flack performed some original songs, but she is better known for her myriad of covers and performances of songs written for her. No matter who wrote the songs, she made all of them her own. She was a master of musical interpretation.

An early life of music

Flack was born in North Carolina in 1937. Both of her parents played piano; her mother was the church organist.

Her early interest in gospel tunes was encouraged and supported with her participation in a local Baptist church in Arlington, Virginia, and many relatives who sang.

Her formal classical musical training continued at Howard University. After a brief period teaching at a junior high school, Flack started landing regular bookings at Mr. Henry’s, a Washington DC bar where Flack performed a range of traditional spirituals, jazz, blues and folk repertoire.

In 1968, she signed with Atlantic Records.

Her brilliant debut

Her debut album, First Take, was recorded over just ten hours in 1969 at Atlantic Recording Studios, New York. First take indeed! Genius!

Considering Flack’s background, religious inspiration and being surrounded by the social movements of the 1960s, it is not surprising that her first album features songs that address race and religion. The album creates a fusion of music with themes of spiritually and compelling political issues.

Flack blended genres effortlessly. One of the highlights of the album is Flack’s interpretation of the folk song The First Time Ever I Saw Your Face. Written in 1957 by British political singer-songwriter Ewan MacColl for the vocalist Peggy Seeger, Flack’s interpretation is notably delivered with a deliberately slower tempo, and with legato phrasing – smooth, and connected.

The lesser-known second track, the Venezuelan/Mexican song Angelitos Negros, offers a soulful statement of black rights.

Flack’s powerful vocal delivery evokes a haunting sense of loss and refined passion. This, combined with her choice of musical arrangement with repeating lyrics, forms a commanding protest song.

Always forging her own path

Labels often described her work as “adult contemporary” or “easy-listening”.

This barely addresses the diversity within her catalogue, which features Broadway ballads like The Impossible Dream, her definitive interpretation of Leonard Cohen’s Hey, That’s No Way To Say Goodbye, Bee Gees and Beatles songs, and folk classics.

Blending genres like jazz, latin, rock and folk with nuanced elements of classical into her own arrangements and song interpretations, to the listener Flack’s interpretation becomes authorship.

In this way, Flack played a role in defining pop music’s processes.

Flack is best known for her majestic indelible early hits songs like Killing Me Softly with His Song, Where Is the Love and The Closer I Get to You.

The 1973 live recording of Killing Me Softly With His Song, written by Charles Fox and Norman Gimbel, is breathtaking.

Flack opens without an introduction: straight in, delicately infusing the lyrics with a vast array of tonal shades. The smooth phrases are delivered with a beautifully aligned dynamic, like the most carefully crafted expression.

In 1996 Killing Me Softly with His Song, was reinvented by the Fugees with lead vocalist Lauryn Hill.

Where Is the Love, a duet with Donny Hathaway, brings together their two legendary voices perfectly. Here were two highly skilled pianists with incredible musicality with voices that blended perfectly together.

I have always enjoyed Flack’s version of Compared to What. Flack’s emotive delivery; the warmth of her tone; the panache; the edgeless smooth phrasing pulls you near in complete comfort.

For Flack the lyric meaning – telling the story with clarity and honesty – was paramount. Her expression is refined with understated inventiveness. There is such power in her performances. She is spellbinding, reaching a deep soulful place that is both classically and contemporarily informed.

While Flack wrote some songs, such as You Know What It’s Like, she was not predominantly a songwriter. Instead, she was a virtuosic interpreter of music. Whether penned by Flack or not, each song’s interpretation sounds authored by her. That is the sense you are getting when you listen to her music: it doesn’t matter who it’s written by, her interpretation makes you believe it is by her.The Conversation

Leigh Carriage, Senior Lecturer in Music, Southern Cross University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What do young people want to see in politics? More than 20,000 pieces of their writing hold some answers

Shutterstock
Philippa CollinWestern Sydney UniversityAzadeh DastyariWestern Sydney UniversityMichael Everitt HartupRMIT University, and Sky HugmanWestern Sydney University

Ahead of the Australian election, candidates, advisers and political parties might be paying attention to what young people think. And if they’re not, they should be.

This election will be the first in which Gen Z and Millennial voters (aged 18–40) will outnumber Baby Boomers (aged 60–79). Many of these young people were in high school during the previous two elections.

While there are concerns about the effectiveness of civics and citizenship educationthere is also evidence young people are interested in, and active on, many issues.

So what do young people care about most? We analysed thousands of pieces of writing by young Australians to find out.

What matters to young people?

For the past 20 years, young people have been telling us what matters to them as part of the Whitlam Institute’s What Matters? writing competition. Students in years 5–12 can write about whatever they like. Most are directed by their schools to contribute as a part of their civics curriculum. Some opt to enter the competition out of interest.

A unique sample, our analysis of 22,500 entries from 2019 to 2024 provides insight into the issues that resonate most with this generation.

We identified common themes: society and democracy, mental health, environment and climate change, intergenerational justice and (social) media.

1. Society and democracy

We found young people were actively grappling with complex and diverse issues in an increasingly fragmented political landscape. They are also concerned about anti-democratic forces.

They reflect on what makes this moment exceptional – climate change, war and violence, rapid technological change – and consider actions needed from individuals, communities and institutions for them to have a future.

Our research shows young people prioritise care in local and global futures, valuing peer support, family, intergenerational ties, and connections across communities and borders. The most common topic was family, followed by pollution, racism and poverty.

An ethics of care shapes their sense of belonging and responsibility – and the responsibilities of government. As a senior student wrote in 2022:

Children are being abused, or watching one of their parents be abused countless times. The Government needs to step up and do their job properly by using more effective ways of helping children and their parents get out of unsafe environments.

Our sentiment analysis shows that they write with hope – and frequently with anxiety and fear.

2. Mental health

Many young people write about “health”, including physical health and the health of communities and natural environments. Most often, though, they write about mental health and the causes of worry, distress and illness.

Young people want governments and leaders to tackle the causes of the causes of ill-health. In other words, they want action on what creates the drivers of ill-health, including climate change, inequality and loneliness.

For policymakers and advocates, this means recognising mental health as deeply connected to broader social and political issues – issues young people believe governments must address if they are serious about improving wellbeing.

3. Environment and climate change

Environmental issues, particularly climate change, were dominant themes — more so than in previous years. Students write about their relationship to the environment and the benefits of connecting to nature.

A group of young people wearing a sign that says stop burning our future.
Concerns about climate change were a common theme across the entries. Shutterstock

Some are calling out extractive relationships with the environment, particularly by large corporations. They demand urgent action from individuals and institutions, advocating for policies that prioritise future generations and the planet.

A senior student wrote in 2019:

our future is under threat because of climate change […] it is our generation’s future that is on the line, yet we continue to be unheard.

4. Intergenerational justice

Young people see intergenerational justice and social justice as interconnected, demanding climate action, economic opportunity and democratic participation. Their concerns reflect a commitment to human rights including refugee rights, gender equality and Indigenous justice.

Their writing shows awareness of Australia’s role in the world. Many discuss global conflicts and the responsibilities of nations in promoting peace and security. They want to contribute to efforts to address these issues.

Young people want to trust and have more of a role in Australian democracy. They want those in power, and the institutions and agencies over which they preside, to be more transparent, to communicate regularly and honestly, and to show how they are taking action for a better future for all generations.

Key areas where young people want greater accountability are in government, the media and business. Twelve-year-old Ivy said in an interview:

young children should have a direct voice to parliament […] adults would take us more seriously instead of just viewing us as just kids. If issues affect kids right now or this generation, they should have a say about that to parliament.

Young people want their activism and efforts recognised and supported. They hope for a democracy in which they’re not just heard, but are actively engaged by leaders, with a direct voice in government (at all levels) and institutions.

5. (Social) media

Young people highlight social media’s pros and cons, calling for strategies that better engage with them to reduce harm and maximise benefits.

A group of teenagers sit together and chat while using their smartphones
Young Australians painted a nuanced picture of social media. Shutterstock

They stress the need for digital literacy to navigate online information critically, and they want online environments to be supportive and safe.

Young people are concerned about how they are represented in the media generally. They argue that inclusive and accurate portrayals are key to having their voices heard and respected – crucial for meaningful civic participation.

Candidates on notice

Young people are not just future constituents – they are voting at the next election.

The young people whose writing we analysed have formed civic and political values during a turbulent time in Australian and world history: catastrophic bushfires and floods, a climate crisis, a pandemic, and digital technologies that are changing our lives.

They reject the idea they are too young to understand issues, and instead want a participatory democracy in which their voices influence real decisions. Indeed, the public has shown a desire to let young people have more of a say.

Our analysis tells us many of this year’s 18–24-year-old voters are informed, engaged and ready to hold leaders accountable. They want action on climate, mental health, economic justice and democratic accountability. They’re tired of being ignored and sidelined.


The authors would like to acknowledge research assistant Ammar Shoukat Randhawa for their work on the research this article reports.The Conversation

Philippa Collin, Professor, Institute for Culture and Society, Western Sydney UniversityAzadeh Dastyari, Director, Research and Policy, Whitlam Institute, Western Sydney UniversityMichael Everitt Hartup, Lecturer in Youth Studies, RMIT University, and Sky Hugman, Lecturer, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

500 years ago, German peasants revolted – but their faith that the Protestant Reformation stood for freedom was dashed by Martin Luther and the nobility

A sketch of groups of peasants wandering around the countryside during the German Peasants’ War. Warwick Press via Wikimedia Commons.
Michael BrueningMissouri University of Science and Technology

Five hundred years ago, in the winter of 1524-1525, bands of peasants roamed the German countryside seeking recruits. It was the start of the German Peasants’ War, the largest uprising in Europe before the French Revolution. The peasants’ goal was to overturn serfdom and create a fairer society grounded on the Christian Bible.

For months, they seized their landlords’ monasteries and castles. By March 1525, the peasant armies had grown to encompass tens of thousands of peasants from Alsace to Austria and from Switzerland to Saxony.

The peasants had economic grievances, to be sure, but they also drew inspiration from the message of freedom, or “Fryheit” in German, being preached by theologian Martin Luther, who had recently launched the Protestant Reformation.

Luther’s rejection of the peasants’ cause, however, would help lead to their crushing defeat.

I am a scholar of the Reformation, and I included the peasants’ list of demands in my book on the debates of the era. The question of the legitimacy of the peasants’ uprising was one of the most consequential debates of the era.

Luther’s message of freedom

In 1517, eight years before the German Peasants’ War, Luther launched the Reformation with his 95 Theses. The theses reflected Luther’s belief that the pope and the Catholic Church were preying on the poor by selling them indulgences, taking their money for a false promise that their sins would be forgiven.

Luther taught instead that God freely forgives the sins of believers. In one of his most famous early treatises, “The Freedom of a Christian,” written in 1520, Luther argued that because they are saved or “justified” by faith alone, Christians are entirely free from the need to do works to merit salvation. This included fasting, going on pilgrimages and buying indulgences.

Luther’s attacks on the Catholic Church, clergy and monks quickly grew more vehement. He and his allies lambasted them for fleecing the peasants and the poor through usury, a practice of lending money at high rates of interest. Since the Bible provided no support for such practices, they argued, the poor should be free of them.

The Twelve Articles

In her 2025 book “Summer of Fire and Blood,” Reformation scholar Lyndal Roper argues that the religious element of the peasants’ war was central. The German peasants were among the first to try to unlock the revolutionary potential of Reformation teachings to fight social and economic injustice.

The peasants’ efforts to do so can be seen in the most important statement of their demands: The Twelve Articles. The articles are rooted in Reformation ideas and demanded, among other things, each village’s right to elect its own pastor and to be exempt from payments and duties not found in the Bible.

A black-and-white sketch showing several people standing with spears and other weapons.
A pamphlet that peasants distributed with their Twelve Articles in 1525. Otto Henne am Rhyn: Cultural History of the German People, via Wikimedia Commons

Most important was the message of freedom in the third article: “Considering that Christ has delivered and redeemed us all, without exception … it is consistent with Scripture that we should be free.” It was a cry for equality based on Christ’s redemption of all, rich and poor alike.

The Twelve Articles were hugely successful, going through 25 printings in just two months. Since the vast majority of peasants were illiterate, this was an astounding number.

For the lower classes, the Reformation promised to break up not just the spiritual monopoly held by the Catholic Church but the entrenched feudal system that kept them oppressed. Their desire for freedom was at the same time a denunciation of serfdom.

The peasants were willing to take up arms to secure their freedom. In winter 1524-1525, the peasants were able to capture castles and monasteries without much bloodshed. But starting in the spring of 1525, the uprising became increasingly violent. On Easter Sunday, the peasants shockingly slaughtered two dozen knights in the city of Weinsberg, Germany. A torrent of bloodshed would follow.

Luther’s rejection of the peasants

Although Luther may have provided the initial inspiration for the peasants, he denounced their revolt in the harshest terms. In his treatise “Admonition to Peace,” Luther complained that the peasants had made “Christian liberty an utterly carnal thing,” which “would make all men equal … and that is impossible.”

Responding to the revolt, Luther produced a tract entitled “Against the Murdering and Robbing Hordes of Peasants.” “Let everyone who can,” he infamously wrote, “smite, slay, and stab” the rebellious peasants. The rulers did just that.

The nobility had been slow to react to the peasants’ initial incursions, but when they finally organized their own armies, the peasants didn’t stand a chance. On the battlefield, the nobles’ cavalry and superior artillery brutally cut down the rebels. Many who escaped the battlefield were hunted down and executed.

The exact number of those killed are not known, but estimates place the number at around 100,000. As Roper notes, “this was slaughter on a vast scale.”

Consequences for the Reformation

English historian A. G. Dickens famously described the Reformation as an “urban event”, meaning that the movement’s important developments took place in cities. The German Peasants’ War shows the idea to be wrong.

In its first years, the Reformation galvanized the hopes and dreams of Germans in both town and country. To peasants and townsfolk, it seemed to promise the chance for a complete reordering of an unjust society.

Luther’s rejection of the peasants had important long-term consequences. His decision to side with the princes transformed the Reformation from a grassroots movement into an act of state. Everywhere the Protestant reformers went, they sought to work with the proper authorities. The close cooperation of Christian leaders and secular authorities would last for centuries.

For their part, the European peasantry grew wary of the Christian leaders who seemed to have abandoned them. Social uprisings over the next centuries lost the religious character of the 1525 conflict and would climax in the decidedly secular French Revolution.The Conversation

Michael Bruening, Professor of History, Missouri University of Science and Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Tomb of Egyptian pharaoh is first found in Luxor since Tutankhamun – here’s how we know who lay inside

Claire Isabella GilmourUniversity of Bristol

Thutmose II was the fourth ruler of the illustrious ancient Egyptian 18th dynasty, which included Tutankhamun. Now, the location of his long-lost tomb, one of the last missing royal tombs, has been confirmed by the New Kingdom Research Foundation, a British-Egyptian archaeological team led by Piers Litherland. It’s the first pharaoh’s tomb to be discovered in Luxor for over a century.

Thutmose II had a relatively short and uneventful reign, but his enduring legacy is his family. He was husband and half-brother of the female pharaoh Hatshepsut, and father of Thutmose III, arguably ancient Egypt’s greatest military leader.

Thutmose was himself of royal blood as a biological son of Thutmose I. But as his mother was only a minor wife, his marriage to Hatshepsut (also a daughter of Thutmose I, by his principal wife Ahmose) cemented his position in line to the throne.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


Around 500 years after Thutmose II’s death, ancient Egyptian officials of the 21st dynasty realised that his tomb (and that of other royals from the New Kingdom) had become vulnerable to damage from flooding and the attentions of tomb robbers. They chose a secret place in the Theban cliffs to relocate the royal remains to.

The mummified bodies of kings, queens and other significant people were interred in their new resting place near Hatshepsut’s temple. The entrance was well disguised by sand and rocks, and was inaccessible by foot. There they lay there until the late 19th century.

When the area became known to Egyptologists in 1881, the cache was found to contain the bodies of, among others, Ramesses II, Seti I, Thutmose III and, of course, Thutmose II.

They were moved from the Egyptian Museum in Tahrir Square, Cairo, in a spectacular, globally broadcast parade to the newly opened National Museum of Egyptian Civilization in 2021. But the search for Thutmose II’s original tomb continued.

Stone block with relief at Karnak Temple Thutmose II
Stone block relief showing Thutmose II, found at Karnak Temple in Luxor. WikiCommonsCC BY

This tomb, designated C4, is located in a relatively inaccessible position. It is next to the magnificent mortuary temple of Hatshepsut, Thutmose’s principal wife and later pharaoh in her own right, at the site of Deir el-Bahri on the west bank of the Nile at Luxor.

Discovered in 2022, the site is some 1.2 miles away from the Valley of the Kings, where tombs for Thutmose I and III and Hatshepsut were planned. Women of the royal family had been found there, so the initial theory was that this newly found tomb belonged to one of Thutmose’s lesser wives.

The tomb was also blocked by flood debris. The excavation team had to work through a deep entrance staircase, collapsed ceilings, corridors filled with flooding debris, and tonnes of limestone fragments.

What was in the tomb?

Further exploration by the excavation team has now brought to light evidence that confirms the tomb is that of Thutmose II himself.

Initial observations showed that the form of the entrance bore a strong resemblance to that of Hatshepsut’s KV20 tomb in the Valley of the Kings. It features a wide staircase, doorway and descending corridor, and therefore a significant space lay beyond.

As the ceilings and walls were cleared, beautiful decoration of a starred sky and extracts from a funerary text known as the Amduat emerged, strongly suggesting that this was a king’s burial. Sifting through the limestone fragments revealed broken alabaster vessels bearing the king’s name and – crucially – that of Hatshepsut, reducing the list of potential candidates to just one.

Even though C4 has otherwise been emptied of funerary goods such as sarcophagi, this is actually good news. It indicates that the tomb contents were moved elsewhere, perhaps due to the flooding. These items were not found with Thutmose II’s relocated body, so the search is still on to find them.

A sandstone statue of Hatshepsut in a pharoah's headdress.
Hatshepsut’s original tomb has not yet been found. Metropolitan Museum of ArtCC BY-SA

Contrary to many reports, C4 is not the first royal tomb to be found since that of Tutankhamun in 1922 by Howard Carter. Pierre Montet’s excavations at the third intermediate period (1069–664BC) capital city of Tanis in the 1930s revealed the royal necropolis of the 21st and 22nd dynasties, with some undisturbed. However, C4 is the first since Tutankhamun in Luxor, and it is the last missing king’s tomb of the 18th dynasty.

Still up for discovery are a handful of tombs belonging to other rulers of Egypt: Nefertiti; Ramesses XIII; the 21st-dynasty high priest of Amun, Herihor; Cleopatra VII; and Alexander the Great. Other significant tombs which may yet come to light are Ankhesenamun, wife of Tutankhamun, and the great architect Imhotep.

Some of these tombs may never be found. But the New Kingdom Research Foundation are now looking to find the next stage in Thutmose II’s postmortem journey – where was he taken after C4, but before the royal cache in the Theban cliffs?The Conversation

Claire Isabella Gilmour, PhD Candidate, Anthropology and Archaeology, University of Bristol

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Five tips to find what really brings you joy outside of work

Alison BishopUniversity of East London

Not long ago I attended a concert. It was a band that I had been waiting a while to see and so I was excited to be there in the crowd. Part way through, they played my favourite song and I noticed that I felt something different.

It felt like a pinnacle moment where the emotion of joy felt expansive and unstoppable. In that moment, I felt more alive with all my senses of my surroundings heightened and yet so much more connected to the core of who I know myself to be.

I first set out to write about finding joy, as if joy was out there in the world waiting for us to find it. However, the story of the concert shows us that this is not the case.

Not everyone likes the band that I saw and not everyone in the concert had the same experience as me. This tells us that joy is more personal, an inside job, rather than something to find outside ourselves.


Ready to make a change? The Quarter Life Glow-up is a new, six-week newsletter course from The Conversation’s UK and Canada editions.

Every week, we’ll bring you research-backed advice and tools to help improve your relationships, your career, your free time and your mental health – no supplements or skincare required. Sign up here to start your glow-up at any time.


The psychologist Chris Meadows suggests that joy is a feeling that comes from viewing an event in our lives as being meaningful to us or good for us.

Joy is not just a singular experience, there are different types of joy, according to Meadows. In his study of joy he writes about the muted experience of “serene joy”, which aims at restoring or maintaining equilibrium in the body. Then there is “excited joy”, which is linked to pursuing goals.

“Individuated joy” is felt while alone while “affiliative joy” is shared with others. Meadow’s study into the phenomenon of joy suggests that social experiences of joy occur more often than solo ones and result in what we know as bonding experiences.

“Anticipatory joy” occurs when the fulfilment of a goal is imminent and then “consummatory joy” happens when the goal has been achieved. There is also an element of feeling blessed or that what has been achieved has exceeded expectations.

In addition to the thought processes that lead to joy, there are many other elements that need to be in place. Safe, familiar surroundings are key in enabling us to be present in the moment to support relaxed equilibrium. When we feel safe and relaxed, we are more able to laugh and play and explore new ideas.

Playfulness that’s aimless but results in fairly predictable outcomes, allows us to switch off our inner critic and focus on the good feelings of being in the moment with joy. This brings a sense of ease in that whatever happens, requires very little effort on our part.

Here are five tips on how to find what brings you joy in its many forms:

1. Be present

“Be in the moment” is easy to say but harder to do.

Joy exists in the present, therefore, we need to be there to experience it. This might mean that sometimes we need to ditch the phone and not video something to post or watch later as doing that prevents us becoming immersed in the here and now. This is about making our own experience more important than the “likes” of others.

2. Listen to your inner voice

Next, turn up the volume on your inner voice.

As joy is unique to each of us, we need to hear our own voice to find out what will bring us joy. To do this, it helps to create specificity around the goals that we aspire to in the future so that we are clear about what we want to achieve.

I love the theme tune for The Pirates of the Caribbean and want to be able to play it on the piano. To make this goal specific, I need to decide what my success criteria is. It might be, I want to play to the end without stopping, or I want to get to the end without stopping and to play all of the notes on the sheet music without mistakes. Only I can know whether I would feel more joyful by achieving the second goal over the first.

Being specific means we will clearly know when that goal fulfilment is either imminent or achieved. So, the more specific we are the better. The same goes for looking at the experiences that have brought us joy in the past. By reflecting on these experiences, we can learn things about ourselves that lead to us being able to create more joy.

3. Don’t listen to your inner critic

It helps to switch off your inner critic, or at least turn the volume on this down.

It is not possible to be playful and feel safe and free, while we constantly are censoring ourselves. So, tell the inner critic that it is OK for you to be you.

4. Find your tribe

These are people who enjoy the same things as you. Being with other people who are like us enables us to feel freer to express ourselves in ways that are congruent with who we are.

5. Tune into the little things

Finally, pay attention to the little things, as they actually are the big things. Joy comes from the most unexpected places. By noticing when we feel joy we can create more of those experiences in our lives so that we can truly experience that joie de vivre (the joy of living).The Conversation

Alison Bishop, Lecturer in Positive Psychology Coaching, University of East London

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How to be happy with what you have – and avoid the trap of comparison

Alphavector/Shutterstock
Joshua ForstenzerUniversity of Sheffield

In many ways, I feel like we shouldn’t be happy with what we have. We live in a world of tremendous inequality and cruelty, running towards an environmental wall. Not just that, but some of the best people I know are chronic persistors: they know how not to accept the unacceptable.

But we also live in an economy that profits from and purposefully generates private feelings of lack, want, comparison and envy. Somewhat counter-intuitively, this envy often spurs on the feelings of lack and want, rather than the other way around. This is the genius of advertising: to generate “perceived” (aka fake) needs. I see someone living a “good” life – exciting, sexy, creative – and now I want what they have: the shoes, watch, holiday, you name it.

Envy requires comparison. And comparison requires a scale by which to rank ourselves. Popular culture offers quite a few. Being the object of sexual desire (think of “matches” on dating apps) for example, or digital social connectivity (think of “followers” or “likes”). These can all play a role in shaping your sense of personal success or failure.


Ready to make a change? The Quarter Life Glow-up is a new, six-week newsletter course from The Conversation’s UK and Canada editions.

Every week, we’ll bring you research-backed advice and tools to help improve your relationships, your career, your free time and your mental health – no supplements or skincare required. Sign up here to start your glow-up at any time.


Sometimes, these are presented in a unified pseudo-metric of success. Take for example the idea of a “high-value man”. The parts of the internet that use the concept tend to celebrate having money, a wide social network and being useful to others. This often veers into celebrating material wealth and superficial self improvement as the path to success and sexual attractiveness. The viral TikTok song I’m Looking for a Man in Finance is an only mildly exaggerated spoof of this ideal.

The implicit assumption is that having more “good things” than others means being more valuable as a person. But behind this there are a host of hidden assumptions – not least that you can “own” the genuinely valuable things in life (as opposed to being them).

These hidden assumptions usually reveal deep seated shame – the feeling that you are not enough as you are. And that you are not entitled to set the parameters that define the success or failure of your own life.

Feeling bad about yourself is not always unhealthy. A healthy negative feeling lets you know if you have done something wrong, or acted in a manner that does not meet your own moral standards. This feeling calls for you to change your ways.

A girl yelling at her younger self.
Shame can be very psychologically painful. Alphavector/Shutterstock

The unhealthy feeling, that I am calling “shame”, is not merely the feeling of embarrassment or moral doubt. Rather, it is (to follow vulnerability researcher Brené Brown’s definition) “the intensely painful feeling or experience of believing that we are flawed and therefore unworthy of love and belonging”.

This feeling is so psychologically painful that you may reflexively do all you can to remain unaware of it. This denial means that you can start to see your own critical inner voice (itself shaped by past negative experiences) as animated by an “objective” social reality, telling you not just that you’re failing, but that you are a failure. This is often called “projection”.

Other times, when you can bear to consciously feel this emotion, you may seek to negotiate with it and offer remedial actions to the universe to make up for recurrent feelings of worthlessness. In darker times still, shame can overtake your whole life, paralysing you and creeping into the quietest parts of your private self.

How to combat shame and be happy with what you have

Shame can be a remarkably sticky emotion. Identifying and interrogating it can be helpful. Working on revising how you understand your self and your relationship to others can also help. The options are many, but for the sake of illustration here are three that speak to me.

1. Stoicism

Stoics believed that your essential nature is stable and the project of life is to fulfil this nature and flourish. When making judgments, people ascribe value to an imagined state of affairs (“it would be really great if I were thinner”) and a belief that a specific course of action will make it a reality (“going without chocolate will return the figure I had in my teens”).

Boy walking with old lady
A stoic approach means connecting with your community. Alphavector/Shutterstock

Both of these can be false, because the things you desire can actually be bad for you, and you have less control over the future than you tend to think. Stoics thought people should try to get the relationship between their emotional state and the goods they pursue into harmony, seeking self-mastery in order to flourish.

To this end, stoic ethics demand that you recognise and cultivate habits that put you in touch with your own nature within the wider world – starting from the self, expanding to the family, the community, the state, humanity and ultimately the cosmos.

2. Existentialism

In contrast, existentialism requires paying attention to the lack of any ultimate purpose in human life. No one thing can ever fully define who you are. Your capacity to reinvent yourself, to value something new, to start a fresh project, is yours alone.

Woman skydiving
Existentialists define life’s meaning for themselves. Alphavector/Shutterstock

The empty feeling of meaninglessness you sometimes encounter when you have finally achieved a long sought after goal (like getting that big promotion) can be dizzying. But this feeling is a reminder of the fact that nothing in your nature demands that you achieve any one thing. It’s up to you.

You must face authentically the fact that you are free and therefore responsible for your projects and the meaning you give to them.

3. Humanistic psychotherapy

humanistic psychotherapeutic perspective offers a middle way. It invites you to look upon yourself with compassion, seeing yourself as complex, responsible and yet also imperfect and vulnerable, always involved in a richly evolving tapestry of relationships that ultimately gives meaning and purpose to your life.

Happy people waving
In humanistic psychotherapy, our relationships give life meaning. Alphavector/Shutterstock

This means that relationships and the recognition you give and derive from them provide the only solid basis for confronting that most important question – “who am I?” – ultimately seeing you through your darkest times. But this means that you need these relationships to be genuine, kind and honest so that you can see yourself and others for the frail, evolving and unique individuals that we all are.The Conversation

Joshua Forstenzer, Senior Lecturer in Philosophy and Co-Director of the Centre for Engaged Philosophy, University of Sheffield

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Joan Lindsay published Picnic at Hanging Rock at 71. Her writing life presents its own mysteries

Promotional still from Peter Weir’s film adaptation of Picnic at Hanging Rock (1975). Janus Films
David CarterThe University of Queensland

Brenda Niall’s new book, as its full title announces, is a biographical account of the “hidden life” of novelist Joan Lindsay, best known as the author of Picnic at Hanging Rock.

It adds to Niall’s work on writers and artists including Martin Boyd and the Boyd familyEthel Turner and Mary Grant BruceGeorgiana McCrae, and Mary and Elizabeth Durack.

The book joins a growing list of Australian literary biographies – if we can use the term “biography” for a complex case like this one.


Review: Joan Lindsay: The Hidden Life of the Woman who wrote Picnic at Hanging Rock – Brenda Niall (Text Publishing)


Big-name biographies from recent years include Brigitta Olubas on Shirley Hazzard, Bernadette Brennan on Helen Garner and Gillian Mears, Nathan Hobby on Katharine Susannah Prichard, Suzanne Falkiner on Randolph Stow, and Jill Roe on Miles Franklin. Catherine Lumby and Matthew Lamb have written separately about Frank Moorhouse.

Many other examples could be given. Alison Alexander has published a biography of romance author Marie Bjelke-Petersen. Sylvia Martin has written books on Aileen PalmerIda Lesson, and Mary Fullerton, Mabel Singleton and Miles Franklin. Patricia Clarke has written about Louisa AtkinsonTasma (the pen name of novelist Jessie Couvreur) and Rosa Praed.

What is striking about such a list is the dominance of women biographers writing about women authors – often authors without the highest ranking in critical standing or literary fashion, or cases where the shape of a literary career is not obvious.

The star biographies are important, as we learn about individual lives and careers. But beyond the big stories of the big names, these studies provide accounts of lesser-known writing lives, often lived in circumstances that made careers in writing for women difficult to practise or be recognised.

Writing that made an impact was easily forgotten. Networks of friends and fellow writers were often essential. There is a major source of knowledge about Australia’s literary culture collected in these works, one that remains underutilised.

Mysteries, in art and life

Niall’s biography makes one hesitate to add the simple descriptor “author” before Joan Lindsay’s name. While Lindsay wrote fiction, art criticism and many forms of journalism, often with a level of success, writing for her was often an unrewarding and frustrating investment of energy and time.

Until Picnic at Hanging Rock, of course. Lindsay’s extraordinary success with this novel – published in 1967 when she was 71 and launched, as it happens, by former prime minister Robert Menzies – inevitably shapes the structure of Niall’s book. It dominates the last two chapters, having been prefigured in passing observations and puzzled questions throughout.

Brenda Niall. Text Publishing

The success of Peter Weir’s 1975 film adaptation extends and complicates the story. Niall evokes Lindsay’s curious, critical engagement with the making of the film and its reception.

But Niall also wants to tell a larger story about Lindsay’s life. She writes of Lindsay’s studies, her practice of painting and its partial abandonment, her art criticism, her marriage to Daryl Lindsay, director of the National Gallery of Victoria, and her life at their home, Mulberry Hill.

Discretion, silences and underachievement appear to have marked much of Lindsay’s creative and, perhaps, intimate life. The word “mystery” recurs throughout Niall’s book. It is applied to aspects of Lindsay’s childhood and her marriage – about which she almost never spoke or wrote – her lack of children, her ambitions and failures, and her unwillingness to talk about such dimensions of her creative life.

The “mysteries” seem finally to have forced their way to expression in Picnic at Hanging Rock, with its famously enigmatic story about a group of schoolgirls vanishing without trace. Niall’s book makes this point. The (often unspoken) issues and aspirations in Lindsay’s earlier life are linked to the unresolved mysteries of the novel.

Art and marriage

Joan Lindsay (née Weigall) was a gifted child from an affluent family. She was a model high school student, who showed early abilities in writing, and later a committed art student at the National Gallery of Victoria School, where she met Frederick McCubbin and was influenced by the imagery of his landscape paintings.

She was distant from her anglophile mother and her two lively older sisters. Her father appears to have been an interesting figure, but also remains something of a “mystery” in this story. The lack of a close family or domestic grounding is presented as significant for Lindsay’s later life.

The National Gallery school, its community of younger artists and students, and related journeys to artists’ camps made a great difference to Joan. An early exhibition of her landscapes was well reviewed. Writer and artist Maie Ryan, who would become the wife of Richard Casey, future deputy prime minister and Australian governor-general, was an important colleague and collaborator. They shared an inner-Melbourne art studio in the early 1920s.

Joan and Daryl Lindsay in 1925. State Library of Victoria Collections, via Wikimedia Commons

Daryl Lindsay is another mystery in the book. Younger brother of artist and critic Lionel Lindsay and bohemian artist and writer Norman Lindsay, Daryl was the ninth child and sixth son in the Lindsay family and a “loner since boyhood”. He pursued multiple jobs, from banking to jackerooing, but began sketching during the first world war in France, then in a hospital in England, where he was tasked with drawing the facial injuries of wounded soldiers.

Fortunately, he met Henry Tonks, a teacher at the Slade School of Art, and Tonks offered him a place in the Slade’s drawing classes. London seemed to offer a world of possibility for an emerging artist.

The rapid courtship between Joan and Daryl in London is another puzzle. They were married in early 1922, just over eight weeks after Joan had departed from Melbourne. They spent their time there visiting galleries. Joan also clicked with Tonks, who painted her, showing “a yearning, a sense of mystery, a visionary inner life”. This interesting work is reproduced in Niall’s book.

Artists, politicians and powerful friends

When the couple returned to Melbourne, Daryl began work as a commercial illustrator, producing work for advertising, newspapers and magazines. Joan tried a range of journalistic writing — interviews, essays, travel pieces and some reviews of art exhibitions. Niall suggests she had the potential to become a professional art critic, although such roles almost always went to men.

The Lindsays were well connected to other Melbourne artists and influential figures who might buy their paintings. Sir John LongstaffDame Nellie Melba and Sir Baldwin Spencer, an influential collector of Australian art, were acquaintances.

In 1926, a joint exhibition drew targeted praise for Joan’s paintings, though in Sydney Daryl’s work was highlighted. With the likely equation of one winner and one loser in such events, Joan decided that Daryl would be the painter. She would be a writer. Much of her artwork stopped at this early point. Only one of her paintings is reproduced in the biography.

Niall charts the major steps in the couple’s life. The key move was their purchase in 1925 of the house they called Mulberry Hill on Victoria’s Mornington Peninsula. A generous renovation added “a second story, an imposing entrance in American colonial style, a stable block, and a big garden that would become Joan’s chief occupation”. The house also gained a large dining room, a drawing room, a studio, and a small room that became Joan’s “scribbling room”.

Mulberry Hill would become a place for visiting artists, politicians and celebrities (alongside its egg-laying hens), often to Daryl’s annoyance. The family of artist Rick Amor would later become residents.

Daryl had a gift for making friends, none more significant than newspaper proprietor Keith Murdoch. He had already performed some unpaid work in London with agents of the National Gallery of Victoria’s Felton Bequest. Back in Australia, Murdoch’s influence led to a curator position for Daryl and eventually his promotion to gallery director.

Daryl broke with the restraints of earlier directors. He was more favourable towards Australian art, though his preferences were also seen by some as “backward-looking”, and were dramatically opposed by the Heide group, centred around John and Sunday Reed.

Joan also had a role at the gallery, a three-day per week position, but extraordinarily one that was unpaid. It nevertheless gave her space in the gallery and an important role as a writer, especially as co-author of Masterpieces of the National Gallery of Victoria (1949), writing on Australian art.

Cover of the first edition of Picnic at Hanging Rock (1967).

A buried career

I see I have spent much of this review describing aspects of the life of Joan Lindsay and her marriage, rather than on Niall’s book as a study of Joan Lindsay’s character and creativity. The book notes the mysteries or puzzles in Lindsay’s life, her discretion or repression of unhappiness in her marriage, and her buried career. But it does not always analyse them.

The couple’s childless marriage and their very different perceptions of their lives in London versus Melbourne are considered. Joan was more at home in Melbourne, creating an active domestic space at Mulberry Hill. Niall underscores that Lindsay’s “deep creative spirit” was almost extinguished “by her role as wife and hostess”. Lindsay’s separation from existing literary circles is also underscored.

Picnic at Hanging Rock is presented as “an expression of Joan’s awareness of the colonial dilemma of not belonging”. Yet its connections to earlier (and ongoing) mysteries in Lindsay’s life, and her preference for “time without clocks” (as her 1962 memoir put it), are suggestive without always being compelling.

The story of her life with Daryl and her uneven, then spectacular participation in the writing life does, however, add to our understanding of cultural networks – and their negatives – in mid-20th century Australia.The Conversation

David Carter, Professor Emeritus, Australian Literature, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Microsoft just claimed a quantum breakthrough. A quantum physicist explains what it means

Microsoft says the Majorana 1 processor is a ‘transformative leap toward practical quantum computing’. Microsoft
Stephan RachelThe University of Melbourne

Researchers at Microsoft have announced the creation of the first “topological qubits” in a device that stores information in an exotic state of matter, in what may be a significant breakthrough for quantum computing.

At the same time, the researchers also published a paper in Nature and a “roadmap” for further work. The design of the Majorana 1 processor is supposed to fit up to a million qubits, which may be enough to realise many significant goals of quantum computing – such as cracking cryptographic codes and designing new drugs and materials faster.

If Microsoft’s claims pan out, the company may have leapfrogged competitors such as IBM and Google, who currently appear to be leading the race to build a quantum computer.

However, the peer-reviewed Nature paper only shows part of what the researchers have claimed, and the roadmap still includes many hurdles to be overcome. While the Microsoft press release shows off something that is supposed to be quantum computing hardware, we don’t have any independent confirmation of what it can do. Nevertheless, the news from Microsoft is very promising.

By now you probably have some questions. What’s a topological qubit? What’s a qubit at all, for that matter? And why do people want quantum computers in the first place?

Quantum bits are hard to build

Quantum computers were first dreamed up in the 1980s. Where an ordinary computer stores information in bits, a quantum computer stores information in quantum bits – or qubits.

An ordinary bit can have a value of 0 or 1, but a quantum bit (thanks to the laws of quantum mechanics, which govern very small particles) can have a combination of both. If you imagine an ordinary bit as an arrow that can point either up or down, a qubit is an arrow that can point in any direction (or what is called a “superposition” of up and down).

This means a quantum computer would be much faster than an ordinary computer for certain kinds of calculations – particularly some to do with unpicking codes and simulating natural systems.

So far, so good. But it turns out that building real qubits and getting information in and out of them is extremely difficult, because interactions with the outside world can destroy the delicate quantum states inside.

Researchers have tried a lot of different technologies to make qubits, using things like atoms trapped in electric fields or eddies of current swirling in superconductors.

Tiny wires and exotic particles

Microsoft has taken a very different approach to build its “topological qubits”. They have used what are called Majorana particles, first theorised in 1937 by Italian physicist Ettore Majorana.

Majoranas are not naturally occurring particles like electrons or protons. Instead, they only exist inside a rare kind of material called a topological superconductor (which requires advanced material design and must be cooled down to extremely low temperatures).

Indeed, Majorana particles are so exotic they are usually only studied in universities – not used in practical applications.

The Microsoft team say they have used a pair of tiny wires, each with a Majorana particle trapped at either end, to act as a qubit. They measure the value of the qubit – expressed by means of whether an electron is in one wire or the other – using microwaves.

Braided bits

Why has Microsoft put in all this effort? Because by swapping the positions of Majorana particles (or measuring them in a certain way), they can be “braided” so they can be measured without error and are resistant to outside interference. (This is the “topological” part of “topological qubits”.)

In theory, a quantum computer made using Majorana particles can be completely free of the qubit errors that plague other designs.

This is why Microsoft has chosen such a seemingly laborious approach. Other technologies are more prone to errors, and hundreds of physical qubits may need to be combined together to produce a single reliable “logical qubit”.

Microsoft has instead put its time and resources into developing Majorana-based qubits. While they are late to the big quantum party, they hope they will be able to catch up quickly.

There’s always a catch

As always, if something sounds too good to be true, there is a catch. Even for a Majorana-based quantum computer, such as the one announced by Microsoft, one operation – known as T-gate – won’t be achievable without errors.

So the Majorana-based quantum chip is only “almost error-free”. However, correcting for T-gate errors is much simpler than the general error correction of other quantum platforms.

Diagram showing increasing numbers of qubits combined together.
Microsoft plans to scale up by grouping together more and more qubits. Microsoft

What now? Microsoft will try to move ahead with its roadmap, steadily building larger and larger collections of qubits.

The scientific community will closely watch how Microsoft’s quantum computing processors operate, and how they perform in comparison to the other already established quantum computing processors.

At the same time, research into the exotic and obscure behaviour of Majorana particles will continue at universities around the globe.The Conversation

Stephan Rachel, Professor, School of Physics, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Have your say: Remaking the retirement villages Regulation

Closes: March 12 2025
In NSW, retirement village operators are regulated by the Retirement Villages Regulation 2017 (the current Regulation), which supports the Retirement Villages Act 1999 (the Act).

The current Regulation will expire on 1 September 2025. Remaking the Regulation allows the NSW Government to consider feedback on how to improve, modernise and streamline the current laws.

The proposed Retirement Villages Regulation 2025 (proposed Regulation) makes significant changes to the asset management plan requirements for retirement villages. The updates aim to improve transparency for residents and reduce unnecessary administrative work for operators.

The key changes include:
  • reducing the amount of information that operators must record on the retirement villages asset register
  • requiring operators to prepare a 1-year capital maintenance report as part of the annual budget process, instead of a 3-year report
  • requiring operators to record the ‘remaining effective life’ of capital items instead of ‘effective life’.
The proposed Regulation also makes other minor changes to clarify the laws and improve how they operate, for example, by ensuring key information is disclosed in a form that is easier to understand and accessible.

Changes are described in detail in the:
Your feedback will help to ensure retirement village laws balance the rights of residents and support operators.


NSA releases policies ahead of Federal Election

February 25, 2025
National Seniors Australia (NSA) has released 16 policy recommendations as part of its annual submission to Treasury in the areas of Cost of Living, Health, Aged Care, Banking, and Superannuation ahead of the Federal Election.

Informed by NSA’s 256,000 community members, the recommendations reflect the diverse and unique needs of older Australians and provide valuable guidance and insight to help government improve the lives of seniors.

NSA Chief Executive Officer Mr Chris Grice said the recommendations, which include cost estimates, have been carefully developed to benefit the needs of different senior cohorts, including pensioners, part-pensioners, self-funded retirees, and pre-retirees.

“Our well-researched and innovative policies seek to relieve current cost-of-living pressures and address more long-term issues related to the pension, employment, private health, dental, and housing, among others. There really is something for everyone,” Mr Grice said.

NSA’s key policy recommendations call to:
  • Exempt all work income from the Age Pension income test to Let Pensioners Work
  • Continue the deeming rate freeze while interest rates remain high
  • Immediately release more Home Care Packages to reduce waiting times for care at home
  • Support Australia Post to deliver full banking services in regional, rural, and remote Australia
“Older Australians are an integral part of society and the economy. The upcoming election provides an opportunity for parties and candidates to show seniors they want to help them manage real problems such as rising living costs, home care delays, and bank closures,” Mr Grice said.

“It’s time for parties and candidates to be bold. They can either adopt inadequate policies that keep inching towards positive change or they can adopt strong policies that make meaningful change happen. It’s why, after all, many people enter politics – to make an impact and to make a difference.

“We urge all candidates to consider NSA’s strong policy recommendations for older Australians of today – and for generations to follow.”

To find out more about NSA’s policy recommendations please visit here

Have your say: Restrictive practices legislative framework

Experiences of people with disability and their supporter
Closes: March 14 2025

The Department of Communities and Justice is seeking feedback on a proposed new framework about using restrictive practices on people with disability.

We want the framework to reduce use of restrictive practices and stop them being used where this is possible.

Restrictive practices are interventions that restrict the rights or movement of a person to change their behaviour - when that behaviour is likely to place them or others in serious danger.

An example of a restrictive practice is using a medication to influence a person's behaviour rather than treat an illness. Another example is restricting where a person can go.

The Department of Communities and Justice has released a Consultation Paper on the proposed framework.

An Easy Read summary is available. If you would prefer you can also read the full Consultation Paper.

Tell us what you think
You can give your feedback by completing a survey here by Friday 14 March 2025:
  • Survey for people with a disability who have experienced restrictive practices in NSW
  • Survey for supporters - family, carers, guardians and any other supporters of people who experience restrictive practices in NSW
If you would like to provide feedback in another way, please:
  • Email: policy@dcj.nsw.gov.au to provide written or audio file feedback
  • Speak to a staff member by emailing: policy@dcj.nsw.gov.au to arrange a conversation
  • Post your written feedback to: Locked Bag 5000, Parramatta, NSW, 2124
Your feedback will help inform the NSW Government as to whether to pursue the reform.

Having an x-ray to diagnose knee arthritis might make you more likely to consider potentially unnecessary surgery

pikselstock/Shutterstock
Belinda LawfordThe University of MelbourneKim BennellThe University of MelbourneRana HinmanThe University of Melbourne, and Travis HaberThe University of Melbourne

Osteoarthritis is a leading cause of chronic pain and disability, affecting more than two million Australians.

Routine x-rays aren’t recommended to diagnose the condition. Instead, GPs can make a diagnosis based on symptoms and medical history.

Yet nearly half of new patients with knee osteoarthritis who visit a GP in Australia are referred for imaging. Osteoarthritis imaging costs the health system A$104.7 million each year.

Our new study shows using x-rays to diagnose knee osteoarthritis can affect how a person thinks about their knee pain – and can prompt them to consider potentially unnecessary knee replacement surgery.

What happens when you get osteoarthritis?

Osteoarthritis arises from joint changes and the joint working extra hard to repair itself. It affects the entire joint, including the bones, cartilage, ligaments and muscles.

It is most common in older adults, people with a high body weight and those with a history of knee injury.

Many people with knee osteoarthritis experience persistent pain and have difficulties with everyday activities such as walking and climbing stairs.

How is it treated?

In 2021–22, more than 53,000 Australians had knee replacement surgery for osteoarthritis.

Hospital services for osteoarthritis, primarily driven by joint replacement surgery, cost $3.7 billion in 2020–21.

While joint replacement surgery is often viewed as inevitable for osteoarthritis, it should only be considered for those with severe symptoms who have already tried appropriate non-surgical treatments. Surgery carries the risk of serious adverse events, such as blood clot or infection, and not everyone makes a full recovery.

Most people with knee osteoarthritis can manage it effectively with:

  • education and self-management
  • exercise and physical activity
  • weight management (if necessary)
  • medicines for pain relief (such as paracetamol and non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs).

Debunking a common misconception

common misconception is that osteoarthritis is caused by “wear and tear”.

However, research shows the extent of structural changes seen in a joint on an x-ray does not reflect the level of pain or disability a person experiences, nor does it predict how symptoms will change.

Some people with minimal joint changes have very bad symptoms, while others with more joint changes have only mild symptoms. This is why routine x-rays aren’t recommended for diagnosing knee osteoarthritis or guiding treatment decisions.

Instead, guidelines recommend a “clinical diagnosis” based on a person’s age (being 45 years or over) and symptoms: experiencing joint pain with activity and, in the morning, having no joint-stiffness or stiffness that lasts less than 30 minutes.

Despite this, many health professionals in Australia continue to use x-rays to diagnose knee osteoarthritis. And many people with osteoarthritis still expect or want them.

What did our study investigate?

Our study aimed to find out if using x-rays to diagnose knee osteoarthritis affects a person’s beliefs about osteoarthritis management, compared to a getting a clinical diagnosis without x-rays.

We recruited 617 people from across Australia and randomly assigned them to watch one of three videos. Each video showed a hypothetical consultation with a general practitioner about knee pain.

Woman descends steps
People with knee osteoarthritis can have difficulties getting down stairs. beeboys/Shutterstock

One group received a clinical diagnosis of knee osteoarthritis based on age and symptoms, without being sent for an x-ray.

The other two groups had x-rays to determine their diagnosis (the doctor showed one group their x-ray images and not the other).

After watching their assigned video, participants completed a survey about their beliefs about osteoarthritis management.

What did we find?

People who received an x-ray-based diagnosis and were shown their x-ray images had a 36% higher perceived need for knee replacement surgery than those who received a clinical diagnosis (without x-ray).

They also believed exercise and physical activity could be more harmful to their joint, were more worried about their condition worsening, and were more fearful of movement.

Interestingly, people were slightly more satisfied with an x-ray-based diagnosis than a clinical diagnosis.

This may reflect the common misconception that osteoarthritis is caused by “wear and tear” and an assumption that the “damage” inside the joint needs to be seen to guide treatment.

What does this mean for people with osteoarthritis?

Our findings show why it’s important to avoid unnecessary x-rays when diagnosing knee osteoarthritis.

While changing clinical practice can be challenging, reducing unnecessary x-rays could help ease patient anxiety, prevent unnecessary concern about joint damage, and reduce demand for costly and potentially unnecessary joint replacement surgery.

It could also help reduce exposure to medical radiation and lower health-care costs.

Previous research in osteoarthritis, as well as back and shoulder pain, similarly shows that when health professionals focus on joint “wear and tear” it can make patients more anxious about their condition and concerned about damaging their joints.

If you have knee osteoarthritis, know that routine x-rays aren’t needed for diagnosis or to determine the best treatment for you. Getting an x-ray can make you more concerned and more open to surgery. But there are a range of non-surgical options that could reduce pain, improve mobility and are less invasive.The Conversation

Belinda Lawford, Senior Research Fellow in Physiotherapy, The University of MelbourneKim Bennell, Professor of Physiotherapy, The University of MelbourneRana Hinman, Professor in Physiotherapy, The University of Melbourne, and Travis Haber, Postdoctoral Research Fellow in Physiotherapy, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Electronic muscle stimulators are supposed to boost blood flow to your legs – here’s what the evidence says

vebboy/Shutterstock
John HoughtonUniversity of Leicester

Google “improve leg circulation” and you may see sponsored ads for electronic muscle stimulators that claim to boost blood flow to your feet. But is there any evidence they work?

Peripheral artery disease is a surprisingly common condition affecting more than one in ten people aged over 65 in the UK. Caused by narrowings and blockages in the arteries of the legs, it can lead to intermittent claudication – calf pain while walking – what the Dutch call “window-shopping legs”.

Leg pain during walking significantly affects the everyday life of those with peripheral artery disease. It limits their ability to take part in social activities, daily tasks such as shopping and it may even impact on a person’s employment. Unsurprisingly, those with shorter pain-free walking distances report worse quality of life and major impacts on their mental wellbeing.

Peripheral artery disease is not a benign condition. Five years from diagnosis, four in ten people will have died and another one in ten will have had a major leg amputation.

So, the aims of treatment for peripheral artery disease are to reduce both the risk of heart attacks – the biggest cause of death – and progression to the end-stage of the disease where amputation is necessary unless surgery is performed to restore blood flow. The most important elements to optimal medical treatment are blood-thinning medications such as aspirin, cholesterol-lowering medications such as statins, and stopping smoking.

For those with pain when walking the treatment with one of the biggest effects on walking distance and quality of life is, well, walking. The best results are seen in those who take part in a supervised exercise programme which has consistently been shown to be more cost effective than surgery for claudication. In fact, one large randomised trial demonstrated similar results from supervised exercise to stenting a blocked artery in improving walking distance and quality of life.

Unfortunately supervised exercise therapy is only available to about half of UK peripheral artery disease patients despite it being recommended by Nice.

What about electrical muscle stimulation?

These devices work by using electronic impulses to cause the muscles of the calf to repeatedly contract. Usually this is by indirect stimulation through the feet using an electronic footplate, somewhat resembling a foot spa – although no water needed is used. These devices appear to be safe and well tolerated, with no adverse events reported.

Studies have demonstrated they do indeed increase arterial blood flow in the calf, both in healthy people and in those with peripheral artery disease. However, these increases in blood flow are present only while using the device.

A 2023 trial of 200 patients with peripheral artery disease assessed the effect of electrical muscle stimulation on walking distance. The study recruited half of the participants from centres with supervised exercise programmes and half from those without. All patients received optimal medical therapy.

The researchers randomly allocated half of the participants to receive electrical muscle stimulation. These patients were given the device and told to use it for 30 minutes at least once a day for three months.

After three months there was no difference in the maximum walking distance between those that did and did not receive electrical muscle stimulation.

However, there was an improvement in walking distance in those that received electrical muscle stimulation in addition to supervised exercise therapy compared to those that received supervised exercise alone.

Additionally, patients who received electrical muscle stimulation reported lower pain scores and better scores for the health domain in quality of life questionnaires – although they recorded no overall quality of life benefit. This demonstrates that while there may be benefit of the device on symptoms, it may only be small or experienced by a limited proportion of patients.

Transcutaneous nerve stimulation (Tens) has also been used in people with peripheral artery disease. This uses weaker electrical impulses to stimulate nerve fibres and block the transmission of pain signals.

review of published studies highlighted that Tens may have some benefit in improving walking distance. The included studies were relatively small though and not all were randomised trials. This means the findings may not be just due to the effect of Tens or applicable to a wider group of patients.

While these electrical stimulation devices show some promise, it is not clear if they are cost effective nor are they currently recommended in guidelines for treating peripheral artery disease.

Certainly, some people with peripheral artery disease do report benefit from using these devices. But they should only be used in addition to the cornerstones of peripheral artery disease treatment: medication, stopping smoking and walking as much as possible.The Conversation

John Houghton, Clinical Lecturer in Vascular Surgery, University of Leicester

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Australia could make it easier for consumers to fight back against anti-competitive behaviour. Here’s how

Mel MarquisMonash University

From the supermarket to the petrol pump, many Australians are concerned about the power of large corporations. Are consumers getting a fair deal? Do they have enough choice?

This week, the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC) is due to hand the government the final report from its inquiry into Australia’s supermarket sector. They have already said the sector is highly concentrated, with just a few sellers controlling prices and exploiting small suppliers.

This advocacy highlights a key source of pressure on wallets. The ACCC is also pursuing consumer law claims against the big supermarkets for creating the “illusion” of discounted prices.

But across the economy, it is unlikely consumer interests are being protected as much as they could be. Further reforms in competition law would help.

In some countries, consumers can band together to sue private companies and demand compensation if they’ve been harmed by anti-competitive behaviour.

Australian consumers can sue companies too – but it can be burdensome, expensive and complicated. In fact, consumer suits seeking damages for such conduct are rare. Australia could make it easier to fight back.

The problem

Treasury will wrap up a major review of competition law in August.

Two areas of reform have rightly been given particular attention: a merger law for the whole economy, and special rules for large digital platforms.

Image of the ACC's website in a a browser window
The ACCC is Australia’s competition regulator and consumer law advocate. Jarretera/Shutterstock

The merger reform has led to amendments to help the ACCC protect markets and a consultation on regulating platforms which has recently concluded.

Treasury is considering other reforms as well. However, putting consumers in a better position to claim damages for anti-competitive conduct is not on the agenda.

That is unfortunate. Consumers should feel more secure using competition law to demand compensation for anti-competitive harm. As the ACCC has said, the annual damage caused by cartels could amount to hundreds of millions of dollars, a staggering figure.

Even when the ACCC and the Commonwealth Director of Public Prosecutions succeed in bringing cartellists to court to obtain penalties or even criminal sentences, it is a way to punish and deter. It does not make victims whole.

Overseas solutions

Australia lags behind its global counterparts.

In 2005, the European Union launched a debate on this subject. Laws were passed to ensure victims of anti-competitive conduct have a right to full compensation.

Flags of European Union countires outside the European parliament.
The European Union has seen a growth in private competition law actions. MDart10/Shutterstock

Since then, it appears to have become easier for consumers there to seek damages. From 2014 to 2019, one study showed a fivefold increase in the number of cases lodged in the EU, from 50 up to 239 private claims seeking compensation.

In the United States, private antitrust enforcement thrives due to large class actions, where consumers with a similar grievance come together to take action against corporate defendants.

US antitrust law allows treble damages, which means consumers can in theory receive three times the value of any harm suffered plus the costs of the lawsuit. In reality they recover less than that, but with large classes of claimants, the incentives to pursue claims through litigation and settlements are strong.

The Australian situation

On paper, private enforcement of competition law already exists in Australia. However, incentives appear weaker here.

In the EU and US, class actions are designed to encourage claimants to seek compensation for anti-competitive harm, but the rarity of such claims in Australia suggests the settings aren’t quite right.

An image of a Google building
Google is currently subject to antitrust action in Australia. JHVEPhoto/Shutterstock

A class action against major banks for allegedly rigging exchange rates, and a recently lodged class action against Google relating to its AdTech operations, are the exceptions, not the rule.

A 2012 article in the UNSW Law Journal said it was “time for an Australian debate”, but little has happened since.

What now? Here are some possible reforms

Various reforms and initiatives could bolster private enforcement in Australia, including:

1. Reviewing evidence rules to allow judges to order the disclosure of documents collected during investigations, provided the public interest is not compromised. If evidence is too hard to access, victims of cartels have no chance of proving their case.

2. Making it easier for a willing defendant to settle out of court. Sometimes, one defendant in a cartel case may be open to settling out of court but the other defendants are not. In such a case, to make it easier for the willing defendant to settle, it could be clarified that the non-settling defendants – if eventually ordered to pay the claimants – cannot then reclaim part of those damages as a “contribution” from the defendant that did settle.

Without this assurance, individual defendants that would otherwise be ready to settle may hesitate for fear of paying more than their share.

3. The ACCC could also more aggressively seek redress for consumers, which would reduce the need for damages actions. So far, the ACCC and the Commonwealth Director of Public Prosecutions have not made enough use of their ability to seek orders granting such compensation in cartel cases.

Competition law is not just about promoting dynamism and productivity growth, and fairer prices and potential wage growth, though these are clearly desirable.

Competition law should also be about securing relief for victims to make them whole, and to boost their trust in markets. Facilitating private rights of action for consumers can help to elevate justice in this area of the law.The Conversation

Mel Marquis, Deputy Associate Dean and Senior Lecturer in Law, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Seniors call for Private Health review as premiums rise

“Seniors are stretched to their limit trying to hold onto Private Health Insurance”

February 27, 2025
The announcement that health insurance premiums will increase by 3.73% on average from April 1st has compelled National Seniors Australia (NSA) to again call for a full review of the private health system and an increase to the Private Health Insurance (PHI) Rebate for low-income earners as priorities for the 2025 federal election.

NSA CEO Mr Chris Grice said rising PHI premiums significantly impact older people. Many develop health conditions but experience reduced income as they move from work to retirement. This means affordability is paramount.

“NSA research shows Private health insurance is the second biggest concern for seniors, behind cost of living. While
most people need private health, rising premiums and out-of-pocket costs significantly undermine its value. As insurers and specialists point the finger at each other – seniors are left caught in the crossfire,” Mr Grice said.

“Concerns about the value of private health interventions have prompted NSA, in our Federal Election Priorities, to call on candidates to support an in-depth independent inquiry into the private health system.

“Despite several reviews, nothing has changed. Private health insurance holders continue to face premium increases, product limitations, and rising out-of-pocket costs.

“Our research shows older people who are single, on the Age Pension or with limited savings are less likely to hold health insurance. While older people support private health insurance, many keep it begrudgingly. The risk for government is older people drop their insurance, placing pressure on the public system. It’s time for an independent review of private health to make healthcare more accessible and affordable for older Australians.

“NSA is also calling for an increase in the Private Health Insurance Rebate for people on lower incomes to help maintain cover, and avoid being forced into the public health system.

“Our research shows 68% of older people have gone without or hesitated to access essential healthcare because of cost.

“To help manage costs, people sadly put up with pain and illness, stretch out the time between appointments or prescriptions, go without one medicine to pay for another, and wait for the condition to worsen to warrant transport and hospitalisation, because it’s free.

“This can lead to all kinds of health and wellbeing issues including untreated problems, undiagnosed conditions, worsening symptoms, and mental health impacts.

“The announced increase reinforces the need for NSA’s recommendations and highlights the fragility of a broken
health system and the need to focus on productivity and efficiency moving forward.”

To view NSA’s Older People’s Experiences of Healthcare Affordability & Accessibility Report please visit here

Can Wearable Technology Be Used to Prevent Falls in Older People in Clinical Settings?

February 27, 2025
A new study has found strong support among healthcare professionals for incorporating wearable technology into clinical practice to assess fall risk and enhance mobility for older people.

Falls are a leading cause of injury among older people, often resulting in hospitalisation, loss of independence, and reduced quality of life. With Australia’s ageing population, there is an urgent need for scalable, effective tools that support fall prevention and safe mobility in real-world environments.

Led by Dr Meghan Ambrens and Associate Professor Kim van Schooten, both Research Fellows at NeuRA and Associate Investigators at UNSW Ageing Futures Institute, the study sought to establish a consensus on how wearable sensors – such as wrist or pendant-worn devices – can be used in clinical care. 

The research was funded by a UNSW Ageing Futures Institute Seed Fund and conducted in collaboration with co-authors Professor Kim Delbaere, Professor Ken Butcher, Professor Jacqui Close, Professor Peter Gonski, Professor Friedbert Kohler, Professor Nigel Lovell, and Dr Daniel Treacy.

Through input from 17 hospital-based healthcare professionals, researchers found broad agreement on the potential benefits of wearables in mobility assessment and fall risk management. 

The study highlighted that these devices can enhance fall risk assessment, track mobility patterns, and improve patient outcomes by providing real-time, objective data. 

Healthcare professionals also identified key considerations for implementation, including affordability, data accuracy, and ease of integration into existing healthcare systems.

Notably, the study found that while cost remains a potential barrier, technological literacy among patients and clinicians was not a major concern.

“Our findings show that wearable sensors have real potential to transform mobility assessment and fall prevention in healthcare settings. By equipping clinicians with objective, real-time data, these devices could significantly enhance the way we assess and support older people at risk of falls," states Dr Ambrens.

“As Australia’s population continues to age, this study offers a roadmap for integrating wearable technology into clinical practice – helping to improve outcomes for older people accessing healthcare.”

Read the full study, Wearable Technology in Mobility and Falls Health Care: Finding Consensus on Their Clinical Utility and Identifying a Roadmap to Actual Use, here.

Do Older Drivers Trust Advanced Driver-Assistance Systems?

February 24, 2025
A new study by researchers at the UNSW Ageing Futures Institute has examined how older Australian drivers perceive and trust Advanced Driver-Assistance Systems (ADAS).

With Australia’s ageing population and increasing numbers of older drivers, ADAS – such as lane-keeping assistance and automatic emergency braking – are being introduced to improve road safety. For these systems to be effective, drivers need to trust and accept them.

The study surveyed over 1,000 older drivers (average age 72) and found that while most participants had a positive attitude toward ADAS, trust in the systems was relatively low. Concerns included privacy, safety, and potential system failures. The research also validated the Partial Automation Acceptance Scale, a model that assesses attitudes, trust, and perceptions of risk related to ADAS. These findings suggest that acceptance and trust strongly influence whether older drivers will use these systems.

“Our study highlights the importance of ensuring that older drivers not only have access to ADAS but also understand and trust these technologies,” says lead author of the publication Dr Abigail Hansen, Associate Investigator at the UNSW Ageing Futures Institute.

“By addressing concerns around privacy and reliability, we can improve confidence in ADAS and enhance road safety for all. These findings underscore the need for targeted education and design improvements to enhance trust in ADAS, ultimately supporting older drivers to stay on the road safely for longer.”

Read the full study, Assessment of the application of technology acceptance measures to older drivers’ acceptance of advanced driver-assistance systemshere.

Creating a more accessible Australia

February 25, 2025
The Government has today announced a $17.1 million investment to work in partnership with states and territories to increase accessibility in community spaces across Australia through the new Commonwealth Accessible Australia initiative.

Accessible Australia builds on the Government’s Changing Places initiative to include funding for additional accessible infrastructure projects in national parks, beaches and play spaces nationwide.

The Federal Government will fund up to 100 per cent of eligible accessible infrastructure for inclusive national parks, beaches and portable Changing Places facilities.

This includes funding for all terrain or beach wheelchairs and accessible paths or mobi-matting.

It will also fund up to 50 per cent of build cost for fixed Changing Places facilities and inclusive play spaces to include features like liberty swings and sensory play platforms, with remaining build costs and ongoing maintenance to be met by state and territory governments.

Minister for Social Services and the National Disability Insurance Scheme, Amanda Rishworth, said Accessible Australia continues our Government’s strong focus on inclusion for people with disability across all aspects of our society and in every community.

“Changing Places is already building facilities in 39 communities across the country, providing the highest level of accessible bathrooms for people with complex needs, helping to remove the barriers some face in participating fully in their community,” Minister Rishworth said.

“Through Accessible Australia, we are significantly broadening the types of accessible infrastructure and amenities that will be built across Australia, providing access – for the first time for many – to national parks, beaches and play spaces.

“These new facilities will be in addition to Changing Places projects recently announced, as we bolster our efforts to increase inclusion and promote accessible tourism.”

The Australian Government will also provide funding to state and territory governments to help with the design, development and delivery of Accessible Australia projects.

“People with disability have the same rights to be included in our communities, to access the spaces we gather in, and to experience our beautiful natural environment.

“By working together, we can make Australia truly accessible for all,” Minister Rishworth said.

Bipartisan agreement on investment in Medicare acknowledges critical importance of general practice

February 24, 2025
The Australian Medical Association welcomes the Coalition’s commitment to match the government’s pledge for an additional $8.5 billion in funding for Medicare and general practice, but says further reforms are also needed.

AMA President Dr Danielle McMullen said the bipartisan recognition of the need for significant investment in general practice was welcome and follows years of campaigning by the AMA on the need to invest in primary care.

“The commitment from the Coalition to match the government’s $8.5 billion for general practice shows recognition across the major parties that funding for primary care has for too long been in decline, with patients increasingly unable to receive timely and affordable care where and when they need it,” Dr McMullen said.

“Our Modernise Medicare campaign has highlighted the neglect of Medicare, which included years of frozen and inadequate indexation by successive governments.

“While the announcements on the weekend were warmly welcomed, our Modernise Medicare campaign focused on the need for Medicare reform to ensure that patients with complex and chronic care needed were better supported”

Dr McMullen said more work was needed to ensure the complexities of the healthcare needs of today’s patients is reflected in the ways general practice is funded.

“The AMA has proposed major reforms to bring Medicare into the modern day, including through a new seven-tier general practice consultation item structure which will fund GPs to spend more time providing more care for patients. Both sides of politics have said they recognise the need for real Medicare reform, and we’d like to see them tackle it.”

Dr McMullen said the focus on workforce, highlighted in the government’s commitment to funding for training more GPs, was critical to ensure GPs in enough parts of the country to ensure patients are cared for.

“In our 2025–26 budget submission we highlighted the need for additional training places to address an impending and disastrous shortfall in GP numbers. We have also shown the necessity of an independent national health workforce planning agency to ensure Australia’s medical workforce is distributed where it’s needed.

“The commitments from both sides of politics on the week also responded to our calls for funding for additional training rotations in general practice for early career doctors and funding to improve and equalise employment conditions for GP doctors-in-training. This will make a significant difference to attracting more doctors into general practice, helping to improve accessibility.

“We stand ready to work with politicians from all parties to make sure Australia’s healthcare needs are understood and funded for now and into the future.”

Strengthening Medicare will provide crucial cost of living relief for older Australians

February 23, 2025
Making it cheaper for Australians to see a doctor by strengthening Medicare will help ease cost of living pressures facing many Australians, including older Australians, COTA Australia says.

The call comes in response to the Federal Government’s announcement today that it will invest $8.5 billion into Medicare to extend bulk-billing to all adults. The reform has now gained bi-partisan support.

COTA Australia – the leading advocacy organisation for older people – Chief Executive Officer, Patricia Sparrow said today’s announcement will come as welcome relief to Australians, including many older Australians, who have historically been ineligible for bulk-billing incentives.

“Anything that eases the cost of living pressures facing Australians is welcome,” Ms Sparrow said.

“The fact that both major parties have committed to ensuring the future of Medicare is incredibly important.

“For too long we’ve been in a situation where many Australians over the age of 50, and indeed Australians of all ages, have been forced to think twice about whether they can afford to go and see a doctor.“Whether or not you can see a doctor shouldn’t depend on how much money you have in your bank account.

“This is a common-sense reform that will hopefully improve the wellbeing of older Australians while also helping to ease some of the cost of living pressures people are facing.”

Ms Sparrow said the next step in Medicare reform needs to focus on the introduction of a Seniors Dental Benefit Scheme.

“We need to see both the Federal Government and the Opposition support the introduction of a Seniors Dental Benefit Scheme. Too many older Australians are missing out on crucial oral and dental care because they simply can’t afford it.

“Good oral health is vital for maintaining good overall health, and the risks of not getting the care people need can be incredibly serious – even life-threatening in some extreme cases.

“But the unfortunate reality is too many older people can’t afford the oral care they need. That needs to change and a Seniors Dental Benefit Scheme is crucial to ensuring that.”

“Making sure all Australians, including older Australians, get access to the quality, affordable health and dental care they need will keep them healthier for longer – decreasing the burden on our public health care system and freeing it up for those who need it most.

Your super fund is invested in private markets. What are they and why has ASIC raised concerns?

Mark MelatosUniversity of Sydney

If you are a member of a super fund, some of your long-term savings are probably invested in private markets.

Public markets are familiar to most of us – the stock market and government and corporate bond markets. Private markets include unlisted assets such as companies owned by private equity firms, infrastructure investments and private credit markets.

Corporate watchdog the Australian Securities and Investments Commission (ASIC), has today released a discussion paper that emphasises the growth in private capital, seemingly at the expense of public markets. While the number of listed companies and the value of initial public offerings has shrunk, private equity and infrastructure funds have boomed.

Should we be worried about this?

Public vs private markets

Public markets tend to be transparent, tightly regulated and liquid. Companies listed on the stock exchange publish their financial accounts, hold annual general meetings and their shares can be readily traded.

In contrast, private markets are lightly regulated. Private capital investments are more opaque, less liquid and, hence, more risky. But they can deliver much higher returns (or losses).

Often, obtaining capital from private sources makes sense. For example, entrepreneurs whose startup firms are short of revenue, profit and tangible assets are unlikely to be able to raise capital in public markets, or from banks. Instead, they turn to private equity firms for funding.

What are the concerns?

In its report, ASIC raises several concerns:

  • the shrinking of Australia’s public equity markets might hurt the economy

  • the rise of private markets may create new or amplified risks

  • the lack of transparency of private markets poses a challenge for investors and regulators.

Public markets play an important role connecting investors with companies seeking capital. The shrinking of public markets, therefore, has important economic implications. Will private markets be able to pick up the slack?

Notwithstanding the growth in private capital markets, they are still small compared to their public counterparts. The total capitalisation of the Australian Stock Exchange (ASX) is $3 trillion. Total private capital funds under management are only $150 billion.

The lack of disclosures in private capital markets might also create more and different risks for financial markets and the economy; risks that regulators may not understand, nor know how to anticipate or effectively mitigate.

The role of Australian super funds

ASIC is concerned about the implications for the superannuation industry of the growth of private capital markets and decline in public markets.

Australia’s superannuation assets now total $4.1 trillion, greater than the value of Australia’s GDP and more than the total value of all companies listed on the ASX. Anything that alters the playing field for Australian super has the potential to create outsized risk (or opportunity) for the Australian economy.

The ASIC report highlights the growing involvement of Australia’s superannuation funds in private markets. Australia’s two largest super funds, Australian Super and Australian Retirement Trust, each have about 20% of their total funds invested in private markets.

The fact is that Australia’s superannuation sector has outgrown Australian public markets. They cannot trade shares on the ASX without moving share prices significantly to their detriment. On the other hand, having super funds, which are highly regulated to protect member savings, investing in unregulated private capital markets is jarring, if not potentially risky.

Having said this, the size of Australia’s super funds means they can set the terms and price at which they invest. This power is most valuable in private deals; less so in public markets where a company’s stock price and its financial accounts are public knowledge.

Increasingly, super funds directly invest in infrastructure projects such as ports and airports rather than buy shares in listed infrastructure firms.

What’s behind the shift in markets?

The ASIC report points the finger at the usual culprits for the shift from public to private capital markets, including the regulatory burden on public companies and the rise of technology companies that prefer to tap private capital.

However, another problem is bedevilling policymakers everywhere: too much capital is chasing too few profitable investment opportunities. Companies have lots of cash on their books and nothing to spend it on.

Increasingly, such companies have resorted to share buybacks (reducing the number of their shares on issue) to reward investors in a tax-effective way. A lot of the shrinkage in public equity is due to share buybacks that in 2022 alone totalled US$1.3 trillion.

Why does all this matter?

The ASIC report is notable for what it does not say; nothing, for example, on its own chequered history of investigative and enforcement action.

The growing importance of opaque private markets matters more if regulators are asleep at the wheel. ASIC’s tendency for weak oversight and sclerotic enforcement can hardly have raised investor confidence in Australia’s public capital markets.

Its oversight of initial public offerings (IPOs) has also been questionable over a long period. How can ASIC be expected to adequately manage complex private capital market risks given its woeful performance managing simpler public market risks?

The apparent decline of public markets has been spooking even sophisticated private financial market players – including, most notably, Jamie Dimon, CEO of JP Morgan. If Dimon is concerned, then ASIC – and all of us – should probably also be concerned.The Conversation

Mark Melatos, Associate Professor of Economics, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Dutton hints he’ll sack 36,000 public servants. Voters deserve to know what services will be affected

John HawkinsUniversity of Canberra

Peter Dutton and his Coalition colleagues have dithered for several weeks on their plans for the Commonwealth public sector.

While being upfront that public service jobs would be targeted, they’ve made numerous contradictory statements about the number of public servants who would be sacked if the Coalition wins the coming election.

But Peter Dutton’s most recent comments confirm that he clearly wants to make significant cuts.

And it’s hard to see how the sackings wouldn’t erode important front line services that many Australians depend on for help and support.

36,000 jobs on the line

This week the opposition leader declared the Coalition would achieve A$24 billion in savings by reducing the size of the public service.

He was unequivocal. The money would be clawed back over four years and would more than cover the Coalition’s promised $9 billion injection into Medicare.

Dutton explicitly tied the $24 billion in savings to the 36,000 Commonwealth public servants who have been hired since the last election

Under the Labor Party, there are 36,000 additional public servants, that’s at a cost of $6 billion a year, or $24 billion over the forward estimates. This program totals $9 billion over that period. So, we’ve well and truly identified the savings.

While still not nominating a precise number of job cuts, it’s Peter Dutton’s clearest statement of intent to date. By “truly” identifying the savings, 36,000 jobs are on the line. And it accords with Dutton’s earlier comments that the extra workers are not providing value for money for Australian taxpayers.

(They have) not improved the lives of Australians one iota

While this sounds like he wants to dismiss them all, senior colleagues are more circumspect.

According to Nationals leader David Littleproud, the number of job cuts has not yet been decided. Shadow Public Service Minister Jane Hume further muddied the waters by referring to the cuts being by attrition, and excluding frontline services.

Frontline services

The public service head count has grown to 185,343, as of June 2024. So cutting 36,000 staff, or even a large proportion of that number, would be a very significant reduction.

The agencies that added the most public servants between June 2023 and June 2024 were the National Disability Insurance Agency (up 2,193), Defence (up 1,425), Health and Aged Care (up 1,173) and Services Australia (up 1,149).

Many of these extra staff would be providing invaluable front line services to clients and customer who are accessing essential support.

And some of the new public servants replaced more expensive outsourced workers. Finance Minister Katy Gallagher has claimed the Albanese government has saved $4 billion of taxpayers’ money by reducing spending on consultants and contractors.

Rather than the alleged explosion in the size of the bureaucracy, the growth in public service numbers has closely matched the increase in the population. Last year, they accounted for 1.36% of all employed persons, up by only a minuscule degree on the 1.35% in 2016.

Canberra bashing

According to Dutton, the 36,000 additional public servants hired under Labor all work in Canberra. It was not a slip of the tongue. The claim is also in the Liberal Party’s pre-election pamphlet.

But only 37% of the public service workforce is located in the national capital. Half are based in state capitals. A full quarter of those involved in service delivery work in regional Australia.

The Liberals clearly think they have nothing to lose among Canberra voters, given they have no members or senators from the Australian Capital Territory.

The coming election will no doubt tell us if Canberra bashing still resonates with voters elsewhere in the country. Dutton has clearly made the political judgement that it does.

Another night of the long knives?

A change of government often precipitates a clean out at the top of the public service.

When the Howard government was elected in 1996, no fewer than six departmental secretaries were sacked on the infamous night of the long knives. Then prime minister Tony Abbott dismissed four departmental chiefs in one fell swoop after taking office in 2013. He didn’t even consult his treasurer before dumping the head of Treasury.

This pattern of culling senior public servants represents a chilling risk to good policy development. Departmental secretaries concerned about losing their jobs may be reluctant to give the “frank and fearless advice” their positions demand.

Spending cuts after the election

Voters are entitled to know what the Coalition has planned for the public service before they cast their ballots.

The lack of detail on job losses is matched by a reluctance to outline spending cuts elsewhere. Dutton has ruled out an Abbott-style audit commission. He is prepared to cut “wasteful” spending, but won’t say if it may be necessary to also chop some worthwhile outlays to dampen inflationary pressures.

Dutton is adamant that any spending cuts by a government he leads will be determined after the election, not announced before it. This does nothing for democratic accountability. It does not give the electorate the chance to cast their votes on the basis of an alternative vision from the alternative government.

All Australians, not just public servants, deserve to know before polling day just how deep Dutton and the Coalition are really planning to cut.The Conversation

John Hawkins, Senior Lecturer, Canberra School of Politics, Economics and Society, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.


NSW records first death of person with Japanese encephalitis since 2022

February 25, 2025
NSW Health continues to urge the public to be vigilant and take precautions against mosquitoes as NSW records its first death of a person with Japanese encephalitis (JE) since May 2022.

A man aged in his 70s from northern Sydney died on 23 February in a Sydney hospital, where he had been receiving care for JE since early February.

It is likely the man acquired JE while holidaying in the Murrumbidgee region in January. This is the state’s third confirmed death from JE since the virus was first detected in NSW in 2022.

NSW Health expresses its sincere condolences to his loved ones.

Further, an additional case of JE has been identified in a woman in her 60s in northern NSW. She likely acquired the infection on her rural property in Tenterfield Shire and is receiving care in hospital.

NSW Health's Executive Director of Health Protection Dr Jeremy McAnulty said these developments are a reminder of the importance for people to take precautions against mosquitoes, including vaccination.

“These two cases of JE virus, one of which was infected while travelling for a holiday, shows it is very important all people take precautions against mosquitoes, not just those living in affected regions,” Dr McAnulty said.

“If you plan on travelling west of the Great Dividing Range, whether for work or holiday, and you plan to spend time outdoors, JE is a risk you must consider.

“Thankfully, there are simple steps you can take to avoid mosquitoes, and there is also a safe and effective vaccine available.”

JE vaccine is available through local general practitioners, Aboriginal health services and pharmacists to anyone who lives or routinely works in various inland LGAs or high-risk occupations.

People who meet the eligibility criteria should make an appointment and let the provider know it is for the JE vaccine, as they may require a few days' notice to order the vaccine.

JE virus is spread by mosquitoes and can infect animals and humans. The virus cannot be transmitted between humans and it cannot be caught by eating pork or other pig products.

There is no specific treatment for JE which, in some cases, can cause severe neurological illness with headache, convulsions, reduced consciousness and death.

The best thing people throughout the state can do to protect themselves and their families is to take steps to avoid mosquitoes.

Simple actions you can take include:
  • Applying repellent to exposed skin. Use repellents that contain DEET, picaridin, or oil of lemon eucalyptus. Check the label for reapplication times
  • Re-applying repellent regularly, particularly after swimming. Be sure to apply sunscreen first and then apply repellent
  • Wearing light, loose-fitting long-sleeve shirts, long pants and covered footwear. and socks
  • Avoiding going outdoors during peak mosquito times, especially dawn and dusk
  • Using insecticide sprays, vapour dispensing units and mosquito coils to repel mosquitoes (mosquito coils should only be used outdoors in well-ventilated areas)
  • Covering windows and doors with insect screens and checking there are no gaps
  • Removing items that may collect water such as old tyres and empty pots from around your home to reduce the places where mosquitoes can breed
  • Using repellents that are safe for children. Most skin repellents are safe for use on children aged three months and older. Always check the label for instructions
  • Protecting infants aged less than three months by using an infant carrier draped with mosquito netting, secured along the edges
  • While camping, use a tent that has fly screens to prevent mosquitoes entering or sleep under a mosquito net.
Information on eligibility for a free JE vaccine is available on Japanese encephalitis vaccination.

For further information on JE virus and ways to protect yourself visit Mosquito borne diseases.

NSW Government to put handbrake on hidden fees from parking apps

February 22, 2025
Motorists would no longer be stung by surprise surcharges when using pay parking apps under changes proposed by the Minns Labor Government.

Instead, local councils will be required to ensure all motorists pay only the signposted cost of parking.

Councils across NSW have been adopting ticketless parking systems but some drivers have complained about hidden charges that can add more than ten per cent to the total cost of parking, including reminder notifications that cost 34 cents each time they are sent.

The apps can help councils reduce the cost of administering parking and provide valuable data on demand in their area. Some apps also allow consumers to ‘top up’ parking payment without returning to their car.

Under current laws in NSW, the cost of administering a pay parking scheme must be borne by parking authorities, which includes local councils.

The NSW Government will consult with parking authorities to clarify that parking charges as signposted on the street or advertised must be the total cost paid without any additional surcharges for services by the apps.

Parking authorities will be given the chance to provide feedback into how the Pay Parking and Controlled Loading Zone Guidelines are updated and input into any challenges associated.

Last month, the NSW Government put on notice councils that run two-tiered beach car parking schemes that favour homeowners over renters that changes will also be made in that area.

Last year, the Government updated the parking Guidelines to require that street parking duration is of a minimum one hour when it is combined with permit holder exemptions.

Minister for Roads John Graham said:
“Councils need to read the signs - motorists are not happy about being slugged with hidden fees on top of the cost of parking.

“Many motorists have been surprised and annoyed to find out the friendly reminder that their parking is running out comes with its own sting in the tail of another 34 cents on top of the bill.

“The cost to park should be just as it says on the sign regardless of how you pay. It’s a simple concept that we want all councils to get onboard with and we are inviting their feedback to help shape improvements for the consumer.

“In general, ticketless parking is there to make payment easier and more convenient for users and reminders are a good thing to avoid the headache of a parking fine. Data on parking demand is also invaluable for making improvements at street level.”

Climate change could make more turtles female – but some are starting to adapt

A loggerhead turtle nesting. Mollie RickwoodCC BY-NC-ND
Mollie RickwoodUniversity of ExeterAnnette BroderickUniversity of Exeter, and Robin SnapeUniversity of Exeter

Rising global temperatures are a particularly acute threat for the world’s sea turtles. That’s because the temperature of a turtle’s nest controls the sex of their offspring.

Coming ashore onto a beach (often the beach from where they hatched), sea turtles use their flippers to carefully scoop out the sand and create flask-shaped nests in the sand in which they lay their eggs. There is no maternal care for these nests – their success depends solely on the environment. Hotter nests will produce more female hatchlings, but fewer babies will survive into adulthood once temperatures rise above a critical threshold.

Unless sea turtles find a way to counteract rising nest temperatures, climate change could produce an increasing number of females and fewer offspring – a frightening scenario for sea turtle biologists like us.

Fortunately, we were pleased to discover that green and loggerhead turtles that breed in North Cyprus are arriving earlier in the year to offset some of the impacts of rising incubation temperatures.

Since the early 1990s, the Society for the Protection of Turtles and our team at the University of Exeter have been working together to monitor and protect the green and loggerhead turtles that nest on the beaches of North Cyprus.

Every summer, a team of dedicated volunteers patrols nesting beaches to record every nest that has been laid. They place temperature data-loggers into these nests and tag every female they encounter. The result is a unique database of over 1,300 individual female turtles for whom the date, location and hatching success of her nests is known.

Using this database, we were able to show that, since 1992, green and loggerhead turtles in North Cyprus are nesting more than half a day earlier each year (greens 0.61 days, loggerheads 0.78 days). Before the mid 2000s, no turtles had been recorded nesting before June, but now we expect to see quite a few nests from the start of May.


Do the seasons feel increasingly weird to you? You’re not alone. Climate change is distorting nature’s calendar, causing plants to flower early and animals to emerge at the wrong time.

This article is part of a series, Wild Seasons, on how the seasons are changing – and what they may eventually look like.


If temperatures keep rising at current rates, we estimated that to maintain current sex ratios, the loggerhead turtles would need to keep nesting half a day earlier each year. To prevent a decrease in hatching rates, they’ll need to nest 0.7 days earlier each year.

This means that, for the time being, our loggerheads are shifting their nesting dates early enough to maintain current incubation temperatures and, therefore, sex ratios and hatching success. Good news.

Though our study in loggerheads offers cause for optimism, there is no guarantee that the females will continue to nest earlier and earlier each year. To try to understand if this might be the case, we wanted to understand whether temperature was the main factor driving this earlier nesting.

Temperature isn’t everything

For individual green turtles, we confirmed that the temperature is an important factor in causing them to nest earlier. In fact, we found that individual females will nest 6.47 days earlier for every degree celsius increase in sea temperature.

However, we also showed that how many times a female has bred before and the number of times she lays eggs in a breeding season explain an equal amount of the variation in her lay dates. These observations have important effects when we think about what is happening to the green turtle population as a whole.

As a result of conservation measures such as protecting the nests from predation and relocating nests laid too close to the high water line we have seen a big population increase in the green turtles at our study site in North Cyprus. Since 1992, numbers have grown from 55 nests per year to over 400.

Understanding the current trend of earlier nesting is complicated. But, for now, we can be assured that sea turtles are doing just enough to counteract the negative effects of climate change – which is fantastic news.

The turtles are doing their bit. Now, it is up to us to ensure the continued conservation and long-term monitoring of this charismatic ocean ambassador to give them the best chance of survival in our changing world.


Don’t have time to read about climate change as much as you’d like?
Get a weekly roundup in your inbox instead. Every Wednesday, The Conversation’s environment editor writes Imagine, a short email that goes a little deeper into just one climate issue. Join the 40,000+ readers who’ve subscribed so far.The Conversation


Mollie Rickwood, PhD Researcher, Marine Conservation, University of ExeterAnnette Broderick, Professor of Marine Conservation, University of Exeter, and Robin Snape, Associate Researcher, Centre for Ecology and Conservation, University of Exeter

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

It’s the biggest Egyptian tomb discovery in a century. Who was Thutmose II?

Wikimedia/The Conversation
Anna M. Kotarba-MorleyUniversity of Adelaide and Katarzyna KapiecPolish Academy of Sciences

Archaeologists in Egypt have made an exciting discovery: the tomb of Pharaoh Thutmose II, a ruler who has long been overshadowed by his famous wife and half-sister, Queen Hatshepsut.

The remarkable find is located in the Western Valley (a burial ground for queens rather than kings), near the complex of Deir el-Bahari, which houses the funerary temple of Hatshepsut. Both of us worked together as archaeologists at this spectacular site some 15 years ago.

Thutmose II’s tomb has been labelled the first, and biggest, discovery of a royal tomb since Tutankhamun’s tomb was found just over 100 years ago.

Despite being totally empty, it’s a crucial element in further understanding a transformative period in ancient Egyptian history.

Hatshepsut’s forgotten brother and husband

Thutmose II (also called Akheperenre) reigned in the first half of the 15th century BCE. This made him the fourth ruler of the 18th Egyptian Dynasty, which marked the beginning of the New Kingdom period.

Thutmose II likely ruled for a little over ten years, although some scholars believe his reign may have lasted only three years.

He was the son of a great pharaoh Thutmose I and his lesser wife, Mutnofret. He married his half-sister Queen Hatshepsut according to the royal custom, to solidify the rule and bloodline. Together they had a daughter named Nefrure.

Thutmose II’s mummy was discovered in 1881 but his original tomb was unknown until now. Wikimedia

Upon his death, his wife Hatshepsut became the sixth pharaoh of the 18th Dynasty – and arguably one of the most famous and successful female rulers of all time.

Military activities

As the successor of Thutmose I, Thutmose II continued his father’s military policy in the southern regions of Egypt.

According to preserved inscriptions, he ordered the brutal suppression of a rebellion against Egyptian rule in the land of Kush (in present-day north Sudan). As a result, a significant number of prisoners were brought to Egypt – possibly as part of a campaign.

But Thutmose II’s military campaigns were minor in comparison to the grand conquests of his predecessors and successors. Most historians believe he was a weak ruler and that Hatshepsut had a major role in governing the country, even long before his death. However, others contest this.

Thutmose II’s short reign left modest traces of building activity in Karnak, one of the largest religious centres in ancient Egypt, located in present-day Luxor.

The structure, of which only fragments survive, features a unique decoration depicting Thutmose II, Hatshepsut as his royal wife before she became a ruler, and their daughter Nefrure. The origins of the monument are uncertain. It’s possible Thutmose II started it and Hatshepsut finished it.

The monument was reconstructed by French researchers and can now be admired at the Open Air Museum in Karnak.

Karnak is one of the most important religious centres in Ancient Egypt. Katarzyna Kapiec

Other monuments of Thutmose II were found in the southern regions of Egypt, such as in Elephantine, in the city of Aswan, and in northern Sudan (likely connected to his military campaigns).

The condemnation of Hatshepsut’s memory

Interestingly, the name of Thutmose II became strongly associated with many of Hatshepsut’s constructions due to the actions of Thutmose III.

Regarded as one of the greatest warriors, military commanders and military strategists of all time, Thutmose III was the nephew and stepson of Hatshepsut, and co-ruled with her as a regent.

At the end of Thutmose III’s reign, some 20 years after Hatshepsut’s death, he carried out a large-scale campaign to remove or alter Hatshepsut’s names and images. Scholars call this “damnatio memoriae”, or condemnation of the memory.

An example of Hatshepsut’s ‘damnatio memoriae’ at Deir el-Bahari. Hatshepsut’s cartouches (left) were defaced, while Thutmose III’s (right) remained untouched. Wikimedia

This was likely due to concerns about securing the throne for his successor, Amenhotep II, by linking him to his male ancestors.

In many cases, Hatshepsut’s name was replaced with that of Thutmose II, making him the principal celebrant in temples built by Hatshepsut, such as in Deir el-Bahari.

View at the temple of Hatshepsut at Deir el-Bahari at the dawn. Katarzyna Kapiec

What does Thutmose II’s empty tomb tell us?

The newly discovered tomb reveals fresh details about the status of Thutmose II and his role in the sociopolitical structure of 15th century BCE Egypt – a period of territorial expansion, wealth and political intrigue. It also sheds light on the perception of his rule at the time.

Thutmose II has been painted as an ineffectual ruler. And the latest findings don’t contradict this.

Unlike his father Thutmose I, who expanded Egypt’s reign through military strength, or his stepson Thutmose III, who became one of the most famous Egyptian warrior-kings, his modest tomb suggests his legacy may not have been as widely celebrated as others in his dynasty.

The tomb’s location is also intriguing, as it is near the tombs of royal wives, including the cliff tomb of Hatshepsut, which was prepared for her when she was still a royal wife.

Thutmose II’s mummy was discovered in the so-called Royal Cache in Deir el-Bahari in 1881, alongside other royal mummies. Many royal mummies were relocated here for protection from flooding and during the uncertain times of the 21st Dynasty (circa 1077–950 BCE), some 400–500 years after Thutmose II’s original burial.

However, experts suspect Thutmose II’s tomb might have been emptied even earlier due to flooding from a waterfall above it.

The two of us speculate another tomb may have been built for him, and is still awaiting discovery.

An 1881 photograph of some of the coffins and mummies found in DB320, taken before the mummies were unwrapped. Wikimedia

Ultimately, Thutmose II’s reign remains shrouded in mystery due to the lack of available records. The search for his tomb – from Western Valley, through the Valley of the Kings, all the way to Deir el-Bahari – spanned centuries.

Despite its poorly preserved state, and its scarcity compared with Tutankhamun’s splendorous tomb, this discovery will expand our understanding of the overlooked figure of Thutmose II, and the role he played in setting up the reign of Hatshepsut – arguably the most successful of the four female pharaohs.

In fact, paving the way for the ascent of Hatshepsut may have been his greatest contribution.The Conversation

Anna M. Kotarba-Morley, Senior Lecturer in Museum and Curatorial Studies / Research Fellow, University of Adelaide and Katarzyna Kapiec, Institute of Mediterranean and Oriental Cultures, Assistant Professor, Polish Academy of Sciences

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How the Victorians started the modern health obsession with collagen

Dream79/Shutterstock
Michelle SpearUniversity of Bristol

Shimmering, wobbling and painstakingly prepared, jelly was a staple of elite Victorian dining tables. But beneath its elegant presentation lay a deeper significance – one that reveals much about the era’s understanding of bone, health and scientific progress.

By examining what jelly meant to the Victorians, we gain a fascinating insight into how food, science, and social status were entwined, and why our modern fascination with bone broth and collagen supplements is nothing new.

To the Victorians, food was not merely sustenance but spectacle, and few dishes displayed culinary prowess as effectively as jelly.

The ability to produce a flawless, quivering mould showed not only a cook’s technical skill but also a household’s refinement and affluence. A beautifully set table featuring jewel-toned jellies and savoury aspics signified sophistication, wealth and control over one’s domestic sphere.

Despite its seemingly effortless appearance, jelly was among the most labour-intensive dishes a Victorian cook could prepare. Before the advent of commercially available gelatin, creating the perfect jelly required hours of patient work, beginning with the extraction of gelatin from animal bones.

Beneath the quivering surface of a Victorian jelly lies a remarkable structural conversion that begins deep within bone.

The key to jelly is collagen, the most abundant protein in the body and a fundamental component of bone. Collagen provides bone with tensile strength and flexibility, working alongside hydroxyapatite, a crystalline form of calcium phosphate, which lends bone its rigidity.

In its natural state, collagen exists as a tightly wound triple-helix structure – a molecular arrangement that resists breakdown under normal conditions. However, through prolonged exposure to heat and water, this resilient protein undergoes hydrolysis, breaking apart into gelatin — a substance capable of setting liquids into the delicate, tremulous form so prized by the Victorians.

The process begins with the slow simmering of bones, a practice familiar to both culinary and medical traditions.

When bones are boiled in water over extended periods, heat disrupts the hydrogen bonds stabilising the collagen fibrils, causing them to unravel. This process, known as thermal denaturation, leads to the gradual breakdown of collagen’s highly ordered triple helix, transforming it into smaller, soluble protein fragments.

The longer the bones are boiled, the more collagen dissolves, releasing a rich, proteinaceous broth — the precursor to both gelatin and the contemporary trend of bone broth, a healthy soup made by boiling animal bones.

As hydrolysis progresses, collagen loses its fibrous structure, forming a loose network of protein chains that remain suspended in the liquid. Unlike intact collagen, which is rigid and insoluble, these denatured fragments possess the unique ability to trap water molecules within a gel matrix when cooled.

This transformation is the defining characteristic of gelatin: once heated, it dissolves readily into a liquid, but upon cooling, the reformation of weak intermolecular bonds allows it to set into a flexible, semi-solid state.

The final stages of gelatin extraction involve purification and clarification. Victorian kitchens employed traditional methods of refining the broth, often using egg whites to bind to impurities, which were then skimmed from the surface. Once sufficiently clarified, the liquid was left to cool, allowing the gelatin to set into its characteristic wobbly structure.

Unlike modern commercial gelatin, which undergoes industrial processing for uniformity and ease of use, Victorian gelatin varied in strength and purity depending on the bones used and the duration of boiling.

Some bones yielded a stronger gelatin than others, influencing both its setting properties and clarity. Calves’ feet were among the most prized sources, rich in collagen and capable of producing a firm, well-setting jelly.

In contrast, ox bones, though commonly used for broths, contained less collagen and required prolonged boiling to extract enough gelatin, often resulting in a weaker set.

Boiling time was critical in determining gelatin strength. A long, slow simmer (12–24 hours) was optimal. Shorter boiling times, often used for poultry or lighter broths (and lighter bones), resulted in weaker gelatin. However, overboiling (beyond 24–36 hours) risked breaking down the protein structure too much, preventing the gelatin from setting properly.

Collagen and health

The link between gelatin and bone health was not lost on Victorian society. Medical texts of the period frequently recommended gelatin-rich broths for invalids, children, and the elderly, reinforcing the belief that consuming gelatin could replenish and strengthen the body’s own systems.

This intuitive logic mirrors contemporary claims that bone broth supports joint health, digestion and skin elasticity. However, while broth provides collagen and minerals, scientific evidence for its direct functional benefits remains limited.

Collagen from food is broken down during digestion and does not directly restore cartilage or connective tissue. Despite its nutrient content, bone broth is no more beneficial than other protein sources, with its resurgence driven more by slow food and wellness trends than firm scientific backing.

In many ways, the gelatinous dishes that graced Victorian dining tables were as much a product of scientific curiosity as they were of culinary tradition. The transformation of bone into jelly encapsulated an era fascinated by both anatomy and domestic mastery, offering a rare but not exclusive intersection between the dinner table and the laboratory.The Conversation

Michelle Spear, Professor of Anatomy, University of Bristol

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

380-million-year-old fossil ‘fish’ from Scotland has been discovered in Australia

3D printouts of the Palaeospondylus australis holotype, enlarged x20. Carole Burrow
Gavin Charles YoungAustralian National University

Queensland is renowned for its fossils of Australia’s largest back-boned animals – dinosaurs, of course, like the Jurassic Rhoetosaurus, the Cretaceous Wintonotitan, and other large sauropods.

However, our new paper published in the journal National Science Review documents the smallest vertebrate fossil animal described so far from the state.

It’s a highly enigmatic tiny “fish” from a remote location close to the Northern Territory border. It lived in the shallow margins of a marine environment about 400 million years ago.

A scattering of its skeletal elements was preserved in a small limestone outcrop at the southern end of the Toomba Range, on the edge of the Simpson Desert.

Palaeospondylus, a fossil enigma

Our paper describes a new species of the genus Palaeospondylus, only the second known. Remarkably, for the last 135 years, Palaeospondylus has been represented by a single species that lived in northern Scotland, on the other side of the world from our discovery.

Unlike nearly all fossil fish of that age, Palaeospondylus was “naked”, lacking external dermal bones and scales. But it did have a mineralised internal skeleton.

It is the oldest example from the fossil record to show a segmented vertebral column (a sort of backbone), hence its name – Greek for “ancient vertebra”.

A flattened fossil on a beige rock face.
Palaeospondylus gunni specimen from Achanarras Quarry, northern Scotland. Carole Burrow

The type species Palaeospondylus gunni is known from thousands of fairly complete specimens, almost all from a single flagstone quarry.

When first described in 1890, it attracted a flurry of competing interpretations in Europe and North America. Which group of animals did it belong to?

Since its discovery, it has been assigned to almost all major jawless and jawed vertebrate groups. All specimens were compressed, making the skeletal elements “melt” together. Imagination has always played a great role in trying to identify its parts.

Even after the advent of 3D scanning, three recent studies reached different conclusions. According to those, Palaeospondylus was related either to chondrichthyans (sharks), or tetrapods (the land vertebrates). Or maybe it was a stem jawed vertebrate – branching separately from the base of the evolutionary tree for all vertebrates with jaws.

The Queensland Palaeospondylus

The story of discovery of our new Queensland species, Palaeospondylus australis, began in 1977.

In the 1960s, geologist Reg Sprigg had predicted oil and gas beneath the northern Simpson Desert. The Bureau of Mineral Resources was conducting seismic surveys and microfossil sampling across the Georgina Basin, immediately to the north.

Microfossils are tiny fossils that can only be studied with a microscope, but are crucial to determining the age of the rock. Numerous sedimentary rock samples are collected, preferably limestones, because these can be dissolved in acid. The insoluble microfossils can then be identified and studied in the acid residues.

In 1977, I collected bits of limestone from an obscure gully in the Cravens Peak Beds, the sandstone forming the main ridge of the Toomba Range. Surprisingly, these produced a rich collection of Devonian fish microfossils. This was the first evidence that an arm of the sea had extended into central Australia during the Early Devonian (about 400 million years ago).

A table with several boxes of rock samples, all labeled and laid out for analysis.
The 1977 Cravens Peak limestone samples before being processed in acid. Carole Burrow

In the 2000s, palaeontologist Carole Burrow at the Queensland Museum was investigating the internal structure of Devonian fish microfossils to assist in dating the rocks.

In the Cravens Peak samples, she noticed some distinctively shaped, tiny elements composed of an unusual honeycomb-like tissue. Carole hypothesised this could be a new species of Palaeospondylus, the only record from outside Scotland.

So, in 2006, we organised another field trip to this remote location.

A group of people standing on a red rocky outcrop looking across a flat horizon.
The 2006 field trip participants (Tim Senden, Tim Holland, Carole Burrow, John Long, Gavin Young) looking south from the end of the Toomba Range, the last rock outcrop for around 500 km across the Simpson Desert. Bruce Burrow

Returning to the Queensland Museum after our field trip, Carole’s colleague from the Netherlands, palaeontologist Jan den Blaauwen, sent her new images showing similar honeycomb-like structure in the Scottish Palaeospondylus gunni.

Carole was acid-etching the newly collected samples so she could extract any microfossils. Luckily, she noticed a slightly larger specimen appearing on the rock surface (although still tiny, only about 3.6 millimetres long). It was highly interesting because it seemed bilaterally symmetrical.

Could this be a braincase (the bony capsule inside the skull that encloses the brain)? She immediately stopped acid etching before it disintegrated into crumbs.

Palaeospondylus australis holotype, QMF 52826, ventral braincase exposed on the limestone surface by acid etching (left), and trimmed for CT scanning (right). Carole Burrow, Gavin Young

The first uncrushed braincase

At the Australian National University, our sample was carefully trimmed before CT scanning, revealing the first uncrushed braincase of Palaeospondylus known to science.

It’s now the holotype – defining type specimen – for our new species. And we have about 400 other elements with the same honeycomb structure which belong to it, too.

The unique uncrushed preservation of this braincase, revealed by CT scanning and 3D printing techniques, provides the first details of brain structure in this tiny animal from 400 million years ago.

These include the shape of the cranial cavity and inner ear canals, the position of the pituitary gland and optic nerve openings, and details of the carotid arteries and jugular veins for blood supply to the brain.

3D scan image, the first view of the upper braincase surface of Palaeospondylus, showing the large opening into the cranial cavity. Jing Lu/Insitute of Vertebrate Paleontology and Paleoanthropology, Beijing

More questions remain

It is noteworthy that our curiosity-driven research into ancient brain morphology can be traced back to economically driven geological surveys of nearly 50 years ago, conducted to support exploration for oil and gas across central Australia.

As with any research result, there are now new questions to be investigated. The honeycomb tissue seems unique to Palaeospondylus, but could be a precursor to calcified cartilage of some other groups, including modern sharks.

Alternatively, it could be an early evolutionary stage for the spongy tissue (endochondral bone) filling the inside of most bones in modern land vertebrates, including humans.

The unique holotype of our new species clearly shows that previous interpretations of the crushed Scottish material included many structures that were not part of the braincase.

We’ve also now demonstrated that a recent study in the leading science journal Nature, which proposed that Palaeospondylus was closely related to our tetrapod ancestors, relied on many erroneous interpretations of braincase structure.

Of one thing we can be sure – Palaeospondylus was not a stem tetrapod.


Acknowledgements: Carole Burrow from Queensland Museum contributed greatly to this article.The Conversation

Gavin Charles Young, Departmental Visitor, Materials Physics, Research School of Physics, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Falling vaccination rates put children at risk of preventable diseases. Governments need a new strategy to boost uptake

Yuri A/Shutterstock
Peter BreadonGrattan Institute and Wendy HuGrattan Institute

Child vaccination is one of the most cost-effective health interventions. It accounts for 40% of the global reduction in infant deaths since 1974 and has led to big health gains in Australia over the past two decades.

Australia has been a vaccination success story. Ten years after we begun mass vaccination against polio in 1956, it was virtually eliminated. Our child vaccination rates have been among the best in the world.

But after peaking in 2020, child vaccination in Australia is falling. Governments need to implement a comprehensive strategy to boost vaccine uptake, or risk exposing more children to potentially preventable infectious diseases.

Child vaccination has been a triumph

Thirty years ago, Australia’s childhood vaccination rates were dismal. Then, in 1997, governments introduced the National Immunisation Program to vaccinate children against diseases such as diphtheria, tetanus, and measles.

Measures to increase coverage included financial incentives for parents and doctors, a public awareness campaign, and collecting and sharing local data to encourage the least-vaccinated regions to catch up with the rest of the country.

What followed was a public health triumph. In 1995, only 52% of one-year-olds were fully immunised. By 2020, Australia had reached 95% coverage for one-year-olds and five-year-olds. At this level, it’s difficult even for highly infectious diseases, such as measles, to spread in the community, protecting both the vaccinated and unvaccinated.

Nurse talks to mother and toddler
By 2020, 95% of children were vaccinated. Drazen Zigic/Shutterstock

Gaps between regions and communities closed too. In 1999, the Northern Territory’s vaccination rate for one-year-olds was the lowest in the country, lagging the national average by six percentage points. By 2020, that gap had virtually disappeared.

The difference between vaccination rates for First Nations children and other children also narrowed considerably.

It made children healthier. The years of healthy life lost due to vaccine-preventable diseases for children aged four and younger fell by nearly 40% in the decade to 2015.

Some diseases have even been eliminated in Australia.

Our success is slipping away

But that success is at risk. Since 2020, the share of children who are fully vaccinated has fallen every year. For every child vaccine on the National Immunisation Schedule, protection was lower in 2024 than in 2020.

Gaps between parts of Australia are opening back up. Vaccination rates in the highest-coverage parts of Australia are largely stable, but they are falling quickly in areas with lower vaccination.

In 2018, there were only ten communities where more than 10% of one-year-old children were not fully vaccinated. Last year, that number ballooned to 50 communities. That leaves more areas vulnerable to disease and outbreaks.

While Noosa, the Gold Coast Hinterland and Richmond Valley (near Byron Bay) have persistently had some of the country’s lowest vaccination rates, areas such as Manjimup in Western Australia and Tasmania’s South East Coast have recorded big declines since 2018.

Missing out on vaccination isn’t just a problem for children.

One preprint study (which is yet to be peer-reviewed) suggests vaccination during pregnancy may also be declining.

Far too many older Australians are missing out on recommended vaccinations for flu, COVID, pneumococcal and shingles. Vaccination rates in aged care homes for flu and COVID are worryingly low.

What’s going wrong?

Australia isn’t alone. Since the pandemic, child vaccination rates have fallen in many high-income countries, including New Zealand, the United Kingdom and the United States.

Globally, in 2023, measles cases rose by 20%, and just this year, a measles outbreak in rural Texas has put at least 13 children in hospital.

Alarmingly, some regions in Australia have lower measles vaccination than that Texas county.

The timing of trends here and overseas suggests things shifted, or at least accelerated, during the pandemic. Vaccine hesitancy, fuelled by misinformation about COVID vaccines, is a growing threat.

This year, vaccine sceptic Robert F. Kennedy Jr was appointed to run the US health system, and Louisiana’s top health official has reportedly cancelled the promotion of mass vaccination.

In Australia, a recent survey found 6% of parents didn’t think vaccines were safe, and 5% believed they don’t work.

Those concerns are far more common among parents with children who are partially vaccinated or unvaccinated. Among the 2% of parents whose children are unvaccinated, almost half believe vaccines are not safe for their child, and four in ten believe vaccines didn’t work.

Other consequences of the pandemic were a spike in the cost of living, and a health system struggling to meet demand. More than one in ten parents said cost and difficulty getting an appointment were barriers to vaccinating their children.

There’s no single cause of sliding vaccination rates, so there’s no one solution. The best way to reverse these worrying trends is to work on all the key barriers at once – from a lack of awareness, to inconvenience, to lack of trust.

What governments should do

Governments should step up public health campaigns that counter misinformation, boost awareness of immunisation and its benefits, and communicate effectively to low-vaccination groups. The new Australian Centre for Disease Control should lead the charge.

Primary health networks, the regional bodies responsible for improving primary care, should share data on vaccination rates with GPs and pharmacies. These networks should also help make services more accessible to communities who are missing out, such as migrant groups and disadvantaged families.

State and local governments should do the same, sharing data and providing support to make maternal child health services and school-based vaccination programs accessible for all families.

A girl and clinician smile at each other
Governments can communicate better about the benefits of vaccination. Yuri A/Shutterstock

Governments should also be more ambitious about tackling the growing vaccine divides between different parts of the country. The relevant performance measure in the national vaccination agreement is weak. States must only increase five-year-old vaccination rates in four of the ten areas where it is lowest. That only covers a small fraction of low-vaccination areas, and only the final stage of child vaccination.

Australia needs to set tougher goals, and back them with funding.

Governments should fund tailored interventions in areas with the lowest rates of vaccination. Proven initiatives include training trusted community members as “community champions” to promote vaccinations, and pop-up clinics or home visits for free vaccinations.

At this time of year, childcare centres and schools are back in full swing. But every year, each new intake has less protection than the previous cohort. Governments are developing a new national vaccination strategy and must seize the opportunity to turn that trend around. If it commits to a bold national plan, Australia can get back to setting records for child vaccination.The Conversation

Peter Breadon, Program Director, Health and Aged Care, Grattan Institute and Wendy Hu, Associate, Health Program, Grattan Institute

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

There’s an outbreak of melioidosis in north Queensland. Here’s what to know about this deadly ‘mud bug’

moomin201/Shutterstock
Thomas JeffriesWestern Sydney University

Seven people have now died from melioidosis in flood-ravaged north Queensland this year.

Dozens of cases have been reported in the state in recent weeks, which experts have described as unprecedented.

So what is melioidosis, and why are we seeing a spike in cases now?

How do people get infected?

Melioidosis is caused by the bacterium Burkholderia pseudomallei, a bug which normally lives harmlessly in soil and freshwater. But it can be dangerous when it infects humans or animals.

B. pseudomallei – sometimes called the “mud bug” – enters the body through cuts or scratches. It can also be breathed in and enter the lungs via small airborne water droplets, or by drinking affected water.

Symptoms usually develop within one to four weeks after a person has been infected. The disease can cause either local infections, such as chronic skin ulcers, or, more commonly, a lung infection which can lead to pneumonia.

A petri dish with the bacteria _B. pseudomallei_.
Melioidosis is caused by the bacteria B. pseudomallei. Reddress/Shutterstock

Symptoms of the infection include fever, headache, trouble breathing, chest and muscle pain, confusion and seizures. In rare cases the disease can enter the bloodstream and cause septicaemia.

Treatment involves receiving intravenous antibiotics in hospital for several weeks followed by up to six months of oral antibiotics.

How common is it?

Diagnosis is usually conducted using a specialist bacterial culture. This is where a sample isolated from the patient is grown in a petri dish to identify the bacteria, which can take several days.

Globally, around 165,000 cases of melioidosis are reported annually, and 89,000 deaths. The majority of cases occur in southeast Asia, particularly Thailand.

Because similar symptoms can be caused by so many other diseases, melioidosis is commonly misidentified, meaning reported case numbers are probably far lower than the actual number of infections.

Also, cases often occur in remote communities and resource-poor settings, which can mean they’re less likely to be diagnosed.

The disease is thought to be endemic to northern Australia. It usually infects about 0.6 per 100,000 people annually in Queensland, which would be equivalent to around 30 people.

In the Northern Territory, around 17 people per 100,000 are infected annually, which would be equivalent to about 42 cases. However, this data is several years old.

In Australia, melioidosis is often treated before fatalities occur. The mortality rate has been estimated at less than 10%.

More people die from the disease in lower-resource countries with poorer diagnostic capabilities and hospital facilities. In Thailand the mortality rate is estimated to be around 40%.

Who is at risk?

Anyone can get melioidosis, but certain people are at higher risk. This includes people with diabetes, liver and kidney disease, cancer, or other conditions which might compromise the patient’s immune system.

In Australia, the disease is also significantly more common in First Nations people than among non-Indigenous Australians.

Once infected, people who are Indigenous, older or have chronic health conditions are at higher risk of poorer outcomes.

In the current outbreak in Queensland, at least three of the victims so far have been elderly.

What’s causing the current outbreak?

Recent cases in north Queensland have been identified mainly around Townsville and Cairns.

Cairns and Hinterland Hospital and Health Service has recorded at least 41 cases since January 1, while more than 20 cases have been reported in Townsville in February.

This is most likely related to increased rainfall and flooding in and around these areas.

B. pseudomallei lives in soil and mud, and comes to the surface during periods of high rainfall. So recent heavy rain and flooding in north Queensland has likely increased the risk of melioidosis.

In the Northern Territory, 28 cases have been reported since the start of the rainy season last October. However this is lower than recent seasons.

How can you protect yourself?

If you’re in an affected region, you can protect yourself by limiting exposure to mud and water, and using appropriate personal protective equipment such as gloves and boots if spending time in muddy areas. Cover any open wounds and wear a respirator if you’re working closely with water.

Monitor for symptoms and see a doctor if you feel unwell.

Several vaccines are in development for melioidosis, and experts have recently called for it to be recognised as a neglected tropical disease by the World Health Organization.

Particularly seeing as increasing extreme weather events due to climate change may make melioidosis more common, hopefully we’ll see an increase in research into and awareness of this disease in the years ahead.The Conversation

Thomas Jeffries, Senior Lecturer in Microbiology, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Studies of Parkinson’s disease have long overlooked Pacific populations – our work shows why that must change

Shutterstock/sfam_photo
Victor DieriksUniversity of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata Rau and Eden Paige YinUniversity of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata Rau

A form of Parkinson’s disease caused by mutations in a gene known as PINK1 has long been labelled rare. But our research shows it’s anything but – at least for some populations.

Our meta-analysis revealed that people in specific Polynesian communities have a much higher rate of PINK1-linked Parkinson’s than expected. This finding reshapes not only our understanding of who is most at risk, but also how soon symptoms may appear and what that might mean for treatment and testing.

Parkinson’s disease is often thought of as a single condition. In reality, it is better understood as a group of syndromes caused by different factors – genetic, environmental or a combination of both.

These varying causes lead to differences in disease patterns, progression and subsequent diagnosis. Recognising this distinction is crucial as it paves the way for targeted interventions and may even help prevent the disease altogether.

Why we focus on PINK1-linked Parkinson’s

We became interested in this gene after a 2021 study highlighted five people of Samoan and Tongan descent living in New Zealand who shared the same PINK1 mutation.

Previously, this mutation had been spotted only in a few more distant places –Malaysia, Guam and the Philippines. The fact it appeared in people from Samoan and Tongan backgrounds suggested a historical connection dating back to early Polynesian migrations.

One person in 1,300 West Polynesians carries this mutation. This is a frequency well above what scientists usually classify as rare (below one in 2,200). This discovery means we may be overlooking entire communities in Parkinson’s research if we continue to assume PINK1-linked cases are uncommon.

A world map shows the incidence of PINK1-linked Parkinson’s, adjusted for population.
This world map shows people in some Polynesian communities have a much higher rate of PINK1-linked Parkinson’s than the global population. Eden YinCC BY-SA

Traditional understanding says PINK1-linked Parkinson’s is both rare and typically strikes younger people, mostly in their 30s or 40s, if they inherit two faulty copies of the gene. In other words, it’s considered a recessive condition, needing two matching puzzle pieces before the disease can unfold.

Our work challenges this view. We show that even one defective PINK1 gene can cause Parkinson’s at an average age of 43, much earlier than the typical onset after 65. That’s a significant departure from the standard belief that only people with two defective gene copies are at risk.

Why this matters for people with the disease

It’s not just genetics that challenge long-held views. Historically, PINK1-linked Parkinson’s was thought to lack some of the classic features of the disease, such as toxic clumps of alpha-synuclein protein.

In typical Parkinson’s, alpha-synuclein builds up in the brain, forming sticky clumps known as Lewy bodies. Our results, contrary to prior beliefs, show that alpha-synuclein pathology is present in 87.5% of PINK1 cases. This finding opens up a promising new avenue for future treatment development.

The biggest concern is early onset. PINK1-linked Parkinson’s can begin as early as 11 years old, although a more common starting point is around the mid-30s. This early onset means living longer with the disease, which can profoundly affect education, work opportunities and family life.

Current treatments (such as levodopa, a precursor of dopamine) help manage symptoms, but they’re not designed to address the root cause. If we know someone has a PINK1 mutation, scientists and clinicians can explore therapies for specific genetic pathways, potentially delivering relief beyond symptom management.

Sex differences add a layer of complexity

In Parkinson’s, generally, men are at higher risk and tend to develop symptoms earlier. However, our findings suggest the opposite pattern for PINK1-linked cases. Particularly, women with two defective copies of the gene experience onset earlier than men.

This highlights the need to consider sex-related factors in Parkinson’s research. Overlooking them risks missing key elements of the disease.

Genetic testing could be a game-changer for PINK1-linked Parkinson’s. Because it often appears earlier, doctors may not recognise it immediately, especially if they are more familiar with the common, later-onset form of Parkinson’s.

Early genetic testing could lead to a faster, more accurate diagnosis, allowing treatment to begin when interventions are most effective. It would help families understand how the disease is inherited, enabling relatives to get tested.

In some cases, where appropriate and culturally acceptable, embryo screening may be considered to prevent the passing of the faulty gene.

Knowing you have a PINK1 mutation could also make finding the right treatment more efficient. Instead of a lengthy trial-and-error process with different medications, doctors could use emerging therapies designed to target the underlying PINK1 mutation rather than relying on general Parkinson’s treatments meant for the broader population.

Addressing research gaps

These findings underscore how crucial it is to include diverse populations in health research.

Many communities, such as those in Samoa, Tonga and other Pacific nations, have had little to no involvement in global Parkinson’s genetics studies. This has created gaps in knowledge and real-world consequences for people who may not receive timely or accurate diagnoses.

Researchers, funding bodies and policymakers must prioritise projects beyond the usual focus on European or industrialised countries to ensure research findings and treatments are relevant to all affected populations.

To better diagnose and treat Parkinson’s, we need a more inclusive approach. Recognising that PINK1-linked Parkinson’s is not as rare as previously thought – and that genetics, sex differences and cultural factors all play a role – allows us to improve care for everyone.

By expanding genetic testing, refining treatments and ensuring research reflects the full spectrum of Parkinson’s, we can move closer to more precise diagnoses, targeted therapies and better support systems for all.The Conversation

Victor Dieriks, Research Fellow in Health Sciences, University of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata Rau and Eden Paige Yin, PhD candidate in Health Sciences, University of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata Rau

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘It’s disgusting that they can get away with this’: here’s how eviction can affect tenants’ lives

Alan MorrisUniversity of Technology SydneyJoelle MooreThe University of QueenslandThi Thanh Mai GiangThe University of Queensland, and Yiran LiUniversity of Technology Sydney

For people relying on rental properties to keep a roof over their heads, there are few things more scary than the possibility of being evicted from their home.

The paucity of official statistics makes it difficult to know exactly how common evictions are. In 2019–20, 13.8% of private renters moved due to their lease being terminated or not renewed.

Besides a report or two, we know little about what happens when households face the possibility of being evicted, or are actually evicted.

Our research examines these consequences. Through in-depth interviews with 53 private tenants in New South Wales and Queensland, we found these experiences negatively shaped people’s lives well into the future. Here are four themes we identified.

1. Poor mental health

The ease with which landlords can terminate a tenant’s occupation evoked persistent anxiety for most of the interviewees (the interviews were conducted prior to the scrapping of no-grounds eviction in NSW, though such evictions are still allowed in other states and territories).

This was especially so for low-income tenants.

When interviewed, Susan* had recently been evicted from her apartment in Sydney. She was reliant on the Disability Support Pension for her income and lived in constant fear of being evicted and rendered homeless. She felt that having a disability and being from a non-English-speaking background made her precarity worse:

if you are somebody who comes from a non-English-speaking background, or you have a disability, or have no ability to enforce [the legislation], it’s on the tenant to take up the laws and to do something about it. And if you don’t have any of those abilities, you’re just going to be on your way to homelessness very, very soon […]

Grace lived by herself in Sydney. She had been given a no-grounds termination and was convinced it was linked to her landlord’s realisation that he could raise her rent considerably once she moved out. Her mental health was seriously affected by the eviction:

It was just like out of nowhere […] so that was horrific […] I’m still trying to settle into this new place with that trauma of being uprooted all of a sudden […] I think it’s probably going to affect me for a while and particularly in terms of just the power that real estates and landlords have to be able to do that.

2. Financial hardship

For many of the low-income tenants, the financial implications of being evicted were severe.

Sarah, her husband and their three children had been renting in Sydney since 2013. She estimated that since 2014, they had had to move at least six times. Most of the moves were not voluntary. She found the financial implications of evictions extremely distressing:

It’s the finances of it that’s the hardest […] when you get asked to move, you need to have a bond ready to go at the next place before you receive your bond back, which is a killer […]

She outlined all the expenses that came up each time she moved from one rental to another: professional cleaners, removalists and maintenance deducted from the bond.

After her rented accommodation was condemned, Brenda, a single mum of two children, had 48 hours to move from her rental property in regional Queensland. The move consumed her savings:

I had $200 after paying all my bills to move. So once I moved that was it. So I struggled the following week for everything. For food, […] getting my son to school, my daughter. It was just horrible.

3. Reluctance to complain

The knowledge that, at some point, the rent could be increased to an untenable level or they could be asked to vacate evoked silent compliance. This created a reluctance to complain or request basic maintenance.

Alice was convinced she was evicted after complaining about the poor condition of the rental property she, her son and grandson had been renting for eight years in regional NSW. Her grandson’s bedroom was unusable due to excessive mould.

However, her low income and the threat of eviction meant she held off complaining for an extended period:

[…] it’s just disgusting that they [landlords] can get away with this shit while charging top dollar, and […] that’s why I didn’t complain because I said to everybody, “as soon as I complain he’ll kick us out.” […] If I hadn’t complained, we’d still be there […]

Sarah described how, despite feeling harassed and stressed by her landlord’s unannounced and constant intrusions, she felt the family had to accept the situation and not protest:

I was petrified of being kicked out if we fought back and so […] we let him onto the property 16 times in 10 months and said nothing.

When they couldn’t take it any longer and complained, they were given notice, the landlord claiming he needed to do maintenance that required the property to be vacant.

4. Ending up in a worse home

A common consequence of eviction is having to move to unsuitable, lower-quality accommodation.

Jan and her partner were older renters and reliant on government benefits for their income. The flow-on effects of being evicted from their accommodation in Queensland, where they had been living for ten years, were devastating. Her partner attempted suicide, her relationship with him ended, and she was forced to live in a tent on a piece of land her mother had bought several years prior:

our rental accommodation was sold out from under us to developers and we had to be out with nowhere to go. We looked around for somewhere else to rent and there was absolutely nowhere we could afford at all.

It’s clear that eviction, or the threat thereof, can have devastating effects on people’s lives.

Although there has been some movement around improving the lot of private renters, such as legislation abolishing no-grounds eviction in some jurisdictions, and rent increases being allowed only once a year, a lot more needs to be done to ensure tenants have acceptable security of tenure.


*All names in this article have been changed to protect participants’ privacy.The Conversation

Alan Morris, Professor, Institute for Public Policy and Governance, University of Technology SydneyJoelle Moore, PhD Candidate, School of Social Science, The University of QueenslandThi Thanh Mai Giang, PhD Candidate, School of Social Sciences, The University of Queensland, and Yiran Li, Research Assistant, Institute of Public Policy and Governance, University of Technology Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Scientists have discovered a 3 billion-year-old beach buried on Mars

A view of the Utopia Planitia region on Mars which is believed to be the site of an ancient ocean. ESA/DLR/FU BerlinCC BY-SA
Aaron J. CavosieCurtin University

In the 1970s, images from the NASA Mariner 9 orbiter revealed water-sculpted surfaces on Mars. This settled the once-controversial question of whether water ever rippled over the red planet.

Since then, more and more evidence has emerged that water once played a large role on our planetary neighbour.

For example, Martian meteorites record evidence for water back to 4.5 billion years ago. On the young side of the timescale, impact craters formed over the past few years show the presence of ice under the surface today.

Today the hot topics focus on when water appeared, how much was there, and how long it lasted. Perhaps the most burning of all Mars water-related topics nowadays is: were there ever oceans?

A new study published in PNAS today has made quite a splash. The study involved a team of Chinese and American scientists led by Jianhui Li from Guangzhou University in China, and was based on work done by the China National Space Administration’s Mars rover Zhurong.

Data from Zhurong provide an unprecedented look into rocks buried near a proposed shoreline billions of years old. The researchers claim to have found beach deposits from an ancient Martian ocean.

A large body of water covering most of the northern portion of an orange planet.
An illustration of Mars 3.6 billion years ago, when an ocean may have covered nearly half the planet. The orange star (right) is the landing site of the Chinese rover Zhurong. The yellow star is the landing site of NASA’s Perseverance rover. Robert Citron/Southwest Research Institute/NASA

Blue water on a red planet

Rovers exploring Mars study many aspects of the planet, including the geology, soil and atmosphere. They’re often looking for any evidence of water. That’s in part because water is a vital factor for determining if Mars ever supported life.

Sedimentary rocks are often a particular focus of investigations, because they can contain evidence of water – and therefore life – on Mars.

For example, the NASA Perseverance rover is currently searching for life in a delta deposit. Deltas are triangular regions often found where rivers flow into larger bodies of water, depositing large amounts of sediment. Examples on Earth include the Mississippi delta in the United States and the Nile delta in Egypt.

The delta the Perseverance rover is exploring is located within the roughly 45km wide Jezero impact crater, believed to be the site of an ancient lake.

Zhurong had its sights set on a very different body of water – the vestiges of an ancient ocean located in the northern hemisphere of Mars.

Aerial, multicoloured map with large areas of red on the left hand side and a patch of dark blue near the right hand side.
Topography of Utopia Planitia. Lower parts of the surface are shown in blues and purples, while higher altitude regions show up in whites and reds, as indicated on the scale to the top right. ESA/DLR/FU Berlin

The god of fire

The Zhurong rover is named after a mythical god of fire.

It was launched by the Chinese National Space Administration in 2020 and was active on Mars from 2021 to 2022. Zhurong landed within Utopia Planitia, a vast expanse and the largest impact basin on Mars which stretches some 3,300km in diameter.

Zhurong is investigating an area near a series of ridges – described as paleoshorelines – that extend for thousands of kilometres across Mars. The paleoshorelines have previously been interpreted as the remnants of a global ocean that encircled the northern third of Mars.

However, there are differing views among scientists about this, and more observations are needed.

On Earth, the geologic record of oceans is distinctive. Modern oceans are only a few hundreds of millions of years old. Yet the global rock record is riddled with deposits made by many older oceans, some several billions of years old.

A diagram depicting an ocean lapping at the foreshore, forming several beach ridges.
This diagram shows how a series of beach deposits would have formed at the Zhurong landing site in the distant past on Mars. Hai Liu/Guangzhou University

What lies beneath

To determine if rocks in Utopia Planitia are consistent with having been deposited by an ocean, the rover collected data along a 1.3km measured line known as a transect at the margin of the basin. The transect was oriented perpendicular to the paleoshoreline. The goal was to work out what rock types are there, and what story they tell.

The Zhurong rover used a technique called ground penetrating radar, which probed down to 100 metres below the surface. The data revealed many characteristics of the buried rocks, including their orientation.

Rocks imaged along the transect contained many reflective layers that are visible by ground penetrating radar down to at least 30 metres. All the layers also dip shallowly into the basin, away from the paleoshoreline. This geometry exactly reflects how sediments are deposited into oceans on Earth.

The ground penetrating radar also measured how much the rocks are affected by an electrical field. The results showed the rocks are more likely to be sedimentary and are not volcanic flows, which can also form layers.

The study compared Zhurong data gathered from Utopia Planitia with ground penetrating radar data for different sedimentary environments on Earth.

The result of the comparison is clear – the rocks Zhurong imaged are a match for coastal sediments deposited along the margin of an ocean.

Zhurong found a beach.

A icy, rocky terrain beneath an orange sky.
Photograph of frosted terrain on Utopia Planitia, taken by the Viking 2 lander in 1979. NASA/JPL

A wet Mars

The Noachian period of Martian history, from 4.1 to 3.7 billion years ago, is the poster child for a wet Mars. There is abundant evidence from orbital images of valley networks and mineral maps that the surface of Noachian Mars had surface water.

However, there is less evidence for surface water during the Hesperian period, from 3.7 to 3 billion years ago. Stunning orbital images of large outflow channels in Hesperian land forms, including an area of canyons known as Kasei Valles, are believed to have formed from catastrophic releases of ground water, rather than standing water.

From this view, Mars appears to have cooled down and dried up by Hesperian time.

However, the Zhurong rover findings of coastal deposits formed in an ocean may indicate that surface water was stable on Mars longer than previously recognised. It may have lasted into the Late Hesperian period.

This may mean that habitable environments, around an ocean, extended to more recent times.The Conversation

Aaron J. Cavosie, Senior lecturer, School of Earth and Planetary Sciences, Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Calling 000 for help in an emergency doesn’t work in parts of Australia – but a new plan could change that

robert paul van beets/Shutterstock
Mark A GregoryRMIT University

People could soon make mobile calls and send SMS text messages from the remotest parts of Australia, under a new election promise from the federal Albanese government to overhaul the country’s mobile phone network.

The proposal would create a new universal outdoor mobile obligation for Australian mobile carriers such as Telstra, Optus and Vodafone. This obligation would require carriers to work with companies operating low Earth orbit satellites to provide access to mobile voice, SMS and the Triple Zero (000) service almost everywhere across Australia.

This world-first reform would be a major step forward for public safety – especially in regional and remote areas, where mobile coverage is currently poor to nonexistent. The Albanese government says that if it wins the upcoming election, it would implement the reform by late 2027.

However, implementing it will come with some technical challenges.

Satellites boost mobile access

Low Earth orbit satellites operate at an altitude of between 160km and 2,000km above the Earth’s surface. Examples include the roughly 7,000 Starlink satellites owned and operated by tech billionaire Elon Musk’s company, SpaceX, that are currently in orbit.

The new generation of these satellites incorporates a technology known as “direct to device”. This means they can directly connect with mobile phones. And it is this feature the Labor government’s new proposal seeks to utilise.

Specifically, the proposal aims to:

  • expand Triple Zero (000) access for Australians across the nation
  • expand outdoor voice and SMS coverage into existing mobile black spots
  • improve the availability of mobile signals during disasters and power outages.

The proposal adds to carriers’ existing obligations to provide fixed phone and internet services across Australia.

In a few years, low Earth orbit satellites should also be able to provide data using an enhanced direct to device technology. The government has said it will consider including data in the obligation when the opportunity arises.

Staying safer and better connected in the bush

The telecommunications industry has long worked towards a goal of providing universal outdoor mobile coverage in Australia. Labor’s new proposal provides the impetus for the industry to take this major step forward.

It would also provide the guidance necessary to ensure a consumer safety focus remains the fundamental rationale for telecommunications.

This policy would ensure everyone can connect to emergency services, friends and family during emergencies or natural disasters.

The benefits for people living and working in regional and remote areas would be considerable.

For example, truck drivers experiencing a breakdown in the outback would be able to call for assistance. And farmers working in the remote wheat belt regions of Western Australia could stay connected with other workers and their families.

Technical problems to solve

However, there are some technical problems the telecommunications industry will need to overcome to achieve universal outdoor mobile coverage.

Across the world, nations are rolling out mobile networks that use different radio frequencies. For the universal outdoor mobile obligation to be successful, the mobile carriers will need to work with satellite providers to ensure the spectrum bands used in Australia for the 4G, and in the future 5G, mobile networks will also work with satellites.

Mobile devices connect with the network when the user makes a phone call, sends an SMS text message or browses the internet.

When the mobile is connected to a low Earth orbit satellite, it’s important that it can tell apps to “shut up” and stop trying to connect to the network to transmit data. Otherwise the connected mobiles could cause congestion and limit service reliability and resilience.

There are mobile handsets that have this capability today. But the vast majority of older mobile handsets do not. A list of compatible mobile handsets would need to be compiled and made available, so that consumers can consider this information when purchasing a mobile.

To connect to a low Earth orbit satellite, it is anticipated a mobile will need to be used in a location where the sky can be seen directly. And initially at least, using a satellite-connected mobile inside a vehicle will require an external antenna.

A man holds his mobile phone to the sky, while a woman sits in a broken-down car on the side of a remote road.
The universal outdoor mobile obligation would enable drivers experiencing a breakdown in the outback to call for help. DedovStock/Shutterstock

A timely step forward

The government says the introduction of a universal outdoor mobile obligation would provide an opportunity to modernise and expand existing service obligations for mobile carriers. For both to be successful, there is also a need for minimum performance standards.

Providing mobile voice call and SMS text access across Australia is of little value if the service quality is poor, and fails during an emergency or natural disaster.

That being said, Labor’s proposal should gain bipartisan support. It is a timely step forward that will bring positive outcomes for all Australians, especially those living and working in regional and remote areas.The Conversation

Mark A Gregory, Associate Professor, School of Engineering, RMIT University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Multiple warnings and huge fines are not stopping super funds, insurers and banks overcharging customers

Jeannie Marie PatersonThe University of Melbourne

Last week the Federal Court fined Australia’s biggest superannuation company, AustralianSuper, A$27 million for overcharging customers.

The company had breached its legal obligations under the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 by failing to identify and merge the duplicate accounts of customers.

Given the individual errant fees were about $1.50 per duplicate account, the penalty might sound disproportionate to the wrongdoing.

But over the nine years the duplicate account and other fees were being charged, they collectively cost customers about $69 million.

As revealed in court, the double charging continued even though AustralianSuper’s employees and officers were aware that duplicate accounts were widespread.

Not a precedent

This court case was not the first. It follows a damning series of cases brought by the Australian Securities and Investments Commission (ASIC) against banks, insurers and super funds for overcharging.

In 2022, ASIC reported six of Australia’s largest financial services institutions had paid almost $4.4 billion in compensation to customers for overcharging or providing no service.

Financial penalties were also imposed. Westpac and associated entities were fined $40 million for charging $10.9 million to more than 11,800 dead customers.

ANZ was also hit with a $25 million penalty for failing to provide promised fee benefits to about 689,000 customer accounts over more than 20 years.

These cases were highlighted in the Royal Commission into Misconduct in the Banking, Superannuation and Financial Services Industry, which ran from December 2017 to February 2019. But even after that, new instances emerged.

In 2023, a review by ASIC resulted in general insurers repaying more than $815 million to more than 5.6 million customers for pricing failures since 1 January 2018“.

After this, ASIC imposed penalties on insurers IAG-subsidiaries and QBE. It was alleged they misled customers by promising them loyalty discounts to renew their home insurance policies. But the customers actually had their premiums raised by an amount similar in size to the discounts.

In 2024, ASIC announced the findings of an inquiry into excessively high fees for superannuation fund advice. The fees were not proportionate to the advice needs of members or the cost of advice.

More than 300 members across seven of the funds had advice fees of more than $15,000 deducted from their accounts.

Despite repeated calls by ASIC and the Australian Prudential Regulation Authority for the industry to improve its operations, a 2024 ASIC review found major banks left at least two million low-income customers in high-fee accounts. Those affected were refunded more than $28 million.

Why has this litany of pricing misconduct cases occurred?

Put in the best light, the failures represent a combination of poor legacy payment systems and increasingly complex modern payment structures and products.

Recognising these constraints, the Federal Court has stated that the obligation under the Corporations Act to ensure financial services are provided "efficiently, honestly and fairly” does not demand “absolute perfection”.

In other words, some mistakes are inevitable. But this does not relieve banks, insurers and superannuation funds from responsibility for payment errors.

The buck stops with the institutions

Charging more money than permitted or failing to pass on discounts will usually be a breach of the financial institution’s contract with its customers, and may also amount to misleading conduct.

It’s unlawful. Even if the individual amounts in question are small compared with the turnover of the financial institution, they are significant to the customers affected.

This means, as courts have consistently recognised, that financial institutions have a responsibility to put in place “systems and processes” to identify and correct payment errors. And they need to remediate affected customers promptly.

The ongoing misconduct suggests banks, insurers and superannuation trustees have ignored this.

Notably, in 2023, a court found NAB waited more than two years to correct overcharging, despite being aware of it.

And in 2025, the court was critical of AustralianSuper for taking years to address the problem of duplicate customer accounts even after it was identified.

The judge in the AustralianSuper case said:

nobody was responsible for ensuring compliance with legislative requirements and [this] resulted in no resources being dedicated to that task.

When no one takes responsibility

After the Royal Commission, ASIC was criticised for not being sufficiently rigorous in enforcing the law. It now appears ASIC is working through the fee practices of banks, insurers and super funds armed with considerable penalties.

ASIC’s clear aim is to ensure payment misconduct doesn’t pay, and enforcement by the regulator cannot be dismissed as a mere cost of doing business.

But is this enough? Customers may wait years for payment errors to be identified and redressed through enforcement by ASIC.

We need to rethink how these institutions understand their obligations to customers. Notably, the United Kingdom has introduced a “consumer duty”, which requires banks to promote customers’ interests and demonstrate how they are doing this.

Australia doesn’t have this obligation. But it may be worth learning from the UK. Banks, insurers and superannuation funds here should be obligated to show they are using processes that produce good ongoing outcomes for their customers.The Conversation

Jeannie Marie Paterson, Professor of Law, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week Four February 2025 (February 17-23)

Justine Dupont, Clement Roseyro, Nic Von Rupp Win Big at 2025 Nazaré Big Wave Challenge + Tyler Wright Wins Pipe Pro for Second time

Two-time World Champion Tyler Wright (AUS) at Pipeline. Credit: © WSL / Brent Bielmann

Justine Dupont, Clement Roseyro, Nic Von Rupp Win Big at TUDOR Nazaré Big Wave Challenge 

NAZARÉ, Portugal 
Tuesday, February 18, 2025

The World Surf League (WSL) TUDOR Nazaré Big Wave Challenge unfolded today in challenging 25-35 foot waves at the world-famous Praia do Norte in Nazaré, Portugal. The best big wave surfers had major performances with today's consistent conditions offering plenty of waves in every heat. The strong offshore wind made it more challenging, with competitors having to navigate huge bumps while traveling full speed down the massive faces. As the swell started to build throughout the afternoon, the teams took their performance to the next level by treating the crowds to a spectacular show of skill and commitment that Praia do Norte demands. 

Pictured: Clement Roseyro's (FRA) unique approach and major performances set him apart to earn the Men's Best Performance Award. Credit: © WSL /  Damien Poullenot

Clement Roseyro Wins Men’s Best Performance Award

Clement Roseyro (FRA) earned the Men’s Best Performance award with an individual score of 21.83 (out of a possible 30). Roseyro earned his highest score of the day in Heat 1 with a 7.50 (out of a possible 10). In his second appearance at the TUDOR Nazaré Big Wave Challenge, Roseyro was able to raise the bar with his unique approach to big wave surfing, and secure the Men’s Best Performance Award.

“I’m grateful to Nic von Rupp, we’re a really good team,” Roseyro said. “He taught me a lot, especially about driving the jet ski, and we push each other to perform.”

Former back-to-back Best Men’s Performance Award winner Lucas Chianca (BRA) fought hard for runner-up and TUDOR Nazaré Big Wave Challenge debutant Ben Larg (SCO) completed the men’s individual podium. Larg received a last-minute call-up after Garrett McNamara (HAW) was unable to compete, and joined teammate Andrew Cotton (GBR). Larg impressed with his snappy carves into the monstrous wave faces, and proved his skill in the tow-in discipline.

Pictured: Justine Dupont (FRA) showcases her best in Nazaré to secure the Women's Best Performance Award. Credit: © WSL /  Laurent Masurel 

Justine Dupont Dominates for Women’s Best Performance Award

Back in action after the birth of her first child, Justine Dupont (FRA) was on fire, drawing beautiful lines on the monstrous walls of Praia do Norte. The former winner looked comfortable in the conditions, staying busy and catching eight waves to build on her score. Dupont’s teammate Eric Rebiere (FRA) only managed to get one wave on the board, but it was enough for a solid start to the day.

“I used to have a lot of fear before,” Dupont said. “Now, after the baby, I’m more worried about my child, whether they are sleeping or eating. At least it takes my mind off the fear! We are a family team, we understand each other, and I’m really happy to be back here to perform. I’m a bit sad that I couldn’t put Eric into a good wave. It was a bit like riding a rodeo out there, really bumpy conditions.”

Justine Dupont wins Women's Best Performance Award. Credit: © WSL /  Damien Poullenot

The experience of Michelle des Bouillons (BRA) prevailed, with her partner Ian Cosenza (BRA) towing her into some of the biggest and cleanest waves of the day, earning her a runner-up finish. In her TUDOR Nazaré Big Wave Challenge debut, Laura Crane (GBR) showed her strong form to get two waves under her belt before towing Antonio Laureano (POR) into a few bombs.

Pictured: The Best Team Performance Winners Nic Von Rupp (POR) and Clement Roseyro (FRA) rewarded for their team performance charging the world-famous Praia do Norte in Nazaré. Credit: © WSL /  Laurent Masurel 

Nic Von Rupp and Clement Roseyro Win Best Team Performance Award 

Nic von Rupp (POR) and Clement Roseyro (FRA) took the lead from the get-go with a strong start in the first heat of the day. Von Rupp did exceptionally well to tow his partner into some of the biggest waves, but it was Roseyro’s good read of the waves, allowing him to open up and unleash massive carves into the critical part of the wave and riding out safely, that earned him the best score in the morning.

Von Rupp pushed the limits and admittedly, pushed a bit too hard, which saw him take a few heavy wipeouts in the first session. In the second session, Roseyro improved on his score with a great backup ride, pushing the team to the top of the leaderboard.

“I fell a lot in the first heat, it was really bumpy, but I pushed really hard,” Von Rupp reflected. “Last year we should’ve won, so this year we came back, training really hard. It’s been a long season, we’ve put in the time here. We’re stoked Clement got two good scores today to get on top of the leaderboard,” Von Rupp said.

Runner-ups Lucas Chianca (BRA) and Pedro Vianna (BRA), last year’s team winners put up a valiant effort to try to take the lead away from Von Rupp and Roseyro, but despite a strong showing in their second heat, they came up short. 

“It was a really hard day,” Vianna said. “The waves weren’t that big, and with the wind, it was really bumpy. It all comes down to choosing the best waves.”

Nic von Rupp (POR) and Clement Roseyro (FRA) win Best Team. Credit: WSL/Damien Poullenot

Replay All The Action From Nazaré. The TUDOR Nazaré Big Wave Challenge ran today and was broadcast LIVE on Red Bull TV, WorldSurfLeague.com, and the free WSL app.

The 2024/2025 TUDOR Nazaré Big Wave Challenge was proudly supported by TUDOR and Red Bull.

For more information, please visit WorldSurfLeague.com

Pictured: Justine Dupont (FRA) crowned winner at the TUDOR Nazaré Big Wave Challenge. Credit: © WSL / Damien Poullenot

The 2025  Nazaré Big Wave Challenge Lineup. Credit: © WSL / Damien Poullenot

Event site:  Nazaré Big Wave Challenge. Credit: © WSL / Damien Poullenot

Tyler Wright Wins 2025 Lexus Pipe Pro

Earlier this month Australian surfer Tyler Wright claimed her second Victory at Pipeline and Reclaimed the Yellow Leader’s Jersey.

The Pipeline or Pipe, is a surf reef break located in Hawaii, off Ehukai Beach Park in Pupukea on O'ahu's North Shore. Pipeline is known for huge waves that break in shallow water just above a sharp and cavernous reef, forming large, hollow, thick curls of water that surfers can tube ride. There are three reefs at Pipeline in progressively deeper water farther out to sea that activate according to the increasing size of approaching ocean swells. 

The 2025 Pipe Lineup. Credit: © WSL / Tony Heff

The World Surf League’s report states;

BANZAI PIPELINE, Oʻahu, Hawaiʻi, USA 

Saturday, February 8, 2025

Today, Tyler Wright (AUS) and Barron Mamiya (HAW) won the Lexus Pipe Pro Presented by YETI, the the first stop of the World Surf League (WSL) 2025 Championship Tour (CT). Wright claimed victory over Caitlin Simmers (USA), the defending winner and reigning World Champion, while the defending men’s winner, Mamiya, went back-to-back to take the win over 2023 runner-up Leonardo Fioravanti (ITA). 

Pictured: The winners of the 2025 Lexus Pipe Pro Presented by YETI Winners, two-time World Champion Tyler Wright (AUS) and back-to-back event winner Barron Mamiya (HAW). Credit: © WSL / Tony Heff

Clean four-to-six-foot swell was groomed by light offshore winds, favouring the longer barrels of Backdoor’s right, but opening up the occasional Pipeline bomb. Though more subdued than the previous day’s swell, the multiple heavy-hitting matches that played out across Finals Day were no less thrilling.

Featuring in her third Final at the North Shore of O`ahu’s most notorious wave, two-time World Champion Tyler Wright (AUS) claimed her 17th CT victory today. The Australian will now enter Stop No. 2 of the 2025 CT season wearing the Yellow Leader’s Jersey, as World No. 1. Previously winning at Pipeline over five-time World Champion and Olympic Gold Medallist Carissa Moore (HAW) after the event moved from Honolua Bay at the start of the 2021 season, Wright narrowly lost to Moore in the 2023 Final. But today, Wright defeated the reigning World Champion to stand atop the podium once again.

"This is such a special win,” Wright said. “I'm always a little bit scared to love surfing because I've been injured so many times. It's just one of those ones where this has been really nice. Last year, I was injured a lot more than I feel like people thought I was. So to come back and have, like, a really nice off season with my wife. It's just, it's so special."

Tyler Wright (AUS) being chaired after her win. Credit: © WSL / Tony Heff

Representing distinct generations, 30-year-old Wright and 19-year-old Simmers had previously shared a Final in the 2023 Rio Pro, where Simmers took the win. The roles were reversed today, but Simmers started with an early advantage after Wright aggressively paddled for a wave and handed the younger competitor priority. Both surfers missed out on high scores after taking big falls, and it was Wright who found the first score of note after the halfway mark of the heat. That barrel at Backdoor turned out to be the defining moment of the Final and earned Wright the win.

"I think I really tried to bring in a lot more joy, and that's what I really felt here.” Wright said. “It was so cool to have a Final with [Caitlin] Simmers out there. She's like the queen of Pipeline to me. And absolutely awesome seeing them have like a little Backdoor shootout in the semi between Molly [Picklum] and Simmers as well."

Throughout the day, Wright’s speedy forehand barrel technique proved to be unbeatable. The Australian previously overcame 2018 World Title runner-up Lakey Peterson (USA) in the Semifinals, the 16th head-to-head match-up for the two Tour veterans. In a rematch of the same round in 2023, Wright found a deep forehand barrel to earn an 8.67 (out of a possible 10) and the win. Wright also took a decisive Quarterfinal victory over 2023 World Champion Caroline Marks (USA). Similarly to the Final against Simmers, Marks and Wright started the match fighting hard for the first wave, with Marks gaining the advantage but unable to emerge from the fast-running Backdoor wall. Wright then stalled into a nice Backdoor section to take control of the heat, which she didn’t let up.

Simmers and Picklum Deliver Backdoor Shootout for the Ages

Simmers hands the Yellow Leader’s Jersey to Wright after holding onto it for many months. Her run on Finals Day included a Quarterfinal against her close friend and fellow Californian, Sawyer Lindblad (USA), and a rematch of the 2024 Final against Molly Picklum (AUS) that will be a guaranteed contender for heat of the year. 

The Semifinal between Simmers and Picklum immediately turned into a classic Backdoor shootout. Picklum won an aggressive fight for the opening ride, but Simmers picked off the very next wave and earned an 8.17. Picklum soon fired back with a driving barrel of her own to collect an 8.33 and the lead. Simmers, the reigning World Champion and defending event champion, responded by pumping and weaving through a long barrel before leaning into a huge grab-rail carve. The 9.50 awarded to Simmers boosted her two-wave heat total to 17.67 (out of a possible 20), both numbers the highest of the event for the women. Multiple impressive attempts from Picklum added to her scoreline, but Simmers held on to extend her unblemished record against the Australian.

Molly Picklum in the 2025 Pipe Pro. Credit: © WSL / Brent Bielmann

"I think watching this wave from inside and out, whether you're in the barrel or just watching it from the beach is one of the most beautiful things ever," Simmers said. "I kind of just wish the Final was a barrel shootout, but sometimes she sleeps and the ocean definitely slept during our heat. But Tyler [Wright] is a very smart competitor and she just got the waves. Congrats to her."

Back-to-Back Victories Place Mamiya Amongst Hawaiian Royalty

Barron Mamiya (HAW) joined Pipeline royalty when he became the sixth man to win the event back-to-back. Not since Andy Irons (HAW) did it for the second time in 2005 and 2006 has anyone been able to achieve the feat. Mamiya joins Irons and Rory Russell (HAW) as the only Hawaiians to do so. The 22-year-old has now claimed three CT wins, all earned at home on the North Shore.

"I really can't believe it happened again, I'm super grateful.” Mamiya said. “Winning it, you know, cool, right on, you did it, it's a big deal. But trying to do back-to-back, I feel like that cements you as one of the best ever out here. That was my goal going to this comp and I did it.”

Barron Mamiya in the 2025 Pipe Pro. Credit: © WSL / Brent Bielmann

After narrowly avoiding a buzzer-beater from Jake Marshall (USA) in the Quarterfinals, a driven Mamiya put on a clinic in the Semifinals to leave 2019 World Champion Italo Ferreira (BRA) needing a massive combination of scores to beat his near-perfect 18.90 heat total. Throughout every heat today, Mamiya’s two-wave totals were made up of one wave from Backdoor and one wave from Pipeline, and he put that playbook to use immediately in the Final against Leonardo Fioravanti (ITA).

Opening with an 8.17 at Pipe, Mamiya quickly earned two more scores at Backdoor, including a 9.80, all within the first six minutes of the 35 minute Final. Meanwhile, Fioravanti struggled to find a score until nearly 20 minutes into the match. But after he did, the Italian turned things around quickly. An 8.83 broke the huge combination he was under, before he found an exceptionally elongated Backdoor barrel to rival Mamiya’s high number. Needing a 9.11, Fioravanti received a 9.10, leaving the two locked on equal heat totals of 17.97. Mamiya’s higher score was the tie-breaker that sealed victory.

“Leo [Fioravanti], that was an insane Final,” Mamiya said. “For you to come back like that was crazy. But, you know, just yesterday and the heat with John [Florence]. Everything was just pretty crazy.”

Unbelievable Comeback Further Secures Fioravanti’s Status as Serious Pipe Contender

Once again proving himself as a serious Pipeline contender, Fioravanti placed runner-up for the second time after competing on his third Finals Day in a row at the venue. The 27-year-old posted six excellent scores over the course of the event, overcoming challenges from two determined Australian Rookies, George Pittar (AUS) and Joel Vaughan (AUS), along with his fellow 2017 Rookie, Ian Gouveia (BRA). Fioravanti’s comeback to equal Mamiya’s huge heat total was nothing short of heroic and the Italian leaves the North Shore of Hawai’i, where he lives part-time, holding his head high.

George Pittar  in 2025 Pipe Pro. Credit: © WSL / Tony Heff

"I'm proud of myself and I'm stoked to be here," Fioravanti said. "Barron [Mamiya] had me in combo, but I just thought, you know what, two Backdoor waves can do it. And needing a 9.11 and getting a 9.10, it's tough. It's tough, but I am very proud of myself for coming back and giving myself that chance. Congratulations to Barron. He is one of the greatest Pipe surfers of all time. I truly believe that."

Strong Season Start for Trio of Brazilian Goofyfooters

A battle of maneuvers turned into a Backdoor barrel-fest for Brazilian goofyfooters Italo Ferreira (BRA) and Miguel Pupo (BRA) in the first men’s Quarterfinal, a steady tit-for-tat that ended in victory for Ferreira. A final exchange saw Pupo extend his lead, leaving Ferreira in need of an 8.43. But Ferreira, the 2019 World Champion, took a more critical drop on a heavier wave to edge past his 8.43 requirement with an 8.50 and secure a Semifinal berth.

More than two decades ago, Fabio Gouveia (BRA) shared eight seasons on the CT with Kelly Slater (USA) and maintained a lead in heat wins over the 11-time World Champion. 

Kelly Slater in 2025 Pipe Pro. Credit: © WSL / Brent Bielmann

Today, Fabio’s son, Ian Gouveia (BRA), defeated Slater in their first head-to-head match-up to advance to his second Semifinal at Pipeline. It was only the second time that Slater has exited in the Quarterfinals at Pipeline out of 27 times making the round. The determining moment in the heat came when Slater was unable to emerge from an extremely long Backdoor barrel. Gouveia took the following wave and found the exit to collect an 8.00 and the jersey off Slater’s back as a gift.

"To be with Kelly [Slater] in a man-to-man heat in Pipeline, it's the biggest thing that I can ask for," Gouveia said. "It's unbelievable to have this opportunity."

For more information, please visit WorldSurfLeague.com.

Tyler Wright at Pipe in 2025 Pipe Pro. Credit: © WSL / Brent Bielmann

 

Botham Beach
By Barbara Davies

Botham Beach is a small reserve on the waterfront at Church Point commencing at Holmeport Marina and finishing at No 12 McCarrs Creek Road. It has approximately 300 m of beach front with a magnificent variety of native plants and superb examples of Endangered Pittwater Spotted Gums. It has been named after one of the local identities who made a significant contribution to the residents and locality of Church Point.

James Bernard Archer Botham was born in 1896 in Mosman to Matilda and James Botham who migrated to Australia from England and Wales. In 1931, James married Nora Johnson at St Matthews Church, Manly. They had three children, Jimmy, Laurel and Graham. James worked as a fisherman and in the 1950’s joined the PMG at Mona Vale. He died in 1974 aged 78.

The Bothams purchased their home at No 1 Brown’s Road, Church Point for under one hundred pounds about 1930. The number was later changed to No 12 McCarrs Creek Road. It is the first house on the eastern side of the creek to have deep water access and adjoins the reserve behind the houses at 2-10 McCarrs Creek Road.

Mr. Botham cleared and maintained the pathways and the reserve and saved “Sunnyside” from bush fires on one occasion. The owners presented him with an afternoon tea set for his efforts.

Mr. Botham fished commercially and hired boats from the two jetties adjoining his home. He used a converted 18’ skiff as his fishing boat and learnt how to make the nets from Greek fishermen at Mosman. The photograph (above left) shows him mending one of his haul nets on the beach – note the huge mangrove branch. There are still the remains of a small jetty on the beach.

He regularly hauled around the shores of McCarrs Creek and used to fish Narrabeen Lake before the bottom bridge was built. He also rowed to Scotland Island, Lovett and Towlers Bay for flathead, bream, whiting, flounder, garfish, catfish, snapper, jewies, king fish and buckets of mackerel for bait. His daughter, Laurel, one of the first licensed fisherwomen in NSW, helped her father from the age of five.

Above:  The photograph of the submarine cable being laid from the mainland to the western shores features the “Veroona” which was originally owned by the Nottings. It was built before the War and is still in use at Gosford as a mooring lighter.

The photographs below show Laurel and her father with McCarrs Creek in the background and Laurel sitting on a rock that is still on the beach and across the creek the houses of Teddy Steck’s parents, Mrs Jarvis’ and Vic Wills’ “Coonardoo”.

During WWII Mr. Botham and Laurel were issued with a permit to be on board any type of boat in Pittwater and the Hawkesbury River Waters.

The family was told that he provided free fish for lots of local families during the Depression. His catches were sold in the markets and locally to regular customers. During his fishing trips, he kept a check on the health of a few old men around the bays, including some who lived in caves.

The Botham children spent an idyllic childhood living in this unique location, spending their time after school fishing off Scotland Island and tramping barefoot through Ku-ring-gai Chase National Park.

Graham used to dive for huge mud oysters in McCarrs Creek and said that the oysters and scallops along the waterfront are coming back. A natural phenomenon known as “white death” seems to kill the scallops about every twenty years.
The family remembers the huge sharks that came into McCarrs Creek each July, one white pointer being as long as the 18’ fishing boat. Graham was not allowed to go into the water above his knees until he was twelve but later became a professional diver. In recent years he caught a bronze whaler about four
to five feet long off Scotland Island.

1,000 lb sharks were often seen off West Head and the fishermen used to blow them up using gelignite. There is a memorial outside the Bayview Hotel at Woy Woy to seven local fishermen who were never found after going shark fishing.

Above (top): Mrs. Botham was a fabulous cook and a committee member of Mona Vale Hospital, with Mrs. Overy. She was also a very keen gardener and is shown with the reserve in the background in the 1970’s. Note the beautiful spotted gums many of which were lost as a result of landslip in the area.

Words by Barbara Davies, 2011. Photographs kindly supplied by Botham descendants, 2011. 

NSW Training Awards: 2025 entries are now open

The Awards honour and reward the achievements of students, teachers, training organisations and employers.

Get recognised and share your vocational success for the NSW Training Awards 70th anniversary. Don't delay, enter today.

  • Individual Awards entries close 14 March 2025 
  • Organisation Award entries close 2 May 2025

To find out more and nominate, please visit; https://education.nsw.gov.au/skills-nsw/nsw-training-awards

Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship tour applications Now open

Up to 20 students from across NSW will be selected to participate in the annual Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship (PAMS) study tour that will visit historic sites relating to Australia’s military history in the Republic of Korea and Singapore in 2025.

Tour locations in the Republic of Korea include the site of the Battle of Kapyong, the Demilitarised Zone and the UN First Battle Memorial in the. In Singapore, the tour will take in sites such as the Kranji War Memorial, Changi Prison Chapel and Museum and the Fort Siloso and Surrender Chambers.

PAMS is a wonderful opportunity for high school history students to further develop their skills and understanding of Australians at war.

Zygmunt Gray from Finigan School of Distance Education in Queanbeyan was PAMS 2024 recipient that toured Japan, describing the trip as a unique opportunity to gain a better understanding of Australians in wartime.

Fellow PAMS 2024 tourist Celine Chandrasegaran from Saint Mary Mackillop College in Albury said the tour was a transformative experience and plans to continue to share the invaluable insights she gained.

The 2025 tour will take place in the Term 3 school holidays departing on Monday 29 September and returning to Sydney on Friday 10 October.

Eligible students can apply online by submitting a personal essay, a letter of recommendation from their school and a parent consent form.

Applications close on Sunday, 9 March 2025 at 8pm More information and details on how to apply is available at https://www.veterans.nsw.gov.au/education/premiers-anzac-memorial-scholarship/

Premier of NSW Chris Minns said:

“This year's Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship presents a unique opportunity to visit South Korea and Singapore.

“This is a chance to develop a greater appreciation of the story of our nation, along with the story of these nations. 

“I really encourage students to apply, to develop their understanding of military history and those who served.”

Minister for Veterans David Harris said:

“The PAMS study tour is a once in a lifetime opportunity for students across New South Wales, and I encourage all Year 10 and Year 11 history students to consider applying. 

“Scholarship recipients will explore Australia’s military history and visit locations that experienced the war’s impact first-hand. Australians fought abroad in Singapore and later became involved in the Korean War, only five years after the end of the Second World War.

“This tour is an opportunity for students to gain a deeper understanding of the service and sacrifice of our soldiers and the impacts war have had on countries around the world.”

Pave App: to support youth Get off vapes while tens of thousands of illegal products removed from community

The Minns Labor Government is today, Tuesday February 11 2025, launching a new evidence-based Pave app to help more young people quit vaping.

It comes as new data shows NSW Health’s youth-targeted campaign has supported or persuaded almost 40,000 young people in NSW to quit vaping.

Meanwhile, the latest seizure data suggests a severe disruption to product availability following the introduction of laws stopping vapes at the border.

New Pave app to support quitting vaping

The new Pave app being launched today will provide users with helpful tips, motivation, tracking tools, distractions for when cravings hit, as well as activities and information to navigate common barriers to quitting vaping.

It provides a daily check-in feature supporting users to reflect on their progress and a click-to-call function to connect with Quitline counsellors.

The app was developed by the Cancer Institute NSW, and designed together with young people who vape or had recently quit vaping.

Their experiences informed the content and user interface of the app.

It’s free and available to download on iOS and Android. Find out more about Pave here

Campaign supports or persuades 40,000 to quit

In January 2024, we launched the ‘Every vape is a hit to your health’ behaviour change campaign to reduce the health impact of vaping among 14 to 24 year olds in NSW – the campaign running across TV, public transport and social media.

The campaign connects young people to information about vaping and quit support, including telephone support through the Quitline, general practitioners and now digital apps such as Pave.

New research shows the campaign motivated 24,000 young people in NSW to quit vaping, and persuaded a further 15,000 to consider quitting.

Research also shows that 80 per cent of young Aboriginal people who vape felt motivated to try to quit after being exposed to the campaign.

The campaign is now entering a new phase which will highlight the health harms of vaping including nicotine addiction, lung damage, breathlessness, nicotine poisoning and burns from exploding vapes.

These health materials are available in Cantonese, Mandarin, Vietnamese, Nepali and Arabic, and can be accessed here.

Tens of thousands of illegal products removed from community

Between 1 October 2024 to 31 December 2024, over 47,000 vaping products were seized from 300 inspections.

This is compared to the same period the previous year, when just under 80,000 vaping products were seized from 238 inspections.

Despite the higher number of inspections, the lower number of products seized is likely the result of the disruption in product availability in the market following the introduction of the commonwealth vaping laws.

Health Minister Ryan Park said:

“I am very concerned about the prevalence of illegal vapes in our community.

“In particular, I’m worried about the impacts it will have on the community’s health, and ultimately, our health system, long into the future.

“This is a once-in-a-generation moment to prevent a ticking timebomb in public health.

“Our efforts against vaping cannot be solely about enforcement – we’ve got to persuade young people to take ownership of their health, as well as clean our streets of illegal products.

“I am encouraged by our efforts to create awareness among young people of the dangers of vaping, as well as to instil in them a desire to say no, or to quit.

“What I’m determined to see as minister is the requisite supports to help them do it.”

Chief Cancer Officer and CEO of Cancer Institute NSW Professor Tracey O’Brien AM stated:

“It’s encouraging to see that tens of thousands of young people are trying to quit vaping or thinking about doing so.

But vaping remains a significant public health issue and the new Pave app is another option we can provide to encourage young people to seek help and stay on track on their quit journey.

“Vaping can cause significant health harms and can be highly addictive.

“Like cigarettes, vapes are also full of harmful chemicals that have been known to cause cancer and there is growing evidence that young people who vape are more likely to take up smoking, which can significantly increase their cancer risk.”

“It’s important that people avoid taking up vaping or seek help to quit. While quitting can be hard, with support, taking that first step can be life changing.”

Former vaper Jillie Clarke said this week:

“The craziest thing about vaping is that I genuinely don’t believe anyone wants to be a vaper.

“I didn’t realise I was addicted until I tried to quit and I couldn’t.

“But quitting vaping is 100 per cent possible, it’s a journey but every step is progress and you can do it.

“Vaping had a noticeable impact on my breathing, it felt like my lungs were working harder than they used to and I ended up getting really sick with a lung infection.

“What was really scary for me was learning that the impacts of vaping go beyond respiratory issues, with other damage not being felt until it’s too late – I didn’t want to risk getting to that stage.”

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Anecdote

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Noun

1. a short amusing or interesting story about a real incident or person.2. an account regarded as unreliable or hearsay. 3. the depiction of a minor narrative incident in a painting.

From late 17th century: from French, or via modern Latin from Greek anekdota ‘things unpublished’, from an- ‘not’ + ekdotos, from ekdidōnai ‘publish’.

The best of both worlds? How Australia’s unique democracy evolved

The opening of the first parliament of the Commonwealth. State Library of Victoria
James WalterMonash University

We are social beings. So, within every group, decisions must be made about how to live together, preserving wellbeing and relations with others. Historically, those decisions were made by tribal leaders, or monarchs and their courts. Yet the ancient states of Greece, needing collective commitment to the battles in which they engaged, realised it would be generated by giving the people, the demos, a voice in what had to be done. From this issued the idea of “democracy”: a particular form of social organisation in which citizens participate in the decisions that affect them.

Small communities can practise direct democracy: people meet and decide, or vote, on decisions concerning them all. In large modern societies, it operates instead as representative democracy within nation-states: citizens elect representatives to act for them in a forum where collective policies are determined.

Every state has its own history. As a result, each has unique features that differentiate it from all the others. But what is common to liberal democracies, of which Australia is one, is that the idea of self-government has, since the 17th century, been linked with a commitment to the freedom of individuals within the state. Yet ideas of freedom differ, as closer attention to arguments within any state, and how states differ, reveals.

Australia: a settler society

Australia is a settler society, created by immigrants from Europe from 1788 onwards. They settled on a continent inhabited by one of the oldest civilisations on earth: 131 distinct language groups, girdling the entire continent, with means of land management, harbouring resources, and investment in ways of living and spiritual connection with their own country over millennia.

European settlers knew nothing of this. They saw First Nations people as primitive tribes, could not understand how they operated collectively, and failed to recognise the Indigenous economy.

It seemed incomprehensible to European settlers that relationships in Indigenous communities were governed by knowledge linked with ancestors, kinship obligations and country, passed down by elders from generation to generation and disseminated through shared stories, ritual and practical action. With ideas of farming, resource exploitation, and development alien to the light touch of Indigenous people, settlers took over this large “undeveloped” continent, unaware of how it had been shaped by Indigenous practices and possession.

The result, inevitably, was conflict. Attempts on each side to come to terms were confounded by incommensurate ways of understanding the world. Frontier wars ensued. It was an uneven battle, propelled by increasing numbers of settlers. Dispossession and massacres of Indigenous peoples stretched right through to the 20th century.

A group of colonial soldiers stand on grass looking at a seated Indigenous people
Australia is a settler society. National Library of Australia

Settler democracy

The settler state was established at the high point of “the age of revolution”, when battles against monarchical control (the American Revolution) and hereditary elites (the French revolution) spurred the adoption of this new form of democracy: government “of the people, by the people and for the people” on one hand, and “liberty, equality and fraternity” on the other.

Yet the first European settlements were convict colonies, repositories for the criminal, marginal and unwanted from Britain. Among them were convicts who had been transported because of their advocacy of the new politics, readers of Thomas Paine’s Rights of Man. In conjunction, as the source of essential labour in the new colonies, convicts had leverage to assume roles and demand rights never granted to their ilk in Britain. Their persistent demands seeded colonial democracy.

Since liberal precepts carried here by successive waves of settlers faced none of the barriers of an established ruling class, such ideas flourished in Australia. As more radical exponents of social liberalism arrived, such as the Chartists who had fought for working class political and civil rights, they played a leading role in events such as the Eureka rebellion, the emergence of mass union movements, and the foundation of the Australian Labor Party (ALP).

A pencil sketch of a man
William Cuffay was a major player in Australia’s chartism movement. National Portrait Gallery/Wikimedia Commons

By the late 19th century, “new liberals” were arguing that freedom could not be assured unless the state intervened to solve problems – poverty, unemployment, lack of education – that disadvantaged individuals could not solve for themselves.

In Australia, some among the emerging middle class (small businessmen, entrepreneurs, journalists and professionals), seized on such views in forming loose reformist alliances with the labour movement to forestall the conservative inclinations of the big landholders who dominated colonial upper houses. The result: Australian colonies took the lead in developing progressive democratic measures: allowing all men to vote, payment of parliamentarians, the secret ballot and in South Australia and Western Australia votes for women.

A ‘talent for bureaucracy’

Australia was a striking incarnation of modern social organisation. It was historically perhaps the most developed instance of the harnessing of democracy with bureaucracy, for two reasons.

First, its settlement and development were documented in detail. Instructions to and reports from colonial governors, the manifests of convict ships, the documentation of immigrant arrivals — all were resources for those managing colonial development.

Second, as population increased, colonial governments needed to raise loans from the mother country to develop the infrastructure necessary for private enterprise to flourish. Public officials became the essential intermediaries in what Noel Butlin called “colonial socialism”. Alan Davies saw these historical contingencies as the origin of an Australian “talent for bureaucracy”.

The influence of these progressive ideas and a “colonial socialism” encouraged in Australia a particular form of liberal polity, one less fervently individualistic than the United States. The dark side of settler liberalism was that its commitment to individualistic liberal freedom rendered it blind to collective forms of social relations, and to the consequences of colonisation for First Nations.

The federal experiment

Negotiation between the colonies in the late 19th century aimed to unify the disparate colonial settlements. It was driven both by lofty ambitions — to create a nation with a common purpose — and by a series of anxieties. A capacity for defence against the other imperial powers making claims in the Pacific; concern to maintain racial purity and protect British civilisation in the antipodes; and worries about promoting economic recovery given class fragmentation following a depression and strikes in the 1890s.

It was brought about through a series of conventions largely comprising colonial politicians. Together they hammered out a constitutional contract to satisfy their interests, driven by lawyers, carefully designating which powers were to be transferred to the Commonwealth, and which were retained by the states. It was, despite the absence of a formal bureaucracy, a profoundly bureaucratic process.

The compact at which they arrived retained British parliamentarianism. It mandated the formation of majority government with fiscal power in the House of Representatives, but borrowed from the United States in establishing a states house of review – the Senate.

A large blackboard with a series of numbers being tallied up.
The results of the 1899 referendum show it was successful, meaning Australia could become a federation. National Library of Australia

The American adoption of a Bill of Rights was proposed but not accepted: British parliamentarism was thought sufficient to ensure the rights of “freeborn Britons”. Liberal preoccupation with checks and balances on government was evident in the constitution of the Senate, in which all states (formerly colonies) have equal representation regardless of population size. More restrictive still was the stipulation that referendums to change the constitution required the support of a majority of people in a majority of states to succeed.

The new federal parliament moved quickly to safeguard “White Australia” with the Immigration Restriction Act 1901. This set a dictation test (in European languages) for immigrants designed to exclude those of non-European origin. There was contention over women’s suffrage, but women had the vote in South Australia and a constitutional clause stipulated that rights already granted in any colony should be accepted federally. Women’s voting rights were recognised in the Commonwealth Franchise Act 1902. Not so the rights of Indigenous peoples, however, who were deemed not to meet the standard of “civilisation” necessary to vote.

Bureaucracy and democracy

The major battles in the first decade of federation were between developing anti-Labor parties representing two faces of liberalism: those convinced freedom was sustained by state intervention when necessary (Protectionists) and those believing freedom was secured by limiting the ability of others to interfere in individual choice (the Free Trade Party).

Initially the baton passed rapidly to and fro between Protectionist and Free-Trade governments. But adroit management by the Protectionist leader, Alfred Deakin, facilitated the election (with Protectionist support) of the first (albeit short-lived) national Labor government in the world. It also ensured that Protectionists’ ambitions governed “the Australian settlement”: tariff protection, White Australia, wage arbitration and targeted welfare overseen by an educated governing class.

The social liberalism of the Australian settlement encouraged further electoral innovation. Preferential voting was introduced in 1918. Compulsory voting was enacted federally in 1924, having been introduced in Queensland in 1915. Other states soon followed. This was foundational to the citizens’ bargain: the state as responsible for collective wellbeing, with citizens obliged to engage seriously with democratic government. It necessitated voter registration, and electoral rolls, administered under state and federal franchise acts. Eventually national electoral rolls were developed, administered within Commonwealth departments, then in an Australian Electoral Office (1973) and ultimately by an independent statutory authority, the Australian Electoral Commission (1984).

A woman and her son put a vote in a ballot box at a remote polling station in the 1960s.
Compulsory voting for federal elections means polling places are set up far and wide. National Archives of Australia

It was not politicians or political agencies but Commonwealth public servants charged with achieving voting equivalence who initially determined electoral boundaries. Later the AEC took that role, along with the supervision of elections from the 1980s. This forestalled the gerrymandering that cruelled equality of representation in other jurisdictions.

Many of these measures were unique to Australia. And the heroes in their achievement? Bureaucrats. The interaction of progressive politicians, committed public servants and community activists was also integral to the transition from “White Australia” race-based “homogeneity” to civic identity and multiculturalism in the 1960s and 1970s; the introduction of voting rights for First Nations at state and then federal level and the 1967 referendum that recognised them as citizens; Indigenous land rights; and the incremental elaboration of health insurance, educational accessibility and civic entitlements. It was not perfect, and much remains to be done, especially in addressing the damage, trauma and continuing marginalisation inflicted on Indigenous communities by settler liberalism.

Democracy in question?

In the 1980s, governments of both stripes adopted an international current of thought driven by economists and technocrats — neoliberal economics — as a counter to “stagflation”: high inflation, low growth and high unemployment. What now was needed was more efficiency, to be achieved by opening markets to competition and rolling back state action: social democracy had failed. The state’s role should be limited to oversight, “steering, not rowing”, with provision of infrastructure and services to be outsourced to private enterprise.

For 30 years, it produced the prosperity reformers had promised. But the rewards were distributed unevenly, with riches accruing to an ever-smaller proportion of the population. Individual precarity was by imputation a failure of effort rather than of market failure, structural disadvantage or the “creative destruction” expected of unbridled capitalism.

As one prime minister argued, “if you have a go, you’ll get a go”. It took no account of the communities destroyed as their jobs vanished and new enterprise failed to arrive.

Surveys suggest the public was never persuaded, and the democratic impact was apparent. Party disengagement ensued. The major parties of the 20th century, in which the need to reach agreement among many voices ensured that extreme positions were rare, were reduced to rumps of committed partisans whose views were typically not representative of the people they served.

Partisan polarisation made achieving policy consensus increasingly difficult. The public service was hollowed out as functions were outsourced, consultants were brought in, organisational knowledge was lost, and governments repeatedly legislated to induce compliance rather than frank and fearless advice.

The result was policy stasis and startling national scandals when the damage of ingenious schemes by consultants to reduce entitlements and shift risk from service providers to their clients was revealed.

High levels of trust in politicians and public officials plummeted, and with this belief in liberal democracy itself was eroded. When a COVID pandemic induced governments to act, invest and cooperate in public provision, and in 2022 a Labor government was elected promising to be responsible, consultative and collaborative, polls bounced back.

Was the Australian tradition of social democracy resurgent? Support for change was soon shown to be tenuous. The bitter campaign against the Albanese government’s initiation of a referendum giving First Nations a constitutional “Voice” on policies affecting them showed how easily the politics of partisan division, race, resentment and negative campaigning can be mobilised to defeat democracy’s promise of fair life chances.


This is an edited extract from How Australian Democracy Works, a new collection of essays from The Conversation on all aspects of the country’s political landscape.The Conversation

James Walter, Emeritus Professor of Political Science, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Unrest in Bangladesh is revealing the bias at the heart of Google’s search engine

Abdul AzizMonash University

Google’s search engine handles the vast majority of online searches worldwide. By one estimate, it fields 6.3 million queries every second.

Because of the search engine’s enormous scale, its outputs can have outsized effects. And, while Google’s search results are shaped by ostensibly neutral rules and processes, research has shown these algorithms often produce biased results.

This problem of algorithmic bias is again being highlighted by recent escalating tensions between India and Bangladesh and cases of violence against Bangladeshi citizens in India and violence against Hindus in Bangladesh. A pro-Indian misinformation and disinformation campaign is exploiting this algorithmic bias to further its agenda – an agenda that has been described as Islamophobic and alarmist.

This kind of misinformation has been implicated in several riots and violent incidents in Bangladesh.

All of this serves as an important reminder of the power Google’s search engine has in shaping public perceptions of any event – and its vulnerability to being exploited. It’s also an important reminder to anyone who uses Google’s search engine to engage critically with the results it dishes up, rather than accepting them at face value.

What is algorithmic bias?

The algorithms that power Google’s search engine are trained on massive amounts of data. This data is gathered by computer bots which crawl billions of pages on the Internet and automatically analyse their content and quality. This information is stored in a large database, which Google’s search engine relies on to serve up relevant results whenever it receives a query.

But this process doesn’t capture every website on the Internet. It is also governed by predetermined rules about what is high quality and what is low quality, and reflects existing biases in data. For example, even though only 16% of the world’s population speaks English, it accounts for 55% of all written content online.

This means the reality of life on the ground in non-English speaking countries is often not reflected in Google search results. This is especially true for those countries located in the Global South.

This lack of representation perpetuates real-world biases. It can also hinder a nuanced public understanding of global issues.

What’s happening between Bangladesh and India?

Relations between Muslim-majority Bangladesh and neighbouring India, which is currently led by the Hindu nationalist BJP government, have deteriorated recently.

In August last year, youth-led anti-government protests erupted in Bangladesh.

These protests resulted in the downfall of prime minister Sheikh Hasina’s long-lasting autocratic regime, which had been supported by the Indian government.

An interim government filled the void. But certain Indian media outlets have leveraged sensitive issues such as Hindu minority rights to undermine its legitimacy.

In November, Bangladeshi authorities arrested Hindu leader Chinmoy Krishna Das on sedition charges over allegations he had disrespected the Bangladeshi flag. This triggered violent clashes between his supporters and police. These clashes resulted in the death of a Muslim lawyer.

Hindu activists also attacked a Bangladeshi consulate in India.

There have also been verified instances of mob violence against Hindus in Bangladesh. However, the Bangladeshi government claims these incidents are politically motivated rather than communal attacks.

The unrest intensified earlier this month, with thousands of protestors destroying the family home of deposed prime minister Sheikh Hasina in the Bangladeshi capital, Dhaka.

Boosting a disinformation campaign

A disinformation campaign based in India has exaggerated some cases of religious violence against Hindus in Bangladesh.

This campaign has been boosted by Google’s algorithmic bias.

For example, an analysis by the Tech Global Institute of Google search results about Chinmoy Krishna Das’s arrest between November 25 and December 20 last year found a “consistent pattern of bias”.

Specifically, Indian news outlets – including Hindu ultranationalist news outlets – “disproportionately” dominated the top search results. This overshadowed

factual reporting from credible Bangladeshi media outlets […] despite the search originating from within Bangladesh, the country where the incident originally occurred.

This bias was also evident in search queries coming from overseas. For example, roughly 90% of the top results about Chinmoy Krishna Das were from Indian outlets when searched from Australia and the United States. Bangladeshi news outlets featured on the thirteenth and fourteenth pages of results.

Indian news outlets – unlike their Bangladeshi counterparts – produce a substantial amount of content in English. They also employ more advanced search engine optimisation – or SEO – techniques, such as using effective keywords and sensationalist headlines. This gives them an advantage in Google search results compared to their Bangladeshi counterparts.

Another investigation by Bangladeshi fact-checking outlet Rumor Scanner in December 2024 found 72% of social media accounts spreading fake and misinformation are located in India.

The Conversation asked Google a series of questions about its search engine. It did not receive a response.

An illustrative case of a global problem

Bangladesh is an illustrative case of the global problem of algorithmic bias. It highlights how search engines can be exploited to promote disinformation and misinformation and powerfully shape people’s perceptions about what’s happening in the world.

It also highlights how everybody should think critically about the information they find online about the current situation in Bangladesh. Or about any news event, for that matter.

The case also reinforces the urgent need for policymakers, tech companies and governments to work together to effectively address algorithmic bias. This is especially urgent in the Global South, where marginal voices remain silenced.The Conversation

Abdul Aziz, Lecturer in Media and Communication Studies, School of Arts and Social Sciences, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Feel like you’re in a funk? Here’s what you can do to get out of it – and how you can prevent it from happening in the future

Whatever the reason, there are many things you can do to get out of a funk. Vectorium/ Shutterstock
Jolanta BurkeRCSI University of Medicine and Health Sciences

Are you feeling worn out? Struggling with lingering sadness, anxiety or feelings of indifference? If so, you might be stuck in a funk.

There are many reasons you might find yourself in a funk – including returning home after a holiday, not being sure what your goals in life are and a lack of meaning and purpose driving you forward. Sometimes, there’s no clear reason why we find ourselves in a funk.

Whatever the cause, don’t lose hope. There are many things you can do to turn the way you’re feeling around.


Ready to make a change? The Quarter Life Glow-up is a new, six-week newsletter course from The Conversation’s UK and Canada editions.

Every week, we’ll bring you research-backed advice and tools to help improve your relationships, your career, your free time and your mental health – no supplements or skincare required. Sign up here to start your glow-up at any time.


1. Express yourself

As obvious as it sounds, one of the best ways to get out of a funk is exploring the reasons you’re feeling this way.

Try writing down your deepest thoughts and feelings without judgement – no matter how disjointed they are. Or, grab a paintbrush, spray paint, pencil or chalk and express your emotions through art. You might even choose to dance, letting your movements convey what you’re feeling and help you get to the root of your funk.

Whatever form of self-expression works for you, all that matters is getting your feelings out. This will help you make sense of what’s causing your funk, and may make it easier to overcome.

2. Remember the good times

When we’re in a funk, we’re often overwhelmed by feelings of sadness or indifference. It can be hard to reduce these negative emotions – especially since negative feelings serve a purpose, by helping us understand what’s going on inside.

Instead of trying to banish bad feelings, try instead to layer positive emotions on top of them. This may help balance your emotions out.

You can do this by closing your eyes and savouring a happy moment from the past when you felt alive, vibrant and fulfilled. Use every sense as you relive those joyful memories.

3. Connect with someone

Research shows the most fulfilled people don’t bury themselves in their thoughts when feeling down. Instead, they look outward – engaging with others and their surroundings.

So when you’re in a funk, try finding ways of connecting, even briefly, with the people around you. Even a simple conversation with a stranger might lift your spirits.

Or take it a step further if you can and do something kind for someone – or try volunteering. This may help break you out of your low mood by giving you a sense of fulfilment?

4. Heal in nature

Nature is shown to improve wellbeing in many ways – such as lowering blood pressure, refreshing your mind and reminding you that you’re part of something larger than yourself.

A cartoon woman walks her dog in the park.
A walk in the park may have many benefits for your wellbeing. GoodStudio/ Shutterstock

If you’ve been feeling down, try going for a walk in the park or find a quiet place to stop on a hike. Lift your head to the sky, listen for the birds singing, immerse yourself in the foliage and let the sound of water wash over you. All of these things are linked with better mental health.

Preventing a funk

Doing any of these activities even just once can make a difference to the way your feeling. The more often you do them, the better.

And once you’ve broken out of your funk, there are things you can do to avoid slipping into one in the future.

1. Build resilience

Resilience isn’t just about bouncing back. It’s more about finding the right resources to help you get out of a funk – and knowing how to use these resources effectively.

For example, if connecting with your friends helps boost your wellbeing, this would be considered one of your “resources” that can help break you out of a funk. Of course, schedules can get in the way, so you’ll need to to find a time that works best for everyone.

This is what resilience is all about. Identifying your go-to resources for preventing those low feelings can help you create a ready-made toolkit to draw from whenever you feel a funk coming on. To build your tool-kit, think about the things that made the biggest difference in pulling you out of a funk the last time.

2. Cultivate hope

Hope isn’t just wishful thinking. It’s about cultivating the will to keep moving forward and finding a way to get there. It’s a pathway to a better life, keeping us focused on growth.

But one of the challenges in building hope is the lack of a clear vision of where we want to be. To overcome this, take some time to imagine your best-case scenario – what your life would look like ten years from now if everything you’ve ever hoped for came true.

Spend 20 minutes writing it down. Don’t stop to worry about spelling or grammar (this is just for you). Repeat this exercise as often as needed to create your ideal future.

When you’re finished, write down how you can achieve what you hope for. Having a well-defined vision of your best possible self can help keep you motivated and prevent you from feeling stuck – and will also give you a reserve of hope to draw upon when facing hard times.

3. Practise self-acceptance

Most importantly, focus on practising self-acceptance. Everyone experiences rough patches, so don’t be hard on yourself for being in a funk — it’s just a temporary state.

Embrace where you are and accept yourself fully, regardless of your current situation. And remember that self-acceptance doesn’t mean resignation. It’s about acknowledging, “It’s okay to be me,” while also envisioning how you want “me” to evolve in the future. With this mindset, you can work towards becoming the person you aspire to be.

Unlike trees, which are rooted in place, we have the flexibility to grow and change. Remember this the next time you start feeling stuck.The Conversation

Jolanta Burke, Senior Lecturer, Centre for Positive Health Sciences, RCSI University of Medicine and Health Sciences

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

YouTube at 20: how it transformed viewing in eight steps

Chay Tee
Alex ConnockUniversity of Oxford

The world’s biggest video sharing platform, YouTube, has just turned 20.

It was started inauspiciously in February 2005 by former PayPal employees Chad Hurley, Steve Chen and Jawed Karim – with a 19-second video of Karim exploring San Diego Zoo.

That year, YouTube’s disruption of the media timeline was minimal enough for there to be no mention of it in The Guardian’s coverage of TV’s Digital Revolution at the Edinburgh TV Festival.

Twenty years on, it’s a different story.

YouTube is a massive competitor to TV, an engagement beast, uploading as much new video every five minutes as the 2,400 hours BBC Studios produces in a whole year. The 26-year-old YouTube star Mr Beast earned US$85 million (£67 million) in 2024 from videos – ranging from live Call of Duty play-alongs to handing out 1,000 free cataract operations.

As a business, YouTube is now worth some US$455 billion (2024 Bloomberg estimate). That is a spectacular 275 times return on the US$1.65 billion Google paid for it in 2006. For the current YouTube value, Google could today buy British broadcaster ITV about 127 times.

YouTube has similar gross revenue (US$36.1 billion in 2024) to the streaming giant Netflix – but without the financial inconvenience of making shows, since most of the content is uploaded for free.

YouTube’s first video: a 19-second look at the elephants of San Diego Zoo.

YouTube has 2.7 billion monthly active users, or 40% of the entire global population outside China, where it is blocked. It is also now one of the biggest music streaming sites, and the second biggest social network (to Facebook), plus a paid broadcast channel for 100 million subscribers.

YouTube has built a video Library of Babel, its expansive shelves lined eclectically with Baby Shark Dance, how to fix septic tanks, who would win a shooting war between Britain and France … and quantum physics.

The site has taken over global children’s programming to the point where Wired magazine pointed out that the future of this genre actually “isn’t television”. But there are flaws, too: it has been described as a conduit for disinformation by fact checkers.

So how did all that happen? Eight key innovations have helped YouTube achieve its success.

1. How new creativity is paid for

Traditional broadcast and print uses either the risk-on, fixed cost of hiring an office full of staff producers and writers, or the variable but risky approach of one-off commissioning from freelancers. Either way, the channel goes out of pocket, and if the content fails to score with viewers, it loses money.

YouTube did away with all that, flipping the risk profile entirely to the creator, and not paying upfront at all. It doesn’t have to deal with the key talent going out clubbing all night and being late to the set, not to mention other boring aspects of production like insurance, cash flow or contracts.

2. The revenue model of media

YouTube innovated by dividing any earnings with the creator, via an advertising income split of roughly 50% (the exact amount varies in practice). This incentivises creators to study the science of engagement, since it makes them more money. Mr Beast has a team employed just to optimise the thumbnails for his videos.

3. Advertising

Alongside parent company Google/Alphabet, and especially with the introduction (March 2007) of YouTube Analytics and other technologies, the site adrenalised programmatic video advertising, where ad space around a particular viewer is digitally auctioned off to the highest buyer, in real time.

That means when you land on a high-rating Beyoncé video and see a pre-roll ad for Grammarly, the advertiser algorithmically liked the look of your profile, so bid money to show you the ad. When that system works, it is ultra efficient, the key reason why the broad, demographics-based broadcast TV advertising market is so challenged.

4. Who makes content

About 50 million people now think they are professional creators, many of them on YouTube. Influencers have used the site to build businesses without mediation from (usually white and male) executives in legacy media.

This has driven, at its best, a major move towards the democratisation and globalisation of content production. Brazil and Kenya both have huge, eponymous YouTube creator economies, giving global distribution to diverse voices that realistically would been disintermediated in the 20th century media ecology.

5. The way we tell stories

Traditional TV ads and films start slow and build to a climax. Not so YouTube videos – and even more, YouTube Shorts – which prioritise a big emotive hit in the first few seconds for engagement, and regular further hits to keep people there. Mr Beast’s leaked internal notes describe how to do sequential escalation, meaning moving to more elaborate or extreme details as a video goes on: “An example of a one thru three minute tactic we would use is crazy progression,” he says, reflecting his deep homework. “I spent basically five years of my life studying virality on YouTube.”

6. Copyright

Back in 2015, if someone stole your intellectual property – say, old episodes of Mr Bean - and re-broadcast it on their own channel, you would call a media lawyer and sue. Now there is a better option – Content ID – to take the money instead. Through digital rights monetisation (DRM), owners can algorithmically discover their own content and claim the ad revenue, a material new income stream for producers.

7. Video technicalities

Most technical innovations in video production have found their way to the mainstream via YouTube, such as 360-degree, 4k, VR (virtual reality) and other tech acronyms. And now YouTube has started to integrate generative AI into its programme-producing suite for creators, with tight integration of Google’s Veo tools.

These will offer, according to CEO Neal Mohan, “billions of people around the world access to AI”. This is another competitive threat to traditional producers, because bedroom creators can now make their own visual effects-heavy fan-fiction episodes of Star Wars.

8. News

YouTube became a rabbit hole of disinformation, misinformation and conspiracy, via a reinforcement-learning algorithm that prioritises view time but not editorial accuracy. Covid conspiracy fans got to see “5G health risk” or “chemtrail” videos, because the algorithm knew they might like them too.

How can the big, legacy media brands respond? Simple. By meeting the audience where the viewers are, and putting their content on YouTube. The BBC has 14.7 million YouTube subscribers. ITV is exploiting its catalogue to put old episodes of Thunderbirds on there. Meanwhile in February 2025, Channel 4 also announced success in reaching young viewers via YouTube. Full episode views were “up 169% year-on-year, surpassing 110 million organic views in the UK”.The Conversation

Alex Connock, Senior Fellow, Said Business School, University of Oxford

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Australian students just recorded the lowest civics scores since testing began. But young people do care about politics

Philippa CollinWestern Sydney University

Australian school students’ civics knowledge is the lowest it has been since testing began 20 years ago, according to new national data.

Results have fallen since the last assessment in 2019 and to the lowest levels since the national civics test began in 2004.

This follows a federal parliamentary report earlier this month, calling for mandatory civics education in Australian schools (it is currently part of the curriculum but not compulsory). The report cited fears young people are “poorly equipped” to participate in Australian democracy.

The latest results are certainly concerning. But as a researcher of the political lives of young people, I would caution against assuming young people “don’t care” about politics, or are unable to engage in it.

We also need to think about how civics education can engage meaningfully with young people and meet their needs.

What does the new report say?

This report from the Australian Curriculum, Assessment and Reporting Authority is based on a national sample of Year 6 and Year 10 students, who are tested on their civics and citizenship skills. It includes knowledge of democratic principles, the Australian political system and related history.

The test is supposed to run every three years, but the most recent one was delayed by COVID. In 2024:

  • 43% of Year 6 students attained the “proficient standard”, compared with 53% in 2019

  • 28% of Australian Year 10 students met the proficient standard, compared with 38% in 2019.



Young people care about history and community

Alongside their civics skills, students were also asked about their support for a range of “citizenship behaviours”. While these figures have dropped from previous years, they nevertheless indicate most students are engaged in civic issues.

  • 81% of Year 6 students and 75% of Year 10 students thought learning about Australa’s history was “very or quite” important

  • 77% of Year 6 students and 70% of Year 10 students thought participating in activities to benefit the local community was “very or quite” important

  • 85% of Year 6 students and 68% of Year 10 students thought taking part in activities to protect the environment was “very or quite important”.



Young people are knowledgable and active

My research with young Australians shows they are interested, knowledgeable and active on civic and political issues in many different ways.

This includes getting involved in or creating their own organisations, campaigns and online content. The issues range from bullying to mental health, climate change and ending gender-based violence.

My research also shows even children as young as six have views on how to address complex issues such as climate change.

When provided with platforms that respect their views, young people show they can research, deliberate and problem-solve. Many have clear opinions on what makes for a good life for themselves, Australia and the world. Initiatives such as a children’s parliament can connect their views directly with those who govern.

Young people don’t feel included

But governments and other authorities are historically poor at meaningfully engaging with young people.

In my work and other research, we continue to hear many students feel they don’t have a genuine voice in the community.

For example, in the climate movement, young female activists have said they do not feel feel their views are taken seriously by decision-makers because they are under 18.

This suggests children’s interest and confidence in democracy could be supported by giving them meaningful opportunities to participate before they can vote.

For example, creating governance mechanisms that include and are accountable to young people on matters that affect them. This should extend to issues which will significantly impact them into the future, such as housing and tax.

Technology and critical media literacy matter

We also have to make sure students are supported to get good quality information about issues relevant to them. And that they have the skills and resources to navigate information online.

Research suggests engagement with news and strong media literacy skills are linked to civic participation.

Studies have also found many Australian children who have high interest in the news are also involved in social issues online. Research shows social media is a key source for this news (as opposed to traditional sources such as newspapers or television).

At the same time, just 41% of children aged 8–16 are confident they can tell fake news stories from real ones (which is is similar to survey results for adults).

We also know some students, particularly from lower socioeconomic backgrounds, lack access to the technology they need for their schooling and everyday lives.

How can civics and citizenship knowledge be improved?

The new data certainly indicates the current system for civics education is not working for Australian students.

As we work to improve young people’s civics knowledge, research indicates any new approach in schools should be created in conjunction with young people themselves. If young people are given a say in how their civics education is designed, they will be more engaged and the lessons will be more effective, especially for students who face disadvantage.

Other studies we have co-designed and co-researched with young people have resulted in recommendations to trust young people and give them responsibilities and real-world learning opportunities, outside of school. They prioritised self-efficacy (people’s belief they can can control events that affect their lives) and a sense of belonging.

If civics education is going to be effective, it should acknowledge young people already have an interest and a stake in politics, focus on where they get their information, and involve them in how civics education is designed and delivered.

We might then have a model for supporting civics and citizenship learning across the community and across people’s lives.The Conversation

Philippa Collin, Professor, Institute for Culture and Society, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

New experiments finally prove a long-forgotten theory about how quantum particles spin

Dmitriy Rybin / Shutterstock
Arjen VaartjesUNSW Sydney and Andrea MorelloUNSW Sydney

What makes something quantum? This question has kept a small but dedicated fraction of the world’s population – most of them quantum physicists – up at night for decades.

At very small scales, we know the universe is made up of waves and energy fields ruled by the laws of quantum mechanics, but at the scale of the everyday world around us we mostly see solid objects following the older rules of classical mechanics. When we ask what makes something quantum, we are asking where the line is between these two realms and how it can be drawn.

In a new study published in Newton, we answer this question in a previously undiscovered way. We show that a single spinning particle can show indubitable evidence of quantum behaviour.

The discovery of spin

One hundred years ago, Dutch physicists Samuel Goudsmit and George Uhlenbeck proposed the idea that most tiny particles never really stand still. Instead, they suggested, electrons – elementary particles that form the outer shell of atoms – behave like minuscule spinning tops.

The spin can be either clockwise or anticlockwise, or what physicists call “spin up” and “spin down”. This binary nature of spinning electrons means that they can be used as building blocks for quantum computers.

However, in 1925 Goudsmit and Uhlenbeck’s spinning electron proposal caused an uproar in the physics establishment. At this time, physics was shaped by illustrious names such as Albert Einstein, Max Planck and Paul Ehrenfest, who laid the groundwork for the grand theories of relativity and quantum mechanics that transformed our understanding of the universe.

After eminent physicist and Nobel laureate Hendrik Lorentz criticised the spin theory, Uhlenbeck got cold feet and wanted to retract the paper. Uhlenbeck and Goudsmit’s mentor Ehrenfest told them to persist, writing: “You are both young enough to be able to afford a stupidity!”

Old ideas still remain

This kind of resistance to new ideas is not unusual in physics. As Planck put it, science progresses one funeral at a time.

Much like the scepticism about the discovery of spinning electrons, today many physicists are educated with a misconception about how spin works. Conventional wisdom, still taught in standard textbooks, tells us that spin is a quantum property that is essential to understanding the behaviour of electrons and nuclei. But at the same time, the textbooks say the rotation of the particle is still somehow perfectly described by classical physics.

Tsirelson’s forgotten protocol

A similar consideration applies to another textbook system, the harmonic oscillator (e.g. a pendulum). According to a 1927 theorem by Paul Ehrenfest, the way a quantum pendulum swings is indistinguishable from a swing in the park.

Strikingly, almost 80 years later the Russian-Israeli physicist Boris Tsirelson had an idea showing that it is possible to discern a quantum pendulum from a swing in the park, provided the quantum system is prepared in a truly quantum state. At the time, Tsirelson’s paper attracted little notice.

Another 15 years later, the research team of Valerio Scarani in Singapore resurfaced Tsirelson’s paper from the depths of the internet. Scarani’s student Zaw Lin Htoo extended Tsirelson’s idea, proving theoretically that it actually was possible to detect quantumness in the rotation of a spin.

Bigger particles and Schrödinger’s cat

Our team at the University of New South Wales decided to take on the challenge and prove the quantumness of a spin in a real experiment. However, we couldn’t do it with a simple spin like an electron. Because an electron is so small, it only has two possible spin states: up and down. Again defying widespread intuition, it turns out that an electron spin can only be prepared in quasi-classical states, which obey the old textbook predictions.

Instead we used a much larger particle, the nucleus of an antimony atom. The spin of this particle can point in eight different directions, instead of just two.

We were able to place the atom in a so-called “Schrödinger’s cat” state, in which it is in a superposition of two widely different spin directions at once.

We then performed the Tsirelson-Scarani protocol, which involves measuring not just the average orientation of the spin, but the positivity of it – a very different kind of measurement to what is done in standard spin resonance setups. This experiment showed unquestionable evidence for the quantumness of the antimony’s spin.

What’s next?

Our study is important for discovering fundamental truths about the universe, and for providing clarity on what it means to “be quantum”. However, it may also have real-life applications.

The states that we demonstrated to be quantum with the Tsirelson-Scarani protocol are exactly the kind of thing that give quantum computation and quantum sensing an advantage over classical counterparts. In the future we will focus making the most of these systems for use in technological applications.The Conversation

Arjen Vaartjes, PhD Student, Quantum Physics, UNSW Sydney and Andrea Morello, Professor, Quantum Nanosystems, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Near-complete skull discovery reveals 'top apex', leopard-sized 'fearsome' carnivore

February 17, 2025

A rare discovery of a nearly complete skull in the Egyptian desert has led scientists to the “dream” revelation of a new 30-million-year-old species of the ancient apex predatory carnivore, Hyaenodonta.

Bearing sharp teeth and powerful jaw muscles, suggesting a strong bite, the newly-identified ‘Bastetodon’ was a leopard-sized “fearsome” mammal. It would have been at the top of all carnivores and the food chain when our own monkey-like ancestors were evolving.

Findings, published in the peer-reviewed Journal of Vertebrate Palaeontology, detail how this ferocious creature would have likely preyed on primates, early hippos, early elephants, and hyraxes in the lush forest of Fayum, Egypt, which is now home to a desert.

Describing the discovery, palaeontologist and lead author Shorouq Al-Ashqar, from Mansoura University and the American University in Cairo, says: “For days, the team meticulously excavated layers of rock dating back around 30 million years.

“Just as we were about to conclude our work, a team member spotted something remarkable —a set of large teeth sticking out of the ground. His excited shout brought the team together, marking the beginning of an extraordinary discovery: a nearly complete skull of an ancient apex carnivore, a dream for any vertebrate palaeontologist.”

Bastetodon belongs to a species in an extinct group of carnivorous mammals called hyaenodonts. Hyaenodonts evolved long before modern-day carnivores such as cats, dogs, and hyenas. These predators with hyena-like teeth hunted in African ecosystems after the extinction of the dinosaurs.

The team – who go under the title ‘Sallam Lab’ – named the specimen after the cat-headed ancient Egyptian goddess Bastet, who symbolized protection, pleasure, and good health. The name acknowledges the region where the specimen was found, famous for its fossils and Ancient Egyptian artifacts. The name is also a nod to the short, cat-like snout and teeth of this fearsome, leopard-sized carnivore (“-odon” means “tooth”).

Its skull was unearthed on Sallam Lab’s expedition to the Fayum Depression, an area where digs reveal an important time window into about 15 million years of evolutionary history of mammals in Africa. This timespan not only captures the transition from the Eocene’s global warming to the Oligocene’s global cooling, but also reveals how these climate shifts played a crucial role in shaping ecosystems that we still see today.

Beyond just a new ancient creature discovery, the finding of Bastetodon has already allowed the research team to reevaluate a group of lion-sized hyaenodonts that was discovered in the rocks of the Fayum over 120 years ago.

In their paper the team also construct the genus Sekhmetops to describe this century-old material and to honor Sekhmet, the lion-headed goddess of wrath and war in ancient Egyptian mythology (“-ops” means “face”). In 1904, Sekhmetops was placed within a European group of hyaenodonts. The team demonstrated Bastetodon and Sekhmetops both belonged to a group of hyaenodonts that actually originated in Africa. In ancient Egypt, Bastet was often associated with Sekhmet, making the two genera scientifically and symbolically connected.

The study demonstrates the relatives of Bastetodon and Sekhmetops spread from Africa in multiple waves, eventually making it to Asia, Europe, India, and North America. By 18 million years ago, some relatives of these hyaenodonts were among the largest mammalian meat-eaters to ever walk the planet.

However, cataclysmic changes in global climate and tectonic changes in Africa opened the continent to the relatives of modern cats, dogs, and hyenas. As environments and prey changed, the specialized, carnivorous hyaenodonts diminished in diversity, finally going extinct and leaving our primate relatives to face a new set of antagonists.

“The discovery of Bastetodon is a significant achievement in understanding the diversity and evolution of hyaenodonts and their global distribution,” Shorouq adds.

“We are eager to continue our research to unravel the intricate relationships between these ancient predators and their environments over time and across continents.”

Concluding, co-author Dr. Matt Borths, Curator of Fossils at the Duke Lemur Center Museum of Natural History at Duke University in Durham, North Carolina, says: “The Fayum is one of the most important fossil areas in Africa. Without it, we would know very little about the origins of African ecosystems and the evolution of African mammals like elephants, primates, and hyaenodonts. Paleontologists have been working in the Fayum for over a century, but the Sallam Lab demonstrated there is more to discover in this remarkable region.”

Artwork of how Bastetodon likely appeared. Credit Ahmad Morsi

Shorouq F. Al-Ashqar, Matthew Borths, Heba El-Desouky, Steven Heritage, Mohamed Abed, Erik R. Seiffert, Sanaa El-Sayed, Hesham M. Sallam. Cranial anatomy of the hypercarnivore Bastetodon syrtos gen. nov. (Hyaenodonta, Hyainailourinae) and a reevaluation of Pterodon in Africa. Journal of Vertebrate Paleontology, 2025; DOI: 10.1080/02724634.2024.2442472

Carnivorous dinosaurs thrived in Australia 120 million years ago, new fossils show

The shinbone of a megaraptorid. Nadir Kinani/Museums Victoria
Jake KotevskiMuseums Victoria Research Institute and Stephen PoropatCurtin University

Between 122 and 108 million years ago, the Australian landmass was much farther south than today. Victoria was positioned within the Antarctic Circle, separated from Tasmania by a vast rift valley rather than open sea.

This was the Early Cretaceous, and lush forests filled with dinosaurs dominated the landscape. We still find traces of these animals in Victoria’s fossil record.

Most of the dinosaur fossils found in Victoria belong to small plant-eaters called ornithopods. But there are also a few theropod fossils — a diverse group that includes all known carnivorous dinosaurs, as well as modern birds.

More than 250 theropod bones have been found in the Victorian Cretaceous. In the palaeontology collections of Museums Victoria, we have now identified five theropod fossils of particular importance. Our work on these bones has been published today in the Journal of Vertebrate Paleontology.

An artwork of trees and a river bed, and three fearsome animals.
Artist’s interpretation of the Cretaceous Bass Coast, 121.4 million years ago. From left to right: carcharodontosaur, unenlagiine and megaraptorid. Jonathan Metzger for Museums Victoria

Shinbones and tail bones

Research over the past decade has revealed striking similarities between Australian and South American dinosaurs. These include megaraptorids with claws shaped like scythes, and small, fleet-footed elasmarian ornithopods. There were also armoured parankylosaurians and colossal sauropods with long necks and small heads.

These parallels may seem surprising at first, but both continents retained a connection to Antarctica throughout much of the Cretaceous Period.

Our newly described fossils show that a bunch of different carnivorous dinosaurs seen in South America also thrived in the Cretaceous of southeastern Australia.

Two shinbones provide the first evidence of carcharodontosaurs (“shark-toothed lizards”) in Australia. A third shinbone provides strong evidence for the presence of unenlagiines, a southern group of dromaeosaurs (“running lizards”).

A fourth shinbone and two tail vertebrae with their chevrons, which are from a megaraptorid, represent one of Australia’s largest-known carnivorous dinosaurs.

A first for Australia

Carcharodontosaurs were apex predators in South America and Africa for much of the mid-Cretaceous. This group of theropods had large skulls, massive teeth and small arms. They were some of the largest predators to ever walk the Earth.

Despite their success in South America and Africa, carcharodontosaur fossils had never been found in Australia – until now. With the two shinbones, we now have the first evidence of the group on this continent.

Curiously, these Australian carcharodontosaurs are much smaller than their African and South American cousins, and the bones we have most closely resemble a carcharodontosaur from Thailand.

One of the Victorian carcharodontosaur shinbones was found on the Otway Coast. The other was found on the Bass Coast, in rocks nearly 10 million years older. This demonstrates these predators were successful in this area for at least 10 million years. It’s a notable find.

The large-bodied carcharodontosaurs of Africa and South America were seemingly specialised for hunting long-necked sauropods. However, this food source was likely not available to the Victorian polar carcharodontosaurs: sauropod fossils have never been found in Victoria.

Aerial view of a jagged cliff with many smaller fallen rocks underneath it.
A cliff face at Twin Reefs Bunurong Coastal Reserve, the area where some of the dinosaur fossils were found. John Broomfield/Museums Victoria

The Australian ‘raptors’

Unenlagiines were lightly built (and likely feathered) predatory dinosaurs, related to Velociraptor of Jurassic Park fame.

Most unenlagiine fossil remains have been found in South America. Historically, Australia had limited evidence for their presence, as well.

Our description of a new unenlagiine shinbone from Victoria provides robust evidence for their success in polar Australia during the Early Cretaceous.

The snouts of unenlagiines were relatively longer, and their arms relatively shorter than those of their dromaeosaur cousins from the Northern Hemisphere. This implies they had a rather different diet. The Victorian unenlagiine presumably ate fish or small land-dwelling animals. One possibility is the small mammals for which the Victorian Cretaceous is perhaps most famous – more than 50 mammal jaws have been found to date, and some are from ancient relatives of platypus and echidna.

A pillow with three discoloured bones on it.
Theropod shin bones from the Bass Coast. From left to right: unenlagiine, carcharodontosaur and megaraptorid. Nadir Kinani/Museums Victoria

The apex predators of Victoria

Large predatory dinosaurs – on the scale of Tyrannosaurus – are notably absent from the Australian fossil record. Instead, Australian dinosaur populations seem to have been dominated by medium-sized carnivores called megaraptorids.

Megaraptorid fossils are only known from South America and Australia. The most complete skeletons are from South America, including a relatively large one – roughly nine metres long. Australia’s only reasonably complete megaraptorid is Australovenator wintonensis from Winton, central Queensland.

The shinbone and tail vertebrae we describe provide evidence for a large megaraptorid in southeast Australia. Despite being almost 30 million years older than the roughly five- to six-metre-long Australovenator, the Bass Coast megaraptorid was at least 5% larger: approaching the size of its South American relatives.

The large, muscular arms and fingers tipped with fearsome scythe-like claws were presumably the primary weapons of megaraptorids. In contrast to almost every other group of medium-sized carnivorous dinosaurs, megaraptorids had elongated snouts with small teeth.

The abundance of ornithopods in Victoria presumably made this region more suited to smaller prey specialists like megaraptorids, rather than sauropod-stalking carcharodontosaurs.

A beige pillow with several large bones neatly laid out on it.
Back row: two megaraptor fossils. Front row: the shinbone of a unenlagiine; two shinbones of carcharodontosaurs; the shinbone of a megaraptor. Nadir Kinani/Museums Victoria

More discoveries yet to come

We have much to learn about Australia’s Cretaceous dinosaurs. Our study shows how even five isolated and incomplete bones can improve our understanding of our continent’s fossil heritage.

Carcharodontosaurs might have been the apex predators in South America, but megaraptorids ruled the roost in the land down under.

The fantastic dinosaur fossil record of Victoria has grown over nearly 40 years thanks to the efforts of Dinosaur Dreaming, an ongoing volunteer palaeontology project, and citizen scientists like Melissa Lowery. Thanks to their efforts, our window into Victoria’s ancient past continues to become ever clearer.The Conversation

Jake Kotevski, PhD Candidate, School of Biological Sciences, Monash University and PhD Candidate, Museums Victoria Research Institute and Stephen Poropat, Research Associate, School of Earth and Planetary Sciences, Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Nat King Cole’s often overlooked role in the Civil Rights Movement

Nat King Cole performs in Copenhagen, Denmark, in April 1960. Ebbe Wrae/JP Jazz Archive/Getty Images
Donna M. CoxUniversity of Dayton

Six decades after Nat King Cole’s death in 1965, his music is still some of the most played in the world, and his celebrity transcends generational and racial divides. His smooth voice, captivating piano skills and enduring charisma earned him international acclaim.

One of the most influential artists of the 20th century, Cole was not only a groundbreaking musician but also a quiet, yet resolute, advocate for social justice.

As an African American sacred music scholar, I have been immersed in the inseparable link between music, culture and social change for over 40 years. Examining Cole through the lens of his activism uncovers the nuanced ways in which he challenged the status quo and contributed to the Civil Rights Movement.

Beneath the polished veneer of his public image lay a deeply personal commitment to confronting racism and advocating for equality that is often overlooked.

Formative years

Nathaniel Adams Coles was born on March 17, 1919, in Montgomery, Alabama, to Perlina Adams Coles and Edward James Coles. Perlina served as the organist at the True Light Baptist Church and later the First Baptist Church of North Chicago, both pastored by Nathaniel’s father. She passed her love for music to her children, teaching them to play the piano and organ. Cole’s formative years were spent in church; gospel songs, hymns and spirituals formed the foundation of his musical education.

Though Cole is primarily remembered for his jazz and pop hits, the emotive power, communal emphasis and uplifting nature of Black sacred music profoundly shaped his artistry throughout his career, despite his single sacred album, “Every Time I Feel The Spirit,” released in 1959. The influence of gospel music, in particular, can be heard in his soulful phrasing and heartfelt delivery, contributing to his remarkable ability to connect with audiences.

Growing up in Chicago, he was also exposed to a rich tapestry of musical genres, including blues, classical and jazz. This eclectic upbringing laid the foundation for his versatile musical style and commercial success.

A black-and-white photo of a family, with a woman seated in the center and three Black men standing behind her.
Group portrait of singer Nat King Cole with his mother, Perlina, his younger brother, Ike, and his father, Edward, circa 1940. Nat King Cole photograph collection/New York Public Library

While Cole’s music was not overtly political, his very presence in the mainstream was a statement. In an era of racial segregation, he was a Black man achieving unprecedented success in a predominantly white music industry. His impeccable diction, tailored suits and sophisticated performances countered the prevailing stereotypes of African Americans as uncouth or subservient.

By embodying a poised and dignified persona, Cole communicated a powerful message: Black excellence and humanity could not be denied. As race scholar George Lipsitz writes in “The Possessive Investment in Whiteness,” “The cultural field … is a site of struggle where meanings are contested and power relations are negotiated.”

Cole’s success challenged the structural racism that sought to confine Black artists to the margins and opened doors for future generations. He acknowledged the significance of his presence on national television, recognizing it as a potential turning point for Black representation. While hesitant to explicitly label himself an activist, he contemplated the impact of his success on breaking down barriers, believing that “when you’ve got the respect of white and colored, you can ease a lot of things.”

Confronting racism

In response to critics who dismiss Cole’s legacy as apolitical, I argue that they overlook the complexity of his resistance. Several scholars have stated that in a society where overt defiance often resulted in violence or economic ruin, Cole’s ability to navigate the entertainment industry while maintaining his dignity was itself a form of activism.

Though Cole never referred to himself as an activist, he confronted racism in both overt and quiet ways. Scholars such as cultural theorist Stuart Hall and researcher Laura Pottinger define “quiet activism” as modest, everyday acts of resistance – either implicitly or explicitly political – that challenge dominant ideologies and power structures. These acts often entail processes of production or creativity.

Despite his commercial success, Cole faced relentless systemic and personal racism. In 1948, he purchased a home in the affluent Hancock Park neighborhood of Los Angeles, a move met with hostility; the local homeowners association attempted to expel him, and he endured threats and acts of vandalism.

Yet Cole refused to be intimidated. His resolve was a courageous act of resistance that highlighted the pervasive inequalities of the time.

Cole faced blatant discrimination in Las Vegas. He was often denied access to the same hotels and restaurants where he performed, forced to stay in segregated accommodations. One particularly notable incident occurred at the Sands Hotel. in Las Vegas. When the maitre d’ tried to deny service to Cole’s Black bandmates in the dining room, Cole threatened to cancel his performance and leave. This forced the hotel management to back down, setting a precedent for other Black entertainers and patrons.

Cole quietly sued hotels and negotiated contracts that guaranteed his right to stay in the hotels where he performed, a significant step toward desegregation. He also made it a point to bring his entire entourage, including Black musicians and friends, to these establishments, challenging their “whites only” policies.

‘We Are Americans Too’

A photo of a young Black girl sitting on her father's lap, with a Christmas tree beside them.
Photo of Natalie Cole singing with her father, Nat King Cole, in 1957. Michael Ochs Archives/Getty Images

Cole’s impact extended beyond the realm of music. In 1956, he became the first African American to host a national network television show, “The Nat King Cole Show.” This was a groundbreaking moment, as it brought a Black man into the living rooms of millions of white Americans every week.

Though the show faced challenges with sponsorship due to racial prejudice, it marked a significant step toward greater representation and acceptance. As historian Donald Bogle notes in his 2001 book “Toms, Coons, Mulattoes, Mammies, and Bucks,” “Television … became a new battleground for the image of the black performer.” Cole’s show, despite its short run, was a crucial battle in this war.

When Cole was attacked onstage by white supremacists during a concert in Birmingham, Alabama, in 1956, it underscored the physical danger Black public figures faced and galvanized Cole’s commitment to the Civil Rights Movement.

It is important to note that Cole’s support for the Civil Rights Movement was often quiet and behind the scenes. He faced criticism from some who felt he should have been more outspoken. However, his actions demonstrate his commitment to the cause of racial equality. Cole, who died in 1965 at the height of the Civil Rights Movement, was a member of his local NAACP branch. He also performed at benefit concerts for the organization, raising money to support their efforts in fighting racial discrimination.

Shortly after the attack in Birmingham, Cole recorded his only song that is specifically political, “We Are Americans Too.” Recorded in 1956, the song was a powerful statement of belonging and a challenge to racial exclusion. Though it would not come close to reaching commercial success, it did serve as a powerful reminder that African Americans were, in fact, Americans. Over a half-century later, this song still resonates and speaks to the ongoing struggle for full inclusion and recognition for marginalized groups.

The juxtaposition of the refrain “We are Americans too” against the backdrop of the treatment of Black people during the Civil Rights Movement gives this song emotional weight. The very act of having to assert “We are Americans too” highlights the injustice of the situation.

It underscores the disconnect between the ideals of American democracy and the reality of racial inequality. In this context, the refrain “We are Americans too” is an act of resistance, a challenge to the prevailing social order. It highlights the hypocrisy of a nation founded on principles of liberty while denying those same liberties to a significant portion of its population. It’s a call for America to finally recognize the full humanity and citizenship of its Black citizens.

‘We Are Americans Too.’

Great art, and great artists, are powerful witnesses of the times in which they live, love, work and play. Their commentary, both artistically and humanly, leaves an important record for generations. This is clearly evident in Nat King Cole.The Conversation

Donna M. Cox, Professor of Music, University of Dayton

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘Myrrh, conifer oil and … breakfast tea’: my sniffer team’s surprise findings on what mummified bodies smell like

Mum’s the word. Banu Sevim
Cecilia BembibreUCL

When we see objects in museum display cases, it often doesn’t tell their whole story. One thing that tends to get ignored or even lost in the conservation process is the smell. We lose a lot of valuable information as a result, such as how the object was produced or how it functioned.

My field is called sensory heritage, which relates to how we engage with heritage objects with senses other than vision. As part of this, I develop methods to identify and preserve culturally significant smells.

For example, I have worked with St Paul’s Cathedral to recreate the scent of its library, to ensure that it can be experienced by future generations. I was also part of an EU-funded project called Odeuropa, which worked with computer scientists and historians to tell the stories of smells from 300 years of European history.

With help from some perfumers, we brought back smells such as 17th-century Amsterdam, with its canals and linden trees. As a result, for example, visitors to Museum Ulm in southern Germany can experience our olfactory interpretations for ten of the paintings on display.

My latest project delves much further into the past. I was asked by the University of Ljubljana, in association with the University of Krakow and the Egyptian Museum in Cairo, to help with a study of mummified bodies. Ljubljana was studying a mummified body in the national museum in Slovenia, and had been invited to extend its research to some mummified bodies in Cairo.

The strict guidelines about studying these bodies stipulate that researchers must use techniques that are not destructive. One way is to see what can be learned by smelling, which is why I joined the project, led by Professor Matija Strlič and PhD researcher Emma Paolin.

Sarcophaguses on display in Cairo.
Sarcophaguses on display in Cairo. Author providedCC BY-SA

We studied nine mummified bodies at the Egyptian Museum, four of which were on display and five in storage. They span different time periods, with the oldest being from 3,500 years ago. They were also conserved in different ways and stored in different places, so they give a decent representation of all the mummified bodies in different collections around the world.

I put together a team of eight expert sniffers, of which I was one. Some are specialists who have worked with me on other projects, while some are colleagues from the Egyptian Museum who were given smell training in advance. We wanted them on the panel because they are so familiar with the smells in question.

The research

We began by doing chemical analysis to ensure the bodies were safe to smell, since in prior decades they were treated with synthetic pesticides to keep them preserved. Several bodies had high concentrations of these pesticides, which could potentially be carcinogenic, so these were removed from the study.

With the remaining nine, we slightly opened their sarcophaguses to insert little pipes and extract quantities of air. A measured volume of this air went into special bags which we took into a room away from display areas, so I and the other sniffers could experience them “nose on”.

More air was captured inside metal tubes containing a polymer that traps the volatile organic compounds, so they could be studied in a laboratory at the University of Ljubljana. This air was subjected to various chemical analyses to see which compounds were present, and also separated into its constituent parts using chromatography, so that we sniffers could experience and describe each smell individually.

This was very hard work: we usually took turns to sit on the end of a special machine with an outlet known as an olfactory port. You spend 15 to 20 minutes experiencing one smell after another, having to quickly describe them and rate their intensity. It can be as much as one smell every second, which can be overwhelming – hence the taking of turns.

Researcher at an olfactory port in a laboratory
Emma Paolin taking her turn at the olfactory port in Ljubljana. Author providedCC BY-SA

Our findings

I was more excited at the prospect of discovering something new than nervous about what it would be like to smell these ancient bodies. However, you’d be forgiven for thinking these odours would not be agreeable. From the accounts of archaeologists to movies such as The Mummy (1999), mummified bodies are associated with foul smells.

Yet surprisingly, the smells were quite pleasant. The sniff team’s descriptions included “woody”, “floral”, “sweet”, “spicy”, “stale” and “resin-like”. We were able to identify ancient embalming ingredients including conifer oils, frankincense, myrrh and cinnamon.

Cecilia Bembibre opening a sarcophagus.
Opening the sarcophagus. Author providedCC BY-SA

We also identified degraded animal fats used in the mummification process; the human remains themselves; and both synthetic pesticides and benign plant-based pest oils that had more recently been used by the museum for preservation.

Bodies in display cases had a stronger scent than those in storage, but none was as strong as, say, a perfume. Surprisingly, one smelled distinctly of black tea: when you smell a body from millennia ago, you certainly don’t expect to be transported back to your kitchen. The other sniffers agreed about the tea smell, and we later established that the source was probably a chemical called caryophyllene.

Future steps

Next, we will reconstruct the smell of the mummified bodies so that visitors to the Egyptian Museum can experience them first-hand. We’ll make both a faithful chemical construction of what we smelled, plus an interpretation of how the body would have smelled when it was sealed off in its tomb.

It will probably be 2026 before the public can experience these. In the meantime, we’re also being approached by other museums with ancient Egyptian collections who are interested in working with us to apply similar methods.

Separately, I am working with other colleagues on developing a catalogue for smells of cultural significance to the UK, including vintage cars, traditional dishes and more libraries.

Cecilia Bembibre smelling an old book in a library
Gotta love the smell of an old library. Author providedCC BY-SA

Hopefully, our work with mummified bodies is an example of how you can bring back another dimension of heritage. Experiencing smells helps to give visitors a more holistic appreciation and understanding of the subjects.

And everyone is fascinated by mummified bodies. Soon, it will be possible to put yourself in the shoes of the archaeologists who originally discovered their tombs, and revealed their secrets to the modern world.The Conversation

Cecilia Bembibre, Lecturer in Sustainable Heritage, UCL

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Is AI making us stupider? Maybe, according to one of the world’s biggest AI companies

Nadia Piet + AIxDESIGN & Archival Images of AI/Better Images of AICC BY-SA
Deborah BrownThe University of Queensland and Peter EllertonThe University of Queensland

There is only so much thinking most of us can do in our heads. Try dividing 16,951 by 67 without reaching for a pen and paper. Or a calculator. Try doing the weekly shopping without a list on the back of last week’s receipt. Or on your phone.

By relying on these devices to help make our lives easier, are we making ourselves smarter or dumber? Have we traded efficiency gains for inching ever closer to idiocy as a species?

This question is especially important to consider with regard to generative artificial intelligence (AI) technology such as ChatGPT, an AI chatbot owned by tech company OpenAI, which at the time of writing is used by 300 million people each week.

According to a recent paper by a team of researchers from Microsoft and Carnegie Mellon University in the United States, the answer might be yes. But there’s more to the story.

Thinking well

The researchers assessed how users perceive the effect of generative AI on their own critical thinking.

Generally speaking, critical thinking has to do with thinking well.

One way we do this is by judging our own thinking processes against established norms and methods of good reasoning. These norms include values such as precision, clarity, accuracy, breadth, depth, relevance, significance and cogency of arguments.

Other factors that can affect quality of thinking include the influence of our existing world viewscognitive biases, and reliance on incomplete or inaccurate mental models.

The authors of the recent study adopt a definition of critical thinking developed by American educational psychologist Benjamin Bloom and colleagues in 1956. It’s not really a definition at all. Rather it’s a hierarchical way to categorise cognitive skills, including recall of information, comprehension, application, analysis, synthesis and evaluation.

The authors state they prefer this categorisation, also known as a “taxonomy”, because it’s simple and easy to apply. However, since it was devised it has fallen out of favour and has been discredited by Robert Marzano and indeed by Bloom himself.

In particular, it assumes there is a hierarchy of cognitive skills in which so-called “higher-order” skills are built upon “lower-order” skills. This does not hold on logical or evidence-based grounds. For example, evaluation, usually seen as a culminating or higher-order process, can be the beginning of inquiry or very easy to perform in some contexts. It is more the context than the cognition that determines the sophistication of thinking.

An issue with using this taxonomy in the study is that many generative AI products also seem to use it to guide their own output. So you could interpret this study as testing whether generative AI, by the way it’s designed, is effective at framing how users think about critical thinking.

Also missing from Bloom’s taxonomy is a fundamental aspect of critical thinking: the fact that the critical thinker not only performs these and many other cognitive skills, but performs them well. They do this because they have an overarching concern for the truth, which is something AI systems do not have.

Man using chatbot on mobile phone.
ChatGPT is used by 300 million people each week. Alex Photo Stock/Shutterstock

Higher confidence in AI equals less critical thinking

Research published earlier this year revealed “a significant negative correlation between frequent AI tool usage and critical thinking abilities”.

The new study further explores this idea. It surveyed 319 knowledge workers such as healthcare practitioners, educators and engineers who discussed 936 tasks they conducted with the help of generative AI. Interestingly, the study found users consider themselves to use critical thinking less in the execution of the task, than in providing oversight at the verification and editing stages.

In high-stakes work environments, the desire to produce high-quality work combined with fear of reprisals serve as powerful motivators for users to engage their critical thinking in reviewing the outputs of AI.

But overall, participants believe the increases in efficiency more than compensate for the effort expended in providing such oversight.

The study found people who had higher confidence in AI generally displayed less critical thinking, while people with higher confidence in themselves tended to display more critical thinking.

This suggests generative AI does not harm one’s critical thinking – provided one has it to begin with.

Problematically, the study relied too much on self-reporting, which can be subject to a range of biases and interpretation issues. Putting this aside, critical thinking was defined by users as “setting clear goals, refining prompts, and assessing generated content to meet specific criteria and standards”.

“Criteria and standards” here refer more to the purposes of the task than to the purposes of critical thinking. For example, an output meets the criteria if it “complies with their queries”, and the standards if the “generated artefact is functional” for the workplace.

This raises the question of whether the study was really measuring critical thinking at all.

Woman sitting at a table in front of a laptop, her hand holding a pen and resting against her chin.
The research found that people with higher confidence in themselves tended to display more critical thinking. ImYanis/Shutterstock

Becoming a critical thinker

Implicit in the new study is the idea that exercising critical thinking at the oversight stage is at least better than an unreflective over-reliance on generative AI.

The authors recommend generative AI developers add features to trigger users’ critical oversight. But is this enough?

Critical thinking is needed at every stage before and while using AI – when formulating questions and hypotheses to be tested, and when interrogating outputs for bias and accuracy.

The only way to ensure generative AI does not harm your critical thinking is to become a critical thinker before you use it.

Becoming a critical thinker requires identifying and challenging unstated assumptions behind claims and evaluating diverse perspectives. It also requires practising systematic and methodical reasoning and reasoning collaboratively to test your ideas and thinking with others.

Chalk and chalkboards made us better at mathematics. Can generative AI make us better at critical thinking? Maybe – if we are careful, we might be able to use generative AI to challenge ourselves and augment our critical thinking.

But in the meantime, there are always steps we can, and should, take to improve our critical thinking instead of letting an AI do the thinking for us.The Conversation

Deborah Brown, Professor in Philosophy, Director of the University of Queensland Critical Thinking Project, The University of Queensland and Peter Ellerton, Senior Lecturer in Philosophy and Education; Curriculum Director, UQ Critical Thinking Project, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What’s the difference between period pain and endometriosis pain?

Polina Zimmerman/Pexels
Sonia R. GroverThe University of Melbourne

Menstruation, or a period, is the bleeding that occurs about monthly in healthy people born with a uterus, from puberty to menopause. This happens when the endometrium, the tissue that lines the inside of the uterus, is shed.

Endometriosis is a condition that occurs when endometrium-like tissue is found outside the uterus, usually within the pelvic cavity. It is often considered a major cause of pelvic pain.

Pelvic pain significantly impacts quality of life. But how can you tell the difference between period pain and endometriosis?

Periods and period pain

Periods involve shedding the 4-6 millimetre-thick endometrial lining from the inside of the uterus.

As the lining detaches from the wall of the uterus, the blood vessels which previously supplied the lining bleed. The uterine muscles contract, expelling the blood and crumbled endometrium.

The crumbled endometrium and blood mostly pass through the cervix and vagina. But almost everyone back-bleeds via their fallopian tubes into their pelvic cavity. This is known as “retrograde menstruation”.

Woman holds uterus model
Most of the lining is shed through the vagina. Andrey_Popov/Shutterstock

The process of menstrual shedding is caused by inflammatory substances, which also cause nausea, vomiting, diarrhoea, headaches, aches, pains, dizziness, feeling faint, as well as stimulating pain receptors.

These inflammatory substances are responsible for the pain and symptoms in the week before a period and the first few days.

For women with heavy periods, their worst days of pain are usually the heaviest days of their period, coinciding with more cramps to expel clots and more retrograde bleeding.

Many women also have pain when they are releasing an egg from their ovary at the time of ovulation. Ovulation or mid-cycle pain can be worse in those who bleed more, as those women are more likely to bleed into the ovulation follicle.

Around 90% of adolescents experience period pain. Among these adolescents, 20% will experience such severe period pain they need time off from school and miss activities. These symptoms are too often normalised, without validation or acknowledgement.

What about endometriosis?

Many symptoms have been attributed to endometriosis, including painful periods, pain with sex, bladder and bowel-related pain, low back pain and thigh pain.

Other pain-related conditions such migraines and chronic fatigue have also been linked to endometriosis. But these other pain-related symptoms occur equally often in people with pelvic pain who don’t have endometriosis.

Girl holds pad
One in five adolescents who menstrate experience severe symptoms. CGN089/Shutterstock

Repeated, significant period and ovulation pain can eventually lead some people to develop persistent or chronic pelvic pain, which lasts longer than six months. This appears to occur through a process known as central sensitisation, where the brain becomes more sensitive to pain and other sensory stimuli.

Central sensitisation can occur in people with persistent pain, independent of the presence or absence of endometriosis.

Eventually, many people with period and/or persistent pelvic pain will have an operation called a laparoscopy, which allows surgeons to examine organs in the pelvis and abdomen, and diagnose and treat endometriosis.

Yet only 50% of those with identical pain symptoms who undergo a laparoscopy will end up having endometriosis.

Endometriosis is also found in pain-free women. So we cannot predict who does and doesn’t have endometriosis from symptoms alone.

How is this pain managed?

Endometriosis surgery usually involves removing lesions and adhesions. But at least 30% of people return to pre-surgery pain levels within six months or have more pain than before.

After surgery, emergency department presentations for pain are unchanged and 50% have repeat surgery within a few years.

Suppressing periods using hormonal therapies (such as continuous oral contraceptive pills or progesterone-only approaches) can suppress endometriosis and reduce or eliminate pain, independent of the presence or absence of endometriosis.

Not every type or dose of hormonal medications suits everyone, so medications need to be individualised.

The current gold-standard approach to manage persistent pelvic pain involves a multidisciplinary team approach, with the aim of achieving sustained remission and improving quality of life. This may include:

  • physiotherapy for pelvic floor and other musculoskeletal problems
  • management of bladder and bowel symptoms
  • support for self-managing pain
  • lifestyle changes including diet and exercise
  • psychological or group therapy, as our moods, stress levels and childhood events can affect how we feel and experience pain.

Whether you have period pain, chronic pelvic pain or pain you think is associated with endometriosis, if you feel pain, it’s real. If it’s disrupting your life, you deserve to be taken seriously and treated as the whole person you are.The Conversation

Sonia R. Grover, Clinical Professor of Gynaecology, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What was the Sykes-Picot agreement, and why does it still affect the Middle East today?

Pictures From History/Universal Images Group via Getty Images
Andrew ThomasDeakin University

Some national borders are determined by natural phenomena like seas, mountains and rivers. Most, however, are created by people.

This means the creation of borders is often a political exercise – usually informed by the interests of those who create them, not the local populations to whom they apply.

The Sykes-Picot agreement, known officially as the Asia Minor Agreement of 1916, was arguably the first in a series of attempts by colonial powers to mould the borders of the Middle East.

Signed in secret at the height of the first world war, Sykes-Picot was an agreement between France and Great Britain, approved by Russia. It would have lasting consequences for the region.

It is frequently cited as the epitome of European colonial betrayal, and the genesis of most conflict in the Middle East.

But while Sykes-Picot did significantly affect regional politics, the history is more complicated than popular narratives suggest.

‘The Eastern question’

The agreement was seen by the signatories as a potential answer to what was then known by European powers as “the Eastern question”: what would happen when the Ottoman Empire inevitably collapsed?

The Ottoman state in the early 20th century was vast compared to its European peers, encompassing Anatolia (the Asian part of modern-day Turkey) and parts of the Arabian Peninsula.

But it was weak, and had been on a steady decline since the 18th century due to multiple military defeats, revolts and rampant corruption. By the beginning of the first world war, the Triple Entente (France, Britain and Russia) believed the Ottoman state would not survive long.

The Entente aimed to create new “zones of influence” in the Middle East, dividing Ottoman territory into colonial partitions.

Turkish infantry column at rest with flag and rifles during World War I.
By the beginning of the first world war, France, Britain and Russia believed the Ottoman state would not survive long. Everett Collection/Shutterstock

Secret negotiations

Between late 1915 and early 1916, Britain and France sent their respective envoys to negotiate the potential terms of this outcome in secret.

Mark Sykes, a political adviser and military veteran, represented the British. François Georges-Picot, a career diplomat, represented the French.

Italy and Russia also had delegations in attendance, though the discussions were dominated by Britain and France as the most powerful nations. The Ottomans were oblivious to these negotiations.

Under the agreement:

  • France was allocated what is now Syria, Lebanon and southern Turkey
  • Britain claimed most of modern-day Iraq, southern Palestine and Kuwait
  • Russia took control of Armenia.

An area known as the Jerusalem Sanjak (an administrative division created by the Ottomon Empire) in Palestine was to come under an international protectorate, though it was not settled in the agreement as to how this protectorate would operate.

Sykes-Picot was kept secret, mostly because Britain had made contradictory commitments to other parties. It had promised (through a series of letters known as the McMahon-Hussein correspondence) to give independence to the Arabs who had helped the British fight the Ottomans in the first world war.

Later, in early November 1917, it also made a promise to Zionist Jews migrating to Palestine in the Balfour Declaration. In this public declaration, Foreign Secretary Lord Arthur Balfour effectively expressed Britain’s support for the Zionist project to create a Jewish state in Ottoman Palestine. Then-Prime Minister David Lloyd George also publicly supported both Zionism and Balfour’s statement.

The Sykes-Picot agreement did not stay secret for long.

In November 1917, the Bolsheviks, who were now in power in Russia following the fall of the Russian monarchy, published Sykes-Picot to the world.

Arab nationalists were enraged. So, too, were Zionists who had witnessed the Balfour Declaration just weeks prior. The Anglo-French declaration of November 1918 attempted to allay the fears of the Arabs by pledging to “assist in the establishment of national governments and administrations.” However, Arab distrust of the European powers only grew.

Borders moulded by colonial powers

In the years following, European powers started to reevaluate their position on Ottoman territory.

The French, who still wished to take control of Syria, had argued the newly formed League of Nations (a predecessor of the United Nations) could give France the territory under a mandate. A mandate is a formal authorisation to govern by the League of Nations.

The British said this would violate their earlier promises to the Arabs. Britain reiterated that the Anglo-French declaration of 1918 superseded Sykes-Picot.

Then came the San Remo Conference in 1920, an international meeting in Italy. This is where some of the popular readings into Sykes-Picot get muddled, as several aspects of the agreement were discarded. What remained the same was the French and British desire to add Ottoman territory to their dominions.

Here, the European victors of the first world war sought to finalise the division of Ottoman territories by slicing them into League of Nations mandates.

This included the French mandates of Syria and Lebanon, as well as the British mandates of Palestine and Mesopotamia. Britain also confirmed at the time its support for a Jewish national homeland, while protecting the local Palestinian population.

This is where we start to see borders of the modern Middle East form. The boundaries themselves differed from Sykes-Picot. But Britain and France, however, were still able to expand their colonial dominion in the region.

In 1921, a group of British representatives met in Cairo to finalise the borders of their mandates. This led to the creation of two states: Iraq under King Faisal and Transjordan (now Jordan) under King Abdullah – both of whom were members of the Arab Heshemite dynasty. Palestine was to remain under British mandatory control.

While these states had independence on paper, then-Colonial Secretary Winston Churchill believed that Transjordan would ultimately be controlled by the British Empire, giving the Heshemites only nominal independence.

Little consideration was given to the ethnic and religious diversity of these territories. Some argue this helped lead to modern-day sectarian conflict in Iraq.

Ripples that continue today

The collapse of the Ottoman Empire was always going to cause regional upheaval, but the colonial jockeying for territory clearly had lasting consequences.

Several regional conflicts were exacerbated during this period, but it would also directly lead to the creation of the state of Israel and the Arab-Israeli conflict.

This leads to the displacement of Palestinians and the Palestinian-Israeli conflict that still rages today.

Zionists and Arab nationalists viewed Palestine to have been originally promised to them by the British through the Balfour Declaration and McMahon-Hussein correspondence, respectfully.

But in Sykes-Picot, the British had no intention of promising Palestine to anyone but themselves.

As a result, the British mandate was characterised by anti-colonial violence from both Jews and Arabs.

When the British eventually abandoned control of Palestine in 1947, the UN partition plan for two states (one Jewish, one Arab) was supposed to take over. Instead, Arab-Israeli conflict began within hours of the partition taking effect.

So a lot happened after Sykes-Picot, with the map proposed in 1916 looking very different to what actually eventuated.

Many scholars argue it was the agreements that followed Sykes-Picot that were more consequential, and Sykes-Picot holds only “minor importance” by comparison.

While this may be true, Sykes-Picot is still emblematic of how consequential European colonial ambition was in the Middle East.

And while the borders outlined in the agreement did not eventuate, Britain and France still managed to get most of the territory they wanted, with little consideration of local populations.

The Sykes-Picot agreement is therefore one of many colonial projects that we are still feeling the ripples of today.The Conversation

Andrew Thomas, Lecturer in Middle East Studies, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

We’ve told this story for 2,500 years: how Hadestown playfully brings alive an ancient Greek myth

Lisa Tomasetti/Opera Australia
Louise PrykeUniversity of Sydney

“It’s an old song”, Hermes (Christine Anu) sings at the opening of Hadestown, but “we’re gonna sing it again and again”.

Based on a myth first told in Greece over 2,500 years ago, Hadestown is a modern retelling of the story of lovers Orpheus and Eurydice.

In ancient Greece, Orpheus was considered the greatest of all musicians, due to his divine heritage. His musical ability makes Orpheus uniquely well suited as the lead for a musical.

In the myth and the musical, Orpheus descends into the Underworld to retrieve his wife, Eurydice, after her untimely death. Moved by his powerful song, the king and queen of the Underworld, Hades and Persephone, allow Orpheus to leave their realm with Eurydice.

One condition: Orpheus must not look back at his wife until they have fully emerged from the underworld.

It’s a tale of a love from long ago

The story of Orpheus and Eurydice is one of the most retold myths from antiquity, likely due to its narrative focus on love, loss, and the human condition.

The ancient story of Orpheus and Eurydice is best known from Ovid’s Metamorphoses and Virgil’s Georgics. While Ovid places Orpheus in a world governed by unpredictable gods, Virgil’s focus on natural order means that the tragic events feel predetermined.

Oil painting, Orpheus leads Eurydice tenderly from the underworld.
Jean-Baptiste-Camille Corot, Orpheus Leading Eurydice from the Underworld, 1861. The Museum of Fine Arts, Houston

There are numerous other ancient versions, including a mention in Plato’s Symposium, where the philosopher (somewhat unfairly) suggests the musician lacked commitment to his lover.

During the Middle Ages, Eurydice was paralleled with biblical Eve. Eurydice and Eve were both figures known to have unfortunate encounters with snakes, and both were viewed as vulnerable to sin (in Eurydice’s case, being carried away by Hades).

Orpheus was sometimes seen as a Christ-like figure, with his descent to hell compared to Christ’s journey to save souls. Indeed, Orpheus is referenced by his fellow traveller to Hell, Dante, in his Inferno.

The lovers’ story inspired artists such as Rubens and Titian, and many operas, such as L’Orfeo by Monteverdi (1607). Indeed, operas featuring Orpheus are sufficiently numerous to have their own Wikipedia page.

The love story of Orpheus and Eurydice recently featured in the Netflix series Kaos (2024). The story is referenced in video games Don’t Look Back (2009) and Hades (2020).

Orpheus’ desperate journey to reconnect with his lost love holds continued relevance, thousands of years after its first telling.

Our lady of the underground

In the musical, the story of Orpheus and Eurydice is paralleled with the story of Hades and Persephone.

In ancient myth, the union of Hades and Persephone in the Underworld was said to cause the changing of the seasons.

Oil painting: woman dressed in gold holds her head in her hands.
Evelyn De Morgan, Demeter Mourning for Persephone,1906. Wikimedia Commons

Persephone’s divine mother, Demeter, goddess of the harvest and fertility, was so devastated by her daughter’s abduction by Hades that no plants would grow.

Zeus offered the solution: Persephone would spend half the year below ground and half above.

When Persephone was with Hades, the world would enter winter. The new life connected with the coming of spring signalled Demeter’s joy at the return of her beloved daughter.

Way down Hadestown

The musical, written by Anaïs Mitchell, is largely faithful to the broad arc of the ancient story of Orpheus and Eurydice. A notable exception is seen in the death of Eurydice. In the ancient myth, this is often attributed to snakebite; in the musical she chooses to descend to the Underworld due to economic desperation.

Having Eurydice choose to sign her life over to Hades arguably lends her a limited amount of agency, although she almost immediately regrets her decision.

The choice to give Eurydice a more distinctive voice is reminiscent of the works of Victorian poets Edward Dowden and Robert Browning, as well as later poems by Margaret Atwood and Carol Ann Duffy.

While in the ancient myth, Eurydice’s speech is limited to her whispered farewell, these poets all give us an insight into Eurydice’s thoughts and feelings. The musical continues this tradition of giving agency, hopes and opinions.

Hades looks down over the ensemble.
The story of Orpheus and Eurydice is paralleled in the musical with the story of Hades and Persephone. Lisa Tomasetti/Opera Australia

The dangers posed by unpredictable seasons, seen in the ancient myth of Hades and Persephone, is used in the musical to reflect modern concerns over climate change and environmental decline.

Rising seas and poor harvests threaten the lives of those inhabiting the industrialised world of Hadestown.

Orpheus attempts to bring a dystopian world “back in tune” through restoring environmental harmony, bringing a hopeful note to the tragic story.

Anu in a silver suit, in front of the band.
Anu is a reassuring presence as the narrator and Orpheus’ confidant, the god Hermes. Lisa Tomasetti/Opera Australia

Nothing changes

In this Australian restaging of the hit Broadway production, Noah Mullins rises to the significant challenge of portraying Orpheus, the greatest of all musicians. Abigail Adriano’s raw portrayal of Eurydice’s confinement in the underworld is genuinely moving.

Anu is a reassuring presence as the narrator and Orpheus’ confidant, the god Hermes. Adrian Tamburini’s powerful bass-baritone adds to the authority of Hades, and Elenoa Rokobaro gives a dazzling performance as Persephone. The chorus and mostly on-stage band are excellent.

Abigail Adriano and Noah Mullins embrace.
The story of Orpheus and Eurydice has been told for thousands of years. Lisa Tomasetti/Opera Australia

At its heart, the myth of Orpheus and Eurydice confronts one of the defining challenges of mortality: the reality that death can separate us from those we love and value most.

In retelling the myth, Hadestown offers timely meditations on the power of creativity and human connection, bringing this ancient love story alive again for modern audiences.

Hadestown is in Sydney until April 26, then touring to Melbourne.The Conversation

Louise Pryke, Honorary Research Associate, Department of Classics and Ancient History, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

President of ABHS Heads South on Historic Replica HMB Endeavour

Geoff Searl OAM, president of the Avalon Beach Historical Society, was aboard the HMB Endeavour that sailed south to take part in the Australian Wooden Boat Festival a few weeks back.

The Australian-built replica of James Cook's HMB Endeavour is one of the world's most accurate maritime replica vessels.

'Helming during one of our watches east of Gabo Island - 2 of our watch on the helm and the navigator in fluoro.' - GS (Geoff is in orange on right)

At right in orange: Geoff Helming during one of his watches east of Gabo Island - '2 of our watch on the helm and the navigator in fluoro' - GS. Photo supplied.

The 'Follow the Wind' Endeavour voyage ran from Sydney to Hobart, Tasmania, from January 28 to February 7, 2025. 

This was an opportunity to experience eighteenth-century historic replica sailing and an obvious match for a gentleman who has done so much for decades to honour and celebrate our local history in between his 'voyages' on the estuary aboard his own vessel or being on Patrol on the sands of Avalon Beach itself, his eyes always turned seawards. 

The Australian National Maritime Museum (ANMM) offered thirty positions for active crew and a further four for supernumeraries (non-working passengers) on each voyage - getting there, and then a return voyage back to Sydney. Geoff securd a place on the southward 'Follow the Wind' stage. 

Geoff explained: ''I was one of 34 applicants from 360 who applied to be a part of the crew.

We were warned that it wasn’t going to be a cruise and we would not be referred to as passengers but part of a team responsible for getting her to Hobart for the National Classic and Wooden Boat Festival.''

More insights on the HMB Endeavour, AWBF and from the Captain's Log run as this week's Aquatics Feature.

Australian Government invests $12.5 million for King Wally to tackle CTE

February 21, 2025
The Australian Government states it is continuing its commitment to tackle dementia, with a $12.5 million funding package to support people living with probable chronic traumatic encephalopathy (CTE).

CTE is a form of dementia linked to repeated head injuries or concussions, which may result in changes in personality, behaviour, and cognitive function.

Research suggests the number and strength of all head impacts over a lifetime—not just concussions—have a significant impact on the likelihood of developing CTE.

The $12.5 million in funding will be provided to Dementia Australia, who have worked with rugby league immortal Wally Lewis to raise awareness of the impacts of CTE.

Dementia Australia will develop and deliver a national pilot program of support services for people impacted by CTE, and a national awareness and education program in schools to protect the brains of Australian children.

Dementia Australia’s campaign will be informed by consultation with teachers, parents, students, researchers, sports organisations, medical experts and people with living experience of probable CTE.

Sport plays a critical role in Australian life but we know concussion and sports-related head injuries impact young people more than any other age group.

In Australia in 2021-22, around 1,600 people between the ages of five and 24 were hospitalised with sports-related concussion.

The Government recently released the National Dementia Action Plan 2024-2034, marking its commitment to Australia being more dementia inclusive.

Minister for Aged Care and Sport, Anika Wells said:
“It is critical we educate sporting clubs, teachers, parents and school children about the importance of looking after our brains for life and who better to get that message across than The King, Wally Lewis.

“We have one brain and we need to look after it – and investing in support and building a better understanding of CTE and its impact on individuals, families and communities, is money well spent.

“We know that concussion and sports-related head injuries affect young people more than any other age group, so we want to make sure our kids have the knowledge and skills to help them compete more safely.

Wally Lewis AM, Dementia Australia Ambassador said: 
“On behalf of all people impacted by CTE I say thank you.

“We need to be talking to the whole community about protecting our brains and brain health and continuing to support people who are impacted by the effects of repeated head injury and are at risk of CTE.”

Senator Marielle Smith, Deputy Chair of Senate Committee Inquiry into Concussion and Repeated Head Trauma in Contact Sports stated: 
“This measure is a vital step in understanding more about CTE, furthering the national conversation and supporting those affected.”

New Chair - New members announced for the National Aged Care Advisory Council

February 13, 2025
The Australian Government is pleased to announce the new Chair and members of the National Aged Care Advisory Council.

Professor Sue Gordon will join the Council as Chair in January 2025.   

Professor Gordon brings a wealth of experience in the aged care sector, having previously been Research Director at Aged Care Research and Industry Innovation Australia (ARIIA).

Professor Sue Gordon is joined by new members: 
  • Professor Tanya Buchanan, CEO of Dementia Australia
  • Associate Professor Mark Yates, Geriatrician at Ballarat Health Services,
  • Charles Moore, CEO of BaptistCare, and
  • Peter Doukas OAM, Chair of Federation of Ethnic Communities’ Councils of Australia (FECCA).
Returning members are: 
  • Anne Burgess AM,
  • Craig Gear OAM, and
  • Dr Sandra Iuliano.
The Advisory Council provide expert advice to government on key matters relating to the aged care sector, including the implementation of aged care reforms, improving navigation and delivery of aged care services, and building the capability of providers and workforce to meet the changing requirements under the reforms. 

The National Aged Care Advisory Council was established in response to recommendation 7 of the Royal Commission into Aged Care Quality and Safety final report.  
 
 
Minister for Aged Care, Anika Wells stated:
 
“During the past three years, the National Aged Care Advisory Council has played an integral role in the government’s mission to improve the quality of aged care in Australia.
 
“I look forward to working with Professor Gordon and new and returning members in 2025.
 
"Our focus for 2025 will not just be delivering Support at Home program and the new Aged Care Act but communicating with the sector to build confidence through the transition.
 
“Reform this significant cannot be achieved without the support and advice of groups like NACAC.”
 
Professor Sue Gordon, Chair of the National Aged Care Advisory Council said:
 
“I’m looking forward to working closely with my fellow Council members to provide trusted and timely advice to Government that drives positive change and well considered outcomes across aged care.
 
“2025 promises to be another busy year and the Council is keen to continue to engage closely with the sector and government, particularly on key reforms such as the new Aged Care Act and the Support at Home program.”

Scam Protection Framework passage a positive move for older Australians

The passing of the Scams Protection Framework through Parliament on Thursday February 13 2025 is an important step towards ensuring all Australians – including older Australians who are the most impacted – are given greater protection against scams.

COTA Australia – the leading advocacy organisation for older people – Chief Executive Officer, Patricia Sparrow said urgent action was essential, with older Australians losing $99.6 million to scammers in 2024.

“Older Australians are falling victim to scam activity at alarming rates, with over 62,000 reported incidents resulting in nearly $100 million in losses last year. These sophisticated scams are having a devastating impact on retirement savings,” Ms Sparrow said.

“This framework will ensure banks, telecommunications companies and social media platforms are held accountable for preventing scams and properly compensating victims when prevention fails, which is crucial.

Ms Sparrow said it’s important to note the concerns raised at the Senate Inquiry into the issue, including potential complexity around compensation.

“There’s a clear need to ensure subordinate legislation, industry codes and the external complaint resolution process is established in a way that ensures compensation will, in practice, be achievable under the scheme.

Ms Sparrow said it is also crucial that those impacted are not just consulted about the next phases, but that the next phases deliver practical protections for Australians.

“While we welcome the Australian Financial Complaints Authority commitment to consult with all stakeholders during the industry design phase, we must ensure this translates into real, practical protections.

“With thousands of older Australians losing their savings each year, we need a system that delivers genuine accountability and accessible compensation pathways.

“The scheduled review in 2027 will be a critical checkpoint to assess whether these measures are delivering the protection older Australians deserve, or whether stronger safeguards are needed. We cannot allow another generation of retirees to lose their life savings to scammers.”

“This isn’t just about protecting older people – it’s about ensuring all Australians can participate in the digital economy with confidence, knowing their financial wellbeing is safeguarded.”

NSA sends Valentine to Treasure ahead of cash mandate submission

A crowd of National Seniors Australia supporters has gathered around a 12.6m x 3.3m billboard in the heart of Brisbane’s CBD that highlights NSA’s submission to the government’s keep cash mandate consultation, due February 14th. The billboard reads: “Roses are red, violets are blue, Dear Treasurer, KEEP CASH, banks & ATMS too!”

The Keep Cash Billboard. Photo: NSA

NSA Chief Executive Officer Chris Grice said the KEEP CASH valentine poem is a declaration of support for the government’s move to ensure cash remains accepted, as detailed the mandating cash acceptance consultation paper.

“Behind this light-hearted message is a serious message about the need to keep cash, banks, and ATMs for older Australians and others who rely on and use cash and traditional banking services,” Mr Grice said.

“Seniors, like most people, value the convenience of card payments; but as a key part of the payments and financial system, cash must be accessible and accepted.

“As a peak consumer advocacy body leading the KEEP CASH campaign, NSA, together with our 255,000 community members, welcomed the opportunity to contribute to the government’s mandating cash acceptance consultation.

“As detailed in our submission, we need to keep cash for a range of reasons including reliability during outages including natural disasters; privacy, security, and trust; and budgeting. Cash is easier for people living with a disability such as vision impairment or cognitive decline to use; it allows for small payments to children, grandchildren as well as charities; and it negates bank charges and card charges.

“While we congratulate the government for taking this step to ensure cash remains accepted, we are disappointed by the extent of the potential limitations. Exactly what items are deemed ‘essential’ goods and services are restricted. Details such as how the mandate will operate in practice, how it will be enforced and communicated, supports for small businesses, and impacts in regional areas needs to be determined. “

As cash use declines, so does the number of access points available to withdraw and deposit. Since 2017 (until June 2024), ATMs have declined by 8,326 (from 32,095 to 23,769). For this same period, bank branches have declined by 2,334 (from 5,694 to 3,360).

“We need to KEEP CASH, banks, and ATMs and hope, with all our heart, the Federal Treasurer receives our Valentine, considers our submission and the varied needs of cash users around the country.
“We’re not after dinner or flowers, but simply for people to be able to access and use cash just as they always have.”

For more information about NSA’s KEEP CASH campaign please visit here

Related - Week 3 February 2025 reports:

Private health insurance report card shows reform is long overdue: AMA

February 12, 2025
The Australian Medical Association is urging consumers to check their private health insurance policy and compare it with other products to determine whether they are getting value for money ahead of an inevitable, but yet unknown, premium increase on 1 April.

The AMA’s Private Health Insurance Report Card 2024, released today, sheds light on major issues in the private health sector, including the overall complexity of choosing the right health fund and level of cover.

AMA President Dr Danielle McMullen says choosing private health insurance is a confusing experience, with the report card showing rebates for identical procedures vary greatly between insurers.

“Consumers should look at the upfront premium cost of the policy, but they should also closely look at the rebates for any procedures they are likely to need,” Dr McMullen said.

“For example, we found a $510 difference between the highest and lowest rebates for the uncomplicated delivery of a baby.

“Private health insurance premiums will inevitably rise on 1 April by an as-yet undetermined amount. It is an important time for consumers to look at their options.”

The report card also confirms that over the past five years, net insurance profits (including net private health insurance investment income) have risen much more sharply than benefits paid to patients.

“While net profits for insurers have increased by almost 50 per cent, the patient rebate for medical services has increased by just over 10 per cent,” Dr McMullen said.

“There’s no question private health insurers need to make a surplus to be sustainable, but it is clear they should be returning more in benefits to patients as a proportion of premiums.

“Our analysis shows 84 per cent of hospital insurance policy premiums were returned to patients in the form of rebates and other benefits for hospital treatment last financial year — a small improvement from the previous financial year, but still well below where it should be."

The AMA is calling on the federal government to mandate insurers to return at least 90 per cent of private health insurance premiums back to consumers in the form of benefits. It is also calling for an independent private health system authority to drive long-term reform, provide appropriate regulation and ensure patients get real value for money.

“Urgent reform is needed, as patients are finding it increasingly difficult to access care under their private health insurance policies,” Dr McMullen said.

“In the past few years, 70 private hospitals have closed or downgraded their services in critical areas such as maternity, mental health and reconstructive surgery.

“An independent body is needed now more than ever. In 2024, we saw insurers and hospitals getting into stoushes over funding — leading to major uncertainty for patients.”

What’s the difference between ageing and frailty? One is inevitable – the other is not

PeopleImages.com - Yuri A/Shutterstock
Julee McDonaghUniversity of Wollongong and Caleb FergusonUniversity of Wollongong

Ageing is a normal part of the life course. It doesn’t matter how many green smoothies you drink, or how many “anti-ageing” skin care products you use, you can’t stop the ageing process.

But while we’re all getting older, not everyone who ages will necessarily become frail. Ageing and frailty are closely related, but they’re not the same thing.

Let’s break down the difference between the two.

What is ageing?

On a biological level, ageing is the result of the build-up of cellular and molecular damage in the body over time.

The ageing process causes a gradual decline in physical and mental function, a higher risk of disease, and eventual (and unavoidable) death.

Still, some people think they can cheat the system, spending millions trying to stay young forever. While we may be able to reduce the appearance of ageing, ultimately there’s no magic pill to increase our longevity.

Around one in six Australians are over the age of 65 (16% of the total population). Yet as individuals and a society many of us still have a fear of ageing.

But what is it about ageing we are so afraid of? When it comes down to it, many people are probably less afraid of ageing, and more afraid of becoming frail.

A senior couple dancing.
Ageing is inevitable – but frailty isn’t. Rawpixel.com/Shutterstock

What is frailty?

Frailty is defined as a state of vulnerability characterised by a loss of reserve across multiple parts of the body.

Frailty is generally characterised by several physical symptoms, such as weakness, slow walking speed, exhaustion, unintentional weight loss, and low activity level.

Lower bone density and osteoporosis (a condition where the bones become weak and brittle) are also associated with frailty, increasing the risk of falls and fractures.

Notably, someone who is frail is less able to “bounce back” (or recover) after a stressor event compared to someone who is not frail. A stressor event could be, for example, having a fall, getting a urinary infection, or even being admitted to hospital.

Frailty is more common in older people. But in some cases, frailty can affect younger people too. For example, people with advanced chronic diseases, such as heart failure, can develop frailty much younger.

A senior woman sitting in a wheelchair.
Frailty is more common in people who are older. Fit Ztudio/Shutterstock

Frailty is dynamic. While it can get worse over time, in some cases frailty can also be reversed or even prevented through health and lifestyle changes.

For example, we know physical inactivity and a sedentary lifestyle can significantly increase a person’s risk of becoming frail. On the flip side, evidence shows doing more exercise can reduce frailty in older adults.

There are other lifestyle modifications we can make too. And the earlier we make these changes, the better.

Preventing frailty

Here are some key things you can do to help prevent frailty:

1. Get moving

Exercise more, including resistance training (such as squats and lunges, or grab some stretchy resistance bands). Many of these sorts of exercises can be done at home. YouTube has some great resources.

You might also consider joining a gym, or asking your GP about seeing an accredited exercise physiologist or physiotherapist. Medicare subsidies may be available for these specialists.

The physical activity guidelines for older Australians recommend at least 30 minutes of moderate intensity physical activity on most days or preferably every day.

The guidelines also highlight the importance of incorporating different types of activities (such as resistance, balance or flexibility exercises) and reducing the time you spend sitting down.

2. Stay socially active

Social isolation and loneliness can contribute to the progression of frailty. Reach out to friends and family for support or contact local community groups that you may be able to join. This might include your local Zumba class or bridge club.

3. Ask your doctor or pharmacist to regularly check your medications

“Polypharmacy” (when someone is prescribed five or more medications) is associated with an increased risk of frailty. The presence of frailty can also interfere with how the body absorbs medicines.

Home medicine reviews are available for older adults with a chronic medical condition or a complex medication regimen. These reviews aims to help people get the most benefit from their medicines and reduce their risk of experiencing adverse effects.

Always consult your doctor before making any changes to your current medications.

4. Eat a protein-rich diet with plenty of fruit and vegetables

Low nutrient intake can negatively impact physical function and may increase your risk of becoming frail. There’s some evidence to suggest eating more protein may delay the onset of frailty.

A food-first approach is best when looking to increase the protein in your diet. Protein is found in foods such as lean meats, poultry, seafood, eggs, dairy products, legumes and nuts.

Adults over 50 should aim to eat 64 grams of protein per day for men and 46g per day for women. Adults over 70 should aim for 81g per day for men and 57g per day for women.

Ask your GP for a referral to a dietitian who can provide advice on a dietary regime that is best for you.

Supplements may be recommended if you are struggling to meet your protein needs from diet alone.The Conversation

Julee McDonagh, Senior Research Fellow of Frailty Research, University of Wollongong and Caleb Ferguson, Professor of Nursing and Director of Health Innovations, University of Wollongong

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Serbia is facing its largest-ever protest movement – why is Europe looking away?

Andi HoxhajKing's College London

On November 1 2024, the roof of a newly €55 million renovated railway station in Novi Sad, Serbia’s second biggest city, collapsed and killed 15 people. The deaths sparked Serbia’s largest wave of student-led anti-government protests since Yugoslavia’s disintegration in 2000.

The protests pose the most serious threat to Serbian president Aleksandar Vučić’s power since he became prime minister in 2014, and president in 2017. The protest movement has highlighted Vučić’s growing authoritarian rule and widespread corruption in Serbia.

Serbians believe that the deadly roof collapse was caused by government corruption. The station was renovated by a Chinese-led consortium as part of China’s Belt and Road Initiative investments and growing political ties with Serbia. The Chinese consortium and Vučić refused to publish the railway station restoration procurement contract after protesters demanded it.

The protesters have four demands: the publication of all procurement documents concerning the renovation of the station, a stop to the prosecution of students arrested during the protests, the prosecution of police and security forces involved in attacking students during the protests and a 20% increase in the budget for higher education.

However, the Serbian government and media — most of which Vučić controls through a network of political patronage and cronyism – are downplaying the protests and threatening students.

Vučić claims that foreign powers are behind the protests to topple him and destabilise Serbia. Russia and China have fully supported Vučić’s claims that Serbia is the target of a western plot to orchestrate the protesters and overthrow Vučić.

Serbia’s history of corruption

In the decade after former president Slobodan Milošević was overthrown, Serbia implemented a number of democratic and anti-corruption reforms. As a result, the country climbed to 72nd place out of 180 countries in Transparency International’s Corruption Perception Index in 2013. Serbia opened EU membership negotiations the following year.

However, since Vučić took office, Serbia has become more authoritarian. Corruption is widespread, and the government has exploited tensions and instability with most of its western Balkans neighbours, primarily Kosovo, for political gain.

Serbia was downgraded to partly free by Freedom House in 2019, and the V-Dem Institute (Varieties of Democracy) labelled it as as an “electoral autocracy”. Serbia dropped to 105th place in Transparency International’s Corruption Perception Index in 2024.

Many international organisations monitoring anti-corruption, human rights and democracy have reported Vučić’s authoritarian tendencies and corruption in Serbia.

A report from Amnesty International published in December 2024 describes Serbia as a “digital prison”. It has been reported that Serbian authorities are using surveillance technology to monitor and suppress the protesters and other political opponents.

International response

The EU has mostly stayed silent since the protests began. After receiving letters from NGOs and activists, EU Commissioner for Enlargement Marta Kos stated that the EU is following the protests in Serbia, and backed the rule of law and freedom of assembly.

This is a far cry from the EU’s response to protests in Georgia last year. EU commission president Ursula von der Leyen said “the Georgian people are fighting for democracy” – yet has stayed silent on the protests in Serbia.

Some argue this (lack of) response is because in August 2024, Vučić made a deal with the EU to provide lithium to the bloc – a boon to the EU’s electric vehicle production. There were also widespread protests against the lithium deal over its transparency and concerns that the mine would cause irreversible environmental destruction to Serbia’s Jadar Valley.

The US has also stayed quiet. President Donald Trump’s associates were recently granted permission to build a Trump hotel in Belgrade. Further, Rod Blagojevich, the former governor of Illinois who served eight years in prison for corruption, is being considered as the new US ambassador to Serbia. Blagojevich, whose father is from Serbia, expressed support for Vučić and visited the country.

What is next for Serbia?

Serbia’s prime minister, Miloš Vučević, and Novi Sad’s mayor, Milan Đurić, both resigned in an effort to de-escalate the protests. Following the resignation of the PM, Vučić has said that he is open to the new government making the documents about the station collapse public.

While this may be a sign that the protests are loosening Vučić’s grip, the movement has only intensified, spreading to more than 200 towns on February 1.

Vučić has pledged to either form a new government within one month, or organise a new parliamentary election in the spring to address the protesters’ demands. However, this would barely paper over the cracks of systemic corruption in Serbia.

The student movement has revealed how democracy and the rule of law have eroded since Vučić came to power in 2014.

The protests have also exposed the international community’s complicity in supporting Vučić under the premise that he is a constructive partner for regional cooperation and stability in the western Balkans.

But to have a lasting impact in Serbia, the protesters should also demand a transitional government to undertake anti-corruption and democratic reforms to strengthen the rule of law, and to organise the next elections.

At the heart of these reforms must be constitutional changes, such as term limits on elected public office. Research shows stricter term limits can reduce the costs of corruption, abuse of power and attacks on the rule of law and democracy.

Term limits would also prevent figures with authoritarian tendencies, like Vučić, from becoming the state themselves with unlimited and unaccountable power.

The EU also has a role to play here. By not putting pressure on Vučić, the EU is empowering his authoritarian tendencies. Second, in EU membership negotiations, it should introduce electoral reform as a new requirement for all EU candidate countries.

Other leaders in the western Balkans have adopted similar authoritarian government models and patronage systems as Serbia to maintain power. These would undermine and threaten the EU rule of law, if they were to join the bloc today.

The EU must also publicly support student protesters who want Serbia to become more democratic and accountable. After all, the students are fighting for the very ideals on which the EU was founded.The Conversation

Andi Hoxhaj, Lecturer in Law, King's College London

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Have your say: Remaking the retirement villages Regulation

Closes: March 12 2025
In NSW, retirement village operators are regulated by the Retirement Villages Regulation 2017 (the current Regulation), which supports the Retirement Villages Act 1999 (the Act).

The current Regulation will expire on 1 September 2025. Remaking the Regulation allows the NSW Government to consider feedback on how to improve, modernise and streamline the current laws.

The proposed Retirement Villages Regulation 2025 (proposed Regulation) makes significant changes to the asset management plan requirements for retirement villages. The updates aim to improve transparency for residents and reduce unnecessary administrative work for operators.

The key changes include:
  • reducing the amount of information that operators must record on the retirement villages asset register
  • requiring operators to prepare a 1-year capital maintenance report as part of the annual budget process, instead of a 3-year report
  • requiring operators to record the ‘remaining effective life’ of capital items instead of ‘effective life’.
The proposed Regulation also makes other minor changes to clarify the laws and improve how they operate, for example, by ensuring key information is disclosed in a form that is easier to understand and accessible.

Changes are described in detail in the:
Your feedback will help to ensure retirement village laws balance the rights of residents and support operators.


Provider finance information updated on My Aged Care website

February 20, 2025
Knowing how aged care providers operate and manage their finances can help older people, their families and carers compare and choose the right provider for them.

The ‘Finance & operations’ tab of the Find a provider tool on the My Aged Care website shows what aged care homes and Home Care Package providers spend on care, staffing, food, and other expenses.

Publishing this information aims to improve the transparency of aged care services in Australia.

It also allows providers to compare their performance against the sector and identify opportunities for improvement.

This is the first update since the information was published in February 2024 that includes data from providers’ annual reporting, as well as quarterly reporting.

Have your say: Restrictive practices legislative framework

Experiences of people with disability and their supporter
Closes: March 14 2025

The Department of Communities and Justice is seeking feedback on a proposed new framework about using restrictive practices on people with disability.

We want the framework to reduce use of restrictive practices and stop them being used where this is possible.

Restrictive practices are interventions that restrict the rights or movement of a person to change their behaviour - when that behaviour is likely to place them or others in serious danger.

An example of a restrictive practice is using a medication to influence a person's behaviour rather than treat an illness. Another example is restricting where a person can go.

The Department of Communities and Justice has released a Consultation Paper on the proposed framework.

An Easy Read summary is available. If you would prefer you can also read the full Consultation Paper.

Tell us what you think
You can give your feedback by completing a survey here by Friday 14 March 2025:
  • Survey for people with a disability who have experienced restrictive practices in NSW
  • Survey for supporters - family, carers, guardians and any other supporters of people who experience restrictive practices in NSW
If you would like to provide feedback in another way, please:
  • Email: policy@dcj.nsw.gov.au to provide written or audio file feedback
  • Speak to a staff member by emailing: policy@dcj.nsw.gov.au to arrange a conversation
  • Post your written feedback to: Locked Bag 5000, Parramatta, NSW, 2124
Your feedback will help inform the NSW Government as to whether to pursue the reform.

Unrest in Bangladesh is revealing the bias at the heart of Google’s search engine

Abdul AzizMonash University

Google’s search engine handles the vast majority of online searches worldwide. By one estimate, it fields 6.3 million queries every second.

Because of the search engine’s enormous scale, its outputs can have outsized effects. And, while Google’s search results are shaped by ostensibly neutral rules and processes, research has shown these algorithms often produce biased results.

This problem of algorithmic bias is again being highlighted by recent escalating tensions between India and Bangladesh and cases of violence against Bangladeshi citizens in India and violence against Hindus in Bangladesh. A pro-Indian misinformation and disinformation campaign is exploiting this algorithmic bias to further its agenda – an agenda that has been described as Islamophobic and alarmist.

This kind of misinformation has been implicated in several riots and violent incidents in Bangladesh.

All of this serves as an important reminder of the power Google’s search engine has in shaping public perceptions of any event – and its vulnerability to being exploited. It’s also an important reminder to anyone who uses Google’s search engine to engage critically with the results it dishes up, rather than accepting them at face value.

What is algorithmic bias?

The algorithms that power Google’s search engine are trained on massive amounts of data. This data is gathered by computer bots which crawl billions of pages on the Internet and automatically analyse their content and quality. This information is stored in a large database, which Google’s search engine relies on to serve up relevant results whenever it receives a query.

But this process doesn’t capture every website on the Internet. It is also governed by predetermined rules about what is high quality and what is low quality, and reflects existing biases in data. For example, even though only 16% of the world’s population speaks English, it accounts for 55% of all written content online.

This means the reality of life on the ground in non-English speaking countries is often not reflected in Google search results. This is especially true for those countries located in the Global South.

This lack of representation perpetuates real-world biases. It can also hinder a nuanced public understanding of global issues.

What’s happening between Bangladesh and India?

Relations between Muslim-majority Bangladesh and neighbouring India, which is currently led by the Hindu nationalist BJP government, have deteriorated recently.

In August last year, youth-led anti-government protests erupted in Bangladesh.

These protests resulted in the downfall of prime minister Sheikh Hasina’s long-lasting autocratic regime, which had been supported by the Indian government.

An interim government filled the void. But certain Indian media outlets have leveraged sensitive issues such as Hindu minority rights to undermine its legitimacy.

In November, Bangladeshi authorities arrested Hindu leader Chinmoy Krishna Das on sedition charges over allegations he had disrespected the Bangladeshi flag. This triggered violent clashes between his supporters and police. These clashes resulted in the death of a Muslim lawyer.

Hindu activists also attacked a Bangladeshi consulate in India.

There have also been verified instances of mob violence against Hindus in Bangladesh. However, the Bangladeshi government claims these incidents are politically motivated rather than communal attacks.

The unrest intensified earlier this month, with thousands of protestors destroying the family home of deposed prime minister Sheikh Hasina in the Bangladeshi capital, Dhaka.

Boosting a disinformation campaign

A disinformation campaign based in India has exaggerated some cases of religious violence against Hindus in Bangladesh.

This campaign has been boosted by Google’s algorithmic bias.

For example, an analysis by the Tech Global Institute of Google search results about Chinmoy Krishna Das’s arrest between November 25 and December 20 last year found a “consistent pattern of bias”.

Specifically, Indian news outlets – including Hindu ultranationalist news outlets – “disproportionately” dominated the top search results. This overshadowed

factual reporting from credible Bangladeshi media outlets […] despite the search originating from within Bangladesh, the country where the incident originally occurred.

This bias was also evident in search queries coming from overseas. For example, roughly 90% of the top results about Chinmoy Krishna Das were from Indian outlets when searched from Australia and the United States. Bangladeshi news outlets featured on the thirteenth and fourteenth pages of results.

Indian news outlets – unlike their Bangladeshi counterparts – produce a substantial amount of content in English. They also employ more advanced search engine optimisation – or SEO – techniques, such as using effective keywords and sensationalist headlines. This gives them an advantage in Google search results compared to their Bangladeshi counterparts.

Another investigation by Bangladeshi fact-checking outlet Rumor Scanner in December 2024 found 72% of social media accounts spreading fake and misinformation are located in India.

The Conversation asked Google a series of questions about its search engine. It did not receive a response.

An illustrative case of a global problem

Bangladesh is an illustrative case of the global problem of algorithmic bias. It highlights how search engines can be exploited to promote disinformation and misinformation and powerfully shape people’s perceptions about what’s happening in the world.

It also highlights how everybody should think critically about the information they find online about the current situation in Bangladesh. Or about any news event, for that matter.

The case also reinforces the urgent need for policymakers, tech companies and governments to work together to effectively address algorithmic bias. This is especially urgent in the Global South, where marginal voices remain silenced.The Conversation

Abdul Aziz, Lecturer in Media and Communication Studies, School of Arts and Social Sciences, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AvPals Term 1 2025


Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps Seniors learn and improve their computer skills. It is a not for profit organisation run by volunteers. 


Started in 2000 it now has 20+ trainers and many hundreds of students. At a really low cost (about $50 a school term) they can provide one-to-one training on most matters connected with computing and related technologies like mobile phones and digital cameras. From the smallest problem (how to hold the mouse!) to much more serious matters, there is a trainer who can help.

We offer “one to one” personal tuition or special short courses in the training rooms under the Catholic Church in Avalon. Training is conducted Monday to Friday from 9am to 4pm. For more information visit AVPALS web site www.avpals.com or phone 02 8064 3574

Keep up to date on our Facebook page

Find out more at: www.avpals.com

Seniors Festival 2025: Local events

The Manly to Barrenjoey Seniors Festival celebrates and recognises seniors for the role they play and the contributions they make to our local community.

The official Festival theme for 2025 is ‘Time to Shine!'

The Festival will run from Monday 3 March to Sunday 30 March 2025, corresponding with NSW Seniors Festival which runs from 3 to 16 March.

An events programme is now available to peruse with some great options to get you out and about and even some exercise classes run online so you can do those at home.

Some are free, others have a small fee.
Have a look and book in early before those with limited places fill up. 

Avalon Beach SLSC turns 100 in 2025!

2025 marks 100 years of Avalon Beach Surf Lifesaving Club.

Planning is underway to celebrate the achievement of Avalon Beach SLSC's Volunteer Surf Lifesavers keeping Avalon Beach safe for residents and visitors for 100 years!

A number of celebratory events and activities spread throughout the Club's 100th year, are currently under development, and will be progressively announced through the year. 

The range of celebrations will involve past and present members, the Avalon Beach community, as well as visitors to our area.  The Surf Club is a focal point in and for the Avalon Beach community, so it is fitting that the community takes pride in this milestone.

Initially, so that our records are up to date, we invite all past members of our Club to Email the Club at 100years@avalonbeachslsc.com.au  with your updated details so we can keep you informed of what will be happening for members.

If you know of others that may be interested in the 100th Anniversary celebrations please pass the message on. 

The Club looks to the future, acknowledging and building on the legacy left from those who came before us over the past 100 years.

Avalon Beach SLSC Centenary Committee

Why did life evolve to be so colourful? Research is starting to give us some answers

Jonathan GoldenbergCC BY-NC-ND
Jonathan GoldenbergLund University

Picture a primordial Earth: a world of muted browns, greys and greens. Fast forward to today, and Earth teems with a kaleidoscope of colours. From the stunning feathers of male peacocks to the vivid blooms of flowers, the story of how Earth became colourful is one of evolution. But how and why did this explosion of colour happen? Recent research is giving us clues into this part of Earth’s narrative.

The journey towards a colourful world began with the evolution of vision, which initially developed to distinguish light from dark over 600 million years ago. This ability probably arose in early organisms, like single-celled bacteria, enabling them to detect changes in their environment, such as the direction of sunlight. Over time, more sophisticated visual systems evolved and allowed organisms to perceive a broader spectrum of light.

For example, trichromatic vision – the ability to detect three distinct wavelengths such as red, green and blue – originated approximately 500-550 million years ago. This coincided with the “Cambrian explosion” (about 541 million years ago), which marked a rapid diversification of life, including the development of advanced sensory systems like vision.

The first animals with trichromatic vision were arthropods (a group of invertebrates that includes insects, spiders and crustaceans). Trichromatic vision emerged 420-500 million years ago in vertebrates. This adaptation helped ancient animals to navigate their environments and detect predators or prey in ways that monochromatic vision could not.

Fossil evidence from trilobites, extinct marine arthropods that roamed the seas over 500 million years ago, suggests they had compound eyes. This means eyes with multiple small lenses, each capturing a fraction of the visual field, which combine to form a mosaic image. These eyes could detect multiple wavelengths, providing an evolutionary advantage in dim marine environments by enhancing the animal’s visibility and motion detection.

Lizard clinging onto tree
Boyd’s forest dragon blends in with its habitat. Jonathan GoldenbergCC BY-NC-ND

The stage was set: organisms could see a colourful world before they became colourful themselves.

The first burst of conspicuous colour came from plants. Early plants began producing colourful fruits and flowers, such as red, yellow, orange, blue and purple, to attract animals to help plants with seed dispersal and pollination.

Analytical models based on present-day plant variation suggest that colourful fruits, which appeared roughly 300-377 million years ago, co-evolved with seed-dispersing animals, such as early relatives of mammals. Flowers and their pollinators emerged later, around 140-250 million years ago. These innovations marked a turning point in Earth’s palette.

The rise of flowering plants (angiosperms) in the Cretaceous period, over 100 million years ago, brought an explosion of colour, as flowers evolved brighter and more vibrant hues than seeds to attract pollinators like bees, butterflies and birds.

Conspicuous colouration in animals emerged less than 140 million years ago. Before, animals were mostly muted browns and greys. This timeline suggests that colour evolution was not inevitable, shaped instead by ecological and evolutionary factors, which could have led to different outcomes under different circumstances.

Vibrant colours often evolved as a kind of signalling to attract mates, deter predators, or establish dominance. Sexual selection probably played a strong role in driving these changes.

Dinosaurs provide some of the most striking evidence of early animal colouration. Fossilised melanosomes (pigment-containing cell structures called organelles) in feathered dinosaurs like Anchiornis reveal a vivid red plumage.

These feathers probably served display purposes, signalling fitness to mates or intimidating rivals. Similarly, the fossilised scales of a green and black ten million-year-old snake fossil suggest early use of colour for signalling or camouflage.

Green snake with stripes across its face.
This snake, a juveline Bornean keeled green pit viper comes in a variety of colours. Jonathan GoldenbergCC BY-NC-ND

The evolution of colour is not always straightforward. Take poison frogs, for instance. These small amphibians display striking hues of blue, yellow, or red, not to attract mates but to warn predators of their toxicity, a phenomenon known as aposematism.

But some of their close relatives, equally toxic, blend into their environments. So why evolve bright warning signals when camouflage could also deter predators? The answer lies in the local predator community and the cost of producing colour. In regions where predators learn to associate vibrant colours with toxicity, conspicuous coloration is an effective survival strategy. In other contexts, blending in may work.

Three clownfish with their orange and white striped bodies
Clownfish lure other fish to anemone with their bright colours. Jonathan GoldenbergCC BY-NC-ND

Unlike many mammals, which have dichromatic vision and see fewer colours, most primates including humans have trichromatic vision, enabling us to perceive a broader range of hues, including reds. This probably helped our ancestors locate fruit in forests and likely played a role in social signalling. We see flowers differently from pollinators like bees, which can detect ultraviolet patterns invisible to us, highlighting how colour is tailored to a species’ ecological needs.

A world still changing

Earth’s palette isn’t static. Climate change, habitat loss, and human influence are altering the selective pressures on colouration, potentially reshaping the visual landscape of the future. For example, some fish species exposed to polluted waters are losing their vibrant colours, as toxins disrupt pigment production or visual communication.

As we look to the past, the story of Earth’s colours is one of gradual transformation punctuated by bursts of innovation. From the ancient seas where trilobites first saw the world in colour to the dazzling displays of modern birds and flowers, life on Earth has been painting its canvas for over half a billion years.

What will the next chapter of this vibrant story hold?The Conversation

Jonathan Goldenberg, Postdoctoral Researcher in Evolutionary Biology, Lund University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

ASIO boss expects more communal violence in worsening security environment in Australia

Michelle GrattanUniversity of Canberra

ASIO chief Mike Burgess has warned that over the next five years Australia’s security environment will become more dynamic, diverse and degraded, with “more security surprises” in the second half of the decade than in the first.

In his Annual Threat Assessment delivered on Wednesday night, Burgess predicted more communal violence attacks and foreshadowed Australia’s defence system would face greater threats from espionage, foreign interference and potentially sabotage.

The situation had prompted him to take the unusual step of declassifying details of the security outlook covering the coming five years.

With an “unprecedented number of challenges, and an unprecedented cumulative level of potential harm, Australia has never faced so many different threats at scale at once,” he said.

“Many of the foundations that have underpinned Australia’s security, prosperity and democracy are being tested: social cohesion is eroding, trust in institutions is declining, intolerance is growing, even truth itself is being undermined by conspiracy, mis-and disinformation.

"Similar trends are playing out across the Western world.

"Australia is facing multifaceted, merging, intersecting, concurrent and cascading threats. Major geopolitical, economic, social and security challenges of the 1930s, 70s and 90s have converged. As one of my analysts put it with an uncharacteristic nod to popular culture: everything, everywhere all at once”.

Burgess said ASIO was empowered to investigate seven heads of security:

  • espionage
  • foreign interference
  • politically motivated violence (which includes terrorism)
  • the promotion of communal violence
  • sabotage
  • attacks on Australia’s defence system, and
  • serious threats to border integrity.

“Three of our heads of security are already flashing red: espionage, foreign interference and politically motivated violence,” Burgess said.

ASIO expected in the next five years the promotion of communal violence, sabotage and attacks on the defence system could join them.

Burgess did not envisage any immediate raising of the national threat level, which puts an act of terrorism at “probable”.

But he said “politically motivated violence is raising the temperature of the security environment and making acts of terrorism more likely”.

At the same time, he stressed that none of last year’s incidents in Australia came from an offshore group and “our greatest threat remains a lone actor using an easily obtained weapon”.

“Of all the potential terrorist matters investigated last year, fewer than half were religiously motivated. The majority involved mixed ideologies or nationalist and racist ideologies.

"Almost all the matters involved minors. All were lone actors or small groups. Almost all the individuals were unknown to ASIO or the police and it is fair to say they allegedly moved towards violence more quickly than we have seen before.

"Importantly, none of the attacks or plots appear to be directly inspired by the conflict in the Middle East or directed by offshore extremists”.

On the promotion of communal violence, Burgess said “I am concerned these attacks have not yet plateaued”.

Promoting communal violence refers to “activities that are directed to incite violence between different groups in Australia, so as to endanger the peace”.

Burgess anticipated “nationalist and racist violent extremists to continue their efforts to ‘mainstream’ and expand their movement.

"They will undertake provocative, offensive and increasingly high-profile acts to generate publicity and recruit. While these activities will test legal boundaries, the greatest threat of violence comes from individuals on the periphery of these organised groups.

"I remain concerned about young Australians being caught up in webs of hate, both religiously and ideologically motivated.

"In the polarised, grievance-rich environment I’m describing, social cohesion will remain strained and we can expect spikes in communal violence.”

Burgess said the Middle East war “has not yet directly inspired terrorism in Australia, but it is prompting protest, exacerbating division, undermining social cohesion and elevating intolerance. This, in turn, is making acts of politically motivated violence more likely.”

The normalisation of violent protests lowered the threshold for potentially violent acts.

“Narratives originally centred on ‘freeing Palestine’ expanded to include incitements to ‘kill the Jews’. Threats transitioned from harassment and intimidation to specific targeting of Jewish communities, places of worship and prominent figures.

"Looking forward, targets of community violence are likely to be broad, depending on the perceived grievance, and will not be limited to nationality, race, culture, religion or gender.

"A hyper-connected world will allow political tensions or conflicts overseas to resonate quickly in Australia, spread by social media and online echo chambers, inflamed by mis- or disinformation”.

Burgess said more traditional distinctions between extremist motivations were breaking down.

Individuals were cherry-picking ideologies to create hybrid beliefs. For example, ASIO had found one person who was apparently motivated by Islamic State propaganda and neo-Nazi propaganda. Another described himself as a left-wing environmentalist aligned with Adolf Hitler.

Burgess said while he was troubled by the breadth of security threats, he was more concerned about their depth.

“More specifically, the depths some regimes are willing to plumb in pursuit of their strategic interests. This is why we assess the security environment is becoming more degraded.”

“A small number of authoritarian regimes are behaving more aggressively, more recklessly, more dangerously. More willing to engage in what we call ‘high harm’ activities.

"Russia’s brazen acts of sabotage in Europe show authoritarian regimes are willing to use a wider range of tools and tactics to coerce, intimidate and damage perceived adversaries. As a supporter of and supplier to Ukraine, it is conceivable Russia could also target Australia for sabotage.”

Australia was not immune to hostile states such as Iran undertaking “acts of security concern” in Australia or the near region.

“Whether such acts serve an internal interest, or a form of retaliation against Israel or our allies, we need to remain alert and responsive to these evolution.”

ASIO had identified at least three different countries plotting to harm people living in Australia.

In one case, a foreign intelligence service wanted to silence an Australia-based human rights activist and tried to trick them into visiting a third country where they would encounter an “accident”. ASIO foiled the plot.

In another case, a different hostile foreign intelligence service wanted to harm and possibly kill one or more individuals on Australian soil. This too was foiled.

“Beyond those egregious examples, multiple foreign regimes continually attempt to monitor, harass, intimidate and coerce cooperation from Australians and those who call Australia home. This includes trying to strong-arm people to report on other members of their diaspora community, threatening perceived dissidents and their family members with violence, and coercing people in Australia to return to the country of their birth to face questioning or charges – or possibly worse.”

On threats to Australia’s defence system, Burgess said multiple countries relentlessly sought information on our military capabilities.

“AUKUS will remain a priority target for intelligence collection, including by countries we consider friendly.

"ASIO has identified foreign services seeking to target AUKUS to position themselves to collect on the capabilities, how Australia intends to use them, and to undermine the confidence of our allies.

"By 2030, as the submarine project matures, intelligence services are more likely to focus on foreign interference to undermine community support for the enterprise and potentially sabotage if regional tensions escalate.”The Conversation

Michelle Grattan, Professorial Fellow, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Telstra found to have misled nearly 9,000 Belong customers over broadband speed claims: ACCC

Friday February 21, 2025
The Federal Court has today found that Telstra made false or misleading representations relating to the upload speed of residential broadband internet services supplied to nearly 9,000 of its Belong customers, following court action by the ACCC.

In October and November 2020, Telstra migrated 8,897 customers who were on a Belong NBN plan with a maximum download speed of 100 megabits per second (Mbps) and a maximum upload speed of 40Mbps, to a service with a maximum upload speed of 20Mbps.

Telstra did not notify customers of the reduction in the maximum upload speed in their service. “Telstra’s failure to inform customers that their broadband service had been altered denied them the opportunity to decide whether the changed service was suitable for their needs,” ACCC Commissioner Liza Carver said.

“There was no reduction to the price Telstra charged its customers even though the cost charged by NBN Co to Telstra was $7 a month less for the new, lower speed service.”

Telstra admitted that it had represented to 2,785 of the Belong customers, who acquired the 40 Mbps plan between 1 May 2017 and 19 September 2018, that they were receiving a Belong NBN Broadband service with a maximum upload speed of 40Mbps, when they were not.  

Telstra continued to make these representations by failing to update customers once the unilateral migration had occurred. Telstra acknowledged its failure in 2021 and provided a one-off $90 credit to these consumers.

The Court also found that Telstra had made false or misleading representations to a further 6,112 Belong customers who had acquired the 40mbps plan between 20 September 2018 and October 2020.

While Telstra never stated the maximum upload speed to these customers, the Court found that these consumers would have reasonably construed the service to which they were bound was the same in all material aspects, including upload speed, as it had always been.

“It is simply unacceptable for a supplier of essential services to mislead consumers when reducing the quality of the services it is providing to its customers,” Ms Carver said.

“We expect better from the country’s largest retail broadband internet service provider and believe these customers, who ultimately received a service they did not agree to, should be compensated.”

The ACCC is seeking declarations, penalties, consumer redress, costs and other orders.

The Court will determine the penalty and any consumer redress after a hearing on a date to be fixed.

Background
Telstra is Australia’s largest telecommunications supplier, supplying the largest number of retail broadband internet services and owning the largest mobile network over which it supplies both retail and wholesale services. It is a publicly listed company, incorporated in Australia.

Belong was launched by Telstra in 2013 as a low-cost mobile and internet service provider, operating semi-independently in a number of areas, including products, marketing, service, billing and parts of IT.

Upload speed refers to the speed at which an internet connection can allow data to be sent from personal devices to the internet, such as sending files, presentations or media content when working or studying from home or sharing photos and videos.

In May 2020, NBN Co launched new wholesale consumer speed tiers, including a new 100/20Mbps wholesale speed tier, which costs retail service providers $7 less per month than the 100/40Mbps plan on a wholesale level.   

The ACCC instituted these Federal Court proceedings against Telstra in December 2022.

The ACCC has previously instituted proceedings against Telstra on several occasions, including in August 2021 for making alleged false or misleading representations in their promotions of some 50Mbps and 100Mbps NBN plans. Telstra was subsequently ordered to pay $15 million in penalties in that case.

Bradford Exchange in Court over alleged misleading representations about subscriptions

Friday February 21, 2025
The ACCC has instituted legal proceedings in the Federal Court against The Bradford Exchange Ltd (Bradford) for allegedly making false or misleading representations in its advertising of collectable coins and ingots in breach of the Australian Consumer Law.

A global retailer of coins and memorabilia, Bradford allegedly made misleading representations to consumers in over 300 newspaper and magazine advertisements for collectable coins and ingots across Australia.

It is alleged that, in many cases, Bradford represented that it would send consumers a single advertised item, when in fact Bradford sent consumers multiple items subject to a subscription (in some cases up to 24 items) and charged them for those items.

Bradford also allegedly represented that, if consumers responded to the relevant advertisements, they would be treated as only agreeing to purchase the single item identified in the advertisement, when this was not the case.

Subsequent items in these collections were typically far more expensive than the originally advertised item, for example, costing $79.99 after the first item was priced at $29.99.

The ACCC alleges that Bradford applied direct debits, or invoiced consumers for these subsequent items. Consumers who did not pay an invoice were sent follow up invoices, some of which incurred a ‘reminder charge’. If the invoice remained unpaid, consumers would ultimately be referred to a debt collection agency which charged additional fees.

“We are alleging Bradford’s actions amounted to a ‘subscription trap’ for consumers who thought they were buying one coin or ingot but were treated as if they had agreed to subscribe to receive an entire series and be charged accordingly,” ACCC Commissioner Liza Carver said.

Subscription traps occur when businesses mislead consumers into signing up for a subscription by representing that the consumer is only making a one-off purchase, or by making cancellation of a subscription difficult.

The ACCC action relates to alleged misleading representations between 1 January 2021 and 26 June 2023 in advertisements by Bradford for collectable commemorative coins and ingots in various print newspapers and magazines across Australia such as the Herald Sun, the Courier Mail, Woman’s Day magazine and New Idea magazine.

The advertisements featured a large image of a single coin or ingot, often with historical or nostalgic themes such as Queen Elizabeth II, World War 1, Phar Lap, and the 1971 Ford Falcon.

In addition, the ACCC alleges Bradford’s advertisements prominently stated a single price for that item and did not state the total price of all the items in each collection.

“Businesses must be open and transparent when signing consumers up to subscriptions, including by stating the total price of goods or services being purchased,” Ms Carver said.

“There have been a large number of complaints about this company from consumers who purchased a single item from Bradford but were then sent and charged for additional items.”

“We consider Bradford’s actions deprived consumers of the ability to make an informed choice about whether to buy an entire collection of items. As a result, many consumers are likely to have paid for subsequent items they did not want or intend to buy and some are likely to have experienced distress and financial loss when Bradford charged them for items they did not intend to purchase,” Ms Carver said.

The ACCC is seeking penalties, declarations, injunctions, costs and other orders for Bradford’s alleged contraventions.

Example of Bradford advertisements:


Background
Bradford is a US-based, retailer of limited-edition memorabilia and collectables including coins and ingots, jewellery, prints, model cars, ornaments and figurines. A significant proportion of Bradford’s revenue comes from the sale of collections. Bradford advertises its products through mainstream newspapers and magazines, as well as on its website and social media accounts.

The Bradford Exchange Group operates globally across fifteen countries including the US, United Kingdom, New Zealand, and Germany. Bradford has operated in Australia for 34 years.

3 statistical stuff-ups that made everyday items look healthier (or riskier) than they really are

VLADIMIR VK/Shutterstock
Adrian EstermanUniversity of South Australia

Conducting scientific studies is never easy, and there are often major disasters along the way. A researcher accidentally spills coffee on a keyboard, destroying the data. Or one of the chemicals used in the analysis is contaminated, and the list goes on.

However, when we read the results of the study in a scientific paper, it always looks pristine. The study went smoothly with no hiccups, and here are our results.

But studies can contain errors, not all of which independent experts or “peer reviewers” weed out before publication.

Statistical stuff-ups can be difficult to find as it really takes someone trained in statistics to notice something wrong.

When statistical mistakes are made and found, it can have profound impacts on people who may have changed their lifestyle as a result of the flawed study.

These three examples of inadvertent statistical mistakes have had major consequences for our health and shopping habits.

1. Did you throw out your black plastic spoons?

Late last year, I came across a news article about how black plastic kitchen utensils were dangerous as they could potentially leak toxic flame-retardant chemicals into your food.

Being a natural sceptic, I looked up the original paper, which was published in the journal Chemosphere. The article looked genuine, the journal was reputable. So – like perhaps many other people – I threw out my black plastic kitchen utensils and replaced them with silicone ones.

In the study, the authors screened 203 household products (about half were kitchen utensils) made from black plastic.

The authors found toxic flame retardants in 85% of the products tested, with levels approaching the maximum daily limits set by the Environmental Protection Agency in the United States.

Unfortunately, the authors made a mistake in their calculations. They were out by a factor of ten. This meant the level of toxic chemicals was well under the daily safety limits.

In recent weeks, the authors apologised and corrected their paper.

2. Did you avoid HRT?

landmark study raised safety concerns about hormone replacement therapy or HRT (now also known as menopausal hormone therapy). This highlights a different type of statistical error.

The Women’s Health Initiative (WHI) study involved 10,739 postmenopausal women aged 50-79 recruited from 40 clinical centres in the US. It compared the health of women randomised to take HRT with those who took the placebo. Neither the researchers nor the women knew which treatment had been given.

In their 2002 paper, the authors reported higher rates of invasive breast cancers in the HRT group. They used a unit called “person-years”. Person-years is a way to measure the total time a group of people spends in a study. For example, if 100 people are in a study for one year each, that makes 100 person-years. If someone leaves the trial after only six months, only that half-year is counted for them.

The authors showed a rate of 38 invasive breast cancers per 10,000 person-years in the HRT group, compared to 30 per 10,000 person-years in the placebo group. This gives a rate ratio of 1.26 (one rate divided by the other).

This fairly large increase in breast cancer rates, also expressed as a 26% increase, caused widespread panic around the world, and led to thousands of women stopping HRT.

But the actual risk of breast cancer in each group is low. The rate of 38 per 10,000 person-years is equivalent to an annual rate of 0.38%. With very small rates like this, the authors should really have used the rate difference rather than the rate ratio. The rate difference is one rate subtracted from the other, rather than divided by it. This equates to an annual increase of 0.08% breast cancer cases in the HRT group – much more modest.

The authors of the 2002 paper also pointed out that the 26% increase in the rate of breast cancer “almost reached nominal statistical significance”. Almost is not statistical significance, and formally, this means there was no difference in breast cancer rates between the two groups. In other words, the difference between the two groups could have happened by chance.

The authors should have been more careful when describing their results.

3. Did Popeye’s spinach change your meals?

Cartoon character Popeye is a one-eyed, pipe-smoking sailor with mangled English, in love with the willowy Olive Oyl. He is constantly getting into trouble, and when he needs extra energy, he opens a can of spinach and swallows the contents. His biceps immediately bulge, and off he goes to sort out the problem.

When Popeye ate spinach, his muscles bulged. No wonder sales of spinach rose.

But why does Popeye eat spinach?

The story begins in about 1870, with a German chemist, Erich von Wolf or Emil von Wolff, depending on which version of events you read.

He was measuring the amount of iron in different types of leafy vegetables. According to legend, which some dispute, he was writing the iron content of spinach down in a notebook and got the decimal point wrong, writing 35 milligrams instead of 3.5 milligrams per 100 gram serve of spinach. The error was found and corrected in 1937.

By then the Popeye character had been created and spinach became incredibly popular with children. Apparently, consumption of spinach in the US went up by a third as a result of the cartoon.

This story had gained legendary status but has one tiny flaw. In a 1932 cartoon, Popeye explains exactly why he eats spinach, and it’s nothing to do with iron. He says in his garbled English:

Spinach is full of Vitamin A. An’tha’s what makes hoomans strong an’ helty!The Conversation

Adrian Esterman, Professor of Biostatistics and Epidemiology, University of South Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Central Barangaroo Modification Request Approved

Monday February 17, 2025
The NSW State Government has announced Barangaroo has reached its next major milestone with the Minister for Planning and Public Spaces granting approval of the modification request for Central Barangaroo.

The planning determination means that the central Barangaroo proposal can proceed subject to conditions.

This development is the final piece of Barangaroo to proceed, enabling the transformation of a once neglected and inaccessible part of the city into a dynamic cultural, residential, business and retail hub.

The development will comprise a mix of residential and retail including restaurants and bars, a hotel and community facilities.  It allows for the area to become a destination in its own right on the Sydney Harbour foreshore due to its proximity to the new Barangaroo Metro.

The approval requires high standards of quality and sustainability, in line with the rest of Barangaroo, with a focus on water efficiency, carbon neutrality, and zero waste.

At least 50% of public open space will be maintained, a key principle of the original proposal.

The modification also delivers an extra 800 square metres of community floor space and two new public plazas. It also establishes view corridors along the northern and southern plazas.

On the nearby Central Barangaroo foreshore there are also separate plans for a new 1.8-hectare waterfront public park for recreation, events and entertainment, currently known as Harbour Park.

Harbour Park, concept drawing

When assessing the proposal, the Department of Planning, Housing and Infrastructure (DPHI) carefully assessed the historic view impacts of the proposal, particularly between Observatory Hill and Sydney Harbour. Conditions on the project include incorporating the Heritage Impact Statement into the consent.

It also included a condition being imposed requiring the height of the northern part of the block facing Nawi Cove to be reduced from 8 storeys down to 5 storeys. This provides continued connection to the water view from Observatory Hill.

In addition, the measures outlined in the Heritage Impact Assessment together with design guidelines will support a design within the building envelope which will further minimise impacts on historic views.

The planning approval enables the proponent to undertake detailed design work, which will include community consultation.

For more information visit: Central Barangaroo | Barangaroo

Minister for Planning and Public Spaces Paul Scully said:

“The renewal of the strategically important Barangaroo site has always been about providing greater access to Sydney’s harbour foreshore. It will create jobs and homes, enhance our cultural facilities, civic spaces and parkland, and create diverse experiences and destinations – all easily accessible by public transport.

“Detailed design work can now proceed on this prominent space under consent conditions to support design excellence to respect the surrounding area.

“This approval considers Barangaroo’s prominent position and is respectful of the contribution of the area to Sydney’s development and future.”

Minister for Lands and Property Steve Kamper said:

“Under the former Government this project was stuck in planning purgatory for over a decade, and this site had been a blight on the harbour for many years before that.

“This is a fantastic outcome. Now that planning approval has been granted, we can get on with the job of delivering the final piece of the Barangaroo puzzle.

“With the Barangaroo Metro station now open, the Pier Pavilion and the Cutaway nearing completion, Barangaroo Reserve, Marrinawi and Nawi Cove open, it will be fantastic to see the full vision for Barangaroo finally realised for locals and visitors to enjoy.”


Harbour Park: In July 2023, the winning concept design was unveiled. The park features nature play for all ages and abilities, an event lawn for hosting community and cultural events, public art installations, winding pathways to explore, extensive native planting and interactive water features.

The winning design for the new Harbour Park is by AKIN, an Indigenous-led and Sydney-based design team comprising of Yerrabingin, Architectus, Jacob Nash, Studio Chris Fox, Flying Fish Blue and Arup.

''Their thoughtful concept showcases First Nations design methodologies to create a place that is rich in culture, deeply connected to Country and welcomes all.

The design seeks to regenerate the land from a cold industrial concrete slab to a landscape that is timeless, with extensive planting and canopy cover, waterways, wetlands and waterholes.''

ACCC welcomes passage of world-first scams prevention laws

February 2025
The ACCC welcomes the passage of the Scams Prevention Framework Bill in Parliament today, February 13 2025.

This world-first legislation enhances protections across the economy by setting out consistent and enforceable obligations for businesses in key sectors where scammers operate.

“The financial crime type, scams, present an unacceptable threat to the Australian community and have had a devastating impact on hundreds of thousands of Australians,” ACCC Deputy Chair Catriona Lowe said.

“This Bill is a critical step in the fight against scams - creating overarching principles that all members of designated sectors must comply with.  We know scammers will exploit weak links in the system – so these principles are key to a consistent approach.”

Under the new legislation, the ACCC will closely monitor regulated entities’ compliance with principles to prevent, detect, disrupt, respond to and report scams.

The Scams Prevention Framework empowers the ACCC to investigate potential breaches and take enforcement action where entities do not take reasonable steps to fulfill their obligations under these principles.

Businesses that do not meet their obligations under the Framework can face fines up to $50 million.

“Individuals have been bearing the brunt of the responsibility to combat scammers for too long,” Ms Lowe said.

“While the steps taken by some organisations over the last few years are welcomed, the Framework provides the opportunity for joint effort across government and industry to develop solutions to scam challenges and for consumers to access meaningful redress.”

“Importantly, the Framework enables consumers to seek redress from regulated businesses when those businesses have not met their obligations,” Ms Lowe said.

Banks, certain digital platforms, including social media, and telecommunications providers will be the first sectors required to comply with the legislation.

The ACCC is a strong supporter of mandatory industry scams codes and, through the National Anti-Scam Centre, has already begun preparing incrementally for the Framework.

“In reaching this important milestone, we acknowledge that there is considerable work ahead to implement the Framework, including the formal designation of sectors, development of sector codes, consumer and industry guidance,” Ms Lowe said.

“We will continue to work closely with government, fellow regulators, industry and community agencies to make sure these elements of the Framework work for all stakeholders, most especially consumers.”

Background
The ACCC runs the National Anti-Scam Centre, which commenced on 1 July 2023, and Scamwatch service. The National Anti-Scam Centre is a virtual centre that sits within the ACCC and brings together experts from government, law enforcement and the private sector, to disrupt scams before they reach consumers.

The National Anti-Scam Centre analyses and acts on trends from shared data and raises consumer awareness about how to spot and avoid scams.

The ACCC, through the National Anti-Scam Centre, has already been partnering with stakeholders across the scams ecosystem to share intelligence and information to detect and disrupt scams on a voluntary basis. The Framework will significantly boost the contributions from industry and require designated businesses to share scam intelligence with the ACCC. 

The new Scams Prevention Framework will be critical to cutting off scammers before they can reach Australians.

Under the Framework, the ACCC will also enforce the digital platforms sector scams code and will take enforcement action where digital platforms breach their obligations under this code.

The Australian Securities and Investments Commission will be the regulator for the banking sector code and the Australian Communications and Media Authority will be the regulator for the telecommunications sector code. Regulators have in place processes to work together to help ensure the right action by the right regulator at the right time.

The ACCC supports the establishment of a single external dispute resolution body under the new Framework and looks forward to working with the Australian Financial Complaints Authority (AFCA).

How to spot and avoid scams
  1. STOP – Don’t give money or personal information to anyone if you’re unsure. Scammers will create a sense of urgency. Don’t rush to act. Say no, hang up, delete.
  2. CHECK – Ask yourself could the call or text be fake? Scammers pretend to be from organisations you know and trust. Contact the organisation using information you source independently, so that you can verify if the call is real or not.
  3. PROTECT – Act quickly if something feels wrong. Contact your bank immediately if you lose money. If you have provided personal information call IDCARE on 1800 595 160. The more we talk the less power they have. Report scams to the National Anti-Scam Centre’s Scamwatch service at scamwatch.gov.au when you see them.

First Japanese encephalitis NSW case this summer

February 15 2025
Japanese encephalitis (JE) virus infection has been identified in a man who likely acquired his infection while camping in the Murrumbidgee region in NSW.

NSW Health's Executive Director of Health Protection Dr Jeremy McAnulty said this recent case, who is currently recovering in hospital, is likely to have acquired the infection in late December or early January while holidaying.

“This case, along with recent detections in pigs and mosquitoes in NSW and detections in Victoria and Queensland, highlights the risk of JE virus infection in a large stretch of NSW west of the Great Dividing Range," Dr McAnulty said.

“It is very important for people who live in or travel to these areas to be aware of the elevated risk and to take precautions against mosquito bites. In addition to JE virus, Murray Valley Encephalitis, Kunjin, Ross River, and Barmah Forest viruses can also be spread by mosquito bites.

“Importantly, there is a safe, effective and free vaccine to protect against JE which is available to anyone who lives or routinely works in various inland LGAs as well as for people who work in some other high-risk occupations."

JE vaccine is available through local General Practitioners, Aboriginal health services and pharmacists.

People who meet the eligibility criteria should make an appointment with their GP, Aboriginal Medical Service or pharmacy and let the provider know it is for the JE vaccine. These providers may require a few days' notice so they can order the vaccine.

Actions to prevent mosquito bites include:
  • Applying repellent to exposed skin. Use repellents that contain DEET, picaridin, or oil of lemon eucalyptus. Check the label for reapplication times
  • Re-applying repellent regularly, particularly after swimming. Be sure to apply sunscreen first and then apply repellent
  • Wearing light, loose-fitting long-sleeve shirts, long pants and covered footwear. and socks
  • Avoiding going outdoors during peak mosquito times, especially dawn and dusk
  • Using insecticide sprays, vapour dispensing units and mosquito coils to repel mosquitoes (mosquito coils should only be used outdoors in well-ventilated areas)
  • Covering windows and doors with insect screens and checking there are no gaps
  • Removing items that may collect water such as old tyres and empty pots from around your home to reduce the places where mosquitoes can breed
  • Using repellents that are safe for children. Most skin repellents are safe for use on children aged three months and older. Always check the label for instructions
  • Protecting infants aged less than three months by using an infant carrier draped with mosquito netting, secured along the edges
  • While camping, use a tent that has fly screens to prevent mosquitoes entering or sleep under a mosquito net
  • Information on eligibility for a free JE vaccine is available on Japanese encephalitis ​vaccination.
JE virus cannot be transmitted between humans, and it cannot be caught by eating pork or other pig products.

Online tax schemes on the rise

The ATO is warning the community to be alert for potentially dodgy tax schemes which are spreading online, including through social media.

Acting Deputy Commissioner Sarah Taylor is urging individuals to be wary of online promotion of tax schemes promising to significantly reduce or avoid tax altogether.

‘Sometimes tax schemes can be peddled as investment schemes. We don’t want to see honest people lured into unlawful tax schemes with false promises of high returns and tax savings – if an offer seems too good to be true, it probably is,’ Ms Taylor said.

‘Those who invest in unlawful tax schemes stand to lose their hard-earned cash, and risk paying tax with interest and heavy penalties.’

‘Promoters of these schemes are often opportunistic and target vulnerable people. Protect yourself and your money by getting advice from a registered tax practitioner before committing to anything,’ Ms Taylor said.

The ATO’s website lists a number of tax schemes to look out for. In one particular recent scheme, individuals are being advised to invest in a start-up company that allegedly qualifies as an early-stage innovation company (ESIC). By investing in an ESIC, they’re told they can then claim the early-stage investor tax offset on shares purchased through the financing arrangement.

The ATO is concerned individuals may be entering into these arrangements under the belief they are entitled to the tax benefits claimed using the financing arrangements. We are also concerned that the companies may not qualify as ESICs.

Another type of tax scheme being promoted in the community promises individuals they can avoid paying tax by setting up a purported non-profit foundation and diverting their income to it. These schemes are not effective and the individuals will still have to pay the tax on the income.

If you are approached with tax arrangements that sound like either of these examples, or sound too good to be true, seek advice from a registered tax practitioner and report it to the ATO.

The ATO takes a strong stance against all types of unlawful tax schemes and their promotion.

‘Promoting and participating in unlawful tax schemes are not victimless crimes. Those who choose to engage in these behaviours are attempting to obtain an unfair advantage over those who do the right thing,’ Ms Taylor said.

‘We take targeted action against unlawful tax schemes that promote tax avoidance behaviours and against those who promote these schemes. We are committed to helping protect the community against misinformation about schemes spread on various channels.’

If you are offered an unlawful tax scheme, you should reject it and report it to the ATO confidentially by:
  • completing the tip-off form on the ATO website
  • phoning the tip-off hotline on 1800 060 062.
If you suspect that you’ve inadvertently become involved in an unlawful tax scheme, you should also contact the ATO immediately. If you proactively approach the ATO, you may be eligible for a reduction in any penalties imposed.

To check if a tax practitioner is registered, use the Tax Practitioners Board's public register.

More information about unlawful tax schemes can be found at ato.gov.au/taxschemes.

ATO clarification on GST treatment of sunscreen: Media Reports incorrect

February 14 2025
Goods and services tax (GST) does not apply to products marketed principally as sunscreen and never has. To be GST-free, a sunscreen product must be ‘marketed principally for use as sunscreen’.

The Australian Taxation Office (ATO) has not changed its view on the GST treatment of sunscreen.

Recent media reports have suggested the ATO is ‘cracking down’ on manufacturers of skincare and sunscreen products in relation to GST treatment. Reporting has also suggested that the price of these products is expected to increase because of ATO actions. These claims are incorrect.

What the ATO has done is improve its guidance to provide clarity on how the existing law applies and make it easier for suppliers to classify their products correctly, noting modern products are being developed and marketed as having other benefits or uses, such as make-up or tint, or correcting the appearance of blemished skin.

To be GST-free, a sunscreen product must be ‘marketed principally for use as sunscreen’. If a product is not marketed principally for use as a sunscreen it is, and always has been, subject to GST.

A product classified as GST-free under this determination would have always been GST-free and vice versa for products that would not be GST-free. Since the introduction of GST, under the law sunscreen products are only GST-free if they:
  • are for application to the skin (including the lips)
  • have a Sun Protection Factor (SPF) of 15 or more
  • are required to be included on the Australian Register of Therapeutic Goods (ARTG)
  • are marketed principally for use as sunscreen.
The ATO’s view is that whether a sunscreen product is marketed principally for use as sunscreen is a matter of overall impression involving an objective assessment of all the marketing information.

Detailed information is available in the ATO’s draft determination GSTD 2024/D2: supplies of sunscreen, from paragraph 20 ‘Marketed principally for use as sunscreen’ and ‘Table 1: common terms and features used in marketing of sunscreen products’ in the ‘Marketed principally for use as sunscreen’ criteria.

NDIS reforms aim to make the scheme fairer. But we’ve found the groups struggling to gain access

Edwin Tan/Getty Images
George DisneyThe University of MelbourneAlexandra DevineThe University of MelbourneAnne KavanaghThe University of MelbourneHelen DickinsonUNSW Sydney, and Yi YangThe University of Melbourne

When the National Disability Insurance Scheme (NDIS) was established in 2013, one of its driving aims was to make disability services and support systems fairer.

However, our new research shows significant inequalities remain, with some groups finding it much harder than others to be deemed eligible and access a funding plan.

Recent NDIS reforms in part aim to address inequity, and to manage costs.

So, what can we do to ensure these reforms don’t further embed existing inequalities? Here’s what we found.

Inequalities in scheme access

To receive funding from the NDIS, participants are required to demonstrate their eligibility.

We wanted to explore whether decisions about eligibility were leading to inequalities in who could access and use NDIS funding.

Our study looked at the individual NDIS applications of 485,676 people aged seven or older, made between 2016 and 2022, to see if they were deemed eligible.

We then compared differences in eligibility rates between groups, considering:

  • age (applicants 55 or older versus those under 55)
  • gender (women and girls versus other applicants)
  • socioeconomic disadvantage (those from the poorest 30% of areas versus all other areas).

Who is deemed ineligible?

We found some groups are more likely to be rejected from the scheme than others: women and girls, people aged 55 and over, and those who live in disadvantaged areas.

Within these groups, eligibility rates also vary.

For example, people with intellectual disability, autism, and brain injury or stroke were very likely to be deemed eligible, regardless of their age, gender or socioeconomic disadvantage (900 or more were accepted per 1,000 applicants).

However, people with physical disability and psychosocial disability (disabilities that can arise from a mental health issue, such as bipolar disorder or schizophrenia) were significantly more likely to be rejected.

This was true across groups, but particularly evident among women and girls.

We compared eligibility rates within every 1,000 applications made by women and girls versus men and boys.

Among those who had physical disability, 145 more women and girls were rejected, compared to men and boys.

Among those with psychosocial disability, 83 more applications were deemed ineligible for every 1,000 applications made by women, compared to men.

Age was also a factor. Older Australians with a physical disability had 235 fewer approvals per 1,000 applications than those with physical disability under 55.

An older man on the phone.
Older Australians were more likely to be found ineligible. Christina RasoBoluda/Shutterstock

What about once they’re eligible?

Inequalities are more pronounced among those trying to prove eligibility for the scheme.

Once accepted into the NDIS, our research found women and girls, and people living in poorer areas, received similar amounts of funding as men and boys, and those living in better-off areas.

This budget is based on what the participant wants to achieve in everyday life and their support needs relating to their disabilities.

However once people receive and are using plans, we then see some differences in how much these people are able to spend. This relates to factors such as the availability of services in an area or whether culturally safe supports are available.

We found that women with psychosocial disability spent more than men with similar sized budgets.

This result could reflect that women with psychosocial disability on the NDIS have higher support needs than men.

It could be that it is harder for women to get onto the scheme in the first place, so those who are deemed eligible have more significant disability than men.

But we need more research to unpack this further.

Why do we see these inequalities?

In the early days of the NDIS, to help fast-track applications, the National Disability Insurance Agency (which runs the NDIS) specified a list of diagnoses closely related to disability.

Known as list A conditions, people with these diagnoses are automatically eligible for the NDIS.

Disabilities likely to be associated with a list A diagnosis include level 2 or 3 autism (requiring substantial or very substantial support) and intellectual disability.

However some people who could have permanent and significant disability, may have a diagnosis not on list A, such as Down syndrome and motor neurone disease. They must provide a broader range of evidence on the impact of their disability to be eligible.

If they face other challenges – such as socioeconomic disadvantage – it may be harder for them to collect this evidence. For example, they may not be able to afford private health care that would help support their application.

This might explain why people who do not have a list A diagnosis are less likely to prove their eligibility for the scheme.

Where next for the scheme?

Following recommendations from an independent review into the NDIS, the National Disability Insurance Agency is currently making changes to how it assesses eligibility.

One of the changes suggested is removing list A classifications altogether.

Instead, the agency will use a suite of functional assessment tools. These are still in the process of being designed, but they are one way to assess a person’s ability to perform everyday tasks and identify the level of support they require.

This approach aims to assess more objectively and fairly how much someone is impacted by their disability.

However, there are longstanding critiques of these tools. These include concerns they are not safe for minority groups, such as those with a culturally or linguistically diverse background, LGBTQIA+ people, and First Nations applicants.

Our new research demonstrates how and why some inequalities arise. We should put this understanding front-and-centre in any changes to the NDIS.

Most importantly, we should make sure reforms are co-designed with a broad range of different groups, to ensure we don’t perpetuate old inequalities or introduce new ones.The Conversation

George Disney, Research Fellow, Social Epidemiology, The University of MelbourneAlexandra Devine, Research Fellow, Melbourne School of Population and Global Health, The University of MelbourneAnne Kavanagh, Professor of Disability and Health, Melbourne School of Population and Global Health, The University of MelbourneHelen Dickinson, Professor, Public Service Research, UNSW Sydney, and Yi Yang, Research Fellow, Social Epidemiology, Melbourne Disability Institute, Melbourne School of Population and Global Health, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Generative AI is already being used in journalism – here’s how people feel about it

Indonesia’s TVOne launched an AI news presenter in 2023. T.J. Thomson
T.J. ThomsonRMIT UniversityMichelle RiedlingerQueensland University of TechnologyPhoebe MatichQueensland University of Technology, and Ryan J. ThomasWashington State University

Generative artificial intelligence (AI) has taken off at lightning speed in the past couple of years, creating disruption in many industries. Newsrooms are no exception.

A new report published today finds that news audiences and journalists alike are concerned about how news organisations are – and could be – using generative AI such as chatbots, image, audio and video generators, and similar tools.

The report draws on three years of interviews and focus group research into generative AI and journalism in Australia and six other countries (United States, United Kingdom, Norway, Switzerland, Germany and France).

Only 25% of our news audience participants were confident they had encountered generative AI in journalism. About 50% were unsure or suspected they had.

This suggests a potential lack of transparency from news organisations when they use generative AI. It could also reflect a lack of trust between news outlets and audiences.

Who or what makes your news – and how – matters for a host of reasons.

Some outlets tend to use more or fewer sources, for example. Or use certain kinds of sources – such as politicians or experts – more than others.

Some outlets under-represent or misrepresent parts of the community. This is sometimes because the news outlet’s staff themselves aren’t representative of their audience.

Carelessly using AI to produce or edit journalism can reproduce some of these inequalities.

Our report identifies dozens of ways journalists and news organisations can use generative AI. It also summarises how comfortable news audiences are with each.

The news audiences we spoke to overall felt most comfortable with journalists using AI for behind-the-scenes tasks rather than for editing and creating. These include using AI to transcribe an interview or to provide ideas on how to cover a topic.

But comfort is highly dependent on context. Audiences were quite comfortable with some editing and creating tasks when the perceived risks were lower.

The problem – and opportunity

Generative AI can be used in just about every part of journalism.

For example, a photographer could cover an event. Then, a generative AI tool could select what it “thinks” are the best images, edit the images to optimise them, and add keywords to each.

An image of a field with towers in the distance and computer-generated labels superimposed that try to identify certain objects in the image.
Computer software can try to recognise objects in images and add keywords, leading to potentially more efficient image processing workflows. Elise Racine/Better Images of AI/Moon over FieldsCC BY

These might seem like relatively harmless applications. But what if the AI identifies something or someone incorrectly, and these keywords lead to mis-identifications in the photo captions? What if the criteria humans think make “good” images are different to what a computer might think? These criteria may also change over time or in different contexts.

Even something as simple as lightening or darkening an image can cause a furore when politics are involved.

AI can also make things up completely. Images can appear photorealistic but show things that never happened. Videos can be entirely generated with AI, or edited with AI to change their context.

Generative AI is also frequently used for writing headlines or summarising articles. These sound like helpful applications for time-poor individuals, but some news outlets are using AI to rip off others’ content.

AI-generated news alerts have also gotten the facts wrong. As an example, Apple recently suspended its automatically generated news notification feature. It did this after the feature falsely claimed US murder suspect Luigi Mangione had killed himself, with the source attributed as the BBC.

What do people think about journalists using AI?

Our research found news audiences seem to be more comfortable with journalists using AI for certain tasks when they themselves have used it for similar purposes.

For example, the people interviewed were largely comfortable with journalists using AI to blur parts of an image. Our participants said they used similar tools on video conferencing apps or when using the “portrait” mode on smartphones.

Likewise, when you insert an image into popular word processing or presentation software, it might automatically create a written description of the image for people with vision impairments. Those who’d previously encountered such AI descriptions of images felt more comfortable with journalists using AI to add keywords to media.

A screenshot of an image with the alt-text description that reads A view of the beach from a stone arch.
Popular word processing and presentation software can automatically generate alt-text descriptions for images that are inserted into documents or presentations. T.J. Thomson

The most frequent way our participants encountered generative AI in journalism was when journalists reported on AI content that had gone viral.

For example, when an AI-generated image purported to show Princes William and Harry embracing at King Charles’s coronation, news outlets reported on this false image.

Our news audience participants also saw notices that AI had been used to write, edit or translate news articles. They saw AI-generated images accompanying some of these. This is a popular approach at The Daily Telegraph, which uses AI-generated images to illustrate many of its opinion columns.

An overview of twelve opinion columns published by The Daily Telegraph and each featuring an image generated by an AI tool.
The Daily Telegraph frequently turns to generative AI to illustrate its opinion columns, sometimes generating more photorealistic illustrations and sometimes less photorealistic ones. T.J. Thomson

Overall, our participants felt most comfortable with journalists using AI for brainstorming or for enriching already created media. This was followed by using AI for editing and creating. But comfort depends heavily on the specific use.

Most of our participants were comfortable with turning to AI to create icons for an infographic. But they were quite uncomfortable with the idea of an AI avatar presenting the news, for example.

On the editing front, a majority of our participants were comfortable with using AI to animate historical images, like this one. AI can be used to “enliven” an otherwise static image in the hopes of attracting viewer interest and engagement.

A historical photograph from the State Library of Western Australia’s collection has been animated with AI (a tool called Runway) to introduce motion to the still image. T.J. Thomson

Your role as an audience member

If you’re unsure if or how journalists are using AI, look for a policy or explainer from the news outlet on the topic. If you can’t find one, consider asking the outlet to develop and publish a policy.

Consider supporting media outlets that use AI to complement and support – rather than replace – human labour.

Before making decisions, consider the past trustworthiness of the journalist or outlet in question, and what the evidence says.The Conversation

T.J. Thomson, Senior Lecturer in Visual Communication & Digital Media, RMIT UniversityMichelle Riedlinger, Associate Professor in Digital Media, Queensland University of TechnologyPhoebe Matich, Postdoctoral Research Fellow, Generative Authenticity in Journalism and Human Rights Media, ADM+S Centre, Queensland University of Technology, and Ryan J. Thomas, Associate Professor, Washington State University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘I feel constant anxiety’: how caring for a seriously unwell pet can lead to stress and burnout

Ground Picture/Shutterstock
Susan HazelUniversity of Adelaide and Tracey TaylorUniversity of Adelaide

Living with a pet brings many benefits, including constant presence, love and support. Pet ownership is also linked with a lower long-term risk of early death.

Most of us would do anything for our pets if they become unwell. But just as caring for a human loved one can come at great personal cost, a growing body of research shows that’s also true for many pet owners looking after a seriously ill pet.

This stress is often known as “caregiver burden”.

An older dog frolics in the grass
Most of us would do anything for our pets if they become unwell. Haletska Olha/Shutterstock

Stress, depression, burnout and anxiety

One 2017 study looked at how people with healthy pets fared compared to those caring for pets with serious diseases.

It found many of those looking after seriously ill animals felt they didn’t have enough time for themselves due to the time they had to spend with their pet.

Compared to owners of healthy pets, those caring for unwell pets experienced:

greater burden, stress and symptoms of depression/anxiety, as well as poorer quality of life.

Our 2023 research into experiences of people looking after older dogs showed similarly concerning results.

We surveyed people with dogs eight years or older. Some of these dogs were living with canine cognitive dysfunction, a form of dementia similar to Alzheimer’s disease in people.

Out of the 637 respondents to our survey, 16% had a high burden of care likely to be associated with negative psychological, physical and financial outcomes.

One respondent told us:

My partner and I cannot leave him home alone for long at all […] I worry about [my pet’s] quality of life. I feel my partner is really struggling with [my pet’s] deterioration and when the time comes for euthanasia I know it will be me forcing the issue. I feel constant anxiety about this decision looming.

A higher burden of care was associated with the dog having more severe canine cognitive dysfunction, pet owners who were aged between 25 and 44 years, and those who lived alone.

This makes sense, because people who live alone don’t have another person to support or help them. The most difficult dog behaviours people reported were night-time disturbances and barking.

Burden of care in other situations

Any significant pet disease or disability is likely to be associated with stress in their caregivers.

Even behavioural problems in dogs, such as aggression or separation-related disorder, have been associated with clinically significant strain in more than 68% of people.

Most of the research has been done in dogs, but owners of ill cats also have a higher burden, although it appears less than owners of an ill dog.

We previously showed that a third of owners of cats with epilepsy are likely to be experiencing high levels of carer stress or strain.

These problems were worse in owners who did not feel supported by their vet. For example, they may feel they’re being rushed through appointments, or that their concerns are being dismissed.

Pet owners more likely to feel this caregiver stress included those who were younger than 55, and those whose cat had uncontrolled seizures.

Strong emotions and complex needs

The burden of caring for an unwell pet is not well recognised, even by vets.

People suffering this kind of carer stress are likely to require more time in consultations at the vet’s office, visit more frequently, and become angry and emotional.

From a vet’s perspective, clients with such strong emotions and complex needs can be challenging.

A woman and her elderly dog visit the vet.
People suffering a high burden of care are likely to require more time in consultations at the vet. Beach Creatives/Shutterstock

How can you get help?

If you or somebody you know is struggling with caring for a seriously ill pet, find a vet you trust and feel comfortable with. If you can tell them what you are struggling with, the vet may be able to provide some support.

Call on your village! Ask friends and family for help to provide you with respite. We often do it when we first bring a new puppy or kitten home, but don’t think it’s OK to ask for help when they’re sick or ageing and need more care.

Know that it’s OK to sometimes feel frustrated, overwhelmed, or even resentful towards your pet. It doesn’t mean you don’t love them. It means providing this level of care is hard.

A woman presses her forehead lovingly against her dog's forehead.
Being a carer is hard work. Soloviova Liudmyla/Shutterstock

Despite the hardships, many caregivers find comfort in their deep connection to their pets. One of our respondents in the senior dog study wrote:

every moment I have with her now is a blessing. She has given me so much over the last ten years; it’s time to pay back now.

Pets also give meaning to our lives. In our study of cats with epilepsy, one person wrote:

I think that most of the people are not aware of the benefits of living with the cat with special needs.

Supporting the human-animal bond means supporting both humans and animals. We’re all better off when we recognise and support people struggling with caring for their pets.

If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14 or Beyond Blue on 1300 22 4636.The Conversation

Susan Hazel, Associate Professor, School of Animal and Veterinary Science, University of Adelaide and Tracey Taylor, PhD Candidate, School of Animal and Veterinary Sciences, University of Adelaide

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What is Navalny’s legacy for Russia?

A spontaneous memorial of flowers in St Petersburg, Russia, on the day of Alexei Navalny’s death, February 16 2024. Aleksey Dushutin/Shutterstock
Ben NobleUCL

This is the best day of the past five months for me … This is my home … I am not afraid of anything and I urge you not to be afraid of anything either.

These were Alexei Navalny’s words after landing at Moscow’s Sheremetyevo Airport on January 17 2021. Russia’s leading opposition figure had spent the past months recovering in Germany from an attempt on his life by the Russian Federal Security Service (FSB). Minutes after making his comments, Navalny was detained at border control. And he would remain behind bars until his death on February 16 2024, in the remote “Polar Wolf” penal colony within the Arctic Circle.

“Why did he return to Russia?” That’s the question I’m asked about Navalny most frequently. Wasn’t it a mistake to return to certain imprisonment, when he could have maintained his opposition to Russia’s president, Vladimir Putin, from abroad?

But Navalny’s decision to return didn’t surprise me. I’ve researched and written about him extensively, including co-authoring Navalny: Putin’s Nemesis, Russia’s Future?, the first English-language, book-length account of his life and political activities. Defying the Kremlin by returning was a signature move, reflecting both his obstinacy and bravery. He wanted to make sure his supporters and activists in Russia did not feel abandoned, risking their lives while he lived a cushy life in exile.


The Insights section is committed to high-quality longform journalism. Our editors work with academics from many different backgrounds who are tackling a wide range of societal and scientific challenges.


Besides, Navalny wasn’t returning to certain imprisonment. A close ally of his, Vladimir Ashurkov, told me in May 2022 that his “incarceration in Russia was not a certainty. It was a probability, a scenario – but it wasn’t like he was walking into a certain long-term prison term.”

Also, Navalny hadn’t chosen to leave Russia in the first place. He was unconscious when taken by plane from Omsk to Berlin for treatment following his poisoning with the nerve agent Novichok in August 2020. Navalny had been consistent in saying he was a Russian politician who needed to remain in Russia to be effective.

In a subsequent interview, conducted in a forest on the outskirts of the German capital as he slowly recovered, Navalny said: “In people’s minds, if you leave the country, that means you’ve surrendered.”


Outrage, detention and death

Two days after Navalny’s final return to Russia, the Anti-Corruption Foundation (ACF) – the organisation he established in 2011 – published its biggest ever investigation. The YouTube video exploring “Putin’s palace” on the Black Sea coast achieved an extraordinary 100 million views within ten days. By the start of February 2021, polling suggested it had been watched by more than a quarter of all adults in Russia.

Outrage at Navalny’s detention, combined with this Putin investigation, got people on to the streets. On January 23 2021, 160,000 people turned out across Russia in events that did not have prior approval from the authorities. More than 40% of the participants said they were taking part in a protest for the first time.

But the Russian authorities were determined to also make it their last time. Law enforcement mounted an awesome display of strength, detaining protesters and sometimes beating them. The number of participants at protests on January 31 and February 2 declined sharply as a result.

Between Navalny’s return to Russia in January 2021 and his death in February 2024, aged 47, he faced criminal case after criminal case, adding years and years to his time in prison and increasing the severity of his detention. By the time of his death, he was in the harshest type of prison in the Russian penitentiary system – a “special regime” colony – and was frequently sent to a punishment cell.

The obvious intent was to demoralise Navalny, his team and supporters – making an example of him to spread fear among anyone else who might consider mounting a challenge to the Kremlin. But Navalny fought back, as described in his posthumously published memoir, Patriot. He made legal challenges against his jailers. He went on hunger strike. And he formed a union for his fellow prisoners.

He also used his court appearances to make clear his political views, including following Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine in February 2022, declaring: “I am against this war. I consider it immoral, fratricidal, and criminal.”

Navalny’s final public appearance was via video link. He was in good spirits, with his trademark optimism and humour still on display. Tongue firmly in cheek, he asked the judge for financial help:

Your Honour, I will send you my personal account number so that you can use your huge salary as a federal judge to ‘warm up’ my personal account, because I am running out of money.

Navalny died the following day. According to the prison authorities, he collapsed after a short walk and lost consciousness. Although the Russian authorities claimed he had died of natural causes, documents published in September 2024 by The Insider – a Russia-focused, Latvia-based independent investigative website – suggest Navalny may have been poisoned.

A mourner adds a flower to the grave Alexei Navalny
A mourner adds her tribute to Alexei Navalny’s grave in Moscow after his burial on March 1 2024. Aleksey Dushutin/Shutterstock

Whether or not Putin directly ordered his death, Russia’s president bears responsibility – for leading a system that tried to assassinate Navalny in August 2020, and for allowing his imprisonment following Navalny’s return to Russia in conditions designed to crush him.

Commenting in March 2024, Putin stated that, just days before Navalny’s death, he had agreed for his most vocal opponent to be included in a prisoner swap – on condition the opposition figure never returned to Russia. “But, unfortunately,” Putin added, “what happened, happened.”

‘No one will forget’

Putin is afraid of Alexei, even after he killed him.

Yulia Navalnaya, Navalny’s wife, wrote these words on January 10 2025 after reading a curious letter. His mother, Lyudmila Navalnaya, had written to Rosfinmonitoring – a Russian state body – with a request for her son’s name to be removed from their list of “extremists and terrorists” now he was no longer alive.

The official response was straight from Kafka. Navalny’s name could not be removed as it had been added following the initiation of a criminal case against him. Even though he was dead, Rosfinmonitoring had not been informed about a termination of the case “in accordance with the procedure established by law”, so his name would have to remain.

This appears to be yet another instance of the Russian state exercising cruelty behind the veil of bureaucratic legality – such as when the prison authorities initially refused to release Navalny’s body to his mother after his death.

“Putin is doing this to scare you,” Yulia continued. “He wants you to be afraid to even mention Alexei, and gradually to forget his name. But no one will forget.”

Alexei Navalny and his wife, Yulia, at a protest rally
Alexei Navalny and his wife, Yulia Navalnaya, at a protest rally in Moscow, May 2012. Dmitry Laudin/Shutterstock

Today, Navalny’s family and team continue his work outside of Russia – and are fighting to keep his name alive back home. But the odds are against them. Polling suggests the share of Russians who say they know nothing about Navalny or his activities roughly doubled to 30% between his return in January 2021 and his death three years later.

Navalny fought against an autocratic system – and paid the price with his life. Given the very real fears Russians may have of voicing support for a man still labelled an extremist by the Putin regime, it’s not easy to assess what people there really think of him and his legacy. But we will also never know how popular Navalny would have been in the “normal” political system he fought for.

What made Navalny the force he was?

Navalny didn’t mean for the humble yellow rubber duck to become such a potent symbol of resistance.

In March 2017, the ACF published its latest investigation into elite corruption, this time focusing on then-prime minister (and former president), Dmitry Medvedev. Navalny’s team members had become masters of producing slick videos that enabled their message to reach a broad audience. A week after posting, the film had racked up over 7 million views on YouTube – an extraordinary number at that time.

The film included shocking details of Medvedev’s alleged avarice, including yachts and luxury properties. In the centre of a large pond in one of these properties was a duck house, footage of which was captured by the ACF using a drone.

Video: ACF.

Such luxuries jarred with many people’s view of Medvedev as being a bit different to Putin and his cronies. As Navalny wrote in his memoir, Medvedev had previously seemed “harmless and incongruous”. (At the time, Medvedev’s spokeswoman said it was “pointless” to comment on the ACF investigation, suggesting the report was a “propaganda attack from an opposition figure and a convict”.)

But people were angry, and the report triggered mass street protests across Russia. They carried yellow ducks and trainers, a second unintended symbol from the film given Medvedev’s penchant for them.

Another reason why so many people came out to protest on March 26 2017 was the organising work carried out by Navalny’s movement.

The previous December, Navalny had announced his intention to run in the 2018 presidential election. As part of the campaign, he and his team created a network of regional headquarters to bring together supporters and train activists across Russia. Although the authorities had rejected Navalny’s efforts to register an official political party, this regional network functioned in much the same way, gathering like-minded people in support of an electoral candidate. And this infrastructure helped get people out on the streets.

The Kremlin saw this as a clear threat. According to a December 2020 investigation by Bellingcat, CNN, Der Spiegel and The Insider, the FSB assassination squad implicated in the Novichok poisoning of Navalny had started trailing him in January 2017 – one month after he announced his run for the presidency.

Alexei Navalny with his face covered in green dye in a Moscow street
Alexei Navalny on a Moscow street after having zelyonka dye thrown in his face, April 2017. Evgeny Feldman via WikimediaCC BY-NC-SA

At the protests against Medvedev, the authorities’ growing intolerance of Navalny was also on display – he was detained, fined and sentenced to 15 days’ imprisonment.

The Medvedev investigation was far from the beginning of Navalny’s story as a thorn in the Kremlin’s side. But this episode brings together all of the elements that made Navalny the force he was: anti-corruption activism, protest mobilisation, attempts to run as a “normal” politician in a system rigged against him, and savvy use of social media to raise his profile in all of these domains.

Courting controversy

In Patriot, Navalny writes that he always “felt sure a broad coalition was needed to fight Putin”. Yet over the years, his attempts to form that coalition led to some of the most controversial points of his political career.

In a 2007 video, Navalny referred to himself as a “certified nationalist”, advocating for the deportation of illegal immigrants, albeit without using violence and distancing himself from neo-Nazism. In the video, he says: “We have the right to be Russians in Russia, and we’ll defend that right.”

Although alienating some, Navalny was attempting to present a more acceptable face of nationalism, and he hoped to build a bridge between nationalists and liberals in taking on the Kremlin’s burgeoning authoritarianism.

But the prominence of nationalism in Navalny’s political identity varied markedly over time, probably reflecting his shifting estimations of which platform could attract the largest support within Russia. By the time of his thwarted run in the 2018 presidential election, nationalist talking points were all but absent from his rhetoric.

However, some of these former comments and positions continue to influence how people view him. For example, following Russia’s annexation of Crimea in 2014, Navalny tried to take a pragmatic stance. While acknowledging Russia’s flouting of international law, he said that Crimea was “now part of the Russian Federation” and would “never become part of Ukraine in the foreseeable future”.

Many Ukrainians take this as clear evidence that Navalny was a Russian imperialist. Though he later revised his position, saying Crimea should be returned to Ukraine, some saw this as too little, too late. But others were willing to look past the more controversial parts of his biography, recognising that Navalny represented the most effective domestic challenge to Putin.

Another key attempt to build a broad political coalition was Navalny’s Smart Voting initiative. This was a tactical voting project in which Navalny’s team encouraged voters to back the individual thought best-placed to defeat the ruling United Russia candidate, regardless of the challenger’s ideological position.

The project wasn’t met with universal approval. Some opposition figures and voters baulked at, or flatly refused to consider, the idea of voting for people whose ideological positions they found repugnant – or whom they viewed as being “fake” opposition figures, entirely in bed with the authorities. (This makes clear that Navalny was never the leader of the political opposition in Russia; he was, rather, the leading figure of a fractious constellation of individuals and groups.)

But others relished the opportunity to make rigged elections work in their favour. And there is evidence that Smart Voting did sometimes work, including in the September 2020 regional and local elections, for which Navalny had been campaigning when he was poisoned with Novichok.

In an astonishing moment captured on film during his recovery in Germany, Navalny speaks to an alleged member of the FSB squad sent to kill him. Pretending to be the aide to a senior FSB official, Navalny finds out that the nerve agent had been placed in his underpants.

How do Russians feel about Navalny now?

It’s like a member of the family has died.

This is what one Russian friend told me after hearing of Navalny’s death a year ago. Soon afterwards, the Levada Center – an independent Russian polling organisation – conducted a nationally representative survey to gauge the public’s reaction to the news.

The poll found that Navalny’s death was the second-most mentioned event by Russian people that month, after the capture of the Ukrainian city of Avdiivka by Russian troops. But when asked how they felt about his death, 69% of respondents said they had “no particular feelings” either way – while only 17% said they felt “sympathy” or “pity”.

And that broadly fits with Navalny’s approval ratings in Russia. After his poisoning in 2020, 20% of Russians said they approved of his activities – but this was down to 11% by February 2024.

Video: BBC.

Of course, these numbers must be taken for what they are: polling in an authoritarian state regarding a figure vilified and imprisoned by the regime, during a time of war and amid draconian restrictions on free speech. To what extent the drop in support for Navalny was real, rather than reflecting the increased fear people had in voicing their approval for an anti-regime figure, is hard to say with certainty.

When asked why they liked Navalny, 31% of those who approved of his activities said he spoke “the truth”, “honestly” or “directly”. For those who did not approve of his activities, 22% said he was “paid by the west”, “represented” the west’s interests, that he was a “foreign agent”, a “traitor” or a “puppet”.

The Kremlin had long tried to discredit Navalny as a western-backed traitor. After Navalny’s 2020 poisoning, Putin’s spokesman, Dmitry Peskov, said that “experts from the United States’ Central Intelligence Agency are working with him”. The Russian state claimed that, rather than a patriot exposing official malfeasance with a view to strengthening his country, Navalny was a CIA stooge intent on destroying Russia.

Peskov provided no evidence to back up this claim – and the official propaganda wasn’t believed by all. Thousands of Russians defied the authorities by coming out to pay their respects at Navalny’s funeral on March 1 2024. Many, if not all, knew this was a significant risk. Police employed video footage to track down members of the funeral crowd, including by using facial recognition technology.

The first person to be detained was a Muscovite the police claimed they heard shouting “Glory to the heroes!” – a traditional Ukrainian response to the declaration “Glory to Ukraine!”, but this time referencing Navalny. She spent a night in a police station before being fined for “displaying a banned symbol”.

Putin always avoided mentioning Navalny’s name in public while he was alive – instead referring to him as “this gentleman”, “the character you mentioned”, or the “Berlin patient”. (The only recorded instance of Putin using Navalny’s name in public when he was alive was in 2013.)

However, having been re-elected president in 2024 and with Navalny dead, Putin finally broke his long-held practice, saying: “As for Navalny, yes he passed away – this is always a sad event.” It was as if the death of his nemesis diminished the potency of his name – and the challenge that Navalny had long presented to Putin.

Nobody can become another Navalny

Someone else will rise up and take my place. I haven’t done anything unique or difficult. Anyone could do what I’ve done.

So wrote Navalny in the memoir published after his death. But that hasn’t happened: no Navalny 2.0 has yet emerged. And it’s no real surprise. The Kremlin has taken clear steps to ensure nobody can become another Navalny within Russia.

In 2021, the authorities made a clear decision to destroy Navalny’s organisations within Russia, including the ACF and his regional network. Without the organisational infrastructure and legal ability to function in Russia, no figure has been able to take his place directly.

More broadly, the fate of Navalny and his movement has had a chilling effect on the opposition landscape. So too have other steps taken by the authorities.

Russia has become markedly more repressive since the start of its war on Ukraine. The human rights NGO First Department looked into the number of cases relating to “treason”, “espionage” and “confidential cooperation with a foreign state” since Russia introduced the current version of its criminal code in 1997. Of the more than 1,000 cases, 792 – the vast majority – were initiated following Russia’s full-scale invasion of Ukraine in 2022.

Russian law enforcement has also used nebulous anti-extremism and anti-terrorism legislation to crack down on dissenting voices. Three of Navalny’s lawyers were sentenced in January 2025 for participating in an “extremist organisation”, as the ACF was designated by a Moscow court in June 2021. The Russian legislature has also passed a barrage of legislation relating to so-called “foreign agents”, to tarnish the work of those the regime regards as foreign-backed “fifth columnists”.

Mass street protests are largely a thing of the past in Russia. Restrictions were placed on public gatherings during the COVID pandemic – but these rules were applied selectively, with opposition individuals and groups being targeted. And opportunities for collective action were further reduced following the full-scale invasion of Ukraine.

Freedom of speech has also come under assault. Article 29, point five of the Russian constitution states: “Censorship shall be prohibited.” But in September 2024, Kremlin spokesperson Peskov said: “In the state of war that we are in, restrictions are justified, and censorship is justified.”

Legislation passed very soon after the 2022 invasion of Ukraine made it illegal to comment on the Russian military’s activities truthfully – and even to call the war a war.

YouTube – the platform so central to Navalny’s ability to spread his message – has been targeted. Without banning it outright – perhaps afraid of the public backlash this might cause – the Russian state media regulator, Roskomnadzor, has slowed down internet traffic to the site within Russia. The result has been a move of users to other websites supporting video content, including VKontakte – a Russian social media platform.

In short, conditions in Russia are very different now compared to when Navalny first emerged. The relative freedom of the 2000s and 2010s gave him the space to challenge the corruption and authoritarianism of an evolving system headed by Putin. But this space has shrunk over time, to the point where no room remains for a figure like him within Russia.

In 2019, Navalny told Ivan Zhdanov, who is now director of the ACF: “We changed the regime, but not in the way we wanted.” So, did Navalny and his team push the Kremlin to become more authoritarian – making it not only intolerant of him but also any possible successor?

There may be some truth in this. And yet, the drastic steps taken by the regime following the start of the war on Ukraine suggest there were other, even more significant factors that have laid bare the violent nature of Putin’s personal autocracy – and the president’s disdain for dissenters.

Plenty for Russians to be angry about

How can we win the war when dedushka [grandpa] is a moron?

In June 2023, Evgeny Prigozhin – a long-time associate of Putin and head of the private military Wagner Group – staged an armed rebellion, marching his forces on the Russian capital. This was not a full-blown political movement against Putin. But the target of Prigozhin’s invective against Russia’s military leadership had become increasingly blurry, testing the taboo of direct criticism of the president – who is sometimes referred to, disparagingly, as “grandpa” in Russia.

And Prigozhin paid the price. In August 2023, he was killed when the private jet he was flying in crashed after an explosion on board. Afterwards, Putin referred to Prigozhin as a “talented person” who “made serious mistakes in life”.

In the west, opposition to the Kremlin is often associated with more liberal figures like Navalny. Yet the most consequential domestic challenge to Putin’s rule came from a very different part of the ideological spectrum – a figure in Prigozhin leading a segment of Russian society that wanted the Kremlin to prosecute its war on Ukraine even more aggressively.

Video: BBC.

Today, there is plenty for Russians to be angry about, and Putin knows it. He recently acknowledged an “overheating of the economy”. This has resulted in high inflation, in part due to all the resources being channelled into supporting the war effort. Such cost-of-living concerns weigh more heavily than the war on the minds of most Russians.

A favourite talking point of the Kremlin is how Putin imposed order in Russia following the “wild 1990s” – characterised by economic turbulence and symbolised by then-president Boris Yeltsin’s public drunkenness. Many Russians attribute the stability and rise in living standards they experienced in the 2000s with Putin’s rule – and thank him for it by providing support for his continued leadership.

The current economic problems are an acute worry for the Kremlin because they jeopardise this basic social contract struck with the Russian people. In fact, one way the Kremlin tried to discredit Navalny was by comparing him with Yeltsin, suggesting he posed the same threats as a failed reformer. In his memoir, Navalny concedes that “few things get under my skin more”.

Although originally a fan of Yeltsin, Navalny became an ardent critic. His argument was that Yeltsin and those around him squandered the opportunity to make Russia a “normal” European country.

Navalny also wanted Russians to feel entitled to more. Rather than be content with their relative living standards compared with the early post-Soviet period, he encouraged them to imagine the level of wealth citizens could enjoy based on Russia’s extraordinary resources – but with the rule of law, less corruption, and real democratic processes.

‘Think of other possible Russias’

When looking at forms of criticism and dissent in Russia today, we need to distinguish between anti-war, anti-government, and anti-Putin activities.

Despite the risk of harsh consequences, there are daily forms of anti-war resistance, including arson attacks on military enlistment offices. Some are orchestrated from Ukraine, with Russians blackmailed into acting. But other cases are likely to be forms of domestic resistance.

Criticism of the government is still sometimes possible, largely because Russia has a “dual executive” system, consisting of a prime minister and presidency. This allows the much more powerful presidency to deflect blame to the government when things go wrong.

There are nominal opposition parties in Russia – sometimes referred to as the “systemic opposition”, because they are loyal to the Kremlin and therefore tolerated by the system. Within the State Duma, these parties often criticise particular government ministries for apparent failings. But they rarely, if ever, now dare criticise Putin directly.

Nothing anywhere close to the challenge presented by Navalny appears on the horizon in Russia – at either end of the political spectrum. But the presence of clear popular grievances, and the existence of organisations (albeit not Navalny’s) that could channel this anger should the Kremlin’s grip loosen, mean we cannot write off all opposition in Russia.

Navalny’s wife, Yulia, has vowed to continue her husband’s work. And his team in exile maintain focus on elite corruption in Russia, now from their base in Vilnius, Lithuania. The ACF’s most recent investigation is on Igor Sechin, CEO of the oil company Rosneft.

But some have argued this work is no longer as relevant as it was. Sam Greene, professor in Russian politics at King’s College London, captured this doubt in a recent Substack post:

[T]here is a palpable sense that these sorts of investigations may not be relevant to as many people as they used to be, given everything that has transpired since the mid-2010s, when they were the bread and butter of the Anti-Corruption Foundation. Some … have gone as far as to suggest that they have become effectively meaningless … and thus that Team Navalny should move on.

Navalny’s team are understandably irritated by suggestions they’re no longer as effective as they once were. But it’s important to note that this criticism has often been sharpest within Russia’s liberal opposition. The ACF has been rocked, for example, by recent accusations from Maxim Katz, one such liberal opposition figure, that the organisation helped “launder the reputations” of two former bank owners. In their response, posted on YouTube, the ACF referred to Katz’s accusations as “lies” – but this continued squabbling has left some Russians feeling “disillusioned and unrepresented”.

So, what will Navalny’s long-term legacy be? Patriot includes a revealing section on Mikhail Gorbachev – the last leader of the Soviet Union, whom Navalny describes as “unpopular in Russia, and also in our family”. He continues:

Usually, when you tell foreigners this, they are very surprised, because Gorbachev is thought of as the person who gave Eastern Europe back its freedom and thanks to whom Germany was reunited. Of course, that is true … but within Russia and the USSR he was not particularly liked.

At the moment, there is a similar split in perceptions of Navalny. Internationally, he was nominated for the Nobel Peace Prize, awarded the Sakharov Prize by the European Parliament, and a documentary about him won an Oscar.

But there are also those outside of Russia who remain critical: “Navalny’s life has brought no benefit to the Ukrainian victory; instead, he has caused considerable harm,” wrote one Ukrainian academic. “He fuelled the illusion in the west that democracy in Russia is possible.”

Trailer for the Oscar-winning documentary Navalny.

Inside Russia, according to Levada Center polling shortly after his death, 53% of Russians thought Navalny played “no special role” in the history of the country, while 19% said he played a “rather negative” role. Revealingly, when commenting on Navalny’s death, one man in Moscow told RFE/RL’s Russian Service: “I think that everyone who is against Russia is guilty, even if they are right.”

But, for a small minority in Russia, Navalny will go down as a messiah-like figure who miraculously cheated death in 2020, then made the ultimate sacrifice in his battle of good and evil with the Kremlin. This view may have been reinforced by Navalny’s increasing openness about his Christian faith.

Ultimately, Navalny’s long-term status in Russia will depend on the nature of the political system after Putin has gone. Since it seems likely that authoritarianism will outlast Putin, a more favourable official story about Navalny is unlikely to emerge any time soon. However, how any post-Putin regime tries to make sense of Navalny’s legacy will tell us a lot about that regime.

While he was alive, Navalny stood for the freer Russia in which he had emerged as a leading opposition figure – and also what he called the “Beautiful Russia of the Future”. Perhaps, after his death, his lasting legacy in Russia remains the ability for some to think – if only in private – of other possible Russias.


For you: more from our Insights series:

To hear about new Insights articles, join the hundreds of thousands of people who value The Conversation’s evidence-based news. Subscribe to our newsletter.The Conversation

Ben Noble, Associate Professor of Russian Politics, UCL

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Power to the people: a new book reveals the true story of how Australian democracy works

Shutterstock
Amanda DunnThe Conversation

When I was a child, I lived in a very politically engaged household. My parents were always talking politics, and my dad in particular was often growling at the television when the face of someone he disagreed with appeared on it.

Yet despite this, and despite nerdily watching election counts all the way through my school years, spurred by a deep interest in how power operates in this country, I still managed to make it to university and beyond with gaping holes in my civics education.

What does our Constitution say, for example? And why is it such a dry legal document, so different from the grand sentiment of its US counterpart? How did the major political parties come to be? And where does the High Court fit into all this?

So in 2024, in the tumultuous aftermath of the Voice to Parliament referendum that had us all grappling with constitutional change and what it might mean, I decided to use the incredible wealth of knowledge and experience at our disposal in our academic writers and put together a book called How Australian Democracy Works. It’s my hope that readers will find it as informative to read as I did to bring it together.

In it, some of our finest thinkers and writers explain and analyse how our government, parliament and Constitution work, and examine some of the most pressing issues facing our democracy. James Walter explains how our unique democracy evolved; Michelle Grattan looks at the role of the prime minister – and some of the most significant holders of that position we’ve had.

Constitutional law expert Anne Twomey explains why Australia is (still) a constitutional monarchy, Yee-Fui Ng examines corruption and other abuses of political power, and Chris Wallace looks at the role of the public service and its place in our democracy. Finally, political historian Paul Strangio presents an essay on the health of Australian democracy a quarter of the way through the 21st century: where its strengths are, but also the considerable fissures that are emerging.

As we head into a federal election at a pivotal moment in our history, it’s our hope that the book offers a deeper understanding of our democracy: its history, strengths and challenges.

In concert with its publication on March 4 (you can pre-order here), we are hosting a series of launches this February and March, and we’d love to see you there.

Canberra

Monday February 24, 6pm SOLD OUT

Editor Misha Ketchell in conversation with Michelle Grattan, Frank Bongiorno and Mark Kenny

Location: Cultural Centre Kambri, Australian National University

Register here

Sydney

Tuesday, March 4, 7pm

Senior Editor Sunanda Creagh in conversation with Michelle Arrow, Anne Twomey and Paul Kildea

Location: Red Mill Distillery, 176 Mullens Street, Rozelle

Register here

Melbourne

Friday, March 7, 6pm

Politics + Society Editor Amanda Dunn in conversation with Chris Wallace, Paul Strangio, Denis Muller

Location: Church of All Nations, 180 Palmerston Street, Carlton

Register hereThe Conversation

Amanda Dunn, Politics + Society Editor, The Conversation

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week Three February 2025 (February 10-16)

Invictus
By William Ernest Henley, 1875

Out of the night that covers me,
      Black as the pit from pole to pole,
I thank whatever gods may be
      For my unconquerable soul.

In the fell clutch of circumstance
      I have not winced nor cried aloud.
Under the bludgeonings of chance
      My head is bloody, but unbowed.

Beyond this place of wrath and tears
      Looms but the Horror of the shade,
And yet the menace of the years
      Finds and shall find me unafraid.


It matters not how strait the gate,
      How charged with punishments the scroll,
I am the master of my fate,
      I am the captain of my soul.

"Invictus" is a short poem by the Victorian era British poet William Ernest Henley (1849–1903). Henley wrote it in 1875, and in 1888 he published it in his first volume of poems, Book of Verses, initially with no title. The established title "Invictus" was added by editor Arthur Quiller-Couch when the poem was included in the Oxford Book of English Verse (1900).

When Henley was 16 years old, his left leg required amputation below the knee owing to complications arising from tuberculosis.  In the early 1870s, after seeking treatment for problems with his other leg at Margate, he was told that it would require a similar procedure.

He instead chose to travel to Edinburgh in August 1873 to enlist the services of the distinguished English surgeon Joseph Lister, who was able to save Henley's remaining leg after multiple surgical interventions on the foot. While recovering in the infirmary, he was moved to write the verses that became the poem "Invictus".

The word ''Invictus'' is Latin for 'unconquered'.

Portrait of William Ernest Henley

First Australian Championship Surfing Competition - May 1964 at Manly

 

Out Front 2025 Opens this February at the Manly Art Gallery & Museum 

Audrey Allan, Silent Echoes In Monochrome, Gouache painting, Pittwater High School. Photo: Audrey Allan. 

Council is proud to announce its annual Out Front 2025 exhibition will be held at Manly Art Gallery & Museum (MAG&M) from 21 February 2025.

Now in its 31st year, Out Front features 25 selected artistic works created by Year 12 students across 21 Northern Beaches secondary schools for their HSC submission. It celebrates the creativity, talent and hard work of the region’s emerging young artists.

Northern Beaches Mayor Sue Heins commended the students for their achievements and dedication.

“Each year this exhibition highlights the extraordinary talent and creativity of our local students. It highlights the importance of fostering the arts in our youth and encouraging self-expression.

“It is inspiring to see how art education in our schools encourages students to push boundaries and to think critically about the world around them.

“It is a testament to the commitment of these talented artists, their teachers and their schools.

“We are immensely proud to support this important milestone for our young artists and to provide a platform for their work to shine,” Mayor Heins said.

Tilda Brownlow, Footloose and Fancy Free, painting, Stella Maris College. Photo: Tilda Brownlow.

The curated collection reflects a broad range of themes and techniques, demonstrating the depth and diversity of talent across the Northern Beaches. The exhibition features a variety of works spanning painting, video, sculpture, drawing, photography and ceramics.

Several awards are granted to participants: the Theo Batten Bequest Youth Art Award, valued at $5000, helps support talented young artists pursue art studies at a tertiary level; and the KALOF People’s Choice Award, valued at $500.

MAG&M is also offering a mentorship session to support one young artists’ transition to a professional level.

PROGRAM

Out Front 2025

21 February – 6 April 2025
Manly Art Gallery & Museum
West Esplanade Reserve, Manly
Open Tuesday to Sunday, 10am – 5pm
Free entry

Exhibition opening night
Friday 21 February, 6–8pm
To be opened by UNSW Associate Professor Lizzie Muller
RSVP link 

MAG&M members and volunteers’ preview
Friday 21 February, 10-11am
RSVP link  

Zahara Spring, Effervescent, Interconnection, Instinct-Love, St. Lukes. Photo: Zahara Spring.

Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship tour applications Now open

Up to 20 students from across NSW will be selected to participate in the annual Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship (PAMS) study tour that will visit historic sites relating to Australia’s military history in the Republic of Korea and Singapore in 2025.

Tour locations in the Republic of Korea include the site of the Battle of Kapyong, the Demilitarised Zone and the UN First Battle Memorial in the. In Singapore, the tour will take in sites such as the Kranji War Memorial, Changi Prison Chapel and Museum and the Fort Siloso and Surrender Chambers.

PAMS is a wonderful opportunity for high school history students to further develop their skills and understanding of Australians at war.

Zygmunt Gray from Finigan School of Distance Education in Queanbeyan was PAMS 2024 recipient that toured Japan, describing the trip as a unique opportunity to gain a better understanding of Australians in wartime.

Fellow PAMS 2024 tourist Celine Chandrasegaran from Saint Mary Mackillop College in Albury said the tour was a transformative experience and plans to continue to share the invaluable insights she gained.

The 2025 tour will take place in the Term 3 school holidays departing on Monday 29 September and returning to Sydney on Friday 10 October.

Eligible students can apply online by submitting a personal essay, a letter of recommendation from their school and a parent consent form.

Applications close on Sunday, 9 March 2025 at 8pm More information and details on how to apply is available at https://www.veterans.nsw.gov.au/education/premiers-anzac-memorial-scholarship/

Premier of NSW Chris Minns said:

“This year's Premier’s Anzac Memorial Scholarship presents a unique opportunity to visit South Korea and Singapore.

“This is a chance to develop a greater appreciation of the story of our nation, along with the story of these nations. 

“I really encourage students to apply, to develop their understanding of military history and those who served.”

Minister for Veterans David Harris said:

“The PAMS study tour is a once in a lifetime opportunity for students across New South Wales, and I encourage all Year 10 and Year 11 history students to consider applying. 

“Scholarship recipients will explore Australia’s military history and visit locations that experienced the war’s impact first-hand. Australians fought abroad in Singapore and later became involved in the Korean War, only five years after the end of the Second World War.

“This tour is an opportunity for students to gain a deeper understanding of the service and sacrifice of our soldiers and the impacts war have had on countries around the world.”

Pave App: to support youth Get off vapes while tens of thousands of illegal products removed from community

The Minns Labor Government is today, Tuesday February 11 2025, launching a new evidence-based Pave app to help more young people quit vaping.

It comes as new data shows NSW Health’s youth-targeted campaign has supported or persuaded almost 40,000 young people in NSW to quit vaping.

Meanwhile, the latest seizure data suggests a severe disruption to product availability following the introduction of laws stopping vapes at the border.

New Pave app to support quitting vaping

The new Pave app being launched today will provide users with helpful tips, motivation, tracking tools, distractions for when cravings hit, as well as activities and information to navigate common barriers to quitting vaping.

It provides a daily check-in feature supporting users to reflect on their progress and a click-to-call function to connect with Quitline counsellors.

The app was developed by the Cancer Institute NSW, and designed together with young people who vape or had recently quit vaping.

Their experiences informed the content and user interface of the app.

It’s free and available to download on iOS and Android. Find out more about Pave here

Campaign supports or persuades 40,000 to quit

In January 2024, we launched the ‘Every vape is a hit to your health’ behaviour change campaign to reduce the health impact of vaping among 14 to 24 year olds in NSW – the campaign running across TV, public transport and social media.

The campaign connects young people to information about vaping and quit support, including telephone support through the Quitline, general practitioners and now digital apps such as Pave.

New research shows the campaign motivated 24,000 young people in NSW to quit vaping, and persuaded a further 15,000 to consider quitting.

Research also shows that 80 per cent of young Aboriginal people who vape felt motivated to try to quit after being exposed to the campaign.

The campaign is now entering a new phase which will highlight the health harms of vaping including nicotine addiction, lung damage, breathlessness, nicotine poisoning and burns from exploding vapes.

These health materials are available in Cantonese, Mandarin, Vietnamese, Nepali and Arabic, and can be accessed here.

Tens of thousands of illegal products removed from community

Between 1 October 2024 to 31 December 2024, over 47,000 vaping products were seized from 300 inspections.

This is compared to the same period the previous year, when just under 80,000 vaping products were seized from 238 inspections.

Despite the higher number of inspections, the lower number of products seized is likely the result of the disruption in product availability in the market following the introduction of the commonwealth vaping laws.

Health Minister Ryan Park said:

“I am very concerned about the prevalence of illegal vapes in our community.

“In particular, I’m worried about the impacts it will have on the community’s health, and ultimately, our health system, long into the future.

“This is a once-in-a-generation moment to prevent a ticking timebomb in public health.

“Our efforts against vaping cannot be solely about enforcement – we’ve got to persuade young people to take ownership of their health, as well as clean our streets of illegal products.

“I am encouraged by our efforts to create awareness among young people of the dangers of vaping, as well as to instil in them a desire to say no, or to quit.

“What I’m determined to see as minister is the requisite supports to help them do it.”

Chief Cancer Officer and CEO of Cancer Institute NSW Professor Tracey O’Brien AM stated:

“It’s encouraging to see that tens of thousands of young people are trying to quit vaping or thinking about doing so.

But vaping remains a significant public health issue and the new Pave app is another option we can provide to encourage young people to seek help and stay on track on their quit journey.

“Vaping can cause significant health harms and can be highly addictive.

“Like cigarettes, vapes are also full of harmful chemicals that have been known to cause cancer and there is growing evidence that young people who vape are more likely to take up smoking, which can significantly increase their cancer risk.”

“It’s important that people avoid taking up vaping or seek help to quit. While quitting can be hard, with support, taking that first step can be life changing.”

Former vaper Jillie Clarke said this week:

“The craziest thing about vaping is that I genuinely don’t believe anyone wants to be a vaper.

“I didn’t realise I was addicted until I tried to quit and I couldn’t.

“But quitting vaping is 100 per cent possible, it’s a journey but every step is progress and you can do it.

“Vaping had a noticeable impact on my breathing, it felt like my lungs were working harder than they used to and I ended up getting really sick with a lung infection.

“What was really scary for me was learning that the impacts of vaping go beyond respiratory issues, with other damage not being felt until it’s too late – I didn’t want to risk getting to that stage.”

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Read

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Verb

1. to look at and comprehend the meaning of (written or printed matter) by interpreting the characters or symbols of which it is composed. 2.  discover (information) by reading it in a written or printed source. 3. to say the words that are printed or written. 4. to understand and give a particular meaning to written information, a statement, a situation, etc.

Noun

1. a period or act of reading something.

Adjective

1. having a specified level of knowledge as a result of reading. 2. having a readership of a specified extent; "it is still a widely read newspaper".

From (etymology); Old English rǣdan, of Germanic origin; related to Dutch raden and German raten ‘advise, guess’. Early senses included ‘advise’ and ‘interpret (a riddle or dream’).

Read (v.);  from Middle English reden, ireden, "to counsel, advise," also "to read," from Old English rædan, gerædan (West Saxon), redan, geredan (Anglian) "to advise, counsel, persuade; discuss, deliberate; rule, guide; arrange, equip; forebode; to read (observe and apprehend the meaning of something written), utter aloud (words, letters, etc.); to explain; to learn through reading; to put in order."

This is reconstructed to be from Proto-Germanic *redan, source also of Old Norse raða, Old Frisian reda, Dutch raden, Old High German ratan, German raten "to advise, counsel, interpret, guess," from word root *re- "to reason, count."

Cognate words in most modern Germanic languages still mean "counsel, advise" (rede). Old English also had a related noun ræd, red "advice," and read is connected to riddle (n.) via the notion of "interpret." Century Dictionary notes that the past participle should be written red, as it formerly was, and as in lead/led. Middle English past participle variants include eradde, irad, ired, iræd, irudde.  

The sense-transference to "interpret and understand the meaning of written symbols" is said to be unique to English and (perhaps under Old English influence) and Old Norse raða. Most languages use a word rooted in the idea of "gather up" as their word for "read" (such as French lire, from Latin legere).

The sense of "make out the character of (a person)" is attested from 1610s. Musical sense of "perform (at first sight) from the notes" is by 1792. To read up "systematically study" is from 1842; read out (v.) "expel by proclamation" (Society of Friends) is from 1788. Read-only in computer jargon is recorded from 1961.

Read (n.) from; "an act of reading, a perusal," 1825, colloquial, from read (v.). The older word for "an act of reading " was reading (Old English). In reference to a written or printed work regarded as to character or quality (a good read, etc.), by 1870 and also from 1825

Read (adj.) from; 1580s, "having knowledge gained from reading," now especially in well-read, past-participle adjective from read (v.).

Early morning on Turimetta Beach, February 2025. Photo: Joe Mills

Five ways that illustrations can tell climate justice stories

Andi Misbahul PratiwiUniversity of Leeds

Climate change is often communicated through scientific reports, statistics and policy discussions. However, these technical approaches can be inaccessible to the public, failing to capture the experiences of those most affected.

Climate narratives structured as stories that involve emotional engagement and personal anecdotes are more effective at mobilising communities, influencing policy and promoting pro-environmental actions across diverse audiences. By blending art with storytelling, illustrations can make complex environmental issues, such as climate justice, much more accessible to the general public.

Illustrations are not just artistic expressions. They can amplify the voices of affected communities and help make the case for climate justice. In an era where climate action is urgent, harnessing the power of illustration can be transformative. It can challenge dominant narratives while creating more inclusive and participatory ways of understanding climate action.

I have been collaborating with Puspita Bahari, an Indonesian fisherwomen’s movement to develop ways to communicate the effects of tidal floods and the importance of feminist solidarity. For my PhD research, I spent seven months carrying out fieldwork in three coastal villages in Demak, Central Java, Indonesia. This involved interviews, observations and creative workshops with the community.

By drawing on 38 women’s firsthand experiences, we have published an illustrated book: Tidal Floods: Women, Fisheries, and Climate Crisis in Indonesia (2024). This story about Indonesia’s fisherwomen explores the intersections of gender, environmental change, activism and the future of the country’s coastal regions. Here are five ways that collaborative illustrations can be used to tell female-led climate justice stories:

1. Intersectional narration

The effects of tidal flooding on Indonesian women vary depending on location, livelihood, age and disability status. Along the coastline, women in Indonesia are involved in selling fish, processing seafood and fishing at sea, alongside domestic work.

This book does not depict women as having a single, monolithic identity. Instead, the images portray their varied realities. These shape how they experience climate injustice and how pre-existing inequalities reproduce new climate injustices.

Intersectional narration is storytelling that captures how different aspects of identity overlap to shape people’s experiences in complex ways. Using this, various issues such as economic hardship, domestic violence, sexual reproductive health, physical and mental health can be better represented.

The image below illustrates these challenges. A woman with a disability is unable to use her wheelchair because the village is sinking. A pregnant woman struggles to access healthcare facilities. Fisherwomen face declining incomes due to environmental and economic pressures.

2. Body maps

To understand the complexity of climate impacts, I worked with women to draw body maps. As they annotated each picture, fisherwomen shared their embodied experiences of living with tidal floods as an everyday disaster.

Body mapping is an intimate cartographic process that involves tracing the body and visually exploring one’s lived experience. This method goes beyond textual and oral narratives. It helps women recall and record body memories that might otherwise remain unspoken.

Their body maps are not just research artefacts. They have been translated into powerful visuals so their personal stories can be shared in this book. The picture above illustrates one fisherwoman’s daily struggles, physical and physiological burdens – so the image reveals the complex, gendered, and intersectional effects of tidal floods.

3. Historical context

Certain pictures show how the coastal landscapes are rapidly changing and how villages are sinking at an alarming rate. This historical context is not only drawn from women’s oral narratives but also from past photo albums shared by the community.

The picture below illustrates the landscape change over 20 years, from rice fields to tidal floodwaters.

4. Movement and agency

Beyond documenting vulnerabilities and the social, ecological and economic effects of climate change on women, this book shows how these women have agency. This manifests in various ways, from small acts of resilience to broader feminist solidarity.

When they work together as a community, women can adapt through collective action. This includes planting crops, building cooperatives and holding demonstrations. Stories can play a role in moving beyond positioning women not just as victims but as people with valuable knowledge and the ability to assert their agency and drive sustainable climate action.

5. Reflection and collective ownership

In an era defined by uncertainty and rapid change, the ability to pause and reflect on climate justice is more valuable than ever. Certain images actively encourage readers to reflect on more tech-driven and infrastructure-focused responses to the climate crisis.

The final pages include questions that prompt critical thinking about the links between gender, climate justice and activism. For example, “what do you think will happen if we do not address the climate crisis?”

Rather than extracting knowledge from women, especially those in Global South countries, this book is co-created. Fisherwomen’s voices and narratives are central to the storytelling process. By reclaiming conversations about climate change that are often dominated by international forums, we can hear and learn from the people who are most affected. And hopefully inspire more climate advocacy and grassroots action.


Don’t have time to read about climate change as much as you’d like?
Get a weekly roundup in your inbox instead. Every Wednesday, The Conversation’s environment editor writes Imagine, a short email that goes a little deeper into just one climate issue. Join the 40,000+ readers who’ve subscribed so far.The Conversation


Andi Misbahul Pratiwi, PhD Candidate, School of Geography, University of Leeds

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

John and Yoko, Cher, Lisa-Marie Presley: 3 memoirs illustrate the peculiar lives of celebrities

Liz EvansUniversity of Tasmania

Throughout the 1990s, I was a music journalist in London. I profiled hundreds of rock bands at the start of their careers, including Nirvana, Alice in Chains, Soundgarden, Pearl Jam, Nine Inch Nails and the Foo Fighters. I can’t imagine a better way to have spent my twenties. But I witnessed a downside. For many musicians, success was a shock, and nearly everyone I knew struggled with aspects of it at times.

Most were affected by the obvious pitfalls of sex, drugs and alcohol, and some didn’t survive. A lot had trouble reconciling their artistic values with the rigorous demands of a cutthroat business, despite their ambitions. Women, including Björk, Tori Amos and Kim Gordon, described their battles with structural misogyny across the industry. And, in a world that rewards performance and persona, many had trouble establishing healthy relationships and holding onto a sense of identity.

The psychological pressures of fame have since intensified. Social media poses a constant threat to personal privacy, and, for better or worse, parasocial relationships are on the rise. But a recent batch of celebrity memoirs, all set in the pre-digital age, support my observations from the 1990s. Famous people lead peculiar lives, and success has always carried a cost.

‘I don’t know who I am’

The most tragic of these accounts is From Here to the Great Unknown, a collaboration between Elvis Presley’s only child, Lisa Marie Presley, and her oldest daughter, Riley Keough. According to Keough’s preface, her mother worked on the memoir for several years, battling with self-doubt before asking her daughter to help. A month later, in January 2023, Presley died aged 54 of a cardiac arrest due to a small bowel obstruction following bariatric surgery.

Still grieving, Keough decided to complete the project alone. The result is essentially an edited transcript of Presley’s memoir tapes interwoven with her own recollections of her beloved mother. Intermittently intimate, it reads less like a biography, and more like a late-night conversation, painting a vivid, although incomplete picture of a lonely, unreachable woman whose greatest loves were her children.

At times, the lack of detail is frustrating. There is nothing here about the impact of Presley’s parents’ divorce, barely any information regarding her third and fourth marriages to actor Nicolas Cage and producer/guitarist Michael Lockwood respectively, and very little about the devastating sexual abuse allegations concerning her second husband, Michael Jackson. No doubt this is partly due to the consideration of surviving family members as well as the content of the tapes, but it does raise questions of editing and craft.

Nevertheless, the narrative offers a moving insight into the worst legacy of superstardom, chronicling the dysfunctional childhood, troubled adolescence and heartbreaking adulthood of someone who was born into privilege, but spent her life seeking validation.

Growing up between the wildly undisciplined environment of Graceland with her loving but volatile father, and a strained home life in California with her mother, Priscilla, who she says “didn’t want me”, Presley was only nine when Elvis died. By then, she was already on track to becoming a textbook problem child.

During adolescence, she endured a spell in rehab, suffered brutal physical violence from her mother’s partner, was subjected to sexual exploitation by an older boyfriend, and made her first suicide attempt. At 17, she found a way out when she fell in love with musician Danny Keough. Presley decided she wanted to have children, and according to Riley, she “absolutely meant to trap my dad”.

With Riley and her younger brother Ben, Presley found happiness, but she was still young and family life was hard to maintain. When Michael Jackson decided she should be with him instead, she embarked on one of the most intriguing celebrity relationships in modern history until his drug dependency drove them apart. The book offers some fascinating insights into the couple’s strong connection, which outlived their marriage by years.

But after Jackson, although Presley had another two husbands, she never found security. “I don’t know who I am,” she states in the book. “I never really got the chance to uncover my own identity. I didn’t have a family. I didn’t have a childhood.”

When her son Ben committed suicide in 2020 at the age of 27, she was finally overwhelmed by her lifelong sense of failure and purposelessness. Unable to face a funeral, she kept Ben’s body in her home for two months in a temperature-controlled room before laying him to rest at Graceland. In many ways, she never recovered from his death.

Keough, who, somewhat unconvincingly, describes her childhood as “perfect” and “amazing”, says her mother wanted to tell her story in order to understand herself and to be understood by others, “in full, for the first time in her life”. The extent of Presley’s personal tragedy, of not being seen, known or witnessed within a world of luxury, lies in these words.

Watching from the wings

While Presley’s memoir conveys the destructive side of inherited fame, media consultant Elliot Mintz’s book, We All Shine On: John, Yoko & Me looks at the peculiar allure of stardom for those in the wings.

Cover of We All Shine On
Goodreads

The story begins in the wake of John Lennon’s murder, a tragedy directly born of fame. The opening pages tell how Mintz, at the time a broadcaster and close associate of John and Yoko, has been summoned to the Dakota building in Manhattan to compile an inventory of John’s belongings. But while this laborious task is testament to Yoko’s faith in him, Mintz has not been personally informed of John’s death, which is odd. He hears about the shooting from his mother, who has seen a television report, and rushes to the airport in a panic to catch a plane to New York. During the flight, he discovers “my best friend is gone” when an air steward explains why she’s crying.

This incongruity typifies the memoir. Graciously told with an old-fashioned charm, the book is presented as an intimate portrayal of life with an extraordinary couple. Yet it’s more a study of dysfunctional interpersonal dynamics where the rich and famous hold sway.

As an adolescent, Mintz was isolated and cursed with a stutter. He developed fantasy relationships with TV talk show hosts, and confesses that “my only friends were on the airwaves”. During the 1970s, he lived in the bohemian haven, Laurel Canyon, and worked in broadcasting, which is how he became part of Lennon and Ono’s personal entourage.

Mintz’s first encounter with Yoko was for a phone interview on his LA radio show during which he cleverly avoided asking the artist about her famous husband. Impressed, Yoko began calling at all hours of the day and night from New York, with John soon joining in.

Gradually, the couple began to trust him. A useful Hollywood contact who comes across as easily flattered into compliance and servitude, he installed a red light on his bedroom ceiling that flashed whenever the phone rang. He hired private investigators at his own expense to help Yoko secure personal details of potential business associates, and after playing the couple’s controversial third album on his radio show, he lost his job.

But aside from an all-expenses trip to Japan, where he acted as John’s minder under Yoko’s orders, the couple never paid him a cent, despite their constant demands.

Elliot Mintz. Photograph by Jimmy Steinfeldt/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

Aware of his status as unpaid assistant, Mintz nevertheless regarded the Lennons as close friends, and even family. But he is never clear about what he meant to them on a purely personal level, and the one time he introduced them to a girlfriend, it didn’t go well. “Whatever magic happened between me, Yoko and John when we got together, it couldn’t be recreated as a party of four”, he says, with unsettling acceptance.

The most revealing, and disturbing, moment in the book is after a party, during which John subjected Yoko to the cruel humiliation of having loud sex with another guest in an adjoining room. Worried about the aftermath, Mintz tries to imagine a world in which the “magical couple” are no longer together, but is unable to bear the thought.

Tellingly, he also fears for himself.

I wondered whether my friendships with them could survive a split. Who would get custody of me? How could I possibly remain friends with just one of them? Or would I end up being abandoned by them both?

In the end, Mintz’s expectation that “the three of us would grow old together” was shattered by John’s murder. He has since maintained a connection with Yoko, but ends his book asking whether the sacrifices he made for the couple were worth the nine years he spent in their company. Interestingly, aside from wondering whether he might have married and had a family, or ended up in a less glamorous career, he doesn’t provide an answer.

‘I was who I was my whole life’

For a more straightforward, firsthand account of fame, Cher: The Memoir, Part One is hard to beat. A big, bold, engaging story of grit and determination that charts the initial rise of Cheryl Sarkisian from poverty and hardship towards becoming the “global icon” known as Cher, this book has all the right ingredients for a blockbuster celebrity biography.

Cover of Cher's memoir
Goodreads

Tracing the first four decades of the superstar’s life, from her birth in 1946 to the brink of her acting profession in 1980, this hefty volume focuses on Cher’s turbulent upbringing and the earlier stages of her singing and entertainment career. It includes her chequered marriages to Sonny Bono, with whom she found success as the pop duo Sonny and Cher, and musician Gregg Allman, as well as her relationships with record label boss David Geffen, and Gene Simmons of Kiss.

Ever the performer, when Cher first agreed to publish a memoir, her main concern was how to replicate the authenticity of her voice. Famously dyslexic, she hired a ghostwriter, but was unhappy with the first attempt because it didn’t sound like her. Two more ghostwriters were found, and the book was rushed out in four months.

Regardless, certain critics have bemoaned the flatness of tone. But while Cher’s distinctive, sassy style would have been hard to capture on the page, no doubt the writers were aiming for coherence. Given the rich, eventful nature of her life, this can’t have been easy. Cher’s memoir is a true adventure story.

Left in the care of children’s homes and extended family members as an infant, Cher experienced a wildly insecure childhood with her beautiful but unstable mother, the aspiring actress, Georgia Holt. Together with her half-sister, Gee, Cher moved home and switched schools constantly, had a string of father figures, and was a teenager by the time she met her biological dad, Johnnie Sarkisian, a heroin addict.

Despite such a difficult start, Cher didn’t buckle. Instead, she developed a fierce independence, a free spirit and a strong sense of self, and from a young age, was determined to achieve the singing and acting career that eluded her mother.

“I guess I was who I was my whole life,” she says, recalling the time she impressed her family with a song at the age of five.

Perhaps inevitably, given the mostly terrible male role models of her childhood, Cher’s marriages were her biggest downfall. Sonny Bono turned out to be pathologically controlling, cheated her out of her money and engaged her in a bitter custody battle over their child, Chas. David Geffen came to the rescue, arranging lawyers and supporting her back to independence, and for a while she was happy with him. But then she fell for Gregg Allman, who suffered from chronic addiction issues, and lied about his habits even after their son, Elijah Blue, was born.

While the book details her divorce from Sonny and outlines the negative episode with Allman, it skims over the breakdown of her other relationships, maintaining the upbeat survivor mode that has become so consistent with her public image. And yet, when it comes to her career, her reflections are occasionally revealing.

“It’s hard when people see you in a certain light and don’t think you can do anything beyond that,” she says of her struggle to be considered for serious acting roles back in 1980. “I was used to that my whole life, but it didn’t make it any less painful.”

Even for Cher, it seems fame and success have not been straightforward.


Cher: The Memoir, Part Two is due for publication in November 2025.The Conversation

Liz Evans, Adjunct Researcher, English and Writing, University of Tasmania

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Most animals have their own version of tree rings – here’s how we biologists use them to help species thrive

Narwhal tusks reveal how they’re affected by declining Arctic ice. Saifullahphtographer
Anna SturrockUniversity of Essex

We have a natural fascination with time – how landscapes have been carved over millennia, how our bodies grow and sag with age, how the stars traverse the sky each night. Scientists probe the layers beneath our feet to understand the secrets of our past. Geologists and palaeontologists sample ice, rock and fossils to reconstruct past climates and species and archaeologists pick through ancient “dustbins” (middens) in excavation sites to reimagine our historical dinner time.

Similarly, most living things produce records of their own existence in layered body tissues – often in the form of daily or yearly growth bands. The most familiar of these so-called biochronologies are tree rings, which form every year in response to seasonal cycles in temperature and rainfall.

Dendrochronology – the art of tree-ring counting – allows us to precisely date trees. Based on the rings in its trunk, a bristlecone pine in eastern California known as Methuselah is said to be the world’s oldest living thing at 4,856 years old.

Methuselah tree in easter California
Methuselah, the world’s oldest living tree. Xiaoling Sun

It’s not just the number of rings, either – their width tells us whether the tree was thriving in a particular year, or suffering due to drought. Chemical compounds locked into the wood offer clues about atmospheric changes, including those produced by volcanic eruptions.

Redwood tree ring
Tree rings are famously detailed life records. Veroja

Let’s not not stop at trees – your own tooth cement, nails and hair are forming chemical and visual records of your own life experience right now, storing traces of food, drink and drugs you have consumed. They can also produce “stress marks” during trauma or pregnancy, when a mother literally breaks her own body tissues to grow and nourish her baby.

Elsewhere in the natural world, some of the more surprising examples of biochronologies include whale earwaxnarwhal tusksbird feathers and the bony plates (scutes) on turtle shells.

Turtle probing rocks
Turtle power. VLADIMIR VK

Recent studies, for instance, have applied forensic analyses of whale earwax to explore their stress levels during historic whaling days. Narwhal tusks, meanwhile, have helped explain how declining Arctic sea ice has affected their diet and exposure to pollution.

The importance of otoliths

In my lab, we work with aquatic animals – from fish scales and ear bones to squid eyes and beaks. Like decoding a biological black box, we analyse chemical constituents in the growth layers to reconstruct a detailed picture of the individual’s prior health, diet and movements.

Some biochronologies are more “fickle”, forming layers at unpredictable rates, including the eye lenses of fish and turtle scutes. Others, such as bird feathers, are shorter lived due to periodic moulting. Yet they all share the important feature of serial growth, producing valuable archives that we can probe to build a picture of the animal’s life.

Probably the best known biochronometer in the animal world – and my own personal obsession – is the fish otolith, or ear bone (Ancient Greek: oto is ear and líthos is stone). We humans have tiny ear stones (otoconia), whose primary function is to maintain balance, but fish otoliths are also crucial for hearing, as well as featuring specific properties that make them particularly valuable markers of biochronology.

Unlike “normal” bones, fish otoliths are composed of calcium carbonate crystals and are metabolically inert, meaning they never get broken down and rebuilt. Instead they keep growing – even during periods of starvation – producing daily and annual growth bands.

These beautiful crystalline structures are also highly resistant to degradation and vary in shape between species. This enables scientists to use a combination of “otolith atlases” and artificial intelligence to identify popular choices of fish from otoliths left behind in ancient human middens, as well as in the contemporary stomach contents or poop of predators such as seals, albatrosses and squid.

Otoliths have driven my research for almost two decades. I’ve been fascinated by animal migration and the ecological and evolutionary processes underpinning these long and dangerous journeys ever since taking a “movement ecology” class at the University of Edinburgh with the brilliant Professor Victoria Braithwaite in 2003.

I decided I wanted to track marine animals myself, and my lab now primarily uses otolith and eye lens chemistry to reconstruct fish habitat use and growth rates, and the temperatures they experienced through their lives. We are now also investigating how well these same structures track reproductive events, chronic stress and exposure to pollution.

And we are working with international teams to understand how hypoxia (low oxygen zones or “dead zones”) affect fish growth and reproduction. Ultimately, this data allows us to connect stressful events in a fish’s past to its lifetime health and survival, which is important for predicting a species’ persistence.

For example, a recent study used otolith-derived metabolic rates of Atlantic bluefin tuna to show their vulnerability to future climate change. Meanwhile in California, we used otolith chemistry to understand the impact of dams on salmon migration and survival, revealing that – on many rivers - dams have made it impossible for salmon to escape into the mountains during summer, which is essential for enabling them to resist the increasingly severe droughts afflicting the region.

Conservation

Fisheries managers read the rings on millions of otoliths each year to track individual cohorts and look for warning signs of overfishing, but I would argue that biochronologies are still underused in this field. For example, fisheries managers could use otoliths to track the movements of juveniles too small to be tagged (those under 4cm long), since chemical markers make it possible to identify where they grew up. This would allow these managers to earmark productive or struggling “nursery habitats” for protection or improvement, respectively.

We consistently find that rivers and estuaries play a critical role in the survival and growth of valuable species such as salmon, sea bass and anchovies. Juvenile fish often have such high natural mortality rates – often only 1% survive to their first birthday – that even small improvements to their survival can result in large boosts in abundance and make wild fisheries more sustainable.

River salmon
Small improvements to survival of wild salmon could make a huge difference to their sustainability. Jakub Rutkiewicz

As such, let’s keep up the momentum to clean and restore our rivers and beaches, and to embrace monitoring tools such as biochronologies to learn which actions produce the biggest benefits. Next time you think about banging the glass at an aquarium, just remember that the fish inside are listening – and recording you too.The Conversation

Anna Sturrock, Senior Lecturer, School of Life Sciences, University of Essex

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Trauma dumping: how sharing experiences on social media can cause distress for other users

Stock Unit/Shutterstock
Alix WoolardThe Kids Research Institute Australia

Have you ever asked someone how their day was, or been chatting casually with a friend, only to have them tell you a horrific story that has left you feeling distressed or emotionally exhausted yourself?

This is called “trauma dumping”. It’s when someone shares something traumatic or distressing without checking in first if the person they’re talking to has the capacity or willingness to take on that information.

Trauma dumping is not new, and you’ve probably experienced it (or inadvertently done it yourself) at some stage in your life.

But now, with the rise of social media platforms such as TikTok, the risk of experiencing trauma dumping has increased exponentially.

People often turn to TikTok for support or validation. And because TikTok’s algorithm is based on attention, it’s not uncommon for highly emotional stories to gather traction and go viral.

My colleagues and I wanted to understand more about trauma dumping on TikTok. In a recent study, we found people often share their trauma on TikTok. And this is usually done without a trigger warning.

TikTok and mental health

It’s estimated around 75% of the population have experienced a traumatic event at some point in their lives. This could include exposure to abuse or neglect in childhood, violence, natural disasters, the death of a loved one, or any other event which is unexpected, distressing, and causes long-term impacts on physical or mental health.

TikTok can be an important source of support and validation, especially for young people who have faced trauma, and who may not have sufficient support offline.

Previous research has shown TikTok provides a platform for talking about things like body image concerns, seeking support and information about gender and sexual diversity, and tackling stigma.

But while TikTok can be a great place for community, support and validation, at the same time it can be a hotbed for trauma dumping.

Importantly, sharing trauma on social media runs the risk of exposing other users to vicarious traumatisation, which is when a person is traumatised by someone else’s trauma.

Vicarious trauma is most common in people who work in “frontline” jobs, such as paramedics or therapists, who deal with trauma regularly. However, anyone can be at risk. Factors including personal experiences, personality traits (such as empathy), support systems and coping strategies all play a role in whether someone might experience vicarious trauma.

A man who appears stressed looking at his phone.
Many people who use TikTok and other social media platforms will be exposed to ‘trauma dumping’. Prostock-studio/Shutterstock

In our study, we set out to explore the top videos on TikTok with one or more of five hashtags related to trauma: #traumatok, #trauma, #traumatized, #traumatic and #traumabond.

We looked the most viewed 50 videos from each hashtag. At the time we carried out our analysis in December 2022, these 250 videos had a total of 296.6 million likes, 2.3 million comments and 4.6 million shares.

#TraumaTok

We found the majority of videos (about 67%) were from people sharing their trauma. In many cases severe trauma was discussed, including child maltreatment, violence and death.

Our study also showed some videos (about 22%) were from people who claimed to be “experts” in trauma. They were using the platform to speak about the symptoms and treatment for trauma-related mental health conditions.

Worryingly, most “experts” (84%) did not disclose their credentials. And only a small proportion (2%) said they were licensed psychologists, counsellors or medical professionals (who are trained to provide evidence-based treatment or advice for mental health).

The remaining videos were either more general mental health content with a mix of hashtags such as “anxiety” and “depression”, or were meant to be humorous, using memes or jokes about trauma.

One of the most concerning things we found in our study was that only 3.7% of videos had some form of trigger warning. A trigger warning, often a verbal statement by the creator, text within the video or a caption, is meant to alert the audience that potentially distressing content is discussed in the video.

A young man sitting in a park using a laptop.
Most videos we looked at didn’t come with trigger warnings. Ketut Subiyanto/Pexels

One of the limitations of our study was that we didn’t look at users’ experiences of viewing these videos. We also didn’t explore discourse on the app, such as comments and video replies.

We can’t say for sure what it’s like for people, especially young people or people with lived experience of trauma, to watch and interact with these videos. Exploring this should be a focus for future research.

Trigger warnings are important

None of this is to say that sharing stories, even traumatic ones, should never happen. In fact, we know support from others is essential for healing from trauma. This can be facilitated, among other avenues, through sharing stories on social media.

But to make this safer for everyone, TikTok should encourage trigger warnings, and creators should use them on videos where trauma is shared. This can give users the option to “opt out” and scroll on if they think they might not have the capacity to listen at that time.

For people consuming videos on TikTok and other platforms, it’s important to be wary of misinformation and think critically about the information they see, seeking further advice from other sources.

If you feel distressed by content you see on social media, seek support from a health-care professional.

If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14.The Conversation

Alix Woolard, Senior Research Fellow, The Kids Research Institute Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Almost half of Australians wish they read more books. Here are 10 ways to get back into reading in a distracted age

Kaboompics.com/Pexels
Breanna WrightMonash UniversityAlyse LennoxMonash University, and Fernanda MataMonash University

Almost half of Australians wish they read more: in our recent research, 54.9% of those who have read a book in the past year, and 49.8% of those who haven’t, told us they read less than they intend to.

So, what’s stopping them?

Common difficulties include getting distracted, finding books they want to read, feeling motivated to read and not feeling like they’re in the right mood to read.

The good news is behavioural science, the study of human behaviour, can offer strategies to help us read more often. The key is to identify the barriers that stop us from reading – and use behavioural tactics tailored to them.

We surveyed a diverse range of 1,622 Australians aged 16 years and older, in August 2024. Our research, done in partnership with Australia Reads, used behavioural science to understand how people read for recreation. We counted print, digital and audio books, but not newspapers or magazines.

Woman on chair reading book
Understanding what’s stopping you from reading more can help change your behaviour. Minan/Pexels

We asked participants about their current reading behaviours and their motivations, capabilities, opportunities and barriers related to reading. We broke down the activity of “reading” into a journey involving five specific behaviours: finding books, choosing books, getting books, starting to read, and continuing to read.

People may go back and forth between stages in their reading journey, and even be at different stages for different books. After investigating the specific barriers people experience at different stages we’ve devised ten useful tactics, to help you read more often.

If you want to read, but get distracted by other activities (or scrolling)

1. Try different formats, like audiobooks and ebooks, to incorporate reading at a more convenient time or place. For example, you could listen to an audiobook when you cook dinner.

2. Engage with shorter material or different genres to reduce the perceived effort of reading. (For example, graphic novels, short stories, or novellas.)

3. Place books in visible places, such as next to the bag you grab before you catch the train, or set reminders to read.

4. Try setting up a regular reading time, such as before bed or on public transport. Most importantly, find a time that is convenient and works with your life.

If you’re rarely in the mood to read

5. Remember, there’s a book for every mood. Find material that feels engaging in the moment, even if it means starting a new book or trying a different genre than you’re used to.

6. Read for enjoyment rather than as a chore – stop reading books if you aren’t enjoying them (give yourself permission to not finish a book even if you usually do), and select books based on your mood and interests, rather than what you think you should be reading.

7. Implement a reading buddy system with a friend or family member to make reading more social and encourage each other.

If you’re unsure what you like to read, or unmotivated by your usual reading material

8. Try shorter, more accessible books to find the types of genres and stories you enjoy. Pay attention to the parts of the books you enjoyed to help you find other similar books.

9. Use book subscriptions or curation services to help find books you might enjoy.

10. Try asking a friend, a librarian or a bookseller for recommendations.

woman reading a book with cup of coffee
There’s a book for every mood. Anthony Tran/Unsplash

How Australians read for leisure

Recreational reading can ebb and flow during different life stages and according to competing priorities. Just 17.3% of those we spoke to cited reading books as their top leisure activity.

But half (49.9%) of them read books as one of their leisure activities. Overall, reading was ranked fourth: behind watching TV and movies (80.9%), social media and internet browsing (61.2%), and eating and drinking out (55.1%).

Our participants who had read a book in the past year told us their top motivations to read were that it helps them relax and unwind (49.2%), brings pleasure and enjoyment (46.3%), and helps to keep their brain active (34.7%).

man reading on beach
People told us they read to relax, for pleasure and to keep their brains active. Martin Péchy/Pexels

It can take a while to feel engaged with a new book, especially if you’re coming back to reading after a bit of a slump. While most people we surveyed felt engaged in 30 minutes or less, around 15% needed up to 60 minutes to feel engaged with a book, and roughly 5% needed over an hour.

It can be easy to feel distracted when you’re not yet engaged. But give yourself time, especially when starting a new book, to connect with it.

The most important thing if you want to read more is to try to understand what’s getting in your way. Then, you can try something to specifically address that barrier.The Conversation

Breanna Wright, Research fellow, BehaviourWorks Australia, Monash Sustainable Development Institute, Monash UniversityAlyse Lennox, Senior Research Officer, BehaviourWorks Australia, Monash Sustainable Development Institute, Monash University, Monash University, and Fernanda Mata, Research Fellow, BehaviourWorks Australia, Monash Sustainable Development Institute, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Leonardo da Vinci’s incredible studies of human anatomy still don’t get the recognition they deserve

WikimediaCC BY-SA
Michael CarrollManchester Metropolitan University

The mere mention of Leonardo da Vinci evokes genius. We know him as a polymath whose interests spanned astronomy, geology, hydrology, engineering and physics. As a painter, his Mona Lisa and Last Supper are considered works of mastery.

Yet one great achievement that frequently goes unrecognised is his studies of human anatomy. More than 500 years after his death, it’s time this changed.

Leonardo is thought to have been born on April 15 1452 in Anchiano, a small hamlet near the town of Vinci, close to Florence. His mother was a 16-year-old peasant girl called Caterina di Meo Lippi, and his father was Ser Piero da Vinci, a 26-year-old notary.

Being illegitimate, the young Leonardo was only permitted an elementary education in reading, writing and arithmetic. He was also barred from becoming a notary, but this worked out to his advantage. Instead of being constrained by life as an officiate, he was free to be creative and explore the world of nature, satisfying his insatiable appetite for knowledge.

The human anatomy became one of his great interests. This was seeded during his time as an apprentice in Andrea del Verrocchio’s bottega (studio) in Florence, where studying the human form was crucial for achieving realistic depictions.

Creating detailed anatomical drawings required precise sketching skills and the ability to accurately depict the structures being studied. As Leonardo’s fascination grew, he would delve deeper into anatomy as a discipline.

Pioneers

This traces back to the 2nd-century Greek physician Galen of Pergamum, whose anatomical descriptions were mostly based on insights he had gained through dissecting animals and studying wounded gladiators. However, he did no human dissections – they were illegal during his time – and many of his extrapolations from animal to human anatomy were wrong.

Galen dissecting a monkey, Veloso Salgado (1906).
Galen dissecting a monkey, Veloso Salgado (1906). wikimedia

It wasn’t until the 14th century that anatomy and medical science advanced thanks to the start of systematic human cadaver dissections. The physician Mondino de Liuzzi, who practised the first public dissections of human cadavers at the University of Bologna, published the first modern anatomical text, Anathomia Corporis Humani, in 1316.

The text was mostly descriptive in nature, like that of Galen, lacking drawings to illustrate anatomy. Subsequent texts on the subject during the 14th and early 15th centuries did contain drawings, but these were basic and unrealistic.

Leonardo advanced this discipline through his remarkable observational skills, knowledge of perspective and, most notably, his outstanding drawing abilities. His anatomical sketches were unlike anything seen before. For example, his sketches of the muscles of the arms and human skull are comparable to illustrations in today’s medical anatomy texts.

Da Vinci's sketches of human muscles, 1515.
Sketches of human muscles, 1515. Italian Renaissance ArtCC BY-SA

According to Leonardo’s biographer, Giorgio Vasari, the artist “was one of the first who, with Galen’s teachings, began to bring honour to medical studies and to shed real light upon anatomy, which had until that time been shrouded in the deepest shadows of ignorance”.

Leonardo was the first to depict a detailed study of the human spine, showing its natural curvature and correctly numbered vertebrae. He drew and described nearly all the bones and muscles of the body in beautiful detail, as well as investigating their biomechanics.

His studies on the heart combined both experimentation and observation. Using an ox’s heart to understand blood flow though the aortic valves, Leonardo poured molten wax into the surrounding cavities to make a wax cast, from which a glass model of the heart was made. He then pumped water mixed with grass seeds through this model to visualise the flow pattern. From this experiment, he concluded that the vortex-like flow of blood through the aortic valves was responsible for closing them during each heartbeat.

Da Vinci's sketches of the heart, c1507.
Sketches of the heart, c1507. MAGCC BY-SA

Over 450 years later, in 1968, scientists used dyes and radiography methods to observe this blood flow and prove that Leonardo was correct. A study in 2014 using MRI (magnetic resonance imaging) also demonstrated that he had provided a strikingly precise depiction of these vortex-like flows.

Shortcomings

Leonardo may have dissected around 30 human corpses during his lifetime. Most took place at the Santa Maria Nuova hospital in Florence, and later at the Santo Spirito hospital in Rome. The fact he didn’t have more human cadavers to study probably helps to explain why he also got things wrong.

In addition, Leonardo was very influenced by Galen, through his readings of both Mondino de Liuzzi and the Persian writer Avicenna (c980-1037), while also dissecting animals such as dogs, cattle and horses to fill in human anatomical gaps.

This approach is evident in his study of the male and female reproductive system, as I found when carrying out a detailed review of his work in this area. Misconceptions included the presence of three channels in the penis for semen, urine and “animal spirit”. The prostate gland is also missing in all his sketches of the male reproductive system. Meanwhile, he made the uterus spherical (derived from cow dissections), and similarly misrepresented the fallopian tubes and ovaries.

Even then, Leonardo still got a lot right. He correctly depicts the position of the foetus in the uterus, and the umbilical cord anatomy. He also correctly argued that penile erections were caused by blood engorgement and not by air or “vital spirits” flowing into the penis, as suggested by Galen.

Da Vinci sketch of baby in the womb, c1510-1513.
Sketch of baby in the womb, c1510-1513. WikimediaCC BY-SA

Where he got things wrong, Leonardo’s shifting focus may also have played a part. His restlessness, disorganised notes and unfinished work suggest ADHD (attention deficit hyperactivity disorder). Equally, this may also explain his boundless curiosity and incredible creativity.

Despite his shortcomings, Leonardo’s anatomical studies were centuries ahead of their time, rivalling modern standards. His work in this area might have been more appreciated had he published it in a book: he had planned one, and is said to have been collaborating with the Renaissance physician and professor, Marc’Antonio della Torre.

Unfortunately, this was cut short with Marc’Antonio’s death in 1511. Leonardo died in 1519 at the age of 67, and while his gifts to the world have received endless attention, his important contributions to anatomy remain overshadowed, and deserve greater recognition.The Conversation

Michael Carroll, Reader / Associate Professor in Reproductive Science, Manchester Metropolitan University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A century in motion: how stop-motion films went from obscure ‘creature features’ to winning Oscars

Netflix
Jack McGrathUniversity of Newcastle

The 2025 Academy Awards could shape up to be a big one for stop-motion animation. Australian director Adam Eliott’s Memoir of a Snail (2024) has raked in a nomination for Best Animated Feature Film, alongside Wallace & Gromit: Vengeance Most Fowl (2024).

Coincidentally, this recognition comes in what is already an historic year for stop motion. A century ago, on February 8 1925, The Lost World hit cinemas. This film is widely considered the first feature-length stop-motion production, as well as the first “creature feature”.

Audiences were captivated as they watched animated dinosaurs share the screen with live actors. The animators positioned and photographed miniature dinosaurs made of rubber, one frame at a time, to create moving sequences that accompanied full-scale shots with human actors.

This method drew from earlier works such as Georges Méliès’s 1902 short film A Trip to the Moon (Le voyage dans la lune).

Guillermo del Toro won the 2023 Academy Award for Best Animated Feature Film with Pinocchio. Netflix

Dynamation: the beginnings

After animating on The Lost World, stop-motion pioneer Willis O’Brien went on to animate King Kong (1933) and the lesser-known Mighty Joe Young (1949), where he mentored Ray Harryhausen.

Harryhausen himself would later design and animate some of the most celebrated stop-motion sequences of all time, including the famous skeleton fight in Jason and the Argonauts (1963) and the fictional Rhedosaurus from The Beast from 20,000 Fathoms (1953).

The blend of animated miniatures and live actors become known as Dynamation, as Harryhausen pushed to create ever-more integrated and dynamic sequences in which animated puppets “interacted” with real actors.

Back then it wasn’t possible to review animation as it was being shot; you could only see the puppet as it was in the moment. Sequences were shot on celluloid film, and animators had to wait for the film to develop before they could see the results.

The famous skeleton fight in Jason and the Argonauts required Harryhausen to remember the movements of seven skeletons and line up a fight sequence with two pre-recorded actors, one frame at a time. He would often work for months before being able to review his work.

In Eastern Europe, filmmakers such as Karel Zeman were also combining live action with miniature special effects and stop motion – extending a long history of Eastern European puppet theatre into cinema.

In 1958, Zeman brought Jules Vernes’ whimsical vehicles and underwater worlds to the screen in his feature film Invention for Destruction (Vynález zkázy).

Zeman’s work went on to influence famous animators such as Jan Švankmajer and Terry Gilliam.

Invention for Destruction was later named The Fabulous World of Jules Verne. Zeman used a combination of puppetry, stop motion and live action effects for the film. IMDB

Technology advances

In the 1970s, Phil Tippet and others working at Industrial Light and Magic (ILM) – a studio founded by George Lucas – pushed the medium further through the development of “go-motion”.

This invention used a custom-made control rig that precisely moved a puppet while it was being photographed – resulting in a subtle motion blur that emulated live-action movement.

This technique allowed for more realistic animation and was used in productions such as Dragon Slayer (1981) and Star Wars: The Empire Strikes Back (1980).

In the 1980s, however, Star Wars began a trend towards photorealism and audiences became more scrutinising of visual effects. Harryhausen’s creatures in Clash of the Titans (1981) appeared especially hammy and outdated even for the time.

The CGI scare

In the early 90s, Phil Tippet and colleagues at ILM, in the pursuit of perfecting the craft, developed test dinosaur sequences for Steven Spielberg’s Jurassic Park (1993). Tippet animated the original test sequences in stop motion.

Also at ILM, Dennis Muren was experimenting with a new kind of animation for creatures made entirely using computer software. These were the early days of computer-generated imagery (CGI).

When Tippet saw an early Jurassic Park test of CGI dinosaur footage, he said to Steven Spielberg “I’m extinct”.

Nonetheless, once it was decided the dinosaurs would be created with CGI, Tippet continued working on the film. He used a dinosaur-shaped physical rig, which allowed changes to the rig’s position to translate to CGI movements onscreen. Stop-motion animators were helpful in this process because “CGI animators” as we know them didn’t yet exist.

Amid a CGI-induced scare, Tim Burton and Henry Selicks’ The Nightmare Before Christmas (1993) became the first fully stop-motion animated feature to be produced by a major studio. This film proved stop motion could be achieved at a Hollywood scale.

Stop motion took a backseat to CGI in the years that followed. Pixar’s Toy Story (1995), the world’s first fully CGI animated feature, cemented CGI as the way of the future.

The only other noteworthy stop-motion cinematic release came at the turn of the century, when DreamWorks teamed up with Aardman Animations to produce Chicken Run (2000), following a number of successful stop motion shorts, starting with Wallace and Gromit’s A Grand Day Out in 1989.

The comeback

Eventually, innovations in digital cameras and motion control paved the way back to stop motion, giving us films such as Wallace & Gromit: The Curse of the Were-Rabbit (2005) and The Corpse Bride (2005).

Working on Coraline (2008), Laika studios introduced 3D printing technology for a sophisticated form of replacement animation, in which different body and facial pieces are swapped to create character movements and expressions.

Traditionally, this technique was achieved by carving individual wooden models and swapping them out between capturing frames. This is how filmmaker George Pal made his Puppetoons films in the 1930s.

Embracing new tech brought stop motion back onto the world stage, with studios such as Laika leading the charge. Since then, we’ve seen the release of features including ParaNorman (2012), The Boxtrolls (2014), Kubo and the Two Strings (2016), Missing Link (2019) and Guillermo del Toro’s Academy Award-wining Pinnoccio (2022).

A new era of stop-motion features

Despite huge developments in CGI, audiences still appreciate the painstaking work of bringing inanimate objects to life frame by frame.

There are more stop motion films being made than ever before, with independent filmmakers and students creating quality sequences for a fraction of what it cost 30 years ago.

Some directors use the medium for its connection with real materials, and out of respect for the art form. Phil Tippet spent more than 30 years on his stop motion feature Mad God (2021) – an experimental and intense horror magnum opus that embodies the materiality of stop motion.

Wes Anderson says his approach to stop motion in Fantastic Mr. Fox (2009) was “very much about bringing to life the [characters’] performance.”

In Pinocchio (2022), Guillermo del Toro tells the touching story of a puppet, using real puppets, in which imperfection and human frailty are emphasised.

We’re also seeing the return of stop-motion creature effects, such as with Disney’s Star Wars series Skeleton Crew (2024–25), in which live action is once again integrated with stop-motion puppets.

The development of artificial intelligence (AI) is now pushing audiences and creators to question what they value in animation, cinema and art more generally.

If AI could generate high-quality films with a stop-motion aesthetic, would we value them as much as those productions that were laboured over for years on end? The recent Oscar nominees may hold the answer.The Conversation

Jack McGrath, Lecturer in Animation, University of Newcastle

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

With ‘damp drinking’ and ‘zebra striping’, Gen Z are embracing moderation – not abstinence – from alcohol

Katinka van de VenUNSW Sydney and Nicole LeeCurtin University

Fewer young Australians are drinking. And when they do drink, they are drinking less and less often than previous generations at the same age.

It’s a trend happening all around the world.

The proportion of young people who drink infrequently is growing in the long term. In 2001, 13.6% of Australians aged 18–24 drank less than once a month. That’s since increased to 20%, or one in five.

The proportion of young people who’ve never consumed a full glass of alcohol has also more than doubled since 2001, from 7.5% to 16.3%.

But for many, abstinence is not necessarily the goal. An interest in mindful drinking means trends that encourage moderation – including “zebra striping” and “damp drinking” – have taken off on social media.

So, what are these strategies for cutting down? And are they really something new?

What is ‘zebra striping’?

Zebra striping” means alternating between alcoholic and non-alcoholic drinks. It effectively halves alcohol consumption for most people. This reduces the risk of intoxication because it gives your body time to process the alcohol.

The term is new but the concept of alternating drinks has long been a cornerstone of harm-reduction strategies.

A UK study commissioned by a zero-alcohol beer brand found that 25% of pub goers alternate between alcoholic and non-alcoholic beer. While commercial research like this requires cautious interpretation, it does highlight a growing appetite for moderation.

Is it different to ‘damp drinking’?

The rise of “damp drinking” is another shift from all-or-nothing approaches to alcohol. In a recent survey, close to 40% of drinkers want to drink less compared to 6.5% who say they want to quit altogether.

Going “damp” – rather than completely “dry” – means reducing alcohol without cutting it out altogether.

Having a drink is reserved for special occasions, but generally doesn’t feature in everyday life. This is also known as being “99% sober”.

It’s an approach that resonates with many young people who are “sober curious”, but do not want to completely abstain from alcohol.

Moderation can be a sustainable strategy for people who are not dependent on alcohol. Sometimes even people who were dependent can achieve moderation, usually after a period of abstinence. In the past, the consensus was that people who were dependent on alcohol should only aim for complete abstinence.

Strict sobriety goals can increase risk of relapse. This is referred to as the abstinence violation effect, which can sometimes lead to a cycle of binge drinking and guilt when people feel they’ve failed.

Moderation strategies, such as damp drinking or zebra striping, are more likely to foster self-compassion and gradual change.

So what’s behind this cultural shift?

In part, popular wellness trends have promoted alcohol-free living as a positive and aspirational lifestyle.

But health concerns are only part of the answer.

Young people especially face increasing social and economic pressures, and may be more focused on professional and personal growth than previous generations.

Studies show many view excessive drinking – and accompanying anxiety and hangovers – as incompatible with their ambitions and desire to stay in control.

Adding to this, social media can make what you do more visible to others – and serve as a permanent record. So some young people are more careful with behaviours that might lead to regret.

The increasing availability of better-tasting zero-alcohol drinks helps, too.

Zero-alcohol beer and wine, and mocktails, offer a way to participate socially without the drawbacks of alcohol consumption. These alternatives have reduced the stigma once associated with abstaining or drinking less in social settings.

This shift is also underpinned by a changing narrative around alcohol. Unlike older generations who often associated drinking with celebration and bonding, younger people are more likely to question the role of alcohol in their lives.

Binge drinking, once seen as a rite of passage, simply may not be as “cool” anymore.

Finding support for change

Given the health risks associated with drinking, such as cancer, liver disease and mental health issues, it’s great news more young people are reducing their drinking.

But four in ten young people (42%) are still consuming alcohol at risky levels.

The Australian national alcohol guidelines try to balance the social benefits and the health risks of drinking.

If you drink within the guidelines – no more than ten drinks a week and no more than four in any one day – you have a one in 100 chance of dying from an alcohol- related illness like cancer or heart disease.

If you drink above those guidelines the risk of these issues exponentially increases.

If you are looking to change your relationship with alcohol, self-reflection is a vital first step. Key questions to consider include:

• is alcohol negatively impacting my health, relationships or work?
• do I struggle to enjoy social occasions without drinking?

Alcohol and other drug support organisations such as Hello Sunday Morning and Smart Recovery offer free, evidence-based, digital support and resources for people looking to change their drinking.

These services emphasise harm reduction and self-compassion, encouraging individuals to set realistic goals and achieve lasting change.The Conversation

Katinka van de Ven, Alcohol and other drug specialist, UNSW Sydney and Nicole Lee, Adjunct Professor at the National Drug Research Institute (Melbourne based), Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Pirates, princes and hostages: inside the mysterious life of the unnamed medieval princess of Cyprus

Leticia Jeeval PalaNottingham Trent University

Throughout her life, the “Damsel of Cyprus” (born circa 1177) was used as a political and diplomatic tool in the conflicts of men. She was the daughter of Isaac Komnenos, the emperor of Cyprus. Her own name was never recorded, although historians have suggested it may have been either Beatrice or Maria.

While the princess was often powerless, the small snippets of evidence that we have about her present the life of a young woman with the resolve and tenacity to survive and thrive. She’s one of the many women I’ve come across during my research into elite women’s experiences of confinement across 11th to 13th-century medieval Europe.

As a child, the princess and her brother were used as hostages in a war that her father was involved in. Isaac was captured while fighting in Armenia and given into the custody of Bohemond III, the prince of the Greek city of Antioch (which was in what is now Turkey). A ransom of 60,000 gold coins was set. After paying half the ransom, Isaac was released and he gave his children as hostages into Bohemond’s custody as surety for the remaining ransom payment.

Medieval drawing of Joanna of Sicily
Joanna of Sicily, circa 1300. Royal MS 14 B VI

The ransom was then supposedly stolen by pirates. Isaac argued that this was a ploy invented by Bohemond and refused to repay it. This left his children in custody for two years until Bohemond, realising that Isaac would never repay the ransom, released them. The princess was seven years old at the time of her release. After the death of her brother, she was Isaac’s sole heir.

In 1191, the princess was again taken captive as a result of one of her father’s conflicts, this time by Richard I of England. Isaac had attempted to capture Richard’s ship, which carried the king’s sister, Joanna of Sicily, and his future wife, Berengaria of Navarre. In retaliation, Richard laid siege to Cyprus.

Isaac eventually fled from Richard’s forces. According to 12th-century English chronicler, Roger of Hoveden, when Richard captured the castle that the princess was hiding in, she went out to meet the king and surrendered. A brave move from a young girl who was only around 14 or 15 years old.

Isaac, who loved his daughter dearly, despite having previously offered her as ransom collateral, soon surrendered and was imprisoned. Richard placed the princess into the custody of his new wife and sister “to be cared for and educated in their customs”. Although she was treated as a ward of the two queens, in reality she was a captive.

Drawing of Richard being anointed
Richard I being anointed during his coronation at Westminster Abbey in 1189, from 13th-century chronicle. Chetham MS Ms 6712 (A.6.89), fol.141r

Freedom or control? The travels of the princess

A new chapter of the princess’s life began. She travelled with the two queens to Acre (in modern-day Israel), Rome, Pisa, Genoa, Marseilles, Aragon (on the Iberian Peninsula) and Poitou, in west-central France.

The historian Annette Parks has suggested that this offered an “odd kind of freedom” for the princess, travelling further than she ever had before and quite possibly crossing paths with the likes of the queen mother of England, Eleanor of Aquitaine. But despite her relative “freedom” in accompanying the two queens, these travels were not at the princess’s own discretion, and her movements were controlled.

After Richard’s own capture by the Holy Roman Emperor, the agreement for his release included his consenting to the marriage of both the princess and Eleanor of Brittany (who was also in Richard’s custody) to the sons of Leopold V of Austria.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


Medieval drawing of Eleanor of Brittany
Eleanor of Brittany circa 1300. British Library/Royal MS 14 B V

The two women began to travel to Austria together in 1193 only to turn around part way through the journey, as the death of Leopold brought an end to the agreement. The princess may then have accompanied Joanna of Sicily during her second marriage to Raymond VI of Toulouse in 1196.

With Richard’s death in 1199, the princess was finally freed and went on to make two advantageous marriages. First, to Raymond VI, the same man who had been married to Joanna of Sicily until her death also in 1199. Second, to Thierry of Flanders after the annulment of her first marriage. Raymond had repudiated the princess in favour of a stronger marriage alliance with Leonor, the daughter of Alfonso II of Aragon.

It was during this second marriage that the princess briefly becomes visible in the historical record again.

In 1204 Thierry attempted to reclaim Cyprus through the rights of his wife. By this point, the political circumstances of Cyprus had changed and a new king had been installed. Thierry and the princess’s attempt was unsuccessful and the two were forced to flee, after which they disappear from the record for good.

The Damsel of Cyprus had almost no control over her life. But the record shows instances in which her own strength and tenacity were able to shine through. From facing King Richard in surrender, to forming advantageous marriages when she had no networks of her own, she navigated the circumstances that captivity brought upon her and she found ways to survive and retain her status as an elite woman. I would even speculate that the attempt to reclaim Cyprus was at the princess’s instigation, in an effort to regain her home.

As a young girl with no say over much of her life, the Damsel of Cyprus is a reminder of how medieval women continued to find ways to overcome the limitations placed on them.The Conversation

Leticia Jeeval Pala, PhD Candidate, history, Nottingham Trent University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Different songs for different days: why it’s important to actively choose the music for your mood

New York Public Library
Katrina McFerranThe University of Melbourne

Many of us take pleasure in listening to music. Music accompanies important life events and lubricates social encounters. It represents aspects of our existing identity, as well as our hopes and dreams. It expresses emotions that cannot be explained with words. Music also distracts us from boredom and difficulty and helps us escape into another world.

Music seems to have a magical power: a wand to be waved that makes life feel better. But what if the power was not in the music itself? In fact, the power of music comes from our choices in what to listen to and the human agency we express in this act.

It can be seen as a placebo effect where the music is endowed with special powers by our minds. The qualities of the music are important. But as with all art, it is how we uniquely perceive the song that makes our experience powerful.

My research has shown most of us operate on autopilot when it comes to choosing music, often assuming previous music selections will have the same effect even under very different circumstances.

Stepping out of autopilot and being more intentional in the songs we chose can move from hoping the music will make you feel good, to knowing it will and seeing how it does.

Choose the right music for you

The way we experience music is personal. There is no one song that is going to make everyone feel the same.

Think about trying to pick a song to make you feel happy, or to listen to when you’re happy. If the power was in the musical qualities of the song itself, Pharrell Williams’ Happy might work. The song has several uplifting musical features: a simple but catchy melody; an energising rhythm emphasised by the singer clicking along; a lively tempo; and words that repeat the key idea.

It’s similar to Psy’s Gangnam Style, Katrina and the Waves’ Walking on Sunshine or ABBA’s Waterloo.

But just because these songs sound happy, do they make you feel happy? Would they make it into your personal top five pleasure-inducing tracks?

Your song selections are different to your friends because of the personal associations you have with them, including your personal taste. That’s why AI can’t generate the right songs for you if you ask it for “happy songs”.

You would be better off to start by looking at your own playlists and frequently played tracks to identify which ones actually make you feel good, personally.

Understanding meaning

It’s important to distinguish between pleasure-inducing tracks and meaningful songs.

Meaningful songs are linked to a range of emotions, identities, histories and social connections – but only some of those are pleasure inducing. Others connect to poignant and beautiful feelings such as grief and loss, whether that is missing home or missing people and creatures we love. This poignancy is distinct from hedonism, which is happiness without negative affect.

If you’re experiencing grief, for example, there may be a beauty in remembering your loved one, but it is connected to the pain of their absence. Choosing pleasure-inducing songs operates as an aesthetic distraction to take our mind away from the pain, which is a different (not necessarily worse or better) choice.

A sad woman with headphones.
Listening to sad songs when you feel low may help with emotional processing – but not always. Antonio Guillem/Shutterstock

Sometimes meaning doesn’t come with a beautiful purpose. Like the love song that becomes the breakup song. Or the favourite artist whose death renders a song poignant rather than uplifting. Then the song may help with emotional processing, or it may not, it can just fulfil a desire for rumination – a thought we keep circling around without discharging the intensity or our perspective on it.

It might seem obvious that these events will change the way we feel when we listen to a song. But it can be surprisingly difficult to let go of music we love.

Sad songs can be enjoyable and/or a beautiful way of connecting to emotional experiences. But they can also intensify our negative emotions, which doesn’t always lead to resolution.

Being conscious and intentional in music choices is important, especially if you’re tending to ruminate. During down times in life, it is worth checking in after listening to make sure the song is helping you process and resolve, and not just intensify and maintain a negative state you would rather leave behind.

Finding what you love

But most days you are safe to let your instincts guide you. After all, there’s nothing more pleasurable than spending time listening to a banger.

In technical speak, we call these “preferred songs” – songs that might not be personally meaningful, or fill you with joy exactly, but they are just great tracks. Music you love, appreciate and rate.

But even identifying preferred songs is still personal. Despite what many people think, it’s very difficult to get agreement about what makes a good song. But it’s not difficult to identify the songs that you think are great. In fact, it’s a super fun thing to do.The Conversation

Katrina McFerran, Professor and Head of Creative Arts and Music Therapy Research Unit; Director of Researcher Development Unit, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Are animals smart? From dolphin language to toolmaking crows, lots of species have obvious intelligence

Dolphins communicate using a sophisticated combination of clicks and whistles. Stephen Frink/The Image Bank via Getty Images
Leticia FanucchiOklahoma State University

Curious Kids is a series for children of all ages. If you have a question you’d like an expert to answer, send it to curiouskidsus@theconversation.com.


Are animals smart? – Deron


It’s a fascinating question that intrigues millions of pet owners, animal lovers, veterinarians and scientists all over the world: Just how smart are animals?

Scientists once believed a brain with billions of neurons was a requirement for intelligence. After all, that’s why you’re able to think – neurons are the nerve cells in the brain that connect and transmit messages to each other.

For the record, the human brain has about 86 billion neurons. For comparison, dogs and cats have less than one billion.

Yet the more that scientists like me study animal emotion and cognition – the ability to learn through experiences and thinking – the more we find that humans are not very special at all. Many nonhuman species can do these things too.

Right now, there’s no agreement on how to decide whether a particular animal species is intelligent. But most scientists who study animal cognition have observed that many animals are able to solve problems, use tools, recall important information about their environment and recognize themselves in the mirror.

Measuring an animal’s intelligence is harder than you might think.

Toolmaking bears and crows

Memory is a marker of intelligence. Of all animals, humans possess the most accurate and sophisticated memory. But elephants can recognize as many as 30 traveling companions at a time. They also learn to migrate away from drought-prone areas, based on memories of earlier droughts.

That kind of recall – known as episodic memory – is the ability to remember an event, including when and where it occurred. Until recently, scientists thought only humans had it. But now researchers have learned that some birds, cats, rats, monkeys and dolphins have it too.

A crow perched on a branch.
Crows are among the smartest of animals. Santiago Urquijo/Moment via Getty Images

Animals may not remember every experience – neither do people – but they do recall things critical to their survival. For example, birds know where they stored food. Monkeys know the presence of a predator.

Scientists once thought tool use was an exclusively human ability, but that’s not so. Chimpanzees use sticks to catch termites and stones to crack nuts open. Crows can even manufacture tools. By bending a wire, they can make a hook to retrieve a food reward that’s otherwise out of reach.

Researchers presented eight captive brown bears with this food challenge: Three objects – a large log, a small log and a box – were placed in an outdoor enclosure. A food reward was suspended above them. Six of the eight bears were able to move the logs and box into positions that enabled them to fetch the reward. Essentially, they used the three objects as tools.

Chimps use gestures and facial expressions to communicate.

Dolphin, chimpanzee communication

Language is another measure of intelligence. People, of course, have enormously sophisticated communication skills. But dolphins have complex dialects in the form of crackles, squeaks and whistles. Many researchers say the noises are a language. Chimpanzees and gorillas have used sign language to express emotions and ask for things from people.

Self-awareness – the ability to recognize yourself as an individual – signals intelligence. Babies don’t recognize themselves in the mirror until they are about a year and a half old. Up until then, they probably think the mirror image they see is another baby.

Many other species, including dolphins, ravens and elephants, recognize themselves in the mirror. Researchers put a red dye mark on chimpanzees under anesthesia; once awake, the chimps saw their reflection in a mirror. Instead of touching the red mark on their reflection in the glass, they touched the red mark on themselves, indicating self-recognition.

Just because animals can’t do certain things, it doesn’t mean they’re unintelligent. After all, humans can’t fly like a bird or swim like a fish. Nor is there a need for us to have the incredible sense of smell a dog has. We’d be sniffing hundreds of different smells from miles away – the scents from perfumes and pollution, gardens and garbage. From an evolutionary standpoint, that wouldn’t help us much. Plus, we’d get sick of it very quickly.

But all animals, including humans, have developed a wide range of capabilities so they can succeed in the environment they live in. Put simply, we’re all using our brains. Now that’s intelligent.


Hello, curious kids! Do you have a question you’d like an expert to answer? Ask an adult to send your question to CuriousKidsUS@theconversation.com. Please tell us your name, age and the city where you live.

And since curiosity has no age limit – adults, let us know what you’re wondering, too. We won’t be able to answer every question, but we will do our best.The Conversation

Leticia Fanucchi, Clinical Assistant Professor of Veterinary Clinical Sciences, Oklahoma State University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.


COTA Australia welcomes new Aged Care Council of Elders members

February 11, 2025
COTA Australia welcomes the four new members of the Aged Care Council of Elders who will join the important advisory body in 2025.

The new members, Professor Ponniah Anandajayasekeram, Associate Professor John Cullen, William (Uncle Benny) Hodges and Russell Westacott will join continuing members Val Fell OAM, Gillian Groom AO, James Carey, Lynette Cullinane, Gwenda Darling, Dr John Davis, Anna Harrison AM, JP, Julie Rankin and Lynda Whiteway under the continued strong leadership of Council Chair, Anne Burgess AM.

COTA Australia – the leading advocacy organisation for older people – Chief Executive Officer, Patricia Sparrow, said the Council of Elders – which serves as an important voice for older Australians providing advice to government – will benefit greatly from the experience of the new members of the Council.

“The new members bring with them a wealth of experience and knowledge that will undoubtedly be a great asset to the Council and help ensure the government is getting the strong advice it needs on how to drive change in aged care reform and aging-related matters,” Ms Sparrow said.

“Each new member brings a wealth of knowledge in aged care and ageing that will no doubt enhance the Council’s work.”

“We would also like to thank the outgoing members of the Council – Margaret Walsh OAM, Professor Tom Calma AO, and Professor John McCallum – who greatly contributed to improving the lives of older people in Australia through their tireless work.”

Rent assistance increase needed to lift retirees from poverty

February 10, 2025
Rental assistance needs to be urgently increased to ensure that Australia’s retirees are not living in poverty, COTA Australia says.

The call follows a Grattan Institute report released today which shows that two in three retirees who rent in the private market live below the poverty line.

COTA Australia – the leading advocacy organisation for older people – Chief Executive Officer, Patricia Sparrow said the report strengthens ongoing calls for the Federal Government to provide a significant boost to the Commonwealth Rent Assistance scheme and for its methodology to be reviewed.

“The current system is allowing too many retirees to fall through the gaps,” Ms Sparrow said.

“Two in three retirees who rent live in poverty. That’s a shocking statistic that we can’t continue to ignore.

“For older single women the figure is even worse, with 80% of single retired women living in poverty.

“The Federal Government needs to initiate an independent government-funded review of demand side housing assistance schemes, including the Commonwealth Rent Assistance scheme, as part of a suite of housing and cost of living policies.

Ms Sparrow said the current housing market is difficult for people of all ages and economic situations, but for those on fixed incomes like retirees, who more often than not simply do not have sufficient savings to keep paying rent in retirement, the situation is dire.

“Everyone deserves to live with dignity in retirement, but the fact that we’ve got two in three retirees who rent in the private market living below the poverty line shows that’s simply not happening.

“We know the largest group at risk of homelessness in Australia at the moment is older women. To allow the current situation to continue unchecked would be to turn our backs on retirees who are falling through the cracks right before our eyes.”

Most retirees who rent live in poverty. Here’s how boosting rent assistance could help lift them out of it

Marlinde/Shutterstock
Brendan CoatesGrattan InstituteJoey MoloneyGrattan Institute, and Matthew BowesGrattan Institute

Most Australians can look forward to a comfortable retirement. More than three in four retirees own their own home, most report feeling comfortable financially, and few suffer financial stress.

But our new Grattan Institute report paints a sobering picture for one group: retirees who rent in the private market. Two-thirds of this group live in poverty, including more than three in four single women who live alone.



Retirees who rent often have little in the way of retirement savings: more than half have less than A$25,000 stashed away. And a growing number of older Australians are at risk of becoming homeless.

But our research also shows just how much we’d need to boost Commonwealth Rent Assistance to make housing more affordable and ensure all renters are able to retire with dignity.

Today’s renters, tomorrow’s renting retirees

Home ownership is falling among poorer Australians who are approaching retirement.

Between 1981 and 2021, home ownership rates among the poorest 40% of 45–54-year-olds fell from 68% to just 54%. Today’s low-income renters are tomorrow’s renting retirees.

Age pensioners need at least $40,000 in savings to afford to spend $350 a week in rent, together with the Age Pension and Rent Assistance. That’s enough to afford the cheapest 25% of one-bedroom homes in capital cities.

But Australians who are renting as they approach retirement tend to have little in the way of retirement savings. 40% of renting households aged 55-64 have net financial wealth less than $40,000.

Rent assistance is too low

Our research shows that Commonwealth Rent Assistance, which supplements the Age Pension for poorer retirees who rent, is inadequate.

The federal government has lifted the maximum rate of Rent Assistance by 27% – over and above inflation – in the past two budgets. But the payment remains too low.

Elderly woman sitting at table in kitchen at home holds domestic bills
A single retiree needs at least $379 per week to afford non-housing essentials. marikun/Shutterstock

A typical single retiree needs at least $379 per week to afford essential non-housing costs such as food, transport and energy.

But we found a single pensioner who relies solely on income support can afford to rent just 4% of one-bedroom homes in Sydney, 13% in Brisbane, and 14% in Melbourne, after covering these basic living expenses.

With Rent Assistance indexed to inflation, rather than low-income earners’ housing costs, the maximum rate of the payment has increased by 136% since 2001, while the rents paid by recipients have increased by 193%.

A boost is needed

Our analysis suggests that to solve this problem, the federal government should increase the maximum rate of Rent Assistance by 50% for singles and 40% for couples.

The payment should also be indexed to changes in rents for the cheapest 25% of homes in our capital cities.

These increases would boost the maximum rate of Rent Assistance by $53 a week ($2,750 a year) for singles, and $40 a week ($2,080 a year) for couples.

This would ensure single retirees could afford to spend $350 a week on rent, enough to rent the cheapest 25% of one-bedroom homes across Australian capital cities, while still affording other essentials.

Similarly, retired couples would be able to afford to spend $390 a week on rent, enough to rent the cheapest 25% of all one- and two-bedroom homes.



Unlikely to push up rents

One common concern is that increasing Rent Assistance will just lead landlords to hike rents. But we find little evidence that this is the case.

International studies suggest that more than five in six dollars of any extra Rent Assistance paid would benefit renters, rather than landlords.



In Australia, there’s little evidence that recent increases in Rent Assistance have pushed up rents.

Our analysis of NSW rental bond lodgement data suggests areas with higher concentrations of Rent Assistance recipients did not see larger rent increases in the year after the payment was boosted.

That’s not surprising. Rent Assistance is paid to tenants, not landlords, which means tenants are likely to spend only a small portion of any extra income on housing.

Since rates of financial stress are even higher among younger renters, we propose that any increase to Rent Assistance should also apply to working-age households.

Boosting Rent Assistance for all recipients would cost about $2 billion a year, with about $500 million of this going to retirees.

These increases could be paid for by further tightening superannuation tax breakscurbing negative gearing and halving the capital gains tax discount, or counting more of the value of the family home in the Age Pension assets test.The Conversation

Brendan Coates, Program Director, Housing and Economic Security, Grattan InstituteJoey Moloney, Deputy Program Director, Housing and Economic Security, Grattan Institute, and Matthew Bowes, Associate, Housing and Economic Security, Grattan Institute

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Avalon Beach SLSC turns 100 in 2025!

2025 marks 100 years of Avalon Beach Surf Lifesaving Club.

Planning is underway to celebrate the achievement of Avalon Beach SLSC's Volunteer Surf Lifesavers keeping Avalon Beach safe for residents and visitors for 100 years!

A number of celebratory events and activities spread throughout the Club's 100th year, are currently under development, and will be progressively announced through the year. 

The range of celebrations will involve past and present members, the Avalon Beach community, as well as visitors to our area.  The Surf Club is a focal point in and for the Avalon Beach community, so it is fitting that the community takes pride in this milestone.

Initially, so that our records are up to date, we invite all past members of our Club to Email the Club at 100years@avalonbeachslsc.com.au  with your updated details so we can keep you informed of what will be happening for members.

If you know of others that may be interested in the 100th Anniversary celebrations please pass the message on. 

The Club looks to the future, acknowledging and building on the legacy left from those who came before us over the past 100 years.

Avalon Beach SLSC Centenary Committee

What you need to know about the new implants to patch up failing hearts – is it really a ‘breakthrough’?

John MartinUCL

There are many difficulties in converting any biological research into a medicine that will treat patients. Because of the complexity involved, these difficulties apply especially to translating cell research in the laboratory to a successful treatment for heart failure, where the heart is unable to pump blood around the body properly.

The definitive treatment for heart failure is a heart transplant – a difficult and costly procedure. Pills are prescribed for the condition, but they only delay death and are not effective in changing the cause of the disease.

Fifteen to 20 years ago, scientists started enthusiastically exploring the use of heart muscle precursor cells grown in the laboratory to transplant to the failing heart in the hope that they might make new heart muscle. Although results in animal tests were positive, they all failed in humans. Included in the failures was the one that my colleagues and I conducted.

We’d had success with animal studies and even some positive results in small groups of patients. Buoyed by these results, we organised a randomised controlled trial – the gold standard for medical studies in humans.

Our study was funded by the European Commission and entailed a massive effort by a large group of researchers across Europe. The result was that the therapy, which entailed injecting bone marrow cells into the heart muscle of patients who had had a heart attack, did not work.

I was therefore surprised to read recently that an article in Nature on this subject had an enthusiastic reception in the press. It was variously described as “groundbreaking”“remarkable” and a “major breakthrough”.

The authors of the article report growing patches of heart muscle in the lab from precursor cells and then applying those patches to the hearts of monkeys that had had an induced heart attack, producing heart failure.

A woman who’d had a heart attack in 2016 also had the procedure. Three months later, she had a heart transplant, allowing the researchers to analyse her heart.

As this was the only case of a human receiving this treatment, and the procedure had failed, as the heart was removed from the patient, the title of the Nature article is perhaps too wide in its scope: Engineering heart muscle allografts for heart repair in primates and humans.

It is noted that a senior author of the article declares that he has shares in the company that will commercialise any success. This conflict may have been declared, but it is still a potential conflict.

Heart arrhythmia

The article does not discuss previous attempts to use heart muscle precursor cells for treating heart failure in humans. In particular, the pioneering work in Paris of the surgeon Philippe Menasché who in 2003 reported in the Lancet that he had injected heart muscle precursor cells into the myocardium (heart muscle) of a patient with apparent success.

He then published the results of a study where he repeated the same procedure in a larger group. The study was not successful. Menasché noted that some of the patients suffered from cardiac rhythm abnormalities following the procedure.

There was much discussion in the field that the junctions between the transplanted cells and the patient’s own heart muscle cells might give rise to abnormal electrical activity that would unpredictably produce potentially fatal heart rhythm change.

Because of the history of failure of cell therapy in human trials after positive tests in lab animals, the objective reader should regard results from animal experiments with scepticism.The Conversation

John Martin, Professor of Cardiovascular Medicine, UCL

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Thousands of Australian pets may soon have ‘useless’ microchips. It’s a symptom of a bigger problem

Mitchell Orr/Unsplash
Bronwyn OrrSouthern Cross University

Late last year, rumours swirled online that HomeSafeID, a private Australian pet microchip registry, had stopped operating.

On Feburary 5 2025, a notice appeared on the HomeSafeID website, ostensibly from the site’s administrator. It states the website “is likely to go offline” soon due to unpaid bills. This means the database of information stored on HomeSafeID would also go offline.

There has been no official word from HomeSafeID as to the status of the company. HomeSafeID did not respond when The Conversation reached out for comment.

According to the Australian Securities and Investment Commission (ASIC), the company is still registered and no insolvency notice has been published. However, it’s possible HomeSafeID has stopped operating or will do so in the near future.

If this happens, any pet with a HomeSafeID registered microchip would no longer have searchable microchip details. If these pets become lost, vets and shelters will have no way of finding or verifying their owner.

The situation is a symptom of a bigger problem with pet microchip registries in Australia – a lack of national oversight.

Why should you microchip your pet?

If your pet goes missing, their microchip is key to you being reunited. Vets and shelters can scan a stray animal’s microchip, search one of the seven microchip registries in Australia, find the pet owner’s details and contact them. Pet microchips significantly increase the likelihood lost pets will be reclaimed by their owners.

In fact, microchipping pets is a legal requirement in all states and territories of Australia except the Northern Territory, although it is required in the City of Darwin. In New South Wales, fines for failing to microchip your pet range from A$180 to $880.

A tiny capsule, the size of a grain of rice, held on a fingertip.
A pet microchip should contain up-to-date details of the pet’s owner so they can be contacted if the animal becomes lost. Todorean-Gabriel/Shutterstock

If HomeSafeID does go offline, many pets will have microchips that don’t connect to a database any more, making them essentially useless.

It’s difficult to estimate the scale of the problem, but it could affect hundreds of thousands of pets, including ones adopted from RSPCA Queensland.

According to ASIC, RSPCA Queensland was a part-owner of HomeSafeID until 2020. A spokesperson for the charity told The Conversation it has no current partnership with HomeSafeID, and “don’t know the extent of how many animals are affected”. Yesterday, RSPCA Queensland issued advice for pet owners to check their registration details.

Where are microchip details stored?

There are currently seven registries in Australia. Five are privately owned, including HomeSafeID, and two are owned by state governments, in NSW and South Australia. Pets microchipped in those states are meant to be registered with the state registry.

The five private registries jointly fund a website called Pet Address, which allows you to search the five private databases to find where your pet’s details are stored.

However, Pet Address doesn’t cover the state registries – these have to be searched separately. Only NSW vets and “authorised identifiers” (such as shelters) can access the pet owner details stored in the NSW registry.

If a pet is moved to another state but their owner doesn’t update the registry, their microchip won’t be readable in the new location by non-NSW vets and shelters.

There are currently no rules, regulations or even guidelines around how private pet microchip registries should operate in Australia. If a microchip database were to cease operating, there is no safety net to ensure information is automatically moved to another database.

A black and white cat scanned at a vet office.
A vet can scan your pet’s microchip to retrieve the number and find out the registration details. Lucky Business/Shutterstock

What can I do to make sure my pet’s microchip is up to date?

Given current uncertainty around the HomeSafeID registry, pet owners across Australia should check their pets’ microchip numbers and find out which database they’re registered in.

If you don’t already know your pet’s microchip number, vets and shelters can use a microchip scanner to find that number for you. Then, you can run it through Pet Address or the SA and NSW registries where relevant, to find out which database the number is registered on.

If your pet’s microchip is currently with HomeSafeID, it might be prudent to move your pet’s details to another database. You can do this by contacting one of the other microchip registries and applying to register with their database (this may involve a small fee).

Australia needs national coordination on pet microchipping

Given it’s mandatory to microchip dogs and cats, it might seem strange there are no regulations or guidelines around how microchip registries should operate. However, this is a symptom of a much bigger issue.

There is almost no national leadership or collaboration on companion animal issues in Australia. Pets are firmly the domain of state governments, with the federal government only really involved in the export and import of companion animals.

There are, however, avenues for national coordination. The renewal of the Australian Animal Welfare Strategy is one, and the national Animal Health Committee is another.

Regardless of who takes responsibility, it’s clear a round table on pet microchipping is urgently required to prevent hundreds of thousands of pets walking around with microchips that don’t work anymore.

Otherwise, lost pets may find themselves at shelters and pounds unnecessarily, and animals that might have otherwise been returned home could end up being adopted, or worse, euthanised.The Conversation

Bronwyn Orr, Veterinarian, Southern Cross University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Seniors Festival 2025: Local events

The Manly to Barrenjoey Seniors Festival celebrates and recognises seniors for the role they play and the contributions they make to our local community.

The official Festival theme for 2025 is ‘Time to Shine!'

The Festival will run from Monday 3 March to Sunday 30 March 2025, corresponding with NSW Seniors Festival which runs from 3 to 16 March.

An events programme is now available to peruse with some great options to get you out and about and even some exercise classes run online so you can do those at home.

Some are free, others have a small fee.
Have a look and book in early before those with limited places fill up. 

AvPals Term 1 2025


Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps Seniors learn and improve their computer skills. It is a not for profit organisation run by volunteers. 


Started in 2000 it now has 20+ trainers and many hundreds of students. At a really low cost (about $50 a school term) they can provide one-to-one training on most matters connected with computing and related technologies like mobile phones and digital cameras. From the smallest problem (how to hold the mouse!) to much more serious matters, there is a trainer who can help.

We offer “one to one” personal tuition or special short courses in the training rooms under the Catholic Church in Avalon. Training is conducted Monday to Friday from 9am to 4pm. For more information visit AVPALS web site www.avpals.com or phone 02 8064 3574

Keep up to date on our Facebook page

Find out more at: www.avpals.com

Boost pension income and Let Pensioners Work

February 2025: By National Seniors
An election is imminent and more than ever National Seniors is telling the Federal Government to Let Pensioners Work. But we need YOUR voice and support.

You may have noticed that news media has ramped up its speculation about when the election will be called. That’s a sure sign the Federal Government is moving quickly to take us to the polls. 

On your behalf, we’re telling the government it has got the rules wrong for working on the pension, and that all parties should listen to what older Australians want. 

We have seen some movement, with the government announcing the one-off $4,000 credit in 2022 and a commitment from the Opposition to double the Work Bonus if elected. 
But neither of these is good enough. 

We need a full exemption of work income from the Age Pension income test. This is the simplest and fairest way to support pensioners who need or want to work. It would be cost-neutral if 8.3% of pensioners work or work more. 

The times are right for such a move
There are workforce shortages, and employment numbers remain tight, leaving employers scrambling for experienced workers. 

Meanwhile, pensioners continue to struggle with cost-of-living increases and social connectedness. It’s a needless waste consigning older people, who want to work, onto the jobs scrapheap and then penalise those who want to work for earning above a punitive limit. 

Currently, people receiving the Age Pension lose their pension if they take on too much paid work. This discourages them from working past pension age, reducing the ability of employers to retain mature and skilled workers at a time of high labour force demand. 

Our policy
What’s wrong with the current government policy?
In key sectors of healthcare and social assistance, job vacancies remain stubbornly high (60,900 or 18% of total vacancies). 

Current pension rules discourage older people from remaining in the workforce.  

Only 3.3% of people on the Age Pension declare earnings from employment.  

Age Pension recipients lose 50 cents in the dollar from their pension if they work more than the rules allow. This discourages some people from working past pension age, undermining the retention of mature and skilled workers at a time of high labour force demand. 

Age Pension rules are complex and confusing and cause many to not work or to work in the black economy to avoid impacting their pension. 

It’s estimated a 5% increase in over-55 worker participation will result in a $47.9 billion increase to GDP. 

Allowing women to retain their pension, even when they work, will help to address the gaps in retirement savings and income, boosting financial wellbeing in retirement.  

The Federal Government announced a permanent increase in the Work Bonus of $4,000 from 1 January 2024, but it is a one-off bonus suited to periodic workers and not ideal for people who work regularly past pension age. 

National Seniors Australia (NSA) wants all political parties and independents to commit to exempting employment income from the Age Pension income test to simplify the pension system and encourage more older people to remain in or rejoin the workforce. 

Current means testing policies are discouraging people from working – only 14.2% of Australians aged 65 or over work compared with 24.8% in New Zealand. 

There are many benefits: 
  • Employers and the economy benefit from greater workforce participation and revenue. 
  • The public, especially seniors, receives better services and care. 
Low wealth pensioners: 
  • Have more disposable income 
  • Have improved health and wellbeing through ongoing workforce engagement 
  • Won’t need to report earnings regularly to Centrelink. 
The government has been reluctant to implement this sensible policy because of fears about the impact on the Federal Budget. But these fears a largely unfounded. 

While an exemption will see some working pensioners receive a boost to their income without having to work more hours, these are likely people who have limited savings. Why? Because the Age Pension means test includes both an income and assets test.  

Under this approach, the government works out the amount of pension you receive by applying both tests. People with more assets come under the assets test, which means that our policy benefits those with limited wealth who need to work to achieve a higher standard of living.  

Care sector test?
While we want employment income to be exempt for all pensioners regardless of what industry they work in, the government could consider phasing the policy in by targeting sectors that need mature workers – for example, aged care and agriculture.  

The health care and social assistance sector, which includes aged and disability care, is losing workers to retirement and struggling to recruit replacements.  

It is predicted that workforce shortages will increase over time, with a shortage of 100,000 (full-time equivalent) care workers predicted by 2027-28 and a shortage of 212,000 workers predicted by 2049-50. 

Age Pension recipients could receive an exemption from the income test for any work undertaken in aged care, disability care, childcare, and other key sectors like agriculture as a first step toward a universal exemption. 

Believe and tell government to act
  • Read more about our Let Pensioners Work campaign 
  • Join here to receive updates and developments 
  • Become a National Seniors Australia member and enjoy the many benefits 
  • Share this information with friends and family 
Let’s get this sensible policy up and support pensioners to fill the many job vacancies holding back our great economy. 

Share your story
NSA is looking for case studies to help promote our Let Pensioners Work policy. 

Are you a working pensioner? Do you want to share your experience of working as a pensioner and how and why a change to the Age Pension income test would make your life better? Your story could help to convince politicians to adopt our policy.

If so, email policy@nationalseniors.com.au to share your story.

Why is there an increase in lung cancer among women who have never smoked?

Pinar Uysal-OnganerUniversity of Westminster

Lung cancer cases are increasing in people who have never smoked, especially in women, a new study by the World Health Organization’s cancer agency has found.

The findings, published in The Lancet Respiratory Medicine, reveal that lung adenocarcinoma, the most common type of lung cancer among non-smokers, accounts for nearly 60% of lung cancer cases in women compared to 45% in men.

About 2.5 million new lung cancer cases were diagnosed worldwide in 2022 – an increase of 300,000 since 2020. The study suggests that environmental factors, particularly air pollution, along with genetic predisposition and immune responses, may be driving this rise in non-smoking-related lung cancer.

One of the most significant risk factors for lung cancer in non-smokers is genetic mutations, especially mutations in the EGFR gene. This gene provides instructions for producing a protein on the surface of cells involved in growth and division.

Mutations in this gene drive uncontrolled cell division and tumour growth. They are found in 50% of lung adenocarcinomas in non-smoking Asian women and 19% in non-smoking western women – compared with 10–20% in non-smoking men.

Advances in genetic testing have made it easier to detect these mutations. However, rising exposure to air pollution, which is known to trigger EGFR mutations – may also be contributing to their increasing prevalence.

Other genetic changes that drive tumour growth include mutations in the genes ALK and ROS1, which are found in about 5% of lung cancer cases in non-smokers. These mutations are more often seen in younger non-smoking women, particularly in Asia. Thankfully, improved screening programmes, especially in east Asian countries, have helped detect these mutations more frequently.

Mutations in TP53, a crucial tumour-suppressing gene, also appear to be more commonly found in non-smoking women than in men. This gene prevents cells from becoming cancerous, and its mutation leads to out-of-control cell growth. The hormone oestrogen can interact with TP53 mutations, making lung cancer more likely to develop in women over time.

Another gene that is worth mentioning is KRAS. Mutations in this gene are usually associated with smoking-related lung cancer, however, they are increasingly being found in non-smokers – particularly women.

Recent studies suggest that exposure to tiny particles in the air, or PM2.5 (so-called because they are 2.5 micrometres or smaller) may be responsible for these mutations in non-smoker women.

Since PM2.5 levels continue to rise in many towns and cities, exposure to these particles could be another factor not only in lung cancer but also in other types of cancers in women.

In addition to genetic predisposition, hormone fluctuations may influence tumour growth in women. Oestrogen receptors are found in lung tissue, and experimental studies suggest that oestrogen promotes tumour growthStudies have shown.) that women who receive hormone-replacement therapy (HRT), have a lower risk of lung cancer compared with women not on HRT, suggesting that natural oestrogen cycles may provide some level of protection.

Chronic inflammation

Beyond genetics and hormones, chronic inflammation could also explain why lung cancer is rising among non-smoking women.

Women are more likely to develop autoimmune diseases than men, and problems with the immune system can play a role in cancer. Persistent inflammation can cause repeated damage to tissues, leading to changes in DNA and promote abnormal cell growth, all of which raise the risk of cancer.

Women with autoimmune diseases like rheumatoid arthritis and lupus have a higher chance of getting lung cancer, possibly because of long-lasting inflammation in the lungs. Inflammatory molecules – like interleukin-6 and tumour necrosis factor-alpha – can exacerbate the cancer by helping tumour cells survive and spread.

Autoimmune diseases have been increasing globally, probably because of environmental changes, changes in diet and shifts in gut microbiomes (the constellation of microorganisms that live in our guts and play an important role in our health). Because women are disproportionately affected by autoimmune conditions, they may be more vulnerable to chronic inflammation-driven cancer.

As life expectancy increases, more women are accumulating years of immune system activation, leading to a higher risk of developing inflammation-related lung cancer. In addition, things like pollution, household chemicals and work-related exposures can make immune system problems worse, increasing the risk of cancer even more.

Air pollution has long been recognised as a significant factor in lung cancer risk, but emerging evidence suggests that women may be particularly vulnerable. Studies show that women’s lung anatomy and function make them more susceptible to the harmful effects of pollutants. Women’s lungs are smaller than men’s, with narrower airways, which might cause more fine particles, like PM2.5, to get trapped in their lungs.

Additionally, oestrogen has been shown to amplify inflammatory responses when exposed to pollutants, potentially making lung tissue more prone to damage that can lead to lung cancer.

Women are more exposed to air pollution than men, but in a different way. While men often face pollution from factory work, women spend more time indoors where toxic fumes from cooking and heating are more common.

Air pollution in the home, especially from things like wood, coal and kerosene, can raise the risk of lung cancer. Women working in places such as textile factories, beauty salons and hospitals are also more exposed to harmful chemicals that can damage the lungs. In rapidly growing cities, women are often in areas with high traffic and factory pollution.

More significant

Women are biologically more likely than men to develop certain genetic mutations that increase the risk of lung cancer. However, factors like rising pollution, changes in hormone levels, immune system imbalances and longer life expectancy are making these risks even more significant.

Recent research suggests that HPV, a virus, may also contribute to lung cancer in women, underscoring the need for further study and preventative measures.

Understanding the roles of immune, hormonal, genetic and viral factors is key to spotting lung cancer early, creating more effective treatments and developing better ways to prevent it.The Conversation

Pinar Uysal-Onganer, Reader in Molecular Biology, University of Westminster

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Leonardo da Vinci’s incredible studies of human anatomy still don’t get the recognition they deserve

WikimediaCC BY-SA
Michael CarrollManchester Metropolitan University

The mere mention of Leonardo da Vinci evokes genius. We know him as a polymath whose interests spanned astronomy, geology, hydrology, engineering and physics. As a painter, his Mona Lisa and Last Supper are considered works of mastery.

Yet one great achievement that frequently goes unrecognised is his studies of human anatomy. More than 500 years after his death, it’s time this changed.

Leonardo is thought to have been born on April 15 1452 in Anchiano, a small hamlet near the town of Vinci, close to Florence. His mother was a 16-year-old peasant girl called Caterina di Meo Lippi, and his father was Ser Piero da Vinci, a 26-year-old notary.

Being illegitimate, the young Leonardo was only permitted an elementary education in reading, writing and arithmetic. He was also barred from becoming a notary, but this worked out to his advantage. Instead of being constrained by life as an officiate, he was free to be creative and explore the world of nature, satisfying his insatiable appetite for knowledge.

The human anatomy became one of his great interests. This was seeded during his time as an apprentice in Andrea del Verrocchio’s bottega (studio) in Florence, where studying the human form was crucial for achieving realistic depictions.

Creating detailed anatomical drawings required precise sketching skills and the ability to accurately depict the structures being studied. As Leonardo’s fascination grew, he would delve deeper into anatomy as a discipline.

Pioneers

This traces back to the 2nd-century Greek physician Galen of Pergamum, whose anatomical descriptions were mostly based on insights he had gained through dissecting animals and studying wounded gladiators. However, he did no human dissections – they were illegal during his time – and many of his extrapolations from animal to human anatomy were wrong.

Galen dissecting a monkey, Veloso Salgado (1906).
Galen dissecting a monkey, Veloso Salgado (1906). wikimedia

It wasn’t until the 14th century that anatomy and medical science advanced thanks to the start of systematic human cadaver dissections. The physician Mondino de Liuzzi, who practised the first public dissections of human cadavers at the University of Bologna, published the first modern anatomical text, Anathomia Corporis Humani, in 1316.

The text was mostly descriptive in nature, like that of Galen, lacking drawings to illustrate anatomy. Subsequent texts on the subject during the 14th and early 15th centuries did contain drawings, but these were basic and unrealistic.

Leonardo advanced this discipline through his remarkable observational skills, knowledge of perspective and, most notably, his outstanding drawing abilities. His anatomical sketches were unlike anything seen before. For example, his sketches of the muscles of the arms and human skull are comparable to illustrations in today’s medical anatomy texts.

Da Vinci's sketches of human muscles, 1515.
Sketches of human muscles, 1515. Italian Renaissance ArtCC BY-SA

According to Leonardo’s biographer, Giorgio Vasari, the artist “was one of the first who, with Galen’s teachings, began to bring honour to medical studies and to shed real light upon anatomy, which had until that time been shrouded in the deepest shadows of ignorance”.

Leonardo was the first to depict a detailed study of the human spine, showing its natural curvature and correctly numbered vertebrae. He drew and described nearly all the bones and muscles of the body in beautiful detail, as well as investigating their biomechanics.

His studies on the heart combined both experimentation and observation. Using an ox’s heart to understand blood flow though the aortic valves, Leonardo poured molten wax into the surrounding cavities to make a wax cast, from which a glass model of the heart was made. He then pumped water mixed with grass seeds through this model to visualise the flow pattern. From this experiment, he concluded that the vortex-like flow of blood through the aortic valves was responsible for closing them during each heartbeat.

Da Vinci's sketches of the heart, c1507.
Sketches of the heart, c1507. MAGCC BY-SA

Over 450 years later, in 1968, scientists used dyes and radiography methods to observe this blood flow and prove that Leonardo was correct. A study in 2014 using MRI (magnetic resonance imaging) also demonstrated that he had provided a strikingly precise depiction of these vortex-like flows.

Shortcomings

Leonardo may have dissected around 30 human corpses during his lifetime. Most took place at the Santa Maria Nuova hospital in Florence, and later at the Santo Spirito hospital in Rome. The fact he didn’t have more human cadavers to study probably helps to explain why he also got things wrong.

In addition, Leonardo was very influenced by Galen, through his readings of both Mondino de Liuzzi and the Persian writer Avicenna (c980-1037), while also dissecting animals such as dogs, cattle and horses to fill in human anatomical gaps.

This approach is evident in his study of the male and female reproductive system, as I found when carrying out a detailed review of his work in this area. Misconceptions included the presence of three channels in the penis for semen, urine and “animal spirit”. The prostate gland is also missing in all his sketches of the male reproductive system. Meanwhile, he made the uterus spherical (derived from cow dissections), and similarly misrepresented the fallopian tubes and ovaries.

Even then, Leonardo still got a lot right. He correctly depicts the position of the foetus in the uterus, and the umbilical cord anatomy. He also correctly argued that penile erections were caused by blood engorgement and not by air or “vital spirits” flowing into the penis, as suggested by Galen.

Da Vinci sketch of baby in the womb, c1510-1513.
Sketch of baby in the womb, c1510-1513. WikimediaCC BY-SA

Where he got things wrong, Leonardo’s shifting focus may also have played a part. His restlessness, disorganised notes and unfinished work suggest ADHD (attention deficit hyperactivity disorder). Equally, this may also explain his boundless curiosity and incredible creativity.

Despite his shortcomings, Leonardo’s anatomical studies were centuries ahead of their time, rivalling modern standards. His work in this area might have been more appreciated had he published it in a book: he had planned one, and is said to have been collaborating with the Renaissance physician and professor, Marc’Antonio della Torre.

Unfortunately, this was cut short with Marc’Antonio’s death in 1511. Leonardo died in 1519 at the age of 67, and while his gifts to the world have received endless attention, his important contributions to anatomy remain overshadowed, and deserve greater recognition.The Conversation

Michael Carroll, Reader / Associate Professor in Reproductive Science, Manchester Metropolitan University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Trauma dumping: how sharing experiences on social media can cause distress for other users

Stock Unit/Shutterstock
Alix WoolardThe Kids Research Institute Australia

Have you ever asked someone how their day was, or been chatting casually with a friend, only to have them tell you a horrific story that has left you feeling distressed or emotionally exhausted yourself?

This is called “trauma dumping”. It’s when someone shares something traumatic or distressing without checking in first if the person they’re talking to has the capacity or willingness to take on that information.

Trauma dumping is not new, and you’ve probably experienced it (or inadvertently done it yourself) at some stage in your life.

But now, with the rise of social media platforms such as TikTok, the risk of experiencing trauma dumping has increased exponentially.

People often turn to TikTok for support or validation. And because TikTok’s algorithm is based on attention, it’s not uncommon for highly emotional stories to gather traction and go viral.

My colleagues and I wanted to understand more about trauma dumping on TikTok. In a recent study, we found people often share their trauma on TikTok. And this is usually done without a trigger warning.

TikTok and mental health

It’s estimated around 75% of the population have experienced a traumatic event at some point in their lives. This could include exposure to abuse or neglect in childhood, violence, natural disasters, the death of a loved one, or any other event which is unexpected, distressing, and causes long-term impacts on physical or mental health.

TikTok can be an important source of support and validation, especially for young people who have faced trauma, and who may not have sufficient support offline.

Previous research has shown TikTok provides a platform for talking about things like body image concerns, seeking support and information about gender and sexual diversity, and tackling stigma.

But while TikTok can be a great place for community, support and validation, at the same time it can be a hotbed for trauma dumping.

Importantly, sharing trauma on social media runs the risk of exposing other users to vicarious traumatisation, which is when a person is traumatised by someone else’s trauma.

Vicarious trauma is most common in people who work in “frontline” jobs, such as paramedics or therapists, who deal with trauma regularly. However, anyone can be at risk. Factors including personal experiences, personality traits (such as empathy), support systems and coping strategies all play a role in whether someone might experience vicarious trauma.

A man who appears stressed looking at his phone.
Many people who use TikTok and other social media platforms will be exposed to ‘trauma dumping’. Prostock-studio/Shutterstock

In our study, we set out to explore the top videos on TikTok with one or more of five hashtags related to trauma: #traumatok, #trauma, #traumatized, #traumatic and #traumabond.

We looked the most viewed 50 videos from each hashtag. At the time we carried out our analysis in December 2022, these 250 videos had a total of 296.6 million likes, 2.3 million comments and 4.6 million shares.

#TraumaTok

We found the majority of videos (about 67%) were from people sharing their trauma. In many cases severe trauma was discussed, including child maltreatment, violence and death.

Our study also showed some videos (about 22%) were from people who claimed to be “experts” in trauma. They were using the platform to speak about the symptoms and treatment for trauma-related mental health conditions.

Worryingly, most “experts” (84%) did not disclose their credentials. And only a small proportion (2%) said they were licensed psychologists, counsellors or medical professionals (who are trained to provide evidence-based treatment or advice for mental health).

The remaining videos were either more general mental health content with a mix of hashtags such as “anxiety” and “depression”, or were meant to be humorous, using memes or jokes about trauma.

One of the most concerning things we found in our study was that only 3.7% of videos had some form of trigger warning. A trigger warning, often a verbal statement by the creator, text within the video or a caption, is meant to alert the audience that potentially distressing content is discussed in the video.

A young man sitting in a park using a laptop.
Most videos we looked at didn’t come with trigger warnings. Ketut Subiyanto/Pexels

One of the limitations of our study was that we didn’t look at users’ experiences of viewing these videos. We also didn’t explore discourse on the app, such as comments and video replies.

We can’t say for sure what it’s like for people, especially young people or people with lived experience of trauma, to watch and interact with these videos. Exploring this should be a focus for future research.

Trigger warnings are important

None of this is to say that sharing stories, even traumatic ones, should never happen. In fact, we know support from others is essential for healing from trauma. This can be facilitated, among other avenues, through sharing stories on social media.

But to make this safer for everyone, TikTok should encourage trigger warnings, and creators should use them on videos where trauma is shared. This can give users the option to “opt out” and scroll on if they think they might not have the capacity to listen at that time.

For people consuming videos on TikTok and other platforms, it’s important to be wary of misinformation and think critically about the information they see, seeking further advice from other sources.

If you feel distressed by content you see on social media, seek support from a health-care professional.

If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14.The Conversation

Alix Woolard, Senior Research Fellow, The Kids Research Institute Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

As Coles slashes its product range, will well-known brands disappear from supermarket shelves?

Hitra/Shutterstock
Flavio MacauEdith Cowan University

Coles is reducing its product range by at least 10%, a move that has sparked public backlash and renewed discussions about the role of supermarkets in the cost-of-living crisis.

In cutting the range of items on offer Coles is moving closer to Aldi and Costco’s strategy to grow exclusive brands and limit product range.

The goal is to boost profitability by reducing costs, increasing sales, and increasing control over the supply chain.

Coles is unlikely to cut traditional brands, especially those from companies with significant market power like Coca-Cola or Nestle. In a battle between giants, the status quo is likely to prevail.

Smaller suppliers are likely to bear the load as they struggle to renew contracts and face increased competition from home brands.

To fully understand the reasons behind this move and its impact on the cost of living, insights from psychology, finance, and supply chain management come in handy.

Why cut back on brands?

The Coles move is all about profitability.

Over the past decade, competition in the Australian supermarket sector has intensified. Coles’ market share declined from 31% to 25% between 2013 and 2023, while Woolworths’ share fell from 41% to 37%.

This shift reflects the rise of Aldi, which now holds approximately 10% of the market, and its strong position in the home brand space.

Signage for Aldi supermarket
Aldi’s smaller range helps to keep costs down. Audreycmk/Shutterstock

To boost profitability with a smaller customer base, Coles needs to find ways to enhance its earnings. This can be achieved by raising prices, cutting costs, or increasing the market share of its home brands.

Raising prices vs cutting costs

Raising prices is not a viable option, as consumers are already struggling with high food prices inflation and the rising cost-of-living. However, there is room to cut costs.

One approach is to squeeze suppliers, but again this is unlikely to be effective. The consumer watchdog, the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission (ACCC), is holding an inquiry into concerns that the supermarkets are using their market power to the disadvantage of their suppliers and consumers.

Additionally, as producers exit unprofitable businesses, supermarkets risk supply chain disruptions due to increased market concentration among surviving suppliers.

Another strategy is to reduce complexity. The more product variety there is, the more complicated and expensive it becomes to manage. Tasks such as stocking shelves, adjusting prices, maintaining inventory, managing delivery schedules, and disposing of expired products all contribute to higher costs.

Anna Croft, Coles’ operations and sustainability officer, explained the strategy when telling investors in November that 13 basic table salts could be cut to five.

Simplifying the product range can also boost sales. When faced with too many options, consumers can experience “choice overload”. A widely recognised study in psychology found that people are more likely to make a purchase when presented with a limited selection rather than an extensive array of choices.

A man in a store chooses a shower gel, carefully reads the bottle
Coles has pointed to shampoo and salt as two potential product ranges that can be simplified. I.K.Media/Shutterstock

Shifting to home brands

Simplifying the range will likely focus on items where Coles has a home brand. Home brands now account for 33.5% of Coles’ sales, with 6,000 products. About 1,100 were added over the past year.

This move is a response to competitors like Aldi and Costco. While Coles and Woolworths manage over 25,000 items in their stores, Aldi limits its offering to about 1,800 products.

Coles is focusing on its home brands to better compete with non-branded offerings from Aldi. In its report to the ACCC, the supermarket highlights its investment in expanding its own-brand range to provide more affordable prices, up to 40% cheaper than similar proprietary brands.

While consumers may have fewer choices, it is expected that they will benefit from better prices.

This shift towards home brands is not exclusive to Australia. In the United States, private label sales hit a record in 2023 across a range of items from beauty products to general merchandise. In the United Kingdom, home brand products now account for over half of supermarket sales.

Have we been here before?

Almost 10 years ago, Woolworths and Coles started a significant move to adjust their price positioning in response to the competition. Along with Metcash (IGA), they reduced product ranges in 2015–16 by 10% to 15% to simplify the weekly grocery shop for consumers.

At that time, the culling of products put suppliers under pressure (as now) while consumers were ambivalent: some wanted more brand variety and others preferred less.

As history repeats itself, it will be interesting to see if Woolworths and Metcash will follow the latest move from Coles and how customers, suppliers, and the ACCC will react this time.The Conversation

Flavio Macau, Associate Dean - School of Business and Law, Edith Cowan University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The Nullarbor is riddled with wombat and rabbit warrens. Scientists are watching them from space

Rob D / Shutterstock
Natarsha McPhersonUniversity of Adelaide

On the vast expanse of the Nullarbor Plain in South Australia, two very different creatures live side by side – but not always peacefully.

One is the southern hairy-nosed wombat, a slow-moving nocturnal digger that loves its underground burrows. The other is the European rabbit: a small and speedy invader that has spread across the continent, often wreaking environmental havoc and creating its own networks of tunnels.

How do we know where these semi-subterranean creatures live, and how many there are? The answer is from the sky.

In new research published in Australian Mammalogy, we show a way to detect wombats and rabbits using satellites that take pictures of our planet from space. By studying high-resolution images from the likes of Google Earth and Bing Maps, we can spot the telltale signs of the burrows and warrens these creatures dig into the ground.

Why is it any of our business where wombats and rabbits live?

Knowing where wombats and rabbits live is important for conservation.

Wombats are unique Australian marsupials that need protection. Rabbits are an invasive species that often damage the land, eating too much vegetation and eroding soil.

Finding their warrens can help scientists and wildlife managers to understand where they live. This in turn helps to make better decisions about protecting native species and controlling pests.

How do you spot a warren?

Imagine looking down at the world from the window of an aeroplane. You might easily see rivers and roads, and even buildings.

But would you spot a hole in the ground? That’s the challenge we faced in our study of satellite images.

Three aerial photos showing disturbed earth amid vegetation.
A wombat warren from above, as seen in images from (a) a Bing maps satellite image, and (b) and (c) higher resolution drone images showing individual burrows and vegetation. Bing Maps / McPherson & Ostendorf / Australian MammalogyCC BY-NC

As it turns out, wombat warrens are relatively easy to spot. They are quite large and have clear trails leading in and out. The digging leaves mounds of lighter-coloured soil.

Rabbit warrens are trickier to find. They are smaller, lack trails, and can blend in with bare patches of dirt.

How well did we do?

By comparing satellite images with surveys conducted on the ground, we figured out we could accurately detect about 82% of wombat warrens from the photos. We weren’t quite as good at rabbit warrens: we could only spot 49%. Small rabbit warrens were particularly easy to miss.

Three aerial photos showing disturbed earth amid vegetation.
A rabbit warren from above, as seen in images from (a) a Bing maps satellite image, and (b) and (c) higher resolution drone images showing individual burrows and vegetation. Bing Maps / McPherson & Ostendorf / Australian MammalogyCC BY-NC

One complicating issue was the fact that wombats and rabbits sometimes share the same burrow. Usually it’s the smaller, sneakier rabbits taking advantage of the large and sturdy tunnels dug by wombats.

This makes it even harder to figure out exactly who is living where. We could recognise shared warrens when we inspected them on the ground, but so far we can’t distinguish them from satellite photos.

What’s next?

Our research shows we can use satellites to map burrowing animal populations without ever setting foot in the outback. This saves time and money, and also reduces the the risk of disturbing wildlife while conducting research.

In the future, with higher-resolution satellite images and better software – using tools like machine learning – we may be able to detect and count burrows and warrens automatically. This could be a big change for wildlife conservation and pest control.

So next time you look up at the sky, remember that somewhere out there a satellite might be taking a picture of a sleepy wombat’s home – or a rabbit plotting its next move.The Conversation

Natarsha McPherson, PhD Candidate in Spatial Ecology, University of Adelaide

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Taking the ‘forever’ out of ‘forever chemicals’: we worked out how to destroy the PFAS in batteries

Mino Surkala, Shutterstock
Jens BlotevogelCSIRO and Naomi BoxallCSIRO

Lithium-ion batteries are part of everyday life. They power small rechargeable devices such as mobile phones and laptops. They enable electric vehicles. And larger versions store excess renewable energy for later use, supporting the clean energy transition.

Australia produces more than 3,000 tonnes of lithium-ion battery waste a year. Managing this waste is a technical, economic and social challenge. Opportunities exist for recycling and creating a circular economy for batteries. But they come with risk.

That’s because lithium-ion batteries contain manufactured chemicals such as PFAS, or per- and polyfluoroalkyl substances. The chemicals carry the lithium – along with electricity – through the battery. If released into the environment, they can linger for decades and likely longer. This is why they’ve been dubbed “forever chemicals”.

Recently, scientists identified a new type of PFAS known as bis-FASIs (short for bis-perfluoroalkyl sulfonimides) in lithium-ion batteries and in the environment. Bis-FASIs have since been detected in soils and waters worldwide. They are toxic – just one drop in an Olympic-size swimming pool can harm the nervous system of animals. Scientists don’t know much about possible effects on humans yet.

Bis-FASIs in lithium-ion batteries present a major obstacle to recycling or disposing of batteries safely. Fortunately, we may have come up with a way to fix this.

There’s value in our battery wastes

Currently, Australia only recycles about 10% of its battery waste. The rest is sent to landfill.

But landfill sites could leak eventually. That means disposal of battery waste in landfill may lead to soil and groundwater contamination.

We can’t throw away lithium-ion batteries in household rubbish because they can catch fire.

So once batteries reach the end of useful life, we must handle them in a way that protects the environment and human health.

What’s more, there’s real value in battery waste. Lithium-ion batteries contain lots of valuable metals that are worth recycling. Lithium, cobalt, copper and nickel are critical and finite metal resources that are in high demand. The recoverable metal value from one tonne of lithium-ion battery waste is between A$3,000 and $14,000.

As more lithium-ion batteries explode in flames, waste chiefs say change is necessary (7.30)

What does this mean for recycling of batteries?

Battery recycling in Australia begins with collection, sorting, discharging and dismantling, before the metal is recovered.

Metal recovery can be done via mechanicalhigh-temperature, chemical or biological methods. But this may inadvertently release bis-FASI, threatening recycling workers and the environment.

Pyrometallurgy is the most common technique for recycling lithium-ion batteries. This involves incinerating the batteries to recover the metals. Bis-FASIs are incinerated at the same time.

Yet PFAS chemicals are stable and can withstand high temperatures. The exact temperature needed to destroy PFAS is the biggest unknown in lithium-ion battery recycling.

Determining this temperature was the focus of our research.

The solution is hot – very hot!

We teamed up with chemistry professor Anthony Rappé at Colorado State University in the United States. We wanted to work out the temperature at which bis-FASIs can be effectively incinerated.

But figuring this out is tricky, not only because of the danger of working with high temperatures.

The inside of incinerators is a hot mess. Molecules get torn apart. Some recombine to form larger molecules, and others interact with ashes produced during the burning process. This could produce toxic new substances, which then exit through a smokestack into the air outside.

Close up of dense white smoke coming out of an industrial factory chimney against a blue sky background.
We don’t want PFAS going out through the smokestack. HJBC, Shutterstock

To make matters worse, it’s not possible to measure all the substances that bis-FASIs break down into, because many of them are unknown.

To help, we applied the science of quantum mechanics and solved the problem on a computer without ever going into the lab. The computer can accurately simulate the behaviour of any molecules, including bis-FASIs.

We found that at 600°C, bis-FASI molecules start to separate into smaller fragments. But these fragments are still PFAS chemicals and could be more harmful than their parent chemicals.

As a consequence, the absence of bis-FASIs in stack exhaust is not enough to deem the process safe. Much higher temperatures of 1,000°C and above are needed to break down bis-FASIs completely into harmless products. This is likely to be much higher than temperatures currently used, although that varies between facilities.

Based on these findings, we built an innovative model that guides recyclers on how to destroy bis-FASIs during metal recovery by using sufficiently high temperatures.

How do we avoid future risks?

We are now collaborating with operators of high-temperature metal recovery and incineration plants to use our model to destroy PFAS in batteries.

Recycling plants will have to use much higher temperatures to avoid problematic fumes and this will require more energy and financial investment.

After our new guidance is implemented, we will test the recovered metals, solid residues, and exhausts to ensure they are free from PFAS.

While we can tackle the PFAS problem now, it remains an expensive undertaking. Metal recovery processes must be upgraded to safely destroy bis-FASIs. Ultimately, consumers are likely to foot the bill.

However, sending lithium-ion battery waste to landfill will damage the environment and be more expensive in the long run. Landfilling of bis-FASI-containing waste should therefore be avoided.

Clearly, the battery recycling rate must improve. This is where everyday people can help. In the future, manufacturers should avoid using forever chemicals in batteries altogether. Development of safer alternatives is a key focus of ongoing research into sustainable battery design.The Conversation

Jens Blotevogel, Principal Research Scientist and Team Leader for Remediation Technologies, CSIRO and Naomi Boxall, Senior Research Scientist in circular economy, CSIRO

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Sharp rise for electricity and gas turnover in December

February 10, 2025
Business turnover for the Electricity, gas, water and waste services industry rose 12.9 per cent in December in seasonally adjusted terms, according to figures released today by the Australian Bureau of Statistics (ABS).

Robert Ewing, ABS head of business statistics, said: “Turnover in the Electricity supply subdivision grew 12.2 per cent as coal power plant outages and high temperatures on the east coast put more pressure on electricity supply.

“The turnover index for this subdivision is now only 3.6 points short of the record high reported in August 2022.

“Other notable industry rises were in Accommodation and food services, which was up 1.9 per cent, and Information media and telecommunications, which rose 1.4 per cent.”

Growth in these industries were partially offset by drops in six of the 13 industries. 

“The largest falls were in Administrative and support services, down 3.0 per cent, and Manufacturing, down 1.9 per cent,” Mr Ewing said.

The 13-industry aggregate showed business turnover rose 0.4 per cent in seasonally adjusted terms and 0.3 per cent in trend terms.
 

Business turnover indicator, change in turnover, seasonally adjusted


Compared to December 2024, turnover was higher for 11 of the 13 industries included in the indicator.

The industries that saw the biggest annual rises were Electricity, gas, water and waste services (+21.6 per cent), Information media and telecommunications (+10.1 per cent), and Transport, postal and warehousing (+7.7 per cent).

The only industry with an annual fall was Mining (-8.5 per cent).

The Monthly Business Turnover Indicator is derived using Australian Taxation Office (ATO) Business Activity Statement (BAS) data from monthly remitters.

Monthly BAS reporting covers businesses with GST annual turnover of $20 million or more and a proportion of smaller businesses that report on a voluntary basis.

The indicator includes 13 industry divisions and 41 industry subdivisions classified according to the Australian and New Zealand Standard Industrial Classification (ANZSIC), 2006, and provides timely and frequent insights into economic activity, which complement the longstanding quarterly measures.

ACCC denies authorisation for industry code on marketing of infant formula

The ACCC has denied authorisation sought by the Infant Nutrition Council for an industry code which seeks to restrict the advertising and promotion of infant formula.

The Infant Nutrition Council sought authorisation to continue to implement the Marketing in Australia of Infant Formula: Manufacturers and Importers Agreement (MAIF Agreement) and its associated guidelines for a further five years.

The ACCC considers that the effectiveness of the MAIF Agreement is being undermined by several factors including its voluntary nature, its limited scope, and restrictions on its ability to capture the breadth of modern digital marketing methods.

As such, the ACCC considers that the claimed public benefits are unlikely to arise, or are likely to occur with or without the MAIF Agreement. Further, the ACCC considers the conduct is likely to result in some competitive detriment.

“We are not satisfied in all the circumstances that the MAIF Agreement is likely to result in public benefits that would outweigh the public detriments likely to result from it,” ACCC Acting Chair Mick Keogh said.

MAIF Agreement
The MAIF Agreement, initially established in 1992, has formed part of Australia’s response to its obligations as a signatory to the World Health Organisation’s International Code of Marketing Breast Milk Substitutes.

The MAIF Agreement is a voluntary, self-regulatory code of conduct which aims to restrict those manufacturers and importers of infant formula who opt in to the agreement from advertising and promoting formula for infants up to 12 months of age. Its implementation requires ACCC authorisation as it forms an agreement between competitors not to market their infant formula products.

“While the link between breastfeeding and improved health outcomes for mothers and children is undisputed, we are concerned there are several factors that undermine the effectiveness of the MAIF Agreement in protecting breastfeeding rates,” Mr Keogh said.

“We are not satisfied that the MAIF Agreement and associated guidelines are likely to result in a net public benefit to justify authorisation and consider that they are likely to result in some public detriment through reduced competition between infant formula manufacturers and importers, compared to the future without the conduct.”

Further information on the final determination is available on the ACCC’s public register at Infant Nutrition Council.

Background
The Infant Nutrition Council represents the majority of manufacturers and importers of infant formula in Australia.

The Council applied for revocation of the existing authorisation and the substitution of a new one to continue to make and give effect to the MAIF Agreement and its associated guidelines for a further five years to ensure a framework remains in place while the Government prepares and implements its response to the independent review of the MAIF Agreement.

In September 2024, the ACCC announced it was proposing to deny this authorisation and sought feedback from interested parties which raised broader health policy issues including whether restrictions on marketing of infant formula should extend to breastmilk substitutes for children over 12 months of age and to retailers.

These issues go beyond the scope of the ACCC’s assessment of this application under competition law and are a matter for the Australian Government.

The Department of Health and Aged Care commissioned an independent review of the MAIF Agreement which found that it is no longer fit for purpose and recommended that it be replaced with a stronger regulatory framework in the form of a legislated, prescribed, mandatory code.

In a submission to the ACCC, the Department stated that the Government accepted this recommendation and intends to introduce a mandatory regime to restrict marketing of infant formula, which it expects would take two years to implement.

NSW Women of the Year 2025 finalists announced

February 10, 2025
Thirty of the most inspirational women and girls across NSW were today announced as finalists for Women of the Year Awards 2025.

The awards program, now in its 13th year, aims to recognise and celebrate revolutionary thinkers, everyday heroes, social advocates and innovative role models.

Award categories include:
  • NSW Premier’s Woman of Excellence
  • NSW Aboriginal Woman of the Year
  • NSW Regional Woman of the Year
  • NSW Community Hero
  • NSW Young Woman of the Year (ages 16-30 years)
  • Ones to Watch (ages 7-15 years)
The Women of the Year Awards ceremony is the centrepiece event of NSW Women’s Week 2025, a week-long celebration from Sunday 2 March until Saturday 8 March. The Awards are the NSW Government’s way of shining the light on the incredible talent and extraordinary women and girls from across our state.

Women of the Year award recipients will be revealed at the Women of the Year Awards 2025 ceremony on Thursday, 6 March at the International Convention Centre, Sydney. The Award ceremony will be livestreamed for everyone to celebrate these inspirational women and girls.

For more information about the NSW Women of the Year Awards 2025, go to www.nsw.gov.au/nsw-women-of-year-awards.

Premier Chris Minns said:
“The incredible group of 2025 finalists reflect how exceptional the women of New South Wales truly are.

“From doctors, academics and scientists to community leaders and advocates – each and every one of our finalists have gone above and beyond in their respective fields.

“On behalf of the NSW Government and our community, I congratulate each of the finalists, for you are all deserving of this recognition.”

Minister for Women, Jodie Harrison said:

“We’ve had a phenomenal response to the NSW Women of the Year Awards 2025 program, with over 500 nominations across NSW. This is a record high, and we can absolutely confirm our 2025 finalists are some of the State’s most impressive women and girls.

“This year’s group come from all walks of life, from scientists and researchers to entrepreneurs and strong advocates to stop domestic and family violence. They come from all across New South Wales – from Sydney to Walgett.

“The NSW Women of the Year Awards is truly a leading recognition program, inspiring everyday women to reach their highest potential.”

The Women of the Year 2025 finalists are (by Local Government Area):

NSW Premier’s Woman of Excellence
  • Professor Annette Cowie (Armidale)
  • Mariam Mohammed (Newcastle)
  • Dr Vanessa Pirotta (Canada Bay)
  • Karen Iles (Sydney)
NSW Aboriginal Woman of the Year
  • Marjorie Anderson (George’s River)
  • Aunty Fay Green (Walgett)
  • Lisa Sarago (Bayside)
  • Robyn Taylor (Penrith)
  • Aunty Rhonda Towney (Parkes)
NSW Regional Woman of the Year
  • Kate Cleary (Hilltops)
  • Kirsty Evans (Orange)
  • Jan Frikken (Eurobodalla)
  • Penny Lamaro (Armidale)
NSW Community Hero
  • Ennia Jones (Newcastle)
  • Kelly Lamb (Port Macquarie-Hastings)
  • Mona Mahamed (Canterbury-Bankstown)
  • Sandy Rogers (Tweed)
NSW Young Woman of the Year (ages 16-30 years)
  • Yeon Jae Kim (Hornsby)
  • Zara Seidler (Woollahra)
  • Jessica Luyue Teoh (Hornsby)
Ones to Watch (ages 7-15 years)
  • Chloe Croker (Goulburn Mulwaree)
  • Jiayi Fang (Ku-ring-gai)
  • Aurora Iler (Campbelltown)
  • Ashleen Khela (The Hills Shire)
  • Aish Khurram (Hornsby)
  • Kat Mulcair (Yass Valley)
  • Hayley Paterson (The Hills Shire)
  • Waniya Syed (Camden)
  • Lydia Tofaeono (Strathfield)
  • Emilia Trustum (Richmond Valley)

DNA barcodes and citizen science images map spread of biocontrol agent for control of major invasive shrub Lantana

February 2025
New CABI-led research using publicly-shared DNA barcodes and citizen science images have provided new evidence on the establishment and spread of a biological control agent used for the control of the major invasive shrub Lantana camara.


Lantana, (Lantana camara) - invasive weed in Warriewood Wetlands- October 2024. Photo: Joe Mills

Lantana camara was introduced as a garden and ornamental plant throughout the tropics and subtropics but is now pervasive throughout the Old World, invading woodlands, forestry, orchards, grasslands, and disturbed areas, where is displaces useful and indigenous plants.

Dr Matthew Cock, CABI Emeritus Fellow, and colleagues took DNA barcodes from the Barcode of Life Data System (BOLD) and citizen science images from the iNaturalist and Afromoths websites to detect the establishment of the biological control agent Orphanostigma haemorrhoidalis (Guenée) (Lepidoptera, Crambidae) -- which is used to tackle L. camara -- in countries where it has not previously been reported.

In this research, the scientists used for the first time a combination of publicly shared DNA barcodes and citizen science images to assess the establishment and spread of an introduced weed biological control agent, O. haemorrhoidalis, as well as confirm historical distribution and establishment records reported in the literature.

Two genetically distinguishable populations of O. haemorrhoidalis
Dr Cock, and colleagues from Australia's Department of Agriculture, Fisheries and Forestry, the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) and MIA Consulting, found that there are two genetically distinguishable indigenous populations of O. haemorrhoidalis in the Americas, one in south-eastern USA and the other widespread in the rest of the Neotropics.

These two populations were introduced into different parts of the World and subsequently spread.

The scientists, whose research was published in the journal CABI Agriculture and Bioscience, used DNA barcodes from BOLD to clarify that a population from Florida is established in Hawai'i, Australia and Fiji, while a population from Trinidad is established in parts of mainland Africa (including new records for Cameroon, Nigeria and Ghana), Madagascar, Mauritius and La Réunion.

New country records for O. haemorrhoidalis were established from iNaturalist images from Eswatini, Kenya, and Mozambique, and from Afromoths for Tanzania.

Presence of O. haemorrhoidalis in its introduced range and beyond
Dr Cock said, "The DNA barcodes publicly shared by scientists on BOLD, and images shared by citizen scientists on iNaturalist, confirm the presence of O. haemorrhoidalis in much of its introduced range as well as several countries where it had not been previously reported."
He said the use of unique Barcode Index Numbers (BINs) which are assigned to clusters of similar DNA barcodes, has enabled the introductions of O. haemorrhoidalis from Florida and Trinidad to be tracked separately.

Dr Cock added, "Based on our findings, we conclude as follows. Orphanostigma haemorrhoidalis derived from Trinidad is now widespread in Africa and the Mascarenes and can be expected to continue to spread throughout sub-Saharan Africa where lantana occurs.

"Orphanostigma haemorrhoidalis derived from Florida is established in Hawai'i, Australia and Fiji and we assume is the BIN present on Norfolk Island and in the other Pacific countries where it is known to occur (Federated States of Micronesia, Niue, Tonga, and Vanuatu). Based on the evidence available it appears that this is the only BIN established from the introductions into Hawai'i, and onward from there."

In 2022, CABI scientists contributed to research, published in the journal Plant-Environment Interactions which showed how L. camara reduced the growth of maize in East Usambara, Tanzania, by 29%.

They sought to gain a better understanding of immediate as well as legacy effects and of direct and indirect impacts of L. camara for improved management of invaded cropland.

Online social network of people sharing biodiversity information
iNaturalist is an online social network of people sharing biodiversity information to help each other learn about nature. It is also a crowdsourced species identification system and an organism occurrence recording tool.

It can be used to record users' own observations, get help with identifications, collaborate with others to collect this kind of information for a common purpose, or access the observational data collected by iNaturalist users.

Afromoths, meanwhile, provides an online database of the Afrotropical moth species (Lepidoptera), updated with the latest information obtained from 10,000+ published sources and studies.

The main objective of this searchable website is to make all relevant information on every Afrotropical moth species hitherto known, accessible to any user worldwide.

Matthew J.W. Cock, Michael D. Day, M. Alma Solis, Rachel L. Winston. Publicly-shared DNA barcodes and citizen science images provide new evidence on the establishment and spread of a lantana biological control agent, Orphanostigma haemorrhoidalis (Lepidoptera, Crambidae). CABI Agriculture and Bioscience, 2025; DOI: 10.1079/ab.2025.0010

Cretaceous fossil from Antarctica reveals earliest modern bird

February 2025
Sixty-six million years ago, at the end of the Cretaceous Period, an asteroid impact near the Yucatán Peninsula of Mexico triggered the extinction of all known non-bird dinosaurs. But for the early ancestors of today's waterfowl, surviving that mass extinction event was like…water off a duck's back. Location matters, as Antarctica may have served as a refuge, protected by its distance from the turmoil taking place elsewhere on the planet. Fossil evidence suggests a temperate climate with lush vegetation, possibly serving as an incubator for the earliest members of the group that now includes ducks and geese.

A paper published today in the journal Nature describes an important new fossil of the oldest known modern bird, an early relative of ducks and geese that lived in Antarctica at around the same time Tyrannosaurus rex dominated North America.The study was led by Dr. Christopher Torres, a National Science Foundation (NSF) Postdoctoral Fellow at Ohio University's Heritage College of Osteopathic Medicine.
The fossil, a nearly complete, 69-million-year-old skull, belongs to an extinct bird named Vegavis iaai, and was collected during a 2011 expedition by the Antarctic Peninsula Paleontology Project. The new skull exhibits a long, pointed beak and a brain shape unique among all known birds previously discovered from the Mesozoic Era, when non-avian dinosaurs and a bizarre collection of early birds ruled the globe. Instead, these features place Vegavis in the group that includes all modern birds, representing the earliest evidence of a now widespread and successful evolutionary radiation across the planet.

"Few birds are as likely to start as many arguments among paleontologists as Vegavis," says lead author Dr. Torres, now a professor at University of the Pacific. "This new fossil is going to help resolve a lot of those arguments. Chief among them: where is Vegavis perched in the bird tree of life?"

Vegavis was first reported 20 years ago by study co-author Dr. Julia Clarke of The University of Texas at Austin and several colleagues. At that time, it was proposed as an early member of modern (also known as crown) birds that was evolutionarily nested within waterfowl. But modern birds are exceptionally rare before the end-Cretaceous extinction, and more recent studies have cast doubt on the evolutionary position of Vegavis. The new specimen described in this study has something that all previous fossils of this bird have lacked: a nearly complete skull.

This new skull helps lay that skepticism to rest, preserving several traits like the shape of the brain and beak bones that are consistent with modern birds, specifically waterfowl. Unlike most waterfowl today, the skull preserves traces of powerful jaw muscles useful for overcoming water resistance while diving to snap up fish.

These skull features are consistent with clues from elsewhere in the skeleton, suggesting that Vegavis used its feet for underwater propulsion during pursuit of fish and other prey -- a feeding strategy unlike that of modern waterfowl and more like that of some other birds such as grebes and loons.
"This fossil underscores that Antarctica has much to tell us about the earliest stages of modern bird evolution," says Dr. Patrick O'Connor, co-author on the study, professor at Ohio University, and director of Earth and Space Sciences at Denver Museum of Nature & Science.

Birds known from elsewhere on the planet at around the same time are barely recognizable by modern bird standards. Moreover, most of the handful of sites that even preserve delicate bird fossils yield specimens that are so incomplete as to only give hints to their identity, as was the situation with Vegavis until now.

"And those few places with any substantial fossil record of Late Cretaceous birds, like Madagascar and Argentina, reveal an aviary of bizarre, now-extinct species with teeth and long bony tails, only distantly related to modern birds. Something very different seems to have been happening in the far reaches of the Southern Hemisphere, specifically in Antarctica," noted Dr. O'Connor.

How the Antarctic landmass helped shape modern ecosystems in deep time is a topic of active research by scientists from around the world. Indeed, according to study co-author Dr. Matthew Lamanna of Carnegie Museum of Natural History, "Antarctica is in many ways the final frontier for humanity's understanding of life during the Age of Dinosaurs."

Dr. Torres was supported at Ohio University for three years by the NSF Postdoctoral Fellowship Program, working on a project examining the relationship between bird diversification and resilience to extinction through the combined lenses of ecology, brain anatomy, and other life history traits. He is now in his first year as an Assistant Professor in the Department of Biological Sciences at University of the Pacific in Stockton, California.

"This discovery exemplifies the power of scientific research and the crucial role our institution plays in advancing knowledge about Earth's deep history," Ohio University President Lori Stewart Gonzalez said. "This research not only enhances our understanding of early bird evolution but also highlights the invaluable contributions of OHIO graduate students and postdoctoral researchers who are at the forefront of these expeditions. It is through these global, expeditionary efforts -- whether in the field or in the lab -- that we can truly grasp the dynamic changes our planet has undergone over millions of years. This study is a prime example of real-world experiential learning that connects STEM education with hands-on, transformative research, preparing the next generation of scientists to tackle the challenges of the future."
"Large-scale projects like this one, involving students and postdoctoral researchers, prepare the scientists of tomorrow to collaborate, advance science, and tackle the biggest questions facing our planet," added Dr. O'Connor.

Other co-authors of the study include Joseph Groenke (Ohio University), Ross MacPhee (American Museum of Natural History), Grace Musser (The University of Texas at Austin and Smithsonian National Museum of Natural History), and Eric Roberts (Colorado School of Mines). This work was funded by the NSF grants DBI-2010996 to Torres, NSF ANT-1142104 to O'Connor, NSF ANT-1141820 to Clarke, NSF ANT-1142129 to Lamanna, and NSF ANT-0636639 and NSF ANT-1142052 to MacPhee.

Artistic renderings of Vegavis iaai. 


Skeletal reconstruction of the Late Cretaceous (~69 million years old) crown bird Vegavis iaai. Preserved bones of the skull and skeleton depicted in white. Credit: Christopher Torres (University of the Pacific), 2025.

Christopher R. Torres, Julia A. Clarke, Joseph R. Groenke, Matthew C. Lamanna, Ross D. E. MacPhee, Grace M. Musser, Eric M. Roberts, Patrick M. O’Connor. Cretaceous Antarctic bird skull elucidates early avian ecological diversity. Nature, 2025; 638 (8049): 146 DOI: 10.1038/s41586-024-08390-0

Schools need parent permission to put students’ photos on social media. 3 questions to ask before you say yes

Karley BeckmanUniversity of Wollongong and Tiffani AppsUniversity of Wollongong

If you are a parent of a school student, you may have received a form seeking permission to use your child’s image on school social media accounts.

It’s very common for schools to share photos of smiling students on platforms such as Facebook and Instagram. This may be to celebrate the start of term, student achievements, or performances and events at the school.

Schools need permission from parents to publish or disclose students’ personal information, including photos and videos, on any online platform.

But research suggests families can lack support and information to provide fully informed consent.

Why do schools post photos online?

Our recent study showed one of main reasons schools post on social media is they believe it is what parents want. This is part of marketing their school as a positive place to learn.

But some parents take a more cautious approach to social media and don’t necessarily want photos of their children made public online.

There is significant community concern about children’s online privacy and their digital footprint or the information trail about them.

Last month, the Australian Federal Police warned parents about sharing images of their children online, especially back-to-school photos. It recommended parents blur or obscure the logo of the child’s school. Police also noted how background features can identify a school or child’s location.

The AFP has seen non-explicit pictures of children and young people become the target of highly sexualised and inappropriate comments or role play.

The risks also go beyond other people identifying your child online. Photos of children shared online can be used to train AI models or create deepfakes that are increasingly being used in cases of cyber bullying and cyber abuse.

A row of students singing together, holding sheets of paper.
School social media accounts are a way of marketing to families and the community. SpeedKingz/Shutterstock

What are the rules in Australia?

The Australian Privacy Act and related Australian Privacy Principles, say consent to share personal information should be current, clearly explained and specific.

This is why schools need to ask parents at the start of each year, but how they do this will depend on the state education department or individual school.

Here are three questions to consider before you sign.

1. What is the school asking you for?

While approaches vary, it is common for schools to ask for several types of permission in one bundle.

For example, they may ask if they can use photos and videos of your child in the school newsletter, school website, annual report, online learning platforms, traditional news media as well as social media.

So the locations where your child’s information and photo may be shared are quite different in terms of privacy and your child’s digital footprint.

For example, this could involve a photo of your child doing a class activity shared on a secure education app, or a video of your child on a public Facebook page.

Parents have the right to consent and/or decline the use of their children’s information for specific purposes. If you can’t do this on the form, you can contact the school.

2. What does the school post?

Before providing or declining consent, you may want to take a closer look at the kinds of posts the school shares. This includes:

  • the quantity of information shared (number of photos or videos shared, and how often)

  • strategies used to protect children’s privacy (no names or locations, or photos in which children are not clearly identifiable or faces are obscured)

  • the purpose of the posts (can you see the value and benefit of sharing information?).

Think about whether the school’s approach fits with your family’s approach to social media and what you share.

3. How does your child feel?

Research shows children as young as eight are developing an understanding of the risks of sharing personal information online.

Understanding how your child feels about their school’s social media is important in making an informed decision about consent. It also helps teach them about making decisions about their digital footprint.

You could ask your child:

  • are they aware of the school social media sites?

  • how does having their photo taken, or not, at school make them feel?

  • are they asked when their photo is taken, and are they told where it will be used or shared?

These forms can seem routine or presented as if it’s not a big deal. But if you have any questions or concerns you should talk to your school. Schools can help you with more information and can also forward feedback to education departments. This is particularly important as we navigate the changing nature of social media and the potential impacts on children.The Conversation

Karley Beckman, Senior Lecturer in Digital Technologies for Learning, University of Wollongong and Tiffani Apps, Senior Lecturer in Digital Technologies for Learning, University of Wollongong

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AI is being used in social services – but we must make sure it doesn’t traumatise clients

Tero Vesalainen/Shutterstock
Suvradip MaitraAustralian National UniversityLyndal SleepCQUniversity AustraliaPaul HenmanThe University of Queensland, and Suzanna FayThe University of Queensland

Late last year, ChatGPT was used by a Victorian child protection worker to draft documents. In a glaring error, ChatGPT referred to a “doll” used for sexual purposes as an “age-appropriate toy”. Following this, the Victorian information commissioner banned the use of generative artificial intelligence (AI) in child protection.

Unfortunately, many harmful AI systems will not garner such public visibility. It’s crucial that people who use social services – such as employment, homelessness or domestic violence services – are aware they may be subject to AI. Additionally, service providers should be well informed about how to use AI safely.

Fortunately, emerging regulations and tools, such as our trauma-informed AI toolkit, can help to reduce AI harm.

How do social services use AI?

AI has captured global attention with promises of better service delivery. In a strained social services sector, AI promises to reduce backlogs, lower administrative burdens and allocate resources more effectively while enhancing services. It’s no surprise a range of social service providers are using AI in various ways.

Chatbots simulate human conversation with the use of voice, text or images. These programs are increasingly used for a range of tasks. For instance, they can provide mental health support or offer employment advice. They can also speed up data processing or help quickly create reports.

However, chatbots can easily produce harmful or inaccurate responses. For instance, the United States National Eating Disorders Association deployed the chatbot Tessa to support clients experiencing eating disorders. But it was quickly pulled offline when advocates flagged Tessa was providing harmful weight loss advice.

Recommender systems use AI to make personalised suggestions or options. These could include targeting job or rental ads, or educational material based on data available to service providers.

But recommender systems can be discriminatory, such as when LinkedIn showed more job ads to men than women. They can also reinforce existing anxieties. For instance, pregnant women have been recommended alarming pregnancy videos on social media.

Recognition systems classify data such as images or text to compare one dataset to another. These systems can complete many tasks, such as face matching to verify identity or transcribing voice to text.

Such systems can raise surveillanceprivacy, inaccuracy and discrimination concerns. A homeless shelter in Canada stopped using facial recognition cameras because they risked privacy breaches – it’s difficult to obtain informed consent from mentally unwell or intoxicated people using the shelter.

Risk-assessment systems use AI to predict the likelihood of a specific outcome occurring. Many systems have been used to calculate the risk of child abuse, long-term unemployment, or tax and welfare fraud.

Often data used in these systems can recreate societal inequalities, causing harm to already-marginalised peoples. In one such case, a tool in the US used for identifying risk of child mistreatment unfairly targeted poorblack and biracial families and families with disabilities.

A Dutch risk assessment tool seeking to identify childcare benefits fraud was shut down for being racist, while an AI system in France faces similar accusations.

The need for a trauma-informed approach

Concerningly, our research shows using AI in social services can cause or perpetuate trauma for the people who use the services.

The American Psychological Association defines trauma as an emotional response to a range of events, such as accidents, abuse or the death of a loved one. Broadly understood, trauma can be experienced at an individual or group level and be passed down through generations. Trauma experienced by First Nations people in Australia as a result of colonisation is an example of group trauma.

Between 57% and 75% of Australians experience at least one traumatic event in their lifetime.

Many social service providers have long adopted a trauma-informed approach. It prioritises trust, safety, choice, empowerment, transparency, and cultural, historical and gender-based considerations. A trauma-informed service provider understands the impact of trauma and recognises signs of trauma in users.

Service providers should be wary of abandoning these core principles despite the allure of the often hyped capabilities of AI.

Can social services use AI responsibly?

To reduce the risk of causing or perpetuating trauma, social service providers should carefully evaluate any AI system before using it.

For AI systems already in place, evaluation can help monitor their impact and ensure they are operating safely.

We have developed a trauma-informed AI assessment toolkit that helps service providers to assess the safety of their planned or current use of AI. The toolkit is based on the principles of trauma-informed care, case studies of AI harms, and design workshops with service providers. An online version of the toolkit is about to be piloted within organisations.

By posing a series of questions, the toolkit enables service providers to consider whether risks outweigh the benefits. For instance, is the AI system co-designed with users? Can users opt out of being subject to the AI system?

It guides service providers through a series of practical considerations to enhance the safe use of AI.

Social services do not have to avoid AI altogether. But social service providers and users should be aware of the risks of harm from AI – so they can intentionally shape AI for good.The Conversation

Suvradip Maitra, PhD Student, Australian National UniversityLyndal Sleep, Senior lecturer, Queensland Centre for Domestic and Family Violence Research, CQUniversity AustraliaPaul Henman, Professor, Digital Sociology and Social Policy, The University of Queensland, and Suzanna Fay, Associate Professor in Criminology, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Google has dropped its promise not to use AI for weapons. It’s part of a troubling trend

Ziv Lavi/Shutterstock
Zena AssaadAustralian National University

Last week, Google quietly abandoned a long-standing commitment to not use artificial intelligence (AI) technology in weapons or surveillance. In an update to its AI principles, which were first published in 2018, the tech giant removed statements promising not to pursue:

  • technologies that cause or are likely to cause overall harm
  • weapons or other technologies whose principal purpose or implementation is to cause or directly facilitate injury to people
  • technologies that gather or use information for surveillance violating internationally accepted norms
  • technologies whose purpose contravenes widely accepted principles of international law and human rights.

The update came after United States President Donald Trump revoked former President Joe Biden’s executive order aimed at promoting safe, secure and trustworthy development and use of AI.

The Google decision follows a recent trend of big tech entering the national security arena and accommodating more military applications of AI. So why is this happening now? And what will be the impact of more military use of AI?

The growing trend of militarised AI

In September, senior officials from the Biden government met with bosses of leading AI companies, such as OpenAI, to discuss AI development. The government then announced a taskforce to coordinate the development of data centres, while weighing economic, national security and environmental goals.

The following month, the Biden government published a memo that in part dealt with “harnessing AI to fulfil national security objectives”.

Big tech companies quickly heeded the message.

In November 2024, tech giant Meta announced it would make its “Llama” AI models available to government agencies and private companies involved in defence and national security.

This was despite Meta’s own policy which prohibits the use of Llama for “[m]ilitary, warfare, nuclear industries or applications”.

Around the same time, AI company Anthropic also announced it was teaming up with data analytics firm Palantir and Amazon Web Services to provide US intelligence and defence agencies access to its AI models.

The following month, OpenAI announced it had partnered with defence startup Anduril Industries to develop AI for the US Department of Defence.

The companies claim they will combine OpenAI’s GPT-4o and o1 models with Anduril’s systems and software to improve US military’s defences against drone attacks.

Defending national security

The three companies defended the changes to their policies on the basis of US national security interests.

Take Google. In a blog post published earlier this month, the company cited global AI competition, complex geopolitical landscapes and national security interests as reasons for changing its AI principles.

In October 2022, the US issued export controls restricting China’s access to particular kinds of high-end computer chips used for AI research. In response, China issued their own export control measures on high-tech metals, which are crucial for the AI chip industry.

The tensions from this trade war escalated in recent weeks thanks to the release of highly efficient AI models by Chinese tech company DeepSeek. DeepSeek purchased 10,000 Nvidia A100 chips prior to the US export control measures and allegedly used these to develop their AI models.

It has not been made clear how the militarisation of commercial AI would protect US national interests. But there are clear indications tensions with the US’s biggest geopolitical rival, China, are influencing the decisions being made.

A large toll on human life

What is already clear is that the use of AI in military contexts has a demonstrated toll on human life.

For example, in the war in Gaza, the Israeli military has been relying heavily on advanced AI tools. These tools require huge volumes of data and greater computing and storage services, which is being provided by Microsoft and Google. These AI tools are used to identify potential targets but are often inaccurate.

Israeli soldiers have said these inaccuracies have accelerated the death toll in the war, which is now more than 61,000, according to authorities in Gaza.

Google removing the “harm” clause from their AI principles contravenes the international law on human rights. This identifies “security of person” as a key measure.

It is concerning to consider why a commercial tech company would need to remove a clause around harm.

Avoiding the risks of AI-enabled warfare

In its updated principles, Google does say its products will still align with “widely accepted principles of international law and human rights”.

Despite this, Human Rights Watch has criticised the removal of the more explicit statements regarding weapons development in the original principles.

The organisation also points out that Google has not explained exactly how its products will align with human rights.

This is something Joe Biden’s revoked executive order about AI was also concerned with.

Biden’s initiative wasn’t perfect, but it was a step towards establishing guardrails for responsible development and use of AI technologies.

Such guardrails are needed now more than ever as big tech becomes more enmeshed with military organisations – and the risk that come with AI-enabled warfare and the breach of human rights increases.The Conversation

Zena Assaad, Senior Lecturer, School of Engineering, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week Two February 2025 (February  3-9)

Anzac Community Grant Recipients 2024

More than $124,000 in funding has been provided to 99 community groups, schools and ex-service organisations from Wyong to Wagga Wagga, Cootamundra to Coogee, Winston Hills to Wollondilly as part of the Anzac Community Grants Program (ACGP) to commemorate veterans across the state.

Minister for Veterans David Harris announced on Tuesday February 4th that $124,629 will be provided to a wide variety of projects that commemorate and educate NSW communities about the service and sacrifices of current and former servicemen and servicewomen.

The 2024 round of the ACGP received 116 applications, surpassing the number received last year with a record amount of funding requested. Up to $3,000 was provided to help fund each of the 99 projects around the state, with veterans as well as the wider community benefitting from the projects delivered from this round, including 34 schools, 20 RSL sub-Branches and 15 Councils.

Grant recipients include Wyalong Public School in the state’s west with funding to enhance their commemorative garden and Goulburn Mulwaree Council to support the display of the significant CEW Bean Military Collection.

For the full list of 2024 ACGP recipients and more information about the program visit www.veterans.nsw.gov.au/acgp2024

Minister for Veterans David Harris said:
“The NSW Government is dedicated to honouring the service and sacrifice of our veterans and their families.

“The Anzac Community Grants Program allocates funding for outstanding projects and initiatives that not only acknowledge Australia’s military service history but also play a crucial role in educating future generations and enhancing the wellbeing of the veteran community in NSW.

“This round saw applications from 99 suburbs, across 59 Local Government Areas and 57 State electorates. It’s wonderful to see that so many communities throughout NSW are applying for this funding, and many projects will gain from this program.”

Local projects funded include:

Barrenjoey High School; Avalon Beach - Barrenjoey Anzac Tribute
The initiative will see the delivery of a large mural inspired by the Anzac tradition involving students and community. The school will draw on its artist in residence program to engage students in a learning process involving the historical significance of the Anzacs and the enduring need for remembrance. Amount of grant: $1,400.00 

Easylink Community Services Limited; Dee Why - Diggers Shuttle
This proposal seeks funding to establish a regular bus service from Anzac Village in Narrabeen to local shops, aimed at supporting the NSW veteran community. The service will facilitate access to essential services, social activities, and community engagement, thereby enhancing the health and wellbeing of veterans. Amount of grant: $1,500.00 

Terrey Hills Public School; Terrey Hills - Anzac Path
Pathway entrance to our school will be bordered with plant native shrubs. Flagpole will have a plaque made in recognition of all service men and women. At the end of the path we would place an Anzac commemorative banner supported with sandstone blocks. Amount of grant:$1,750.00

BHS at Anzac Day 2024 March at Avalon Beach. Pic; AJG/PON

 

Manly Students Discover Democracy at the Parliament of NSW: Schools Program for 2025

Students from Northern Beaches Secondary College crossed the bridge to experience Australia’s first parliament: The Parliament of NSW.

Legal Studies students from Northern Beaches Secondary College visited NSW Parliament House on Macquarie Street earlier in December 2024.

The students immersed themselves in the real-world applications of their studies from Part 1: The Legal System and Part II: The individual and the law of the Legal Studies Syllabus. They explored the chambers where key debates and decisions occur and learnt about the complexities of lawmaking and the legal system.

The Hon. Greg Piper MP, Speaker of the NSW Legislative Assembly, was thrilled to welcome the students who hail from the Manly Electorate and highlighted the inclusivity of the Parliament’s education programs, offering all students the opportunity to get involved in civics education regardless of their location.

“It was exciting that the students from Northern Beaches Secondary College had the opportunity to visit Parliament and be immersed in the process of democracy. I was delighted to hear they were joined by their local member, Mr James Griffin MP, to chat about local issues and initiatives,” Mr Piper said.

The Hon. Ben Franklin MLC, President of the NSW Legislative Council, expressed his admiration for the active engagement of young people with the workings of Parliament, calling it inspiring to witness the next generation directly participating in the democratic process by viewing question time and experiencing the Chambers. The students are now able to apply their experience at Parliament directly to their legal studies.

“The insightful and probing questions raised by the students served as a powerful reminder of why it is essential to cultivate a deep and lasting understanding of democracy from an early age,” Mr Franklin said.

“These students represent the future leadership of New South Wales, and it is their curiosity, critical thinking and passion that will shape the state’s future.”

Mr James Griffin MP, Member for Manly, expressed his appreciation for the opportunity to host local school students at Parliament.

“It was a wonderful privilege to have some of my local school students visit Parliament,” Mr Griffin said.

“Their presence here is always a good reminder of the importance of the work we do, particularly to ensure we leave a good legacy for younger generations.”

Rebecca Stuart HSIE teacher at Northern Beaches Secondary College echoed the student's excitement and engagement on the day.

“The students are extremely high achieving, and many go into the field of law. It is always a great day and provides them with practical knowledge about court and parliamentary processes,” Ms Stuart said.

Interactive programs and learning resources are available online for students in regional areas across NSW in addition to the many programs and events held at NSW Parliament House in Sydney. In 2025, we're offering travel subsidies to help schools from regional, remote and rural areas.

The unique programs available to schools in 2025 at the Parliament of NSW include:

  • Guided tours
  • Legal studies workshops
  • Interactive online programs
  • A short film competition – Parli – Flicks; and
  • Leadership events including a Secondary Student Leadership Program, Young Women’s Seminar and the Constitutional Convention
  • Coming soon – Aboriginal Studies and High School History programs.

Visit the Parliament of NSW Education website to find out more.

 

Out Front 2025 Opens this February at the Manly Art Gallery & Museum 

Audrey Allan, Silent Echoes In Monochrome, Gouache painting, Pittwater High School. Photo: Audrey Allan. 

Council is proud to announce its annual Out Front 2025 exhibition will be held at Manly Art Gallery & Museum (MAG&M) from 21 February 2025.

Now in its 31st year, Out Front features 25 selected artistic works created by Year 12 students across 21 Northern Beaches secondary schools for their HSC submission. It celebrates the creativity, talent and hard work of the region’s emerging young artists.

Northern Beaches Mayor Sue Heins commended the students for their achievements and dedication.

“Each year this exhibition highlights the extraordinary talent and creativity of our local students. It highlights the importance of fostering the arts in our youth and encouraging self-expression.

“It is inspiring to see how art education in our schools encourages students to push boundaries and to think critically about the world around them.

“It is a testament to the commitment of these talented artists, their teachers and their schools.

“We are immensely proud to support this important milestone for our young artists and to provide a platform for their work to shine,” Mayor Heins said.

Tilda Brownlow, Footloose and Fancy Free, painting, Stella Maris College. Photo: Tilda Brownlow.

The curated collection reflects a broad range of themes and techniques, demonstrating the depth and diversity of talent across the Northern Beaches. The exhibition features a variety of works spanning painting, video, sculpture, drawing, photography and ceramics.

Several awards are granted to participants: the Theo Batten Bequest Youth Art Award, valued at $5000, helps support talented young artists pursue art studies at a tertiary level; and the KALOF People’s Choice Award, valued at $500.

MAG&M is also offering a mentorship session to support one young artists’ transition to a professional level.

PROGRAM

Out Front 2025

21 February – 6 April 2025
Manly Art Gallery & Museum
West Esplanade Reserve, Manly
Open Tuesday to Sunday, 10am – 5pm
Free entry

Exhibition opening night
Friday 21 February, 6–8pm
To be opened by UNSW Associate Professor Lizzie Muller
RSVP link 

MAG&M members and volunteers’ preview
Friday 21 February, 10-11am
RSVP link  

Zahara Spring, Effervescent, Interconnection, Instinct-Love, St. Lukes. Photo: Zahara Spring.

No Access: Badger’s graffiti glance wins Wildlife Photographer of the Year People’s Choice Award

February 5 (UK) 6th (AUS), 2025

‘No Access’, British photographer Ian Wood’s perfectly timed capture of an ambling Eurasian badger glancing up at some rather familiar graffiti in St Leonards-on-Sea, England, has won the tenth edition of the Wildlife Photographer of the Year People’s Choice Award 2024.

'No Access' ©Ian Wood, Wildlife Photographer of the Year

The 25 nominated images for this year's Wildlife Photographer of the Year People’s Choice Award received a record number of votes with over 76,000 wildlife photography and nature fans from around the world voting for their favourite image.

Director of the Natural History Museum, Dr Douglas Gurr, says: “Ian’s flawlessly timed image offers a unique glimpse of nature’s interaction with the human world, underscoring the importance of understanding urban wildlife. His exceptional photograph serves as a powerful reminder that local nature and wildlife, often just outside our homes, can inspire and captivate us.”

After residents of St Leonards-on-Sea, England, had been leaving food scraps on the pavement for foxes, Ian noticed that badgers from a nearby sett were also coming to forage. Having seen a badger walking along the pavement by this wall late one night, he decided to photograph it and set up a small hide on the edge of the road to take his picture. Only the light from a lamppost illuminated the creature as it ambled along.

Ian says: “The outpouring of badger love since my photo was nominated for the People’s Choice Award has been beautifully overwhelming. Finding out that it has won is truly humbling. 

However, there is a darker side to this image. I live in rural Dorset where I’m on a re-wilding mission to enhance habitats for a huge array of wildlife. The badger cull – which is still ongoing – has decimated their numbers and I fear that unless the cull is stopped, we’ll only see badgers in urban settings in several parts of England. My hope is for this image to raise awareness of the damaging effect of the badger cull and help push for change.”

European badgers

In the twentieth century, badger populations were severely threatened across Europe. Their woodland habitat was being cleared, primarily for agriculture and forestry, while disease and human persecution were also taking their toll.

Since the 1970s, however, the Eurasian badger has bounced back thanks to legal protections. While it’s not well known how many badgers there are in the whole of Europe, the population of badgers in England and Wales more than doubled to an estimated 500,000 by 2014.

Badgers are the UK’s largest living predator, and as a result play an important role in controlling populations of their prey. They’re also important ecosystem engineers, making an ecosystem more diverse by modifying it.

One of the main ways they do this is by digging out their underground homes, which are known as setts. Badger setts can last for decades or even centuries, as successive generations dig out a network of underground tunnels.

The excavation provides new opportunities for plants to grow and means that biodiversity around badger setts is often higher than the surrounding area. They’re also known for digging out latrines where the seeds carried in badger excrement can grow.

While badgers play an important role in the ecosystem, they can also spread bovine tuberculosis (TB), which is caused by the bacteria Mycobacterium bovis. Concerns over its impact on cattle mean that over 230,000 badgers have been culled in the UK since 2013 in an effort to eradicate the disease.

The badger cull has been controversial, with doubts raised about its effectiveness. The UK government has now announced that the cull is set to end by 2030, with a programme of vaccinations instead planned for cattle and badgers.

The source of the word "badger" is uncertain. The Oxford English Dictionary states it probably derives from "badge" + -ard, a reference to the white mark on its forehead that resembles a badge, and may date to the early 16th century. The French word bêcheur ('digger') has also been suggested as a source. A male badger is a boar, a female is a sow, and a young badger is a cub. A badger's home is called a sett. Badger colonies are often called clans.

The far older name "brock" (Old English: brocc), (Scots: brock) is a Celtic loanword (cf. Gaelic broc and Welsh broch, from Proto-Celtic *brokko) meaning 'grey'. The Proto-Germanic term was *þahsu- (cf. German Dachs, Dutch das, Norwegian svin-toks; Early Modern English dasse), probably from the PIE root *tek'- 'to construct', which suggests that the badger was named after its digging of setts (tunnels); the Germanic term *þahsu- became taxus or taxō, -ōnis in Latin glosses, replacing mēlēs ('marten' or 'badger'), and from these words the common Romance terms for the animal evolved (Italian tasso, French tesson/taisson/tasson—now blaireau is more common—, Catalan toixó, Spanish tejón, Portuguese texugo) except Asturian melandru.

Until the mid-18th century, European badgers were variously known in English as brock, pate, grey, and bawson. The name "bawson" is derived from "bawsened", which refers to something striped with white. "Pate" is a local name that was once popular in northern England. The name "badget" was once common, but only used in Norfolk, while "earth dog" was used in southern Ireland. The badger is commonly referred to in Welsh as a mochyn daear ('earth pig')

Four ‘Highly Commended’ images

The four ‘Highly Commended’ images that also impressed wildlife lovers across the globe include ‘Earth and Sky’ by Francisco Negroni, an unforgettable capture of a double lenticular cloud illuminated at nightfall by lava emitted from the Villarrica volcano in Chile, and ‘Edge of Night’ by Jess Findlay, an action shot showing a ghostly barn owl exiting through the hayloft window of a derelict barn to hunt.

‘Earth and Sky’ ©Francisco Negroni, Wildlife Photographer of the Year

A double lenticular cloud is illuminated at nightfall by the lava emitted from the Villarrica volcano, Chile.  

Villarica is in the town of Pucón in the south of Chile. It’s one of the country’s most active volcanoes and last erupted in 2015.  

Francisco takes regular trips to Villarrica to monitor its activity. On this visit, he stayed nearby for 10 nights.  

He says every trip is “quite an adventure – never knowing what the volcano might surprise you with”. Some nights are calm, others furious as in this photograph, where the brightness of the crater illuminates the night sky.

‘Edge of Night’ ©Jess Findlay (Canada), Wildlife Photographer of the Year

A ghostly barn owl exits the hayloft window of a derelict barn to hunt in fields outside Vancouver, Canada. Jess quietly watched the owl for several nights to understand its habits.

He set up an invisible beam that would trigger a flash when the owl flew out of the barn. Simultaneously, a slow shutter speed gathered ambient light cast on the clouds and barn.

On the tenth night, all the moving parts came together as the owl left to begin its hunt.

The two other finalist images depict a stoat sitting up to observe its territory as it blends perfectly into a snowy landscape in Belgium in Michel d’Oultremont’s image ‘Whiteout’, and David Northall’s interesting capture ‘Spiked’ which shows a bloodied yet determined honey badger returning to finish off a Cape porcupine, which had tried to defend itself earlier.

'Whiteout' ©Michel d’Oultremont (Belgium), Wildlife Photographer of the Year

A stoat sits up and observes its territory as it blends perfectly into a snowy landscape in Belgium.  

Michel had been looking for stoats in the snow for many years.  

The magic of snowfall fascinates Michel every winter. He wanted to take a photograph that showed how the stoats blend in with the whiteness of the landscape.  

He’d seen a few in Switzerland but never in his native Belgium. Then, finally his dream came true. He lay in the snow with a white camouflage net covering all but his lens.  

This curious stoat came out of its snowy hole and sat up from time to time, observing its territory just before setting off to hunt.

The fourth Highly Commended photograph shows a bloodied yet determined honey badger returning to renew its attack on a Cape porcupine, which earlier had tried to defend itself.  

Found throughout Botswana, honey badgers are famously ferocious. They often chase animals many times their own size.  

This honey badger got an unpleasant surprise when it attacked the normally nocturnal Cape porcupine.  

The badger grabbed the porcupine’s right leg. In defence, the porcupine repeatedly backed into its attacker, piercing it with many quills.  

During a lull in the attack, the porcupine managed to shuffle away, its leg badly damaged.  

After a short retreat, the bloodied badger returned and renewed its attack on the porcupine under a bush close to the original attack then dragged it into its underground den.

'Spiked' ©David Northall (UK), Wildlife Photographer of the Year

Ian’s image, 'No Access', and the four finalist ‘Highly Commended’ images were selected from a shortlist of 25 images chosen by the Natural History Museum, London, and an international judging panel from almost 60,000 images submitted for the sixtieth Wildlife Photographer of the Year competition.

The five images will be displayed both online and on the interactive voting screens in the flagship exhibition at the Natural History Museum, London, on until 29 June 2025.

About Wildlife Photographer of the Year

Wildlife Photographer of the Year shines a light on inspiring and impactful stories from the natural world to create advocates for our planet. The annual competition for amateur and professional photographers of all ages from around the world uses photography’s unique emotive power to connect people with nature.

Images entered into the sixty-first competition are currently being judged by an international panel of expertsThe winners will be announced at the next annual awards ceremony which will take place at the Natural History Museum, London, in October 2025.

You can view the Wildlife Photographer of the Year images from the current and previous years' competitions online. These images were awarded for their artistic composition, technical innovation and truthful interpretation of the natural world.

Wonderful images of and from Australia are among this gallery.

Visit: www.nhm.ac.uk/wpy/gallery

Wildlife Photographer of the Year was founded in 1965 by BBC Wildlife Magazine, then called Animals. The Natural History Museum joined forces in 1984 to create the competition as it is known today. The annual competition and touring exhibition are now run and owned by the Natural History Museum, London.

International touring venues currently include the Australian National Maritime Museum (in Sydney), Queen Victoria Museum and Art Gallery and National Wool Museum in Australia; Royal BC Museum and Royal Ontario Museum in Canada; Statens Naturhistoriske Museum (Danish Natural History Museum) in Denmark; Muséum d’histoire naturelle de Bourges (Bourges Natural History Museum) in France; Staatliches Naturhistorisches Museum, Hessisches Landesmuseum Darmstadt, Westfälisches Pferdemuseum Münster and Naturkunde Museum Reutlingen in Germany; Forte di Bard in Italy; Naturhistorisches Museum Basel (Natural History Museum Basel) in Switzerland; National Museum of Wildlife Art of the United States in the USA.

New Matildas mural officially unveiled at Stadium Australia - Olympic Park, Homebush

February 5, 2025

The NSW Government has unveiled the artist and artwork that will be projected onto Stadium Australia at Olympic Park (Accor Stadium) to celebrate the Matildas’ history-making campaign at the 2023 Women’s World Cup.

''This is the first mural in a new series that will commemorate the greatest moments in sport and entertainment at Australia’s home of major events at Accor Stadium, which is celebrating 25 years since the 2000 Sydney Olympic and Paralympic Games.'' the government said

In their first World Cup on home soil, the Matildas progressed through to the semi-final smashing all records in the process across crowds, TV viewership and inspiring a new generation with rapidly increasing participation rates.

Artist Kirthana Selvaraj has painted a striking artwork that captures the key players who inspired a nation. The artwork will be transformed into a 57-metre-long immersive mural that extends across the exterior of Accor Stadium’s Cathy Freeman Stand.

Matildas captain Sam Kerr’s wonder strike and celebration against England has been illustrated in the mural, as has Mackenzie Arnold’s brilliance in goals and young star Courtney Vine’s composure to kick the winning penalty goal against France in the quarter-final, among other key moments.

The public will have an opportunity to view the mural for the first time in April to celebrate the team’s two upcoming Sydney and Newcastle games which have been announced for April 4 (Allianz Stadium) and April 7 (McDonald Jones Stadium).

Sydney was the main host city of the tournament, with 11 games and more than 600,000 fans hosted across Accor and Allianz stadiums.

This mural further builds on the Minns Labor Government’s acknowledgement of great female athletes in our sporting venues including through the renaming of the Stadium’s eastern grandstand in honour of sporting legend Cathy Freeman OAM.

Premier of New South Wales Chris Minns said:

“It’s long overdue that our nation’s inspirational female athletes are provided with recognition of some of the greatest sporting achievements in our nation’s history.

“The Matildas captivated the nation like never before smashing all kinds of records and inspiring a new generation of sports stars, participants and fans.

“Their game-changing tournament will be perfectly honoured with this mural which will be fittingly projected onto the exterior of the Cathy Freeman Stand – the first grandstand in a major Australian stadium to be named after a female athlete.”

Minister for Sport Steve Kamper said:

“The saying goes, you can’t be what you can’t see. It’s fair to say the Matildas World Cup campaign opened the eyes of a generation.

“The Matildas effect is still being felt today with more girls and women playing the game thanks to the team’s achievement at the Women’s World Cup.

“This mural will forever celebrate the success of the Matildas who inspired us all.”

Minister for Women Jodie Harrison said:

“The Matildas are one of our most admired national sporting teams and have inspired a whole generation of women and girls to participate in sports and dream big.

“This mural is a great way to immortalise an incredible sporting moment, as well as public recognition of women’s sporting achievements.

“It also symbolises the NSW government’s ongoing commitment to recognising and empowering women and girls to have full access to opportunity and choice, and excel in the world of sport.”

Artist Kirthana Selvaraj (standing in centre of photo, beside Premier Chirs Minns, with the teal coloured suit on) said:

“It has been an honour to create this painting commemorating the Matildas during the 2023 FIFA Women’s World Cup.

“Women in sport have always been a vital part of the game’s history, and this work is a celebration of their enduring legacy.

“Through this piece, I hoped to capture not only the strength and grace of the Matildas but also the unyielding spirit and unity they inspire in all of us.

“I hope this artwork stands as a permanent reminder of the impact women have made – and continue to make – not just on the field but in shaping the broader public’s connection to sport. It’s a tribute to the trailblazers who came before, the athletes who shine today, and the young people who will carry their legacy forward.”

Pics: NSW Government

Take breaks, research your options and ditch your phone: how to take care of yourself during Year 12

Karolina Grabowska/PexelsCC BY
Steven LewisAustralian Catholic University

Year 12 is arguably the most important year of school. It is full of exams, milestones and decisions.

It is both the culmination of formal learning and the gateway to what lies beyond. It is an end and beginning all in one.

Unsurprisingly, many Year 12s find it to be a demanding and stressful time. So, what mindsets and habits can you set up now to give yourself the stamina and support you need for the year ahead?

Put your exams in context

The academic focus of Year 12 is an obvious source of stress for many students. While this is natural, there are many things you can do to put all the assignments and assessments in context.

Remember Year 12 should always be framed as preparing students for life after school. It is about working out where you want to go – be it further study or work – and then keeping open as many possible pathways to get you there.

While students might have a particular career goal in mind, there are always many options and they don’t all hinge entirely on your ATAR.

Know what the entrance requirements are for your preferred option (such as getting into a particular course at university), but also research other pathways if you don’t get your desired grades or preferences.

There are always alternative ways into your dream course or field of study. A TAFE diploma can unlock entrance to a bachelor’s degree and a bachelor of arts can open entry into postgraduate law. Many universities also offer early entry schemes that don’t rely on Year 12 grades or ATAR rankings.

Most of all, try to avoid thinking there is only one right path. It is about finding the right path for you at this point in time.

A teenage boy wears headphones while he studies next to a couch.
Remember your ‘success’ this year does not hinge on your ATAR. Karolina Grabowska/PexelsCC BY

Don’t study all the time

While study is going to play a large role this year, it is important to make time for your mental, physical and emotional wellbeing. This will help give you stamina to face your study workload and the other demands of the year.

For example, playing sport or making art can help to enhance cognition, reduce stress and improve self-confidence.

Work out a schedule that allows time for study, rest and the things you enjoy. This could also include catch-ups with friends, walking your dog or cooking dinner with your family.

Remember that it is recommended teenagers get 8-10 hours of sleep per day. If you don’t get enough sleep, it makes it harder to think, learn and regulate your emotions.

And while it might be unpopular, it is also important to avoid excessive screen time. This can also help your sleep and decrease stress.

Create habits that can make you less reactive to technology. For example, put your phone on “do not disturb” mode when you are studying, and try to avoid screens at least an hour before bed.

A young woman pats a small, happy dog.
Time with a furry friend can help as you manage the demands of Year 12. Samson Katt/ PexelsCC BY

You’re not alone

If you’re feeling overwhelmed, don’t be afraid to ask for help.

This may be from teachers or school guidance officers, or it may be from parents, older siblings or friends. Reach out to trusted people early if you are worried or anxious, and support your fellow Year 12s to do the same.

Look for signs in yourself and others that could suggest at-risk mental health.

This might be difficulty concentrating, inability to sleep or significant changes in mood and behaviour. Seeking help early can help avoid these issues escalating.


If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14 or Kids Helpline on 1800 55 1800.The Conversation

Steven Lewis, Associate Professor of Comparative Education, Australian Catholic University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

$18.4 million to support nursing students with clinical placements in aged care

The Australian Government announced on January 30 2025 it is investing $18.4 million to support thousands of nursing students through the Aged Care Nursing Clinical Placements Program.

This funding will support up to 8,000 nursing students to develop practical skills in the care of older people to manage their unique clinical care needs.
 
The program provides students an opportunity to experience the benefits of working in the care and support sector early in their career with the aim of increasing the supply of skilled and dedicated nurses in aged care.
 
The program is available to Bachelor of Nursing and Master of Nursing students and is now also open to Diploma of Nursing students, allowing more students to gain practical skills.
 
Students are supported by trained clinical facilitators and have access to an online resource hub throughout their placement.  These dedicated resources enable students to further enhance their skills in gerontological care.
 
The following organisations are being funded to deliver this program nationally until 30 June 2027:
  • Australian Primary Health Care Nurses Association (APNA)
  • Pop-Up Health
  • University of Canberra
  • Hunter Primary Care
  • Brightwater Care Group

Aged care clinical placements available to nursing students

February 6, 2025
High-quality clinical placements in the aged care sector are now available to nursing students through the Aged Care Nursing Clinical Placements Program.

The Aged Care Nursing Clinical Placements Program provides nursing students with high-quality clinical placements in aged care. 

The program:
  • enables students to meet their clinical placement requirement
  • gives students the opportunity to experience working in aged care early in their career.
Trained clinical facilitators provide specialist support to students in the program. 

Free online resources and tools are also available for students, workers and providers on the Aged Care Knowledge Hub.

The program runs until June 2027. 


Word Of The Week: Pither

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Verb

1. to do other things rather than the important task at hand.

Pither is also a surname that may have originated from the Middle English word pithe meaning "pith" or "essential vigor". Notable people with the surname Pither include: 

  • Alfred George Pither: An Australian Air Force officer who served as director of radar and telecommunications. He was also involved in the investigation of Japanese scientific development and Australia's claims for reparations after World War II. 
  • Chris Pither: A New Zealand racing driver who drove for PremiAir Racing in the Repco Supercars Championship. 
  • Herbert Pither: A New Zealand aviator 
  • Luke Pither: A Canadian hockey player 
  • George Pither: An English football player 

The surname Pither has sometimes been confused with the surname Peter. 

Compare: Dither

1. to tremble with excitement or fear. 2. to be uncertain or indecisive. to be in an agitated state.

The term dither fish refers to an arbitrary group of aquarium fish, commonly used by aquarists, to help reduce innate timidity and aggression.

Compare: Pith

Noun

1. the spongy white tissue lining the rind of oranges, lemons, and other citrus fruits. 2. the essence of something. 3. Archaic; the spinal marrow.

From Old English pitha, of West Germanic origin. From Old English piþa "central cylinder of the stems of plants," also, figuratively, "essential part, quintessence, condensed substance," from West Germanic *pithan- (source also of Middle Dutch pitte, Dutch pit, East Frisian pit), a Low German root of uncertain origin. Figurative sense of "energy, concentrated force, closeness and vigor of thought and style" is by 1520s. The pith helmet (1889, earlier pith hat, 1884) was so called because it is made from the dried pith of the Bengal spongewood.

Compare pithy (adj.); early 14c., "strong, vigorous," from pith (n.) + -y (2). Meaning "full of substance or significance" is from 1520s; literal meaning "full of pith" not attested until 1560s. Related: Pithily; pithiness. Pithless "wanting strength, weak" is attested from 1550s but is rare.

Cockatoo antics - PON yard, Monday Feb. 3 2025

How we’re recovering priceless audio and lost languages from old decaying tapes

Nick Thieberger
Nick ThiebergerThe University of Melbourne

Remember cassettes? If you’re old enough, you might remember dropping one into a player, only to have it screech at you when you pressed “play”. We’ve fixed that problem. But why would we bother?

Before the iPod came along, people recorded their favourite tunes straight from the radio. Some of us made home recordings with our sibling and grandparents – precious childhood snippets.

And a few of us even have recordings from that time we travelled to a village in Vanuatu, some 40 years ago, and heard the locals performing in a language that no longer exists.

In the field of linguistics, such recordings are beyond priceless – yet often out of reach, due to the degradation of old cassettes over time. With a new tool, we are able to repair those tapes, and in doing so can recover the stories, songs and memories they hold.

A digital humanities telescope

Our digital archive, PARADISEC (Pacific and Regional Archive for Digital Sources in Endangered Cultures) contains thousands of hours of audio – mainly from musicological or linguistic fieldwork. This audio represents some 1,360 languages, with a major focus on languages of the Pacific and Papua New Guinea.

The PARADISEC research project was started in 2003 as a collaboration between the universities of Melbourne and Sydney, and the Australian National University.

Like a humanities telescope, PARADISEC allows us to learn more about the language diversity around us, as we explained in a 2016 Conversation article.

Lubing the screech

While many of the tapes we get are in good condition and can be readily played and digitised, others need special care, and the removal of mould and dirt.

We work with colleagues at agencies such as the Solomon Islands National Museum, for whom we recently repaired a set of cassettes that were previously unplayable and just screeched. We’ll be taking those cassettes, now repaired and digitised, back to Honiara in February and expect to pick up more for further treatment.

Screeching happens when a tape is dried out and can’t move through the mechanism easily. The screeching covers the audio signal we want to capture.

In 2019, my colleague Sam King built (with the help of his colleague Doug Smith) a cassette-lubricating machine while working at the Australian Institute of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Studies. This machine – likely the first of its kind in Australia – allowed us to play many previously unplayable tapes.

Last year, Sam built two versions of an updated machine called the LM-3032 Tape Restorator for PARADISEC, improving on the previous model. Between hand building some parts, 3D printing others and writing code for the controllers, it took him more than a year.

The 2024 LM-3032 Tape Restorator is an improved version of a model built in 2019. Sam King

Preserving culture and heritage

The LM-3032 Tape Restorator works by applying cyclomethicone (a silicone-based solvent used in cosmetics) to the length of a tape. This leaves behind an extremely thin film of lubrication that allows smoother playback, making digitisation possible. See more details here.

Tests have shown this process has no negative long-term effects on the tape. In fact, tapes treated with this method five years ago still play without issues.

This technological wizardry allows us to salvage precious analogue recordings before it’s too late. For many languages, these may be the only known recordings – stored on a single cassette, in a single location, and virtually inaccessible. Some of the primary research records digitised by PARADISEC have survived long periods of neglect in offices, garages and attics.

The audio below is from a tape that was kept at Fitzroy Crossing in the Kimberley for 40 years. It features beautiful singing in the local Walmajarri language, with guitar accompaniment. The first seven seconds are from the untreated tape, while the rest is from the treated version.

Singing in Walmajarri, with guitar accompaniment. A side-by-side comparison of a tape treated with the LM-3032 Tape Restorator. CC BY-NC-SA410 KB (download)

Our experience has shown community members truly value finding records in their own languages, and we’re committed to making this process easier for them.

Here’s one testimonial from E’ava Geita, Papua New Guinea’s current acting Solicitor General. In 2015, Geita was overjoyed to hear digitised records capturing PNG’s Koita language:

If only you witnessed and captured the reaction in me going through the recordings at home! It is quite an amazing experience! From feeling of awe to emotion to deep excitement! The feeling of knowing that your language has been documented or recorded in a structured way, kept safely somewhere in the world, hearing it spoken 50–60 years ago and by some people you haven’t seen but whose names you only hear in history is quite incredible. It is most heartwarming to know that it is possible to sustain the life of my language. Thank you once again for the opportunity to listen to the records.


Acknowlegement: I’d like to thank Sam King for the technical information provided in this article.The Conversation

Nick Thieberger, Associate Professor in Linguistics and a Chief Investigator in the Centre of Excellence for the Dynamics of Language, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Supersonic jets are making a comeback – but despite the hype, don’t expect to book yet

Rendering of Boom Supersonic’s proposed Overture supersonic airliner. Boom Supersonic
Chris JamesThe University of Queensland

Late last week, American company Boom Supersonic flew faster than the speed of sound with its XB-1 supersonic demonstrator aircraft. It’s now the first piloted non-military aircraft to break the sound barrier since the Concorde was retired from service in 2003.

It’s the first step in Boom’s ambitious goal to have supersonic airliners carry passengers by 2029.

But what exactly is supersonic travel? There are good reasons why it’s not more common, despite the hype.

Boom Supersonic’s XB-1 supersonic demonstrator aircraft during its 11th test flight where it became the first civilian aircraft to fly supersonically since the Concorde. Boom Supersonic

What is supersonic flight?

The Mach number is defined as a plane’s speed divided by the speed that sound waves move through the air. To “break the sound barrier” means to fly faster than the speed of sound, with Mach numbers greater than 1.

The Mach number is an important ratio: as a plane flies, it disturbs the air in front of it. These disturbances move at the speed of sound. In supersonic flight these disturbances combine to form shock waves around the vehicle.

When people say you can see a fighter jet before you hear it, they’re referring to supersonic flight: fighter jets can travel at around Mach 2.

The sound from the fighter jet is trapped inside its shock wave; until the shock wave moves to your position on the ground, you won’t hear the plane.

Illustration of how disturbances propagate in subsonic, Mach 1, and supersonic flow. Chabacano/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA

The allure of supersonic travel

For efficiency reasons, most passenger jets cruise slightly slower than the speed of sound, at around Mach 0.8 (this is subsonic flight).

Boom plans to build an airliner called Overture that can fly at Mach 1.7. Flying supersonically can drastically decrease flight times. The company claims a trip from New York to Rome on Overture could take just four hours and 40 minutes, instead of eight hours.

Boom isn’t the only company working on this lofty goal. American firm Spike Aerospace is also developing a supersonic business jet, with the tagline “delivering the world in half the time”.

This is the value proposition of supersonic passenger travel.

In limited ways, it did already exist in the 20th century. However, due to timing, bad luck and the laws of physics, it didn’t continue.

Remember the Concorde?

Designs for supersonic airliners began in the mid-20th century, and by the 1970s we had supersonic passenger flight.

There was the little-known Russian Tupolev-144 and Concorde, a Franco-British supersonic airliner operated by British Airways and Air France from 1976 to 2003.

Concorde had a capacity of up to 128 passengers and cruised at Mach 2. It regularly travelled from London to New York in around three hours. The flights were expensive, mainly shuttling business people and the rich and famous.

A long-nosed plane with short wings flies across a blue sky.
British Airways Concorde in flight. Wikimedia Commons/Eduard MarmetCC BY-SA

Why supersonic passenger flight didn’t take off

Concorde was designed in the 1960s when it seemed like supersonic passenger transport was going to be the next big thing.

Instead, the Boeing 747 entered commercial service in 1970. Cheap, large and efficient airliners like it blew Concorde out of the water.

Designed to cruise efficiently at supersonic speeds, Concorde was extremely fuel inefficient when taking off and accelerating. Concorde’s expensive, “gas guzzling” nature was a complaint levelled against it for most of its lifetime.

A catastrophic 1973 Paris air show crash of the competing Russian airliner, Tupolev Tu-144, also shifted public perception on supersonic flight safety at a time when many airlines were considering whether or not to purchase Concordes.

Only 20 Concordes were manufactured out of the planned 100. It is still disputed today whether Concorde ever made money for the airlines who operated it.

Illustration of a shock wave propagating from a supersonic aeroplane and hitting the ground to produce a sonic boom. Cmglee/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA

Noise is a real problem for supersonic flight

Remember the fighter jets? When a plane travels supersonically, its shock waves propagate to the ground, causing loud disturbances called sonic booms. In extreme cases they can shatter windows and damage buildings.

In the early 1970s, sonic boom concerns led the United States government to ban supersonic passenger flight over land in the US. This hurt the Concorde’s potential market, hence its only two regular routes were trans-Atlantic flights principally over the water.

The Concorde was also a very loud plane at take off, since it needed a lot of thrust to leave the ground.

Video footage of the final Concorde takeoff from New York’s JFK airport.

The future of supersonic travel

A future for supersonic travel relies on solving some or all of the issues Concorde faced.

NASA and Lockheed Martin’s Quesst project aims to show sonic boom can be dissipated to manageable levels. They plan to fly their X-59 supersonic aircraft over US cities and gauge responses from citizens.

Quesst aims to use the geometry of the X-59, with a long elongated nose, to dissipate sonic booms to a weak “thump”, hopefully allowing supersonic airliners to travel over land in the future.

NASA’s X-59 quiet supersonic research aircraft. NASA/Steve Freeman

Spike Aerospace’s Spike S-512 Diplomat concept also aims to be a “quiet” supersonic aircraft with a less disruptive sonic boom.

Can Boom surpass Concorde?

Boom Supersonic don’t plan to fly supersonically over land. Their plan is to fly over land at Mach 0.94, which they claim will allow 20% faster overland travel than standard passenger airliners, even subsonically.

They also claim the design of their engines will ensure Overture is no louder than modern subsonic airliners when it takes off.

Rendering of Boom Supersonic’s Overture supersonic airliner on the runway. Boom Supersonic

In terms of gas guzzling, they plan to use up to 100% sustainable aviation fuel to reduce emissions and their carbon footprint.

Concorde was made of aluminium using design tools available in the 1960s. Modern design methods and modern aerospace materials such as titanium and carbon fibre should also allow Overture and similar craft to weigh much less than Concorde, improving efficiency.

While Boom are currently receiving a lot of interest, with orders from many airlines, Concorde did have similar commitment before it become available. Most of it didn’t eventuate.

Additionally, Concorde was the product of an analogue era when the idea of flying to London or New York for the day for an important business meeting seemed like a necessary thing. In a world of remote work and video meetings, is there still a need for a supersonic airliner in the 2020s?

For now, supersonic airliners like Overture are likely to remain in the realm of the rich and famous, like Concorde did. But with modern technological advances, it will be interesting to see whether supersonic passenger travel once again becomes reality – or even goes mainstream. Only time will tell.The Conversation

Chris James, UQ Amplify Senior Lecturer, Centre for Hypersonics, School of Mechanical and Mining Engineering, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Bees count from left to right just like some humans, apes and birds – new research

Stock Holm/Shutterstock
Scarlett HowardMonash University and Adrian DyerMonash University

Picture writing the numbers 1 to 5 in a horizontal line, from smallest to largest. Where did you put 1? If you placed 1 on the left and 5 on the right, you share this preference with most humans.

Humans are not alone in this preference. Some other primates, and even some birds, also order small-to-large quantities from left to right. Although, some animals do prefer to order quantities from right to left.

This is known as the mental number line, and it shows how brains typically organise information. But why do our brains do this?

To investigate how and why brains order numbers, it’s sometimes useful to step back in time. How did a common ancestor of humans and insects order information? To find out, we can compare the results of humans and bees: we last shared a common ancestor more than 600 million years ago.

Two recent studies on bees have revealed a lot about how tiny brains order numbers.

One study, conducted by a team in Europe, showed that bees prefer to order lower numbers on the left and higher numbers on the right, just like many humans. Our new study, led by Jung-Chun (Zaza) Kuo and her supervisory team, has explored how numbers and space interact in the bee brain.

‘Number’ and ‘space’

As humans, we link the concepts of “space” and “number”. This means there is a logic to how we order numbers (typically from left to right in ascending order: 1, 2, 3, 4 … and so on).

Studies have shown humans may also have a vertical – bottom to top – preference when processing numerical information efficiently.

There may also be educational influences, especially due to language and writing direction. Some languages, like English, write from left to right. Others, such as Japanese, Chinese, Korean, Hebrew or Arabic, can be written in other directions. Writing direction can influence how we prefer to order numbers.

Meanwhile, honeybees are efficient learners and show evidence of being tiny mathematicians. In past research, they have been shown to add and subtractunderstand the concept of zerouse symbols to represent numbersorder quantitiescategorise numbers by odd or even, and show evidence of linking numbers to spatial information like size.

The competency bees show around numbers makes them an ideal animal to look at how number and space interact in a miniature brain.

A honeybee flying in front of coloured Arabic numerals including 2, 3, 2, 4.
Do bees have a mental number line? Scarlett Howard

How did we test bees in our study?

We gave freely flying bees sugar water for visiting an image of three circles printed on a card: this was our “reference number”. The card was hung in the centre of a large circular screen, with a drop of sugar water on a platform underneath it.

As the bees repeatedly visited the reference number, they learned an association between the number three, the centre of the circular screen, and a reward. In between visits, bees took the sugar water back to their hive to be made into honey.

After bees had learned to associate number (three) and space (middle) with a reward, we tested them on numbers higher and lower than three, to see if they had linked space and number.

We showed bees images of a higher number (four circles) and a lower number (two circles). Two identical images of four shapes were shown simultaneously on the left and right sides of the screen. If bees preferred the larger number on the right, they would fly to the quantity of four presented on the right more than when four was presented on the left.

We did the same for the smaller number of two shapes. If bees preferred four circles on the right and two circles on the left, that would reveal they have a left-to-right mental number line, like humans.

We also tested if bees had a preference to order numbers upwards or downwards, and found no preference for linking space and number vertically. However, bees did prefer options that were towards the bottom of the circular screen.

A diagram of the experimental screen on  the left and an image of a bee flying towards an image of three yellow dots on a grey background on the right.
The image on the left (a) shows a diagram of the screen apparatus. In the right panel (b) we see a bee flying towards an image of three yellow dots on a grey background. Jung-Chun (Zaza) Kuo

So, how does the bee mental number line work?

The study by the European team found bees have a consistent left-to-right mental number line. This means they prefer to order lower numbers on the left and higher numbers on the right.

Our study has confirmed bees prefer to order higher numbers on the right. But we also found bees preferred to visit the right side of the screen. The preference of bees to order numbers from left-to-right and to visit the right side of the circular screen interacted in an intriguing way.

The bees in our study showed a preference for higher numbers on the right, but not for lower numbers on the left. This could be because the right-side bias we observed cancelled out the preference for smaller numbers on the left.

Taken together, the findings of both studies confirm that bees do possess a left-to-right mental number line and also that they have a bias towards the right side of their visual space.

Our team suggests such biases – for example, how most humans are right-handed – may be an important part of how brains make sense of ordering information in the world.

The birds and the bees (and the apes)

By looking at the behaviours of animals, we can sometimes learn more about ourselves.

These two recent studies on bees show there is a complex interaction between ordering numbers and how spatial relationships are processed by an insect brain.

We now know that the preference to order numbers from left to right exists in several very different animal groups: insects, birds and apes. Perhaps evolution has landed on this preference as an advantageous way to process complex information.The Conversation

Scarlett Howard, Lecturer, School of Biological Sciences, Monash University and Adrian Dyer, Associate Professor, Department of Physiology, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

This year, make a commitment to understanding your world better: practise the art of slow looking

gilber franco/Unsplash
Sienna van RossumGriffith University

We are in a rapidly changing visual culture where it is increasingly inadequate to take images at face value.

There is an ever-increasing prevalence of image manipulation and AI imagery. And in the attention economy, our attention has become a precious, sought-after resource. Images participate in this redirection of our attention with an endless production line of new, stimulating content to maximise user engagement.

In this environment, there is an increasing demand to prioritise visual literacy with the same rigour as we do with writing and reading.

We need to look more closely at images – to practise slow looking.

What is it you’re looking at?

The act of slow looking involves taking a pause and thoroughly describing what you see.

Often, we jump to the image’s meaning by identifying its contents. But it is important to discern what the image actually “looks like” and how this influences its reading.

The aim of looking slowly is not just to verify what is real, fake or AI. After all, there will become a time when it is too difficult and time-consuming for the average person to determine every AI-generated image without a watermark or label.

While the ability to detect whether something is AI is one important skill, this should not be the only reason to practise slow looking. To only determine if it is fake or real can ignore what an AI image can also tell us about our cultural climate.

In December, Madonna shared a deepfake of her embracing the Pope from digital artist RickDick.

Satirical images of the pope have a long history. As early as the 16th century, artists depicted the head of the Catholic Church alongside the profane as a means of critique and provocation.

RickDick’s deepfakes, in their eerie sense of realness, prove a new means to continue to satirise and provoke viewers in the digital age. We can deduce on close inspection that these images of Madonna and the Pope are not real photographs, but we can look even further to also discern what nevertheless gives these AI images their potency.

Fake or not, the lifelike, intimate embrace of the two icons probes an old but ongoing friction between perceived acts of blasphemy in pop culture and the sacred authority of the church.

16th century etching
In this etching from 1555, the Pope has three heads: one wears the papal tiara, one wears a turban, and one is an infant. The Metropolitan Museum of Art

The act of slow looking develops visual literacy. It examines why certain images go viral, why some move us above others and what they say about our reality, values or beliefs.

Beginning to look slowly

To begin this practice, imagine you are trying to describe an image to a friend who cannot see it. What’s happening in the image? What is its scale? What colours are used? How is it made? Where and how are you viewing it – on your phone, a billboard or poster?

Adopt a questioning stance to spot possible biases or blind spots – your own, or of the creator of the image. What is possibly missing from the image? Whose perspective is it or isn’t it showing?

This process can be significantly enhanced through using your hands: draw or paint what you see. It doesn’t need to be expensive or time-consuming. Nor do you need to be “good” at it. Drawing on a scrap piece of paper with an old ballpoint pen you have on your desk for even just a few minutes can connect the mind and body into a deep awareness of your visual field.

A woman with a sketch pad.
Try drawing what you see, to really examine it and have a deeper connection with it. Eepeng Cheong/Unsplash

Pick anything to draw from your immediate surroundings or screens. This is all about the process: it is not the goal to have a finished artwork.

Key details that weren’t apparent before will emerge through this creative practice and help you analyse how an image works, why it is or isn’t engaging and what are its multiple possible meanings.

Slowing down

That we should look more slowly in our fast-paced, oversaturated visual culture is not a new concept, especially in the art community.

Numerous galleries such as London’s Tate Gallery, the National Gallery of Australia , and most recently Ipswich Art Gallery’s 2024 Arriving Slowly exhibition host “slow looking” events to initiate this practice.

These events often take the form of a guided tour and provide prompts to build the viewer’s analytical skills, with the additional benefit of building a communal engagement to look slowly together.

We are all creators and consumers of images. It is important for all of us to reflect on where our attention is being directed, and why, in the constant flood of images.

We have a shared responsibility in how we examine images. Now, more than ever, our visual literacy would benefit from creative practices to slow us down. At both individual and collective levels, we should prioritise looking intently at how our images remember the past, define our present, and envision the future.The Conversation

Sienna van Rossum, PhD Candidate, Queensland College of Art and Design, Griffith University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How a Cold War satellite and Robert Menzies changed the way Australian schools are funded

Prime Minister Robert Menzies during the 1963 federal election campaign. Image courtesy of the National Archives of Australia. NAA: A1200, L46014
Jennifer ClarkUniversity of Adelaide

As students and teachers prepare to go on holidays, there’s a disagreement raging over a new school funding deal for 2025.

Queensland, New South Wales, South Australia and Victoria have all refused to sign up to the Albanese government’s offer for the next round of funding. This offer would see the federal government contribute 22.5% towards government school funding, up from 20%. But these state governments think it should be 25% instead.

As the disagreement rolls into next year, many Australians may not realise the federal government hasn’t always contributed to school funding.

The federal government has only been funding schools for 60 years. And it would not have happened if not for a Soviet satellite, an Australian prime minister and some science labs.

Schools have historically been funded by the states

Before 1964, the federal government resisted involvement in school education.

Legislation between 1872 and 1895 made colonial and then state governments responsible for government schools. Government funding for non-government schools was abolished as a result. So all independent schools, including Catholic parish schools, had to rely on fees and philanthropy.

But this all changed during the 1963 federal election campaign and the subsequent States Grants Act of 1964.

Enter the space race

In 1957 something dramatic happened.

At the height of the Cold War, the Soviet Union launched the first satellite, Sputnik. The then Liberal Prime Minister Robert Menzies called it a “spectacular act of technology and propaganda”. But others bluntly argued it signalled the failure of the West to keep up with science education. As American physicist George Henry Stine reportedly said: “Unless the US catches up fast we’re dead”.

Fortunately, Menzies had already commissioned Sir Keith Murray from the United Kingdom to review the state of Australia’s universities in 1956.

The Murray report, tabled a month before Sputnik, warned of weaknesses in Australian science education.

In a foreshadowing of concerns about students’ STEM skills today, the Murray report showed the number of students studying physics and maths was low. First year failure rates in university science courses were high because the students were not properly prepared at school. Science teachers were insufficiently trained. The curriculum was outdated and facilities and equipment were either inadequate or nonexistent.

In other words, in the age of Sputnik, science education was not good enough.

This was especially the case in girls’ schools (again echoed in today’s concerns about a gender gap in science achievement). Girls usually studied biology if they studied science at all, as science was seen as “better suited to boys”. The number of women who became science teachers was very small and there was little financial incentive to do so.

A replica of the Sputnik
A replica of the Sputnik 1, the first artificial satellite to reach outer space. The replica is stored at the US National Air and Space Museum. NSSDC, NASA via Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

Schools had no labs to teach science

By far one of the greatest problems for Australia was the lack of suitable laboratories in schools to teach science.

The problem was so acute, headmaster R.L. Robson (from elite Sydney boys school Shore) and CSR chair F.E. Trigg established The Industrial Fund, to raise money to build science laboratories in “schools of standing”. The fund successfully raised £623,000 to support 37 projects in large private boys’ schools between 1958 and 1964. No girls’ schools were funded.

Menzies was well aware of The Industrial Fund because he was regularly invited to open the new buildings.

So, not only did Menzies understand the importance of science education for national defence in a post-Sputnik world, he was aware of Australian education failings from the Murray report. He was also reminded of a way to fix this, every time he opened a new science laboratory.

A black and white photo of women in a library, circa 1960s.
Before the 1960s, science was not seen as a subject for girls. Museums Victoria/ UnsplashCC BY

The 1963 election

Then a domestic political opportunity presented itself.

In 1963, the federal executive of the Labor Party reversed a NSW State Labor Party decision to support government aid for science to non-government schools. This gave Menzies a unique and timely electoral window to differentiate his party.

In the election campaign of 1963 Menzies proposed to build science laboratories in high schools “without discrimination”.

Historians have long argued Menzies’ policy shift was all about courting the Catholic vote in the tight 1963 election (which he ultimately won).

But the States Grants Act also went beyond Catholic schools. Students benefited regardless of whether they attended a state school or not and whether they were boys or girls. In the end, more than 500 schools either received assistance to build a lab or were recommended to receive it.

From labs to libraries and beyond

Commonwealth assistance to schools expanded rapidly in the late 1960s.

In 1968, the federal government began a grants program for school libraries. Per capita grants were introduced for private schools in 1969 and for public schools from 1972.

What had begun as a specific scheme to improve science education grew into an ongoing commitment to support school education in general.

As today’s school funding wars continue into 2025, it is worth remembering the unusual history behind the federal government’s involvement. And how for some, it is not a natural funding source for the school system.

Meanwhile, increasing students’ skills and engagement with science has been a concern in Australia for more than six decades.The Conversation

Jennifer Clark, Adjunct Professor of History, University of Adelaide

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Art, music and science combine at a new whale exhibition at Winchester Cathedral

University of SouthamptonCC BY-NC-ND
Ryan ReisingerUniversity of Southampton and Drew CrawfordUniversity of Southampton

The nave of Winchester Cathedral in Hampshire is, until February 26 2025, home to three monumental ambassadors from the sea, sculpted by artist Tessa Campbell Fraser.

In Campbell Fraser’s immersive art installation, three sculpted sperm whales (the largest of the toothed whales), hang from the cathedral ceiling. Toothed whales have teeth instead of the keratinous baleen that blue whales and others use to feed on tiny animals, such as krill. Sperm whales, which feed mainly on squid, are the largest predators alive today.

Their ecology is strange, but impressive. They are socially sophisticated, massive-brained, far-wandering, deep-diving and loud. Sperm whale clicks are the loudest biologically produced sound ever recorded.

Whales use these strange vocalisations to echolocate as they hunt for prey and to communicate to each other. In this installation, Campbell Fraser has creatively employed sperm whale clicks to vibrate paint on the banners that hang alongside the whales in the cathedral, serving as a visual representation of sperm whale “codas”. These repetitive patterns of clicks, lasting a few seconds, have intrigued researchers since they were first recorded off North Carolina, US, in the 1950s.

We now know that groups of sperm whales are organised into “vocal clans” based on unique coda repertoires. These whale call signatures have probably been learned culturally, but scientists are yet to understand what they mean.

While carrying out her research, Campbell Fraser referenced a multidisciplinary research collaboration that’s seeking to translate whale calls using artificial intelligence. Already, that project has discovered that sperm whale codas are far more complex than previously thought.

The three whale sculptures (which are between three and five metres long) are made, in part, from “ghost gear” – this is abandoned, lost, and discarded fishing gear, collected at sea by British charity Ghost Fishing UK. Floating ghost gear, which includes fishing nets, can kill or entangle marine life such as whales.

At the opening of the exhibition, Campbell Fraser recounted reports of stranded sperm whales whose stomachs were filled with plastic debris. One sperm whale that was found dead in Pas-de-Calais, France, had 25kg of debris, including nets and rope, in its stomach.

Despite this lethal backstory, Campbell Fraser’s method of construction gives the whales an ephemerality and lightness. This seems at odds with their mass in real life, for sperm whales can weigh 45 tonnes, but it is apt considering they are nearly weightless in water. This has allowed baleen whales to evolve such massive bodiesBlue whales are the largest animals to have ever lived, despite feeding almost exclusively on tiny krill.

three hanging whale scultures in cathedral
These three sperm whales are on exhibition until 26 February 2025. The University of Southampton.CC BY-NC-ND

Using netting in these sculptures represents, on one level, the increasing effects of humans on the ocean and whales. On another level, it hints at the long entanglement between human history and whales. Our spiritual, cultural and intellectual links with whales are represented through rich intersections of art and science.

One famous literary example is the 1851 novel Moby Dick by Herman Melville, which artfully weaved descriptions of whale biology with the human story of pre-industrial whaling. This theme is also explored by our colleague Philip Hoare in his book Leviathan (2009).

Unfortunately, people have negative effects on the oceans. The consequences of pollution, overfishing and climate change are widespread and increasing. Even in the furthest corners of the sea, whales may encounter humans or be affected by our influence, through climate changenoise and plastic pollution.

Our research has shown how whale foraging areas in the remote western Antarctic peninsula overlap with an increasing fishery for Antarctic krill which now requires urgent and careful management to ensure its sustainability for people and whales.

Through an unprecedented compilation of over 1,000 tracks from eight whale species globally, we have produced a world-first map of “whale superhighways” – the blue corridors whales use as they migrate across oceans. This map also highlights how these extensive migrations expose whales to a mosaic of threats at various scales. As a result, protecting whales requires coordinated effort at local and global scales.

The art of acoustics

Of course, scale is a key consideration in the design of cathedrals. Winchester is a particularly fine example – at 170m, it is the longest medieval cathedral in the world.

On February 6, four composer-performers from the University of Southampton’s department of music will perform a specially commissioned, site-specific piece called Echolocations. The music will approach this intersection of art and scientific research from another angle, in part by responding to the expansive acoustics of the cathedral.

Vocalist Liz Gre and pianist Ben Oliver, with live electronics performed by Pablo Galaz and Drew Crawford, will work with this acoustic to evoke the vast aquatic distances across which whales communicate. And inspired by the ghost netting in Campbell Fraser’s sculptures, the music will address the threat that ongoing human activities are having on marine ecosystems via noise pollution.

We are polluting the oceans with plastic and sonic garbage. It sometimes seems we will be incapable of action until whale song ends up a digitally rendered collective memory.

But this performance inspires the same qualities of imagination that enable us to conceive of building the gothic medieval wonder of the cathedral’s nave, conquer oceans to build global trade networks, mine the ocean floor and use machine learning to understand whale song. This level of imagination will be vital in creating a new set of sustainable relations with the rest of the planet.


Don’t have time to read about climate change as much as you’d like?
Get a weekly roundup in your inbox instead. Every Wednesday, The Conversation’s environment editor writes Imagine, a short email that goes a little deeper into just one climate issue. Join the 40,000+ readers who’ve subscribed so far.The Conversation


Ryan Reisinger, Associate Professor in Marine Biology and Ecology, University of Southampton and Drew Crawford, Associate Professor, Department of Music, University of Southampton

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

This Valentine’s Day, try loving-kindness meditation

Love is one of the most diverse emotions, and it can be experienced in countless ways. fizkes/iStock via Getty Images Plus
Jeremy David EngelsPenn State

Most people love love, but not everyone loves Valentine’s Day.

When it was first invented in the 1300s in medieval Europe, this holiday was a celebration of romantic love, the coming of spring and the freedom to choose a partner, rather than having one chosen for you.

Today that ancient and optimistic message remains but is often buried under a pile of consumer goods – chocolates, cards, stuffed animals, plastic toys, expensive dinners and roses that cost so much more than you think.

The archetypical image of this holiday is Cupid shooting a person with an arrow that makes them go mad with physical desire.

Yet love is one of the richest and most diverse human emotions. There are many ways to experience love – so this holiday, as a scholar of mindfulness and communication, I encourage you to try out a practice of “metta,” or loving-kindness.

What is loving-kindness?

Loving-kindness, or metta, is the type of love praised and practiced by Buddhists around the world, and it is very different from romantic love. It is described as “limitless” and “unbounded” love.

In the ancient Pali language, the word “metta” has two root meanings. The first is “gentle,” in the sense of a gentle spring rain that falls on young plants without discrimination. The second is “friend.” A metta friend is a true friend – someone who is always there for you without fail and without demanding anything in exchange, or someone who supports you when you’re in pain and who is happy for you when you’re happy, without a tinge of jealousy.

Metta is a kind of love that is offered without any expectation of return. It is not reciprocal or conditional. It does not discriminate between us and them, or worthy and unworthy. To practice metta meditation is to give the rarest gift: a gift that does not demand a return.

The Buddha describes how to practice this love in an early discourse called the “Karaniya Metta Sutta.”

A group of monks approach the Buddha complaining about the spirits living in the forest causing nearby villagers to suffer. The Buddha advises against fighting or driving them away. Instead, he encourages practicing boundless love toward them, wishing them happiness, peace and ease.

The monks do as recommended, practicing loving-kindness meditation for several weeks. Over time, noticing how happy the monks became, the spirits began to practice loving-kindness, too, because they also wanted to be happy. The practice changed the spirits’ behavior, and they stopped harassing the villagers.

How to practice loving-kindness

In the fifth century, a Sri Lankan monk named Buddhaghosa composed an important meditation text called the Visuddhimagga, or “The Path of Purification.” This text is sacred to Theravada Buddhists.

Buddhaghosa provides instructions for how to practice loving-kindness meditation. Contemporary teachers adapt and modify these instructions. However, the general format of this meditation tends to be consistent.

Loving-kindness meditation begins with a practice of mindfulness in order to calm the mind and body and to remember to come back to the now.

A guided loving-kindness meditation practice.

Next, this meditation involves softly reciting several traditional phrases and visualizing an audience who will receive loving-kindness as these words are spoken. The phrases are:

  • May I/you/they/we be filled by loving-kindness

  • May I/you/they/we be safe from inner and outer dangers.

  • May I/you/they/we be well in body and mind.

  • May I/you/they/we be at ease and happy.

Traditionally, the meditation starts with yourself – the pronoun will be “I.” Then, the meditation involves picturing a beloved person – and it does not even have to be a person; it can be a pet or an animal – and directing loving-kindness to them. The pronoun in the meditation will change to “you.”

After this, the meditation involves directing loving-kindness to a wider circle of friends and loved ones – the pronoun will change to “they.” Finally, the meditation involves gradually including more and more people in your well wishes: the folks in your community and town, people everywhere, animals and all living beings, and the whole Earth, and the pronoun will change to “we.”

Many versions of this meditation invite practitioners to express metta for people who have caused them difficulty, including to someone seen to be an “opponent.”

However, teachers including the Zen master, poet and peace activist Thich Nhat Hanh recommend practicing this type of metta meditation only once you are well established in directing loving-kindness at yourself and those you are close to.

Why practice loving-kindness meditation?

Clinical research shows that loving-kindness meditation has a positive effect on mental health. It could help lessen anxiety and depression, increase life satisfaction and improve self-acceptance; it could also reduce self-criticism.

There is also evidence that loving-kindness meditation increases a sense of connection. Practicing loving-kindness could increase happiness while strengthening feelings of kinship with all living beings, a few of the benefits of metta meditation described by the Buddha in the Karaniya Metta Sutta.

So if you’re feeling disconnected from others, ill at ease or just disenchanted with a holiday that has become overrun by capitalism on this Valentine’s Day, you might consider trying loving-kindness meditation.The Conversation

Jeremy David Engels, Liberal Arts Endowed Professor of Communication, Penn State

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why are rubies red and emeralds green? Their Colours come from the same metal in their atomic structure

Rubies get their bright colour from some fascinating chemistry. Matthew Hill/Bloomberg Creative Photos via Getty Images

Daniel FreedmanUniversity of Wisconsin-Stout

The colours of rubies and emeralds are so striking that they define shades of red and green – ruby red and emerald green. But have you ever wondered how they get those colours?

I am an inorganic chemist. Researchers in my field work to understand the chemistry of all the elements that make up the periodic table. Many inorganic chemists focus on the transition metals – the elements in the middle of the periodic table. The transition metals include most of the metals you are familiar with, like iron (Fe) and gold (Au).

One feature of compounds made with transition metals is their intense colour. There are many examples in nature, including gemstones and paint pigments. Even the colour of blood comes from the protein haemoglobin, which contains iron.

Investigating the colours of compounds containing transition metals leads you into some really amazing science – that’s part of what drew me to study this field.

Rubies and emeralds are great examples of how a small amount of a transition metal – in this case, chromium – can create a beautiful colour in what would otherwise be a fairly boring-looking mineral.

Minerals and crystals

A small, round ruby
Rubies appear red because they absorb blue and green light. benedek/E+ via Getty Images

Both rubies and emeralds are minerals, which is a type of rock with a consistent chemical composition and a highly ordered structure at the atomic level.

When this highly ordered structure extends in all three dimensions, the mineral becomes a crystal.

With a theory developed by physicists in the 1920s called crystal field theory, scientists can explain why rubies and emeralds have the colours they do. Crystal field theory makes predictions about how a transition metal ion’s structure is affected by the other atoms surrounding it.

Rubies are mainly made up of the mineral corundum, which is composed of the elements aluminium and oxygen in a regular, repeating array. Each aluminium ion is surrounded by six oxygen ions.

A chemical structure diagram showing
A crystal of corundum looks like this at the atomic level, with the aluminium ions shown as red balls and the oxygen ions shown as white balls. Each aluminium ion is surrounded by six oxygen ions, and each oxygen by four aluminiums. Eigenes Werk/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA

Emeralds are mainly made up of the mineral beryl, which is made from the elements beryllium, aluminium, silicon and oxygen. Beryl’s crystal structure is more complicated than corundum’s because of the additional elements in the formula, but each aluminium ion is again surrounded by six oxygen ions.

A rectangular emerald
Emeralds appear green because they absorb red and blue light. SunChan/E+ via Getty Images

Pure corundum and beryl are colourless. The brilliant colours of rubies and emeralds come from the presence of very small amounts of chromium. The chromium replaces about 1% of the aluminium in the corundum or beryl crystal when a ruby or emerald forms underground at a high temperature and pressure.

But how can one element – chromium – create the red colour of a ruby and green colour of an emerald?

Colour science

Rubies and emeralds have the colours they do because, like many substances, they absorb some colours of light. Most visible light, like sunlight, is composed of all the colours of the rainbow: red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet. These colours make up the visible light spectrum, which is easy to remember as ROY G BIV.

A diagram showing the visible light spectrum, with indigo and violet having shorter wavelengths than red and orange.
Objects absorb some visible light wavelengths and reflect others, which is why we see them as having a colour. Fulvio314/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA

One of the main reasons why objects have a colour is because they absorb one or more of these visible colours of light. If a substance absorbs, for instance, red light, it means that the red light gets trapped in the substance and the other colours reflect back to your eyes. The colour you see is the sum of the remaining light, which will be in the green-to-blue range. If a substance absorbs blue, it will look red or orange to you.

Unlike the colourless aluminium ion, the chromium ion absorbs blue and green light when surrounded by the oxygen ions. The red light is reflected back, so that’s what you see in rubies.

In an emerald, even though the chromium is surrounded by six oxygen ions, there is a weaker interaction between the chromium and the surrounding oxygen ions. That’s due to the presence of silicon and beryllium in the beryl crystal. They cause the emerald to absorb blue and red light, leaving the green for you to see.

The ability to tune the properties of transition metals like chromium through changing what is surrounding it is a core strategy in my field of inorganic chemistry. Doing so can help scientists understand the basic science of metal-containing compounds and the design of chemical compounds for specific purposes.

You can take delight in the amazing colours of the gemstones, but through chemistry, you can also see how nature creates those colours using an endless variety of complex structures made with the elements in the periodic table.The Conversation

Daniel Freedman, Dean of the College of Science, Technology, Engineering, Mathematics & Management, University of Wisconsin-Stout

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Beyoncé is right – music genres can force artists into conformity. But ditching them isn’t an option

Timothy McKenryAustralian Catholic University

Beyoncé appeared visibly astonished to hear her album Cowboy Carter had won best country album at this year’s Grammy Awards. Onstage, the singer offered a heartfelt reflection on musical genre:

I think sometimes genre is a code word to keep us in our place as artists and I just want to encourage people to do what they’re passionate about and stay persistent.

Beyoncé’s speech built on a more pointed critique of genre found in one of the tracks from her album, SPAGHETTII.

The track opens with a soundbite from Linda Martell, a pioneering Black country music singer who enjoyed commercial success in the 1960s, but whose career was marred by both overt racial abuse and accusations she didn’t “sound black”. In the soundbite, Martell says:

Genres are a funny little concept, aren’t they? […] In theory, they have a simple definition that’s easy to understand, but in practice, well, some may feel confined.

This description of confinement was echoed in 2024, when the Country Music Association Awards controversially excluded Cowboy Carter from the nomination process due to insufficient radio airplay, as per the award rules.

Media reports claimed some country radio stations refused to play, or were slow to play, Beyoncé’s new album because they didn’t recognise her as a country artist.

Debates about the usefulness of genre have been around for a while, and won’t disappear anytime soon. Beyoncé’s Grammy win presses us to consider the relevance of genre in the modern music world – and the extent to which these rigid definitions can be justified.

Is ‘genre’ useful in music?

On one level, genre is a simple and necessary mechanism for categorising different types of music. Genre encodes various aspects of music, including instrumentation, the time period it originates from, its emotional character, and the melodic, rhythmic and harmonic conventions it employs.

Terms such as jazz, rock, country, R&B, metal, hip-hop, folk and EDM are rich in meaning, and are routinely used as identity markers for performers – and for award categories at events like the Grammys. They also help us discuss our musical preferences, and teach and learn about music in educational settings.

At the same time, these terms remain fluid and contested. Research tracking the rise and fall of musical genres highlights the power genres have in shaping our understanding and experience of music.

Consider rock as an example. In the early 1950s, radio disc jockeys popularised the term rock'n'roll to describe a distinct style that drew from genres including rhythm and blues, gospel and country music, but which differed from each of these in character and function.

The societal adoption of rock'n'roll as a “new” genre wasn’t just driven by the features present in the music, but by its resonance with a teenage audience for whom it signalled rebellion, associations with sexuality and a merging of different American music cultures.

Just as Elvis Presley came to embody the genre, divergent practices gave rise to new and adapted terminology. “Rockabilly” (a style that combines elements of country and rock'n'roll) entered the lexicon. Rock'n'roll simply became “rock” and numerous adjectives such as “folk”, “psychedelic”, “progressive”, “punk”, “classic” and “hard” were attached to make sense of the continually evolving style.

I’d argue the music of Elvis Presley has little in common with the stoner rock band Kyuss, yet we group them in the same broad musical taxonomy.

Research has revealed significant inconsistencies in how people use and understand music genre terminology. Nonetheless, genre labels have historically been considered useful tools to communicate meaningful information about musical experiences.

So, what’s Beyoncé’s problem with genre?

Problems can arise for musicians when genres don’t simply describe musical practices, but work to control or distort them. Record labels have a profit imperative that incentivises artists to create music that’s easily categorised into well-established genres.

The risk this incentive poses to creativity has traditionally been offset by audiences demanding new and diverse music – alongside a flourishing independent musical culture that either ignores or is overtly antagonistic towards the generic preferences of large record labels.

That said, musicians are also pushed to adhere to narrow definitions of genre due to search functions in streaming services and methodologies used by music charts.

For example, the ARIA (Australian Recording Industry Association) charts’ code of practice lists six genre charts: core classical, country, crossover/classical, dance, hip hop/R&B, and jazz and blues. And while the ARIAs have a range of mechanisms to track record sales, the codification of these genres inevitably influences Australian musicians who wish to make a living from their music.

Beyond this, powerful cultural associations with certain genres can make their boundaries difficult to cross. Sometimes genre boundaries are rightly inflexible – particularly those associated with regional music-making or First Peoples’ cultures.

Cowboy Carter however, represents a rediscovery and celebration of Black country musicians. It draws attention to how these musicians were neglected because they didn’t align with prevailing assumptions about the genre.

The fact that Beyoncé’s choice to explore country music was in any way contentious emphasises this point. The foray by The Beatles’ drummer Ringo Starr into country music was, by contrast, uncontroversial.

Genre as a framework is, ultimately, necessary. It’s impossible to discuss music without some way of making sense of it all. Listeners, however, should recognise that rigid genre definition can distort creativity. They should also reflect on whether it may be distorting their listening habits, too.The Conversation

Timothy McKenry, Professor of Music, Australian Catholic University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Is this 2025, or 1965? Grammy wins for the Beatles and the Rolling Stones keep the rock canon in the past

Charlotte MarkowitschRMIT University

History has repeated in the rock category at this week’s 67th Grammy Awards. Best rock performance was awarded to the Beatles for their song Now and Then, while the Rolling Stones took home best rock album for Hackney Diamonds.

The Beatles’ track, finished and released by the fab four’s remaining members with the assistance of artificial intelligence, has been recognised by the Recording Academy 55 years after the band broke up. This comes as their eighth Grammy win and 27th nomination since their 1962 debut.

The Beatles’ long time rivals, the Rolling Stones, have received many accolades over their six decade career, including five Grammys. Their 24th studio album includes cameos from other legacy artists like Elton John and Stevie Wonder.

These victories are historic – but they also reveal a broader truth about rock music’s biggest institutions. The same artists who defined the genre decades ago continue to dominate its highest honours, leaving little space for contemporary acts to break through.

The new wave

The past year has seen a resurgence in rock. Streaming services and radio have reflected a rise in the popularity of the genre and reunions of rock’s most popular bands are making headlines.

This renewed enthusiasm toward rock has brought newcomers to the genre, including an emergence of new popular talent.

Newer rock talent was present at the Grammys, with St Vincent (who broke out in 2006) winning Best rock song and Fontaines D.C. receiving their first best rock album nomination since their debut in 2014.

Both of these artists have been recognised for breathing new life into the rock genre. With a willingness to confront discomfort and vulnerability coupled with distinctive guitar work and production choices, St. Vincent has been positioned as a trailblazer in modern rock.

Fontaines D.C’s nominated album Romance has been praised by critics for its energetic embrace of a diverse musical palette with compelling lyrics, a sound which has grabbed the attention of those outside and within the rock audience.

But they were up against a nominee pool largely composed of long career legacy acts such as Green Day, Pearl Jam, Jack White and the Black Crowes, who all broke out in the last millennium.

Along with the Beatles’ and the Rolling Stones’ wins, this reflects a trend in rock’s institutional recognition, where industry awards, hall of fame inductions, and media retrospectives continue to reaffirm the same monumental figures – often to the exclusion of artists shaping rock today. This phenomenon is a symptom of the rock canon, otherwise known as “the best of all time”.

The old canon

The rock canon is a set of artists, albums and songs that have been collectively deemed as the genre’s greatest.

This canon was solidified by the late 1960s and 1970s and is sustained predominantly by media outlets and awards organisations like the Grammys. Publications that rank “the best” also help shape the rock canon by repeatedly spotlighting the same classic albums and artists.

To be considered “the best” in rock, artists typically need to meet an (often unwritten) criteria of long-term critical acclaim, commercial success and influence on future generations. Artists like the Beatles and the Rolling Stones meet this criteria, frequently appearing in the top ranks of “best of” lists and maintaining their position at the top of the rock hierarchy.

But the Grammy wins for the Beatles and the Rolling Stones raise concerns about how rigid this canon remains. Artists who enter the rock canon rarely leave it, making it difficult for newcomers to garner the same levels of critical and commercial success. It has also been criticised for its preferential treatment towards whiteness and masculinity.

If the canon represents the highest levels of artistic quality in rock, its inability to change poses concerns for the future of the genre.

Australia has not remained untouched by these issues. While the Grammys are an American institution, the rock canon’s influence extends globally.

Australian institutions such as Triple J’s Hottest 100 of All Time have demonstrated this influence, showing us that the canon plays a role in shaping Australian music culture. Artists like the Beatles, the Rolling Stones and Led Zeppelin often appear on these lists, voted on by Australian listeners. Local audiences overwhelmingly favour a more standard, mainstream canon of older international rock acts over our own Australian talent.

The preference towards artists who have long been in the canon in today’s “best of” lists makes it harder for local artists – particularly those from marginalised backgrounds – to gain widespread recognition.

Crafting a vital genre

The Grammy success of the Beatles and the Rolling Stones reflects both the strength and the stagnation of rock’s institutional gate-keeping.

On one hand, these wins celebrate artists whose influence has endured for generations. On the other, they reveal how difficult it is for new acts to gain recognition when institutions continue looking backward rather than forward.

As rock continues its resurgence, the vitality of the genre may rely on expanding a more inclusive definition of greatness: one that makes room for innovation and diversity, not just nostalgia.

Will future Grammy ceremonies still be awarding the Beatles and the Rolling Stones, or will we finally see rock’s institutions evolve?The Conversation

Charlotte Markowitsch, PhD Candidate in Popular Music Studies, RMIT University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Where does black fall on the Colour spectrum? A Colour scientist explains

You perceive electromagnetic radiation in the form of light in all the colours of the rainbow. MirageC/Movement via Getty Images
Michael J. MurdochRochester Institute of Technology

Curious Kids is a series for children of all ages. If you have a question you’d like an expert to answer, send it to curiouskidsus@theconversation.com.


Where does black fall on the colour spectrum? – Utsav, age 17, Navi Mumbai, Maharashtra, India


People love the rainbow of ROYGBIV colours: red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo and violet. Human eyes perceive visible light as this array of colours.

You may notice that some colours you can perceive aren’t part of the classic rainbow, though. Where is black, for example?

I’m an associate professor of colour science, a field that combines physics and perception. Colour scientists are interested in learning more about human vision and applying that knowledge to make colour systems – such as in cameras, screens or lighting systems – work better.

To understand where black falls on the colour spectrum, first consider what light actually is.

Light is radiation visible to the human eye

Light is energy called electromagnetic radiation. It’s made up of a stream of energy particles called photons.

Each photon has its own energy level. There are two characteristics you can use to describe a photon. Its frequency is how fast it vibrates back and forth – or oscillates – as it travels. And its wavelength is the distance between those oscillations in space.

A sine curve colored the colors of the rainbow. The left side, which is violet, has higher frequency and shorter wavelength. The right side, which is red, has lower frequency and longer wavelength.
Light is made up of photons traveling as waves through space. DrSciComm via Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

As photons with wavelengths within a range of about 400–700 nanometres stream into your eyes, your brain perceives them as light. Scientists call these photons visible radiation. You perceive photons with different wavelengths as different colours.

Photons outside that range of wavelengths are invisible to human eyes. Shorter wavelength energy includes ultraviolet, X-ray and gamma radiation, while longer wavelength energy includes infrared and radio waves.

A chart labeled with different types of radiation with increasing wavelengths. Below, the visible spectrum is expanded to show the wavelengths of different colors.
The human eye can perceive only a small range of wavelengths of radiation. Ali Damouh/Science Photo Library via Getty Images

Shades and intensities

Colour perception is also affected by the quantity of photons – what physicists call the power – at different visible wavelengths. More photons means more powerful light, which looks brighter. A very vivid colour consists mostly of photons of similar wavelength. For example, a pure red may consist of photons that all share the same wavelength near 620 nanometres.

A stream of photons with a wider range of wavelengths will appear as a paler, less saturated colour. White light, such as natural daylight, consists of photons with wavelengths spread fairly evenly across a wide range of the visible spectrum. LEDs and other electric light sources are not quite as uniform across the spectrum, but they still appear white or achromatic, meaning without colour.

Mixtures of wavelengths combine and appear as new colours. The human visual system interprets pure red light and pure green light combined as yellow. Add in pure blue, and this mix of radiation appears white. Scientists and engineers take advantage of this quality in display devices, which are able to create a huge range of perceived colours by mixing the primary colours red, green and blue.

Black on the Colour spectrum

While there’s no black in a rainbow, photons anywhere in the electromagnetic spectrum can be seen as black. Or in some cases, they can’t be seen at all!

Radiation within the visible spectrum can appear black if it is low in power – more specifically, lower in power than its surroundings.

Additionally, radiation outside the visible range of wavelengths appears black to our eyes. For example, infrared radiation appears black because it is invisible to humans.

Perception is subjective

Our eyes detect the wavelength and power of the light, but our brains interpret it. So colour perception always depends on the context.

People are good at adapting to a wide range of light levels, from sunlight to starlight. So our perception of colour and brightness depends on what’s around and what we’ve been looking at recently. If you step from outdoor daylight into a dark theatre, at first you probably perceive the whole environment as black, and you may even have trouble finding your way.

However, your visual system immediately begins to adapt to the low light level. Soon, visual details begin to emerge. What appeared black now has different levels of lightness and colour.

A black circle on a white background next to a gray circle on a black background
Colour perception depends on the surrounding environment. Michael J. Murdoch

Consider the optical illusion that consists of a light rectangle next to a dark rectangle. Each rectangle contains a circle. The circles appear to be different shades but in fact are identical. Against the light background, the circle is dark enough to appear black. Surrounded by the black background, it becomes clear that the circle is merely dark grey. Even when you know the circles are the same, it’s hard to believe because the effect of the surrounding background is so strong.

A smooth gradient from light gray to black
In a smooth gradient from grey to black, where does black begin? Michael J. Murdoch

You might be asking yourself, how dark must a colour be to appear black? Another way to ask the question is, how low in power must the physical light be in order to look black?

For a visual answer, look at a gradient from dark grey to black. Where in the gradient is the boundary, or threshold, at which you call it black? What if you dim your display or view the screen in a much brighter or much darker environment? Probably the best answer for how dark it must be is, “It depends.”

Colour perception is a fascinating topic, and we colour scientists are continuing to uncover details of how the human visual system works while also applying our knowledge to many other useful things, including dyes, cameras, printers, LED lighting systems and AR/VR displays.


Hello, curious kids! Do you have a question you’d like an expert to answer? Ask an adult to send your question to CuriousKidsUS@theconversation.com. Please tell us your name, age and the city where you live.

And since curiosity has no age limit − adults, let us know what you’re wondering, too. We won’t be able to answer every question, but we will do our best.The Conversation

Michael J. Murdoch, Associate Professor of Colori Science, Rochester Institute of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Rare, almost mythical Australian tree kangaroos can finally be studied, thanks to new tech

Tree kangaroos are easily spotted with thermal drones. Emmeline Norris
Emmeline NorrisJames Cook University

Bennett’s tree kangaroos, one of Australia’s most mysterious marsupials, have long eluded researchers. Our new study, published in Australian Mammalogy today, has achieved a breakthrough: using thermal drones to detect these rare animals with unprecedented efficiency.

Tree kangaroos are found only in the tropical rainforests of Australia and New Guinea. Unlike their ground-dwelling relatives, they spend their lives in treetops, feeding on leaves and vines. Their dependence on rainforest trees makes them vulnerable to deforestation and climate change.

Alarmingly, 12 of the 14 species of tree kangaroos are listed as threatened. Yet we know little about their numbers or habits due to difficulties studying them in dense rainforest.

Our new findings mark a significant step forward, offering hope for improved conservation of these elusive, near-mythical creatures. Thermal drones, which detect animals by their body heat, may help to unravel the mysteries of tree kangaroos and guide efforts to protect them.

Rugged, dense rainforests

Bennett’s tree kangaroos inhabit Australia’s most rugged and densely vegetated rainforests north of the Daintree River in Far North Queensland. They rarely descend from their vine-covered treetop roosts, which can be up to 40 metres high.

Traditional survey methods like spotlighting (that is, methodically using flashlights) or handheld thermal cameras (using infrared sensors to detect warm bodies) often fail to detect tree kangaroos, as these tools are limited to what can be seen from the ground.

As a result, there have been no systematic surveys of Bennett’s tree kangaroos. Population estimates rely on outdated observations and anecdotal evidence, leaving their conservation status unclear.

We need robust population estimates to detect shifting population trends and prevent population declines. This requires new monitoring methods to help us find these elusive animals.

Hotspots in the treetops

Thermal drones are just what they sound like – drones equipped with infrared cameras that detect heat signatures from the air.

Warm-blooded animals like tree kangaroos stand out against the cooler rainforest background, even when partially hidden by foliage. This technology offers a powerful advantage over traditional methods, allowing researchers to scan large areas from above and see past vegetation.

In our study, we conducted three drone flights at the Daintree Rainforest Observatory, Cape Tribulation, during the morning and evening.

To our surprise, we detected six Bennett’s tree kangaroos in under an hour of flight time – an unprecedented result. These included a solitary animal, a pair, and a group of three, all consistent with known home range sizes for the species.

By comparison, traditional ground surveys often require several nights of survey effort to spot a single animal. The drones not only made detection easier but also allowed us to closely observe the animals’ behaviour, such as feeding on specific plant species, without disturbing them.

Side-by-side comparison of the same image in colour and in thermal view, with three tree kangaroos clearly visible (circled in yellow) in the thermal image. Emmeline Norris

Shedding light on a hidden species

Our findings suggest Bennett’s tree kangaroos are thriving in Cape Tribulation’s lowland rainforest.

While this is encouraging, further systematic surveys are needed to assess how population density varies with forest type, elevation and other factors.

Another intriguing discovery was the tree kangaroos’ diet. Using the drone’s colour zoom camera, we identified the vines and leaves they were eating. Mile-a-minute vine (Decalobanthus peltatus) and fire vine (Tetracera daemeliana) were popular choices on the menu.

These observations deepen our understanding of the species’ habitat needs and could inform future conservation efforts.

Conservation research methods must prioritise minimising stress on wildlife. The tree kangaroos showed no signs of disturbance, continuing to forage after briefly pausing to look at the drone.

This non-invasive approach is a promising alternative to traditional methods, like radio tracking (where a tag is attached to the animal), which can disrupt natural behaviours.

Dense green foliage with a sleepy looking orange animal in the middle.
A Bennett’s tree kangaroo peeks at the thermal drone through the vines. Emmeline Norris

Craning for a better view

Despite showing promise, drone-based wildlife monitoring has its challenges. Regulations require drone operators to maintain visual line of sight with their drone. This can be difficult in a rainforest due to the height and density of the canopy.

To overcome this, we remotely operated our drone from a 47-metre-high canopy crane designed for research. This extra height allowed us to maintain a clear view while surveying a larger area.

A distant view of rainforest treetops with a tall crane in the middle.
The 47-metre high canopy crane at the Daintree Rainforest Observatory, Cape Tribulation. Emmeline Norris

However, canopy cranes are rare – there’s only one in tropical Australia. Expanding this approach will require alternative strategies, such as using mountaintops or canopy walkways as vantage points.

Our study is just the beginning. The next step is designing methods to estimate population densities more accurately – not only for Bennett’s tree kangaroos but also other tree kangaroo species in the remote mountains of New Guinea. By identifying individual tree kangaroos based on their unique fur markings, we aim to also study their social structure and sex ratios.

Thermal drones have the potential to revolutionise conservation efforts for hard-to-study wildlife. They offer a powerful tool to monitor populations and guide management decisions.

For the rare and remarkable Bennett’s tree kangaroo, this technology could make the difference between obscurity and security.The Conversation

A high view of a platform where people in safety gear stand operating drones.
The study authors flying drones from the upper platform of the canopy crane. Emmeline Norris

Emmeline Norris, PhD Candidate, Conservation Biology, James Cook University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The King and I on the Hawkesbury

Prince Charles on the Hawkesbury – May 1966

Chris Hendrikson, Whale Beach SLSC Life Member and from the family who owned and ran the Whale Beach Kiosk from at least early 1945, shares this photo from his family albums, from 60+ years ago.

Chris states this is Prince Chares at a fishing camp course on the Hawkesbury in May 1966. Official records state then 17-year-old Charles visited in May 1966.

Details seem to be that on May 25 1966 when King Charles visited the Hawkesbury Agricultural College or the Broken Bay Fitness camp. Chris, still a youngster then himself, had earned money to attend a ‘fishing camp/education course’ there.

Chris can be seen, second from the left, in the background.
He smilingly calls this picture ‘the Kind and I’ nowadays and explains he was quite young, and had earned the money to attend the course on the Hawkesbury.

This proof of King Charles in photographic form while still young himself, along with anecdotal recalled by former Pittwater MP Rob Stokes of Prince Charles staying with a Minister of the Church at Newport during his holidays, will be welcome news to Peter Bodman who set the news service the task of finding out more in October 2020. 

Peter recalled his decades of holidaying at The Basin during the 1940’s, 50’s and 60’s and of rumours Prince Charles was staying in the cottage there and had been seen 'mucking about in boats on the estuary' at the same time... or spotted just enjoying being here.

How very Pittwaterian of this future king!

With Peter’s recall, and Chris and Rob’s proof, it seems our King most certainly did spend time in the best part of Australia, decades before his second visit to Pittwater in January 1988, 22 years later.

Prince Charles, The Prince of Wales, in Sydney. Date taken: 25 May 1966

Most of the future king's education was in British boarding schools, but in 1966 he was sent to Timbertop, a campus in rural Victoria.

During the school holiday break he visited Sydney after having spent time in Papua New Guinea in the first half of May 1966.

Prince Charles, now King Charles III, made his 16th trip to Australia in 2012 with Camilla, Queen Consort to mark the Queens Diamond Jubilee, taking in Tasmania, Victoria, New South Wales and the Australian Capital Territory. 

He returned in 2015 and again in 2018, this time the Royal Tour was to open the Gold Coast Commonwealth Games.  HM also visited Bundaberg to celebrate Prince’s Trust Australia’s Low Glow campaign with Greenfleet and Disney ANZ, and convened His Trust’s Great Barrier Reef roundtable on Lady Elliot Island with the Great Barrier Reef Foundation.


Prince Charles and Princess Diana at Bayview wharf on January 31st 1988, courtesy Brian Friend OAM, formerly Pittwater Water Police. Photo: Brian Friend OAM

In the Spring of 2024 King Charles III and Queen Camilla visited Australia again. 

“What a great joy it is to come to Australia for the first time as Sovereign, and to renew a love of this country and its people which I have cherished for so long.” - King Charles III

NSW Premier Chris Minns invited members of the public to join Their Majesties at the Sydney Opera House on Tuesday, 22 October, which will be followed by with an impressive Fleet Review and fly past by the Australian Defence Force on Sydney Harbour.

Members of the public were invited to the Sydney Opera House Forecourt for the special event and the chance to meet The King and Queen. 

The afternoon event [at 4.20pm] was followed by a Fleet Review on Sydney Harbour including an Australian Defence Force fly-over. Their Majesties, accompanied by the Governor-General, Chief of the Defence Force and Chief of Navy, conducted a review of His Majesty’s Australian Ships Hobart, Warramunga, Arunta, Gascoyne, and Yarra, which were anchored in the Harbour.

A Royal Fleet Review was also part of the experience for the first Royal visitor to Australia, Prince Alfred in 1868

The Royal Prince Alfred Yacht Club was named for this first member of the Royal family to visit Australia, when the club members still sailed on Sydney Harbour and to Pittwater. Foundation members formed up on their yachts on the harbour to greet the visitor as he sailed in.

However, King Charles and Queen Camilla didn't make it to Pittwater last Spring - the furthest north they went was to attend a Sunday Service at St Thomas' Anglican Church in North Sydney. 

Later that morning, The King visited New South Wales Parliament House where he made a speech to mark the bicentenary of the NSW Legislative Council.


King Charles III founded the youth charity The Prince's Trust in 1976, sponsors The Prince's Charities, and is a patron, president, or a member of over 400 other charities and organisations. 

He has advocated for the conservation of historic buildings and the importance of architecture in society. A critic of modernist architecture, Charles has worked on the creation of Poundbury, an experimental new town based on his architectural tastes. He is also an author or co-author of a number of books.

An environmentalist his whole life, he has supported organic farming and action to prevent climate change as the manager of the Duchy of Cornwall estates, which has earned him awards and recognition from environmental groups.

And that's just a shortlist of works accomplished.

HUGE thanks to Chris Hendrikson for sharing his 'King and I on the Hawkesbury' photo - I'm sure this has brought back a lot of fond memories for many of us - even those who only met King Charles for the first time late last year.

The photo is the Whale Beach Kiosk and beer garden in 1948. From Henrikson Family Albums.

More in:

Many Whale Beach people of today would know Chris Hendrikson (Hendo), who grew up, literally, on W

Seniors set for laughs during free NSW Seniors Festival Comedy Shows

Nine comedy geniuses will take to the stage for the NSW Seniors Festival Comedy Shows this March to entertain seniors in Sydney and Port Stephens.

The free events will deliver a day of laughs as comedians Bec Melrose, Rebecca De Unamuno, Simon Kennedy, Gary Eck, Anisa Nandaula, Mat Wakefield, Laura Hughes, Peter Berner, and Tommy Dean show off their talents at the Seniors Festival Comedy Shows.

Emcee Andrew Barnett, will host the fun-filled events at:
  • Sydney Town Hall on Tuesday 4 March at 11am
  • Soldiers Point Hall in Port Stephens on Thursday 6 March at 10:30am and 1:30pm
Tickets will be available from Tuesday 11 February at 9am at www.nsw.gov.au/nsw-seniors-festival-comedy-show.

Sydney 
When: Tuesday, 4 March 2025
Time: 11:00am
Where: Sydney Town Hall 

The line-up includes: MC - Andrew Barnett, Bec Melrose, Rebecca De Unamuno, Simon Kennedy, Gary Eck, Anisa Nandaula, Tommy Dean

The annual NSW Seniors Festival takes place from 3 to 16 March. The festival is the largest of its kind in the southern hemisphere, with more than 500,000 people participating in events held across NSW.

Highlights of the festival include the Expo with a range of activities and stalls for seniors to engage in, as well as the free Premier’s Gala Concerts, both of which will be held at Sydney’s International Convention Centre on Wednesday 12 and Thursday 13 March.

For tickets to these events and to keep up to date with everything happening at the NSW Seniors Festival, visit www.nsw.gov.au/arts-and-culture/seniors-festival.

Minister for Seniors Jodie Harrison said:
“It’s fantastic to see the comedy shows being held again – they always draw a great crowd and leave seniors in stitches.

“These events offer our seniors the opportunity to enjoy time out with friends, while watching comedians they know or discover new ones. It’s a popular event that helps keep seniors connected and feeling included. I’m looking forward to seeing them enjoy the shows.

“This is the NSW Government’s way of saying thank you for all the valuable contributions our older generation has made and continues to make to society. I encourage seniors to get their free tickets and attend these great shows in Sydney and Port Stephens.”

AvPals Term 1 2025


Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps Seniors learn and improve their computer skills. It is a not for profit organisation run by volunteers. 


Started in 2000 it now has 20+ trainers and many hundreds of students. At a really low cost (about $50 a school term) they can provide one-to-one training on most matters connected with computing and related technologies like mobile phones and digital cameras. From the smallest problem (how to hold the mouse!) to much more serious matters, there is a trainer who can help.

We offer “one to one” personal tuition or special short courses in the training rooms under the Catholic Church in Avalon. Training is conducted Monday to Friday from 9am to 4pm. For more information visit AVPALS web site www.avpals.com or phone 02 8064 3574

Keep up to date on our Facebook page

Find out more at: www.avpals.com

Improved service standards for superannuation a welcome move

January 28 2025
The introduction of mandatory and enforceable service standards for superannuation funds will help improve the quality of service people are getting from the moment they open a super account right through to their retirement phase, COTA Australia says.

The Federal Government today announced that it aims to raise the bar for member service in superannuation by introducing mandatory and enforceable service standards for all large APRA-regulated superannuation funds.

COTA Australia – the leading advocacy organisation for older people – Chief Executive Officer, Patricia Sparrow, said the Federal Government’s announcement is an important, and long overdue, step towards improving member outcomes.

“There’s no question that the standard of service older Australians, and indeed Australians of all ages, are receiving can be significantly improved,” Ms Sparrow said.

“People deserve high quality customer service from the moment they first engage with superannuation right through to their retirement phase, but we hear reports all too regularly about that simply not happening.

“As our population ages, we need to be looking at measures that ensure that people can live the dignified life in retirement that they deserve to. Super funds need to ensure they are communicating clearly and in a timely way with their members all the time, to assist in planning and preparing for retirement.

Ms Sparrow said improving outcomes during vulnerable and difficult moments in people’s lives is especially important.

“Compassionate, clear, high-quality service is really the least we should expect from our superannuation funds every day but especially during our most vulnerable moments such as when we’re waiting for the timely payment of death benefits,” Ms Sparrow said.

“While some funds have made improvements it’s no secret that the customer experience has been left wanting for a long time. It’s good to see action finally being taken to address the problem and improve the service people receive.”

“COTA Australia looks forward to contributing to the consultation and ensuring the voices of older Australians are heard throughout the process.”

Restless legs syndrome is incurable – here’s how to manage the symptoms

Andrey_Popov/Shutterstock
Adam TaylorLancaster University

Restless legs syndrome (RLS), also known as Willis-Ekbom Disease, is a neurological condition that affects about 7% of people.

Typical symptoms include an irresistible urge to move your legs, alongside sensations of aching, crawling, creeping, itching, pulling or throbbing. Until the age of 35, the condition is equally common in men and women, but after that age, RLS affects twice the number of women than men.

Each person’s condition is categorised as mild, moderate, severe or very severe according to the international rating scale, which measures the effects of RLS on limb discomfort and sleep disruption, as well as frequency of symptoms.

RLS symptoms have a 24-hour cycle known as a circadian rhythm. Symptoms tend to peak at night, coinciding with the body’s increase in melatonin release. Melatonin reduces dopamine – the brain chemical that affects movement and mood – to help us sleep but, because dopamine helps control muscles, low dopamine levels can cause involuntary movements.

There is no test for RLS. Diagnosis is based on symptoms and medical history. Primary RLS runs in families – there are genetic links to a number of chromosomes. RLS has an autosomal dominant inheritance pattern, meaning you only need one “defective” copy to present with symptoms. Some cases, however, develop with no known cause.

Other people may develop “secondary” RLS as a result of other conditions, such as iron deficiency anaemiachronic kidney diseasediabetesParkinson’s diseaserheumatoid arthritisunderactive thyroid gland, and fibromyalgia. While primary RLS is more common than secondary, the latter is usually more severe and progresses more rapidly.

Risk factors

Age seems to be a risk factor for RLS. In 2000, a study found that 10% of adults aged 30 to 79 have RLS, increasing to 19% of those over the age of 80. However, understanding of the condition has improved since that study was conducted, so it’s likely these figures are higher – particularly in children, where some RLS symptoms have been confused with “growing pains” or ADHD in the past.

Women have an increased chance of developing RLS. Approximately one in five women will suffer from restless legs at some point, and some studies suggest as many as one in three women are affected. Women are more likely to suffer from other comorbidities that affect the central nervous system, such as anxiety, depression and migraine, which may be linked to the development of RLS.

Pregnancy is another risk factor. The further you are through the trimesters, the higher your chance of being affected BY RLS – with 8%, 16% and 22% of women suffering through their respective first, second and third trimesters. Multiple pregnancies increase the risk of pregnancy-related RLS, and research has found that women who’ve given birth may have a higher incidence of RLS in later life, compared with women of the same age who haven’t given birth.

Obesity is also considered a risk factor for RLS. One study showed that each 5kg/m² increase in body mass index increased the likelihood of developing RLS by 31%.

Triggers and treatments

Research has shown smoking and alcohol consumption seem to make RLS worse, so lifestyle changes such as stopping smoking and drinking alcohol can help manage symptoms.

Research has also found that exercise and stretching is beneficial for symptom relief or reduction – although study participants suggest that morning exercise is more effective for improving symptoms, while evening exercise can make restless legs worse. Patients with secondary forms of RLS, lower BMI and less severe cases of the condition may benefit the most from lifestyle changes to manage symptoms.

Also, treatment of underlying issues can also alleviate or reduce some of the symptoms. For instance, iron deficiency anaemia reduces dopamine levels, which can lead to restless legs. Iron supplements may benefit some sufferers – but the evidence is mixed so supplements won’t help everyone.

In terms of medication, research has found that neurological therapies, such as the anticonvulsant Gabapentin – usually prescribed as a treatment for epilepsy – can improve symptoms and overall quality of life for those suffering with restless legs. These therapies target nerve cells in the brain, reducing their activity.

Other medicines – known as dopamine agonists – activate dopamine receptors in the brain to control movement. They are primarily used as a treatment for Parkinson’s disease and are effective in managing symptoms of RLS. However, they can disturb your sleep pattern and may increase impulse control disorders, and are not recommended during pregnancy or breastfeeding as they can inhibit lactation.

While there may not be a cure for RLS, there is hope for sufferers – and options for managing and reducing symptoms.The Conversation

Adam Taylor, Professor of Anatomy, Lancaster University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Bacteria in your mouth may hold clues to your brain health and dementia risk – new study

Joanna L'HeureuxUniversity of Exeter

Could the bacteria in your mouth predict whether you are at risk of dementia? Emerging research suggests that the bacteria living on your tongue and gums may affect how the brain works and how it changes as we age. In turn, this could affect whether someone ages normally or develops dementia.

Scientists are uncovering surprising connections between the oral microbiome, which is the bustling ecosystem of bacteria in our mouths, and brain health. A new study my colleagues and I conducted suggests that certain bacteria may help memory and thinking skills, while others could be early warning signs of a decline in brain function.

This raises the possibility that diet and treatments that change our oral bacteria could one day play a role in helping to preserve brain health as we age.

For our investigation, we analysed saliva samples from 115 adults over 50 years old. Among these people, 52% had healthy brain function, and the other 48% had early signs of decline in memory and other brain functions.

We examined the bacteria in these samples and showed that people who had large numbers of two groups of bacteria called Neisseria and Haemophilus performed better in brain health tests. In particular, people with these bacteria had better memory, and better ability to pay attention and perform complex tasks.

These people also had higher levels of the ion nitrite in their mouths. Nitrite is made by bacteria when they break down nitrate, which is a natural part of a vegetable-rich diet.

Bacteria can also break down nitrite to produce nitric oxide, which improves circulation, including blood flow to the brain. This suggests that eating lots of nitrate-rich vegetables, such as leafy green spinach and rocket, could boost levels of healthy bacteria and help improve brain health, which might be especially important as people age.

We are now investigating whether nitrate-rich beetroot juice can improve brain function in older adults by hijacking bacteria in the mouth.

On the other hand, a different group of bacteria may be causing more harm than good. Our study found two groups of bacteria that are potentially linked to worse brain health.

One group called Porphyromonas, which is often associated with gum disease, was more common in people with memory problems than people who were healthy.

A second group called Prevotella was linked to low nitrite, which in turn could mean poorer brain health. Prevotella was also more common in people who carry the gene APOE4, which is associated with an increased risk of Alzheimer’s.

These findings suggest that some bacteria might play a detrimental role in changes in brain health as people age. It also raises the question of whether routine tests to measure levels of these bacteria could be used to detect very early signs of declining brain health as part of dental checkups in the future.

Profound implications

The implications of this research are profound. If certain bacteria support brain health while others contribute to decline, then treatments to change the balance of bacteria in the mouth could be part of a solution to prevent dementia.

Encouraging the growth of nitrite-producing bacteria like Neisseria, while reducing Prevotella and Porphyromonas, could help maintain brain function as we age. This could be achieved through dietary changes, probiotics, oral hygiene routines, or even targeted treatments that reshape the microbiome.

While we’re still in the early stages of understanding the intricate links between the mouth bacteria and the brain, our findings provide a strong rationale for further research.

If future studies confirm that the oral microbiome plays a role in maintaining a healthy brain, then by paying closer attention to the bacteria in our mouths we may unlock new possibilities for detecting and potentially delaying dementia.

In the meantime, the best advice is to keep your teeth clean, see the dentist regularly and eat food with lots of nitrate, like leafy green vegetables, to keep feeding the good bacteria in your mouth.The Conversation

Joanna L'Heureux, Postdoctoral Researcher, Public Health and Sport Sciences, University of Exeter

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

More Nurses: Removing Red Tape for Record Numbers of Nurses Moving to Australia

The Australian government announced on January 27 2025 A record number of nurses are joining the Australian health workforce from overseas, with 16,622 internationally qualified nurses registering to practise here in the past financial year – three times more than the 5,610 nurses that joined in the final year before COVID (2018/19).
 
Of the 27,810 nurses that registered to practise in Australia from overseas in the past two years, 70 per cent have come via New Zealand under a Trans-Tasman agreement, the government stated.
 
Sixteen per cent, or 4,476 nurses, have qualifications from a group of comparable countries that includes Canada, Ireland, Singapore, Spain, the United Kingdom and United States of America.
 
''Starting in March 2025, Australia’s health workforce is set to receive a major boost by ensuring that internationally qualified nurses from these comparable countries are fast-tracked to register and work in Australia, instead of spending months tied up in needless red tape while waiting for their application to be approved.'' the statement reads
 
''As a result of these changes, assessment and registration will be streamlined, with the time reduced by up to 6-12 months.''
 
Nurses with relevant qualifications and experience in these comparable countries will no longer need to sit additional examinations or upgrade qualifications in order to gain registration.
 
The new standard will apply to internationally qualified registered nurses who have practised for at least 1,800 hours since 2017 in comparable countries including Ireland, Singapore, Spain, the United Kingdom, the United States of America, and the Canadian provinces of British Columbia and Ontario.
 
To ensure that high standards of patient safety and quality of care are maintained, all internationally qualified registered nurses must still meet the same regulatory requirements as Australian-trained nurses when applying for registration. 
 
The new registration process supports implementation of the Kruk Review, which recommended changes to make it simpler, quicker and cheaper for internationally qualified health practitioners to work in Australia.
 
In the 2024-25 Budget, the Albanese Government allocated $90 million to implement the recommendations of the Kruk Review to grow and support the nation’s health workforce.
 
This reform represents a collaborative effort between the Nursing and Midwifery Board of Australia, the Australian Health Practitioner Regulation Agency, and all Australian governments to address unprecedented workforce shortages while maintaining Australia’s rigorous safety and quality standards for healthcare.
 
A fast-track pathway for general practitioners from New Zealand, the UK and Ireland began in October 2024. Since then, AHPRA has been receiving an average of around 11 applications a week from GPs looking to join the Australian health system. Similar pathways for other specialist medical practitioners will get underway this year.
 
Health Minister, The Hon. Mark Butler stated:
 
“For too long highly-educated nurses with experience from countries like the UK, Canada and Ireland are left waiting on red tape approvals before they are able to work in our hospitals, aged care facilities and general practices.
 
“From March, internationally qualified registered nurses who have practised for at least 1,800 hours in these comparable countries will be fast-tracked, cutting the application time by up to 6-12 months, in some cases.
 
“Australian patients will ultimately benefit from these changes, since these highly educated nurses can start working and providing care to Australians sooner, without waiting needlessly on red tape.”
 
Assistant Minister for Health and Aged Care Ged Kearney said:
 
“As a former nurse, I know all too well that Australia’s healthcare system is powered by the sweat, hearts and expertise of nurses.
 
“Streamlining the application process for the thousands of highly experienced nurses from comparable countries overseas will go a long way to ensuring Australians can get the best quality care, soonest.
 
“Combined with the many scholarships, placements and other programs the Australian Government provides to support our home-grown nurses, this will improve the availability of nurses in health settings around the country.”

$18.4 million to support nursing students with clinical placements in aged care

The Australian Government announced on January 30 2025 it is investing $18.4 million to support thousands of nursing students through the Aged Care Nursing Clinical Placements Program.

This funding will support up to 8,000 nursing students to develop practical skills in the care of older people to manage their unique clinical care needs.
 
The program provides students an opportunity to experience the benefits of working in the care and support sector early in their career with the aim of increasing the supply of skilled and dedicated nurses in aged care.
 
The program is available to Bachelor of Nursing and Master of Nursing students and is now also open to Diploma of Nursing students, allowing more students to gain practical skills.
 
Students are supported by trained clinical facilitators and have access to an online resource hub throughout their placement.  These dedicated resources enable students to further enhance their skills in gerontological care.
 
The following organisations are being funded to deliver this program nationally until 30 June 2027:
  • Australian Primary Health Care Nurses Association (APNA)
  • Pop-Up Health
  • University of Canberra
  • Hunter Primary Care
  • Brightwater Care Group

Aged care clinical placements available to nursing students

February 6, 2025
High-quality clinical placements in the aged care sector are now available to nursing students through the Aged Care Nursing Clinical Placements Program.

The Aged Care Nursing Clinical Placements Program provides nursing students with high-quality clinical placements in aged care. 

The program:
  • enables students to meet their clinical placement requirement
  • gives students the opportunity to experience working in aged care early in their career.
Trained clinical facilitators provide specialist support to students in the program. 

Free online resources and tools are also available for students, workers and providers on the Aged Care Knowledge Hub.

The program runs until June 2027. 

Avalon Beach SLSC turns 100 in 2025!

2025 marks 100 years of Avalon Beach Surf Lifesaving Club.

Planning is underway to celebrate the achievement of Avalon Beach SLSC's Volunteer Surf Lifesavers keeping Avalon Beach safe for residents and visitors for 100 years!

A number of celebratory events and activities spread throughout the Club's 100th year, are currently under development, and will be progressively announced through the year. 

The range of celebrations will involve past and present members, the Avalon Beach community, as well as visitors to our area.  The Surf Club is a focal point in and for the Avalon Beach community, so it is fitting that the community takes pride in this milestone.

Initially, so that our records are up to date, we invite all past members of our Club to Email the Club at 100years@avalonbeachslsc.com.au  with your updated details so we can keep you informed of what will be happening for members.

If you know of others that may be interested in the 100th Anniversary celebrations please pass the message on. 

The Club looks to the future, acknowledging and building on the legacy left from those who came before us over the past 100 years.

Avalon Beach SLSC Centenary Committee

Sweeping reform of the electoral laws puts democracy at risk. They shouldn’t be changed on a whim

Joshua BlackAustralian National University

The Albanese government is trying once more to legislate wide-ranging changes to the way federal elections are administered.

The 200-page Electoral Reform Bill, if passed, would transform the electoral donation rules by imposing donation and spending caps, increasing public funding, and improving transparency.

As noble as it sounds, the bill in its current form would undermine Australian democracy by favouring established parties over independent candidates and other new players.

Competitive disadvantage

The proposed donation caps are a case in point.

Donors could give A$20,000 per year, per recipient, to a branch of a party or candidate for electioneering purposes. In practice, that means donors could give no more than $20,000 per year to an independent but could contribute $180,000 to the Labor Party via each of its state and federal branches, or $160,000 to the Liberal Party (which has one less branch than the ALP).

The donation cap would reset annually and after each federal election, allowing a single donor to give $720,000 to the Labor Party in one election cycle or $640,000 to the Liberals, but no more than $20,000 to an independent who declares their candidacy in the year of an election.

Avoiding the American road

There are welcome components in the bill. Faster disclosure and lower donation thresholds would make the system more transparent. Given the large amount of undisclosed funding – “dark money ” – currently propping up political parties, this would be a significant improvement.

But democracy is not cheap.

Last year, the Financial Times reported Donald Trump and Kamala Harris spent a combined US$3.5 billion (A$5.6 billion) on their presidential races. This kind of money helps to sustain an American two-party system largely immune to challengers.

Australian campaigns look nothing like this, but there has been increased interest in the money spent in particular seats in recent years.

Former Labor minister Kim Carr revealed in his recent book Labor spent $1 million to defeat the Greens in the Melbourne electorate of Batman in 2018, while the LNP reportedly spent $600,000 campaigning to retain the affluent electorate of Fadden in 2023.

The bill before Parliament would cap election spending at $800,000 in each lower house seat. But the major parties could promote their generic party brand or a frontbench MP (in a seat other than their own) without affecting their capped spending.

These unfair discrepancies would reward the major parties while kneecapping independents whose first hurdle is to get their name “out there”.

Haunted by billionaires

The government argues its bill limits the influence of “big money” in politics, namely mining boss Clive Palmer, who spent $117 million at the last election.

For the Coalition, it is the community independents and their Climate 200 supporters who represent a kind of money “without precedent in the Australian political system” according to departing MP Paul Fletcher.

Rather than getting big money out of politics, this bill would make the major parties’ own funding pipelines the only money that matters.

The bill recognises “nominated entities” whose payments to associated political parties would not be limited by donation caps. Independents would not have this privilege.

Meanwhile, the long delay before the commencement of the bill in 2026 would give wealthy donors time to get their ducks in order. They could amass their own war chests before the new laws are due to come in to force and then register them as nominated entities at a later date.

Who pays? The taxpayer, of course!

Parties and candidates with more than 4% of the primary vote currently receive public election funding. The Hawke government introduced this measure as a “small insurance” against corruption.

The bill would raise the return to $5 per vote, which would mean an extra $41 million in funding, on top of the $71 million handed over after the 2022 election. Most of this money would go to the major parties.

The windfall would come with no extra guardrails or guidelines about how those funds could be spent. There are no laws to guarantee truth in political advertising at the federal level. Voters may well be paying for more political advertising that lies to them.

Closed consultations

Labor’s current strategy is to seek Coalition support for these changes to the rules of democracy.

Special Minister of State Don Farrell claims to have consulted widely on the design of the bill, but that came as news to independents David Pocock and Kate Chaney when asked about it last week.

The government’s haste and secrecy suggest it wants neither the bill nor its motives closely scrutinised.

Australians care about the quality of their democracy. Polling research by the Australia Institute last November showed four in five Australians expect electoral changes to be reviewed by a multi-party committee.

That’s what is needed for this bill. To do otherwise would threaten the integrity of Australian elections – or invite a High Court challenge that may overturn the entire system if the court rules freedom of political expression is at stake.

Democracy matters. The rules must not be changed on a whim.The Conversation

Joshua Black, Visitor, School of History, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Is this 2025, or 1965? Grammy wins for the Beatles and the Rolling Stones keep the rock canon in the past

Charlotte MarkowitschRMIT University

History has repeated in the rock category at this week’s 67th Grammy Awards. Best rock performance was awarded to the Beatles for their song Now and Then, while the Rolling Stones took home best rock album for Hackney Diamonds.

The Beatles’ track, finished and released by the fab four’s remaining members with the assistance of artificial intelligence, has been recognised by the Recording Academy 55 years after the band broke up. This comes as their eighth Grammy win and 27th nomination since their 1962 debut.

The Beatles’ long time rivals, the Rolling Stones, have received many accolades over their six decade career, including five Grammys. Their 24th studio album includes cameos from other legacy artists like Elton John and Stevie Wonder.

These victories are historic – but they also reveal a broader truth about rock music’s biggest institutions. The same artists who defined the genre decades ago continue to dominate its highest honours, leaving little space for contemporary acts to break through.

The new wave

The past year has seen a resurgence in rock. Streaming services and radio have reflected a rise in the popularity of the genre and reunions of rock’s most popular bands are making headlines.

This renewed enthusiasm toward rock has brought newcomers to the genre, including an emergence of new popular talent.

Newer rock talent was present at the Grammys, with St Vincent (who broke out in 2006) winning Best rock song and Fontaines D.C. receiving their first best rock album nomination since their debut in 2014.

Both of these artists have been recognised for breathing new life into the rock genre. With a willingness to confront discomfort and vulnerability coupled with distinctive guitar work and production choices, St. Vincent has been positioned as a trailblazer in modern rock.

Fontaines D.C’s nominated album Romance has been praised by critics for its energetic embrace of a diverse musical palette with compelling lyrics, a sound which has grabbed the attention of those outside and within the rock audience.

But they were up against a nominee pool largely composed of long career legacy acts such as Green Day, Pearl Jam, Jack White and the Black Crowes, who all broke out in the last millennium.

Along with the Beatles’ and the Rolling Stones’ wins, this reflects a trend in rock’s institutional recognition, where industry awards, hall of fame inductions, and media retrospectives continue to reaffirm the same monumental figures – often to the exclusion of artists shaping rock today. This phenomenon is a symptom of the rock canon, otherwise known as “the best of all time”.

The old canon

The rock canon is a set of artists, albums and songs that have been collectively deemed as the genre’s greatest.

This canon was solidified by the late 1960s and 1970s and is sustained predominantly by media outlets and awards organisations like the Grammys. Publications that rank “the best” also help shape the rock canon by repeatedly spotlighting the same classic albums and artists.

To be considered “the best” in rock, artists typically need to meet an (often unwritten) criteria of long-term critical acclaim, commercial success and influence on future generations. Artists like the Beatles and the Rolling Stones meet this criteria, frequently appearing in the top ranks of “best of” lists and maintaining their position at the top of the rock hierarchy.

But the Grammy wins for the Beatles and the Rolling Stones raise concerns about how rigid this canon remains. Artists who enter the rock canon rarely leave it, making it difficult for newcomers to garner the same levels of critical and commercial success. It has also been criticised for its preferential treatment towards whiteness and masculinity.

If the canon represents the highest levels of artistic quality in rock, its inability to change poses concerns for the future of the genre.

Australia has not remained untouched by these issues. While the Grammys are an American institution, the rock canon’s influence extends globally.

Australian institutions such as Triple J’s Hottest 100 of All Time have demonstrated this influence, showing us that the canon plays a role in shaping Australian music culture. Artists like the Beatles, the Rolling Stones and Led Zeppelin often appear on these lists, voted on by Australian listeners. Local audiences overwhelmingly favour a more standard, mainstream canon of older international rock acts over our own Australian talent.

The preference towards artists who have long been in the canon in today’s “best of” lists makes it harder for local artists – particularly those from marginalised backgrounds – to gain widespread recognition.

Crafting a vital genre

The Grammy success of the Beatles and the Rolling Stones reflects both the strength and the stagnation of rock’s institutional gate-keeping.

On one hand, these wins celebrate artists whose influence has endured for generations. On the other, they reveal how difficult it is for new acts to gain recognition when institutions continue looking backward rather than forward.

As rock continues its resurgence, the vitality of the genre may rely on expanding a more inclusive definition of greatness: one that makes room for innovation and diversity, not just nostalgia.

Will future Grammy ceremonies still be awarding the Beatles and the Rolling Stones, or will we finally see rock’s institutions evolve?The Conversation

Charlotte Markowitsch, PhD Candidate in Popular Music Studies, RMIT University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Reading Whistler’s Nocturne in Blue and Gold – Old Battersea Bridge as a piece of music

Nocturne in Blue and Gold – Old Battersea Bridge by James Abbott McNeill Whistler (1872-5). Tate/CanvaCC BY-SA
Frances FowleUniversity of Edinburgh

In 1877 the American artist James McNeill Whistler (1834-1903) achieved notoriety when he exhibited his recent views of the river Thames at the Grosvenor Gallery in London. He gave his paintings musical titles: Nocturne in Black and Gold – The Falling Rocket (1875) and Nocturne in Blue and Gold – Old Battersea Bridge (circa 1872-5).

The view of Battersea Bridge includes Chelsea Church and the then newly constructed Albert Bridge. The lights of Cremorne Pleasure Gardens twinkle in the distance, while fireworks explode in the pale sky above.

The painting is remarkable for its intense, light blue tonality suggestive of evening, the time of day sometimes known as “the blue hour”. Painting from memory, Whistler thinned his paint with copal (a tree resin), turpentine and linseed oil. This created what he called a “sauce”, which he applied in thin, transparent layers, wiping it away until he was satisfied. He left areas of the dark preparatory layer unpainted to create the illusion of the bridge. Inspired by Japanese woodblock prints, he exaggerated its height.


This article is part of Rethinking the Classics. The stories in this series offer insightful new ways to think about and interpret classic books, films and artworks. This is the canon – with a twist.


All this was lost on the critics, however. The author Oscar Wilde reviewed the exhibition and wrote that the Battersea Bridge Nocturne was “worth looking at for about as long as one looks at a real rocket, that is, for somewhat less than a quarter of a minute”.

A few years earlier Whistler had exhibited another view of the Thames, Nocturne: Blue and Silver – Chelsea (1871), at the Dudley Gallery in London. The critic for The Times summed up Whistler’s intention, observing that the painting was:

So closely akin to music that the colours of the one may and should be used, like the ordered sounds of the other; that painting should not aim at expressing dramatic emotions, depicting incidents of history or recording facts of nature, but should be content with moulding our moods and stirring our imaginations, by subtle combinations of colour.

Self portrait of Whistler in artist's clothing and beret holding paint brushes
Arrangement in Gray: Portrait of the Painter by Whistler (1872). Detroit Institute of Arts

Whistler’s paintings were first compared to music as early as 1863 when the French critic Paul Manz described his haunting portrait, The White Girl (1872), as a “symphony in white”. Whistler adopted the title retrospectively, creating a series of three aesthetic mood paintings or “symphonies”, featuring young women in flowing white dresses.

Press and public alike were puzzled by the artist’s insistence that his paintings lacked any specific narrative or moral message.

When he witnessed the abstraction of Whistler’s latest Nocturnes at the Grosvenor Gallery, the leading English art critic John Ruskin published a venomous review. “I have seen, and heard much of Cockney impudence before now,” he wrote, “but never expected to hear a coxcomb ask 200 guineas for flinging a pot of paint in the public’s face.”

Whistler’s retort

Whistler sued Ruskin for libel and used the ensuing two-day trial to defend his views on art. He referred to his paintings throughout proceedings in musical terms, as “arrangements”, “symphonies” or “nocturnes”. When asked what the Battersea Bridge painting was intended to represent, he replied:

I did not intend it to be a ‘correct’ portrait of the bridge. It is only a moonlight scene … As to what the picture represents, that depends upon who looks at it. To some persons it may represent all that is intended; to others it may represent nothing.

Whistler won the court case, but was awarded only a farthing in damages, resulting in his bankruptcy. Undaunted, the following year (1878) he published The Red Rag, in which he articulated his aesthetic theory:

Art should be independent of all clap-trap – should stand alone, and appeal to the artistic sense of eye or ear, without confounding this with emotions entirely foreign to it, as devotion, pity, love, patriotism, and the like. All these have no kind of concern with it, and that is why I insist on calling my works “arrangements” and “harmonies”.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


In 1885 he delivered his, now famous, 10 o’clock Lecture. In it reiterated his aesthetic theory. “Nature,” he wrote, “contains the elements, in colour and form, of all pictures, as the keyboard contains the notes of all music”. He urged artists not to copy nature slavishly, as Ruskin had recommended, but to approach it more like a musician, waiting for that moment when:

The evening mist clothes the riverside with poetry, as with a veil, and the poor buildings lose themselves in the dim sky, and the tall chimneys become campanili and the warehouses are palaces in the night, and the whole city hangs in the heavens, and fairy-land is before us.

It is then, he argued, that nature “sings her exquisite song to the artist alone”.

Beyond the canon

As part of the Rethinking the Classics series, we’re asking our experts to recommend a book or artwork that tackles similar themes to the canonical work in question, but isn’t (yet) considered a classic itself. Here is Frances Fowles’ suggestion:

Whistler was not the only artist of this period to view his art as the equivalent of music. His work anticipated symbolism, a literary and artistic movement that rejected naturalistic representation in favour of more abstract concerns, such as the connections between words, colours and musical notes.

Black and white photo of a man and a colourful painting of abstract shapes.
Mikalojus Čiurlionis and his 1908 painting, Stellar Sonata. Wiki Commons

The relationship between colour, rhythm and sound was central to the work of French artist Paul Signac (1863-1935), who worked in a pointillist technique (applying dots of colour), and assigned his paintings opus numbers and tempos. The Lithuanian painter and composer Mikalojus Čiurlionis (1875-1911), too, fused music and colour and gave his artworks musical titles.The Conversation

Frances Fowle, Personal Chair of Nineteenth-Century Art, History of Art, University of Edinburgh

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Sweeping reform of the electoral laws puts democracy at risk. They shouldn’t be changed on a whim

Joshua BlackAustralian National University

The Albanese government is trying once more to legislate wide-ranging changes to the way federal elections are administered.

The 200-page Electoral Reform Bill, if passed, would transform the electoral donation rules by imposing donation and spending caps, increasing public funding, and improving transparency.

As noble as it sounds, the bill in its current form would undermine Australian democracy by favouring established parties over independent candidates and other new players.

Competitive disadvantage

The proposed donation caps are a case in point.

Donors could give A$20,000 per year, per recipient, to a branch of a party or candidate for electioneering purposes. In practice, that means donors could give no more than $20,000 per year to an independent but could contribute $180,000 to the Labor Party via each of its state and federal branches, or $160,000 to the Liberal Party (which has one less branch than the ALP).

The donation cap would reset annually and after each federal election, allowing a single donor to give $720,000 to the Labor Party in one election cycle or $640,000 to the Liberals, but no more than $20,000 to an independent who declares their candidacy in the year of an election.

Avoiding the American road

There are welcome components in the bill. Faster disclosure and lower donation thresholds would make the system more transparent. Given the large amount of undisclosed funding – “dark money ” – currently propping up political parties, this would be a significant improvement.

But democracy is not cheap.

Last year, the Financial Times reported Donald Trump and Kamala Harris spent a combined US$3.5 billion (A$5.6 billion) on their presidential races. This kind of money helps to sustain an American two-party system largely immune to challengers.

Australian campaigns look nothing like this, but there has been increased interest in the money spent in particular seats in recent years.

Former Labor minister Kim Carr revealed in his recent book Labor spent $1 million to defeat the Greens in the Melbourne electorate of Batman in 2018, while the LNP reportedly spent $600,000 campaigning to retain the affluent electorate of Fadden in 2023.

The bill before Parliament would cap election spending at $800,000 in each lower house seat. But the major parties could promote their generic party brand or a frontbench MP (in a seat other than their own) without affecting their capped spending.

These unfair discrepancies would reward the major parties while kneecapping independents whose first hurdle is to get their name “out there”.

Haunted by billionaires

The government argues its bill limits the influence of “big money” in politics, namely mining boss Clive Palmer, who spent $117 million at the last election.

For the Coalition, it is the community independents and their Climate 200 supporters who represent a kind of money “without precedent in the Australian political system” according to departing MP Paul Fletcher.

Rather than getting big money out of politics, this bill would make the major parties’ own funding pipelines the only money that matters.

The bill recognises “nominated entities” whose payments to associated political parties would not be limited by donation caps. Independents would not have this privilege.

Meanwhile, the long delay before the commencement of the bill in 2026 would give wealthy donors time to get their ducks in order. They could amass their own war chests before the new laws are due to come in to force and then register them as nominated entities at a later date.

Who pays? The taxpayer, of course!

Parties and candidates with more than 4% of the primary vote currently receive public election funding. The Hawke government introduced this measure as a “small insurance” against corruption.

The bill would raise the return to $5 per vote, which would mean an extra $41 million in funding, on top of the $71 million handed over after the 2022 election. Most of this money would go to the major parties.

The windfall would come with no extra guardrails or guidelines about how those funds could be spent. There are no laws to guarantee truth in political advertising at the federal level. Voters may well be paying for more political advertising that lies to them.

Closed consultations

Labor’s current strategy is to seek Coalition support for these changes to the rules of democracy.

Special Minister of State Don Farrell claims to have consulted widely on the design of the bill, but that came as news to independents David Pocock and Kate Chaney when asked about it last week.

The government’s haste and secrecy suggest it wants neither the bill nor its motives closely scrutinised.

Australians care about the quality of their democracy. Polling research by the Australia Institute last November showed four in five Australians expect electoral changes to be reviewed by a multi-party committee.

That’s what is needed for this bill. To do otherwise would threaten the integrity of Australian elections – or invite a High Court challenge that may overturn the entire system if the court rules freedom of political expression is at stake.

Democracy matters. The rules must not be changed on a whim.The Conversation

Joshua Black, Visitor, School of History, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Misleading and false election ads are legal in Australia. We need national truth in political advertising laws

An ad falsely depicting independent candidate Alex Dyson as a Greens member. ABC News/Supplied
Yee-Fui NgMonash University

The highly pertinent case of a little-known independent candidate in the Victorian seat of Wannon has exposed a gaping hole in Australia’s electoral laws, which allow for misleading political advertisements in the lead-up to an election campaign. It’s all entirely legal and is already being exploited to try to shape the outcome of the coming federal election.

Conservative activist group Advance Australia has widely distributed digitally altered flyers attacking independent Alex Dyson, who is challenging senior frontbencher Dan Tehan.

It’s part of a campaign to damage Dyson’s electoral prospects after he helped slash the Liberal Party’s margin in the seat at the last election to less than 4%.

The material depicts Dyson ripping open his shirt in a “Superman” pose, to reveal a t-shirt bearing the official Greens party logo.

Dyson is not a Greens candidate. So why are the ads permissible? And what does it tell us about the urgent need for truth in political advertising laws to prohibit material that lies to voters?

Why are misleading ads allowed?

Section 329 of the Electoral Act prohibits the publication of material likely to mislead or deceive an elector in casting their vote.

But in a narrow interpretation by the Electoral Commission, the ban only applies after an election has been called by the prime minister.

That means the Wannon ad, and maybe countless others like them from across the political spectrum, could be distributed for months without repercussion.

Advance Australia has form when it comes to misleading material.

At the 2022 election, it displayed placards that falsely depicted independents David Pocock and Zali Steggall as Greens candidates.

In that case, the Electoral Commission ruled that because the corflutes were deployed during the campaign proper, they breached the electoral laws.

It is absurd and dangerous to democracy to have a law that only bans ads that mislead voters in casting their vote during the official election period, and allows them to proliferate unchecked at other times.

It should not be permissible to lie to voters just because of a technicality. In an era of permanent campaigning, voters can be influenced by political messages received well before a campaign officially starts.

Furthermore, there is little justification for allowing political parties to mislead while banning corporations from engaging in misleading and deceptive conduct. If consumers and shareholders are protected from fraudulent and dishonest claims, why not electors, who have the solemn task of deciding who runs the country?

How can the electoral laws be fixed?

There are available remedies to the problem, starting with reforming the Electoral Act. It should be clearly specified that the provision on misleading electors applies to any material calculated to affect the result of an election, regardless of when it is distributed.

Broader truth in political advertising provisions should also be introduced. This would cover a wider range of factually misleading ads beyond the existing narrow ambit of misleading a voter in the casting of their vote.

If the Electoral Commission determines the material is false or misleading to a material extent, it would order a withdrawal and a retraction.

Importantly, the laws would be confined to false or misleading statements of fact. Parties and other political players would still be free to express their opinions. Freedom of speech would not be impeded.

Parliamentary stalemate

The Albanese government has taken tentative steps to fix the problem. Truth in advertising laws introduced to parliament last year would have forced Advance Australia to retract and correct its dishonest flyers in Wannon.

However, the bill was pulled due to a lack of support.

Any doubters on the opposition benches should look to the experience in South Australia and the ACT, which have both enacted truth in advertising laws.

My research has shown these laws operate effectively in both jurisdictions.

What’s at stake

Spreading political lies has the potential to cause harm on multiple fronts.

The first is the damage to the candidate or political party in terms of their reputation and electoral prospects.

The second danger is to the integrity of the electoral process if lies cause people to switch their votes to such an extent that it changes election outcomes.

The spread of disinformation has become prevalent in an era of “fake news” and “alternative facts”, exacerbated by the rise of social media.

In 2024, the World Economic Forum’s Global Risks Report ranked misinformation and disinformation as the most severe risk facing the world over the next two years.

False information can alter elections, affect voting participation, silence minorities, and polarise the electorate. It is time to reform our electoral laws to mitigate the significant dangers to our democratic system.The Conversation

Yee-Fui Ng, Associate Professor, Faculty of Law, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Current cultural citizens: the importance of creating spaces in art galleries for young people

Naomi ZouwerUniversity of Canberra and Olivia HamiltonRMIT University

Galleries and art museums can be intimidating and alienating even for adults. Imagine it from a child’s point of view. Stern security guards in uniforms stationed the doors, bags checked, snacks banned and people hushed. It’s no wonder that kids groan when an excursion to the gallery comes up.

An increasing number of galleries are rethinking their approach, asking what it takes to be welcoming and engaging for the younger generation. Children should be welcomed and visible in gallery spaces. Their experiences now shape the citizens they will become in the future. Viewing art helps develop their identity and creativity, and a more nuanced understanding of the world.

The first step in making change is to recognise that children are current and active cultural citizens who can offer valuable perspectives, ideas and youthful energy. Through thoughtful design and programming, the younger generation is told their presence in the gallery is valued.

Here are some ways galleries are rising to the challenge and making children more welcome – and more valued – in our cultural spaces.

Setting the tone

The entrance to a gallery sets the tone for a young visitor. Are they greeted warmly and made to feel welcome, or does their arrival feel like an intrusion?

Some simple adjustments such as less intimidating bag checks, clear signage, and designated stroller parking create a more welcoming environment. Replacing uniformed security guards with friendly guides and training reception staff to acknowledge and engage with young visitors make a huge difference.

Children in a white room, sticking colourful dots on a fridge.
Visitors in Obliteration Room 2002, the Kids for Kusama exhibition at NGV International, Melbourne until 21 April 2025. © YAYOI KUSAMA. Photo: Eugene Hyland

Inciting curiosity and interaction at the front door is another way to invite children into the space. Displaying eye-catching and intriguing sculptural works at the entry or in the foyer builds a sense of anticipation and interest.

The iconic water wall at the National Gallery of Victoria signals to children that there are wonders to touch and explore inside.

Children don’t come alone

Children come to galleries with parents, siblings, schools or community groups. Galleries that consider how these varied age groups move through the space can greatly enhance the overall experience.

Programming designed with the whole family in mind means parents and kids can share cultural experiences. Well designed workshops, interactive exhibits and events appeal to mixed aged groups.

Children watch a band play.
Lucky Lartey and friends perform as part of the Hive Festival 2024 at the Art Gallery of New South Wales. Photo © Art Gallery of New South Wales, Christopher Snee

The Art Gallery of New South Wales regularly stages all-ages concerts with popular DJs and live music, building positive associations with the gallery for the whole family.

Incorporating a variety of spaces and experiences extend the duration and frequency of family visits. Some children need low sensory sessions with reduced stimuli to enjoy their visit. Others can use adjacent outdoor spaces and robust sculpture gardens to burn off excess energy, share lunch or even splash in some pink water.

Is there a place for me?

Does your local gallery have a dedicated children’s gallery?

These spaces are designed with kids in mind, engaging the senses and creating participatory ways of experiencing art. The way children encounter the work helps young children learn about the diverse and creative approaches and perspectives of artists in an engaging context.

The interactive experiences and programming mean children can explore their imagination and creativity and form a personal connections with the arts.

What about the older kids? Can they see themselves in the gallery? Teens need to connect, collaborate and to be included in cultural narratives in ways that are relevant to them.

Programs tailored for teens, such as workshops or art-making sessions, move beyond passive observation and encourage self expression and participation.

A woman walks through a gallery.
Installation view of Top Arts 2024 on display at The Ian Potter Centre: NGV Australia from 14 March to 14 July. Photo: Kate Shanasy

Ambitious teen programs, like the out-of-hours teen parties in the National Gallery of Victoria or the youth council at the National Gallery of Australia, empower young people to interact with art and the institution in ways that are meaningful for them.

Exhibiting the best artwork from the year 12 graduating students is another effective way to demonstrate to teens their perspectives and presence matters. Seeing creative work by their age group displayed in a gallery builds confidence and demonstrates to older adults how much the younger generation have to contribute.

Growing lifelong learners

Galleries are unique learning environments, able to engage with and activate the school curriculum and develop essential skills like social and emotional capabilities and creative and critical thinking skills.

New institutions can consider how to meaningfully engage with children in the design phase, but even existing galleries can reconfigure and retrofit their spaces and exhibitions to enable kids to learn.

Teenagers drawing in an art gallery.
Neo at the Art Gallery of South Australia, Adelaide. Photo: Sam Roberts

Specifically designed studios, creative technology, classrooms and presentation areas open the doors to cultural exploration. Positive exposure fosters a sense of stewardship ensuring that future generations value and support the arts.

Galleries are doing a great job welcoming kids but even more can be done. By embracing children as current cultural citizens, galleries can create a more inclusive, creative, and culturally aware society.

Intentionally designed spaces and programming ensure that children are not only welcomed but inspired to return – again and again – throughout their lives.The Conversation

Naomi Zouwer, Visual Artist and Lecturer in Teacher Education, University of Canberra and Olivia Hamilton, Associate Dean of Learning and Teaching- RMIT School of Architecture and Urban Design. Senior Lecture in Interior Design, RMIT University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Central Coast program benefits breast cancer patients across NSW

February 4, 2025
Patients who have surgery for breast cancer across NSW are benefiting from an innovative, patient-centred program developed by a team on the Central Coast which is detecting and preventing chronic lymphoedema.

Patients who undergo surgery for breast cancer and have their lymph nodes removed are at heightened risk of developing chronic lymphoedema, a condition which involves painful swelling of the limbs and trunk and requires lifelong treatment.

A team of physiotherapists at Central Coast Local Health District saw an opportunity to prevent or halt the progression of lymphoedema through early detection. The program enrols patients at the time of their cancer diagnosis and provides ongoing monitoring, education, and intervention throughout their cancer treatment and for up to two years after surgery.

Traditionally up to 30 per cent of patients will develop lymphoedema after breast cancer surgery however under this new model of care, CCLHD reduced chronic lymphoedema to less than five per cent of enrolled patients, paving the way for the program to be rolled out across NSW.

The program is available at 32 clinical sites across 13 local health districts in NSW. Since 2021, more than 6,500 patients have been part of the program. Evidence shows it has successfully prevented chronic lymphoedema in more than 700 patients, with only four per cent developing the condition.

As well as delivering life-changing benefits for patients, an economic evaluation of the program showed for every dollar invested in the prevention program, approximately $8 were saved in treatment costs for patients who would otherwise have developed chronic lymphoedema.

The program is funded through the Commonwealth Government's Lymphoedema Garments and Allied Health Therapy Program.

NSW Minister for Regional Health, Ryan Park stated:

“This proactive, early intervention program is a wonderful example of patient-centred care and it's great to see a project so successful at a local level, developed and rolled out and benefiting patients right across NSW.

“This is the first time an early monitoring and lymphoedema prevention program has been implemented on this scale anywhere in the world.

“It's really important on World Cancer Day to recognise this fantastic work, which is having a really positive impact on the lives of people who have been treated for breast cancer."

Minister for the Central Coast, David Harris said:

“This world leading early intervention program highlights the life changing work being done by healthcare professionals on the Central Coast.

“We have already seen how effective this program has been in detection and prevention, with statistics showing the number of patients developing chronic lymphoedema has reduced.

“This World Cancer Day it is important that we recognise the important work that is having a direct impact in our community."

Federal Assistant Minister for Rural and Regional Health, Emma McBride, stated:

“The Albanese Labor Government's Lymphoedema Garments and Allied Health Therapy Program is empowering this life-saving work in our community.

“A cancer diagnosis can be one of the most difficult times in a person's life.

“Earlier intervention better supports patients to properly understand their diagnosis and prepare for their journey ahead.

“I'm pleased this program is delivering better outcomes for patients on the Central Coast."

Federal Member for Robertson, Dr Gordon Reid MP stated:

“It is fantastic to see world leading intervention programs taking place right here on the Central Coast and then being rolled out across NSW.

“Our local health professionals are outstanding and I commend them on their work developing this program.

“I look forward to this program continuing to support patients across the Central Coast."

Central Coast Local Health District Senior Physiotherapist and Lymphoedema Practitioner, Courtney Clapham said:

“In the past, many patients had no knowledge of lymphoedema until they were told they had it.

“Our patients are supported and well-informed, with the program giving them the chance to take some control of their cancer journey and health outcomes going forward.

“I'm so proud that the program has not only improved outcomes for our patients here on the Central Coast, but across NSW."

Central Coast Local Health District patient Christine Walker said:

“Learning you have a cancer diagnosis is an anxiety-fuelled time, so when I learnt that I was at risk of developing lymphoedema after my surgery, I was extremely worried.

“I had an amazing experience with the early intervention program. My treatment is personalised, I have regular check ins and I have exercises to do at home. I believe the more information you have, the better, it means that I know what's next and how to deal with it. For me, the program has been very reassuring."

ACCC sweep uncovers concerning online shopping return policies and terms and conditions

February 4, 2025
The ACCC has conducted a sweep of more than two thousand Australian retail websites and has found some businesses using terms and conditions that may contravene the Australian Consumer Law (ACL).

As part of this sweep, business’ return policies and website terms and conditions were reviewed, some of which raised concerns as being potentially misleading for consumers.

“Our sweep has found numerous examples of practices that could potentially mislead or deceive consumers regarding their rights to exchange, refund or return a product,” ACCC Deputy Chair Catriona Lowe said.

“Under the Australian Consumer Law consumers have basic rights when buying products and services, known as consumer guarantees. These rights are separate from any warranties offered by a business and cannot be taken away by anything a business says or does.”

The sweep identified several potentially misleading statements in the terms and conditions of a number of the websites reviewed, including:
  • imposing time-limits for returning a faulty product;
  • imposing blanket ‘no refund’ conditions on sales or specialised items;
  • referring to manufacturer warranties as the only avenue for consumers to claim remedies for faulty goods, and;
  • placing restrictions on consumers’ right to a remedy, including stating that delivery fees paid for faulty items were non-refundable and charging restocking fees if customers returned faulty items.
Problematic statements found during the sweep included:
  • “Items that have been opened and used cannot be exchanged or refunded”;
  • “Made to order products cannot be returned”;
  • “Sale items cannot be returned, exchanged or refunded” and;
  • “In the unlikely event that your item arrives damaged or faulty, please notify the store within 30 days of delivery to receive a replacement”.
As a result of the sweep’s findings, the ACCC sent warning letters to several businesses whose returns policies or terms and conditions raised concerns under the ACL.

“Our action led to the majority of businesses changing or removing concerning statements from their websites and improving consumer guarantee messages to consumers,” Ms Lowe said.

“While we did identify some concerning practices during this sweep, we were pleased to find that many websites had information that advised consumers of their consumer guarantee rights under the Australian Consumer Law.”

Under the ACL, businesses should not be making statements, written or verbally, to the following effect about faulty products:
  • No refunds are permitted under any circumstances;
  • No refunds are provided for sale or specialised items;
  • To be eligible for a refund, the consumer has a limited timeframe, from receipt of the good, to return the product;
  • Returns will be subject to a processing, restocking or repair fee;
  • No refunds are provided for opened or used items under any circumstances;
  • Delivery fees are non-refundable;
  • Customers must pay for delivery for returned items.
“The ACCC is committed to improving business compliance with consumer guarantees and will continue to actively monitor this area, and where appropriate, take enforcement action,” Ms Lowe said.

“We encourage all businesses to review their return policies and terms and conditions to ensure they comply with the law.”

Consumers should report any potentially misleading or deceiving statements to the ACCC: Report a consumer issue

Around 3% of us will develop a brain aneurysm in our lives. So what is it and how do you treat it?

Elif Bayraktar/Shutterstock
Theresa LarkinUniversity of Wollongong and Jessica NealonUniversity of Wollongong

Australian radio host Kyle Sandilands announced on air yesterday that he has a brain aneurysm and needs urgent brain surgery.

Typically an aneurysm occurs when a part of the wall of an artery (a type of blood vessel) becomes stretched and bulges out.

You can get an aneurysm in any blood vessel, but they are most common in the brain’s arteries and the aorta, the large artery that leaves the heart.

Many people can have a brain aneurysm and never know. But a brain (or aortic) aneurysm that ruptures and bursts can be fatal.

So, what causes a brain aneurysm? And what’s the risk of rupture?

Weakness in the artery wall

Our arteries need strong walls because blood is constantly pumped through them and pushed against the walls.

An aneurysm can develop if there is a weak part of an artery wall.

The walls of arteries are made of three layers: an inner lining of cells, a middle layer of muscle and elastic fibres, and a tough outer layer of mostly collagen (a type of protein). Damage to any of these layers causes the wall to become thin and stretched. It can then balloon outward, leading to an aneurysm.

Genetics and certain inherited disorders can cause weak artery walls and brain aneurysms in some people.

For all of us, our artery walls become weaker as we age, and brain aneurysms are more common as we get older. The average age for a brain aneurysm to be detected is 50 (Sandilands is 53).

Females have a higher risk of brain aneurysm than males after about age 50. Declining oestrogen around menopause reduces the collagen in the artery wall, causing it to become weaker.

An illustration showing a brain aneurysm.
A brain aneurysm occurs when a part of the wall of an artery balloons out. Alfmaler/Shutterstock

High blood pressure can increase the risk of a brain aneurysm. In someone with high blood pressure, blood inside the arteries is pushed against the walls with greater force. This can stretch and weaken the artery walls.

Another common condition called atherosclerosis can also cause brain aneurysms. In atherosclerosis, plaques made mostly of fat build up in arteries and stick to the artery walls. This directly damages the cell lining, and weakens the muscle and elastic fibres in the middle layer of the artery wall.

Several lifestyle factors increase risk

Anything that increases inflammation or causes atherosclerosis or high blood pressure in turn increases your risk of a brain aneurysm.

Smoking and heavy drinking affect all of these, and nicotine directly damages the artery wall.

Sandilands mentioned his cocaine use in discussing his diagnosis. He said:

The facts are, a life of cocaine abuse and partying are not the way to go.

Indeed, cocaine abuse increases the risk of a brain aneurysm. It causes very high blood pressure because it causes arteries to spasm and constrict. Cocaine use is also linked to worse outcomes if a brain aneurysm ruptures.

Stress and a high-fat diet also increase inflammation. High cholesterol can also cause atherosclerosis. And being overweight increases your blood pressure.

A study of more than 60,000 people found smoking and high blood pressure were the strongest risk factors for a brain aneurysm.

Is it always a medical emergency?

About three in 100 people will have a brain aneurysm, varying in size from less than 5mm to more than 25mm in diameter. The majority are only discovered while undergoing imaging for something else (for example, head trauma), because small aneurysms may not cause any symptoms.

Larger aneurysms can cause symptoms because they can press against brain tissues and nerves.

Sandilands described “a lot of headache problems” leading up to his diagnosis. Headaches can be due to minor leaks of blood from the aneurysm. They indicate a risk of the aneurysm rupturing in subsequent days or weeks.

Less than one in 100 brain aneurysms will rupture, often called a “brain bleed”. This causes a subarachnoid haemorrhage, which is a type of stroke.

If it does occur, rupture of a brain aneurysm is life-threatening: nearly one in four people will die within 24 hours, and one in two within three months.

If someone’s brain aneurysm ruptures, they usually experience a sudden, severe headache, often described as a “thunderclap headache”. They may also have other symptoms of a stroke such as changes in vision, loss of movement, nausea, vomiting and loss of consciousness.

Surgeons performing brain surgery under lights.
Surgery can repair a brain aneurysm, and stop it from rupturing. Roman Zaiets/Shutterstock

Surgery can prevent a rupture

Whether surgery will be used to treat a brain aneurysm depends on its size and location, as well as the age and health of the patient. The medical team will balance the potential benefits with the risks of the surgery.

A small aneurysm with low risk of rupture will usually just be monitored.

However, once a brain aneurysm reaches 7mm or more, surgery is generally needed.

In surgery to repair a brain aneurysm, the surgeon will temporarily remove a small part of the skull, then cut through the coverings of the brain to place a tiny metal clip to close off the bulging part of the aneurysm.

Another option is endovascular (meaning within the vessel) coiling. A surgeon can pass a catheter into the femoral artery in the thigh, through the aorta to the brain. They can then place a coil inside the aneurysm which forms a clot to close off the aneurysm sac.

After either surgery, usually the person will stay in hospital for up to a week. It can take 6–8 weeks for full recovery, though doctors may continue monitoring with annual imaging tests for a few years afterwards.

You can lower your risk of a brain aneurysm by not smoking, moderating alcohol intake, eating a healthy diet, exercising regularly and maintaining a healthy weight.The Conversation

Theresa Larkin, Associate Professor of Medical Sciences, University of Wollongong and Jessica Nealon, Senior Lecturer in Medical Sciences (Neuroscience), University of Wollongong

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What are cooling blankets? Can they really help me sleep?

EGHStock/Shutterstock
Linda GrosserUniversity of South Australia and Luana MainDeakin University

You wake up exhausted from yet another hot night of tossing and turning, with very little sleep.

So you might be tempted to buy a “cooling blanket” after reading rave reviews on social media. Or you might have read online articles with taglines such as:

Stop waking up in a puddle of sweat with our roundup of the best cooling blankets – including a top-rated option from Amazon that ‘actually works’.

But what are cooling blankets? And can they help you get a restful night?

We know a cooler bedroom is best

First, let’s look at why a cooler environment helps us sleep better at night.

Our body’s internal temperature has a circadian rhythm, meaning it fluctuates throughout the day. A couple of hours before bed, it drops about 0.31°C to help you fall asleep. It will drop about another 2°C across the night to help you stay asleep.

During sleep, your internal temperature and skin work together to achieve a balance between losing and producing heat. Your skin has sensors that pick-up changes in the environment around you. If it gets too warm, these sensors let your body know, which may cause you to kick-off blankets or bed clothes and wake more often leading to poorer sleep quality.

Sleep quality is an important component of sleep health ensuring you get the physical, mental and emotional benefits that come from a good night’s sleep.

The ideal temperature for sleep varies depending on the season and type of bedding you have but falls between 17°C and 28°C. Keeping your sleeping environment within this range will help you to get the best night’s rest.

So what are cooling blankets?

Cooling blankets are designed to help regulate your body temperature while you sleep.

Different technologies and materials are used in their design and construction.

We’re not talking about hospital-grade cooling blankets that are used to reduce fever and prevent injury to the nervous system. These use gel pads with circulating water, or air-cooling systems, connected to automatic thermostats to monitor someone’s temperature.

Instead, the type of consumer-grade cooling blankets you might see advertised use a blend of lightweight, breathable materials that draw moisture away from the skin to help you stay cool and dry through the night. They look like regular blankets.

Common materials include cotton, bamboo, silk or the fibre Lyocell, all of which absorb moisture.

Manufacturers typically use a thread count of 300-500, creating air pockets that enhance airflow and moisture evaporation.

Some blankets feature a Q-Max rating, which indicates how cool the fabric feels against your skin. The higher the value, the cooler the fabric feels.

Others feature phase change materials. These materials were developed by NASA for space suits to keep astronauts comfortable during a spacewalk where temperatures are from roughly -157°C to 121°C. Phase change materials in cooling blankets absorb and hold heat producing a cooling effect.

Astronaut performing spacewalk while servicing satellite
Some cooling blankets use NASA technology developed for space suits. Summit Art Creations/NASA/Shutterstock

Do they work?

If you believe online reviews, yes, cooling blankets can cool you down and help you sleep better in warmer weather or if you get too hot using normal sheets and blankets.

However, there is little scientific research to see if these consumer-grade products work.

In a 2021 study exploring sleep quality, 20 participants slept for three nights under two different conditions.

First, they slept with regular bed sheets in an air-conditioned room with the temperature set to their preference. Then, they used cooling bed sheets in an air-conditioned room where the temperature was set 3°C higher than their preference.

Participants reported good sleep quality in both conditions but preferred the warmer room with its cooling sheets.

This may suggest the use of cooling bedding may help provide a more comfortable night’s sleep.

But everyone’s cooling needs varies depending on things like age, health, body temperature, the space you sleep in, and personal preferences.

So while these products may work for some people who may be motivated to leave a good review, they may not necessarily work for you.

Are they worth it?

There’s a wide variety of cooling blankets available at different prices to suit various budgets. Positive customer reviews might encourage a purchase, especially for individuals experiencing disrupted sleep at night due to heat.

Yet, these cooling blankets have limited scientific research to show they work and to say if they’re worth it. So it’s up to you.

Cooling blankets for sale
Lots of choice, but little scientific evidence to back them. Screenshot Google Shopping

What else can I do if I’m a hot sleeper?

If a cooling blanket isn’t for you, there are other things you can do to stay cool at night, such as:

  • using air conditioning or a fan

  • placing a damp towel under or over you

  • wearing lightweight or minimal sleepwear and avoiding thick or synthetic fabrics, such as nylon, that can trap heat

  • if you usually share a bed, on hot nights, consider sleeping by yourself to avoid excess body heat from your partner.

On a final note, if you often struggle with hot, disturbed sleep, you can check in with your health-care provider. They can see if there is a medical explanation for your disturbed sleep and advise what to try next.The Conversation

Linda Grosser, Research Associate, Behaviour-Brain-Body Research Centre, University of South Australia and Luana Main, Associate Professor in Applied Sport Science, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

New evidence confirms our Indigenous languages have a common source, but how they spread remains a mystery

SolStock/Getty Images
Mark HarveyUniversity of Newcastle and Robert MailhammerWestern Sydney University

Have you ever wondered how Australia’s many Indigenous languages relate to one another and how far back the connections go?

The Australian continent has been settled by Indigenous people for at least 50,000 years, but just how old are the languages spoken today and where did they originate? Our research provides some answers to these questions – and the answers throw up new and interesting puzzles.

There is a long-standing proposal that all the Indigenous languages of continental Australia come from one language, called Proto-Australian. This hypothesis is based on observations, going back to the 19th century, that many Indigenous languages show similarities in grammar and vocabulary.

However, without proper testing, it is not possible to know whether these similarities are best explained as inheritances from a single ancestor language or in some other way, such as borrowing, which would not require a single ancestor language.

Our recent research – the first evaluation of the Proto-Australian hypothesis – shows it is supported. Proto-Australian was most likely spoken about 6,000 years ago in the Top End of the Northern Territory. When it spread across mainland Australia it displaced all the other languages spoken before.

One big question is how this spread took place. Language spread is usually associated with population movements or economic and technological change. But there is no clear evidence for population movement or economic and technological change in the past 10,000 years.

This suggests we need to develop new models of how language spreads, and of Australian prehistory.

Language families

Relationships between languages are established by finding similar or shared words. Languages that share similar forms are members of a language family; languages that do not share those forms are not part of that family.

Language families can be grouped into hierarchies of mother and daughter language families. Within Australia, Proto-Pama-Nyungan (PPN), one of the daughter families of Proto-Australian is much more widespread than the others. It occupies 90% of the continent, the lighter area on Map 1.

The other daughter languages of Proto-Australian are called Non-Pama-Nyungan (NPN). Some of these form small families. Others, with no close relatives, are isolates, the white areas on Map 2.

The area with the most isolates has the greatest diversity. Within Australia, that area is the Top End. As a general principle, the area with the greatest diversity is the most likely homeland for a proto-language. Therefore, the Top End is the most likely homeland for Proto-Australian.

Though there is considerable diversity, we find similar words across both Proto-Pama-Nyungan and Non-Pama-Nyungan. In Proto-Pama-Nyungan, for example, the word for hand is marla. In Non-Pama-Nyungan languages, we find several variations:

Amurdak: mara

Bardi: marla

Gajirrabeng: marla

Ganggalida: marl

Gija: marla

Gooniyandi: marla

Kayardild: marl

Lardil: marl

Ngandi: mar

Nyulnyul: marl

Yawuru: marla

Finding similarities does not provide exact timelines for when the proto-language was spoken as a single language, but there are no reliable examples dating back more than 10,000 years.

Diversification is an inherent feature of language. With sufficient time all similarities will be lost. Given that the continent has been continuously occupied for at least 50,000 years, the prediction is that there would be many unrelated languages across Australia.

This prediction is borne out in two critical cases: Tasmania, which separated from the mainland 14,000 years ago, and the Tiwi Islands, which separated 6,000 years ago, thereby preventing language spread to either of these islands after these dates.

Neither the Tasmanian nor Tiwi languages are related to the mainland languages. This accords with the prediction from standard rates of language diversification that similarities should be lost.

Standard rates of diversification predict there should be many unrelated languages on the mainland. But this is not the case. This means that Proto-Australian must have spread continent-wide after the separation of the Tiwi Islands.

A big question

Why and how one language spread with such a success is a big question. Accompanying language spread, there would usually be evidence of social change. This social change might be population increase or movement; it might be economic or technological change. But there is no direct evidence for this.

Hypotheses about population movements can be evaluated against genetic studies, while hypotheses about population increase or economic and technological change can be evaluated against the archaeological record.

There is considerable variation in the genetics literature, but no suggestion of significant changes in the last 10,000 years.

One theory is that there was a single founding population, which differentiated between 33,000 and 10,000 years ago, with gene flow from the north-east to much of the rest of the continent during the last 10,000 years.

Another theory proposes a founding group at 50,000 years ago, which spread rapidly to all coastal areas by 45,000 years ago. This rapid spread was followed by ongoing in-situ diversification, with no evidence for significant population movements.

Yet another theory proposes divergence 26,000-35,000 years ago, with little evidence of migration.

There are also differing interpretations of the archaeological record. Variation in climate may have had effects on population levels, with significant increases during the last 10,000 years. But while the evidence supports significant fluctuations in land use over the last 10,000 years in various regions, it has also been argued that the evidence does not generally support either synchronised continent-wide fluctuations or unidirectional change.

The one example of a continent-wide change that offered an economic advantage was the introduction of the dingo 4,000-8,000 years ago. But it is very unlikely that one economic change would lead to continent-wide language replacement. Further, dingoes are native to the Tiwi Islands, suggesting that the spread of the dingo does not correlate with the spread of Proto-Australian.

A final puzzle is that language spread does not automatically lead to a total eclipse of pre-existing languages. In Europe, where Indo-European languages spread through trade and military might, some languages from before that time are still around – Basque and Sámi, for example. There are also traces of older languages in words and place names.

But in mainland Australia, there are only languages that are daughter languages of Proto-Australian. That is quite unusual. Therefore, we have a good question, but no good answers, which means our models need revision.The Conversation

Mark Harvey, Conjoint Associate Professor, Linguistics, University of Newcastle and Robert Mailhammer, Professor of Linguistics, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why we should all try to eat like people in rural Papua New Guinea – new study

Tanya Keisha/Shutterstock
Jens WalterUniversity College Cork

Western diets – high in processed foods and low in fibre – are associated with obesity, diabetes and heart disease. These diets don’t only harm our bodies, they also harm our gut microbiomes, the complex community of bacteria, fungi and viruses found in our intestinal tract that are important for our health.

Scientists, including my colleagues and me, are actively searching for ways to create healthy microbiomes to prevent chronic diseases. And my search has taken me to Papua New Guinea.

I have long been fascinated by this country, with its remote valleys almost untouched by the modern world until 1930, more than 800 languages, an ancient system of sustenance agriculture and entire communities living a non-industrialised lifestyle. This fascination kicked off a thrilling nine-year research project involving researchers from eight countries, which led to a paper published in the scientific journal Cell.

In previous research, my team studied the gut microbiomes of rural Papua New Guineans. We discovered microbiomes that are more diverse than their westernised counterparts, enriched in bacteria that thrive on dietary fibre, and with lower levels of inflammation-causing bacteria that are typically found in people who eat highly processed foods.

This information provided hints on how to perhaps redress the damage caused to our gut microbiomes.

The traditional diet in rural Papua New Guinea is rich in unprocessed plant-based foods that are full of fibre but low in sugar and calories, something I was able to see for myself on a field trip to Papua New Guinea. Determined to create something everyone could use to benefit their health, our team took what we saw in Papua New Guinea and other non-industrialised societies to create a new diet we call the NiMe (non-industrialised microbiome restore) diet.

What sets NiMe apart from other diets is that it is dominated by vegetables (such as leafy greens) and legumes (such as beans) and fruit. It only contains one small serving of animal protein per day (salmon, chicken or pork), and it avoids highly processed foods.

Dairy, beef and wheat were excluded from the human trial because they are not part of the traditional diet in rural Papua New Guinea. The other characteristic distinction of the diet is a substantial dietary fibre content. In our trial, we went for around 45g of fibre a day, which exceeds the recommendations in dietary guidelines.

One of my PhD students got creative in the kitchen designing recipes that would appeal to a person used to typical western dishes. These meals allowed us to develop a meal plan that could be tested in a strictly controlled study in healthy Canadian adults.

Remarkable results

We saw remarkable results including weight loss (although participants didn’t change their regular calorie intake), a drop in bad cholesterol by 17%, decreased blood sugar by 6%, and a 14% reduction in a marker for inflammation and heart disease called C-reactive protein. These benefits were directly linked to improvements in the participants’ gut microbiome, specifically, microbiome features damaged by industrialisation.

On a western diet low in dietary fibre, the gut microbiome degrades the mucus layer in the gut, which leads to inflammation. The NiMe diet prevented this process, which was linked to a reduction in inflammation.

The diet also increased beneficial bacterial metabolites (byproducts) in the gut, such as short-chain fatty acids, and in the blood, such as indole-3-propionic acid – a metabolite that has been shown to protect against type 2 diabetes and nerve damage.

Research also shows that low dietary fibre leads to gut microbes ramping up protein fermentation, which generates harmful byproducts that may contribute to colon cancer.

In fact, there is a worrying trend of increased colon cancer in younger people, which may be caused by recent trends towards high-protein diets or supplements. The NiMe diet increased carbohydrate fermentation at the expense of protein fermentation, and it reduced bacterial molecules in the participants’ blood that are linked to cancer.

The findings from our research show that a dietary intervention targeted towards restoring the gut microbiome can improve health and reduce disease risk. The NiMe diet offers a practical roadmap to achieve this, by providing recipes that were used in our study. It allows anyone interested in healthy eating to improve their diet to feed their human cells and their microbiome.The Conversation

Jens Walter, Professor at the School of Microbiology, University College Cork

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why the WHO has recommended switching to a healthier salt alternative

goodbishop/Shutterstock
Xiaoyue (Luna) XuUNSW Sydney and Bruce NealGeorge Institute for Global Health

This week the World Health Organization (WHO) released new guidelines recommending people switch the regular salt they use at home for substitutes containing less sodium.

But what exactly are these salt alternatives? And why is the WHO recommending this? Let’s take a look.

A new solution to an old problem

Advice to eat less salt (sodium chloride) is not new. It has been part of international and Australian guidelines for decades. This is because evidence clearly shows the sodium in salt can harm our health when we eat too much of it.

Excess sodium increases the risk of high blood pressure, which affects millions of Australians (around one in three adults). High blood pressure (hypertension) in turn increases the risk of heart disease, stroke and kidney disease, among other conditions.

The WHO estimates 1.9 million deaths globally each year can be attributed to eating too much salt.

The WHO recommends consuming no more than 2g of sodium daily. However people eat on average more than double this, around 4.3g a day.

In 2013, WHO member states committed to reducing population sodium intake by 30% by 2025. But cutting salt intake has proved very hard. Most countries, including Australia, will not meet the WHO’s goal for reducing sodium intake by 2025. The WHO has since set the same target for 2030.

The difficulty is that eating less salt means accepting a less salty taste. It also requires changes to established ways of preparing food. This has proved too much to ask of people making food at home, and too much for the food industry.

A salt shaker spilling onto a table.
There’s been little progress on efforts to cut sodium intake. snezhana k/Shutterstock

Enter potassium-enriched salt

The main lower-sodium salt substitute is called potassium-enriched salt. This is salt where some of the sodium chloride has been replaced with potassium chloride.

Potassium is an essential mineral, playing a key role in all the body’s functions. The high potassium content of fresh fruit and vegetables is one of the main reasons they’re so good for you. While people are eating more sodium than they should, many don’t get enough potassium.

The WHO recommends a daily potassium intake of 3.5g, but on the whole, people in most countries consume significantly less than this.

Potassium-enriched salt benefits our health by cutting the amount of sodium we consume, and increasing the amount of potassium in our diets. Both help to lower blood pressure.

Switching regular salt for potassium-enriched salt has been shown to reduce the risk of heart disease, stroke and premature death in large trials around the world.

Modelling studies have projected that population-wide switches to potassium-enriched salt use would prevent hundreds of thousands of deaths from cardiovascular disease (such as heart attack and stroke) each year in China and India alone.

The key advantage of switching rather than cutting salt intake is that potassium-enriched salt can be used as a direct one-for-one swap for regular salt. It looks the same, works for seasoning and in recipes, and most people don’t notice any important difference in taste.

In the largest trial of potassium-enriched salt to date, more than 90% of people were still using the product after five years.

A female nurse taking a senior man's blood pressure.
Excess sodium intake increases the risk of high blood pressure, which can cause a range of health problems. PeopleImages.com - Yuri A/Shutterstock

Making the switch: some challenges

If fully implemented, this could be one of the most consequential pieces of advice the WHO has ever provided.

Millions of strokes and heart attacks could be prevented worldwide each year with a simple switch to the way we prepare foods. But there are some obstacles to overcome before we get to this point.

First, it will be important to balance the benefits and the risks. For example, people with advanced kidney disease don’t handle potassium well and so these products are not suitable for them. This is only a small proportion of the population, but we need to ensure potassium-enriched salt products are labelled with appropriate warnings.

A key challenge will be making potassium-enriched salt more affordable and accessible. Potassium chloride is more expensive to produce than sodium chloride, and at present, potassium-enriched salt is mostly sold as a niche health product at a premium price.

If you’re looking for it, salt substitutes may also be called low-sodium salt, potassium salt, heart salt, mineral salt, or sodium-reduced salt.

review published in 2021 found low sodium salts were marketed in only 47 countries, mostly high-income ones. Prices ranged from the same as regular salt to almost 15 times higher.

An expanded supply chain that produces much more food-grade potassium chloride will be needed to enable wider availability of the product. And we’ll need to see potassium-enriched salt on the shelves next to regular salt so it’s easy for people to find.

In countries like Australia, about 80% of the salt we eat comes from processed foods. The WHO guideline falls short by not explicitly prioritising a switch for the salt used in food manufacturing.

Stakeholders working with government to encourage food industry uptake will be essential for maximising the health benefits.The Conversation

Xiaoyue (Luna) Xu, Scientia Lecturer, School of Population Health, UNSW Sydney and Bruce Neal, Executive Director, George Institute Australia, George Institute for Global Health

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Mastercard plans to get rid of credit card numbers. We could be heading towards the end of cards

Antonina St/Shutterstock
Gary MortimerQueensland University of Technology and Cassandra CrossQueensland University of Technology

Mastercard has announced plans to remove the 16-digit number from their credit and debit cards by 2030 in a move designed to stamp out identity theft and fraudulent use of cards.

The numbers currently used to identify cards will be replaced with tokenisation and biometric authentication

In 2022, Mastercard added biometric options enabling payments to be made with a smile or wave of the hand.

Tokenisation converts the 16-digit card number into a different number – or token – stored on your device, so card information is never shared when you tap your card or phone or make payments online.

The first rollout of these numberless cards will be through a partnership with AMP Bank, but it is expected other banks will follow in the coming 12 months.

Why card security is important

There is nothing quite like the sinking feeling after receiving a call or text from your bank asking about the legitimacy of a card transaction.

In 2023-2024 the total value of card fraud in Australia was A$868 million, up from $677.5 million the previous financial year.

Credit card numbers and payment details are often exposed in major data breaches affecting large and small businesses.

A man sitting at a laptop hold a phone in one hand and a credit card in the other
The cost of credit card fraud in Australia rose by almost $200 million last financial year. CC7/Shutterstock

Late last year, the US Federal Trade Commission took action against the Marriott and Starwood Hotels for lax data security. More than 300 million customers worldwide were affected.

Event ticketing company Ticketmaster was also hacked last year. The details of several hundred million customers, including names, addresses, credit card numbers, phone numbers and payment details were illegally accessed.

So-called “card-not-present fraud”, where an offender processes an unauthorised transaction without having the card in their physical possession, accounts for 92% of all card fraud in Australia. This rose 29% in the last financial year.

The Card Verification Value (CVV) (or three-digit number on the back of a credit card) aimed to ensure the person making the transaction had the physical card in their hands. But it is clearly ineffective.

Benefits of removing credit card numbers

Removing the credit card number is the latest attempt to curb fraud. Removing numbers stops fraudsters processing unauthorised card-not-present transactions.

It also reduces the potential for financial damage of victims exposed in data breaches, if organisations are no longer able to store these payment details.

Man walking between large computer servers
Companies will no longer be able to store card data, reducing the risk of data breaches. ESBProfessional/Shutterstock

The storage of personal information is a contested issue. For example, the 2022 Optus data breach exposed information from customers who had previously held accounts with the telco back in 2018.

Removing the ability of organisations to store payment details in the first place, removes the risk of this information being exposed in any future attack.

While any efforts to reduce fraud are welcome, this new approach raises some new issues to consider.

Potential problems with the new system

Mastercard has said customers will use tokens generated by the customer’s banking app or biometric authentication instead of card numbers.

This is likely to be an easy transition for customers who use mobile banking.

However, the use of digital banking is not universal. Many senior consumers and those with a disability don’t use digital banking services. They would be excluded from the new protections.

While strengthening the security attached to credit cards, removing numbers shifts the vulnerability to mobile phones and telecommunication providers.

Offenders already access victims’ phones through mobile porting and impersonation scams. These attacks are likely to escalate as new ways to exploit potential vulnerabilities are found.

There are also concerns about biometrics. Unlike credit card details, which can be replaced when exposed in a data breach, biometrics are fixed. Shifting a focus to biometrics will increase the attractiveness of this data, and potentially opens victims up to ongoing, irreversible damage.

While not as common, breaches of biometric data do occur.

For example, web-based security platform BioStar 2 in the UK exposed the fingerprints and facial recognition details of over one million people. Closer to home, IT provider to entertainment companies Outabox is alleged to have exposed facial recognition data of more than one million Australians.

Will we really need cards in the future?

While removing the numbers may reduce credit card fraud, emerging smart retail technologies may remove the need for cards all together.

Smartphone payments are already becoming the norm, removing the need for physical cards. GlobalData revealed a 58% growth in mobile wallet payments in Australia in 2023, to $146.9 billion. In October 2024, 44% of payments were “device-present” transactions.

Amazon’s innovative “Just-Walk-Out” technology has also removed the need for consumers to bring a physical credit or debit card all together.

Amazon Go and the world’s most advanced shopping technology.

This technology is available at more than 70 Amazon-owned stores, and at more than 85 third-party locations across the US, UK, and Australia. These include sports stadiums, airports, grocery stores, convenience stores and college campuses.

The technology uses cameras, weight sensors and a combination of advanced AI technologies to enable shoppers in physical stores make purchases without having to swipe or tap their cards at the checkout line.

Such technology is now being offered by a variety of other vendors including TrigoCognizant and Grabango. It is also being trialled across other international retailers, including supermarket chains Tesco and ALDI.

While Just-Walk-Out removes the need to carry a physical card, at some point consumers still need to enter their cards details into an app. So, to avoid cards and numbers completely, smart retail tech providers are moving to biometric alternatives, like facial recognition payments.

Considering the speed at which smart retail and payment technology is entering the marketplace, it is likely physical credit cards, numberless or not, will soon become redundant, replaced by biometric payment options.The Conversation

Gary Mortimer, Professor of Marketing and Consumer Behaviour, Queensland University of Technology and Cassandra Cross, Associate Dean (Learning & Teaching) Faculty of Creative Industries, Education and Social Justice, Queensland University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Dating apps could have negative effects on body image and mental health, our research shows

Dikushin Dmitry/Shutterstock
Zac BowmanFlinders University

Around 350 million people globally use dating apps, and they amass an estimated annual revenue of more than US$5 billion. In Australia, 49% of adults report using at least one online dating app or website, with a further 27% having done so in the past.

But while dating apps have helped many people find romantic partners, they’re not all good news.

In a recent review, my colleagues and I found using dating apps may be linked to poorer body image, mental health and wellbeing.

We collated the evidence

Our study was a systematic review, where we collated the results of 45 studies that looked at dating app use and how this was linked to body image, mental health or wellbeing.

Body image refers to the perceptions or feelings a person has towards their own appearance, often relating to body size, shape and attractiveness.

Most of the studies we included were published in 2020 onwards. The majority were carried out in Western countries (such as the United States, the United Kingdom and Australia). Just under half of studies included participants of all genders. Interestingly, 44% of studies observed men exclusively, while only 7% included just women.

Of the 45 studies, 29 looked at the impact of dating apps on mental health and wellbeing and 22 considered the impact on body image (some looked at both). Some studies examined differences between users and non-users of dating apps, while others looked at whether intensity of dating app use (how often they’re used, how many apps are used, and so on) makes a difference.

More than 85% of studies (19 of 22) looking at body image found significant negative relationships between dating app use and body image. Just under half of studies (14 of 29) observed negative relationships with mental health and wellbeing.

The studies noted links with problems including body dissatisfaction, disordered eating, depression, anxiety and low self-esteem.

A man leaning against large windows of an apartment.
Dating apps are becoming increasingly common. But could their use harm mental health? Rachata Teyparsit/Shutterstock

It’s important to note our research has a few limitations. For example, almost all studies included in the review were cross-sectional – studies that analyse data at a particular point in time.

This means researchers were unable to discern whether dating apps actually cause body image, mental health and wellbeing concerns over time, or whether there is simply a correlation. They can’t rule out that in some cases the relationship may go the other way, meaning poor mental health or body image increases a person’s likelihood of using dating apps.

Also, the studies included in the review were mostly conducted in Western regions with predominantly white participants, limiting our ability to generalise the findings to all populations.

Why are dating apps linked to poor body image and mental health?

Despite these limitations, there are plausible reasons to expect there may be a link between dating apps and poorer body image, mental health and wellbeing.

Like a lot of social media, dating apps are overwhelmingly image-centric, meaning they have an emphasis on pictures or videos. Dating app users are initially exposed primarily to photos when browsing, with information such as interests or hobbies accessible only after manually clicking through to profiles.

Because of this, users often evaluate profiles based primarily on the photos attached. Even when a user does click through to another person’s profile, whether or not they “like” someone may still often be determined primarily on the basis of physical appearance.

This emphasis on visual content on dating apps can, in turn, cause users to view their appearance as more important than who they are as a person. This process is called self-objectification.

People who experience self-objectification are more likely to scrutinise their appearance, potentially leading to body dissatisfaction, body shame, or other issues pertaining to body image.

A woman using a dating app.
Dating apps are overwhelmingly image-centric. Studio Romantic/Shutterstock

There could be several reasons why mental health and wellbeing may be impacted by dating apps, many of which may centre around rejection.

Rejection can come in many forms on dating apps. It can be implied, such as having a lack of matches, or it can be explicit, such as discrimination or abuse. Users who encounter rejection frequently on dating apps may be more likely to experience poorer self-esteem, depressive symptoms or anxiety.

And if rejection is perceived to be based on appearance, this could lead again to body image concerns.

What’s more, the convenience and game-like nature of dating apps may lead people who could benefit from taking a break to keep swiping.

What can app developers do? What can you do?

Developers of dating apps should be seeking ways to protect users against these possible harms. This could, for example, include reducing the prominence of photos on user profiles, and increasing the moderation of discrimination and abuse on their platforms.

The Australian government has developed a code of conduct – to be enforced from April 1 this year – to help moderate and reduce discrimination and abuse on online dating platforms. This is a positive step.

Despite the possible negatives, research has also found dating apps can help build confidence and help users meet new people.

If you use dating apps, my colleagues and I recommend choosing profile images you feel display your personality or interests, or photos with friends, rather than semi-clothed images and selfies. Engage in positive conversations with other users, and block and report anyone who is abusive or discriminatory.

It’s also sensible to take breaks from the apps, particularly if you’re feeling overwhelmed or dejected.

If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14. The Butterfly Foundation provides support for eating disorders and body image issues, and can be reached on 1800 334 673.The Conversation

Zac Bowman, PhD Candidate, College of Education, Psychology & Social Work, Flinders University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Some vegetables are pretty low in fibre. So which veggies are high-fibre heroes?

Valentina_G/Shutterstock
Lauren BallThe University of Queensland and Emily BurchSouthern Cross University

Many people looking to improve their health try to boost fibre intake by eating more vegetables.

But while all veggies offer health benefits, not all are particularly high in fibre. You can eat loads of salads and vegetables and still fall short of your recommended daily fibre intake.

So, which vegetables pack the biggest fibre punch? Here’s what you need to know.

What is fibre and how much am I supposed to be getting?

Fibre, or dietary fibre, refers to the parts of plant foods that our bodies cannot digest or absorb.

It passes mostly unchanged through our stomach and intestines, then gets removed from the body through our stool.

There are two types of fibre which have different functions and health benefits: soluble and insoluble.

Soluble fibre dissolves in water and can help lower blood cholesterol levels. Food sources include fruit, vegetables and legumes.

Insoluble fibre adds bulk to the stool which helps move food through the bowels. Food sources include nuts, seeds and wholegrains.

Both types are beneficial.

Australia’s healthy eating guidelines recommend women consume 25 grams of fibre a day and men consume 30 grams a day.

However, research shows most people do not eat enough fibre. Most adults get about 21 grams a day.

4 big reasons to increase fibre

Boosting fibre intake is a manageable and effective way to improve your overall health.

Making small changes to eat more fibrous vegetables can lead to:

1. Better digestion

Fibre helps maintain regular bowel movements and can alleviate constipation.

2. Better heart health

Increasing soluble fibre (by eating foods such as fruit and vegetables) can help lower cholesterol levels, which can reduce your risk of heart disease.

3. Weight management

High-fibre foods are filling, which can help people feel fuller for longer and prevent overeating.

4. Reducing diabetes risk and boosting wellbeing

Fibre-rich diets are linked to a reduced risk of chronic conditions such as type 2 diabetes and colorectal cancer.

Recent research published in prestigious medical journal The Lancet provided some eye-opening stats on why fibre matters.

The researchers, who combined evidence from clinical trials, found people who ate 25–29 grams of fibre per day had a 15–30% lower risk of life-threatening conditions like heart disease, stroke, high blood pressure, and type 2 diabetes compared to those who consumed fewer than 15 grams of fibre per day.

An older woman harvests some carrots from her garden.
Getting plenty of fibre can help us as we age. Iryna Inshyna/Shutterstock

So which vegetables are highest in fibre?

Vegetables are excellent sources of both soluble and insoluble fibre, along with essential vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants.

The following veggies are some of the highest in fibre:

  • green peas
  • avocado
  • artichokes
  • parsnips
  • brussels sprouts
  • kale
  • sweet potatoes
  • beetroot
  • carrots
  • broccoli
  • pumpkin

Which vegetables are low in fibre?

Comparatively lower fibre veggies include:

  • asparagus
  • spinach (raw)
  • cauliflower
  • mushrooms
  • capsicum
  • tomato
  • lettuce
  • cucumber

These vegetables have lots of health benefits. But if meeting a fibre goal is your aim then don’t forget to complement these veggies with other higher-fibre ones, too.

A veggie box is shot from above.
Vegetables are excellent sources of both soluble and insoluble fibre – but some have more fibre than others. anna.q/Shutterstock

Does it matter how I prepare or cook the vegetables?

Yes.

The way we prepare vegetables can impact their fibre content, as cooking can cause structural changes in the dietary fibre components.

Some research has shown pressure cooking reduces fibre levels more greatly than roasting or microwave cooking.

For optimal health, it’s important to include a mix of both cooked and raw vegetables in your diet.

It’s worth noting that juicing removes most of the fibre from vegetables, leaving mostly sugars and water.

For improved fibre intake, it’s better to eat whole vegetables rather than relying on juices.

What about other, non-vegetable sources of fibre?

To meet your fibre recommendations each day, you can chose from a variety of fibre-rich foods (not only vegetables) including:

  • legumes and pulses (such as kidney beans and chickpeas)
  • wholegrain flour and bread
  • fruits
  • wholegrains (such oats, brown rice, quinoa, barley)
  • nuts and seeds (such as flaxseeds and chia seeds)

A fibre-rich day that meets a recommended 30 grams would include:

  • breakfast: 1⁄2 cup of rolled oats with milk and 1⁄2 cup of berries = about 6 grams of fibre
  • snack: one banana = about 2 grams
  • lunch: two cups of salad vegetables, 1⁄2 cup of four-bean mix, and canned tuna = about 9 grams
  • snack: 30 grams of almonds = about 3 grams
  • dinner: 1.5 cups of stir-fried vegetables with tofu or chicken, one cup of cooked brown rice = about 10 grams
  • supper: 1⁄2 a punnet of strawberries with some yoghurt = about 3 grams.

Bringing it all together

Vegetables are a key part of a healthy, balanced diet, packed with fibre that supports digestion, blood glucose control, weight management, and reduces risk of chronic disease.

However, the nutritional value of them can vary depending on the type and the cooking method used.

By understanding the fibre content in different veggies and how preparation methods affect it, we can make informed dietary choices to improve our overall health.The Conversation

Lauren Ball, Professor of Community Health and Wellbeing, The University of Queensland and Emily Burch, Accredited Practising Dietitian and Lecturer, Southern Cross University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week One February 2025 (January 27 - February 2)

Off To School In 2025 A Bit Quicker Than A Hundred Years Ago


Section from Panorama of Mona Vale, New South Wales, [picture] / EB Studios National Library of Australia PIC P865/125 circa between 1917 and 1946] and sections from made larger to show detail.

The sight of traffic around school drop off time that will happen later this week, on the first full day back to school for everyone, brings to mind stories my grandmother used to tell of her horse and riding to school in the days before there were school buses or boats to bring children across the water to school. 

Granny's eyes would light up as she spoke about how her horse was her best friend, about playing hide and seek with her brothers when she and her horse would gallop ahead and then both of them crouch down hiding behind a green bank, my young grandmother giggling and her horse snuffling (giggling too?) as those boys rode past - unable to see them.

"She was a very smart horse." my grandmother used to say.

Of course in Pittwater school was often reached by a long walk ('Shank's Pony' - your feet! ) or on horseback in the days before there were good roads or school buses. There are people among us still who recall riding all the way from Palm Beach to St. Ives as weekend 'fun' and people who still enjoy riding their horses now - the Ingleside Riders Group for example.

The traffic and Gran's anecdote also reminded us of a little insight we ran for you a few years back on how four boys used to share one horse to get to school and a page we put together for you on how Pittwater once had Australia's First School Launch. Children who live on Scotland Island and our Western Shores still get to school via the water - only today it's a Church Point Ferry that brings them to school - some to Newport Public School, some to Pittwater High School. Must be a lovely way to start the day.

Today you all get to school on a bus or on your bike or someone drops you off in a car or you're big enough to walk all the way there and back again.

Most students attending Pittwater schools live within a short distance of their school - but imagine of you had to get up with the dawn and ride a horse 15 miles over bush tracks to get to school and then do the same to get home again. This would be a wonderful adventure of course - imagine all you would see along the way each day - but it would mean you could spend as much time travelling to and from school as you would spend at your desk, learning how to write or add things up.

This Issue, apart from wishing you all a great first term back at school, those insights run below showing the few hours you may now spend having a surf, having a sail, doing your homework or simply strolling home at leisure were, just over a hundred years ago, time spent simply getting to and from school.

As so many ask for a re-run of these insights, people who love horses and people who like mucking about on boats we suspect, we run it again for you all this year too.

An additional LONG version of another Pittwater school, that began at Church Point, runs as this week's History feature too. We'll return to the 'Summer in Pittwater' theme next Sunday.

The school launch started picking up children at 7.15 am and took almost two hours to call into all the little bays and wharves between Barrenjoey Lighthouse (where children lived with their Lighthouse Keeper parents) to get to school. 

Must have given them all a great time to have a daydream in - or perhaps join in singing the same song.

ON THE ROAD TO SCHOOL. 
To ride a long distance every day to school is not at all peculiar' to Australia, but there is no doubt that it is sometimes done here under conditions that are essentially local. A rather singular case of this kind has furnished our artist with an illustration, which will not be viewed with less interest on account of the circumstance it depicts having ah actual foundation in fact, and being chronicled in a Victorian newspaper. 

Four young boys in a bush locality live no less than 15 miles from the nearest school. This is a condition that would damp the ardour for knowledge of most youthful aspirants to learning, and would be looked upon by many parents as satisfactorily exempting them from the operation of the compulsory clause of the Education Act. Not so with the youngsters in question. Their father has an old horse, which would appear to possess the sailor's great point of merit in a horse, 'a long back and good, carrying capacity.' They all mount this highly domestic quadruped, sitting one after the other on the bare and somewhat razor-shaped back, the eldest in front to 'steer,' and trot off to the distant school in the morning, returning at night.

The patient horse, who is entirely uninterested in such matters as educational standards, has, nevertheless, to render his services towards this object, and jogs oft' with the juvenile family on his back to the school, where nothing but a not very luxuriant grass paddock awaits him. In the afternoon, school over, he is again caught, the old cart 'winkers.'-are slipped over his somewhat elongated head, the passengers climb up to their not too comfortable seat, and the steady-going old steed readily gets up the steam for a swinging trot 'homeward. In a school at Tasmania, on a recent occasion, one pupil, a girl, was distinguished with a prize on account of the immense number of miles that she had to travel on foot in a year for the education she was acquiring. If not only results, but also the labour of getting them, were taken into consideration, our young Victorians might perhaps be thought deserving of some other form of recognition in addition to that of having their daily journey made the subject of a picture in The Sketcher.
Sketches. (1874, October 31). The Australasian Sketcher with Pen and Pencil (Melbourne, Vic. : 1873 - 1889), p. 116. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article60605611
Off to School in 1874 - The original runs below from (1874, October 31). The Australasian Sketcher with Pen and Pencil (Melbourne, Vic. : 1873 - 1889), p. 117. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-page5985651 
Children on horseback off to school, photo by C. H. Kerry, 1880's; photo courtesy National Library of Australia, nla.cat-vn6099952

WITH THE CHILDREN. HOMEWARD BOUND.

Some few years ago in and around Pittwater were found many children who could neither write nor spell their own names. The nearest school was miles away, and quite inaccessible to the children living at-the mouth of the bay. Directly the attention of the department was called to this matter it set itself to remedy so great an evil. A trim little-oil launch was requisitioned, subsidised by the Government, and now the visitor to Newport, Bayview, Clareville, or Kurring-gai Chase, may see the unique spectacle of a launch full of children going- to or from the public school at Church Point.

It starts on its way at 7.15 a.m., and gathers the children from the many little bays and inlets that make beautiful that fine stretch of water to the left of Barrenjoey. At 9.30 the pupils are all seated at their desks.

Afternoon is the best time for the visitor to take a trip with the launchman, and see how the State caters for the children.

The launch leaves Newport on the home-ward journey about 3.15 p.m. It heads straight for the point, where the children, some 25 or 30 of them, having left the pretty schoolhouse half a mile distant, have assembled themselves on the jetty. A pretty picture they make, too, as they stand on the steps, white-pinafored, dark coated, rosy-cheeked, with bag in hand or slung over shoulder. The launch draws alongside. The bigger boys and girls step in, carefully watched by the assistant, who lifts the smaller ones and sets them quickly but gently on the deck of the boat. Another moment and away she goes with her cargo of little souls. A quick steam along the right shore, and a stop is made at one of the pretty bays for which Pittwater is renowned. A curly-headed little girl, some 6 years old, and her bigger brother are landed. They shout a merry "Good-bye" to the other youngsters, and off they go to the big house, where their parents are. Another stop, and three others are landed, along with sundry loaves of bread, and what looks uncommonly like a leg of mutton. Further on a halt is made to deliver the day's paper, a tin of biscuits, three loaves of bread, and two more children.

The launch is slowing down. This landing is not so easy as the last. There is no wharf here. The fisherman pulls out in his boat, draws alongside, and the children step in. A few loaves of bread, a letter, and sundry parcels accompany them.

Many stoppages are made before Barrenjoey is reached. The largest number of children are delivered to here, along with a larger supply of provisions.

It is said that boys and girls of 1-7 living in this lonely, out-of-the-way place had no means of education until the department provided this means of conveyance, and carried them free of charge to the school at the head of the bay. The launch turns homeward, but it is a long run before the four remaining children are landed.

It grows colder. They huddle closer together. The launchman suggests a song. Their willingness to comply proves it to be the usual way they pass the time down the bay after losing their companions. Four shrill little voices pipe "When the Empire Calls," "Three' Blind Mice," and "The Canadian Boat Song." "God Save the King" gives the visitors timely warning that they are nearing home, though there is no sight or sound of habitation. They are landed at last. Their day is a long one. They are the first passengers and the last. They must make an early start, for their home lies three-quarters of a mile from the water. Away they go, each carrying a loaf of broad and their schoolbags. They are a wee bit timid of the walk just yet. An evening or two previous they were in sight of home when two native cats jumped down on the narrow bush track. With one accord they dropped everything, turned themselves round, and never stopped running till they reached the water where 15 minutes previously they had been landed.

A quick run of half an hour with one or two stoppages for the delivery of provisions to the lonely fisherman or selector brings the launch back to its moorings.

Truly we live in wondrous times when the education of the children of the solitary fisherman, the lighthouse keeper, or the caretaker is thought of so much importance that means are found to bring them to the in to whom that education can be obtained.-"Herald." ZAVA.

WITH THE CHILDREN. (1906, December 25)Clarence and Richmond Examiner (Grafton, NSW : 1889 - 1915), p. 2. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article61461790

Small launch built by Gordon Beattie, perhaps the Coral circa 1910, courtesy Gosford Library images.

Bayview School Launch.

(See Illustration on this page.)

The Patonga is a motor launch, engaged, morning and evening, of every school day, to convoy children residing at Barrenjoey, Careel Bay, and the adjoining district, to the Bayview (Central) School. Pittwater, although one of the most beautiful, interesting, and picturesque of Nature's gems, is by tho very reason of its loveliness, a difficult place to provide with schools. Until Quite recently the only way those children could get-to either Bayview or Newport Public Schools, was by rowing boat, the distance in some cases being nearly eight miles. It will be seen that only in very fine weather was it possible to attend school, and the result, unfortunately, was that the people, by the peculiarity of their location, were practically debarred the advantage of our Public Instruction Act. 

Numerous requests were made to have more convenient  school  accommodation for these children (29 in number), but there was this difficulty--That to give all these families anything like equal opportunities, would have necessitated two or three small schools. Early in the present year, the Hon John Perry, then Minister for Education, Instructed Mr. Senior Inspector Lobban to take the matter in hand, and ascertain the best way in which the request could be treated. 

After exhaustive inquiries had been made by that able officer; assisted by Mr. S. Morrison, teacher Bayview Public School, it was proposed to gather together all the children, and take them by launch to Bayview Public School. This idea commended itself to Mr. Perry, and arrangements were made with Mr. William Sykes, the owner of the Patonga, to give the scheme a fair trial. The service was inaugurated in  April, and has been running nearly four months. 

As this was one of the last administrative acts of Mr.Perry, he may feel proud of the result, which is described in departmental reports as "an .unqualified success". 

This, launch, is the first and only school launch in Australia. The boat is a distinct departure from the style usually adopted for motor launches. She is 30ftlong and 8ft beam, the motive power being supplied by a 5 h.p. Hercules engine. She was built specially strong to withstand the rough sea sometimes experienced in the bay, and it is a source of gratification to the department that all through :the recent heavy weather the timetable has been carried out. She is in charge of her owner, and presents an interesting appearance as she comes each morning, with 20 to 30 children, to Church Point Wharf. The Bayview (Pittwater) Public School Launch. 

Bayview School Launch. (1904, August 3). Australian Town and Country Journal (NSW : 1870 - 1907), p. 37. Retrieved from  http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article71512651


The Bayview (Pittwater) Public School Launch. Bayview School Launch. (1904, August 3).Australian Town and Country Journal (Sydney, NSW : 1870 - 1907), , p. 37. Retrieved  from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article71512651

Images is  from a Newspaper cutting held by the State Library of Western Australia: 

'This image is part of a collection of 69 albums of pictures, postcards, and newspaper cuttings donated to the State Library of Western Australia in July 1961 by the family of the late Mr Miller. Jack Edward Miller was employed as a boatman and cook by the Harbour and Lights Department in February 1902 and spent some time at Breaksea Island lighthouse near Albany.' Call Number U15g.

Pittwater School ferry – the Patonga Launch was built by E. Fisk at Penrith in 1903.

A NEW MODEL LAUNCH

This reminds us of the model oil launch referred to in the heading, and which we were invited to inspect. There is nothing so calculated to push a country forward as private enterprize (although our present Government is not of that opinion), and did we but have more of it, things would soon hum in Australasia as loud as in America. A step or two up the ladder of private enterprize has just been taken in Penrith in connection with water traffic and the result—a splendid launch, built on perfectly modern scientific principles, with all latest contrivances for speed, convenience and comfort. The enterprising proprietor is Mr William Sykes, architect, and the builder Mr E Fisk, well known as a thoroughly efficient and -reliable ship-builder, having served his apprenticeship in Sydney.

Unfortunately for the district this handsome modern launch is not being perfected and expensively finished to float on and grace our deserted waters, but is intended by the owner for service on the Hawkesbury River. Whether this is through the unwillingness of the public to patronise and encourage such undertakings, or whether the proprietor has in view a much more profitable scheme in the locality chosen, is not in our province to say. Anyway, it is clear at-the present time our river has no attraction for its owners, and the cause remains a knotty problem to solve.

The new launch is being built at the rear of Mr Sykes residence in High-street, and is 30ft in length—the beam being 8ft- has a depth of 4ft 6in. and a draught of about 2ft. She is being built especially strong, having 3 lots of frames, and for greater protection is double-planked all over. The engine-house, which is placed centrally, is very neatly constructed and well lighted, the upper part, which is glazed with very thick glass, standing about 2ft above the deck. The motive power will be supplied by a powerful oil engine of latest design. The boat is beautifully fitted up for the accommodation of 16 people, sleeping arrangements being made for 8. For the safety of passengers the floor of the cock-pit and all seats are constituted so as to float in case of necessity, and so be the means of saving life. All this is being done in compliance with the Navigation Department's regulations. The fore cabin is also conveniently arranged and fitted up, and there is a hat oh way on the deck above for the storage of the anchor, &c. The lower parts of the launch are securely covered with copper sheeting, to water mark, the whole of the work being splendidly executed. The boat will have a single screw. Above deck she will be fitted with awnings which may be made entirely water and wind proof when necessary. The launch, when finished, will be a handsome structure, fit to face either a rough sea or smoother waters. The proprietor informs us the boat will be run by his son. A Model New Launch. (1903, May 23). Nepean Times (Penrith, NSW : 1882 - 1962), p. 6. Retrieved from  http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article100916017 

*Shanks' (or shanks's) mare (or nag or pony) derives from the name of the lower part of the leg between the knee and ankle - the shank, nowadays more often known as the shin-bone or tibia. This was alluded to in the early form of this term - shank's nag and  originated in Scotland in the 18th century. There are several early citations in Scottish literature, as here in Robert Fergusson's Poems on Various Subjects, 1774: 

"He took shanks-naig, but fient may care."

 Church Point Ferry Amelia K on the to Newport School Ferry Run

Some Earlier Pittwater Horses:


MANLY TO NEWPORT AND PITTWATER. Boulton's Royal Mail Coaches leave Manly every SATURDAY, at 3.30p.m., returning Mondays at 5 a.m. WILLIAM  BOULTON, Newport Hotel, Newport. Advertising. (1883, June 15). The Sydney Morning Herald(NSW : 1842 - 1954), p. 9. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article13537010

Joseph Black at Newport with passengers and the mail - courtesy Mr Black's family


3. Dee Why Hill. 

4. At Narrabeen. 

THE MANLY-PITTWATER CYCLE PATHS. (1901, August 24). The Sydney Mail and New South Wales Advertiser (NSW : 1871 - 1912), p. 479. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article165234777


Narrabeen Hotel, licensee Robert Norris, [before 1905] , from Album; Box 14: Royal Australian Historical Society : photonegatives, ca. 1900-1925. Image No.: c16401_0051_c - courtesy State Library of NSW

CHURCH   POINT   IN   1904.  


Image No.: c071860047 From Box 21: Glass negatives including views of New Zealand farms, Sydney Harbour, Narrabeen (Warriewood), ca 1890-1910, Photographs of William Joseph Macpherson, courtesy State Library of NSW.



Readers can visit  The Rock Lily Hotel (Restaurants you could also stay at) history page for more.


TRAM WAY CONNECTION WITH NARRABEEN.


CUTTING OUT BALLAST FOR THE NEW TRAMLINE AT CABLE'S QUARRY, AT THE TOP OF DEE WHY HILL.


'PRINCE,' A GOVERNMENT HORSE EMPLOYED IN THE NARRABEEN TRAMWAY WORK, PULLING SIX TONS OF RAILS UP A GRADE OF 1 IN 19,


A PANORAMA OF NARRABEEN AND THE LAKE FROM THE TOP OF THE HILL NEAR COLLAROY.

TRAMWAY CONNECTION WITH NARRABEEN. (1912, March 6). The Sydney Mail and New South Wales Advertiser (NSW : 1871 - 1912), p. 35. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article164295089 



BATHING AT NARRABEEN, FOR CHILDREN AND HORSES.


A GROUP OF MERRY YOUNGSTERS AT NARRABEEN.
No title (1926, January 3). Sunday Times (Sydney, NSW : 1895 - 1930), p. 10 (Social and Magazine Section). Retrieved from  http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article128132989


Skewbald foals grazing at Warriewood, N.S.W.

Have you heard the wag-tails chirrup,
Felt the dawn wind creeping cold?
Till your foot was in the stirrup
And the whole world changed to gold! 
THE POETS' AUSTRALIA (1953, July 15).The Australian Women's Weekly (1933 - 1982), p. 15. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article46455683 

Mail by horseback Postie
One of the few women "posties" in NSW, 18 year old Josephine Griptock, of Bayview, delivers the mail on horseback to people living along the shores of Pittwater. Although she is neyer footsore, Josephine says she often feels shaken to pieces and utterly weary by the time she has finished her day's work. Josephine came from England nearly four years ago' with her mother, Mrs. S. L. Gristock, and her brother George. She has worked with the PMG since her arrival, first at Mona Vale post Office as a telegram girl, and now as official Post-woman at Bayview.' Housewives prefer a ters and packages, she believes. "They chat  to me about their children' and their household worries and often get me to pick up messages for them from the local store," Josephine said. "A. postwoman has a chance to help them as no one else could." 
Horses earn keep 
Her work at the' post office keeps Josephine's two horses in good condition as well as providing the money to keep them. She takes special care to see that they are well groomed while on the mail round, and is delighted if one of the householders comments on their smooth appearance. Both horses, a white and a chestnut, have won prizes in local gymkhanas and will be entered for the Royal Easter Show this year. Before she came to Australia, Josephine lived in Kent, where she did not keep any pets. Now she has three cats, two cockatoos, a cow, two horses, ducks and fowls to look after. At Christmas Josephine received presents for the pets as well as for herself from grateful customers.

MISS JOSEPHINE GRISTOCK saddles her horse, Johnnie, ready for the morning mail delivery. 
Mail by horseback 'postie' (1953, February 4). The Sun (Sydney, NSW : 1910 - 1954), p. 25 (LATE FINAL EXTRA). Retrieved fromhttp://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article231010324 

 EB Studios (Sydney, N.S.W.). 1917, Panorama of Palm Beach, New South Wales, 14 , PIC P865/6/1 LOC Nitrate store,  (zoomable at http://nla.gov.au/nla.obj-162567120 ) and sections from – courtesy National Library of Australia 

School Traffic Jam on the First Day Back to School in 2019 - at North Avalon

 

Out Front 2025 Opens this February at the Manly Art Gallery & Museum 

Audrey Allan, Silent Echoes In Monochrome, Gouache painting, Pittwater High School. Photo: Audrey Allan. 

Council is proud to announce its annual Out Front 2025 exhibition will be held at Manly Art Gallery & Museum (MAG&M) from 21 February 2025.

Now in its 31st year, Out Front features 25 selected artistic works created by Year 12 students across 21 Northern Beaches secondary schools for their HSC submission. It celebrates the creativity, talent and hard work of the region’s emerging young artists.

Northern Beaches Mayor Sue Heins commended the students for their achievements and dedication.

“Each year this exhibition highlights the extraordinary talent and creativity of our local students. It highlights the importance of fostering the arts in our youth and encouraging self-expression.

“It is inspiring to see how art education in our schools encourages students to push boundaries and to think critically about the world around them.

“It is a testament to the commitment of these talented artists, their teachers and their schools.

“We are immensely proud to support this important milestone for our young artists and to provide a platform for their work to shine,” Mayor Heins said.

Tilda Brownlow, Footloose and Fancy Free, painting, Stella Maris College. Photo: Tilda Brownlow.

The curated collection reflects a broad range of themes and techniques, demonstrating the depth and diversity of talent across the Northern Beaches. The exhibition features a variety of works spanning painting, video, sculpture, drawing, photography and ceramics.

Several awards are granted to participants: the Theo Batten Bequest Youth Art Award, valued at $5000, helps support talented young artists pursue art studies at a tertiary level; and the KALOF People’s Choice Award, valued at $500.

MAG&M is also offering a mentorship session to support one young artists’ transition to a professional level.

PROGRAM

Out Front 2025

21 February – 6 April 2025
Manly Art Gallery & Museum
West Esplanade Reserve, Manly
Open Tuesday to Sunday, 10am – 5pm
Free entry

Exhibition opening night
Friday 21 February, 6–8pm
To be opened by UNSW Associate Professor Lizzie Muller
RSVP link 

MAG&M members and volunteers’ preview
Friday 21 February, 10-11am
RSVP link  

Zahara Spring, Effervescent, Interconnection, Instinct-Love, St. Lukes. Photo: Zahara Spring.

Northern Beaches Youth Theatre Romeo and Juliet Production Opportunity

Northern Beaches Youth Theatre's June performance of “Romeo & Juliet” will be a load of fun and they want you to be part of it!

''Calling all 12-17 year olds to register for our Feb 7th auditions at bit.ly/NBYTRandJ''

Want to volunteer behind the scenes? Email them at infonbyt@gmail.com

The Youth Theatre rehearses at:

10 Jubilee Ave, Warriewood

Applications to join the DOVES Council are open for 2025

Applications for the DOVES Minister’s Student Council are open for 2025.

The Minister's Student Council, known as the Department of Student Voices in Education and Schools (DOVES), is an initiative of the NSW Government to ensure student voices are heard in developing education policy and addressing matters of concern to students.

In October 2020 a student steering committee was formed to help co-design the council.

The result is DOVES a 27-member council representing students from all Operational Directorates across NSW, including Connected Communities, who advocate on behalf of their school communities.

There are three students representing each operational directorate who bring their wider student community into the policy process by holding regular DOVES forums, where they hear from special interest groups.

The number of positions available is listed below by directorate, 15 in total.

Regional South 2
Connected Communities 0
Regional North & West 2
Regional North 3
Rural North 1
Rural South & West 3
Metro North 1
Metro South & West 1
Metro South 2

Students initial expressions of interest can be submitted via a video of up to 90 seconds or less in length and showcase you:

1. Tell us about yourself

2. Why would you be a good advocate and member of the DOVES Council?

3. Why are you passionate about helping NSW public education students?

4. What is an initiative you have implemented in your school?

Applications are open for students currently in Year 6 to Year 9.
Each student will sit on the council for a 2-year term
There are no Year 12 students on the council due to HSC commitments.
If you are in Year 10 or Year 11 now you will be ineligible as your second year on the council will be in Year 12.
A selection panel will review all submissions and invite shortlisted applicants to join a short online video interview. The panel includes students currently on the DOVES Council and department representatives.

All students submitting their applications will be contacted.

Please submit your application video via the Google form (External link)

Applications close 8 February 2025 (Week 2, Term 1)

TAFE Fee-free* courses - semester 1 2025 enrol now

NSW Fee-free* TAFE is a joint initiative of the Australian Commonwealth and New South Wales Governments, providing tuition-free training places for eligible students wanting to train, retrain or upskill.

Places are limited and not guaranteed. Enrolling or applying early with all required documentation is recommended. The number of funded NSW Fee-free* TAFE places is determined by the terms of the skills agreement between the Australian Commonwealth and New South Wales Governments.

Semester 1 2025 Fee Free* TAFE Certificates and Diplomas.

Enrol Now in:

  •  Aboriginal Studies and Mentoring
  •  Agriculture
  •  Animal Care and Horse Industry
  •  Automotive
  •  Aviation
  •  Building and Construction Trades
  •  Business and Marketing
  •  Civil Construction and Surveying
  •  Community and Youth Services
  •  Education and Training
  •  Electrotechnology
  •  Engineering
  •  Farming and Primary Production
  •  Fashion
  •  Food and Hospitality
  •  Healthcare
  •  Horticulture and Landscaping
  •  Information Technology
  •  Mining and Resources
  •  Music and Production
  •  Screen and Media
  •  Sport and Recreation
  •  Travel and Tourism
  •  Water Industry Operations

Who is Eligible for NSW Fee-free TAFE?

To be eligible, you must at the time of enrolment:

  • Live or work in New South Wales.
  • Be an Australian or New Zealand citizen, permanent Australian resident, or a humanitarian visa holder.
  • Be aged 15 years or over, and not enrolled at any school.
  • Be enrolling in a course for the first time for Semester 1 2025 and your studies must commence between 1 January 2025 and 30 June 2025.

You are strongly encouraged to apply if you fall under one or more of these categories:

  • First Nations people
  • LGBTIQ+ community
  • Veterans
  • Job seekers
  • Young people
  • Unpaid carers
  • Women interested in non-traditional fields
  • People living with a disability
  • People from culturally and linguistically diverse backgrounds.

Find out more and enrol via:  www.tafensw.edu.au/fee-free-short-courses

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Translucent

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Adjective

1. (of a substance) allowing light, but not detailed shapes, to pass through; semi-transparent.

From: late 16th century (in the Latin sense): from Latin translucent- ‘shining through’, from the verb translucere, from trans- ‘through’ + lucere ‘to shine’.

Compare: 

Aurora Australis At Mawson Station: August 2023

photos by and courtesy Jess Condon Antarctica, taken on Saturday August 19 2023

''Aurora over an Emperor penguin rookery. Emperor's are only found in Antarctica, and are about the size of a 6 year old child, 19/8/23 Mawson Station, Antarctica.'' - Jess

Jess arrived there in February with 19 others and will be getting collected Feb. next year. She is there for 12 months helping to keep a research station running through the Winter.





Luminescent!!

Bioluminescence at Station Beach, Palm Beach in the early hours of Sunday-Monday morning August 20 to 21 2023 from midnight until around 1am. 

Photos: by and courtesy Jarvis Liu - Artist: jarvisliu559

Jarvis specialises in Street Photography. He was based in Chengdu, China and is now in Sydney, Australia.

Check out more of his work on Instagram; www.instagram.com/jarvisliu559 and via: https://linktr.ee/jarvisliu559

Palm Beach Longboarders Inc states there  was bioluminescence at  Avalon beach on the evening Thursday August 24. People can witness this natural phenomenon when there is lots of bioluminescence in the water, usually from an algae bloom of plankton. The bioluminescent sea or estuary will glow when it's disturbed by a wave breaking or a splash in the water at night. Algae bloom sea sparkle events occur in calm and warm sea conditions.




Swimming in the sweet spot: how marine animals save energy on long journeys

Kimberley StokesSwansea University

Competitive swimmers know that swimming underwater causes less drag resistance than swimming at the surface. Splashing around making waves isn’t the most efficient way to swim. Any energy spent creating waves is essentially wasted, as water is moved without providing forward thrust for the swimmer.

New research by my colleagues and I has found evidence that many air-breathing marine animals know this too – or rather they have evolved swimming behaviour that minimises wasted energy on long journeys.

We know a lot about how birds save energy on their migrations, such as flying in V formationsriding updrafts, or timing their departure for favourable winds. But it has been challenging to study these kinds of adaptations in marine animals, which are largely hidden from view, particularly during long-distance travel.

Whales and sea turtles, for example, often travel thousands of miles to breed or feed. These animals have evolved to minimise the energy costs of such long journeys, allowing them to conserve energy for reproduction and survival.

Using Fitbit-style accelerometer data, depth-loggers and video footage from animal-borne cameras, we collected detailed swim-depth measurements in free-living little penguins and loggerhead turtles. We compared these with satellite-tracking depth data for green turtles on long-distance migrations, and published data from whales, other species of penguins and migrating sea turtles from other populations.

Optimal depths

What we discovered was a remarkable similarity in relative swim depth across sea turtles, penguins and whales. When these air-breathing animals are travelling rather than feeding or evading predators, they swim at near-optimal depths to minimise energy waste. They swim just deep enough to avoid creating waves at the surface but not so deep that they expend extra energy travelling up and down to breathe.

This sweet spot for energy efficiency has long been established in physics. Experiments show that “wave drag” – additional drag from wave creation – is minimised once an object is at a depth of three times its diameter. For swimming animals, this diameter refers to their body thickness from back to chest.

Our research revealed that many marine animals, from little penguins (about 30cm long) to pygmy blue whales (nearly 20m long), travel at depths of around three body thicknesses under the surface. This shared strategy helps them save energy on their epic journeys across the oceans.

These findings are especially exciting because they span such a wide range of species, from birds to mammals and reptiles. They also have important implications for conservation. Knowing where animals travel and at what depths can help us design better conservation measures to protect them.

For example, understanding typical swim depths could help reduce the risk of boat strikes, which are a major threat to whales, or decrease accidental captures in fishing gear. Tracking animals to find out where they live and travel has become a key part of designing effective conservation measures. For marine animals, considering swim depth – essentially adding a third dimension – can also help to inform strategies to provide better protection.

A figure showing the swim depths of different marine animals
Many marine animals travel at a depth of around 3x their body depth (dotted lines). Kimberley StokesCC BY

Of course, not all swim depths are determined by energy efficiency alone. Animals may dive deeper to hunt for prey or avoid predators. But during long-distance migrations or shorter “commutes” to feeding areas, this energy-saving pattern emerges across many air-breathing species.

Collecting depth-tracking data from migrating animals has been notoriously difficult, but advances in technology are making it easier. We are thrilled that our work has contributed to uncovering this widespread adaptation, and we believe there will be much more to learn as tracking tools improve.

Historically, depth-tracking tags have prioritised recording the deepest and longest dives. They are often seen as the most dramatic or impressive aspects of animal dive behaviour. Our research highlights the importance of near-surface tracking too. This “ordinary” behaviour of swimming at just the right depth is no less impressive, given the energy savings it enables over vast distances.The Conversation

Kimberley Stokes, Research Officer in Biosciences, Swansea University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Friday essay: Seize the day – Virginia Woolf’s Mrs Dalloway at 100

Naomi MilthorpeUniversity of Tasmania

I’m at the park with my daughter, who is jumping in and out of puddles, splashing, shrieking at me (Mum! Look what I can do!), as I read frantically, taking one-handed notes on my phone (Mum! Look at this!). Part of me wishes I could enjoy with her this moment of pleasure in movement. The other, more insistent part is thinking about this essay: where to start, what to say, how to sum up the extraordinary legacy of the book I’m re-reading, Virginia Woolf’s Mrs Dalloway, which this year marks 100 years since its first publication in 1925. How am I supposed to write about this book?

If you were to read a synopsis, it might seem like a book purely for an academic specialist (which, admittedly, I am). One day in London in June 1923, an ageing rich woman, Clarissa Dalloway, prepares to give a party. Across town, a shell-shocked Great War veteran, Septimus Warren Smith, loses his grip on sanity. Between them oscillate other characters: Clarissa’s former lover Peter Walsh, Clarissa’s husband Richard and daughter Elizabeth, Elizabeth’s tutor Doris Kilman, Septimus’s wife Rezia, and his doctors Holmes and Bradshaw.

Like that other modernist monument, James Joyce’s Ulysses (1922), Mrs Dalloway is explicitly quotidian. It follows ordinary people through ordinary activities on an ordinary day – shopping, walking in the park, riding the bus, going to appointments, mending a dress. As Woolf’s characters go about their day, scenes and impressions are filtered through their individual consciousnesses, threaded together with language, images and memories.

The novel opens with the famous line “Mrs Dalloway said she would buy the flowers herself”, a sentence remarkable for its banality, as well as for its commitment to the in medias res plunge into life that Woolf was so keen on. The iconic status of the line is demonstrated by the number of online parodies it inspires, perhaps only surpassed by William Carlos Williams’s poem This Is Just To Say, which has become a verified meme.

A new seam

On Good Friday 1924, Woolf wrote on a page of the manuscript she was drafting – then called “The Hours” – that “I will write whatever I want to write.” She could write whatever she wanted to write because she owned her own publishing house, The Hogarth Press. The actual press was in the basement of her suburban Richmond home.

Mrs Dalloway, first edition dust jacket, with cover art by Vanessa Bell. The Hogarth Press, 1925. Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Mrs Dalloway was the second of Woolf’s novels to be self-published in this way. Being a small-press publisher allowed her to experiment formally in ways that would have been impossible if she was working with a mainstream publisher. In A Writer’s Diary, she describes her process as both exploratory and technical. On August 30, 1923, she wrote: “I dig out beautiful caves behind my characters”. Later, in October 1924: “I practise writing; do my scales”.

I recently co-hosted a conference here in Hobart, which included a panel on contemporary Tasmanian experimental writing. The writers who spoke that day talked of the struggle to place work that pushed the boundaries of form and genre. A hundred years after Woolf’s efforts to unearth what she called a new “seam”, commercial imperatives continue to constrain writers and their work.

Despite Woolf’s refusal to compromise with mainstream tastes, Mrs Dalloway was well received. Her contemporaries recognised the novel’s importance immediately. “An intellectual triumph”, proclaimed P.C. Kennedy in the New Statesman; “a cathedral”, pronounced E.M. Forster in the New Criterion.

It sold moderately well: 1,500 copies within about a month of its publication on May 14 – more than her prior novel, Jacob’s Room, had sold in a year. Her biographer Hermione Lee records that in 1926 income from writing allowed Woolf and her husband Leonard to install a hot water range and toilet at their country home.

Woolf’s novel was revolutionary for its depiction of same-sex attraction and mental illness, as well as for its challenge to the novel form and representation of time. Clarissa remembers the jolt of desire she felt as an 18-year-old for her friend Sally Seton, who kisses her on the terrace of her house at Bourton:

the most exquisite moment of her whole life passing a stone urn with flowers in it. Sally stopped; picked a flower; kissed her on the lips. The whole world might have turned upside down! The others disappeared; there she was alone with Sally. And she felt that she had been given a present, wrapped up, and told just to keep it, not to look at it – a diamond, something infinitely precious, wrapped up, which, as they walked (up and down, up and down), she uncovered, or the radiance burnt through, the revelation, the religious feeling!

Clarissa, made “virginal” in middle age by illness and marital boredom, is surprised by this irrupting memory. She connects it to her sense of joy in life itself: “the moment of this June morning on which was the pressure of all the other mornings […] collecting the whole of her at one point”.

Clarissa and Septimus Smith – though they never meet – are shadow versions of each other. Both have beaky noses, thin pale birdlike bodies, and histories of illness.

Septimus, so capable as a soldier in the Great War, buries the trauma of seeing his commanding officer Evans killed, only to have it resurface in visual and aural hallucinations, of Evans behind the trees, and birds singing in Greek. He perceives, as Clarissa does, the burden of the past upon the present, and he suffers as a result of the coercion of the social system – what Woolf’s narrator ironises as the sister goddesses Conversion and Proportion.

“Worshipping proportion […] made England prosper”, because proportion forbids despair, illness, and emotional extremes. Conversion, the strong arm of Empire, “offers help, but desires power; smites out of her way roughly the dissentient, the dissatisfied”. Conversion “loves blood better than brick, and feasts most subtly on the human will”. Together, they suck the life from those who cannot or will not comply with them.

For Septimus, who has witnessed the dreadful disproportion of the war, ordinary social life becomes a torturous pressure cooker, a “gradual drawing together of everything to one centre before his eyes, as if some horror had come almost to the surface and was about to burst into flames”. A reviewer for the Times Literary Supplement emphasised this aspect of its experimentalism:

Watching Mrs Woolf’s experiment, certainly one of the hardest and very subtly planned, one reckons up its cost. To get the whole value of the present you must enhance it, perhaps, with the past.

Watching my daughter lark about is shadowed by the two surgeries she had in early childhood to correct her developmental hip dysplasia. I hear her screech with joy in the park, rocketing about freely; I hear her scream in pain in the hospital, encased in plaster from the midsection down. As Woolf knew, the past and the present are experienced within us simultaneously.

Doubled experience

“In this book I have almost too many ideas,” Woolf wrote in her diary on June 19, 1923. “I want to give life and death, sanity and insanity; I want to criticise the social system, and to show it at work, at its most intense.”

Woolf’s ideas have inspired scores of interpretations, focusing on time, space, reality, psychology, domesticity, history, sexual relations, politics, fashion, the environment, health and illness. She is now probably the most written-about 20th century English author. I can remember vividly first reading this novel as an undergraduate, after which I devoured Woolf’s revolutionary 1929 essay A Room of One’s Own, which criticised the educational, economic and social constraints that prevented women, in many instances, from writing anything at all.

Cover of the first edition of A Room of One’s Own (1929). Public domain.

Woolf, of course, could and did write. This was a function, as she knew, of her financial and class privilege. Feminist politics has progressed beyond Woolf, but she laid one of the foundation stones. In her fiction, she modelled a method of writing that critiques patriarchal thinking. She focuses our attention on overlooked individuals and their inner lives, and she splendidly undoes the Victorian conception of plot.

The same year Woolf published Mrs Dalloway, she also published her important collection of essays, The Common Reader. The first piece in that book, on the medieval letters of the Paston family, describes the illumination cast by these ordinary, non-literary pieces of writing:

Like all collections of letters, they seem to hint that we need not care overmuch for the fortunes of individuals. The family will go on, whether Sir John lives or dies. It is their method to heap up in mounds of insignificant and often dismal dust the innumerable trivialities of daily life, as it grinds itself out, year after year. And then suddenly they blaze up; the day shines out, complete, alive, before our eyes.

Mrs Dalloway encompasses this doubled experience of insignificance and blazing life. Woolf writes of the past emerging into the present day and the present’s capacity to reshape the past. In her diary, she called this her “tunnelling process, by which I tell the past in instalments, as I have need of it”.

In tunnelling through narrative, digging out caves behind her characters, Woolf flung out a lot of what seems to be dust – buying flowers, ogling girls, table manners and weight gain, advertising, letter writing, doctor’s appointments, eating eclairs in a department store cafe. The novel reminds us of these moments’ triviality, and their significance, through repeated reference to the bells and clocks of London striking the hour.

This is why the opening line – and the novel as a whole – is so remarkable. It catches drops of shimmering reality from moments that can so easily go unremarked. This, Woolf knew, was what writing needed to do: to stop time. As she wrote of the Pastons’ letters: “There is the ancient day, spread out before us, hour by hour.”

Portrait of Virginia Woolf – Roger Fry (1917) Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Her metaphor shows that Woolf’s thinking about time also had a spatial dimension. These two dimensions of space and time structure Mrs Dalloway’s theme and method, As David Daiches explained in his 1939 book The Novel and the Modern World, Woolf first links a series of different perspectives through a single shared moment in time – marked by the sound of the bells – then switches to an individual perspective, anchored in space, and moves through that individual’s memories.

Woolf wrote in her diary that “the caves shall connect and each comes to daylight at the present moment.” Daiches diagrammed these relations in time and space as a series of connected trees, arguing that they illustrated the novel’s concern with “the importance of contact and at the same time the necessity of keeping the self inviolable, of the extremes of isolation and domination”.

A legacy of inspiration

Since its publication, Mrs Dalloway has continued to inspire. For second-wave feminism, Woolf was a touchstone. Since the 1970s, she has enjoyed an unparalleled position in the history of 20th century letters, inspiring the recovery of other contemporaneous women writers connected with the Bloomsbury group.

Michael Cunningham’s The Hours, Robin Lippincott’s Mr Dalloway and John Lanchester’s Mr Phillips all appeared in the three years between 1998 and 2000, all of them reflecting Woolf’s legacy, tacitly or explicitly.

Because of the Oscar-winning film adaptation by Stephen Daldry, Cunningham’s novel is the most recognisable of these three. The Hours revises Mrs Dalloway through the stories of three women: Virginia Woolf herself; Laura Brown, a 1950s housewife who reads Mrs Dalloway; and Clarissa Vaughan, nicknamed Mrs Dalloway by her former lover Richard, for whom she throws a literary party.

Cunningham’s novel counterpoints, as Woolf did, the work of living with the work of art. The homemaker Laura Brown tries to bake a cake to equal a work of art, hoping “to be as satisfied and as filled with anticipation as a writer putting down the first sentence, a builder beginning to draw the plans.” Later, her delirious dying son Richard regrets what he views as the failure of his art to compete with simply living:

I wanted to create something alive and shocking enough that it could stand beside a morning in somebody’s life. The most ordinary morning. Imagine trying to do that. What foolishness.

More recently, Michelle Cahill’s Daisy & Woolf (2023) and Miranda Darling’s Thunderhead (2024) have wrestled with Mrs Dalloway the character, and with Woolf’s legacy. Darling’s novel revives a new “Mrs” Dalloway, Winona, a wealthy Sydney suburban writer, wife and mother, who struggles to break through “to something more real” than the constraint of middle class domestication.

Cahill’s Daisy & Woolf explores a minor character from Mrs Dalloway, whom Woolf failed to make properly live: Daisy Simmons, Peter Walsh’s Anglo-Indian fiancee. In Woolf’s novel, Daisy exists entirely offstage. She is a romantic memory of Peter’s, “dark, adorably pretty”. Daisy, writes Cahill, is

trapped in the past, in a moment, a vignette, but not the kind that would enter a room, open a window, to a life inside, a life in the mind, as it does for Clarissa with a squeak of hinges on the very first page of Mrs Dalloway! Not a real girl, Daisy, too arch perhaps, the air not stirring for her, seeing as she has no present tense.

Cahill’s present-day narrator Mina, writing back to Woolf, sees Daisy as a fully fleshed character: a mixed-race woman living in Calcutta in the twilight of Empire, as the Indian independence movement grows in strength. In recovering Daisy’s rich personal and political history, narrated through letters to Peter, Cahill reclaims interiority for this marginalised character.

In her 1937 essay Craftsmanship, the BBC broadcast of which is the only surviving recording of her voice, Woolf wrote: “Words, English words, are full of echoes, of memories, of associations.”

Mrs Dalloway shows us the ways that words can both connect and sever. Characters pass each other on the street, muse on a shared past, or witness the same event from different vantage points and through different filters of personality and psyche. As Hermione Lee explained, for Woolf “the really important life was ‘within’”.

Peter remembers Clarissa’s theory of life, which is expounded on top of a bus going down Shaftesbury Avenue:

She felt herself everywhere; not here here here; […] but everywhere. […] so that to know her, or any one, one must seek out the people who completed them; even the places […] since our apparitions, the part of us which appears, are so momentary compared with the other, the unseen part of us, which spreads wide, the unseen might survive, be recovered somehow attached to this person or that, or even haunting certain places, after death.

Late in the book, Septimus’s suicide is reported to Clarissa at the party. “Oh,” she thinks, “in the middle of my party, here’s death”. And in the middle of her party, Clarissa feels not only the disaster of death – “her disaster, her disgrace […] and she forced to stand here in her evening dress” – but the deep pulsing joy of life. “Nothing could be slow enough; nothing last too long.”

In certain lights – to paraphrase Michael Cunningham – Mrs Dalloway might look like the book of one’s own life, a book that will locate you, parent you, arm you for life’s changes. As an undergraduate, I was mesmerised by Woolf’s language and her grasp on the inner life.

Though Clarissa Dalloway is 52, Woolf turned 43 the year her novel was published. I’m turning 43 this year, too. Woolf, ravaged by long periods of illness and partially toothless, thought of herself as elderly. I do not, though I am no longer young. But to re-read this novel at this age reminds me to relish these long hours and short years: to sniff flowers, feel the lift of the gusting wind, jump and splash with my children, read the patterns made by the clouds. To seize the day.The Conversation

Naomi Milthorpe, Senior Lecturer in English, University of Tasmania

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The sound of skateboarding offers skaters a therapeutic way to connect with the city

Alistair Macrobert/Unsplash
Paul O'ConnorUniversity of Exeter

The sound of a skateboard trick communicates a world of sensory information to skateboarders. The power of “skatesound” – the noises of the board and the environment it comes into contact with – is so distinct because it relates to an experience that is both heard and felt.

Despite the sound of skateboarding frequently being an issue of public complaint, many skaters find it therapeutic, calming and a source of joy.

The visually spectacular activity of skateboarding is often presented as an exciting, iconoclastic pursuit. Despite its inclusion in the last two summer Olympics, it remains sub-culturally distinct. Some skateboarding practices are perhaps even arcane and cult-like in their reverence for banal concrete steps and metal benches.

Research my colleagues and I conducted argues that the niche world of skateboarding endures because of its dense sensory culture – one that is heard and felt by skateboarders.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


For skateboarders, skatesound is an augmented experience of the world multilayered with insights about the body, movement and the texture of the city.

Imagine the skateboard itself as an amplifying tool, one that gives fine and detailed information about terrain, efficacy and possibility. It is as if the skateboard is an extended sensory appendage, to feel and hear the world at large.

The sounds of the city

A series of research on sport and sound has explored how physical ability can be enhanced by music, the motivation and communal experience of spectator chants and even hearing loss.

Our research in skateboarding highlights new areas of consideration. One of the most distinct issues relates to how skateboarders have a dynamic understanding of skateable urban spaces that are unknown to other street denizens.

‘Relaxing’ skateboarding sounds videos rack up thousands of views on YouTube.

What skateboarders hear is also what they feel – the sound of the pavements or office plazas becomes part of their sensory world. Skateboarders can hear the sound of a skateboard and be aware of not just the environment it is being ridden through, but also the embodied experience, “the feel” of it for the rider.

One middle-aged Canadian skateboarder told us that when she heard the sound of someone skateboarding it both gave her joy and a sense of connection to the rider. Sound might therefore tell us something of the shared community and bond skaters report. They connect with each other because they share such a wealth of specialised knowledge.

black and white photo of man skating
Skaters say they feel excited when they hear the sound of someone else skateboarding. Tanner Vote/Unsplash

Generally, skateboarders love the sound of skateboarding, describing it with a range of adjectives as the “sound of freedom”, “happiness”, or simply “lovely”. Yet, they are also keenly aware that, by some, skateboarding is considered unpleasant noise.

The paradox of skatesound is that skateboarders are able to hold both opposing notions simultaneously. We collected numerous accounts of skateboarders deliberately avoiding certain locations and times so as not to disturb, startle and annoy other city users. Yet, their own experience of hearing skatesound unexpectedly while at work, or in the street below at home, was always met with excitement.

A universal among skateboarders is what we have termed the “head whip” – the immediate instinctual turn of the head to seek out the origin of skatesound. The association of this sound was reported as an invitation to adventure, a feeling of fraternity with an unseen but clearly heard member of the tribe.

A surprising feature of our research was that several participants reported some form of neurodiversity, either being on the autism spectrum or having ADHD. The sensory experience of skateboarding, of feeling what you see and hear, was reported in positive terms as a way to calm sometimes overpowering senses.

For these skaters, skatesound has become part of a full-body connecting experience engaging the physical, mental and emotional with the board and the world at large. It represents some form of craft and mastery of the chaos of everyday life.

For the past 15 years, the A-Skate foundation provided skateboarding opportunities for children on the autism spectrum in recognition of these therapeutic processes. A range of therapists worldwide are incorporating elements of skateboarding into their support of people’s needs, spanning anxiety to learning disabilities.

The art of skateboarding

Bridging the gap between skateboarder and non-skateboarder, artist Max Boutin’s Texturologies art installation (2022) enables those curious about the sensory world to get a no-risk taster.

Using dynamic sound, large visual screens and static boards that pulse with the skatesound being played underneath, Boutin’s art offers a sensory experience of the skateboarder’s unique relationship to urban space. As a consequence, hearing like a skateboarder becomes one of the simplest ways to feel like a skateboarder.

Boutin’s work advocates for the specific knowledge embedded in the act of skateboarding. It speaks of those who find joy and revelry in often neglected and unloved urban realms that have lost their enchantment to a public chaperoned endlessly into spaces of consumption.

As contempt for the city deepens, skatesound can allow us to feel our urban spaces in new ways.The Conversation

Paul O'Connor, Senior lecturer in Sociology, University of Exeter

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Marianne Faithfull: the singer with an inimitable voice was a Romantic poet at heart

Stephanie HernandezUniversity of Liverpool

Marianne Faithfull, the London-born singer with an inimitable voice, has passed away at the age of 78. She was known for many things: she was a pop star, an actress and a muse. But she was probably best known for her voice.

When she first entered the world of pop in 1964, her high-pitched tones rang with mellifluous vibrato. As she grew older and lived an increasingly excessive lifestyle, she developed a rasp – a quality borne of her unique experiences.

Faithfull’s final musical releases were works that incorporated Romantic poetry in different ways. She Walks in Beauty (2021) is a spoken-word album of canonical Romantic poetry by the likes of Lord Byron, Percy Shelley and John Keats. Songs of Innocence and Experience 1965-1995 (2022) is a chronological retrospective of her career which uses the name of William Blake’s poetry collection (1789) as its title.

As a PhD student focused on the legacy of Romanticism in 1960s and 1970s popular music, I’ve closely examined Faithfull’s engagement with Romantic literature throughout her career. These final two albums represent a beautiful culmination of her artistic journey, and are a testament to her unique voice and strong poetic influences.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


Songs of Innocence and Experience 1965-1995, like Blake’s poetry collection, is broken up into the sections Innocence and Experience.

The Innocence portion of the album covers Faithfull’s youth, featuring early hits such as This Little Bird. Her early sound incorporated baroque pop instrumentation, including harps, harpsichord and horn arrangements (Come and Stay with Me), as well as folk styles with the acoustic guitar at the centre of the sound (Cockleshells).

Faithfull’s voice in this section portrays her as an “innocent” girl in pop stardom, as its high pitch and pure tone embody a sense of naivete that is also reflected in her lyrics about young love, such as in Come and Stay With Me:

We’ll live a life no one has ever known
But I know you’re thinking that I’m hardly grown
But oh thank God, at last and finally
I can see you’re gonna stay with me

There is a noticeable shift in the Innocence section of the album with the song Sister Morphine. As the song was made in collaboration with her then-boyfriend, Mick Jagger, it features a noticeably more rock sound in contrast to her previous pop productions. You can also hear subtle changes in Faithfull’s voice: it cracks and sounds strained in places.

The song’s lyrics (“Please, Sister Morphine, turn my nightmares into dreams”) reflect the darker side of the mythologised “swinging sixties” lifestyle and its drug culture, which Faithfull has come to symbolise.

Blake’s Songs of Innocence features a piper as the presiding narrator over the poems. In contrast, Songs of Experience is meant to be heard through the voice of an ancient bard, as established in Introduction to the Songs of Experience:

Hear the voice of the Bard!
Who Present, Past, & Future sees
Whose ears have heard,
The Holy Word
That walk’d among the ancient trees.

The Experience section of Faithfull’s album features music from Broken English (1979) and her re-recording of As Tears Go By, from Strange Weather (1987). The songs in this portion of the album exhibit her completely transformed voice: from piper to bard, it is deeper, raw and more weathered as a result of her struggles with addiction and bouts of illness. This brought a distinct edge to her music, marking a new phase in her career.

Beyond the qualities of her voice, Faithfull’s song selection reflects Blake’s notions of Experience. Strange Weather (“Will you take me across the Channel / London Bridge is falling down”) aligns with Blake’s London geographically and thematically, as both explore entrapment and decay. Faithfull’s depiction of societal monotony, as in “Strangers talk only about the weather / All over the world / It’s the same …” echo Blake’s “charter’d street(s)” and “mind-forg’d manacles”.

Faithfull’s connection to Romantic poetry is most overt in She Walks in Beauty, which she made with Warren Ellis (Australian composer and member of Nick Cave and the Bad Seeds). In this album, she recites Romantic poetry set to Ellis’s music.

The poems she selected to recite are all by male poets and many feature voiceless female subjects, such as Byron’s She Walks in Beauty or Thomas Hood’s The Bridge of Sighs. On the album’s liner notes, Faithfull described how she related with these women, particularly Alfred, Lord Tennyson’s Lady of Shalott.

The Lady of Shalott is a woman cursed to live alone in a tower near Camelot – unable to look directly at the world, forced to weave what she sees in the mirror. Faithfull uses the Lady to reflect on the pressure she felt to conform to the expectations imposed on her by the press and music industry. There is a parallel between the Lady’s forced isolation and her struggles with being controlled and defined by external forces, as she explained:

Do I identify with the Lady? Oh yeah, always. I’m nothing like the Lady of Shalott, but I guess I wanted to be … When Mick Jagger wrote the lyrics for As Tears Go By, he knew this poem. There’s a bit he always said he used from here, the thing about ‘it was the closing of the day’.

In the liner notes, Faithfull also mentioned that her love of poetry was thanks to her English teacher at St Joseph’s Convent in Reading, Mrs Simpson, and to Palgrave’s Golden Treasury, an anthology of English poetry, which she had bought as a teenager.

Faithfull’s lifelong interest in literature came to fruition in her two final projects. They exemplify how she was a pop star, muse and chanteuse – and also a Romantic.The Conversation

Stephanie Hernandez, PhD Candidate, Literature and Music, University of Liverpool

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

While you sleep, these insects are working hard on the night shift to keep our environment healthy

photosounds/Shutterstock
Tanya LattyUniversity of Sydney

As night falls over Australia’s forests, grasslands and backyards, the hidden world of nocturnal insects stirs to life. In many ecosystems, overall insect activity actually peaks at night, especially in warmer regions of the world.

These nighttime creatures play essential roles in ecosystems, providing services such as pollination, waste decomposition, and pest control. Here are some of the remarkable insects that come out after dark – and why they matter.

Moths: the stars of the night shift

While their flashier daytime relatives, the butterflies, often steal the spotlight, moths are the hidden stars of the night shift.

An estimated 22,000 species of moth call Australia home, and most are nocturnal, although some are diurnal (day active) or crepuscular (active at dawn and dusk).

Many species feed on flower nectar using their long, straw-like mouthparts, transferring pollen between flowers as they go.

In the Snowy Mountains, for instance, scientists found moths carry pollen from 19 different plant species.

While some moths feed on a wide variety of plants, others have evolved highly specialised relationships with specific flowers.

For instance, more than 500 species of leaf flower trees (Phyllanthus) across tropical Asia, Africa, Australia, and the Pacific are dependent on tiny leaf flower moths (Epicephala) for their pollination.

The trees’ flowers attract moths by producing nectar at night, when the moths are most active.

The larvae of moths, caterpillars, also play a vital role in ecosystems. For example, the larvae of Mallee moths (Oecophoridae) feed on dry leaves in the leaf litter, making them essential for the decomposition of tough, dry plant material.

Without their tireless work breaking down organic matter, leaf litter can accumulate to problematic levels.

Although most caterpillars feed on plant material, some have unusual diets. Trisyntopa neossophila caterpillars, for example, feeds on the faeces of parrots nesting in termite mounds.

Some caterpillars are even predators. The larvae of the brown scale moth (Mataeomera coccophaga), for instance, eats scale insects.

Moths and their larvae provide a fat and protein-rich food source for many animals, including humans.

Once so abundant they famously blanketed the 2000 Sydney Olympics, large bogong swarms have become increasingly rare, putting at risk species that depend on them for essential nutrients.

Busy night beetles

Seeing the tiny, flashing lights of fireflies dancing through the darkness on a summer night is a magical experience.

Fireflies are actually beetles in the family Lampyridae, and 25 species call Australia home.

Each firefly species uses its own distinctive flash pattern to communicate with potential mates.

When large numbers of the same species gather, they can synchronise their light pulses, creating a breathtaking light show.

The fireflies’ distinctive light is produced through a biochemical reaction involving a molecule called luciferin and an enzyme called luciferase. When these interact in the presence of oxygen, they emit light.

Adult fireflies do not eat but firefly larvae mostly eat snails, which helps keep snail populations under control.

Beetles in the scarab family are often active at night. Large numbers of Christmas beetles (Anoplognathus spp) flying around porch lights used to be a common sight, but numbers appear to be in decline.

Some native dung beetles, such as the five-horned dung beetle (Onthophagus pentacanthus), are also nocturnal. Hardworking dung beetles play a vital role by breaking down animal dung, helping to recycle nutrients and improve soil health.

Lacewings and mantisflies

Lacewings belong to an ancient group of insects (Neuroptera) named for the delicate, lace-like net pattern of veins on their wings.

Most adult lacewings are nocturnal predators, feeding on smaller insects using their hollow, scissor-shaped mouthparts to catch and suck the nutrients from their prey.

Several lacewing species are effective pest controllers and are used in agriculture to manage pests such as aphids and mealybugs.

Mantid lacewings, also known as mantisflies, resemble a strange hybrid between a mantis and a fly but are actually in the same group as lacewings.

The larvae of mantisflies are poorly studied, but most species are believed to be predators of insects, although some are predators of spider eggs. By eating other insects, mantisflies may play a role in controlling pest populations.

Protecting these night shift workers

Artificial lights at night are causing serious disruption to insects on the night shift.

Insects often become disoriented, flying in endless circles around bright lights, burning energy they cannot afford to lose. This confusion can lead to exhaustion or death.

Artificial lighting at night can also disrupt nocturnal insect reproduction. And, predators such as owls and bats may learn to hunt around artificial lights where prey becomes more concentrated and vulnerable.

The exact reasons why nocturnal insects are drawn to light remain unclear, but recent research suggests that some nocturnal insects use light to maintain stable, level flight by orienting their bodies so light hits their upper surface.

This system works well when the only lights present at night are the Moon and stars, but fails when artificial lights disrupt the night.

We can help protect nocturnal insects by:

  • turning off unnecessary outdoor lights at night, especially during summer when many insects are breeding
  • using motion-activated lights to reduce light pollution
  • reducing or eliminating the use of insecticides in our gardens.

Small changes can make a big difference to help protect the insects working hard overnight to keep our ecosystems healthy.The Conversation

Tanya Latty, Associate Professor, School of Life and Environmental Sciences, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

5 games to play if you’re ‘not a gamer’ – or to introduce to the non-gamers in your life

Steam/ Monster Couch, Stonemaier Games
Marcus CarterUniversity of SydneyFinn DawsonUniversity of SydneyRyan StantonUniversity of Sydney, and Taylor HardwickUniversity of Sydney

Gaming is no longer a niche activity reserved for a select few – it’s a global pastime enjoyed by people of all ages, backgrounds and interests. In fact, studies show 81% of Australians engage in some form of gaming.

But for those who don’t consider themselves “gamers”, it can be hard to know where to start. The idea of picking up a complex, console-focused title might feel intimidating.

But fear not. Whether you’re looking for a game that’s mentally stimulating, addictive enough to help kill time, or simply something everyone can enjoy, there are plenty of options. Here are our top picks for beginners.

1. Real Bird Fake Bird

Since Wordle’s meteoric rise in 2022, we’ve seen a wave of daily browser games, including Tradle, Vulture’s Cinematrix and the New York Times’ Connections.

The Melbourne-based developers behind the critically acclaimed Scrabble-esque Gubbins have created the newest addition to this list: Real Bird Fake Bird.

The premise is simple. Each day you’re given a topic, and are supposed to guess whether seven different things are “real” or “fake” examples of that topic. For instance, Adele is a real example of a Grammy winner, but “sun condemnation” is a fake example of a yoga pose.

Sounds simple, right? It’s harder than it seems. The lists often have devilish examples of fakes that seem real, and real things that seem fake, leaving you second-guessing.

And just like with Wordle, you can share your score with friends once you’ve made all seven guesses. It’s a great way to spend a minute of your day.

You can share your Real Bird Fake Bird score with your friends. Studio Folly

You can play Real Bird Fake Bird through any device that can access a browser.

2. Balatro

Then there’s a hypnotic re-imagining of the card game poker, Balatro, (playable everywhere).

Each round involves playing poker hands to hit a points target, but these hands can be upgraded and augmented by a deck of “jokers” that favour particular poker hands or combinations of cards. Hands swiftly ascend to scoring tens of thousands (if not millions) of points per hand, in a near-perfect gameplay loop that combines card-game logic with the immersive flow of games like Tetris.

Balatro, largely developed by a single, anonymous developer, was one of 2024’s biggest hits. It sold more than 3,500,000 copies, won best indie game and best mobile game at the Game Awards 2024, and even secured a surprise nomination for game of the year.

This is the gaming equivalent of an anonymous independent filmmaker getting a nod for Best Picture at the Oscars.

3. The Case/Rise of the Golden Idol

This recommendation is targeted at mystery lovers. If you, or someone you know, can’t get enough of films like Knives Out (2019) or mystery books like The Thursday Murder Club, then the Golden Idol series (2022 and 2024) may be the perfect fit.

Each level shows the moment of a crime and it’s up to the player to interact with the characters and environment to fill in the blanks on a file explaining what happened.

With simple controls and a retro art style recalling the classic LucasArts adventure games, much of the joy in the Golden Idol games comes from the devious logic puzzles the cases provide.

One case revolves around placing the locations of all the house guests at an estate party, while another involves interpreting an entire language made out of dance moves. Combine these puzzles with a delightful sense of humour and a slightly mystical meta-narrative and these games will keep your inner detective occupied for hours.

The original and sequel are both Netflix games, and are available through Netflix on mobile and tablet.

4. Mouthwashing

Heavily inspired by the films Alien (1979) and The Shining (1980) – and not for the faint-of-heart – Mouthwashing (2024) is perfect for horror fans who want to dip their toes into the gaming world.

The cargo spaceship Tulpar is deliberately crashed by its captain mid-voyage. Unable to call for help, its five crew members can do nothing but wait for rescue. They open the hold in search of food or medicine, but instead find millions of bottles of mouthwash. Lost in space with minimal supplies, the crew begin to turn on each other – and wonder why their beloved captain crashed the ship in the first place.

A haunting story of human fallibility, Mouthwashing tells its tale through “walking sim” gameplay: the player simply wanders around the wreck of the Tulpar, interacting with objects and characters, without any complicated controls.

With a compelling cast, gorgeously surreal art direction and a focus on dread and despair (rather than jump scares), Mouthwashing is a wonderful introduction to the renaissance happening in horror games right now.

The game is available for PC via Steam (A$19) and can be completed in 2-3 hours.

5. Wingspan

For those who have endless bird facts on hand, can identify a bird at a glance and look forward to the Aussie Bird Count each year, Wingspan is the perfect game.

The goal of this competitive, card-driven board game (which also has a videogame version) is to attract the best birds to various habitats by gathering food and laying eggs. Each player also has a randomly determined individual goal, which they can use to score extra points, making Wingspan very re-playable.

The best aspects of the game include the beautiful art and the delightful facts on each bird card. There is even an Oceania expansion, so you can gather and admire Australian birds, too!

Wingspan can be purchased online or at major board game retailers. You can play the videogame version with friends via Steam.

Wingspan is a relaxing and captivating strategy card game about birds. Steam

Although Wingspan was released in 2018, last year its publisher, Stonemaier Games, also released Wyrmspan – a spiritual successor which focuses on hatching dragons instead of birds. Wyrmspan is more complex than Wingspan, though, and offers a steeper learning curve for less-experienced board game players.

Acknowledgement: we would like to acknowledge the contributions of Mads Mackenzie to this article, director of the upcoming game Drăculești and co-director of the Freeplay Independent Games Festival.The Conversation

Marcus Carter, Professor in Human-Computer Interaction, ARC Future Fellow, University of SydneyFinn Dawson, PhD Candidate, Media and Communications, University of SydneyRyan Stanton, PhD Candidate, Media and Communications, University of Sydney, and Taylor Hardwick, Postdoctoral Research Fellow in the School of Architecture, Design and Planning, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

1975 was declared International Women’s Year. 50 years on, the ‘revolution in our heads’ is still being fought

National Archives of Australia
Marian SawerAustralian National University

In December 1972, the same month the Whitlam government was first elected, the United Nations General Assembly proclaimed 1975 as International Women’s Year (IWY). This set in train a series of world-changing events, in which Australia was to play a significant part.

The aim of IWY was to end discrimination against women and enable them to participate fully in economic, social and political life. Fifty years later, such participation has become an indicator of development and good governance. But the full promise of International Women’s year has yet to be fulfilled, hampered by pushback and the scourge of gender-based violence.

‘The greatest consciousness-raising event in history’

Dubbed “the greatest consciousness-raising event in history”, the UN’s first World Conference on Women took place in Mexico City in June 1975. Consciousness-raising had been part of the repertoire of women’s liberation. Now it was taken up by government and intergovernmental bodies.

The Mexico City conference was agenda-setting in many ways. The Australian government delegation, led by Elizabeth Reid, helped introduce the world of multilateral diplomacy to the language of the women’s movement. As Reid said:

We argued that, whenever the words “racism”, “colonialism” and “neo-colonialism” occurred in documents of the conference, so too should “sexism”, a term that had not to that date appeared in United Nations documents or debates.

Reid held the position of women’s adviser to the prime minister. In this pioneering role, she had been able to obtain government commitment and funding for Australia’s own national consciousness-raising exercise during IWY.

A wide range of small grants promoted attitudinal change – “the revolution in our heads” – whether in traditional women’s organisations, churches and unions, or through providing help such as Gestetner machines to the new women’s centres.

IWY grants explicitly did not include the new women’s services, including refuges, women’s health centres and rape crisis centres. Their funding was now regarded as an ongoing responsibility for government, rather than suitable for one-off grants.

IWY began in Australia with a televised conversation on New Year’s Day between Reid and Governor-General John Kerr on hopes and aspirations for the year. On International Women’s Day (March 8), Prime Minister Gough Whitlam’s speech emphasised the need for attitudinal change:

Both men and women must be made aware of our habitual patterns of prejudice which we often do not see as such but whose existence manifests itself in our language and our behaviour.

The Australian postal service celebrated the day by releasing a stamp featuring the IWY symbol, showing the spirit of women breaking free of their traditional bonds. At Reid’s suggestion, IWY materials, including the symbol, were printed in the purple, green and white first adopted by Emmeline Pankhurst in 1908 and now known as the suffragette colours.

Author supplied

Policy power

Inside government, Reid had introduced the idea that all Cabinet submissions needed to be analysed for gender impact. After the Mexico City conference, this idea became part of new international norms of governance.

Following the adoption at the conference of the World Plan of Action, the idea that governments needed specialised policy machinery to promote gender equality was disseminated around the world.

Given the amount of ground to be covered, IWY was expanded to a UN Decade for Women (1976–85). By the end of it, 127 countries had established some form of government machinery to advance the status of women. Each of the successive UN world conferences (Copenhagen 1980, Nairobi 1985, Beijing 1995) generated new plans of action and strengthened systems of reporting by governments.

The Fourth World Conference on Women in Beijing was a high point. Its “platform for action” provided further impetus for what was now called “gender mainstreaming”. By 2018, every country recognised by the UN except North Korea had established government machinery for this purpose.

The global diffusion of this policy innovation was unprecedented in its rapidity. At the same time, Australia took the lead in another best-practice innovation. In 1984, the Commonwealth government pioneered what became known as “gender budgeting”. This required departments to disaggregate the ways particular budgetary decisions affected men and women.

As feminist economists pointed out, when the economic and social division of labour was taken into account, no budgetary decision could be assumed to be gender-neutral. Governments had emphasised special programs for women, a relatively small part of annual budgets, rather than the more substantial impact on women of macro-economic policy.

Standard-setting bodies such as the OECD helped promote gender budgeting as the best way to ensure such decisions did not inadvertently increase rather than reduce gender gaps.

By 2022, gender budgeting had been taken up around the world, including in 61% of OECD countries. Now that it had become an international marker of good governance, Australian governments were also reintroducing it after a period of abeyance.

Momentum builds

In addition to such policy transfer, new frameworks were being adopted internationally. Following IWY, the UN Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against Women (CEDAW) was adopted in 1979. CEDAW became known as the international bill of rights for women, and has been ratified by 189 countries. This is more than any other UN Convention except that on the rights of the child.

All state parties to CEDAW were required to submit periodic reports to the UN on its implementation. Non-government organisations were encouraged to provide shadow reports to inform the questioning of government representatives. This oversight and dialogue relating to gender equality became part of the norm-building work of the UN.

However, this very success at international and regional levels helped fuel “anti-gender movements” that gathered strength after 1995. No more world conferences on women were held, for fear there would be slippage from the standards achieved in Beijing.

In Australia, the leveraging of international standards to promote gender equality has been muted in deference to populist politics. It became common to present the business case rather than the social justice case for gender-equality policy, even the cost to the economy of gender-based violence (estimated by KPMG to be $26 billion in 2015–16).

The battle continues

Fifty years after IWY, Australia is making up some lost ground in areas such as paid parental leave, work value in the care economy, and recognition of the ways economic policy affects women differently from men.

However, all of this remains precarious, with issues of gender equality too readily rejected as part of a “woke agenda”.

The world has become a different place from when the Australian government delegation set out to introduce the UN to the concept of sexism. In Western democracies, women have surged into male domains such as parliaments. Australia now has an almost equal number of women and men in its Cabinet (11 out of 23 members).

But along with very different expectations has come the resentment too often being mobilised by the kind of populist politics we will likely see more of in this election year.The Conversation

Marian Sawer, Emeritus Professor, School of Politics and International Relations, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

When news is stressful, how do you balance staying informed with ‘doomscrolling’?

Mart Production/Pexels
Lisa HarrisonFlinders University

It all begins innocently – a late-night peek at your favourite social media site before bed. You catch a headline that grabs your attention with “breaking news” you can’t afford to miss.

Like following digital breadcrumbs, one click leads to another. Before you know it, you’re tumbling down a rabbit hole of endless updates and emotionally charged social media posts. Two hours later, your shoulders are tense, your stomach is in knots, but you can’t put your phone down.

This endless scrolling through bad news – known as “doomscrolling” – sneaks up on us.

It’s important to stay in touch with what’s happening in the world. Being informed helps us make better decisions, engage meaningfully in our communities, and respond effectively to changes that affect our lives and those around us.

But just like a healthy diet, we must be smart about our news consumption to avoid it taking a toll on our health.

The good news is there are proven ways to stay informed without letting it take over your life. Research shows setting clear boundaries around your news consumption can make a huge difference. So, how can you strike the right balance?

How to set boundaries with news consumption

It’s worth considering why you feel compelled to stay constantly informed. Ask yourself: “will this information change what I can do about it?”.

Often, we scroll not because the information is actionable, but because we are trying to gain a sense of control in an uncertain world.

Research shows scrolling through negative news can disrupt your sleep and increase anxiety. To make sure your media consumption is intentional, there are a few steps you can take.

Be picky with the news sources you read. Choose a few trusted outlets instead of letting social media algorithms decide what you see. It’s like sticking to a balanced meal plan, but for your mind.

While engaging with the news, pay close attention to how you’re feeling. When you notice physical signs of anxiety or emotional distress, that is your cue to take a break.

Set aside time earlier in the day with clear boundaries around your news consumption: maybe with your morning coffee or during your lunch break, whatever works for your schedule. Consider implementing a “digital sunset”, too. This is a cut-off time for news and social media, ideally an hour or two before bedtime, to give your mind time to process what you have learned without disrupting your sleep.

The world will always be there, but you will be in a better head space to process what is happening.

You don’t have to feel helpless

Taking breaks from consuming news is not burying your head in the sand – it’s practising self care. Studies have shown that people who set healthy boundaries around news consumption are often better equipped to engage meaningfully on important issues and take constructive action when needed.

When you check the news, be an active consumer. Instead of endless scrolling:

  • choose one or two in-depth articles to read thoroughly

  • discuss the news with colleagues, friends and family to process your feelings

  • look for solution-focused news stories that highlight positive change

  • take meaningful action on issues you care about.

There are also various apps and tools that can help you form healthier digital habits. Productivity apps use various approaches to help you stay focused, providing ways to snap you out of mindless scrolling.

News curation apps and apps that allow you to save articles to read later can help you establish a balanced news diet, and remove the urgent need to read everything immediately.

Many smartphones now come equipped with screen time management features, such as Apple’s Screen Time or Android’s Digital Wellbeing. You can use these to monitor your scrolling habits and to manage how much time you spend on social media or news apps.

One useful feature is to block apps from use during certain times of day or after you’ve used them for a set amount of time.

A notification on a phone screen that states Instagram has been paused for the rest of the day.
Screen time management features allow you to pause or block apps from use. The Conversation

Stay mindful, stay engaged

Staying informed doesn’t mean staying constantly connected. By mindfully setting boundaries and using supportive tools, you can keep up with important events while protecting your wellbeing.

If you’re trying productivity apps and other tools, start small. Choose one tool that resonates with you rather than trying everything at once. Set realistic goals that fit your life, and use these apps’ insights to understand your habits better.

Pay attention to what triggers your doomscrolling and adjust your settings accordingly. Remember, these tools work best when combined with offline activities you enjoy.

The goal isn’t to disconnect completely, but to find a sustainable balance between staying informed and maintaining peace of mind. With thoughtful boundaries and the right support tools, you can stay engaged with the world while keeping your mental health intact.The Conversation

Lisa Harrison, Lecturer in Digital Communications, Flinders University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Finding ‘Kape’: How Language Documentation helps us preserve an endangered language

Francesco Perono CacciafocoXi'an Jiaotong-Liverpool University

Shiyue Wu, a member of Francesco Perono Cacciafoco’s research team at Xi'an Jiaotong-Liverpool University (XJTLU), who is currently developing intensive fieldwork in Alor Island to document and preserve endangered languages, discovered and first documented Kape during a Language Documentation fieldwork in August 2024 and therefore actively contributed to this study.


As of 2025, more than 7000 languages are spoken across the world. However, only about half of them are properly documented, leaving the rest at risk of disappearing.

Globalisation has propelled languages such as English and Chinese into the mainstream, and they now dominate global communication.

Parents today prefer their children learn widely-spoken languages. Meanwhile, indigenous languages, such as Copainalá Zoque in Mexico and Northern Ndebele in Zimbabwe, are not even consistently taught in schools.

Indigenous people generally did not use writing for centuries and, therefore, their languages do not have ancient written records. This has contributed to their gradual disappearance.

To prevent the loss of endangered languages, field linguists – or language documentarists – work to ensure that new generations have access to their cultural heritage. Their efforts reveal the vocabulary and structure of these languages and the stories and traditions embedded within them.

My research team and I have spent over 13 years documenting endangered Papuan languages in Southeast and East Indonesia, particularly in the Alor-Pantar Archipelago, near Timor, and the Maluku Islands. One of our significant and very recent discoveries is Kape, a previously undocumented and neglected language spoken by small coastal communities in Central-Northern Alor.

Not only is the discovery important for mapping the linguistic context of the island, but it also highlights the urgency of preserving endangered languages by employing Language Documentation methods.

The discovery of Kape

In August 2024, while working with our Abui consultants, Shiyue Wu, my Research Assistant at Xi'an Jiaotong-Liverpool University, discovered a previously-ignored, presumably undocumented Papuan language from Alor, ‘Kape’.

At the time, she was gathering information about the names and locations of ritual altars known as ‘maasang’ in the Abui area, with assistance from our main consultant and several native speakers. In Central Alor, every village has a ‘maasang’.

During conversations about the variants in altar names across Alor languages and Abui dialects, some speakers mentioned the name of the ‘maasang’ (‘mata’) in Kape—a language previously unrecorded and overlooked in linguistic documentation.

‘Kape’ translates to ‘rope’, symbolising how the language connects its speakers across the island, from the mountains to the sea. Geographically and linguistically, it is associated with Kabola in the east and Abui and Kamang in Central Alor.

At this stage, it is unclear whether Kape is a distinct language or a dialect of Kamang, as the two are mutually intelligible. Much of Kape’s basic lexicon (the collection of words in one language), indeed, shares cognates (related words among languages) with Kamang.

However, Kape is spoken as the primary (native) language by the whole Kape ethnic group of Alor, and the speakers consider themselves an independent linguistic and ethnic community. This could serve as an element for regarding Kape as a language.

Kape also shows connections with SubooTiyei, and Adang, other Papuan languages from Alor Island. The speakers, known as ‘Kafel’ in Abui, are multilingual, fluent, to some extent, in Kape, Kamang, Bahasa Indonesia, Alor Malay, and, sometimes, Abui.

So far, no historical records have been found for Kape, though archival research may reveal more about its origins. Based on its typology and lexical characteristics, Kape appears as ancient as other languages spoken in Alor. Like many Papuan languages, it is critically endangered and requires urgent documentation to preserve its legacy.

Documenting languages: An ongoing challenge

Language Documentation aims to reconstruct the unwritten history of indigenous peoples and to guarantee the future of their cultures and languages. This is accomplished by preserving endangered, scarcely documented or entirely undocumented languages in disadvantaged and remote areas.

External sources, like diaries by missionaries and documentation produced by colonisers, can help reconstruct some historical events. However, they are insufficient for providing reliable linguistic data since the authors were not linguists.

My research team and I document endangered languages, starting with their lexicon and grammar. Eventually, we also explore the ancient traditions and ancestral wisdom of the native speakers we work with.

We have contributed to the documentation of several Papuan languages from Alor Island, especially AbuiKula, and Sawila. These languages are spoken among small, sometimes dispersed communities of indigenous peoples belonging to different but related ethnic clusters.

They communicate with each other mostly in Bahasa Indonesia and Alor Malay. This is because their local languages are almost never taught in schools and are rarely used outside their groups.

Over time, in addition to documenting their lexicons and grammars, we worked to reconstruct their place-names and landscape namesoral traditionsfoundation mythsancestral legends and the names of plants and trees they use.

We also explored their traditional medical practices and local ethnobotany, along with their musical culture and number systems.

Safeguarding Kape is not just linguistically relevant. Its preservation and documentation are not just about attesting its existence – they also contribute to revitalising the language, keeping it alive, and allowing the local community to rediscover its history, knowledge, and traditions to pass down to the next generations.

This journey has just begun, but my team and I – with the indispensable collaboration from our local consultants and native speakers – are prepared to go all the way towards its completion.The Conversation

Francesco Perono Cacciafoco, Associate Professor in Linguistics, Xi'an Jiaotong-Liverpool University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How we uncovered the UK’s biggest site of dinosaur tracks in a quarry in Oxfordshire

Kirsty Marie EdgarUniversity of Birmingham and Duncan MurdockUniversity of Oxford

In 2024, researchers from the universities of Oxford and Birmingham excavated a huge expanse of a quarry floor in Oxfordshire filled with hundreds of dinosaur footprints.

Dating to the Middle Jurassic period (around 166 million years ago), the extensive trackways are part of what has been described as a huge “dinosaur highway”. They form the largest dinosaur tracksite in the UK today. It’s among the largest in the world.

The tracks were made as dinosaurs walked across mudflats surrounded by warm tropical lagoons. As the feet of the giant animals, some up to 10 tonnes, pressed on the mud, they left behind both an impression of the foot and in some cases a large rim of displaced mud around the track.

The surface was then rapidly flooded and the tracks were filled in and buried by a clay-rich mud, which acted to preserve them. Over time and further burial these sediments turned into rock. Unlike body fossils, tracks give us a glimpse into a moment in the life of the dinosaur.

The size, shape and position of the tracks can tell us how these dinosaurs moved, their body size and speed, where they lived, and how they interacted with their environment and with each other.

Smaller finds, including shells, teeth and plant matter, help to build a more complete picture of this lost environment of Middle Jurassic Oxfordshire.

How it began

Dinosaur science itself began with the discoveries of fossil bones in Oxfordshire and recognition that they belonged to new creatures. Megalosaurus, an apex predator in the Middle Jurassic, was the first dinosaur to be scientifically named and described in 1824 from fossils found in slate quarries in the village of Stonesfield.

Remains of three other dinosaurs are also known from sites in the county, including the 18m-long sauropod Cetiosaurus.

In 1997, extensive trackways were discovered in Ardley Quarry, north Oxfordshire, including those likely belonging to the large carnivorous dinosaur Megalosaurus – a member of a dinosaur grouping known as theropods – as well as numerous larger tracks made by sauropods. These trackways were recorded and then reburied for the construction of an energy recovery facility.

Further discoveries at the smaller Ardley North quarry led to the trackway’s surface being designated as a site of special scientific interest in 2010, in light of a planned extension of quarrying activity into the neighbouring Dewars Farm.

Early in 2022, quarry worker Gary Johnson felt “unusual bumps” as he was stripping back a layer of clay from the ground in his digger to expose the rocky quarry floor. On inspection he realised that these were regularly spaced and could be a trackway.

Dewars Farm and Duns Tew quarry manager, Mark Stanway, contacted the Oxford University Museum of Natural History. As more and more of the surface was exposed, the significance of the site became clear and, in collaboration with University of Birmingham and quarry operators Smiths Bletchington, a plan was formed for a major excavation.

In June 2024, together with Dr Emma Nicholls from the Oxford University Museum of Natural History and Professor Richard Butler from the University of Birmingham, we led a team of more than 100 staff, students and volunteers for a week long excavation of the quarry surface.

Together, we painstakingly uncovered and cleaned out the overlying clay from around 200 footprints, took more than 20,000 images of individual footprints for photogrammetry – a technique that uses photographs to create 3D models of objects and landscapes. Using computer software, we were then able to build detailed 3D models of the site using aerial drone photography – documenting the footprints in unprecedented detail for future research.

We identified at least five separate trackways. One of these was probably made by Megalosaurus and four by giant herbivorous sauropod dinosaurs. The longest trackway stretches for more than 150 metres.

Further excavations

Data analysis continues, but the trackways are already yielding insights into how these dinosaurs moved – including their speeds, how large they were and if and how they interacted. Each Megalosaurus track (a classic three-toed track) is around 65cm in length, with a stride length of about 2.7 metres and the dinosaur could have been up to 9 metres in length.

The sauropod tracks may have been made by a dinosaur called Cetiosaurus, reaching up to 18 metres in length, and weighing 10 tonnes or more. The longest sauropod trackway at Dewars Farm has tracks that are up to one metre long but the different trackways have tracks of different sizes indicating different species or different-sized individuals at the site. The spacing of the prints suggest that the sauropod and Megalosaurus were walking at similar speeds, about 5km per hour – roughly an average adult human walking speed.

Where trackways intersect, we can determine which animal passed through the area first. In this case, the theropod came after the sauropod, whether it was mere moments, days or weeks between these tracks, we don’t know.

Dewars Farm is still a working quarry with no public access and will remain so in the medium term. However, we are actively working with Smiths Bletchington and Natural England on options for preserving the site for the future. Perhaps most exciting is that the ongoing quarrying of the overlying limestone (for use as crushed and graded aggregate) will only uncover more of the trackway surface.

We are further planning exploratory visits and hope to return for another excavation in summer 2025. It is very likely that the number, length and extent of the trackways will only increase and there may well be unexpected discoveries still to come.The Conversation

Kirsty Marie Edgar, Professor of Micropalaeontology, University of Birmingham and Duncan Murdock, Collections Manager, Earth Collections, Museum of Natural History, University of Oxford

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The Brutalist: an architect’s take on a film about one man’s journey to realise his visionary building

Phevos KallitsisUniversity of Portsmouth

For anyone involved in architecture, it’s no surprise that a film focusing on a visionary architect and his profession demands the epic dimensions of cinematography, drama and 215-minute running time of Brady Corbet’s The Brutalist. This week the film was nominated in ten Oscar categories including best picture, best director and best actor.

Despite architects being present in film from the early stages of cinema, architecture’s role in society has rarely been at the epicentre of the narrative.

Notable exceptions are King Vidor’s The Fountainhead (1949), where the architect is a vessel for Ayn Rand’s hymn to individualism; Peter Greenaway’s The Belly of an Architect (1987), which looks at the political stance of architects; and last year’s Megalopolis, where the architect is the ultimate coordinator of everyday life. But I never felt these films grasped the reality of architecture’s complex obligations or the challenges beyond designing.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.


The Brutalist tells the story of the fictional Hungarian architect László Tóth (Adrian Brody) who, after surviving the Holocaust and forced separation from his wife (Felicity Jones), emigrates to Philadelphia to work in the furniture shop of his prosperous cousin (Alessandro Nivola).

Unexpectedly, Tóth is tasked with refurbishing the study of a wealthy industrialist Harrison Van Buren (Guy Pearce), who despite his initial negative reaction, hires him to design an enormous library in memory of his mother.

In the process, Van Buren takes Tóth under his wing and helps him bring his wife to the US. The commission of the building is a joyous moment, but as the process of design and construction throws up challenges, the tension escalates.

Epic films usually depict the rise and fall of their protagonist, but The Brutalist explores the interconnected fates of the architect and his buildings. Tóth is aware of what is at stake. Once at the top of his game in Hungary, he is ostracised for his modernism which is considered anti-German by the Nazis. He is also condemned for being a Jew.

But Van Buren gives Tóth a second chance after a news story praises the building and he discovers the Hungarian’s previous work and his connection to the radical German Bauhaus movement.

From that point onward, we would expect that Tóth has gained his client’s trust. His joy at getting the authorities’ approval for the building is soon punctured by the obsessive Van Buren hiring consultants to check his work and keep tabs on the budget. Soon Tóth is beset by other problems as a railway accident delays the arrival of materials causing a hiatus.

Restarting the project is accompanied by constant concerns for health and safety and the pressures of any other potential delays. Tóth is also experiencing problems in his personal life, but Corbet and Mona Fastvold’s screenplay is driven by the challenges of realising his vision for this new groundbreaking building.

The Brutalist demonstrates the intrinsic role the client plays and how the architect is beholden to them – in this case necessitating the negotiation of a tricky relationship with the demanding Van Buren. As Italian architect Aldo Rossi writes in his book The Architecture of the City, “the architecture that is going to be realised is always an expression of the dominant class”.

And the dominant class wants things done their way. Tóth is even ready to sacrifice his fee to realise his vision. He needs the building to make a name for himself at a time when capitalism is producing unprecedented opportunities for architectural expression.

It is the period about which American architect Philip C. Johnson proclaims: “the battle for modern architecture has been won”. Think of Frank Lloyd Wright’s Johnson Wax tower or Ludwig Mies Van der Rohe’s Lake Shore Drive Apartments, or Eero Saarinen’s General Motors Technical Center to reveal how the US became the main proponent of this ambitious expansive style.

A memorable scene in the cavernous marble quarries of Carrara in Italy is both magnificent and ominous. The sheer scale that renders humans the size of ants underscores the clash between nature and power, in the level of extraction required for materials, and the exploitation of people and planet to satisfy the egos of two competing masculinities.

In the past, “What does an architect do?” was a question I often was asked by clients who wanted me to justify my fee. This is a question I now ask my students to reveal their own perceptions and values.

Architecture is one of the three main fine arts of antiquity. However, beyond the artistry and the aesthetics, its role has been developing to meet the needs of its time. In a post-war world, architects were compelled to go beyond efficiency; they needed to create an identity and capture the public’s imagination, while creating buildings with market value.

Architects take many aspects into consideration. Tóth draws beautifully, has knowledge of materials and technology, reads the landscape and understands the environment. He also manages the budget and has to promote himself in a world that mocks his accent and others him as a foreigner – architecture has a long way to go when it comes to inclusivity.

US modernism is full of immigrant architects who either moved there very young like Estonian Louis Kahn and Finn Eero Saarinen, or by accepting teaching positions like Germans Walter Gropius and Mies Van der Rohe did after the closure of the Bauhaus.

So The Brutalist needs its three and half hours to tell the saga of an immigrant architect’s life and the long arduous years it takes to complete a cherished project. As an architect in a digital era, it made me nostalgic for paper, charcoal drawings and physical models. And wish that architects had a filmmaker’s power to complete the construction of a building like a speeded-up film montage.The Conversation

Phevos Kallitsis, Associate Head Academic, School of Architecture Art and Design, University of Portsmouth

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Here’s what ‘deep listening’ can tell us about the natural world and our place in it

Jakub Maculewicz, Shutterstock
Monty NixonUniversity of Canberra

Have you ever taken the time to stop and listen to nature? Deeply, quietly and patiently?

If not, don’t worry, there’s still time to learn. Deep listening is a skill that can be developed.

There’s much more to it than simply recognising the call or song of a particular species. To listen deeply to nature is to become aware of behaviours, relationships and patterns of interaction between multiple species, and to learn from what we hear.

This is what Indigenous people have been doing for many thousands of years, in Australia and overseas.

Under the supervision and guidance of Indigenous knowledge holders of Karulkiyalu Country, my PhD research, explores ways to embed this Indigenous approach to deep listening in Australia’s education system.

The project builds on previous work showing positive results for student and teacher wellbeing, as well as an increased understanding of and desire to care for the natural world.

A bird resting on a branch, singing with its mouth wide open
The Rufous whistler is an Australian virtuoso. Andrew Skeoch

What is deep listening?

If you’d like to try deep listening, take some time to visit a natural place and find a quiet spot where you won’t be disturbed. Turn off your electronic devices.

Close your eyes, and extend your sense of hearing into the landscape around you. Try focusing your listening in each direction, then above and even below. How far you can hear?

At first you will hear the voices of individual creatures, perhaps one then another. After a while, you may begin to notice interactions and patterns of communication between them. Be curious. Does one respond to another? How, and why?

Hearing all the interconnected activity going on around you in that moment can help you comprehend the living system as a whole.

A man sitting on the ground behind a microphone in a bush setting, wearing headphones while recording the sounds of nature
Acoustic ecologist Andrew Skeoch recording the sounds of nature in the Australian bush. Andrew Skeoch

What can we learn from nature by listening?

People often simplify complex relationships down to perceptions of either cooperation or competition.

But listening to nature affirms that cooperative partnerships play a far greater role than meets the eye. Relationships between species that accommodate each other’s needs are ubiquitous throughout the biosphere.

For instance, multiple species of birds forage efficiently and safely in mixed flocks, by communicating and alerting each other to information about food and threats. This practice of foraging collectively is so worthwhile it’s encountered the world over.

Listening to the animated twittering of these flocks – which continually communicates and affirms each bird’s location – reminds us how beneficial cooperation can be. More importantly, cooperation is most advantageous when it embraces diversity.

Addressing the existential threats facing humanity will require cooperation and collaboration on a massive scale. Many of these threats are interlinked. They tend to resist independent solutions and need to be tackled together.

So there is an urgent need to embrace and celebrate our differences. Listening to mixed-species flocks reminds us that diversity can be a source of great strength.

Lessons about competition

Listening can also tell us about competitive interactions, particularly between members of the same species.

In the morning twilight of the breeding season, songbirds join the dawn chorus – singing with repertoire and behaviours not heard at other times of day or year. It’s also clear they are listening to each other.

At dawn, songbirds use formal vocal interactions to negotiate their most essential relationships. These include defining home ranges, establishing and maintaining pair bonds, acknowledging neighbours and affirming community identities.

In this way, the dawn chorus is a sonic expression of a widespread principle in nature: that while the potential for competition exists, life-threatening aggression is risky, inefficient and costly.

Many animals have developed specialised behaviours to sort out their relationships and status while minimising the risks of serious harm. For instance “boxing” kangaroos engage in scrapping or sparring rather than injurious fighting.

While these physical behaviours are found widely throughout the animal world, songbirds have evolved their own trick: they use song to negotiate their interactions. Listening to them singing at dawn reminds us that competitive behaviours and aggression are not advantageous. Negotiation, mutual acknowledgement and respect are more successful ways of living.

Two male kangaroos face off in a boxing match, standing up on their hind legs with their tail for balance while throwing punches at one another,
Boxing kangaroos negotiate their status without causing injury. victoriam, Shutterstock

Educational possibilities from listening

Learning through deep listening was integral to the education system in Australia for thousands of years. It allowed First Nations peoples to understand the ecological community around them and how to live with these groups of species.

In this education system, Country and Earth-Kin, (such as plants and animals) were both central knowledge holders and teachers. Humans (primarily grandparents) provided support for childrens’ learning from these knowledge holders. In this way children came to know, understand and care for land.

People and Country flourished through this way of learning. Australia became home to the longest continuing cultures in human history.

Research is demonstrating how this old teaching and learning method can work in modern schooling. More than 120 educators across the ACT are involved in the Country as Teacher project. Cultivating a practice of deep listening to Earth-Kin and Country helped teachers and students develop an improved sense of wellbeing, as well as knowledge and understanding of the places they live.

The research argues that teachers first need to cultivate their own practice of listening. Then they can embed this process in their approach to education. By slowing down, developing nuanced awareness, following curiosity, listening empathically to other beings and opening to being affected emotionally, teachers can cultivate their own deeper sense of care, appreciation and understanding. From their personal listening journey, educators can then facilitate these experiences for their students.

Deep listening to Earth-Kin or Country as Teacher offers an old and new pathway to return to a valuable and important way of being for our schools and society.

This path offers us the chance to come to appreciate and care for the ecological communities of the Earth. Through listening we can learn the ways in which species across the Earth adapt, survive and thrive, providing guidance for our own cultures as we confront increasing social and environmental uncertainty.

This article was written in collaboration with acoustic ecologist Andrew Skeoch. The Conversation

Monty Nixon, PhD Student in Education, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Online lifestyle trial boosts cognition in older Australians: new study - CHeBA / UNSW

January 29, 2025
Cognitive decline can lead to dementia, making improving cognition as you age key to prevention.

An internet-delivered lifestyle intervention has resulted in significantly better cognition in older adults, a clinical trial has shown.

The team, led by Professor Henry Brodaty AO, Co-Director of UNSW’s Centre for Healthy Brain Ageing (CHeBA), calculated a global cognition score from online tests that measured memory, reasoning and speed of information processing, and published their findings in Nature Medicine today.

The landmark trial, known as Maintain Your Brain, is the largest internet-based trial ever conducted to attempt to prevent cognitive decline and dementia.

The researchers recruited over 6000 participants aged 55-77 for the trial through the Sax Institute’s 45 and up study, to target modifiable risk factors for dementia in general and Alzheimer’s disease in particular. Participants were without dementia but carried at least two of the major risk factors for dementia.

Half of the participants received an active intervention which included personalised coaching in two to four modules depending on their risk factors – physical activity, brain training, nutrition or depression/anxiety. The control group received publicly available information. A Mediterranean diet with limited meat and dairy, an increase in moderate-vigorous intensity exercises and specific types of computerised brain training were among the changes that led to an improved cognition score.

The trial directly or indirectly tackled several of the 14 modifiable risk factors, reported by the Lancet Commission, accounting for approximately 45% of the risk of dementia.

The researchers say the findings have international significance.

“This intervention is scalable with the potential for population-level roll out that may delay cognitive decline in the general community,” says Prof. Brodaty. “We could essentially reduce worldwide dementia prevalence if this trial were implemented to the wider population.”

Greatest benefit to date in preventing cognitive decline
The trial incorporated participants from metropolitan, rural and remote areas, and assessed an online lifestyle intervention to prevent cognitive decline over a three-year period, with follow-ups done at the end of each year. The team split participants into two groups.

The trial specifically tested whether improving lifestyle behaviours could slow cognitive decline.

“The outcome was a resounding yes – we can improve cognition over three years and therefore, likely enhance resilience to dementia,” says Prof. Brodaty.

“Both groups improved but the intervention group demonstrated the greatest benefit to date in a randomised control trial to prevent cognitive decline.”

Bowral resident Paddy Goldsmith, 82, who participated in Maintain Your Brain, believes the trial has significantly benefited her and her husband, Geoff. Together they have continued to adhere to the nutrition guidelines and found that the brain training improved their concentration.

“I continue to do weekly balance and strength training as well as online brain training, which I would never have done without the knowledge learned in the trial,” says Paddy.

Evidence to support a tailored prevention program
The findings recommend personalising prevention efforts and suggest that interventions focused on just one modifiable risk factor, for example physical inactivity, are less effective in preventing dementia.

“Previous trials have largely not tailored interventions to match dementia risk factors of individual participants,” says Prof. Brodaty. “Our findings suggest personalising interventions and targeting a broad range of lifestyle factors are important for success.”

Chair of CHeBA’s Advisory Committee, Ita Buttrose AC OBE, says this is a moment to be celebrated.

“We now have clear evidence to support a national dementia prevention program,” says Buttrose. “Previously Australia has been a leader in prevention, particularly with smoking, skin cancer and HIV minimisation, but we have dropped the ball. Dementia is a prime example of where we can and must act now.

“This evidence demonstrates significant benefits to improving cognition and potentially delaying the onset of dementia.

“It is now time for Australia to think seriously about long term goals, to acknowledge the evidence and embrace the need for investment in prevention,” says Buttrose.

We could essentially reduce worldwide dementia prevalence if this trial were implemented to the wider population. - Prof. Henry Brodaty

Findings may be even more significant
The estimate of the intervention effect is considered conservative, given the control group and the group that received personalised coaching both improved.

Through assessing self-reported change from baseline to the year three follow up, researchers also noted significant improvements in aerobic activity, strength training, diet and depression scores.

“If we were able to compare the intervention with a control group that received no information at all, we would likely find out that the benefits of this trial would be even greater,” says Prof. Brodaty. “Participants aged 55-65 showed greater benefit than those aged 66-77, suggesting we should consider starting prevention programs earlier.”

This trial has several strengths, particularly in terms of the large population sample size and methodology. Limitations exist, including that participants were more likely to have university education, better self-rated quality of life and a family history of Alzheimer’s disease. There was also a lack of ethno-racial diversity among participants.

Prof. Brodaty says this research offers new hope for prevention of dementia.

“Future developments could focus on cultural adaptation, particularly targeting groups from lower socio-economic backgrounds and those with less education.”

The study is available online:

Brodaty, H., Chau, T., Heffernan, M. et al. An online multidomain lifestyle intervention to prevent cognitive decline in at-risk older adults: a randomized controlled trial. Nat Med (2025). https://doi.org/10.1038/s41591-024-03351-6

The intervention modules were:

Physical activity steered by University of Sydney’s Professor Maria Fiatarone Singh – participants were advised to do 300 minutes of moderate intensity exercise or 150 minutes of vigorous intensity exercise per week as well as two days of moderate-vigorous intensity strength training per week, and daily balance training;

Nutrition steered by Professor Maria Fiatarone Singh – participants were advised to follow a Mediterranean diet by consuming unprocessed plant foods including vegetables, fruits, legumes, grains, nuts/seeds and extra virgin olive oil, moderate amounts of fish and shellfish, and low intake of meat, dairy, eggs and animal fats;

Brain training steered by UNSW’s Professor Michael Valenzuela – this training targeted seven cognitive domains (verbal executive, verbal memory, visual executive, visual memory, visual attention, speed and working memory) and allocated three 45-minute sessions each week across the first 10 weeks and then monthly sessions;

Peace of mind steered by Scientia Professor Gavin Andrews and Dr Michael Millard from the Clinical Research Unit for Anxiety and Depression (CRUfAD) at St Vincent’s Hospital – participants received training via ThisWayUp, a digital mental health program based on the principles of cognitive behavioural therapy aimed at reducing or preventing depression and anxiety.

AvPals Term 1 2025


Avalon Computer Pals (AVPALS) helps Seniors learn and improve their computer skills. It is a not for profit organisation run by volunteers. 


Started in 2000 it now has 20+ trainers and many hundreds of students. At a really low cost (about $50 a school term) they can provide one-to-one training on most matters connected with computing and related technologies like mobile phones and digital cameras. From the smallest problem (how to hold the mouse!) to much more serious matters, there is a trainer who can help.

We offer “one to one” personal tuition or special short courses in the training rooms under the Catholic Church in Avalon. Training is conducted Monday to Friday from 9am to 4pm. For more information visit AVPALS web site www.avpals.com or phone 02 8064 3574

Keep up to date on our Facebook page

Find out more at: www.avpals.com

Avalon Beach SLSC turns 100 in 2025!

2025 marks 100 years of Avalon Beach Surf Lifesaving Club.

Planning is underway to celebrate the achievement of Avalon Beach SLSC's Volunteer Surf Lifesavers keeping Avalon Beach safe for residents and visitors for 100 years!

A number of celebratory events and activities spread throughout the Club's 100th year, are currently under development, and will be progressively announced through the year. 

The range of celebrations will involve past and present members, the Avalon Beach community, as well as visitors to our area.  The Surf Club is a focal point in and for the Avalon Beach community, so it is fitting that the community takes pride in this milestone.

Initially, so that our records are up to date, we invite all past members of our Club to Email the Club at 100years@avalonbeachslsc.com.au  with your updated details so we can keep you informed of what will be happening for members.

If you know of others that may be interested in the 100th Anniversary celebrations please pass the message on. 

The Club looks to the future, acknowledging and building on the legacy left from those who came before us over the past 100 years.

Avalon Beach SLSC Centenary Committee

Australia’s drama dilemma: how taxpayers foot the bill for content that ends up locked behind paywalls

Shutterstock
Anna PotterQueensland University of TechnologyAmanda LotzQueensland University of Technology, and Marion McCutcheonUniversity of Canberra

Headlines about Screen Australia’s latest annual Drama Report have highlighted one particular figure: a 29% drop in total industry expenditure compared to the year before.

But a closer look suggests this isn’t the most concerning finding. The report also reveals a significant chunk (42%) of the A$803 million spent on producing Australian TV drama in 2023–24 was funded by taxpayers.

What’s more – watching half of the Australian TV drama hours broadcast in 2024 required a streaming subscription. Watching all of them required seven different subscriptions.

With Australians’ funding of this commercial, for-profit sector on the rise, we can’t help but ask: what do Australian viewers get in return?

Screen production challenged globally

Screen sectors globally are experiencing significant downturns because of changes in audience behaviour and advertiser spending. Various analyses suggest between 14% and 25% of all viewing is now comprised of videos from YouTube, TikTok, Facebook and Instagram.

Advertising revenue that once helped fund local drama has followed viewers to social media apps, imperilling Australia’s commercial broadcasters.

Traditionally, commissions from the three commercial broadcasters have supported Australia’s drama production sector. However, in 2021 the government significantly watered-down their quota obligations. As a result, networks Seven, Nine and Ten commissioned just nine hours of new, non-soap drama in 2024.

The loss of commercial broadcasters from the production ecosystem has radically changed the sector’s dynamics. Streamers such as Netflix and Stan are now the largest investors in Australian drama, followed by the ABC.

Government subsidies for the sector have also grown considerably, partly due to rising production costs. Over the ten years leading up to 2023–24, federal spending on local TV drama production more than tripled, increasing by an average of 16.9% each year.

Yet, during that same period, the hours of TV drama produced fell by an average of 5.7% each year. In other words, we’re spending more on less. And as mentioned above, much of this declining TV drama slate – which is heavily subsidised by government money – is ending up behind streamer paywalls.

The problem with current policy

Too much of Australia’s current screen funding is going towards stories that can’t be watched without a paid subscription.

Also, many of these stories have little to no connection to Australia. For instance NBC Universal’s Young Rock, which was produced in Australia, is about the childhood of American celebrity Dwayne “The Rock” Johnson. Similarly, Nautilus, which Disney originally commissioned and which was made in Australia, is loosely based on Jules Verne’s maritime adventure novel, 20,000 Leagues Under The Sea.

Since the 2000s, our screen industry has become far more global than national. Current policy largely funds television projects through tax rebates on production budget. And any scripted production made in Australia (and with a certain minimum budget) is eligible for this funding.

These rebates, combined with a lack of local content quotas for broadcasters and streamers, mean our current policy risks generously funding titles made by global corporations for international viewers.

The 2024 Drama Report highlights a need to carefully consider whether Australia’s policy for the sector is delivering for Australians.

It’s time to update the conditions of support, which were designed back when commercial broadcasters reliably commissioned some 300 hours of Australian drama each year. This is no longer the case.

Solutions for more Australian stories

So what needs to change? For a start, policy must offer greater support for dramas that tell compelling Australian stories in all their diversity.

Such dramas, which deliver significant cultural value to audiences, should receive higher levels of rebates than international stories filmed in Australia. The ABC and the SBS could lead the way in commissioning this content, as per their charter obligations.

The 2021 changes to Australian content regulations left the ABC as the principal provider of free local drama and children’s programs – but the ABC has limited resources. Rather than supporting international productions, local audiences might be better served if the government increased the ABC’s funding to produce minimum amounts of drama and children’s programs.

We also have to bring Australian drama out from behind streamer paywalls if they receive any kind of government support. They should be made available to local audiences for free within two years of their release.

This could be done through free-to-air television services, like ABC iView or SBS On Demand, or on a free platform built specifically for local content.

Policymakers will need to define production sector sustainability in a 21st century context. Australia has historically had many small production companies. However, the steep decline in local drama being produced suggests only a few companies will remain viable in the long term.

The scale of disruption facing local broadcasters and production companies needs to be matched by policy that’s fit for purpose, and which returns value to Australian communities.The Conversation

Anna Potter, Professor in Digital Media and Cutural Studies, Queensland University of TechnologyAmanda Lotz, Professor of Media Studies, Queensland University of Technology, and Marion McCutcheon, Senior Research Fellow, News and Media Research Centre, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Researchers uncover new approach to predict pain sensitivity

In an international effort, researchers at Western University, the University of Maryland School of Dentistry (UMSOD) and Neuroscience Research Australia (NeuRA) uncovered how specific patterns in brain activity can predict an individual's sensitivity to pain, expanding opportunities for improved pain management strategies.

The new study was published Jan. 27 in JAMA Neurology. It found the combination of two biomarkers in the brain -- corticomotor excitability (CME), excitability in the region of the brain that controls movement, and peak alpha frequency (PAF), a neural marker associated with cognitive performance -- can accurately and reliably distinguish high- and low-pain sensitive individuals during prolonged pain.

"The burden of chronic pain is massive. Having objective biomarkers would greatly assist with decision making in the diagnosis, prevention and treatment of chronic pain," said senior author and Schulich School of Medicine & Dentistry professor David Seminowicz, who started this study while he was a professor at UMSOD.

For people who suffer from prolonged or chronic pain, this means they could be more effectively treated according to their level of pain sensitivity.

According to recent data from the Global Burden of Disease study, approximately 1.7 billion people around the world live with musculoskeletal conditions, typically characterized by persistent pain, including pain in muscles, bones, joints, ligaments and tendons. Living with prolonged pain can be debilitating and affect a person's ability to work or socialize. Currently, there is a lack of effective treatments for chronic pain and a gap in understanding the transition from acute to chronic pain.

"For the first time we have something that looks like it could predict pain outcome for people," said Siobhan Schabrun, co-author and professor at Western's School of Physical Therapy.

The researchers looked specifically at jaw pain typically attributed to problems with the joint or muscles in the jaw, also known as temporomandibular disorders.

The study involved 150 participants in Australia, aged 18 to 44. PAF, the brain biomarker associated with cognitive performance, was measured using electroencephalography (EEG) recording, which records electrical activity in the brain using electrodes. CME, the biomarker related to excitability, was measured through transcranial magnetic stimulation, where nerve cells in the brain are stimulated using magnetic fields.

This research was a collaborative effort between Nahian Chowdhury, research fellow at NeuRA, who led the data collection; a statistical team led by University of Maryland School of Medicine postdoctoral fellow Chuan Bi and professor Shuo Chen; and principal investigator of the UMSOD site, assistant professor Joyce Teixeira Da Silva.

Slow PAF and low CME indicates higher pain sensitivity
"Our results suggest individuals who have slow PAF prior to a prolonged pain episode and reduced CME shortly after the onset of a prolonged pain episode are more likely to experience higher pain days or weeks later." explained Seminowicz.

Additional findings from complementary studies indicate individuals with low levels of CME during the acute stages of low back pain were more likely to develop chronic pain after six months.

The new research also shows potential to measure PAF and CME in pre-operative and post-injury settings to identify whether a patient has high- or low-pain sensitivity.

Based on previous literature that found higher acute pain can predict the development of chronic pain, the researchers suggest these biomarkers, PAF and CME, could potentially be used to gauge a person's likelihood of developing chronic pain after an experience with acute pain.

'A major leap forward'
"This study represents a major leap forward in the field of pain science. A biomarker that can predict pain sensitivity with 88 per cent accuracy has the potential to transform the treatment and prevention of pain in future," said Schabrun, who is also William and Lynne Gray Endowed Research Chair in Mobility and Activity at St. Joseph's Health Care London.

Backed by the high rates of accuracy, reproducibility and reliability of their study, the researchers are now working to validate the biomarker in clinical populations to explore clinical translation, including predicting the transition from acute to chronic clinical pain.

"This would allow us to target treatments toward people with acute pain who are likely to transition to chronic pain," said Schabrun. "If these brain biomarkers can predict that occurrence in future, we hope to be able to interfere with the transition to chronic pain to provide better patient outcomes."

Nahian S. Chowdhury, Chuan Bi, Andrew J. Furman, Alan K. I. Chiang, Patrick Skippen, Emily Si, Samantha K. Millard, Sarah M. Margerison, Darrah Spies, Michael L. Keaser, Joyce T. Da Silva, Shuo Chen, Siobhan M. Schabrun, David A. Seminowicz. Predicting Individual Pain Sensitivity Using a Novel Cortical Biomarker Signature. JAMA Neurology, 2025; DOI: 10.1001/jamaneurol.2024.4857

Sydney’s Museum of Contemporary Art is now charging for entry. It’s a sign our cultural sector needs help

Chiara O'ReillyUniversity of Sydney and Anna LawrensonUniversity of Sydney

From January 31, Sydney’s Museum of Contemporary Art (MCA) will reintroduce ticketed entry, charging adults $20 for general admission and $35 for combined special exhibitions and museum entry. Entry will remain free for Australian students and people under 18.

This decision, which reverses 24 years of free general entry to the museum, reflects broader challenges faced by museums globally.

Driven by philanthropy

The MCA was opened in 1991, established through the bequest of Australian expatriate artist John Power. As an independent, not-for-profit organisation, its administrative and financial structure is different from major cultural institutions in Sydney.

Unlike the Art Gallery of New South Wales and Australian Museum, which are statutory bodies of the NSW government, the MCA receives a far smaller proportion of state funding.

For 2023-2024, the NSW government delivered A$46.2 million in recurrent funding to the Art Gallery of NSW and $47.4 million to the Australian Museum. The MCA received $4.2 million, which represented just 16% of its total revenue.

This funding disparity has always required the MCA to secure the bulk of its budget through other revenue streams. Corporate and philanthropic partnerships have been vital.

In 2000, financial support from Telstra allowed the museum to offer free admission. In 2012, philanthropists including Simon and Catriona Mordant contributed greatly to fund the museum’s expansion.

The MCA has also been proactive in leveraging its venue to maximise income. In 2023, 41% of revenue was earned through commercial services including venue hire, retail and commercial leases.

Why there’s no more free entry

Despite reducing its opening hours to six days a week post-COVID and scaling back audience engagement, the MCA’s financial pressures continued. According to director Suzanne Cotter, the museum “didn’t have any choice” but to implement an admission fee.

While ticketed admission creates a financial barrier, it also provides visitors a way to invest directly in the museum’s future and sustainability.

The MCA has consistently demonstrated its value, generating impressive visitor numbers. In 2019, attendance surpassed one million visitors, setting the museum ahead of many international peers.

But the effects of the COVID pandemic have lingered. In 2022-23, the museum attracted 859,386 visitors – a 15% decline compared to 2019.

In comparison, the Art Gallery of NSW welcomed almost two million visitors to its expanded campus in 2023, representing a 51% increase from pre-COVID figures.

The MCA isn’t struggling alone

Internationally, there are clear signs of an industry under immense pressure.

Major US institutions such as The Metropolitan Museum of Art (The Met), The Museum of Modern Art (MoMA) and the Guggenheim and Whitney have all increased general adult admission fees to US$30.

The Met’s shift away from a pay-what-you-can model to fixed admission for most visitors in 2018 was driven by speculation of a US$40 million deficit. However, New York state residents and students, as well as New Jersey and Connecticut students, can still pay what they wish – even as little as one cent.

Similarly, at the Whitney, a US$2 million donation last year by Trustee and artist Julie Mehretu has helped enable free entry for under-25s.

These examples show how paying visitors can support a museum’s sustainability while preserving subsidised access for priority groups.

Across Europe, major museums including the Louvre and Uffizi are also increasing prices, though many retain periodic free days to ensure accessibility.

In the UK, smaller regional museums are resorting to admission charges for the first time in their histories.

Meanwhile, commentators such as cultural historian Ben Lewis argue major institutions such as the British Museum should start charging general admission fees to supplement stagnant government funding and decrease dependence on potentially unethical corporate donors.

This would allow the museums to pay competitive wages and fund essential work, Lewis argues.

Lewis’s concerns about corporate donations accord with debates taking place internationally and in Australia around the role of big oil, mining and pharmaceutical companies that use the arts to “greenwash” their public brand.

Can Accessibility be prioritised in Australia?

The MCA’s situation, which reflects international trends, raises questions about arts funding and access.

Both the NSW and federal governments’ arts policies recognise the value of providing access to the arts. As the NSW government’s Creative Communities policy notes, “the right to participate in arts, cultural and creative activities is a fundamental human right.”

The MCA excelled in this regard under its free admission policy, attracting a diverse audience that other museums often struggled to reach. In 2023, about half of the museums on-site visitors were under 35, and 45% were from culturally and linguistically diverse backgrounds.

The NSW government’s policy – along with its national counterpart Revive – also emphasises the importance of telling Australian stories. This is another area the MCA has excelled in.

The question then is: if the state and federal governments value equitable access to the arts and appreciates the platforming of Australian stories, will they commit to a more sustainable funding arrangement for organisations like the MCA?

Without such a commitment, the gap between those who can afford to attend museums and those who can’t will continue to widen – compromising the democratic ideal of an accessible cultural sector.The Conversation

Chiara O'Reilly, Senior Lecturer in Museum Studies, University of Sydney and Anna Lawrenson, Lecturer Museum and Heritage Studies, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A Call to Volunteer Trainers and Students

Come and share your knowledge or learn more about your device! 
Computer Pals for Seniors Northern Beaches would love to hear from you. We are a not-for-profit organisation helping seniors navigate the wonderful world of technology.

We teach in term times Monday to Friday in a relaxed fun environment.

Common topics requested by Students are: Sending and receiving emails, discovering useful apps, safe banking online, learning how to take and store photos, avoiding Scams, and basically being able to operate their device with confidence.

We teach Android/Apple tablets and phones, and Apple/Microsoft/ Chromebook laptops.

We are based at the Tramshed Arts & Community Centre, 1395a Pittwater Road, Narrabeen, near the B-Line bus stop.

Why not give us a call on 0478 920 651


Seniors set for laughs during free NSW Seniors Festival Comedy Shows

Nine comedy geniuses will take to the stage for the NSW Seniors Festival Comedy Shows this March to entertain seniors in Sydney and Port Stephens.

The free events will deliver a day of laughs as comedians Bec Melrose, Rebecca De Unamuno, Simon Kennedy, Gary Eck, Anisa Nandaula, Mat Wakefield, Laura Hughes, Peter Berner, and Tommy Dean show off their talents at the Seniors Festival Comedy Shows.

Emcee Andrew Barnett, will host the fun-filled events at:
  • Sydney Town Hall on Tuesday 4 March at 11am
  • Soldiers Point Hall in Port Stephens on Thursday 6 March at 10:30am and 1:30pm
Tickets will be available from Tuesday 11 February at 9am at www.nsw.gov.au/nsw-seniors-festival-comedy-show.

Sydney 
When: Tuesday, 4 March 2025
Time: 11:00am
Where: Sydney Town Hall 

The line-up includes: MC - Andrew Barnett, Bec Melrose, Rebecca De Unamuno, Simon Kennedy, Gary Eck, Anisa Nandaula, Tommy Dean

The annual NSW Seniors Festival takes place from 3 to 16 March. The festival is the largest of its kind in the southern hemisphere, with more than 500,000 people participating in events held across NSW.

Highlights of the festival include the Expo with a range of activities and stalls for seniors to engage in, as well as the free Premier’s Gala Concerts, both of which will be held at Sydney’s International Convention Centre on Wednesday 12 and Thursday 13 March.

For tickets to these events and to keep up to date with everything happening at the NSW Seniors Festival, visit www.nsw.gov.au/arts-and-culture/seniors-festival.

Minister for Seniors Jodie Harrison said:
“It’s fantastic to see the comedy shows being held again – they always draw a great crowd and leave seniors in stitches.

“These events offer our seniors the opportunity to enjoy time out with friends, while watching comedians they know or discover new ones. It’s a popular event that helps keep seniors connected and feeling included. I’m looking forward to seeing them enjoy the shows.

“This is the NSW Government’s way of saying thank you for all the valuable contributions our older generation has made and continues to make to society. I encourage seniors to get their free tickets and attend these great shows in Sydney and Port Stephens.”

Great Australian artists to entertain NSW seniors at Premier’s Gala Concerts

Thousands of NSW Seniors are set to be entertained by Todd McKenney, Rob Mills, Tarryn Stokes and Prinnie Stevens at this year’s Premier’s Gala Concerts, with free tickets available early next month.

The Premier’s Gala Concerts will be held at the International Convention Centre (ICC) Darling Harbour on Wednesday 12 and Thursday 13 March 2025 with two performances each day and will be live-streamed for seniors who are unable to attend in person.

The 2025 Seniors Festival Expo, held at the ICC across the same dates, will feature more than 110 exhibitors providing a variety of opportunities for seniors to get involved and stay active and connected within the community.

The Premier’s Gala Concerts are a highlight of the annual NSW Seniors Festival, which runs from Monday 3 to Sunday 16 March 2025.

The festival is the NSW Government’s way of thanking seniors for their valuable contributions to society. The theme of this year’s festival is “Time to Shine” and it’s an opportunity for older people to get involved, and stay active and connected.

Last year, the Premier Gala Concerts sold out, with 32,000 seniors attending. Seniors also showed their strong support for events around NSW, with an estimated 500,000 attending various activities across the state over the whole festival fortnight.

Free tickets for the performances will be available on the NSW Seniors Festival website from 9am on Tuesday 4 February 2025 at https://www.nsw.gov.au/arts-and-culture/seniors-festival/whats-on/premiers-concert

Keep up to date with all that’s happening at the NSW Seniors Festival at https://www.nsw.gov.au/arts-and-culture/seniors-festival.

Minister for Seniors Jodie Harrison said:

“The NSW Seniors Festival embraces the diversity of seniors and celebrates the wonderful work they do for their communities.

“It’s the highlight of the year for many and this year is set to deliver with a fantastic range of entertainment and activities to suit everyone.

“Seeing our seniors thoroughly enjoy themselves at one of the biggest events of the year is always special, and I encourage our seniors to get in early for tickets to the Gala Concerts.”

Myth busted: Healthy habits take longer than 21 days to set in - University of South Australia

We're one month into 2025, but if you're struggling to hold onto your New Year's resolution, stay strong, as University of South Australia research shows that forming a healthy habit can take longer than you expect.

In the first systematic review of its kind, UniSA researchers found that new habits can begin forming within about two months (median of 59-66 days) but can take up to 335 days to establish.
It's an important finding that could inform health interventions to promote healthy behaviours and prevent chronic disease.

In Australia, chronic disease contributes to a large portion of the disease burden. Many conditions, including type 2 diabetes, heart disease, lung diseases and stroke, can be prevented by changing unhealthy habits or lifestyle factors.

University of South Australia researcher, Dr Ben Singh, says that contrary to popular belief, healthy habits take far longer than three weeks to lock down.

"Adopting healthy habits is essential for long-term well-being but forming these habits -- and breaking unhealthy ones -- can be challenging," Dr Singh says.

"At the beginning of the year, many of us are setting goals and making plans for the months ahead -things like being more active, cutting back on sugar, or making healthier food choices -- but while common wisdom suggests that it takes just 21 days to form such habits, these claims are not evidence-based.

"In our research, we've found that habit formation starts within around two months, but there is significant variability, with formation times ranging from four days to nearly a year.

"So, it's important for people who are hoping to make healthier habits not to give up at that mythical three-week mark."

The study of more than 2600 participants also found that certain factors can influence successful habit formation.

"When trying to establish a new healthy habit, success can be influenced by a range of things including how frequently we undertake the new activity, the timing of the practice, and whether we enjoy it or not," Dr Singh says.

"If you add a new practice to your morning routine, the data shows that you're more likely to achieve it. You're also more likely to stick to a new habit if you enjoy it.

"Planning and intending to complete a new behaviour can also help solidify a new habit, so make sure you continue to make time to include your new healthy habits into your everyday activities. This could be as easy as laying out your gym clothes the night before a morning walk or having a healthy lunch ready to go in the fridge.

"Tailoring habit-building strategies into our day and making plans on how we can achieve them, will put you in a position for success."

While more research is needed, researchers say that these findings can guide public health initiatives and personalised programs that support sustained and healthy behaviour change.

Additional stats:
  • Fruit and vegetables: 6/10 Australian adults do not eat enough fruit; only 1/15 Australian adults eat enough vegetables.
  • Physical activity: 83% of Australian teenagers, 37% of adults; and 57% of older adults (65+) do not meet physical activity guidelines.
  • Obesity: 14 million Australians (2 in 3 adults, and 1 in 4 children) are living with overweight or obesity.
  • Smoking and vaping: Tobacco is the second highest risk factor contributing to the burden of disease; More people are using e‑cigarettes in Australia, with nearly 20% people aged 14 and over reporting e‑cigarette use.
Ben Singh, Andrew Murphy, Carol Maher, Ashleigh E. Smith. Time to Form a Habit: A Systematic Review and Meta-Analysis of Health Behaviour Habit Formation and Its Determinants. Healthcare, 2024; 12 (23): 2488 DOI: 10.3390/healthcare12232488

Might xenon gas be useful for treating Alzheimer’s, as a new study suggests?

Ritchie WilliamsonUniversity of Bradford

An inert and unreactive gas may not seem like an obvious candidate for treating Alzheimer’s disease, yet a new study in mice suggests that xenon might just be the breakthrough we need.

Xenon is one of the six noble gases. Its name derives from the Greek word for “strange”. In medicine, it has been used as an anaesthetic since the early 1950s and, more recently, to treat brain injuries. It is also being tested in clinical trials for several conditions including depression and panic disorder.

The new study from Washington University and Brigham and Women’s Hospital (the teaching hospital of Harvard Medical School) in the US, has investigated the potential of xenon to treat the brain changes associated with Alzheimer’s.

These changes, which can be found in all brains of people with dementia, include clumps of the proteins amyloid and tau. The connections between neurons, called synapses, are also lost in Alzheimer’s disease and it is these connections between neurons that allow us to think, feel, move and remember.

A final common feature found in the brains of people with Alzheimer’s is inflammation. This is the body’s response to injury or disease and triggers the immune response to heal the damaged tissue.

Usually, inflammation disappears once the tissue is healed. In Alzheimer’s, the inflammation does not go away and the immune responses triggered can then damage healthy brain cells.

All of the above changes give rise to the symptoms of Alzheimer’s, such as memory loss, confusion and mood swings.

We don’t know what causes Alzheimer’s disease, but a leading theory suggests that a build up of amyloid triggers the process that then gives rise to the subsequent changes. So targeting amyloid seems like an obvious approach to treating the disease.

Just over two years ago, we learned of the success of one of these treatments called lecanemab in slowing the rate of decline.

The increase in clumps of proteins and the loss of synapses occur over decades, and it remains to be seen if directly targeting a single protein (either amyloid or tau) would be able to halt disease progression or have a measurable effect on all the characteristic harms.

The brain has several types of cell that work together to support brain function. Neurons are the cells responsible for everything – walking, talking, thinking and breathing. Astrocytes provide energy to the neurons as well as structural support and protective functions.

Other important cells found in the brain are microglia. They are immune cells that help remove pathogens and dead cells, among other activities. However, if they are overactive, they can cause chronic inflammation in the brain.

Microglia explained.

Microglia have different states depending on the environment they find themselves in, from an inactive state through to an active state. The difference in these states can be determined both by their appearance and importantly by the functions they perform. For example, active microglia can help clear the accumulated debris, such as unwanted proteins, cells and infections.

The scientists in this latest study used mice that have the same brain changes seen in Alzheimer’s to investigate the role of microglia. A specific active state of microglia that was associated with inflammation was identified. The scientists gave the mice xenon gas to inhale, which changed the state of their microglia.

This altered state allowed the microglia to surround, engulf and destroy amyloid deposits. It also changed the function of these microglia so that they didn’t drive further inflammation.

The researchers also found a reduction in the number and size of amyloid deposits found. All these changes were associated with the altered microglial state.

But what of the other changes seen in the brains of people with Alzheimer’s? The study also suggested xenon inhalation could reduce brain shrinkage (a common feature of Alzheimer’s disease) and lead to an increase in support of the connections between neurons. And in all the mice studied, markers of the excessive inflammatory response were reduced.

So, overall, the research suggests that inhaling xenon triggers the active microglia to change from an Alzheimer’s disease-type active state to a pre-Alzheimer’s state. This pre-Alzheimer’s disease state promotes the clearance of amyloid deposits and reduces the cell messengers that cause excessive inflammation.

New hope

There are no drugs that target microglia in Alzheimer’s and inroads have been made in addressing amyloid accumulation. Current drugs aimed at reducing amyloid in the brain offer a modest reduction in amyloid deposits and rate of decline.

Amyloid treatment will improve over time, but what of the other changes that occur in the brain, such as the deposits of tau, brain shrinkage and loss of synapses?

The new research opens up the possibility of targeting a cell type that has the innate potential to affect all of these characteristic harms.

Clinical trials in healthy volunteers are expected to begin this year. If these findings hold up, xenon could offer a completely new approach to this mind-robbing disease. It would be a treatment that doesn’t directly target amyloid, but rather aims to reset the brain’s immune response to counteract all of the disease’s destructive changes. Stranger things have happened.The Conversation

Ritchie Williamson, Director of Research, Associate Professor in Therapeutics, University of Bradford

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Archaeologists find 'lost' site depicted in the Bayeux Tapestry

January 27, 2025
Archaeologists have uncovered evidence that a house in England is the site of a lost residence of Harold, the last Anglo-Saxon King of England, and shown in the Bayeux Tapestry.

By reinterpreting previous excavations and conducting new surveys, the team from Newcastle University, UK, together with colleagues from the University of Exeter, believe they have located a power centre belonging to Harold Godwinson, who was killed in the Battle of Hastings in 1066.


The Bayeux Tapestry, showing King Harold riding to Bosham, where he attends church and feasts in a hall © The Society of Antiquaries of London.

Bosham, on the coast of West Sussex, is depicted twice in the Bayeux Tapestry, which famously narrates the Norman Conquest of England in 1066 when William, Duke of Normandy, challenged Harold for the throne. The Tapestry culminates in Williams's victory at Hastings, but earlier in the artwork Bosham is shown as the place where Harold enjoys a feast in an extravagant hall before setting sail for France, and again on his return.

The location of Harold's residence at Bosham has never been proved, although it has been suggested that a house in the village -- now a private home -- stands on the site.

Archaeological detective work
The team of archaeologists used a range of methods to unpick the early history of the property, including a geophysical survey of the surrounding area, assessment of standing remains, scrutiny of maps and records, and re-examination of evidence from excavations carried out in 2006 by West Sussex Archaeology.

This confirmed the existence of two previously unidentified Medieval buildings: one integrated into the current house and another in the garden. The crucial indication that the site had even earlier origins comes from the excavations in 2006, which identified a latrine within a large timber building. In the past decade or so archaeologists have begun to recognise a trend in England, beginning during the 10th century AD, for high-status houses to integrate toilets. The discovery of the latrine therefore indicated to the team that the timber building was of elite status, and almost certainly represents part of Harold's residence illustrated on the Bayeux Tapestry. The hall was one part of a more extensive complex, that also included a church, which still survives.

The research, which is published in The Antiquaries Journal, was led by Dr Duncan Wright, Senior Lecturer in Medieval Archaeology at Newcastle University, who said: "The realisation that the 2006 excavations had found, in effect, an Anglo-Saxon en-suite confirmed to us that this house sits on the site of an elite residence pre-dating the Norman Conquest. Looking at this vital clue, alongside all our other evidence, it is beyond all reasonable doubt that we have here the location of Harold Godwinson's private power centre, the one famously depicted on the Bayeux Tapestry."
Professor Oliver Creighton of the University of Exeter, and Co-Investigator of the project, added: "The Norman Conquest saw a new ruling class supplant an English aristocracy that has left little in the way of physical remains, which makes the discovery at Bosham hugely significant -- we have found an Anglo-Saxon show-home."

The research at Bosham was carried out as part of the wider Where Power Lies project, with a team drawn from Newcastle University and the University of Exeter, and funded by the Arts and Humanities Research Council. The project aims to explore the origins and early development of aristocratic centres like Bosham, assessing for the first time the archaeological evidence for these sites across the entirety of England.

David Gould, Oliver Creighton, Scott Chaussée, Michael Shapland, Duncan W Wright. WHERE POWER LIES: LORDLY POWER CENTRES IN THE ENGLISH LANDSCAPE c. 800–1200. The Antiquaries Journal, 2025; 1 DOI: 10.1017/S0003581524000350

Babies as young as 4 months can tell how the sounds of different languages are made – new research

Colin Maynard/Unsplash
Eylem AltuntasWestern Sydney University

Babies are like little detectives, constantly piecing together clues about the world around them. If you’ve ever noticed your baby staring at you while you talk, it’s because they’re picking up on more than just sounds – they’re learning how those sounds are made.

Our recent study, published in Developmental Science, shows this amazing process starts as early as four months old, shaking up the old belief that babies learn these patterns only after tuning in to their native language between 6 and 12 months of age.

It also gives us an earlier window to help children who might be at risk of speech or language delays.

Sorting through a buffet of sounds

By their first birthday, babies are already fine-tuning their ears to the sounds of their native language in a process called perceptual attunement. Think of it like their brain sorting through a buffet of sounds to focus on the ones that matter most.

But in their first six months, babies can tell apart sounds from languages they’ve never even heard. For example, they might distinguish certain Hindi contrasts that are challenging for adult English speakers or identify unique tones in Mandarin, even if they’re growing up in an English-speaking household.

This incredible ability doesn’t last forever. Between six and 12 months, babies start narrowing their focus to the sounds they hear most often. For vowels, this fine-tuning kicks in at around six months while consonants follow at closer to ten months.

Think of it as babies zooming in on the sounds that matter, such as the difference between the “r” and “l” in English, while losing sensitivity to sounds they don’t hear regularly.

Until now, researchers thought this narrowing process was needed for babies to start learning more complex language skills, such as figuring out that the “b” in “bin” and the “d” in “din” differ because one is made with the lips and the other with the tongue tip.

But our study found babies as young as four months are already learning how sounds are physically made, long before this narrowing begins.

Father holding his baby in his lap, surrounded by toys.
In their first six months, babies can tell apart sounds from languages they’ve never even heard. Mila Supinskaya Glashchenko/Shutterstock

Learning mini-languages

Here’s an example to picture this. Imagine you’re listening to someone speak a language you don’t know. Even if you don’t understand the words, you might notice how their lips or tongue move to make sounds. Four-month-old babies can do this too.

To demonstrate this, we conducted an experiment with 34 babies, aged four to six months, whose parents had provided consent to participate. We created a “match-the-pattern” game using two made up mini-languages.

One language had words with lip sounds like “b” and “v”, while the other used tongue-tip sounds like “d” and “z”. Each word, like “bivawo” or “dizalo”, was paired with a cartoon image – a jellyfish for lip words and a crab for tongue-tip words. A recording of a word was played at the same time its paired image was shown.

Why cartoons? Because babies can’t exactly tell us what they’re thinking, but they can form associations in their brains. These images helped us see if the babies could link each mini-language to the correct picture.

After the babies learned these mini-languages and their picture pairings, we mixed things up.

Instead of hearing the words, they watched silent videos of a person’s face saying new words from the same mini-languages.

In some videos, the face matched the cartoon they had learned earlier. In others, it didn’t. We then tracked how long the babies looked at the videos – a common method researchers use to see what grabs their attention. Babies tend to look longer at things that surprise or interest them and shorter at things they find familiar, helping us understand how they process and recognise what they see.

The results were clear: babies looked significantly longer at the videos where the face matched what they’d learned. This showed they weren’t just passively listening earlier – they were actively learning the rules of the mini-languages and linking that knowledge to what they saw.

Cartoon image of a red crab and a pink jellyfish against a black background.
The experiment involved pairing certain words with a cartoon image of a jellyfish and a crab. Eylem Altuntas

Connecting the dots

In simple terms, this means four-month-old babies can connect the dots between sound and sight. This early ability to spot patterns in how sounds are made is the foundation for learning language later on. It’s like their brains are already laying the groundwork for saying their first words.

This discovery changes what we thought we knew about babies’ early language learning. It suggests babies start figuring out patterns at four months, well before they begin perceptually attuning to the sounds of their native language between six and 12 months.

That opens up exciting new possibilities for helping children who might struggle with speech or language. If we can help earlier, we might make a big difference.

These findings raise several interesting questions. For example, can babies learn other differences such as voicing – whether a sound is made with a buzzing vibration, like the difference between “b” (buzzing) and “p” (no buzzing) – as early as four months? How does growing up in a bilingual home affect this ability? Could babies use this skill to learn patterns in entirely new languages?

By exploring these questions, we’ll keep uncovering the amazing ways babies’ brains set the stage for learning one of the most complex human skills: language.The Conversation

Eylem Altuntas, Postdoctoral Researcher, Speech & Language Development, The MARCS Institute for Brain, Behaviour and Development, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Paracetamol pack sizes and availability are changing. Here’s what you need to know

Bowonpat Sakaew/Shutterstock
Natasa GisevUNSW Sydney and Ria HopkinsUNSW Sydney

Changes are coming into effect from February 1 about how paracetamol is sold in Australia.

This mainly affects pack sizes of paracetamol sold outside pharmacies and how paracetamol is accessed in pharmacies.

The changes, announced by Australia’s drug regulator, are in line with moves internationally to reduce the harms of liver toxicity and the risk of overdose.

However, there are no new safety concerns when paracetamol is used as directed. And children’s products are not affected.

What is paracetamol?

Paracetamol is commonly sold under brand names such as Panadol, Dymadon and Panamax. It’s used to treat mild pain and fever for short periods or can be prescribed for chronic (long-term) pain.

Millions of packs of this cheap and accessible medicine are sold in Australia every year.

Small packs (up to 20 tablets) have been available from supermarkets and other retailers such as petrol stations. Larger packs (up to 100 tablets) are only available from pharmacies.

Paracetamol is relatively safe when used as directed. However, at higher-than-recommended doses, it can cause liver toxicity. In severe cases and when left untreated, this can be lethal.

Why are the rules changing?

In 2022, we wrote about how the Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) was considering changes to paracetamol access because of an increase in people going to hospital with paracetamol poisoning.

An expert review it commissioned found there were about 40-50 deaths every year from paracetamol poisoning between 2007 and 2020. Between 2009-10 and 2016-17, hospital admissions for this increased (from 8,617 to 11,697), before reducing in 2019-20 (8,723). Most admissions were due to intentional self-poisonings, and about half of these were among people aged ten to 24.

After the report, the TGA consulted with the public to work out how to prevent paracetamol poisonings.

Options included reducing pack sizes, limiting how many packs could be bought at once, moving larger packs behind the pharmacy counter and restricting access by age.

Responses were mixed. Although responses supported the need to prevent poisonings, there were concerns about how changes might affect:

  • people with chronic pain, especially those in regional areas, where it may be harder to access pharmacies and, therefore, larger packs

  • people on limited incomes, if certain products were made prescription-only.

Although deaths from paracetamol poisoning are tragic and preventable, they are rare considering how much paracetamol Australians use. There is less than one death due to poisoning for every million packs sold.

Because of this, it was important the TGA addressed concerns about poisonings while making sure Australians still had easy access to this essential medicine.

Pharmacist typing at computer behind the counter
If you buy large packs of paracetamol for chronic pain, you’ll need to go to the pharmacy counter. StratfordProductions/Shutterstock

So what’s changing?

The key changes being introduced relate to new rules about the pack sizes that can be sold outside pharmacies, and the location of products sold in pharmacies.

From February 1, packs sold in supermarkets and places other than pharmacies will reduce from a maximum 20 tablets to 16 tablets per pack. These changes bring Australia in line with other countries. These include the United Kingdom, which restricted supermarket packs to 16 tablets in 1998, and saw reductions in poisonings.

In all jurisdictions except Queensland and Western Australia, packs sold in pharmacies larger than 50 tablets will move behind the pharmacy counter and can only be sold under pharmacist supervision. In Queensland and WA, products containing more than 16 tablets will only be available from behind the pharmacy counter and sold under pharmacist supervision.

In all jurisdictions, any packs containing more than 50 tablets will need to be sold in blister packs, rather than bottles.

Several paracetamol products are not affected by these changes. These include children’s products, slow-release formulations (for example, “osteo” products), and products already behind the pharmacy counter or only available via prescription.

What else do I need to know?

These changes have been introduced to reduce the risk of poisonings from people exceeding recommended doses. The overall safety profile of paracetamol has not changed.

Paracetamol is still available from all current locations and there are no plans to make it prescription-only or remove it from supermarkets altogether. Many companies have already been updating their packaging to ensure there are no gaps in supply.

The reduction in pack sizes of paracetamol available in supermarkets means a pack of 16 tablets will now last two days instead of two-and-a-half days if taken at the maximum dose (two tablets, four times a day). Anyone in pain that does not improve after short-term use should speak to their pharmacist or GP.

For people who use paracetamol regularly for chronic pain, it is more cost-effective to continue buying larger packs from pharmacies. As larger packs (50+ tablets) need to be kept out of sight, you will need to ask at the pharmacy counter. Pharmacists know that for many people it’s appropriate to use paracetamol daily for chronic pain.The Conversation

Natasa Gisev, Clinical pharmacist and Scientia Associate Professor at the National Drug and Alcohol Research Centre, UNSW Sydney and Ria Hopkins, Postdoctoral Research Fellow, National Drug and Alcohol Research Centre, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Public health alert: Likely case of botulism linked to unregulated anti-wrinkle injections

NSW Health is reminding the community to only receive cosmetic anti-wrinkle injections from an authorised practitioner.

This follows a suspected case of botulism in a woman in Sydney, which is believed to be linked to an unregulated anti-wrinkle injection she received at a residential premises from a person in the previous two weeks.

The woman is receiving intensive care at a hospital in Sydney.

NSW Health is working with the Health Care Complaints Commission and NSW Police on this matter.

NSW Health Executive Director Health Protection Dr Jeremy McAnulty said the case was a reminder of the potential side effects of unregulated cosmetic injections and to be sure to receive cosmetic injections by authorised practitioners.

“Cosmetic injections, if used incorrectly, could result in serious harm and even death in the most serious of cases,” Dr McAnulty said.

“Botulism, although rare, can be fatal, which is why it is so important that anyone receiving cosmetic injections does so under the supervision of an appropriately registered health practitioner.

“In this particular case, investigations are continuing, but we want people to be aware of the symptoms of botulism as others could have been exposed.”

Symptoms can appear for up to two weeks following injections.

Symptoms of botulism may include:
  • progressive weakness
  • difficulty swallowing (dysphagia)
  • drooping eyelids (ptosis)
  • blurred or double vision (diplopia)
  • difficulty breathing
If you experience any of these symptoms, you should seek immediate medical attention by visiting their nearest emergency department or call Triple Zero (000) for emergency assistance.

If you or someone you care about needs health advice, treatment or care and it is not life-threatening, you can call Healthdirect for free on 1800 022 222 where you will speak with a registered nurse. Depending on your condition, the nurse will recommend the right care option for you and connect you with one of the many services available in NSW.

How the world fell in love with plastic without thinking through the consequences – podcast

Joaquin Traverso Traverso/Shutterstock
Gemma WareThe Conversation

Every year, 400 million tons of plastic are produced worldwide, and every year, approximately 57 million tons of plastic pollution is created. And yet in November, the latest round of negotiations on the first legally binding international treaty on plastics pollution ended without an agreement.

Oil-producing countries, including Saudi Arabia, Iran, Kuwait and Russia, refused to sign up to a clause calling for the world to reduce its production of plastics. As clean energy technologies like electric vehicles gain traction worldwide, these economies are counting on continued and even increased plastic production to buffer them from the economic blow of reduced demand for oil.

So what can we really do about the plastics pollution problem? The Conversation Weekly podcast sat down with Mark Miodowonik, professor of materials and society at UCL in the UK, to understand the history of plastic, how it’s shaped our lives, and what can be done to make sure more plastic is recycled and less ends up polluting the planet.

In 1907 a chemist called Leo Bakerland invented a new type of rigid, synthetic plastic. He called it bakelite, and it was quickly seized upon by the modernism movement.

“You can start mass producing items in a particular shape and they’re all the same,” explains Miodowonik, who leads the Plastic Waste Innovation Hub at UCL. First telephones, and then radios are manufactured using bakelite. “It’s a huge revolution in the way people think about themselves, how they communicate with the world, who they are … plastic becomes the material of this new era and everyone goes to town with it.”

Because plastic is a big business, the price comes down and it goes from a somewhat luxurious item to an everyday one. Suddenly everything is made of different types of plastic, including disposable packaging for fast food that people are encouraged to throw away.

By the 1970s, scientists working in plastic manufacturing companies were sounding alarms about all the plastic making its way to landfill and how long it took to degrade. But little action was taken, says Miodowonik.

“You can see that the companies obviously don’t want to deal with it. It’s going to cost them money. And us people who are buying this stuff, we went along with it, right? We luxuriated in it. We weren’t too bothered either.”

Making polluters pay

As a result of environmental activists raising the alarm in the 1980s and 1990s, governments and companies slowly started to at least pay lip service to plastic recycling. And these days, there has been a shift in our attitudes toward plastics as people are starting to realise the scale of plastic pollution.

Few plastic manufacturers have faced consequences for their inaction, though these days, there seems to be more of a collective will to take action against them. In September 2024, the US federal government successfully sued Keurig, the company that makes those little plastic pods that produce one cup of coffee or tea, for claiming that those pods are recyclable when they’re not. Keurig paid US$1.5 million (£1.2m) in penalties.

The state of California in the US has also brought a similar lawsuit against Exxon Mobil alleging that it knowingly made fraudulent claims about the recyclability of its plastic products.

Midowonik doesn’t lay the blame solely at the feet of companies like these. He says the inaction of plastic manufacturers to reduce plastic waste is a reflection of our own consumerist society and our desire for cheap stuff. He believes there needs to be a more concerted effort to make polluters pay.

“I think we need to change the laws so that if you make something, you’re responsible for its end of life. You should not be able to sell any product into a market where there’s not a waste processing system in place which can deal with that material.”

Listen to the The Conversation Weekly podcast to hear the full conversation with Miodowonik.


This episode of The Conversation Weekly was produced by Gemma Ware and Katie Flood. Sound design was by Michelle Macklem, and our theme music is by Neeta Sarl.

Newsclips in this episode from NHK World JapanToday and CBS News.

You can find us on Instagram at theconversationdotcom or via e-mail. You can also subscribe to The Conversation’s free daily e-mail here.

Listen to The Conversation Weekly via any of the apps listed above, download it directly via our RSS feed or find out how else to listen here.The Conversation

Gemma Ware, Host, The Conversation Weekly Podcast, The Conversation

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Is it school reluctance or refusal? How to tell the difference and help your child

Rachel LeslieUniversity of Southern QueenslandAnnette BrömdalUniversity of Southern QueenslandCris TownleyWestern Sydney University, and Glenys ObergThe University of Queensland

It’s back-to-school season around Australia. While many students will be excited to reunite with friends, or have some nerves about the first day, others may feel an overwhelming sense of dread about school.

This can be confusing and worrying for parents.

We are researching child and parent perspectives about what is making school too stressful to attend. We have found it is useful to think about school attendance as a spectrum that may look like reluctance at one end and emotional distress at the other.

Understanding the difference can help you to know which supports to seek for your child.

School attendance in Australia

Last week, new national figures showed school attendance continues to be an issue in Australian schools post-COVID.

In 2024, school attendance rates (the number of days students attend) for Years 1–10 was 88.3%. This is down slightly from 88.6% in 2023. Student attendance levels (the percentage of students who go for more than 90% of the time) was 59.8% in 2024, down from 61.6% in 2023.

In 2019, national attendance rates were 91.4% and attendance levels were 73.1%.

While these reports don’t tell us why the figures are dropping, we know school refusal is a common and growing issue. A 2023 Senate inquiry heard how family requests for support to groups such as School Can’t Australia have almost doubled every year since 2014.

A 2023 Greens-commissioned survey of 1,000 families found 39% said their child had been unable to attend school in the past year because of anxiety or stress.

What is school reluctance?

Sometimes children and young people will not want to go to school but it is not school refusal.

When this is temporary and tied to a specific stressor, such as a test, social conflict, sports lesson or event like a camp or swimming carnival, it can be described as “school reluctance”.

Signs can include clinginess in younger children or teenagers, as well as complaints of seemingly minor ailments such as a tummy ache, headache or “feeling sick”.

In these cases, it is important for parents to validate a child’s feelings. Using phrases such as “I can see you’re nervous about starting a new class” can make children feel seen and heard.

Families should also set up predictable morning routines to help children build self-regulation skills. If you celebrate small wins, such as completing the day, or getting to school on time, you can help boost motivation and confidence.

These early interventions can help avoid escalation into more significant school-related distress.

When it’s more than reluctance

But at other times, a child’s issues with school are more serious and a child feels overwhelmed by stressors that make attending school feel threatening, unsafe and impossible. This is what is seen as “school refusal”, although some families and researchers are now using the term “school can’t” to reframe the issue and avoid blaming children in these situations.

Some signs this could be happening to your child include:

  • spending significant portions of the school day in the office or sick bay

  • extreme difficulty in getting ready in the morning, even with basic tasks such as dressing or making breakfast

  • physical symptoms such as nausea or dizziness that worsen on school days, but may also be evident on weekends

  • persistent absences from school, even with encouragement and support

  • extreme emotional reactions – crying, anger or complete withdrawal – when school is mentioned.

Who can be impacted?

Reports show school refusal is more common in some groups, for example neurodiverse studentsgender-diverse students, and students born with innate variations of sex characteristics (also known as intersex variations / traits).

School refusal is closely associated with social anxiety, separation anxiety and school anxiety. This anxiety can become overwhelming and trigger a student’s need to avoid the environment that is causing them emotional distress. For these students, not going to school might be a survival mechanism or a way to respond to burnout.

Whatever the reason, we know this can lead to stress and conflict for families. For students, it can have long-term effects on academic success, social skills and mental health, as well as poorer outcomes after they leave school.

Supporting your child

If your child is refusing or can’t go to school, they need your empathy and support. Listen to them and be their advocate. Remember, you know them best. You can also:

  • seek professional help. A psychologist may help uncover and address the root causes of their distress

  • work with the school. Talk to teachers and staff about accommodations such as flexible schedules or sensory breaks, and how else they may offer inclusive, affirming and supportive learning environments

  • think outside the box. This can include prioritising wellbeing over attendance. Consider a break from schooling or alternative forms of education, which may suit your family better

  • seek support from other families. You are not alone – there are many other families who share this experience.


If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14 or Kids Helpline on 1800 55 1800.The Conversation

Rachel Leslie, Lecturer in Curriculum and Pedagogy with a focus on Educational Psychology, University of Southern QueenslandAnnette Brömdal, Associate Professor, Sport, Health and Physical Education, University of Southern QueenslandCris Townley, Research fellow, Transforming Early Education and Child Health Research Centre, Western Sydney University, and Glenys Oberg, PhD candidate in education and trauma, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Online privacy policies can be 90,000 words long. Here are 3 ways to simplify them

Rokas Tenys/Shutterstock
Adam AndreottaCurtin University

Think about the last app you downloaded. Did you read every word of the associated privacy policy? If so, did you fully understand it?

If you said “no” to either of these questions, you are not alone. Only 6% of Australians claim to read all the privacy policies that apply to them.

Don’t blame yourself too much, though. Privacy policies are often long – sometimes up to 90,000 words – and hard to understand. And there may be hundreds that apply to the average internet user (one for each website, app, device, or even car you use).

Regular reviews are also required. In 2023, for example, Elon Musk’s X updated its privacy policy to include the possibility of collecting biometric data.

For these reasons, some privacy scholars have argued that it’s nearly impossible for us to properly manage how our personal data are collected and used online.

But even though it might be hard to imagine, we can regain control over our data. Here are three possible reforms to online privacy policies that could help.

1. Visuals-based privacy policies

One way to shorten privacy policies is by replacing some text with visuals.

Recently, the Australian bank Bankwest developed a visual-style terms and conditions policy to explain one of its products. A consulting engineering company also used visuals in its employment contract.

There is evidence that suggests this promotes transparency and helps users understand the contents of a policy.

Could visuals work with online privacy policies? I think companies should try. Visuals could not only shorten online privacy policies, but also make them more intelligible.

2. Automated consent

Adding visuals won’t solve all the problems with privacy policies, as there would still be too many to go through. Another idea is to automate consent. This essentially means getting software to consent for us.

One example of this software, currently being developed at Carnegie Melon University in the United States, is personalised privacy assistants. The software promises to:

learn our preferences and help us more effectively manage our privacy settings across a wide range of devices and environments without the need for frequent interruption.

In the future, instead of reading through hundreds of polices, you might simply configure your privacy settings once and then leave the accepting or rejecting of polices up to software.

The software could raise any red flags and make sure that your personal data are being collected and used only in ways that align with your preferences.

The technology does, however, raise a series of ethical and legal issues that will need to be wrestled with before widespread adoption.

For example, who would be liable if the software made a mistake and shared your data in a way that harmed you? Furthermore, privacy assistants would need their own privacy policies. Could users easily review them, and also track or review decisions the assistants made, in a way that was not overwhelming?

3. Ethics review

These techniques may have limited success, however, if the privacy policies themselves fail to offer user choices or are deceptive.

recent study found that some of the top fertility apps had deceptive privacy policies. And in 2022, the Federal Court of Australia fined Google for misleading people about how it used personal data.

To help address this, privacy policies could be subject to ethical review, in much the same way that researchers must have their work reviewed by ethics committees before they are permitted to conduct research.

If a policy was found to be misleading, lacked transparency, or simply failed to offer users meaningful options, then it would fail to get approval.

Would this really work? And who would be included in the ethics committee? Further, why would companies subject their policies to external review, if they were not required to do so by law?

These are difficult questions to answer. But companies who did subject their polices to review could build trust with users.

Glass building with 'Google' written in colourful letters.
In 2022, the Federal Court of Australia fine Google for misleading people about how it used personal data. JHVEPhoto/Shutterstock

Testing the alternatives

In 2024, Choice revealed that several prominent car brands, such as Tesla, Kia, and Hyundai, collect people’s driving data and sell it to third-party companies. Many people who drove these cars were not aware of this.

How might the above ideas help?

First, if privacy polices had visuals, data collection and use practices could be explained to users in easier-to-understand ways.

Second, if automated consent software was being used, and users had a choice, the sharing of such driving data could be blocked in advance, without users even having to read the policy, if that was what they preferred. Ideally, users could pre-configure their privacy preferences, and the software could do the rest. For example, automated consent software could indicate to companies that users do not give consent for their driving data to be sold for advertising purposes.

Third, an ethics review committee may suggest that users should be given a choice about whether to share driving data, and that the policy should be transparent and easy to understand.

A parked blue car being recharged.
Some car companies, such as Tesla, collect people’s driving data and sell it to third-party companies. Jure Divich/Shutterstock

Benefits of being transparent

Recent reforms to privacy laws in Australia are a good start. These reforms promise to give Australians a legal right to take action over serious privacy violations, and have a greater focus on protecting children online.

But many of the ways of empowering users will require companies to go beyond what is legally required.

One of the biggest challenges will be motivating companies to want to change.

It is important to keep in mind there are benefits of being transparent with users. It can help build trust and reputation. And in an era where consumers have become more privacy conscious, here lies an opportunity for companies to get ahead of the game.The Conversation

Adam Andreotta, Lecturer, School of Management and Marketing, Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The ‘singles tax’ means you often pay more for going it alone. Here’s how it works

lightman_pic/Shutterstock
Alicia BubbRMIT University and Sarah SinclairRMIT University

Heard of the “singles tax”? Going it alone can also come with a hidden financial burden you may not be aware of.

Obviously, this isn’t an official levy paid to anyone in particular. It simply refers to the higher costs single people face compared to couples or families.

Single-person households have been on the rise in Australia. It’s projected they’ll account for up to 28% of all households in 2046.

People are marrying later, divorce rates remain high and an ageing population means more people live alone in older age. Many people also make a conscious decision to remain single, seeing it as a sign of independence and empowerment.

This is part of a global trend, with singledom increasing in Europe, North America and Asia.

So, how does the singles tax work – and is it worse for some groups than others? What, if anything, can we do about it?

Why does being single cost more?

One of the biggest drivers of the singles tax is the inability to split important everyday costs. For example, a single person renting a one-bedroom apartment has to bear the full cost, while a couple sharing it can split the rent.

Woman selecting vegetables from the fresh produce section of a supermarket
Being single can mean not being being able to split living costs like groceries. Gorodenkoff/Shutterstock

Singles often miss out on the savings from bulk grocery purchases, as larger households consume more and can take better advantage of these deals.

Fixed costs for a house like electricity, water and internet bills often don’t increase by much when you add an extra user or two. Living alone means you pay more.

These are all examples of how couples benefit from economies of scale – the cost advantage that comes from sharing fixed or semi-fixed expenses – simply by living together.

My calculations, based on the most recent data from the Australian Bureau of Statistics (ABS), show that singles spend about 3% more per person on goods and services compared to couples.

Compared to couples with children, single parents spend about 19% more per person. While government support mechanisms such as the child care subsidy exist, many single parents find them insufficient, especially if they work irregular hours.

Beyond the essentials

The singles tax extends beyond our “essential needs” and into the costs of travel, socialising and entertainment.

Solo travellers, for example, may encounter something called a “single supplement” – an extra fee charged for utilising an accommodation or travel product designed for two people.

Streaming services such as Netflix and Spotify offer family plans at slightly higher prices than individual ones, making them more cost-effective for larger households.

Person holding remote, screen shows a streaming service loading screen
Couples and families can easily split fixed costs, such as streaming subscriptions. Vantage_DS/Shutterstock

A global phenomenon

Reports from around the world paint a similar picture.

In the United States, research by real estate marketplace Zillow found singles pay on average US$7,000 ($A11,100) more annually for housing, compared to those sharing a two-bedroom apartment.

In Europe, higher living costs and limited government supports put singles at a disadvantage. And in Canada, singles report feeling the pinch of rising rent and grocery prices.

The tax systems of many countries can amplify the financial burden of being single, by favouring couples and families.

In the United States, for example, tax policies intended to alleviate poverty often exclude childless adults, disproportionately taxing them into poverty.

The Earned Income Tax Credit (EITC) reduces tax liabilities by providing refundable credits to low-income workers. It’s had some significant benefits for families, but offers minimal support to single, childless individuals.

Man sitting on bed alone in room facing a window
Many tax structures disadvantage single-person households. WPixz/Shutterstock

As economist Patricia Apps argues, tax and transfer policies often fail to account for the complexities of household income distribution.

These systems favour traditional family structures by providing benefits like spousal offsets or joint income tax breaks. Single individuals and single-parent households are left bearing a disproportionate financial burden.

Who is affected the most?

The singles tax disproportionately impacts women, who are more likely to live alone than men.

This can compound existing financial pressures such as the gender pay gap, taking career breaks, and societal expectations leaving them with lower retirement savings.

For older women, the singles tax adds another layer of difficulty to maintaining financial security.

And it can seriously exacerbate financial pressures on single mothers. Many rely on child support payments, which are often inconsistent or inefficient, leaving them financially vulnerable.

Working part-time or in casual roles due to caregiving responsibilities further limits their earning potential.

Working mother taking notes while daughter is sitting on her lap and using laptop
Single mothers may be disproportionately impacted by the singles tax. Drazen Zigic/Shutterstock

There are unique challenges for single men, too, who may lack the same access to family-oriented subsidies and workplace flexibility. Single men may also face societal expectations to spend more on dating or socialising.

Alarmingly, men are disproportionately represented among the homeless population, making up 55.9% of people experiencing homelessness, and single men have a higher risk of premature death.

Growing recognition

While the singles tax highlights big systemic inequities, there are signs the issue is receiving more attention.

Some advocacy groups are pushing for better financial protections and child support reforms for single mothers.

Similarly, efforts to address homelessness have gained momentum, with increased attention to advocacy and services for single men facing housing insecurity.

There is also the potential to design tax systems to reduce these inequities. Tax systems that treat individuals as economic units, instead of basing benefits on household structures, could mitigate the singles tax and create a fairer system for all.The Conversation

Alicia Bubb, Research & Teaching Sessional Academic, RMIT University and Sarah Sinclair, Senior Lecturer in Economics, RMIT University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What’s the difference between Hass and Shepard avocados? It’s not just the colour

Stepanenco Valeria/Unsplash
Yasmine ProbstUniversity of Wollongong and Karen ZoszakUniversity of Wollongong

Whether with crumbled feta or poached eggs, you’d be challenged to find a cafe in Australia or farther afield that doesn’t have avocado somewhere on the menu.

This fruit (yep, it’s a fruit from a tree, not a vegetable) is widely associated with brunch culture and other trendy eating habits.

The Australian avocado industry developed in the 1960s, 30 years after the start of the first large-scale production in California. Orchards producing avocados now span all parts of Australia, except Tasmania, Australian Capital Territory and the Northern Territory.

Avocados are considered a monoculture crop: they’re grown on the same land each year, making them more susceptible to pests and creating a need for increased fertiliser use. The carbon footprint of avos is almost twice as high as that of apples, but much lower than many animal food sources.

There are now over 50 different avocado types globally, but only a few are grown commercially.

Not all avos are the same

You may not notice a difference when you get your avocado toast at a cafe. But at the shops or the market, a striking difference occurs each year in Australia.

In autumn, the familiar dark purple Hass avocado disappears and is replaced with the lighter green Shepard variety. In Australia, this typically happens between February and May.

If you don’t know the difference between the two, you may expect Shepard avos to perform the same way as Hass – and be left disappointed. There are some important differences.

Hass avocados

A pile of dark avocados on a cutting board with one cut open in the foreground.
Hass avocado skin is very dark when ripe. Nungning20/Shutterstock

Hass avocados are known for their dark, pebbly-looking skin that appears almost black when ripe. They have an ovoid shape with a slight pear-like appearance. The thick skin can be a challenge to peel, often requiring a sharp knife or avocado slicer.

Hass avocado flavour is rich, creamy and buttery, with nutty undertones. Their texture is ideal for mashing, blending and spreading, creating a creamy texture in dips, guacamole and smoothies.

Hass avocados ripen – and darken in colour – slowly over several days. They remain firm to the touch when ripe, and will feel squishy when overripe. A slight give when pressed confirms Hass avos are ready to eat.

Available in Australia from May to January, Hass are the dominant variety of commercially grown avocado worldwide. They were cultivated by horticulturalist Rudolph Hass in California in the 1920s.

Shepard avocados

Shepard avocados have smooth, green skin that remains green even when they are fully ripe. They are round to slightly oblong in shape and have a slightly milder and sweeter taste, with less pronounced nutty undertones.

Shepard avocados ripen more quickly than Hass, but you won’t be able to tell that by the colour. Instead, check for softness – Shepard avocados are very soft when ripe. What might feel overripe when handling a Hass will likely be ideal ripeness if it’s a Shepard. The thin, smooth skin makes them easy to peel by hand or with a gentle squeeze.

Their buttery soft texture is firm and creamy, and they hold their shape well when cut, making them ideal for slicing, dicing and spreading despite being structurally firm.

Interestingly, Shepard avocados brown much more slowly than Hass, making them perfect for garnishes. Their milder flavour also makes Shepard avos well suited to sweet dishes, such as chocolate mousse.

Shepard avos account for approximately 10–15% of Australian avocados and are in season from February to April each year while there is a gap in the Hass season.

Australia is the only country in the world that grows Shepard avocados commercially. (They are grown in Queensland.)

Avocados and our health

As avocados contain 59% fat, people wishing to lose weight were previously advised to avoid or limit eating them.

We now know that a majority of this fat is oleic acid, a monounsaturated (healthy) fat that helps to reduce cholesterol and improve heart health.

Additionally, only 1% of an avocado is made up of carbohydrates, making the fruit popular with people following a ketogenic (keto) diet of low carbs and high fat.

People who consume avos also tend to follow a better pattern of eating in general. They eat more whole grains, fruit and vegetables and fewer discretionary or takeaway foods.

As an energy-dense food, consuming a whole avocado is about the same as eating 2.5 whole apples. Per 100 grams, avocado actually gives you less energy than an equivalent amount of cooked white rice.

As avocado dishes are visually appealing and often featured in food photography, they have become a symbol of modern eating habits.The Conversation

Yasmine Probst, Professor, School of Medical, Indigenous and Health Sciences, University of Wollongong and Karen Zoszak, Accredited Practising Dietitian, PhD Candidate, University of Wollongong

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Too many Australians miss out on essential medical care every year. Here’s how to fix ‘GP deserts’

Zhuravlev Andrey/Shutterstock
Peter BreadonGrattan Institute and Wendy HuGrattan Institute

Some communities are “GP deserts”, where there are too few GPs to ensure everyone can get the care they need when they need it. These communities are typically sicker and poorer than the rest of Australia, but receive less care and face higher fees.

At the 2025 federal election, all parties should commit to changing that. The next government – whether Labor or Coalition, majority or minority – should set a minimum level of access to GP care, and fund local schemes to fill the worst gaps.

People in GP deserts miss out on care

About half a million Australians live in GP deserts. These are communities in the bottom 5% for GP services per person. Most GP deserts are in remote Queensland, Western Australia and the Northern Territory, and some are in Canberra.

People in GP deserts receive 40% fewer GP services than the national average. This means less of the essential check-ups, screening and medication management GPs provide.

Nurses and Aboriginal health workers help plug some of the gap, but even then GP deserts aren’t close to catching up to other areas.

And some people miss out altogether. Last year, 8% of people older than 65 in these areas didn’t see the GP at all, compared to less than 1% in the rest of the country.

Poorer and sicker places miss out, year after year

GP deserts are in the worst possible places. These communities are typically sicker and poorer, so they should be getting more care than the rest of Australia, not less.

People in GP deserts are almost twice more likely to go to hospital for a condition that might have been avoided with good primary care, or to die from an avoidable cause.

Most GP deserts are in the bottom 40% for wealth, yet pay more for care. Patients in GP deserts are bulk billed six percentage points less than the national average.

These communities miss out year after year. While rises and falls in national bulk billing rates get headlines, the persistent gaps in GP care are ignored. The same communities have languished well below the national average for more than a decade.

Policies to boost rural primary care don’t go far enough

Most GP deserts are rural, so recent policies to boost rural primary care could help a bit.

In response to rising out-of-pocket costs, the government has committed A$3.5 billion to triple bulk-billing payments for the most disadvantaged. Those payments are much higher for clinics in rural areas. An uptick in rural bulk billing last year is an early indication it may be working.

Older man sits in living room in a wheelchair
Older people in GP deserts are much less likely to see a GP than their peers in other parts of the country. Theera Disayarat/Shutterstock

New rural medical schools and programs should help boost rural GP supply, since students who come from, and train in, rural areas are more likely to work in them. A “rural generalist” pathway recognises GPs who have trained in an additional skill, such as obstetrics or mental health services.

But broad-based rural policies are not enough. Not all rural areas are GP deserts, and not all GP deserts are rural. Australia also needs more tailored approaches.

Local schemes can work

Some communities have taken matters into their own hands.

In Triabunna on Tasmania’s east coast, a retirement in 2020 saw residents left with only one GP, forcing people to travel to other areas for care, sometimes for well over an hour. This was a problem for other towns in the region too, such as Swansea and Bicheno, as well as much of rural Tasmania.

In desperation, the local council has introduced a A$90 medical levy to help fund new clinics. It’s also trialling a new multidisciplinary care approach, bringing together many different health practitioners to provide care at a single contact point and reduce pressure on GPs. Residents get more care and spend less time and effort coordinating individual appointments.

Murrumbidgee in New South Wales has taken a different approach. There, trainee doctors retain a single employer throughout their placements. That means they can work across the region, in clinics funded by the federal government and hospitals managed by the state government, without losing employment benefits. That helps trainees to stay closely connected to their communities and their patients. Murrumbidgee’s success has inspired similar trials in other parts of NSWSouth AustraliaQueensland and Tasmania.

These are promising approaches, but they put the burden on communities to piece together funding to plug holes. Without secure funding, these fixes will remain piecemeal and precarious, and risk a bidding war to attract GPs, which would leave poorer communities behind.

Australia should guarantee a minimum level of GP care

The federal government should guarantee a minimum level of general practice for all communities. If services funded by Medicare and other sources stay below that level for years, funding should automatically become available to bridge the gap.

The federal and state governments should be accountable for fixing GP deserts. These regions typically have small populations, few clinicians, and limited infrastructure. So governments must work together to make the best use of scarce resources.

GP writes script for patient.
Some states have introduced schemes where doctors can work in a range of locations. Stephen Barnes/Shutterstock

Funding must be flexible, because every GP desert is different. Sometimes the solution may be as simple as helping an existing clinic hire extra staff. Other communities may want to set up a new clinic, or introduce telehealth for routine check-ups. There is no lack of ideas about how to close gaps in care, the problem lies in funding them.

Lifting all GP deserts to the top of the desert threshold – or guaranteeing at least 4.5 GP services per person per year, adjusted for age, would cost the federal government at least A$30 million a year in Medicare payments.

Providing extra services in GP deserts will be more expensive than average. But even if the cost was doubled or tripled, it would still be only a fraction of the billions of dollars of extra incentives GPs are getting to bulk bill – and it would transform the communities that need help the most.

GP deserts didn’t appear overnight. Successive governments have left some communities with too little primary care. The looming federal election gives every party the opportunity to make amends.

If they do, the next term of government could see GP deserts eliminated for good.The Conversation

Peter Breadon, Program Director, Health and Aged Care, Grattan Institute and Wendy Hu, Associate, Grattan Institute

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Changing jobs is a big move but it’s worth considering if your workplace is toxic

Rauschan_films/Shutterstock
Timothy Colin BednallSwinburne University of Technology and Kathryn PageSwinburne University of Technology

Returning to work after a summer break can be jarring, especially for the many workers dissatisfied with their jobs. Almost half report high levels of job-related stress.

Dissatisfaction can be tied to an unhealthy, even toxic workplace where negative behaviour and poor leadership harm employee wellbeing and productivity.

Key indicators include bullying, harassment, lack of trust, poor communication and high job strain.

The impact of toxic workplaces

If you think your workplace is toxic, it is worth considering the impact it is having on your mental health. You might also consider how committed your organisation is to supporting its employees’ mental health.

Toxicity can develop gradually through subtle patterns of micromanagement, exclusion, or eroding morale. These dynamics create a draining environment that undermines individual wellbeing and business success.

As well as affecting employees’ mental health, there is growing evidence workplace stress may lead to serious physical health problems, such as cardiovascular disease.

According to Safe Work Australia, mental health-related workers’ compensation claims have increased by over a third since 2017-2018.

In 2021-2022, there were 11,700 accepted claims relating to mental health conditions. These cases proved highly costly for employers, with the median compensation paid being A$58,615.

The International Standards Organisation released a global standard in 2021 to help manage psychological health and safety risks in workplaces.

A number of countries, including Canada and Australia, have introduced laws and standards making employers responsible for preventing and managing work-related stress.

To support a safe workplace, some researchers (including one of the authors) have recommended an integrated, multidisciplinary approach to ensure companies respond appropriately to mental health risks.

What your employer is doing in the following three areas can show how committed they are to protecting mental health.

1. Preventing, minimising or managing the negatives

Most work, health and safety legislation and standards in Australia relates to protecting employees from physical hazards, including slips, trips and falls.

More recently, attention has turned to psychosocial hazards.

Safe Work Australia and Comcare, as well as state and territory regulators, keep a list of common hazards.

These include bullying, excessive workloads, low job control, lack of role clarity and exposure to traumatising events, for example, witnessing an accident.

These lists are not exhaustive and there are some problems unique to specific jobs. For instance, teachers are often isolated from their colleagues, face big administrative loads and sometimes have to deal with abusive students and/or parents.

Most employers can make necessary improvements including creating fairer workloads, redefining job roles and providing more support to individual employees.

2. Responding to employee mental health issues

Despite efforts to minimise the impact of psychosocial hazards, some employees will nonetheless experience mental health issues.

Employers should not try to treat an employee’s mental health problems. They should support them and direct them to appropriate mental health care.

Managers can also help by identifying signs of distress, having sensitive conversations with workers about the impact of mental illness and making reasonable changes to their roles.

Giving employees access to support services through employee assistance programs, which can offer confidential short-term counselling, can also help.

Making counselling available to employees can help staff mental health and workplace morale.
Making counselling available to employees can help staff mental health and workplace morale. kmpzzz/Shutterstock

Establishing a critical incident investigation procedure for events that have compromised employee mental health can help identify the cause of incidents and shape responses.

3. Promoting the positive

As well as managing the negative aspects of work, organisations can create conditions that promote employee mental health and wellbeing.

One approach for doing this is to provide flexible working arrangements, such as hybrid work, which can offer employees greater choice in work location and scheduling.

Another approach involves fostering social connectedness and inclusion among employees. This could involve team-building, social events and opportunities for employees to build relationships.

Leaders can also promote a culture of psychological safety – where employees feel able to bring their authentic selves to work and speak their minds freely. This has been linked to greater employee wellbeing.

The SMART model suggests employees will be most satisfied in jobs that provide stimulation (for example, solving meaningful problems), mastery (receiving mentoring or constructive feedback), autonomy (creative freedom), social relationships (supportive colleagues) and tolerable demands (lack of psychosocial hazards).

Should I stay or should I go?

Making the decision to leave a workplace requires careful consideration.

In addition to your own wellbeing, you should consider whether your organisation prioritises mental health and how comfortable you would feel initiating a discussion about mental health.

Remember while changing jobs is a big step, staying in a toxic workplace can have serious long-term consequences for both mental and physical health.

Consider seeking advice through your employee assistance program or an independent career counsellor.

Whatever you decide, prioritising your mental health and wellbeing should be central to your decision making.The Conversation

Timothy Colin Bednall, Associate Professor in Management, Swinburne University of Technology and Kathryn Page, Adjunct Professor in Management, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What is the story of hongbao, the red envelopes given out at celebrations like Lunar New Year?

Remi Chow/Unsplash
Ming GaoAustralian Catholic University

Red envelopes, known as hongbao in Mandarin, are a cherished cultural tradition in China and many other parts of Asia.

In China, the vibrant red colour symbolises good fortune and joy. Hongbao can be given during many various festive and joyful occasions, and they are a prominent feature of Lunar New Year.

Receiving a hongbao is something most Chinese people, particularly children, eagerly anticipate every Lunar New Year. It was also one of my fondest childhood memories. But what’s the history behind this tradition?

A historical tradition

The origins of hongbao can be traced back to the Han dynasty (206 BCE–220 CE) when amulet-like items in the shapes of coins were worn.

Early practices resembling money giving took place in the Tang dynasty court (618–907 CE), where coins were scattered in springtime as part of celebrations.

Giving children money during celebrations became an established custom during the Song and Yuan dynasties (960–1368). In the Ming and Qing dynasties (1368–1911/12), this tradition evolved further with money being given to children threaded on red string.

In the Ming and Qing dynasties money was given to children threaded on red string. Nataliia K/Shutterstock

The modern concept of hongbao emerged in early 20th-century China. Elders would give money wrapped in red paper to children during the Lunar New Year as a talisman against evil spirits, known as sui (祟).

The red envelopes given to children, or in some cases unmarried adults, during Lunar New Year are also called ya sui qian.

Colloquially, ya sui qian translates to “suppressing age money”, as sui (岁) also means age. Ya sui qian reflects the belief this money could ward off misfortune and slow ageing.

In traditional contexts, the amount of money inside the envelope carries symbolic meaning.

Even numbers, except for the number four (considered unlucky due to its phonetic similarity to the word for “death” in Chinese), are regarded as lucky. Six (symbolising smooth progress) and eight (symbolising prosperity) are particularly favoured.

Beyond monetary value, the act of giving and receiving hongbao represents a gesture of goodwill, reinforcing social bonds and conveying respect and care.

The digital revolution

Today, hongbao straddle the worlds of tradition and modernity, adapting to societal changes while preserving their cultural essence.

Super-apps like WeChat and AliPay have transformed this age-old practice from a physical tradition into a digital, virtual experience.

Four digital envelopes.
Red packet designs available on WeChat. Screenshot/Ming Gao

WeChat popularised the concept of “digital red envelopes” in 2014, incorporating gamified elements such as randomised monetary amounts and group exchanges.

In 2017, WeChat recorded a staggering 14.2 billion hongbao transactions on the eve of Lunar New Year alone. While the initial excitement around the digital hongbao has waned over time, the practice remains popular. On Lunar New Year’s Eve in 2024, WeChat users recorded approximately 5.08 billion digital hongbao transactions.

The shift to digital formats aligns with our increasingly cashless society, making it easier for people to participate in the custom, even across great distances. Families separated by migration can partake in this tradition in real time, maintaining connections that might otherwise weaken over long distances.

My child doesn’t get to see my parents very often, but my mother promised to send a “large” hongbao to her grandchild on the eve of the Lunar New Year this year. Despite the geographical distance spanning the ocean between Australia and China, the tradition of giving hongbao transcends borders, connecting our family members across continents every Lunar New Year.

Societal significance

The enduring popularity of hongbao highlights its importance in Chinese culture. It serves not only as a means of giving but also as a way to uphold tradition amid rapid modernisation.

The act of giving hongbao, whether physical or digital, reinforces intergenerational ties and preserves cultural heritage. Parents and grandparents giving hongbao to children during Lunar New Year continue to embody the traditional values of family and unity.

A family with a baby holding a red envelope.
The act of giving hongbao reinforces intergenerational ties and preserves cultural heritage. SeventyFour/Shutterstock

But the digitisation of hongbao has sparked debates about its impact on traditional values. Some argue the ease of sending digital hongbao reduces the personal touch and thoughtfulness inherent in the physical exchange.

Others view it as an evolution that keeps the practice relevant and accessible in a fast-paced world.

Regional variations

While hongbao is most closely associated with Chinese culture, similar traditions exist across Asia, each with notable regional variations.

In Korea, during the Lunar New Year (Seollal), elders give money to young or unmarried adults after receiving their New Year’s bow (sebae). One legend suggests the Korean tradition originates from China. However, unlike the red envelopes used in Chinese culture, the money in Korea can be presented in white envelopes, as whiteness in Korean culture symbolises purity and new beginnings.

Envelopes hang from tree branches.
Similar traditions exist across Asia. These red envelopes are hanging in Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam. Marie Shark/Shutterstock

In Singapore, where a diverse population blends Chinese, Malay and Indian traditions, the giving of hongbao (also known as ang bao or ang pow in Hokkien) is a common practice. This tradition has extended beyond the Chinese population, reflecting the cultural influence of Chinese diasporic communities.

While red envelopes are traditional, envelopes in other colours, such as pink or gold, are also considered acceptable.

The Future of hongbao

As technology continues to shape societal norms, the practice of giving hongbao is likely to further evolve.

The advancement of E-CNY (China’s digital currency), regardless of its ultimate success, could introduce new dimensions to traditional practices, enabling more innovative and secure forms of exchange.

The enduring appeal of hongbao lies in its core values: the celebration of relationships, the sharing of blessings, and the preservation of cultural heritage.

As the Lunar New Year of the Snake approaches, it’s wise to have some hongbao ready, whether digital or physical, to avoid being caught off guard by a playful youngster cheerfully exclaiming, “May you be prosperous, now hand over the red envelope!” (“gong xi fa cai, hong bao na lai”). This light-hearted and catchy greeting cleverly combines good wishes with a cheeky request for a hongbao.The Conversation

Ming Gao, Research Scholar of East Asia Studies, Gender and Women's History Research Centre, Australian Catholic University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.